U.S.A
Sumitomo Machinery Corporation of America(SMA)
4200 Holland Blvd. Chesapeake, VA 23323, U.S.A.
TEL (1)757-485-3355 FAX (1)757-485-7490
CanadaSM Cyclo of Canada, Ltd. (SMC)
1453 Cornwall Road, Oakville, Canada ON L6J 7T5
TEL (1)905-469-1050 FAX (1)905-469-1055
MexicoSM Cyclo de México, S.A. de C.V. (SMME)
Fresnos #201, Pocket Park Oriente, 67258 Juárez, N.L.
MéxicoTEL (52)81-8144-5130
BrazilSumitomo Industrias Pesadas do Brasil Ltda.
(SHIB)
Rodovia do Acucar (SP-075) Km 26
Itu, Sao Paulo, Brasil
TEL (55)11-4886-1000 FAX (55)11-4886-1000
Chile
SM-Cyclo de Chile Ltda. (SMCH)
Camino Lo Echevers 550, Bodegas 5 y 6,
Quilicura, Región Metropolitana, Chile
TEL (56)2-892-7000
FAX (56)2-892-7001
Argentina
SM-Cyclo de Argentina S.A. (SMAR)
Ing Delpini 2230, B1615KGB Grand Bourg,
Malvinas Argentinas, Buenos Aires, Argentina
TEL (54)3327-45-4095 FAX (54)3327-45-4099
GuatemalaSM Cyclo de Guatemala Ensambladora, Ltda.
(SMGT)
Parque Industrial Unisur, 0 Calle B 19-50 Zona 3,
Bodega D-1 Delta Bárcenas en Villa Nueva, Guatemala
TEL (502)6648-0500 FAX (502)6631-9171
Colombia
SM Cyclo Colombia, S.A.S. (SMCO)
Parque Industrial Celta, Km 7.0 Autopista Medellín,
Costado Occidental, Funza, Cundinamarca, Colombia
TEL (57)1-300-0673

Austria
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH(SCG)SCG Branch Austria Office
Gruentalerstraße 30A, 4020 Linz, Austria
TEL (43)732-330958 FAX (43)732-331978

Korea
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Korea, Ltd. (SCK)Royal Bldg Room #913, 19, Saemunan-ro 5-gil,
Jongno-gu, Seoul, 03173, Korea
TEL (82)2-730-0151
FAX (82)2-730-0156

Belgium
Hansen Industrial Transmissions NV (HIT)
Leonardo da Vincilaan 1, Edegem, Belgium
TEL (32)34-50-12-11 FAX (32)34-50-12-20

TaiwanTatung SM-Cyclo Co., Ltd. (TSC)
22 Chungshan N. Road 3rd., Sec. Taipei, Taiwan 104,
R.O.C.
TEL (886)2-2595-7275 FAX (886)2-2595-5594

FranceSM-Cyclo France SAS (SMFR)
8 Avenue Christian Doppler, 77700 Serris, France
TEL (33)164171717
FAX (33)164171718
Italy
SM-Cyclo Italy Srl (SMIT)
Via dell' Artigianato 23, 20010 Cornaredo (MI), Italy
TEL (39)293-481101 FAX (39)293-481103
Spain
SM-Cyclo Iberia, S.L.U. (SMIB)
C/Gran Vía Nº 63 Bis, Planta 1, Departamento 1B
48011 Bilbao–Vizcaya, SpainTEL (34)9448-05389 FAX (34)9448-01550
United Kingdom
SM-Cyclo UK Ltd. (SMUK)Unit 29, Bergen Way, Sutton Fields Industrial Estate,
Kingston upon Hull, HU7 0YQ, East Yorkshire,
United Kingdom
TEL (44)1482-790340 FAX (44)1482-790321
TurkeySM Cyclo Turkey Güç Aktarım Sis. Tic. Ltd. Sti.
(SMTR)
Barbaros Mh. Çiğdem Sk. Ağaoğlu, Office Mrk. No:1 Kat:4 D.18
Ataşehir, İstanbul, Turkey
TEL (90)216-250-6069 FAX (90)216-250-5556
India
Sumi-Cyclo Drive India Private Limited (SDI)
Gat No. 186, Raisoni Industrial Park, Alandi Markal Road,
Fulgaon-Pune, Maharashtra, India
TEL (91)96-0774-5353

Peru
SM Cyclo de Perú, S.A.C (SMPE)
Jr. Monte Rosa 255, Oficina 702, Lima,
Santiago de Surco, PerúTEL (51)1-713-0342
FAX (51)1-715-0223

China
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Shanghai, Ltd.
(SCS)
11F, SMEG Plaza, No. 1386 Hongqiao Road,
Changning District, Shanghai, China 200336
TEL (86)21-3462-7877 FAX (86)21-3462-7922

Germany
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH
(SCG)
Cyclostraße 92, 85229 Markt Indersdorf, Germany
TEL (49)8136-66-0
FAX (49)8136-5771

Hong Kong
SM-Cyclo of Hong Kong Co., Ltd. (SMHK)
Room 19, 28th Floor, Metropole Square, No.2 On
Yiu Street, Shatin, New Territories, Hong Kong
TEL (852)2460-1881 FAX (852)2460-1882

Singapore
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte.
Ltd. (SCA)
15 Kwong Min Road, Singapore 628718
TEL (65)6591-7800
FAX (65)6863-4238
Philippines
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd.
Philippines Branch Office (SMPH)
C4 & C5 Buildings Granville Industrial Complex, Carmona,
Cavite 4116, Philippines
TEL (63)2-584-4921
FAX (63)2-584-4922
Vietnam
SM-Cyclo (Vietnam) Co., Ltd. (SMVN)
Factory 2B, Lot K1-2-5, Road No. 2-3-5A,
Le Minh Xuan Industrial Park, Binh Chanh Dist.,
HCMC, Vietnam
TEL (84)8-3766-3709 FAX (84)8-3766-3710
Malaysia
SM-Cyclo (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. (SMMA)
No.7C, Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/56, Kota Kemuning,
Seksyen 31, 40460 Shah Alam, Selangor Darul Ehsan,
Malaysia
TEL (60)3-5121-0455 FAX (60)3-5121-0578

HF-620 Series User’s Guide

Worldwide Locations

HF-620 Series
InverterSingle-phase 200V class 0.2 to 2.2kW
Three-phase 200V class 0.2 to 7.5kW
Three-phase 400V class 0.4 to 7.5kW

User´s Guide

Indonesia
PT. SM-Cyclo Indonesia (SMID)
Jalan Sungkai Blok F 25 No. 09 K, Delta Silicon III,
Lippo Cikarang, Bekasi 17530, Indonesia
TEL (62)21-2961-2100 FAX (62)21-2961-2211
Thailand
SM-Cyclo (Thailand) Co., Ltd. (SMTH)
195 Empire Tower, Unit 2103-4, 21st Floor, South
Sathorn Road, Yannawa, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120,
ThailandTEL (66)2670-0998
FAX (66)2670-0999
Australia
Sumitomo (SHI) Hansen Australia Pty. Ltd.
(SHAU)
181 Power St, Glendenning, NSW 2761, Australia
TEL (61)2-9208-3000 FAX (61)2-9208-3050
Japan
Sumitomo Heavy Industries, Ltd. (SHI)
ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-6025, JapanTEL (81)3-6737-2511 FAX (81)3-6866-5160<Note>
This product should be handled by only those who have been trained for the work.
Please read this manual carefully before use.
Deliver this manual to the customer who will actually use the product.
This manual should be carefully stored.
Specifications, dimensions, and other items are subject to change without prior notice.

Power Transmission & Controls Group
Headquarter ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-6025, Japan

No.DM2502E-1.0
EA15 Printed 2024.02

Userʼs Guide DM2502E-1

Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing HF-620 Inverter.
This is a guide that describes the handling and maintenance of HF-620.
For the purpose of reduction paper consumption and provision of the latest information, we enclose theInstruction manual only, while providing the User's Guide for more detailed description throughelectronic means instead of CD or a printed document.
■About the Instruction manual (Bundled in product)
The Instruction manual provides the minimum information necessary for handling the product. Please
make sure to read this document as well as the User's Guide for more detailed information.
■About the User's Guide (This document)This document is 'Original instructions'.
The User's Guide provides detailed information necessary for handling the product. Please make sure toread the User's Guide for proper use.
If future updated descriptions differ from the Instruction manual, the description in the User's Guide will
have higher priority. Always use HF-620 strictly within the range described in the User's Guide andperform proper inspection and maintenance to prevent failures or accidents.
The latest version of the User's Guide can be obtained through our website. In case it is not available orcannot be downloaded, please contact the nearest sales office.
■Handling an optional products
If you use the inverter with optional products, you should also read the instruction enclosed in those
products.
■For a proper use
Before using the inverter, please carefully read the Instruction manual, User's Guide and each optional
products instruction manuals.
In addition any personnel handling or performing maintenance of the product must carefully read theInstruction manual, User's Guide and each optional products instruction manuals.
Before any attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect this equipment, a complete understanding of
the equipment specifications, safety instructions, precautions, handling and operation instructions isrequired. Please follow all the specifications and instructions for a proper use. Additionally, review theInstruction manual, User's Guide and each optional product instruction manuals periodically.
■Precautions
It is prohibited to reproduce or reform this document partially or totally in any form without the
publisher's permission.
The contents of the document are subject to change without prior notice.
Any handling, maintenance or operation method NOT described on the Instruction manual, User's Guideand each optional product instruction manuals is not covered by the product warranty.
Please DO NOT performs any procedure NOT described on HF-620 and optional product guides since it
can be the cause of unexpected failures or accidents.
We are not responsible for any impact from operations regardless of unexpected failure or accident due
to operation or handling of the product in a manner not specified on the Instruction manual, User’s
Guide and each optional product instruction manuals. We appreciate your understanding.
Note that, in case the Instruction manual, User's Guide and each optional product instruction manuals
are enclosed, they should be delivered to the end user of the inverter. Also make sure to download andkeep accessible any other related guides or instruction for the end user.

S-1
S-1

Index● Introduction……………………………………………………………………………………………………S-1● Index ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………S-2

Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks
1.1 Warning indications and symbols …………………………………………………………………………1-1
1.1.1 Details of warning indications …………………………………………………………………………1-1
1.1.2 Description of symbols …………………………………………………………………………………1-1
1.2 Cautions ………………………………………………………………………………………………………1-2
1.3 Compliance to European directive (CE) …………………………………………………………………1-7
1.3.1 Caution for EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) …………………………………………………1-7
1.3.2 Caution for machinery directive (functional safety)………………………………………………1-11
1.3.3 Note of European directive (CE) ……………………………………………………………………1-11
1.4 Compliance to UL standards ……………………………………………………………………………1-12
1.4.1 UL cautions ……………………………………………………………………………………………1-12

Chapter 2 Outline of This User's Guide/Procedure for Operation
2.1 What is written in this User's Guide ………………………………………………………………………2-1
2.2 Overview of each Chapter …………………………………………………………………………………2-2
2.3 Procedure for operation (flowchart) ………………………………………………………………………2-4

Chapter 3 Main Body of the Product3.1 Confirmation at the time of purchase ……………………………………………………………………3-1
3.1.1 Checking the product and the included items ……………………………………………………3-1
3.1.2 Model of the inverter and nameplate ………………………………………………………………3-2
3.2 Appearance of the product and part names ……………………………………………………………3-3
3.2.1 Appearance of each model ……………………………………………………………………………3-3
3.2.2 Part names and descriptions on the front of the product…………………………………………3-5
3.2.3 Connecting remote operator …………………………………………………………………………3-6

Chapter 4 Installation
4.1 Installation environment ……………………………………………………………………………………4-1
4.1.1 Installation precautions ……………………………………………………………………………4-1

Chapter 5 Wire Connection
5.1 Terminal block cover …………………………………………………………………………………………5-1
5.2 Main circuit terminal …………………………………………………………………………………………5-3
5.2.1 Configuration of main circuit terminal ………………………………………………………………5-3
5.2.2 Wiring power supply and motor ………………………………………………………………………5-4
5.2.3 Arrangement of main circuit terminal ………………………………………………………………5-7
5.3 Applicable peripheral device ………………………………………………………………………………5-9
5.3.1 Overview of peripheral device …………………………………………………………………………5-9
5.3.2 Recommended wire diameter, wiring equipment, crimp terminal ……………………………5-10
5.3.3 Applicable braker………………………………………………………………………………………5-11
5.3.4 DC Wiring of DC reactor………………………………………………………………………………5-13
5.3.5 Wiring of braking resistor and regenerative braking unit ………………………………………5-14
5.4 Control circuit terminal ……………………………………………………………………………………5-15
5.4.1 Configuration of control circuit terminal …………………………………………………………5-15
5.4.2 Recommended wire diameter and wiring method for control circuit terminals ……………5-21
5.4.3 Switching sink/source logic and connecting external power supply/programmable controller……………5-22

S-2
S-2

Index
Chapter 6 Operation check/Residual
6.1 Overview of residual risk checklist …………………………………………………………………………6-1
6.2 Residual risk checklist ………………………………………………………………………………………6-2

Chapter 7 Usings the Control Panel
7.1 Keypad of use …………………………………………………………………………………………………7-1
7.1.1 Part names and descriptions …………………………………………………………………………7-1
7.1.2 Key Operation System …………………………………………………………………………………7-3
7.1.3 Example of parameter setting key operation ………………………………………………………7-4
7.2 Functions related to operation panel ……………………………………………………………………7-7
7.2.1 Limit parameter display…………………………………………………………………………………7-7
7.2.2 Initialize the parameters ……………………………………………………………………………7-13
7.2.3 Restart communication setting ………………………………………………………………………7-15
7.2.4 Prohibit parameter changes …………………………………………………………………………7-17
7.2.5 Protecting data with passwords ……………………………………………………………………7-18
7.2.6 Setting the initial display of the operation panel …………………………………………………7-20
7.2.7 Automatic registration of changed parameter history……………………………………………7-20
7.2.8 Fixed indication (DISP) function ……………………………………………………………………7-21
7.2.9 Function of remote operator ………………………………………………………………………7-22

Chapter 8 Parameter Setting and Test Run
8.1 Essential sets for operation …………………………………………………………………………………8-1
8.1.1 Outline of required setting items ……………………………………………………………………8-1
8.1.2 Load specification of the inverter ……………………………………………………………………8-2
8.1.3 Setting motor nameplate data to parameters ………………………………………………………8-4
8.1.4 Setting the electroniic thermal ………………………………………………………………………8-6
8.1.5 Set the motor constant ………………………………………………………………………………8-11
8.2 Test run ………………………………………………………………………………………………………8-12
8.2.1 Simulation mode ………………………………………………………………………………………8-12
8.2.2 Motor test run at no load ……………………………………………………………………………8-15
8.2.3 Connect the machine load and test run ……………………………………………………………8-18
8.3 Auto-tuning …………………………………………………………………………………………………8-19
8.3.1 Procedure for auto-tuning of induction motor ……………………………………………………8-19

Chapter 9 Inverter Function
9.1 RUN command ………………………………………………………………………………………………9-1
9.1.1 Types of RUN command ………………………………………………………………………………9-1
9.1.2 Operation by RUN key on the keypad ………………………………………………………………9-2
9.1.3 Operation by forward/reverse input terminals ……………………………………………………9-2
9.1.4 Operation by 3-wire control function………………………………………………………………9-3
9.1.5 Operation by Modbus-RTU communication (RS485 communication) …………………………9-4
9.1.6 Operation by communication option …………………………………………………………………9-4
9.1.7 Temporarily changing RUN command input source ………………………………………………9-4
9.1.8 Disabling the STOP/RESET key on the keypad ……………………………………………………9-5
9.2 Selecting frequency reference………………………………………………………………………………9-6
9.2.1 Types of frequency reference …………………………………………………………………………9-6
9.2.2 Setting frequency reference by keypad ……………………………………………………………9-8
9.2.3 Setting frequency reference by analog input (Voltage/Current) ………………………………9-9
9.2.4 Setting frequency command by multi-speed operation function………………………………9-10
9.2.5 Setting frequency command for Jogging and inching operation ………………………………9-13
9.2.6 Setting frequency reference by Modbus-RTU communication…………………………………9-14
9.2.7 Setting frequency reference by communication option …………………………………………9-14
9.2.8 Setting frequency reference by pulse input ………………………………………………………9-15

S-3
S-3

Index9.2.9 Setting frequency reference by PID control ………………………………………………………9-16
9.2.10 Select and calculate two frequency references …………………………………………………9-16
9.2.11 Increasing/Decreasing frequency command ……………………………………………………9-18
9.2.12 Increasing/Decreasing frequency command by remote control ……………………………9-19
9.2.13 Temporarily changing the frequency reference input source …………………………………9-21
9.3 Acceleration/Deceleration function ……………………………………………………………………9-22
9.3.1 Change the acceleration/deceleration time ………………………………………………………9-22
9.3.2 To switch the acceleration/deceleration time in two steps ……………………………………9-24
9.3.3 Acceleration/Deceleration hold function …………………………………………………………9-25
9.3.4 Change the acceleration/deceleration pattern …………………………………………………9-26
9.3.5 Momentarily cause the frequency to follow a command ………………………………………9-28
9.3.6 Switching acceleration/deceleration time during multi-speed operation ……………………9-29
9.4 Limiting frequency reference/RUN command …………………………………………………………9-32
9.4.1 Limiting frequency reference ………………………………………………………………………9-32
9.4.2 Limiting RUN command direction …………………………………………………………………9-33
9.4.3 Limiting rotation output direction …………………………………………………………………9-33
9.4.4 Disabling output until RUN command permission ………………………………………………9-34
9.5 Motor control mode selection ……………………………………………………………………………9-35
9.5.1 Motor control mode selection ………………………………………………………………………9-35
9.5.2 V/f control constant-torque characteristics (VC characteristics) ………………………………9-36
9.5.3 V/f control reduced torque characteristics (VP1.7 power characteristics) …………………9-37
9.5.4 V/f controlled free V/f …………………………………………………………………………………9-38
9.5.5 V/f controlled auto-torque boost ……………………………………………………………………9-40
9.5.6 Manual torque boost function ………………………………………………………………………9-41
9.5.7 Energy-saving mode……………………………………………………………………………………9-42
9.5.8 Speed control with sensor ……………………………………………………………………………9-43
9.5.9 Stabilize the motor hunting …………………………………………………………………………9-45
9.5.10 Sensorless vector control ……………………………………………………………………………9-46
9.5.11 Encoder feedback ……………………………………………………………………………………9-48
9.6 Torque control ………………………………………………………………………………………………9-54
9.6.1 Speed control and torque control …………………………………………………………………9-54
9.6.2 Switching between speed control and torque control …………………………………………9-55
9.6.3 Operate by commanding the torque ………………………………………………………………9-56
9.6.4 Torque limit ……………………………………………………………………………………………9-58
9.6.5 Run by adding torque command ……………………………………………………………………9-63
9.6.6 Setting the Motor Control Gain ……………………………………………………………………9-65
9.6.7 Moving a single load with multiple motors（Droop speed control ……………………………9-67
9.7 Changing the start and stop method ……………………………………………………………………9-68
9.7.1 Reduced voltage startup ……………………………………………………………………………9-68
9.7.2 Starting after applying DC braking …………………………………………………………………9-69
9.7.3 Starting with the frequency matching function……………………………………………………9-70
9.7.4 Frequency entry function to start ……………………………………………………………………9-71
9.7.5 Start after trip reset or power on ……………………………………………………………………9-75
9.7.6 Start after free run stop ………………………………………………………………………………9-76
9.7.7 Select the stop operation ……………………………………………………………………………9-77
9.7.8 DC braking ………………………………………………………………………………………………9-78
9.7.9 Switch to commercial power supply ………………………………………………………………9-82
9.7.10 Brake control …………………………………………………………………………………………9-83
9.7.11 Control the contactor ………………………………………………………………………………9-86
9.7.12 Perform compulsory operation ……………………………………………………………………9-90
9.7.13 Switch and use two motors …………………………………………………………………………9-95
9.8 PID processing control ……………………………………………………………………………………9-98
9.8.1 PID control ………………………………………………………………………………………………9-98
9.8.2 Use PID1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………9-100

S-4
S-4

Index9.8.3 Use PID2 ………………………………………………………………………………………………9-121
9.8.4 Signal output of PID function ………………………………………………………………………9-126
9.8.5 PID unit converter function …………………………………………………………………………9-128
9.9 Trip-less function …………………………………………………………………………………………9-130
9.9.1 Overload limit function ………………………………………………………………………………9-130
9.9.2 Limit the output frequency during acceleration to prevent overcurren ……………………9-132
9.9.3 Control the output frequency during deceleration to prevent an overvoltage ……………9-133
9.9.4 Overexcitation function …………………………………………………………………………9-135
9.9.5 Braking resistor operating circuit (DBTR) ………………………………………………………9-137
9.9.6 Restart after instantaneous power failure or undervoltage ……………………………9-138
9.9.7 Restart after overcurrent …………………………………………………………………………9-143
9.9.8 Restart after overvoltage …………………………………………………………………………9-146
9.9.9 Instantaneous power failure non-stop function ……………………………………………9-149
9.10 Protective function………………………………………………………………………………………9-152
9.10.1 Adjust the carrier frequency………………………………………………………………………9-152
9.10.2 Automatically reduce the carrier frequency……………………………………………………9-153
9.10.3 Reduce motor electromagnetic noise …………………………………………………………9-154
9.10.4 Trip the inverter externally ………………………………………………………………………9-154
9.10.5 Prevent starting immediately after power-on …………………………………………………9-155
9.10.6 Jump frequency ……………………………………………………………………………………9-156
9.10.7 Select cooling fan operation ……………………………………………………………………9-156
9.10.8 Monitor the temperature of the motor …………………………………………………………9-157
9.10.9 Detect a ground fault ………………………………………………………………………………9-157
9.10.10 Detect an input phase loss ………………………………………………………………………9-158
9.10.11 Output phase loss detection sensitivity ………………………………………………………9-158
9.11 Warning signal ……………………………………………………………………………………………9-159
9.11.1 Alarm signal …………………………………………………………………………………………9-159
9.11.2 Output a serious failure signal ……………………………………………………………………9-160
9.11.3 Outputs warning in case of overload ……………………………………………………………9-161
9.11.4 Warning signal in case of low current …………………………………………………………9-162
9.11.5 Warning signal before electronic thermal protection of motor ……………………………9-163
9.11.6 Warning signal before electronic thermal protection of the inverter ………………………9-164
9.11.7 Warning signal when the received power voltage is high ……………………………………9-165
9.11.8 Warning signal when the temperature of the cooling fin rises………………………………9-166
9.11.9 Warning signal of electrolytic capacitor life on the board …………………………………9-167
9.11.10 Warning signal of cooling fan life ………………………………………………………………9-168
9.11.11 Warning signal of inverter main element life …………………………………………………9-169
9.11.12 Warning signal when the operating time has elapsed/power ON time has elapsed …9-170
9.11.13 Detection for disconnection and out of range of analog input ……………………………9-171
9.11.14 Unsteady detection function ……………………………………………………………………9-174
9.12 Output the operating status to the terminals ………………………………………………………9-179
9.12.1 Output signal during operation …………………………………………………………………9-179
9.12.2 Output signal during forward or reverse rotation ……………………………………………9-179
9.12.3 Output signal RUN command ……………………………………………………………………9-180
9.12.4 Output signal when operation preparation is completed ……………………………………9-180
9.13 Compare the output frequency and output it to the terminal ……………………………………9-181
9.13.1 Output signal when the frequency reaches the target ………………………………………9-181
9.13.2 Output signal when the output frequency exceeds the set value …………………………9-182
9.13.3 Output signal when the output frequency is near the set value ……………………………9-183
9.13.4 Output signal when the output frequency becomes near 0Hz ……………………………9-184
9.13.5 Output by combining two output signals ………………………………………………………9-185
9.14 Perform positioning operation …………………………………………………………………………9-186
9.14.1 Absolute position control …………………………………………………………………………9-186

S-5
S-5

Index9.14.2 Orientation function ………………………………………………………………………………9-199
9.14.3 Switching operation between speed control and position control …………………………9-201
9.14.4 Operate absolute position control and brake control in conjunction ……………………9-202
9.15 Input signal ………………………………………………………………………………………………9-204
9.15.1 Input signal function ………………………………………………………………………………9-204
9.15.2 Adjust the response of the signal input …………………………………………………………9-206
9.15.3 Adjust the analog input ……………………………………………………………………………9-207
9.15.4 Pulse count function ………………………………………………………………………………9-211
9.15.5 Reset the alarm ……………………………………………………………………………………9-214
9.15.6 Automatic reset ……………………………………………………………………………………9-216
9.16 Output signal ……………………………………………………………………………………………9-218
9.16.1 Output signal function ……………………………………………………………………………9-218
9.16.2 Delay and hold the output signal ………………………………………………………………9-221
9.16.3 Select the monitor …………………………………………………………………………………9-221
9.16.4 Pulse output of monitor data ……………………………………………………………………9-223
9.16.5 Output monitor data in analog ……………………………………………………………………9-231
9.16.3 Input/Output synchronization function …………………………………………………………9-237

Chapter 10 Monitor Functions
10.1 Operation data ……………………………………………………………………………………………10-1
10.1.1 Monitor the output frequency………………………………………………………………………10-1
10.1.2 Monitor the output current …………………………………………………………………………10-3
10.1.3 Monitor the rotation direction ……………………………………………………………………10-3
10.1.4 Monitor the motor detect speed …………………………………………………………………10-4
10.1.5 Monitor the torque command and output torque ………………………………………………10-5
10.1.6 Monitor the position control ………………………………………………………………………10-6
10.1.7 Monitor the output voltage …………………………………………………………………………10-6
10.1.8 Monitor the inverter input power/integrated input power ……………………………………10-7
10.1.9 Monitor the output power/integral power from the inverter …………………………………10-8
10.1.10 Monitor the DC bus voltage ………………………………………………………………………10-9
10.1.11 Monitor the load factor of the braking resistor ………………………………………………10-9
10.1.12 Monitor the electronic thermal load ratio ……………………………………………………10-10
10.2 Monitor the input/output terminal ……………………………………………………………………10-11
10.2.1 Monitor the status of input/output terminals …………………………………………………10-11
10.2.2 Monitor the analog input and pulse input ………………………………………………………10-12
10.2.3 Monitor the status of analog input and output ………………………………………………10-13
10.2.4 Monitor the unsteady state of the analog output ……………………………………………10-14
10.3 Monitor the status of the inverter ……………………………………………………………………10-15
10.3.1 Monitor the operation information for the inverter……………………………………………10-15
10.3.2 Monitor the cooling fin temperature ……………………………………………………………10-16
10.3.3 Monitor the life assessment results………………………………………………………………10-16
10.3.4 Monitor the operating mode of the inverter ……………………………………………………10-17
10.3.5 Monitor the frequency command destination and operation command destination……10-19
10.3.6 Monitor the dual monitor …………………………………………………………………………10-20
10.3.7 Monitor the warning of the inverter………………………………………………………………10-20
10.4 Monitor the PID control…………………………………………………………………………………10-22
10.5 Monitor the trip, retry and warning……………………………………………………………………10-23
10.5.1 Monitor the number of trips and trip history …………………………………………………10-23
10.5.2 Monitor the retry history …………………………………………………………………………10-24
10.5.3 Monitor warning information ……………………………………………………………………10-24

S-6
S-6

Index
Chapter 11 Modbus Communication
11.1 Modbus-RTU communication……………………………………………………………………………11-1
11.1.1 Communication specifications and setting parameters ………………………………………11-1
11.1.2 Communication wiring and connection …………………………………………………………11-3
11.1.3 Communication procedure …………………………………………………………………………11-4
11.1.4 Message configuration ………………………………………………………………………………11-5
11.2 Modbus-RTU function codes ……………………………………………………………………………11-8
11.2.1 Read status of coil [01h] ……………………………………………………………………………11-8
11.2.2 Read holding register [03h]…………………………………………………………………………11-9
11.2.3 Write to coil [05h] …………………………………………………………………………………11-10
11.2.4 Write to holding register [06h] ……………………………………………………………………11-11
11.2.5 Loop-back test [08h] ………………………………………………………………………………11-12
11.2.6 Write to multiple coil [0Fh] ………………………………………………………………………11-13
11.2.7 Write to multiple registers [10h] …………………………………………………………………11-14
11.2.8 Writing to and reading from multiple holding registers [17h] ………………………………11-15
11.2.9 Exception response ………………………………………………………………………………11-16
11.2.10 Store the changes to holding register …………………………………………………………11-17
11.2.11 Holding register endian selection………………………………………………………………11-19
11.3 Modbus mapping function ……………………………………………………………………………11-21
11.3.1 Set Modbus mapping function ……………………………………………………………………11-21
11.4 Inter-inverter communication EzCOM function …………………………………………………11-24
11.4.1 EzCOM ………………………………………………………………………………………………11-24
11.4.2 EzCOM setting ………………………………………………………………………………………11-25

Chapter 12 PC Software
12.1 PC Software…………………………………………………………………………………………………12-1
12.2 Trace Function ……………………………………………………………………………………………12-2
12.1.1 Trace Function data logging ………………………………………………………………………12-2
12.2.2 Trace function rerated parameters ………………………………………………………………12-3

Chapter 13 Communication Option
13.1 Communication option …………………………………………………………………………………13-1
13.1.1 Communication option unit ………………………………………………………………………13-1

Chapter 14 Safety Function STO
14.1 Using the safety function STO (Safe Torque Off) …………………………………………………14-1
14.1.1 STO function …………………………………………………………………………………………14-1
14.1.2 STO State monitor output (EDM Signal) …………………………………………………………14-3
14.1.3 STO status indication ………………………………………………………………………………14-5

Chapter 15 Troubleshooting
15.1 Self-diagnosis of problems ………………………………………………………………………………15-1
15.1.1 Procedure for checking when a problem occurs ………………………………………………15-1
15.2 Troubleshooting protection functions …………………………………………………………………15-2
15.2.1 Check the trip information …………………………………………………………………………15-2
15.2.2 Check retry information ……………………………………………………………………………15-4
15.2.3 Troubleshooting for protection functions related error ………………………………………15-5
15.3 Troubleshooting the warning function ………………………………………………………………15-20
15.3.1 Warning display ……………………………………………………………………………………15-20
15.3.2 Other display ………………………………………………………………………………………15-21
15.4 Others ……………………………………………………………………………………………………15-22
15.4.1 Troubleshooting other than trip occurrence and warning …………………………………15-22

S-7
S-7

Index
Chapter 16 Maintenance and Inspection
16.1 Cautions for maintenance and inspection ……………………………………………………………16-1
16.1.1 Daily inspection ………………………………………………………………………………………16-2
16.1.2 Cleaning ………………………………………………………………………………………………16-2
16.1.3 Periodic inspection …………………………………………………………………………………16-2
16.1.4 Periodic function test for safety function (STO) …………………………………………………16-2
16.2 Daily inspection and periodic inspection ……………………………………………………………16-3
16.2.1 Inverter inspection list ………………………………………………………………………………16-3
16.2.2 Megger test ……………………………………………………………………………………………16-5
16.2.3 Withstand voltage test ………………………………………………………………………………16-5
16.2.4 Checking the inverter and converter section ……………………………………………………16-6
16.2.5 Smoothing capacitor life curve ……………………………………………………………………16-7
16.2.6 Life warning output …………………………………………………………………………………16-7
16.2.7 Measurement method of input/output voltage, current and power…………………………16-8

Chapter 17 Specifications
17.1 Standard Specifications …………………………………………………………………………………17-2
17.1.1 Single-phase 200V class ……………………………………………………………………………17-2
17.1.2 Three-phase 200V class ……………………………………………………………………………17-3
17.1.3 Three-phase 400V class ……………………………………………………………………………17-4
17.1.4 Common specifications ……………………………………………………………………………17-5
17.2 External dimensions ………………………………………………………………………………………17-7
17.3 Current derating …………………………………………………………………………………………17-11

Chapter 18 Parameter
18.1 Modbus coil number/special resister numbers ………………………………………………………18-1
18.1.1 List of Modbus coil numbers………………………………………………………………………18-1
18.1.2 Modbus list of Modbus special holding registers ……………………………………………18-2
18.2 Parameter …………………………………………………………………………………………………18-2
18.2.1 d Parameter …………………………………………………………………………………………18-3
18.2.2 F Parameter ………………………………………………………………………………………18-12
18.2.3 A Parameter ………………………………………………………………………………………18-13
18.2.4 b Parameter ………………………………………………………………………………………18-25
18.2.5 C Parameter ………………………………………………………………………………………18-34
18.2.6 List of multi-function input terminal functions ………………………………………………18-42
18.2.7 List of multi-function output terminal functions ……………………………………………18-43
18.2.8 H Parameter ………………………………………………………………………………………18-44
18.2.9 o Parameter ………………………………………………………………………………………18-50
18.2.10 P Parameter ………………………………………………………………………………………18-51
18.2.11 U Parameter ………………………………………………………………………………………18-52● Warranty …………………………………………………………………………………………………APP.1-1● To Inverter Users …………………………………………………………………………………………APP.1-2

S-8
S-8

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks

1This chapter includes instructions for installation, wiring, operation, maintenance, inspection and use of
the inverter.
Be sure to read this User's Guide and other guides thoroughly before installing, wiring, operating,
maintaining, inspecting or using the inverter.

1.1 Warning indications and symbols
1.1.1 Details of warning indications
In the User's Guide, the severity levels of safety precautions and residual risks are classified as follows:"DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

DANGERWARNINGCAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations, which have a highchance of resulting in serious personal injury or death and may result in major
physical loss or damage.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations, which may result
in serious personal injury or death, and may result in major physical loss or damage.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations, which may result
in serious personal injury or death, and may result in major physical loss or damage.

Furthermore,"CAUTION" level description may lead to a serious risk depend on the circumstances.
Be sure to follow the instruction because whichever contains important safety description.
There are the text includes notes using a only safety symbol " ". These also contains important safety
instructions, so be sure to follow the instructions.

1.1.2 Description of symbols
This document contains annotations with graphic symbols. Be sure to pay close attention to the contents
and be sure to follow them.
Indicates a danger, warning or caution notice for fire, electric shock and high temperature in
the operation of the product.
Details are indicated in or nearby pictures or words.
The drawing on the left indicates "a non-specific and general danger or caution".
The drawing on the left indicates "a possible damage due to electric shock".
Indicates "what you must not do" to prohibit the described acts in the operation of the
product.

Indicates "what you must do" according to the instructions in the operation of the product.

1-1
1-1

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

1.2 Cautions
Caution！

DANGER・Incorrect handling may result in personal death or severe injury, or may result in damage to
CAUTIONDO

the inverter, motor or the whole system.
・Be sure to read the Guide and appended documents thoroughly before installing, wiring,
operating, maintaining, inspecting or using the inverter.

・Notes for possible causes of danger or damage are also provided for each explanation inother sections.
CAUTION・Be sure to read the corresponding explanation thoroughly before installing, wiring, operating,
maintaining, inspecting or using the inverter.
DO・Many of the drawings in the Guide show the inverter with covers and/or parts blocking yourview removed to illustrate the details of the product.

CAUTION・Do not operate the inverter in the status shown in those drawings. If you have removed thecovers and/or parts, be sure to reinstall them in their original positions before starting
operation and follow all instructions in this guide when operating the inverter.

DO

Precautions for installation

WARNING● Risk of fire!
Fire・Do not place flammable materials near the installed inverter.
・Prevent foreign matter (e.g., cut pieces of wire, sputtering welding materials, iron chips, wire,and dust) from entering the inverter.
・Installthe inverter on a non-flammable surface, e.g., metal.
Prohibited・Install the inverter in a well-ventilated indoor site not exposed to direct sunlight. Avoid
places where the inverter is exposed to high temperature, high humidity, condensation,DOdust, explosive gases, corrosive gases, flammable gases, grinding fluid mist, hydrogen sulfide
or salt water.
● Risk of injury!
Fire・Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or parts are missing.

Prohibited● Risk of injury due to the inverter falling!
Fall
Injury・When carrying the inverter, do not hold its cover parts.

Prohibited・Install the inverter on a structure able to bear the weight specified in the User's Guide.

・Install the inverter on a vertical wall that is free of vibrations.
DO

1-2
1-2

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks● Risk of failure of the inverter !
Failure・The inverter is a precision equipment. Do not allow it to fall or be subject to high impacts.

・Also do not step on it or place a heavy load on it.
・Avoid places where static electricity discharges often occur (for example, on a rug) for theProhibited
operation of the product.
・In order to discharge static electricity from your body, touch a safe metal surface first
before starting the operation.
DO

Precautions for wiring

DANGER● Risk of an electric shock and fire!
Electric ・Be sure to ground the inverter.
shock ・Entrust wiring work to a qualified electrician.
Fire・Before the wiring work make sure to turn off the power supply and wait for more than 10DOminutes. (Confirm than the charge lamp is OFF and the voltage between terminals [P/+] and[N/-] is DC45V or less.)● Risk of failure of the inverter!
Failure・Do not pull the wire after wiring.
Prohibited● Risk of an electric shock and injury!
Electric
Shock
Injury・Perform the wiring only after installing the inverter.

DO

WARNING● Risk of injury and fire!
InjuryFire・Do not connect AC power supply to any of the inverter output terminals ([U/T1], [V/T2], and[W/T3]).
・Make sure that the voltage and frequency of AC power supply match the rated voltage (ACProhibited
input voltage) and frequency of your inverter.
DO

1-3
1-3

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks● Risk of electric shock and injury!
Electric ・Before operating the slide switch in the inverter, be sure to turn off the power supply.
shock
・Since the inverter supports two modes of cooling-fan operation, the inverter power is not
InjuryDO

always off, even when the cooling fan is stopped. Before operating the switch, be sure toturn off the power supply and wait for more than 10 minutes. (Confirm that the charge lampon the inverter is off and the DC voltage between terminals [P/+] and [N/-] is DC45V or less.)
・Prevent the distribution cable from being compressed or getting caught to avoid damage tothe cable.

● Risk of fire!
Fire・Do not input a single-phase power supply to the three-phase model.

・Do not connect a resistor directly to any of the DC terminals ([P1/+1], [P/+], [N/-]).
・Do not use the magnetic contactor installed on the primary and secondary sides of theProhibited inverter to stop its operation.
・Tighten the screws and bolts with the specified torque.
・No screws and bolts must be left loose.
DO・Connect an earth-leakage breaker to the power input circuit.
・Use only the power cables, earth-leakage breaker, and magnetic contactors that have thespecified capacity (ratings).
● Risk of damage to the inverter and burnout of the motor!
Burnout

・Do not operate the inverter when an output phase is lost (output phase loss).

DO

Precautions for running and test running

DANGER● Risk of electric shock and fire!
Electric
Shock
Fire

・While power is supplied to the inverter, do not touch any internal part or the terminal of theinverter. Also do not check signals, or connect/disconnect any wire or connector.
・While power is supplied to the inverter, do not touch any internal part of the inverter.
Also do not insert a bar in it.

Prohibited● Risk of electric shock!
Electricshock

・Be sure to close the terminal block cover before turning on the inverter power. Do not open

the terminal block cover while power is being supplied to the inverter or voltage remains
inside. Do not touch the internal PCB, terminal block or connector while power is being
supplied to the inverter or voltage remains inside.
Prohibited・Do not operate switches in the inverter or on the board with wet hands.
● Risk of injury and fire!
InjuryFire・While power is supplied to the inverter, do not touch the terminal of the inverter, even if it

has stopped.
Prohibited

1-4
1-4

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks● Risk of injury and damage to machine!
InjuryDamage・Do not select the retry mode for controlling an elevating or traveling device because freerunning status occurs in retry mode.

Prohibited● Risk of injury!
Injury ・If the retry mode has been selected, the inverter will restart automatially after a break upondetection of an error. Stay away from the machine controlled by the inverter when the
inverter is under such circumstances.
Prohibited (Design the machine so that human safety can be ensured, even when the inverter restarts
suddenly.)
・The STOP/RESET key on the keypad can be enabled/disabled using the "STOP-key enable[AA-13]". Prepare an emergency stop switch separately.
・If a RUN command has been input to the inverter before a short-term power failure, theDOinverter may restart operation after the power recovery. If such a restart may put persons indanger, design a system configuration that disables the inverter from restarting after power
recovery.
・When an error (alarm) occurs, before moving to the next operation (resetting the alarm
status or reapplying the power), make sure that no RUN command has been input. If theinverter has received a RUN command, it restarts automatically.
・When an unexpected event occurs, do not touch the inverter or cable.
・Thoroughly understand and check the functions set in the inverter, and use it only after
confirming safety. Be careful that RUN command or resetting operation do not cause an
unexpected restart.

Warning● Risk of injury and damage to machine!
InjuryDamageDO

・The inverter allows you to easily control the speed of the motor or machine operations.
Before operating the inverter, confirm the capacity and ratings of the motor or machine
controlled by the inverter.
・When using the inverter to operate a motor at a high frequency, check the allowable motor
speeds with the manufacturers of the motor and the machine to be driven and obtain theirconsent before starting inverter operation.
・During inverter operation, check the motor for the direction of rotation, abnormal sound,and vibrations.
● Risk of burn injury!

Burn injury

・Do not touch the heat sink, which heats up during the inverter operation.
Prohibited● Risk of injury and damage to machine!
Injury・Install an external brake system if needed.

DO

1-5
1-5

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

Precautions for maintenance/daily inspection

DANGER● Risk of electric shock!
Electric・Do not perform maintenance, inspection, and the replacement of parts other thanshock

designated person.
(Be sure to remove wristwatches and metal accessories, e.g., bracelets, before maintenanceand inspection work and to use insulated tools for the work.)
Prohibited・Before inspecting the inverter, be sure to turn off the power supply and more than 10
minutes. (Confirm that the Charge lamp on the inverter is off and the DC voltage between
terminals [P/+] and [N/-] is DC45V or less.)
DO

Precautions for disposal

DANGER● Risk of injury and explosion!
InjuryExplosion ・For disposal of the inverter, outsource to a qualified industrial waste disposal contractor.

DO

Disposing of the inverter on your own may result in an explosion of the capacitor or produce
poisonous gas.
・A qualified industrial waste disposal contractor includes industrial waste collector ortransporter and industrial waste disposal operator.
・Follow the laws and regulations of each country for disposing of the inverter.

Other caution

DANGER● Risk of electric shock, fire and injury!
Electric
Shock
Fire
Injury・Never modify the inverter.

Prohibited

CAUTION● Risk of significantly shortening the life cycle of a product!
Life cycle

DO・If wood materials for packaging are needed to be sterilized and disinfected, make sure touse a means other than the wood fumigation method. If the product is included in the
fumigation treatment, electronic parts could receive critical damage from the emitted gases
or vapors. Especially, halogen disinfectants (including fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine)can cause corrosion in the capacitor.

Note: For risks other than the above, also refer to "Chapter 6 Operation Check/Residual Risk".

1-6
1-6

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

1.3 Compliance to european directive (CE)1.3.1 Caution for EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
The HF-620 inverter complies with Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive (2014/30/EU).
When using the inverter in Europe, you must comply with the following specifications and requirements
to meet the EMC Directive and other standards in Europe.

WARNING・This equipment must be installed, adjusted, and maintained by qualified engineers who haveexpert knowledge of electric work, inverter operation, and the hazardous circumstances thatcan occur. Otherwise, personal injury may result.

1. Power supply requirements:
・Voltage fluctuation must be -15% to +10% or less.
・Voltage imbalance must be ±3% or less.
・Frequency variation must be ±4% or less.
・Total harmonic distortion (THD) of voltage must be ±10% or less.
2. Installation requirements:
・HF-620 complies with the EMC Directive by installing an EMC filter. Applicable EMC filter depends
on the series and capacity of the inverter. Be sure to use an EMC filter compatible with the inverter
model by referring "Applicable EMC Filter" on the next page.
3. Wiring requirements:
・Use a shielded wire (screened cable) with a length of 25m or less for motor wiring.
・If the length of the motor wire exceeds 25m, use an output AC reactor to reduce the leakage current.
・The carrier frequency should be 10kHz or lower, which satisfies the EMC requirement.
・The main circuit wiring must be separated from the control circuit wiring.
4. Environmental requirements (to be met when a filter is used):・Ambient temperature: -10 to 50 °C (at ND rating), -10 to 40 °C (at LD rating)(current derating required)・Humidity: 20 to 90 %RH (non-condensing)・Vibration: 10 to 57Hz: amplitude 0.075mm
57 to 150Hz: 9.8m/s2 (1.0G)
・Install location: altitude 1000m or less (free from corrosive gases and dust)

1-7
1-7

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks■Applicable EMC filter
Power
Supply

EMC classModel
HF620S-A20

Single-phase
200V class

HF620S-A40
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2
HF6202-A20
HF6202-A40

EMC filter

In metalcabinetNonmetalcabinet

C1

C2

-

C3

CarrierFrequency

Cable Length

10kHz

25m
(Shielded)

FPF-9120-10-SW Note
FPF-9120-14-SW Note
FPF-9120-24-SW Note

NF-CEH7

HF6202-A75
Three-phase
200V class

HF6202-1A5
HF6202-2A2
HF6202-3A7

NF-CEH20

HF6202-5A5

NF-CEH30

HF6202-7A5

NF-CEH40

HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
Three-phase
400V class

NF-CEH10

HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2
HF6204-3A7
HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5

FPF-9340-05-SW Note
FPF-9340-10-SW Note
FPF-9340-14-SW

C1

Note

FPF-9340-30-SW Note

Note: Made by TDK

1-8
1-8

C2

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

Cautions for installation and wiring
1. Input AC reactor or other equipment is required if necessary to comply with EMC directive from the harmonic
distortion point of view (IEC 61000-3-2: 2018, IEC61000-3-4: 1998).
2. If the motor cable length exceeds 20m, use output AC reactor to avoid unexpected problem due to the leakage
current from the motor cable (such as malfunction of the thermal relay, vibration of the motor, etc.).
3. As user you must ensure that the HF (high frequency) impedance between adjustable frequency inverter, filter,and ground is as small as possible.
Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact areas (zinc-plated mounting
plates).
4. Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas, especially loops that encompass large areas.
Avoid unnecessary conductor loops.
Avoid parallel arrangement of low-level signal wiring and power-carrying or noise-prone conductors.
5. Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines.
Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible, i.e. do not strip away the shield(screen) further away from the cable end than absolutely necessary.
With integrated systems (for example, when the adjustable frequency inverter is communicating with some type ofsupervisory controller or host computer in the same control cabinet and they are connected at the same ground+ PE-potential), connect the shields of the control lines to ground + PE (protective earth) at both ends.
With distributed systems (for example the communicating supervisory controller or host computer is not in thesame control cabinet and there is a distance between the systems), we recommend connecting the shield of thecontrol lines only at the end connecting to the adjustable frequency inverter. If possible, route the other end of
the control lines directly to the cable entry section of the supervisory controller or host computer.
The shield conductor of the motor cables always must be connected to ground + PE at both ends.
・To achieve a large area contact between shield and ground + PE-potential, use a PG screw with a metallic shell,or use a metallic mounting clip.
・Use only cable with braided, tinned copper mesh shield (type "CY") with 85% coverage.
・The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable. If the use of reactors, contactors,
terminals, or safety switches in the motor output is necessary, the unshielded section should be kept as short as
possible.
・Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing. Very often, the terminal boxes,and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw connections, are painted. Make sure there is always a good
metallic connection between the shielding of the motor cable, the metal PG screw connection, the terminal
box, and the motor housing. If necessary, carefully remove paint between conducting surfaces.
6. Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through installation cables.
Separate interfering cables with 0.25m minimum from cables susceptible to interference. A particularly criticalpoint is laying parallel cables over longer distances. If two cables intersect (one crosses over the other), theinterference is smallest if they intersect at an angle of 90°.
7. Cables susceptible to interference should therefore only intersect motor cables, intermediate circuit cables, orthe wiring of a rheostat at right angles and never be laid parallel to them over longer distances. Minimize thedistance between an interference source and an interference sink (interference- threatened device), thereby
decreasing the effect of the emitted interference on the interference sink.
You should use only interference-free devices and maintain a minimum distance of 0.25 m from the adjustablefrequency inverter.
8. Follow safety measures in the filter installation.
If using external EMC filter, ensure that the ground terminal (PE) of the filter is properly connected to the groundterminal of the adjustable frequency inverter. An HF ground connection via metal contact between the housingsof the filter and the adjustable frequency inverter, or solely via cable shield, is not permitted as a protective
conductor connection. The filter must be solidly and permanently connected with the ground potential so as topreclude the danger of electric shock upon touching the filter if a fault occurs.
- To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter:
・Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10mm2 cross-sectional area.
・Connect a second grounding conductor, using a separate grounding terminal parallel to the protective
conductor. (The cross section of each single protective conductor terminal must be sized for the required
nominal load.)

1-9
1-9

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

Installation method (Example of single-phase 200V class model)
The mounting method is the same for the three-phase 200 V class model and the three-phase 400V classmodel.
Input power supply
Single-phase 200V

Metal plate (earth)PE

L1, L2

The filter is integrated andmounted between the inverter
and the metal plate.
Remove paint from the groundterminal, ensure sufficient
contact area, and ground.
(part in the figure left)

EMC filter

U, V, W

L1, L2

Cable clamp Note
The ground wire isconnected to the groundterminal of the inverter.

Shielded cable

Metal plate (earth)

Cable clamp NoteＭ

Note: The ground at both ends of the shielded cable must be connected to ground with a cable clamp. From theviewpoint of harmonic current, the CE-mark (IEC 61000-3-2: 2018, IEC61000-3-4: 1998) requires an input ACreactor or facility to suppress harmonic current. The conducted noise and radiated noise pass even if the
input-side AC reactor is removed.

1-10
1-10

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

1.3.2 Caution for Machinery directive (functional safety)

CAUTION● When using STO (Safe Torque Off) function, please be sure to read the "Safety function
Guide" of separate !
・HF-620 conforms to STO (Safe Torque Off) defined in Functional Safety IEC 61800-5-2. When using the
STO function, refer to "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2504E)". Please contact your supplier todownload the guide.

1.3.3 Note of European directive (CE)・This product complies with the requirements of IEC 60364-4-41:2005/AMD1: 2017:
Clause 411 “Protective measure: automatic disconnection of supply”, since it complies with therequirements of IEC61800-5-1:2007+AMD1:2016:Clause 4.3.9.
・In order to comply with above mentioned requirements, installation must be in line with theconditions in “1.3 Compliance to European Directive (CE)” and “1.4 UL Compliance to UL
standards”.
・Regarding IEC61800-5-1:Clause 5.2.3.6.3.3 “Short-circuit between phase terminals of
power output and protective earth”, circuitry in compliance test is as described as“Figure 13
Example of short-circuit test between CDM/BDM d.c. link power output and protective earth” and“Class J 30A Non time delay fuse” is used as “OCPD”in“Fault loop”.

1-11
1-11

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

1.4 Compliance to UL standards
1.4.1 UL cautions
This section summarizes the items required for UL standard compliant inverter installation.
(The English text is the original and the Japanese text is for reference purposes.)
GENERAL:・HF 620 series inverter is open type AC Inverter with three/single phase input and three phase output.
It is intended to be used in an enclosure. It is used to provide both an adjustable voltage andadjustable frequency to the AC motor. The inverter automatically maintains the required volts-Hz ratio
allowing the capability through the motor speed range. It is multi-rated device, and the ratings are
selectable according to load types by operator with keypad operation.
Markings:
Maximum Surrounding Temperature:・ND (Normal Duty): 50deg C・LD (Low Duty): 40deg C
Storage Environment rating:・-20 to 65deg C (for transportation)
Instruction for installation:
・Pollution degree 2 environment and Overvoltage category 3
Electrical Connections:・See section [5.2 Main circuit terminal]Interconnection and wiring diagrams:
・See section [5.4 Control circuit terminal]
Short circuit rating and overcurrent protection device rating:・Single-phase 200V series model,
HF620S-A20 to 2A2- [Non-semiconductor Fuses]
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000rms symmetrical amperes,
240V maximum.
- [Semiconductor Fuses]
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms symmetrical amperes,
240V maximum.
・Three-phase 200V series model,
HF6202-A20 to 3A7- [Non-semiconductor Fuses]
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000 rms symmetrical amperes,
240 V maximum.
・Three-phase 200V series model,
HF6202-5A5 to 7A5- [Non-semiconductor Fuses]
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000rms symmetrical amperes,
240V maximum.
・Three-phase 200V series model,
HF6202-A20 to 7A5- [Semiconductor Fuses]
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms symmetrical amperes,
240V maximum.

1-12
1-12

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks

・Three-phase 400V series model,
HF6204-A40 to 7A5- [Non-semiconductor Fuses]
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000rms symmetrical amperes,
480V maximum.
・Three-phase 400V series model,
HF6204-A40 to 7A5- [Semiconductor Fuses]
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms symmetrical amperes,
480V maximum.
Integral:・Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit
protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local
codes.
Integral:・Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit
protection must be provided in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.
(For Canada)

1-13
1-13

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks■Field wiring conductor size and torque values making for wiring terminal
Model

Screw Size

Required Torque(Nm)Wire Range(AWG/mm2)

HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2

M3.5
M3.5
M4
M4
M4

1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.4

AWG16 (1.3mm2)
AWG16 (1.3mm2)
AWG12 (3.3mm2)
AWG10 (5.3mm2)
AWG10 (5.3mm2)

HF6202-A20

M3.5

1.0

AWG16 (1.3mm2)

HF6202-A40
HF6202-A75
HF6202-1A5
HF6202-2A2
HF6202-3A7
HF6202-5A5
HF6202-7A5

M3.5
M3.5
M4
M4
M4
M5
M5

1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.0
3.0

AWG16 (1.3mm2)
AWG16 (1.3mm2)
AWG14 (2.1mm2)
AWG12 (3.3mm2)
AWG10 (5.3mm2)
AWG6 (13mm2)
AWG6 (13mm2)

HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2
HF6204-3A7
HF6204-5A5

M4
M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
M5

1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
3.0
3.0

AWG16 (1.3mm2)
AWG16 (1.3mm2)
AWG16 (1.3mm2)
AWG14 (2.1mm2)
AWG12 (3.3mm2)
AWG10 (5.3mm2)
AWG10 (5.3mm2)

HF6204-7A5

Temperature rating of field wiring installed conductor:
 For models
HF620S-A20, HF620S-A40, HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5, HF6202-A40, HF6202-A75,
HF6202-1A5, HF6204-A40, HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5, HF6204-2A2, HF6204-3A7- 60 degree C only.
・Except above models - 75 degree C only.
Field wiring terminal marking for wire type:・Use copper conductors only

1-14
1-14

Chapter 1

Safety Instructions/Risks■Required protection by Fuse
Model

Typ e

HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2

Non-Semiconductor Fuse
Maximum Rating
Voltage
Current

Semiconductor Fuse
Manufacture:
Cooper Bussmann LLC

6A
10 A
20 A
30 A
30 A

FWH-15A14F
FWH-15A14F
FWH-60B
FWH-60B
FWH-60B

HF6202-A20

6A

FWH-15A14F

HF6202-A40
HF6202-A75
HF6202-1A5
HF6202-2A2
HF6202-3A7
HF6202-5A5
HF6202-7A5

10 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
30 A
60 A
60 A

FWH-15A14F
FWH-25A14F
FWH-25A14F
FWH-60B
FWH-60B
FWH-150B
FWH-150B

6A
10 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
30 A
30 A

FWH-15A14F
FWH-25A14F
FWH-25A14F
FWH-25A14F
FWH-25A14F
FWH-60B
FWH-60B

HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2
HF6204-3A7
HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5

600 V

Class JClass CCClass GClass T

600 V

600 V

1-15
1-15

Chapter 2

Outline of This User's Guide/Procedure for Operation

Chapter 2 Outline of this User's Guide
Procedure for Operation

2

This chapter describes the applicable products, the knowledge required to read this Guide, the target
readers of this Guide, the purpose of this Guide, the structure of the chapters in this Guide, and an outlineof the procedure (flowchart) for operating the inverter.

2.1 What is written in this user's guide
・The contents of this Guide apply to HF-620 main unit. Refer to the corresponding guide or manuals forother products and optional parts.
・This Guide is meant to be read by those who have knowledge of electricity (certified electrician orequivalent) and those who are in charge of introduction, installation or connection of control equipment,
system design and workplace management. This Guide is written in SI units.
・This inverter can use the second control function to switch some parameters used for motor control fromthe 1st control parameter [**1**] (e.g. [AA101]) to the 2nd control parameter [**2**] (e.g. [AA201]) by
turning on the "2nd-motor control [SET]" input terminal.
In this user's guide, the descriptions of various functions basically refer to parameters [**-**] (e.g. [Ab-01])
that are not subject to the second control function and the 1st control parameter [**1**], but when thesecond control function is enabled, the first control parameter [**1**] is read as the second control
parameter [**2**].
For details on the second control function and the applicable parameters, refer to "9.7.13 Switching
between Two Motors".
・This Guide is intended to provide the following necessary information:(a) Installation and wiring of the product.
(b) Parameter settings.
(c) Conducting test run and operation.
(d) Maintenance and inspection.

2-1
2-1

Outline of This User's Guide/Procedure for Operation

Chapter 2

2.2 Overview of each chapter
・This guide consists of the following chapters:
Refer also to the chapter to be referred to the various part of the inverter appearance drawing on thenext page.
Chapter
Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks
Chapter 2 Outline of This User's Guide
Procedure for Operation

Chapter 3 Main Body of the Product
Chapter 4 Installation
Chapter 5 Wire Connection
Chapter 6 Operation Check/Residual Risk
Chapter 7 Keypad and Related Functions
Chapter 8 Mandatory Setting for Motor
Drive and Test Run
Chapter 9 Inverter Functions
Chapter 10 Monitor Functions
Chapter 11 Modbus Communication
Chapter 12 PC Software
Chapter 13 Communication Option
Chapter 14 Safety Function STO
Chapter 15 Troubleshooting
Chapter 16 Maintenance and Inspection
Chapter 17 Specifications
Chapter 18 List of Parameters

Description
Describes safety precautions for installation, wiring, operation,
maintenance, and inspection.
Describes the people who will read this Guide and the purpose ofthis Guide.
Also describes the overall flow from installation to test run, the flow
chart for driving the motor, and related reference points.
Describes the contents of the inspection at the time of purchase, thepackage, the product model, the contents of the specification label,
and the appearance of the product.
Describes the installation of the inverter, installation environment
and precautions for installation.
Describes the wiring of the inverter and input power supply, themotor and applicable peripheral equipment, and the wiring of the
I/O signals for control.
Describes the residual risk checklist for inverter operation.
Describes how to operate the main unit keypad and related
functions.
Describes the settings required to drive the motor and test run.
Describes the functions available with the inverter.
Describes various data that can be monitored by keypad, remote
operator, etc.
Describes the communication function using Modbus-RTU(RS485)
communication. For the coil/register number used bycommunication function, refer to "Chapter 18 List of Parameters".
Describes the outline what can be done by connecting HF-620 to acomputer.
Describes applicable communication option.
Describes an overview of using the safety function STO.
Describes the inverter error status, warning status, andtroubleshooting.
Describes how to perform maintenance and inspection.
Describes the specifications and dimensions of this product and current
derating characteristics.
Describes the monitor and parameter list.
Coil/register numbers for Modbus communication are also described inthis chapter.

2-2
2-2

Chapter 2

Outline of This User's Guide/Procedure for Operation■What this guide explains.
Chapter 3 Main Body of the Product

Chapter 7 Keypad and Related Functions

・Describes the package, specification label,appearance, and name of each part of the
product.

・Explains how to operate the inverter.

Chapter 8 Mandatory Setting for Motor Drive
and Test Run

Chapter 4 Installation
・Describes the installation of the product.

・Describes the settings required to drive themotor and test run.

Chapter 9 Inverter Functions
・Describes the functions that can be
performed with the inverter.

Chapter 10 Monitor Functions
・Describes various data that can bemonitored by the inverter.

Chapter 12 PC Software
・Provides an overview of what canbe done by connecting to a computer.

Chapter 17 Specifications

Chapter 13 Option Board

・Describes the inverter specifications, external
dimensions and current derating

・Describes the supported option boards.

Chapter 5 Wire Connection
・Describes the wirings of the power line, motor line andoptional device such as reactor and braking resistor tothe main circuit terminal block.
・Also describes the wiring of the I/O contacts, relay
output, analog I/O and so on to the control circuit
terminal block.

Chapter 11 Modbus Communication
Chapter 14 Safety Function STO
・Describes detailed information when Modbus
communication and safety function STO are used.
・For the wiring, also refer to "5.4 Control Circuit
Terminal".

Chapter 15 Troubleshooting
・Describes the countermeasures for trip and warning
occurrence.

Chapter 6 Operation Check/Residual Risk

Chapter 16 Maintenance and Inspection

・Describes residual risks during operation andthe items to be checked.

・Describes maintenance and inspection, such as daily
inspection.

2-3
2-3

Chapter 2

Outline of This User's Guide/Procedure for Operation

2.3 Procedure for operation (flowchart)
・The flowchart below shows an outline of the procedures of installing, wiring, test run and various
settings in case installing a HF-620.
The overview of each item in the flowchart and the main sections that describe the details are shown in
the right column.
For installation

Overview of the checks and main reference section

1

Confirmation of safety

Check the precautions necessary for handling the inverter.
"Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks"

2

Checking the inverter

Check that there are no problems with the model, enclosed items, appearance,
etc. of the inverter you purchased.
"3.1 Confirmation at the Time of Purchase"

3

Installation of inverter

Check the status and environment of the inverter installation.
"Chapter 4 Installation"

4

Wiring and checking
main circuit terminals

Wire the power supply, motor, applicable peripheral device (work only whennecessary), etc. to the main circuit terminal of the inverter and check if the wiring to theinverter is correct.
"5.2 Main Circuit Terminal""5.3 Applicable Peripheral Device"

5

Wiring and checking thecontrol circuit terminals

Wire I/O signals and analog I/O signals to the control terminal of the inverter andcheck if the wiring to the inverter is correct.
"5.4 Control Circuit Terminal""9.15 Functions with External Signal Input""9.16 Functions with External Signal Output"

6

Checking how to use
keypadCheck how to use keypad, and then change the parameter settings or monitor in
the following steps.
"7.1 How to Use Keypad"

7

Setting mandatory
parameters for
operating the motor andinverter

Set the load rating of the inverter according to the load.
Set the basic data of the motor and protection settings such as electronic
thermal, etc. according to the motor specifications to be driven.
"8.1 Mandatory Setting for Operation"

8

Selecting control mode

Set the control mode according to the characteristics of the load machine.
"9.5 Selecting Control Mode for the Motor and Load"To next page

2-4
2-4

Chapter 2

Outline of This User's Guide/Procedure for Operation

From previous page9

Test run without load

To check if there is a basic problem with the inverter or motor, connect only the
motor and rotate it with no load to check if it rotates properly.
"8.2.2 Test Run by Connecting Only the Motor"

10

Check if auto-tuning isrequired.

It is necessary to perform auto-tuning when using automatic torqueboost, sensorless vector control, or when using a motor whose motor
constant is unknown.
"8.3 Carrying Out Motor Auto-tuning"

11

Test run with actual load

Perform a test run to confirm that there is no problem with theoperation by connecting the mechanical system.
"8.2.3 Perform a Test run With a Machine Load"

12

Selecting RUN command source(a) Running with keypad's RUN-key(b) Running with Forward/Reverse
signal input(c) Running with push button(automatic return contact)(d) Select other RUN commands

Set RUN command source of the inverter.
Refer to the following sections respectively:(a) "9.1.2 Operation by RUN Key on the Keypad"(b) "9.1.3 Operation by Forward/Reverse Input Terminals"(c) "9.1.4 Operation by Pushbutton (Momentary Switch) Input"(d) For other RUN commands and related functions, refer to "9.1.1
Types of RUN command" and refer to the section in which the
run command method suitable for the purpose is described.

13

Selecting the frequency command
source(a) Set the frequency with keypad(b) Set the frequency with analog
voltage input by connecting avariable resistor(c) Set the frequency with analog
current input(d) Switch the frequency in multispeed by combinations of signal
input ON/OFF(e) Select other frequency reference

Set the frequency command source of the inverter.
Refer to the following sections respectively:(a)"9.2.2 Setting Frequency Command by Keypad"(b), (c) "9.2.3 Setting Frequency Command by Analog Inputs(Voltage/Current)"(d) "9.2.4 Setting Frequency Command by Multi-Speed Operation
Function"(e) For other frequency commands and related functions, refer to"9.2.1 Types of Frequency Command" and refer to the section inwhich the frequency command method suitable for the purpose isdescribed.

14

Setting various parameters for
operation

Set various parameters related to the required functions by referringto "Chapter 9 Inverter Functions".

Tips for setting parameter・If the parameter you want to set is not displayed or the parameter cannot be changed, refer to "7.2
Functions Related to Keypad" to check if any restrictions have been applied.
・If the inverter does not operate as intended after setting several parameters, refer to "15.4 How to
Check When Something Is Wrong" to deal with it.
・If possible, consider initializing the parameters. In this case, see "7.2.2 Initialize the Parameters".
(However, it is recommended to back up parameters with inverter configuration PC software, etc. prior
to parameter initialization.)

2-5
2-5

Chapter 3

Main Body of the Product

Chapter 3 Main Body of the Product3

This chapter describes the main body of the product. The inspection at the time of purchase, the items
included in the product, the explanation of the product model name, the details of the specification label,the appearance of the product and the names of each part are described.

3.1 Confirmation at the time of purchase3.1.1 Checking the product and the included items
・The following items are included in the package.
・If you find any faults or defects in the product or have any question about the product, please contact
your supplier.

Inverter HF-620: 1 Unit

・1 × HF-620 Manual
・1 × HF-620 Safety Function Guide Caution
・1 × HF-620 Caution reminder stickers (multilingual)(Others, which are a correction error table/supplementary instruction
manual, etc., may be included.)

Confirmations at unpacking
When unpacking, check that the package contains ·1 inverter main unit, ·1 Manual, and other included
items.
Check the specification label again to confirm that the product is the one you have ordered.
Check the product for damage (including falling of parts and dents in the inverter body) caused duringtransportation.

Caution・Applying a different inverter voltage class or motor rated voltage from the specified input power voltage
may lead to damage to your inverter or motor burnout.
・Check with the specification label to be sure that the inverter voltage class is correct.

DO・The User's Guide (this document) is not included in the product. To get the latest version of the HF-620
User's Guide, please contact the supplier where this device was purchased.
When you use the inverter with optional products, you should also read the manuals enclosed withthose products.
・Note that the HF-620 manual and optional products manuals to be used should be delivered to theend user of the inverter. For the User's Guide and manuals, contact your supplier.

3-1
3-1

Main Body of the Product

Chapter 3
3.1.2 Model of the inverter and nameplate

・The model of the product is as follows. Check that the model is same as you ordered.

HF620

4 －

A40
② Applicable Motor Output① Power Supply Voltage
Inverter Series: HF-620
Symbol ①

Power Supply Voltage

Symbol ②

Applicable Motor Output

S
2
4

Single-phase 200V classThree-phase 200V classThree-phase 400V class

A20
A40
A75

0.2kW
0.4kW
0.75kW

1A5
2A2
3A7
5A5

1.5kW
2.2kW
3.7kW
5.5kW

7A5

7.5kW

■Nameplate for the Inverter(e.g.) Three-phase 400V class
Inverter Model No.

VersionInput
OutputManufacturing number

Made date (e.g. 2401…January 2024)

・In this Guide, some indications may be omitted from the model name. In that case, the omitted
indications are not concerned with the description.
・The input and output currents on the specification label are UL certified current values.
The " *** " part of the label above shows the product-specific values.

3-2
3-2

Main Body of the Product

Chapter 3
3.2 Appearance of the product and part names
3.2.1 Appearance of each model

・The appearance of the product and the names of its parts are shown below for each model.
■Single-phase 200V class：HF620S-A20/A40
Three-phase 200V class：HF6202-A20/A40/A75
(3)

(5)
(6)
H
(4)

D
W

(7)

Note: The W and H dimensions are the same, but the D dimensions differ depending on the model due to thedifference of the cooling fin.

■Single-phase 200V class: HF620S-A75/1A5/2A2
Three-phase 200V class: HF6202-1A5/2A2
Three-phase 400V class: HF6204-A40/A75/1A5/2A2
(1)
(2)

(3)
(5)

(6)

H
D

(4)

W
(7)

Note: The W and H dimensions are the same, but the D dimensions differ depending on the model due to thedifference of the cooling fin.
HF620S-A75 and HF6204-A40 do not have a cooling fan and a cooling fan cover.
(1) Cooling fan cover(2) Cooling fan(3) Cooling fin(4) Main body cover(5) Terminal block cover (6) Control terminal cover (7) Backing plate

3-3
3-3

Main Body of the Product

Chapter 3■Three-phase 200V class: HF6202-3A7
Three-phase 400V class: HF6204-3A7

(1)
(2)

(3)
(5)

(6)
(4)

(7)

■Three-phase 200V class: HF6202-5A5/7A5Three-phase 400V class: HF6204-5A5/7A5
(1)

(2)

(3)

(5)
(8)

(6)

(4)
(7)
(1) Cooling fan cover(2) Cooling fan(3) Cooling fin(5) Terminal block cover (6) Control terminal cover (7) Backing plate

3-4
3-4

(4) Main body cover(8) Main body case

Main Body of the Product

Chapter 3
3.2.2 Part names and descriptions on the front of the product

・The appearance from the front of the product without the terminal cover and the names of the parts
are shown below.

(1) USB connector (Micro-B)⇒ "12.1 Inverter configuration software(5) EDM Switch⇒ "14.1.2 STO State Monitor Output(EDM Signal)"(2) RJ45 connector for remote operator⇒ "3.2.3 Connecting remote operator"ON
OFF (Factory default)(3) Termination resistor switch⇒ "11.1.2 Communication Wiring andConnection"(6) Safety Function STO Input 1/2⇒ "14.1.1 STO Function"ON
OFF (Factory default)(8) Multi-function relay output terminal⇒ "5.4 Control Circuit Terminal(4) Option board connector⇒ "Chapter 13 Communication Option"(7) Control circuit terminal⇒ "5.4 Control Circuit Terminal"(9) Main circuit terminal⇒ "5.2 Main circuit terminal"(10) Charge lamp

Name

Description(1) USB connector

USB connector (Micro-B) for connecting to a PC.
(Only when inverter configuration software is used.)(2) RJ45 connector for
remote operator

Connector for connecting the optional remote operator(OS-44: ver.2.0 onwards).

(3) Termination resistor switch(4) Option board connector(5) EDM function switch(6) Safety function STO input
1/2(7) Control circuit terminal(8) Intelligent relay output
terminal(9) Main circuit terminal(10) Charge lamp
(Charging indicator lamp)

Termination resister switch for the RS485 communication terminal on the control terminal.
When turned on, the built-in resistor (120Ω) is connected.
Connector for mounting option board.
Turn ON in case of using the [EDM] signal of the safety function.
Be sure to turn off the power before switching ON/OFF.
(Refer to section "14.1.2 STO State Monitor Output (EDM Signal)")Terminals block for input signals of safety function. (Refer to section "14.1.1 STO Function")
Terminal block for connecting various digital/analog Input/Output signals for inverter control.
1c contact terminal block for intelligent relay output.
Terminal block for connecting the inverter main power supply, motor output, braking resistor,
etc.
This lamp lights when the main circuit DC voltage (between terminal [P/+] and [N/-]) isapproximately DC45V or more even after the power supply is shut off.
The voltage does not necessarily run out even if the charge lamp goes off. When changing thewiring, wait for 10 minutes or more after shutting off the power, and check that there is no
residual DC voltage by using a tester or other instrument to confirm safety.

Note: 1. For the displays and keys on the keypad, refer to "7.1 How to Use Keypad".
2. The position of the (10) charge lamp depends on the model. For the positions of each model, refer to "5.2.3
Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminal Block".
3. Note that operation is also possible from the inverter main unit when driving from a PC via USB cable.
4. Disconnect the power supply before connecting or disconnecting the remote operator (OS-44: ver.2.0
onwards) to or from (2) RJ45 connector.

3-5
3-5

Main Body of the Product

Chapter 3
3.2.3 Connecting remote operator

・Connecting the optional remote operator (OS-44: ver.2.0 onwards) enables operation from outside thepanel.
・It is recommended to use the connector cable option ICS-1 (1m) or ICS-3 (3m) to connect the inverter
main unit and the remote operator.
・Inverter can detect remote operator disconnection and some remote operators can use the data R/Wfunction. For detail, refer to "7.2.9 Remote Operator Functions".

RJ45 Connector

・Use a connector cable within 3m. If the cable is more than 3m, it may cause malfunctioning.
・Do not connect or disconnect the remote operator while the inverter is energized.

3-6
3-6

Installation

Chapter 44Chapter 4 Installation

This chapter describes the instruction of the inverter.
When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters and pay attention to safety.

4.1 Installation environment
4.1.1 Installation precautions
・When installing the inverter, be sure to observe the following precautions.

◆ Transportation
・Plastic parts are used for the inverter. When carrying the inverter, handle it carefully to prevent
damage to the parts.
・Do not carry the inverter by holding the keypad or terminal block cover.
Doing so may cause the inverter to fall.
・Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or parts are missing.

Drop◆ Ambient temperature
・Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the ambient temperature goes above or below
the allowable range, as defined by the standard inverter specification.

Temperature requirement
Note: Temperature requirements vary depending on the "Load type selection [Ub-03]".
In addition, current derating may be required. For details, refer to "Chapter 17
Specifications".
・Leave sufficient space around the inverter. Measure the temperature in a position about 5cm
from the bottom-center point of the inverter, and check that the measured temperature is
within the allowable range. Operating the inverter at a temperature outside this range will
shorten the inverter life (especially the capacitor life).

4-1
4-1

Installation

Chapter 4◆ Humidity

・Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the relative humidity goes above or below theallowable range (20 to 90% RH), as defined by the standard inverter specification. Especially,
use the product in a place where there is no condensation.

20 to 90 ％RH

・Condensation inside the inverter will result in short circuits and malfunctioning of electronic parts.
Also avoid installing the product in a place exposed to direct sunlight.

Water droplets

Direct sunlight◆ Ambient atmosphere・Avoid installing the inverter in a place where the inverter will be subject to dust, water
droplets, corrosive gases, explosive gases, flammable gases, grinding fluid mist, or salt air.

Intrusion・Foreign particles entering the inverter will cause it to fail. If you use the inverter in aconsiderably dusty environment, install the inverter inside a sealed enclosure.

◆ Installation method and installation direction
・Install the inverter firmly and vertically with screws or bolts on a surface that can withstand theinverter weight and is free from vibrations.
Screwing

Screwing

Screwing

Screwing

・If the inverter is not installed vertically, its cooling performance may be degraded and tripping
or inverter damage may result.

Inclination

4-2
4-2

Installation

Chapter 4◆ Mounting in an enclosure

・When mounting multiple inverters in an enclosure with a ventilation fan, carefully design thelayout of the ventilation fan, air intake port, and inverters. An inappropriate layout will reducethe inverter-cooling effect and raise the ambient temperature. Pay close attention so that theambient temperature of the inverter is within the allowable operating temperature range.
If a ventilation fan is located directly above the inverter, dust or dirt may drop on it. To prevent
this, move the inverter horizontally to a suitable position.

Ventilation fan

InverterInverter(Good)(Bad)

Position of Ventilation fan

Watt loss
・Watt loss data (at 100% load) of the inverter are shown below.
■Single-phase 200V class
A20

A40

HF620SA75

1A5

2A2

16

28

50

91

155

A20

A40

A75

HF62021A5
2A2

3A7

5A5

7A5

15

25

43

73

109

194

309

296

A40

A75

1A5

HF62042A2

3A7

5A5

7A5

29

45

55

64

94

207

220

Model No.
I te mWatt loss (W) Normal Duty

■Three-phase 200V class
Model No.
I te mWatt loss (W) Normal Duty

■Three-phase 400V class
Model No.
I te mWatt loss (W) Normal Duty

Note: Watt loss data depend on power supply condition and power factor for the motor.

4-3
4-3

Installation

Chapter 4◆ Surface on which to install the inverter

・The inverter will reach a high temperature (up to about 150°C) during operation. Install theinverter on a vertical wall surface made of nonflammable material (e.g. metal) to avoid the riskof fire.
・Leave sufficient space around the inverter. Keep sufficient distance between the inverter andother heat sources (e.g. braking resistors and reactors) so that the heat discharged from theheat sources does not affect the inverter.
Wall

10cm or more

5cm or more

5cm or more

Inverter

Air flow

Keep enough clearance between the
inverter and the wiring ducts locatedabove and below the inverter toprevent the latter from obstructing
the ventilation of the inverter.

10cm or more
Note: For the inverter dimensions, refer to "17.2 External Dimensions".

・It is also possible to install multiple inverters side by side in the panel. In this case, derating is required
for the carrier frequency and output current. For details, refer to "17.3 Current Derating" for details.

10cm or more

5cm or more

5cm or more

10cm or more

4-4
4-4

Wire Connection

Chapter 55Chapter 5 Wire Connection

This chapter describes the wirings of the power supply to the main circuit terminal of the inverter, motor
and peripheral options, and the analog and digital input/ output signal wirings to the control circuit
terminal. When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and thecorresponding chapters and pay attention to safety.

5.1Terminal block cover・Control terminal can be checked by removing the terminal block cover. The main circuit terminal block
can be checked by removing the backing plate.
■How to remove the terminal block cover(1) Loosen the terminal block
cover fixing screws (one or
two locations).

(2) Remove the terminal block coverfrom the bottom while pressing thelower part of the terminal block
cover in the direction of the arrow.

(3) When wiring, slide the backing plateforward and remove it.

・While pressing in the direction of the arrow,
remove the terminal block cover from below.
Note: The terminal block cover fixing screws are provided in one place on the lower right or lower left for models with acapacity of 2.2kW or less, and in two places on both sides for models with a capacity of 3.7kW or more.
Also, the control terminal cover is fixed to the terminal block cover with a screw, but it is not fixed to the main
unit. Therefore, the terminal block cover can be removed without removing the control terminal cover.

■How to attach the terminal block cover・Contrary to removing, attach the terminal block cover to the main unit from the upper side first andpush it in until it clicks. (Tighten the fixing screws of the control terminal cover and the terminal block
cover with a tightening torque of 0.2 to 0.3Nm.)
HF620S-A20, A40
HF6202-A20 to A75

HF620S-A75 to 2A2
HF6202-1A5, 2A2
HF6204-A40 to 2A2

HF6202-3A7
HF6204-3A7

ControlTerminal
cover

Terminal block cover
Terminal block cover fixing screw(1 place for 2.2kW or less))

Terminal block cover

5-1
5-1

Terminal block cover fixing screw(1 place for 3.7kW or more)Wire Connection

Chapter 5■How to use the backing plate
HF620S-A20 to 2A2、HF6202-A40 to 7A5、HF6204-A40 to 7A5
Control circuit wiring
・Pull out from the terminal block cover.

Main circuit wiring
・Cut the connection points between the unnecessary part and the backing
plate using a nipper or a cutter, to cut off the unnecessary part for wiring.

・Cut the connection points between the unnecessary part and the backing plate using a nipper or acutter, to cut off the unnecessary part for wiring. Be careful not to get injured.
When high voltage is applied to the relay output terminals, etc., pull out the wires separately from thelow voltage wires such as the control circuit wires.

5-2
5-2

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
5.2 Main circuit terminal
5.2.1 Configuration of main circuit terminal
Short circuit between P and P1 (factory default state)[P/+] and [P1/+1] terminals are short-circuited at the factory-set.
If these terminals are not connected, power is not supplied to the main
circuit, which disables operation.

Short-circuit bar

Circuit breaker
MCB

Single/Threephase
AC power
supplyMagnetic
contactor
MC

200V class:Single/Three phase 200 to 240 V
400V class:Three-phase 380 to 480 V

Terminal symbol
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
P1/+1
P/+
PR
P/+
N/-

G

N/-

PR

P1/+1

(Single-phase)P/+

R/L1 (R/L1)

U/T1

S/ L2

V/ T 2

T/L3 (S/L2)

W/T3

Three-phase
AC motor

M

Main circuit terminal

Name

Description

Input terminal for main
power supply

Connects to AC power supply.
There is no [T/L3] terminal in the single-phase model. In this case, connect AC
power supply to [R/L1] and [S/L2] terminals.

Inverter output terminal

Connect a three-phase motor.

DC reactor connection
terminal

Remove the short-circuit bar between [P/+] and [P1/+1] terminal andconnect the optional DC reactor for power factor improvement.

Braking resistor connection
terminal

When braking torque is required, connect the optional external braking resistor
between [P/+]([+]) and [PR] terminal.

Regenerative braking unit
connection terminal

Inverter grounding terminal

When braking torque is required and the built-in braking circuit is insufficient,connect the optional regenerative braking unit between [P/+] and [N/-]terminal.
Note: In this guide, the voltage between these terminals is referred to as theDC bus voltage.
Ground terminal. Ground to prevent electric shock and reduce noise.
Connect according to the applicable local grounding standards. For models
of 200V class 3.7kW or less and 400V class 3.7kW or less, connect the
grounding bar on the bottom left of the inverter.

Precautions for wiring the main circuit terminals● Risk of electric shock and fire!
Electric
shock
Fire

DO

・Be sure to check that the charge lamp is off before making any work such as wiring change after the poweris shut off. Once the power is turned on, regardless of whether open phase is occurring or the device
is running or not, it is very dangerous because the capacitor in the inverter is charged at high voltage
for certain period even after the power is shut off. Check that the input power is turned OFF and wait
at least 10 minutes before starting the work. (Check that the charge lamp is off and the DC voltage
between [P/+] and [N/-] terminals is DC45V or less.)

5-3
5-3

Wire Connection

Chapter 55.2.2 Wiring power supply and motor

・Connect [R/L1], [S/L2] and [T/L3] terminal to the AC power supply, and [U/T1], [V/T2] and [W/T3]
terminal to the motor.
Pay attention to the following points when wiring.
■Cautions for wiring the main circuit terminal● Risk of burnout of the motor!
DangerBurnout•

・Do not drive a 200V class motor with a 400V class inverter.
・The input power supply should be within the following ranges.
200V class AC200 to 240V (allowable fluctuation range +10%/-15%)

Prohibited

400V class AC380 to 480V (allowable fluctuation range +10%/-15%)
50Hz/60Hz (fluctuation range ±5 %)DO■Caution for the main power input terminal● Risk of fire and damage to machine!
Fire・For connection between the power supply and the main power input terminal ([R/L1], [S/L2], [T/L3]),
DamageDO

use the earth-leakage breaker for protecting the circuit and wiring.
・If the protection function of the inverter is activated, there is a possibility that a failure or an accident
is occurring on your system. Connect a magnetic contactor that shuts off the power supplied to theinverter.
・Since the earth-leakage breaker may malfunction due to effects of high frequency noise, please use amodel with large high-frequency sensitive current value.

● Risk of damage to the inverter!
・Do not turn on or off the magnetic contactor installed on the input (primary) and output (secondary)
Failuresides of the inverter to start or stop operation.
・To start or stop operation using external signals, use the RUN command (FR, RR) of the control circuit
Prohibited terminal block.
DO● Risk of electric shock, injury and damage to the inverter!
Electricshock
InjuryFailure・Do not operate the inverter when an input phase is lost.
・With the three-phase input model, even if an input phase is missing, the internal capacitor will becharged, which may cause an electric shock or injury. In addition, if an input phase is missing,the inverter may be damaged due to frequent undervoltage and overcurrent errors due to singlephase operation.
・With a single-phase input model, power will not be supplied due to a single-wire disconnection.
Prohibited
However, contact with the power line on the unbroken side may cause electric shock or injury.
● Risk of damage to the inverter!
Failure・Do not use the following types of power supplies. Otherwise, the internal converter module may
be damaged.
(a) Unbalance of the power supply voltage is 3% or more.
(b) The power supply capacity is 10 times or more than the inverter capacity and 500kVA or more.
Prohibited(c) When the power supply change suddenly for reason such as the following example.
(e.g. 1) When two or more inverters are installed and connected each other with a short cable.
(e.g. 2) When the inverter and the thyristor converter are connected to each other with a short cable.
(e.g. 3) When a phase advance capacitor is inserted or shut off.

5-4
5-4

Wire Connection

Chapter 5● Risk of damage to the inverter!
Failure・Do not turn on and off the power frequently, which should not be done more than once every 3
minutes.

Prohibited■Cautions for inverter output terminals● Risk of fire, malfunction and damage to machine!
DANGERFire

DO

・Use wires with a thickness equal to or above the applicable wire. Otherwise, the output voltage may
drop between the inverter and the motor. Especially at low speed output, voltage drop caused bywiring reduces the torque of the motor.

● Risk of damage to the inverter!
FailureProhibited・Do not install a phase advance capacitor or surge absorber between the inverter and the motor, as
they may cause inverter errors or damage to the capacitor or surge absorber.

● Risk of burnout of the motor!
Burnout

・DO

・When connecting multiple motors, install thermal relays for each of them.

● Risk of burnout of the motor!
Burnout

DO・When the wire length exceeds 20m, due to the stray capacitance or the inductance of the wire, surge
voltage may be generated on the motor terminals (especially on 400 V class), which may cause themotor to burnout.

● Risk of burnout of the motor!
Burnout

DO

・The RC value of the thermal relay should be 1.1 times the rated current of the motor.
The thermal relay may trip earlier than intended depending on the wire length. In that case, install an
AC reactor on the output side of the inverter.

5-5
5-5

Wire Connection

Chapter 5■Cautions for ground terminal for inverter● Risk of electric shock!
Electricshock

DO・Be sure to ground the inverter and motor for use in accordance with the applicable local grounding
standards.
・Use grounding wires whose thickness is thicker than that of the applicable wires and make them
short as much as possible.

● Risk of malfunction of the inverter and peripheral control devices!
Malfunction

・When more than one inverter are used, connect them that the grounding route (condition) should
not be cascaded or loops connection.
InverterInverterInverterInverterInverterInverter

Prohibited

Grounding bolt
prepared by thecustomer.

Other cautions
・For details on compliance with CE and UL standards, refer to "1.3 Compliance to European Directive(CE)" and "1.4 Compliance to UL Standards".
・If exports to the U.S. or Canada, or compliance with UL, cUL standards is required, the wires and circuit
breakers specified in the UL, cUL standards must be used. When connecting wires to the main circuit
terminal block, use round crimping terminals (UL-certified item) suitable for the wires for use. Use acrimp tool recommended by the manufacturer of the crimping terminal to crimp the terminal.
・Screw size may differ depending on the terminal. For the screw sizes of the main circuit terminal andthe ground terminal, refer to "5.2.3 Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminal Block".
・For the wiring to the inverter and the tightening torque of the crimp terminal and terminal screw, referto the table in "5.3.2 Recommended Wire Diameter, Wiring Equipment, Crimp Terminal".

5-6
5-6

Wire Connection

Chapter 55.2.3 Arrangement of main circuit terminal

・The arrangement of the main circuit terminal of the inverter is shown in the figure below.
Model

Terminal arrangement

Single-phase 200V class
0.2 to 0.4kW
HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40

電源入力線
Single-phase
model

R/L1

S/L2

P/+

PR

N/-

Three-phase 200V class
0.2 to 0.75kW
HF6202-A20
HF6202-A40
HF6202-A75

Charge lamp

Shortcircuit
bar

Motor output
Power supply input
P/+

Three-phase
model

PR

N/Shortcircuit
bar

Motor output
Ground bar: M4×2

Single-phase model

Single-phase 200V class0.75 to 2.2kW
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2

P1/+1 P/+

1PR

N/- R/L1

Charge lamp

Three-phase 200V class
1.5 to 2.2kW
HF6202-1A5
HF6202-2A2
Three-phase 400V class
0.4 to 2.2kW
HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2

Screw size: M3.5, Terminal width: 7.3mm

Short-circuit bar
S/L2

Power supply input

Motor output

Three-phase model
P/+

PR

Short-circuit bar

N/- R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

Power supply input
Ground bar: M4×2

Three-phase 200V class
3.7kW
HF6202-3A7

Motor output

Screw size: M4, Terminal width: 9.9mm

Charge lamp
Short-circuit bar

Three-phase 400V class
3.7kW
HF6204-3A7

P/+

PR

N/Power supply input

Motor output

Screw size: M4, Terminal width: 9.9mm

Ground bar: M4×2

5-7
5-7

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
Model

Terminal arrangement

Three-phase 200V class
5.5/7.5kW
HF6202-5A5
HF6202-7A5

Power supply input

Three-phase 400V class
5.5/7.5kW
HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5

Motor output

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

P1/+1

P/+

N/-

PR

Short-circuit bar

V/T2 W/T3

G

GGround terminal

Screw size: M5, Terminal width: 13mm
Charge lamp

5-8
5-8

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
5.3 Applicable peripheral device
5.3.1 Overview of peripheral device
Cautions

Power supply

・The applicable devices shown in this chapter are those when Hitachi standard 3-phase 4-pole
induction motor is used.
・For the circuit breaker, choose an appropriate device by taking breaking capacity into
consideration. (Use an inverter-compatible type.)
・To ensure safety, use an earth-leakage breaker (ELB).
・Use a 75°C copper wire (HIV wire). (For details, refer to "1.4.1 UL Cautions".)・When the wiring length exceeds 20m, a thick power line needs to be used.
・Use 0.75 mm2 wire for relay output terminals.
・Tighten the terminal screws at specified torques. Loose tightening may cause a short circuit or
fire. Excessive tightening may damage the terminal block or inverter.
・Employ different sensitive currents for earth-leakage breaker (ELB) depending on the total wiring length
between the inverter and the power supply and between the inverter and the motor. Also, use an invertercompatible type earth-leakage breaker. High-speed type products may malfunction.
・Leakage current is approx. 30mA/km when XLPE wire is used and wired with a metal tube.
・As relative permittivity of HIV wire is high, the current increases by about 8 times. Therefore, use an itemwith 8 times sensitive current that is shown on the table right. When the total wiring length exceeds 100m,
use a XLPE wire.

<1>

<2>

<3>

<4>

<5>

No.

<6>
<7>
R

S
INV

T
P1

U

V

<9>

<10>

<12>
<13>

M
Motor

Wire

<2>

Earth-leakage breakerCircuit breaker<3>

Magnetic contactor

30
100

Refer to "5.3.2 Recommended Wire Diameters, Wiring
Equipment and Crimp Terminal".

<4>

Input-side AC reactor<5>

Noise filter<6>

Zero-phase reactor<7>

Radio noise filter(XY filter)

This is applied as a countermeasure against harmonic
suppression, or when imbalance of power supply voltage is 3%
or above, or when power supply capacity is 500 kVA or above.
It is also used when a rapid change is made to power supply
voltage. It is also effective in improving power factor.
This reduces conducted noise generated from the inverter andtransmitted through the wires. Connected to the primary side
(input side) of the inverter.
When the inverter is used, noise may be generated on an adjacentradio or other devices through wiring on the primary side (inputside) of inverter. This is used for reducing the noise (reducing
radiation noise).
This reduces the radiation noise that is emitted from the wireon the input side.

<8>

DC reactor

This suppresses harmonics generated from the inverter.

<9>

Braking resistor<10>

Regenerative braking
unitThis is used for increasing the braking torque of inverter,
repeating power on and off at high interval, or reducing the
speed of high load caused by moment of inertia.

<11>

Output-side
noise filter<12>

Zero-phase reactor<13>

Output-side
AC reactor

W

<11>

Sensitivity current (mA)

100m or shorter
300m or shorter

Function

<1>

<8>

P
PR
N

Name

Total wiring length

This is installed between the inverter and motor to reduce theradiation noise that is emitted from the wire. It is used toreduce radio interference on radios or televisions or prevent
malfunctioning of measurement instruments and sensors.
This is applied for reducing noise generated on the output sideof inverter. (It can be used on both input side and output side.)
When a general-use motor is driven by the inverter, comparedwith when it is run by commercial power supply, larger
vibration may be generated. By connecting this device between
the inverter and motor, the vibration of motor can be reduced.
Also, if the wiring length between the inverter and motor is long
(10m or longer), by inserting a reactor, malfunctioning of thethermal relay caused by harmonic attributable to switching of
inverter can be prevented. It is also possible to use a current
sensor instead of a thermal relay.

5-9
5-9

Wire Connection

Chapter 55.3.2 Recommended wire diameter, wiring equipment, crimp terminal

・The following table shows the recommended wiring to the inverter, crimp terminals and tightening
torque of the terminal screws.
■Single-phase 200V class
Main circuit terminal wiring
AWG (mm2)

Crimp terminal
Power/GroundTerminal screw size
(Terminal width)

Tightening torque (N m)Power/Ground (max. value)

AWG16 (1.3mm2)R2-3.5/R2-4

M3.5(7.3mm)

0.9 to 1.2/
1.3 to 1.5(1.4/1.8)

R5.5-4/R5.5-4

M4(9.9mm)1.4/1.3 to 1.5(1.6/1.8)

Main circuit terminal wiring
AWG (mm2)

Crimp terminal
Power/GroundTerminal screw size
(Terminal width)

Tightening torque (N m)Power/Ground (max. value)

HF6202-A40
HF6202-A75
HF6202-1A5

AWG16 (1.3mm2)R2-3.5/R2-4

M3.5(7.3mm)

0.9 to 1.2/
1.3 to 1.5(1.4/1.8)

AWG14 (2.1mm2)

R2-4/R2-4

HF6202-2A2

2

AWG12 (3.3mm )HF6202-3A7
HF6202-5A5
HF6202-7A5

AWG10 (5.3mm2)

M4(9.9mm)1.4/1.3 to 1.5(1.6/1.8)

R14-5/R14-5

M5(13mm)

3.0/3.0(3.0/3.0)

Crimp terminal
Power/GroundTerminal screw size
(Terminal width)

Tightening torque (N m)Power/Ground (max. value)

R2-4/R2-4

M4(9.9mm)1.4/1.3 to 1.5(1.6/1.8)M5(13mm)

3.0/3.0(3.0/3.0)

Model
HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2

AWG12 (3.3mm2)
AWG10 (5.3mm2)■Three-phase 200V classModel
HF6202-A20

AWG6 (13mm2)R5.5-4/R5.5-4■Three-phase 400V class
Model

Main circuit terminal wiring
AWG (mm2)

HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5

AWG16 (1.3mm2)

HF6204-2A2

AWG14 (2.1mm2)

HF6204-3A7
HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5

AWG12 (3.3mm2)R5.5-4/R5.5-4

AWG10 (5.3mm2)R5.5-5/R5.5-5・The wire size in the above table shows the designed values based on HIV cables (with thermal
resistance of 75°C).
・When the wiring length exceeds 20m, a thick power line needs to be used.
・When connecting wires to the main circuit terminal block, use round crimping terminals (UL-certifieditem) suitable for the wires for use. Use a crimp tool recommended by the manufacturer of the crimping
terminal to crimp the terminal.
・Use a ground wire with a diameter equal to or thicker than that indicated on the power line.
・It is recommended to tight screws at the "maximum value" of the tightening torque in the above table.

5-10
5-10

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
5.3.3 Applicable breaker■Single-phase 200V class (Standard load rating [ND]: Initial setting）
Model
HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2

Applicable
Motor (kW)
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2

Earth-leakage
breaker (ELB)(Mitsubishi electric)

Breaker (MCB)(Mitsubishi electric)

NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV63-SV

NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF63-SV

Rated current (A)Magnetic
contactor(Fuji electric)

5
10
20
30
40

SC-03
SC-03
SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2

Rated current (A)Magnetic
contactor■Single-phase 200V class (Light load rating [LD])Model
HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2

Applicable
Motor (kW)
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2

Earth-leakage
breaker (ELB)(Mitsubishi electric)

Breaker (MCB)(Mitsubishi electric)

NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV63-SV

NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF63-SV(Fuji electric)
10
15
20
30
40

SC-03
SC-4-0
SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2

Rated current (A)Magnetic
contactor■Three-phase 200V class (Standard load rating [ND]: Initial setting）
Model
HF6202-A20
HF6202-A40
HF6202-A75
HF6202-1A5
HF6202-2A2
HF6202-3A7
HF6202-5A5
HF6202-7A5

Applicable
Motor (kW)
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

Earth-leakage
breaker (ELB)(Mitsubishi electric)

Breaker (MCB)(Mitsubishi electric)

NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV63-SV
NV125-SV

NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF63-SV
NF125-SV(Fuji electric)
5
5
10
15
20
30
50
60

SC-03
SC-03
SC-03
SC-4-0SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2S
SC-N3

Rated current (A)Magnetic
contactor■Three-phase 200V class (Light load rating [LD])Model
HF6202-A20
HF6202-A40
HF6202-A75
HF6202-1A5
HF6202-2A2
HF6202-3A7
HF6202-5A5
HF6202-7A5

Applicable
Motor (kW)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11

Earth-leakage
breaker (ELB)(Mitsubishi electric)

Breaker (MCB)(Mitsubishi electric)

NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV63-SV
NV125-SV
NV125-SV

NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF63-SV
NF125-SV
NF125-SV

5-11
5-11

(Fuji electric)
5
10
15
20
30
40
60
75

SC-03
SC-03
SC-4-0SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2S
SC-N3
SC-N3

Wire Connection

Chapter 5■Three-phase 400V class (Standard load rating [ND]: Initial setting）
Model
HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2
HF6204-3A7
HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5

Applicable
Motor (kW)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

Earth-leakage
breaker (ELB)(Mitsubishi electric)

Breaker (MCB)(Mitsubishi electric)

NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV

NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV

Rated current (A)Magnetic
contactor(Fuji electric)

5
5
10
15
20
30
30

SC-03
SC-03
SC-03
SC-4-0
SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2

Rated current (A)Magnetic
contactor■Three-phase 400V class (Light load rating [LD])Model
HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2
HF6204-3A7
HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5

Applicable
Motor (kW)
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11

Earth-leakage
breaker (ELB)(Mitsubishi electric)

Breaker (MCB)(Mitsubishi electric)

NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV32-SV
NV63-SV
NV63-SV

NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF32-SV
NF63-SV
NF63-SV(Fuji electric)
5
10
10
20
30
40
50

SC-0-3SC-0-3SC-0-3
SC-N1
SC-N2
SC-N2
SC-N2S・Applicable motor capacity is based on Sumitomo 200V (for 200V class)/400V (for 400V class), 60Hz,
4 pole IE3 motor.
・When exports to the U.S. or Canada, or compliance with UL, cUL standards is required, the wires andcircuit breakers specified in the UL, cUL standards must be used. For details, refer to "1.4 Compliance
to UL Standards".
・Device model name on above table shows example selection. The device selection should be based on
rated current, short circuit current capability and accordance to the local electrical legislation.
・For the wire diameter, refer to the "Main circuit terminal wiring AWG (mm2)" column in "5.3.2
Recommended Wire Diameters, Wiring Instruments, Crimp Terminal".
・The electrical endurance of the class AC-1 magnetic contactor is 500,000 times, but when using for
emergency stops during motor drive, the electrical endurance is 25 times.
・When using a MC for emergency stop during motor drive, select a MC of the class AC-3 rated current
depending on the inverter input current.
・When selecting oversize inverter capacity compared to motor rating, select magnetic contactor
according to the inverter capacity.

5-12
5-12

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
5.3.4 DC Wiring of DC reactor

・When using a DC reactor, connect it after removing the short circuit bar between [P1/+1] and [P/+]terminals.
・The power factor can be improved, and harmonic noises can be reduced by using DC reactor.
DC reactor
Short circuit bar
Short circuit bar

P1

P/+
P1/+1

P/+

Cautions for DC link choke connection terminals ([P1/+1], [P/+])

CautionProhibited

DO・When the short-circuit bar between [P1/+1] and [P/+] terminals is removed and the DC reactor is notconnected, power is not supplied to the main circuit part of the inverter and the inverter cannot be
operated.
・When the DC reactor is not used, do not remove the short-circuit bar between [P1/+1] and [P/+]terminals.
・The wiring length to DC reactor should be within 5m. Otherwise, it may not perform efficiently.
・When installing the DC reactor, please make sure that its heat does not affect the inverter.

5-13
5-13

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
5.3.5 Wiring of braking resistor and regenerative braking unit

・In HF-620, a braking resistor circuit is built-in as standard.
・By installing optional braking resistor or regenerative braking unit, the braking force can be improved
and the overvoltage can be suppressed, and it can be used even with large regenerative loads (loweringload or load applied at high-speed rotation).
・For details of the setting when connecting a braking resistor, refer to "9.9.5 Suppressing Overvoltage
with Braking Resistor". When connecting the regenerative braking unit, set "Dynamic brake activation
selection [bA-61]" to "Disable (00)".
Braking resistor (option)
Short circuit bar

N/- PR P1/+1

Short circuit bar

P/+

N/- PR P1/+1 P/+

Regenerative braking unit (option)

Short circuit bar

N/- PR P1/+1

P/+

Cautions for the brake resistor connection terminals ([P/+], [PR]) and regenerative brake unit connection terminals ([P/+], [N/-] )● Risk of damage to the inverter and burnout of the braking resistor!
・Do not connect items other than the braking resistor between [P/+] and [PR] terminals.
Failure・Do not short-circuit [P/+] and [PR] terminals.
Burnout
・Do not attach a resistor whose resistance is lower than the predefined value. Otherwise, the braking
resistor (DBTR) circuit or the regenerative braking unit may be damaged.
・Wiring to the braking resistor and regenerative braking unit (DBTR) should be within 5m, and the wires
Prohibitedshould be twisted.
・Arrange devices so that the heat generated by the braking resistor and regenerative braking unit does
not affect the inverter.
DO■Selection and wiring of regenerative braking resistor
Connectable minimum resistor

Power supply

Model

Applicablemotor capacity (kW)Regenerative braking
torque without resistor (%)

Resistor value (Ω)

Use ratio (%)

Single phase
200V class

HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2

0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2

50
50
50
50
20

100
100
50
50
35

10

Three phase
200V classThree phase
400V class

HF6202-A20

0.2

50

100

HF6202-A40

0.4

50

100

HF6202-A75

0.75

50

50

HF6202-1A5

1.5

50

50

HF6202-2A2

2.2

20

35

HF6202-3A7

3.7

20

35

HF6202-5A5

5.5

20

20

HF6202-7A5

7.5

20

17

HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2
HF6204-3A7
HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5

0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

50
50
50
20
20
20
20

180
180
180
100
100
70
70

5-14
5-14

10

10

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
5.4 Control circuit terminal
5.4.1 Configuration of control circuit terminal

・Control circuit terminal wires are shown in the figure below. Check the cautions, functions, andelectrical specifications of the control circuit terminal wiring in this section and pay sufficient attention
to wiring so that there is no incorrect wiring.
Note: For details when switching the sink/source logic and using external devices or external power supply, refer to"5.4.3 Switching Sink/Source Logic and Connecting External Power Supply/Programmable Controller".
External +24 power supply
input for control circuit(Reverse current prevention
diode is mandatory)
Thermistor

Option board connector

COM
P24 +24V

MC

PCS

MB
MA

Multi-function relay output
1c contact

COM

EDM switch
EDM

FR

UPF/EDM Note:5

RR 4.7kΩ
Multi-function
Input terminal
FR to RST

DRV

DFL

OM

DFM
AUT/PTC
ES/PLZ

Multi-function
output terminal(open collector)
Sink/source support

Note:1

Note:2
Note:3

RST/ B phase pulse/direction signal

Note:3.4

Multi-function input PLA
or
Pulse input (DC5 to 24V Max. 32kHz)(Common: [COM] terminal)

PLA/Aphase pulse/single phase pulse
Voltage

AMI

Analog output(0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA)
Initial setting: 4-20mA

Current

10V power supply(Max.10mA)
＋V
1kΩ

3
2
1

Analog input１(0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA)

10V

VRF

Voltage

Voltage
Current

AMV

Analog output(0 to 10V)or
Pulse output: FRQ(0/10V: Max. 32kHz)
Initial setting: 0 to10V

Pulse

COM

COM
IRF

Analog input 2(0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA)

Voltage
Current

Termination resistor switch (120Ω)SP

Safetyfunction STO
input 1/2
Common when using an
external power supply forsafety function

P24S
SN

ST1
ST2
CMS

COM

Modbus-RTU, EzCOM
communication port
(RS485/Max 115.2kbps)
Connect the signal ground of theexternal communication device to[COM] terminal.

Note: 1. When "Thermistor type selection [Cb-40]" is set to "PTC (01)", input terminal [AUT] becomes a terminal forconnecting an external thermistor (PTC).
2. When using "Pulse input Z [PLZ]" input terminal, assign it to input terminal [ES].
3. When "Pulse input target function selection [CA-90]" is set to anything other than "Disable (00)", input
terminal [RST] is automatically switched to the terminal for B-phase pulse input or direction signal, andinput terminal [PLA] is automatically switched to the terminal for A-phase pulse input or single-phase
pulse input. For details, refer to "9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback.
4. The electrical specifications of input terminal [PLA] differ from those of other input terminals [FR] to [RST].
For details, refer to "Functions and electrical specifications of control circuit terminals" in this section.
5. When the EDM switch on the board is turned ON, output terminal [UPF] switches to "STO state monitor[EDM]". When the switch is turned back to OFF, output terminal [UPF] becomes "Not use [no]".

5-15
5-15

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
Cautions for wiring control circuit terminals● Risk of electric shock and damage to the inverter!
Electric
Shock
Failure・[COM] terminal and [OM] terminal are common terminals for input and output signals.
They are isolated from each other. Do not short-circuit or ground these common terminals.
・Also, do not ground them through external devices. (Check the grounding condition of theexternal devices.)
・Do not short-circuit between [＋V] terminal (10V power supply) and [COM] terminal, [P24] terminal(＋24V power supply) and [COM] terminal.
Prohibited● Risk of damage to the inverter!
FailureDO・Switching the dip switch on the board while the power is on may cause a failure. Turn off the power,
check that Power LED [PWR] on the keypad is off, and then switch.
・Difference of the switch status and the actual input/output specifications may cause a failure. Be sure
to check that the characteristics of the input/output and the switch are correct.
・When connecting a relay to the intelligent output terminal, connect a diode for surge absorption inparallel with the coil. Surge-voltage at switching the relay may cause a failure of the internal circuit.
・By supplying external +24V to [P24] terminal, it is possible to operate only the control circuit andparameters can be read/written. When an external +24V power supply is connected, be sure toconnect a reverse current prevention diode. Also, be careful not to shut off the external +24V power
supply when writing parameters in this state.

● Risk of malfunction of the inverter!
Malfunction ・Separate the wiring to the control circuit terminal from the wiring of the main circuit line (power line)DOor relay control circuit. when it is unavoidable to do so, make them positioned at right angles to eachother.
・For wiring to the control circuit terminal, use twisted shield wires, and connect the shield films toeach common terminal.
・The wiring length to the control circuit terminal shall be within 20m. When the connecting wire
exceeds 20m, sufficient characteristics may not be obtained due to the effects of voltage drop.
When it is unavoidable to set the length to more than 20m, use an analog insulation signal
converter, and check that there is no problem with operation.
・When "Thermistor type selection [Cb-40]" is set to "PTC (01)", input terminal [AUT] becomes aterminal for connecting an external thermistor (PTC). In this case, the connection to the input
terminal [AUT] should be twisted to the individual common wire to terminal [COM] and separated
from the other common wires. In addition, the power supply to the thermistor should be separated
from the power line because of the weak current. The wire connected to the thermistor should bewithin 20m.
・For wiring to "External thermistor [PTC]", twist it together with [COM] terminal common wires
individually, and separate it from the other [COM] common wires. Since the power supply flowing
through the thermistor is a weak current, separate it from the power line. The wiring length to thethermistor should be within 20m.
・When connecting contacts to the control circuit terminals, use crossbar twin contacts, etc. that do
not easily cause contact failure even with a weak current/voltage.
・After wiring, pull the wire lightly to check that it is securely connected.

5-16
5-16

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
Arrangement of control circuit terminal

Safety function STO input
Logic power and power supply
supply andST2 CMS ST1
commonVoltage/pulse input
Multi-function/pulse input
Multi-function input
PLA RST ES AUT DFM DFL RR
SP

FR COM PCS P24 P24S

SN +V VRF IRF COM AMV AMI OM DRV UPF

Analog input
Power supply
Modbuscommunication

Analog output
Pulse output

Multi-function
output

MB MA MCMulti-function
relay output■Wiring example of control circuit terminal

Common of A, B and Z-phase pulse input and thermistor input is [COM] terminal.
External +24V power supply for control circuit(Reverse current prevention diode is mandatory)

A,B,Z phase pulse input

Thermistor

PLA
SP

RST

ES

SN

Modbus-RTU

AUT/PTC DFM
+V

VRF

3

2

Short-circuitbar(sink logic)

DFL

IRF

COM

RR

FR

AMV

COM
AMI

PCS

OM

Safety function STO
input

ST2

P24

CMS

ST1

P24S

DRV

UPF/EDM

RY

RY

MB MA MCＸ

1

Potentiometer for
frequency reference input
source (1kΩ)

Analog/Pulse Analog
outputoutputOpen collector output

Relay output

X ：Device such as lamps, relays, and PLCs
RY ：Relay

・When "Thermistor type selection [Cb-40]" is set to "PTC (01)", input terminal [AUT] becomes the terminal
for connecting an external thermistor (PTC). When a thermistor is used, the common is [COM] terminal
regardless of the sink/source logic.
・When "Pulse input target function selection [CA-90]" is set to anything other than "Disable (00)", input
terminal [RST] is automatically switched to the terminal for B-phase pulse input or direction signal, andinput terminal [PLA] is automatically switched to the terminal for A-phase pulse input or single-phase
pulse input. For details, refer to "9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback.
・When using "Pulse input Z [PLZ]" input terminal for home return function or orientation function, assign
it to input terminal [ES].
・Output terminal [UPF] switches to the "STO state monitor [EDM]" by turning on the EDM switch on theboard.

5-17
5-17

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
Functions and electrical specifications of control circuit terminals
Item

SymbolName

Description

Electrical characteristics

Analog input/output
COM

Common for
input signal＋V

Power supply forfrequency
reference

VRF

Analog input 1(Voltage/Current)

IRF

Analog input 2(Voltage/Current)

AUT
[PTC]

External
thermistor input

Power supply

Analog input

Thermistor
input

Common terminal for internal power supply,
input terminal [FR] to [PLA], analog
input/output and pulse input/output
terminals.
10V power supply. Used when inputting a
Maximum allowable current:
frequency reference by analog voltage input
10mA
with a potentiometer.
[VRF] and [IRF] terminals are terminal for
Analog voltage input:
analog input. Both terminals can be switched
Input impedance:
between voltage input and current input by
Approx. 10kΩparameter setting.
Allowable input voltage range:- Analog voltage input-0.3 to 12V
0 to 10V voltage input. It is adjusted at thefactory to reach the maximum frequency at
Analog current input:
9.8V input.
Input impedance:- Analog current input
Approx. 100Ω4 to 20mA current inputs. It is adjusted at the
Allowable input current range:
factory to reach the maximum frequency at
0 to 24mA
19.8mA input.
When "Thermistor type selection [Cb-40]" is set
to "PTC (01)", input terminal [AUT] becomes theterminal for connecting an external thermistor(PTC).
An external thermistor is connected between thisterminal and [COM] terminal to trip the inverter
due to a temperature error. (Trip at approx. 3kΩ
or more.)PTC type

Regardless of the sink or source logic, thecommon is [COM] terminal.
Digital input
COM

Common for
input signal

P24Power supply
terminal for input
signalPCS

Sink/Source logic
switchingterminal for input
signalPower supply

Contact input

FR
RR
DFL
DFM
AUT

Multi-function
input

Common terminal for internal power supply,
input terminal [FR] to [PLA], analog
input/output and pulse input/output
terminals.
+24V internal power supply terminal for contact
input. Common for source logic input.
By supplying external +24V to this terminal, it ispossible to operate only the control circuit andparameters can be read/written. When an external+24V power supply is connected, be sure toconnect a reverse current prevention diode.
Sink logic: short-circuit to [P24] terminal
Source logic: short-circuit to [COM] terminal
When driving the contact input with an
external power supply, remove the shortcircuit wire. For details, refer to "5.4.3
Switching Sink/Source Logic and Connecting
External Power Supply/ Programmable
Controller".
Each terminal function can be selected byparameter setting for each terminal.
Both sink and source logic are supported. For
details, refer to "5.4.3 Switching Sink/Source
Logic and Connecting External Power Supply/
Programmable Controller".

5-18
5-18

-

Maximum allowable current:
10mA-

Voltage between each terminal and[COM] terminal
ON voltage: min. 18V
OFF voltage: Max. 3V
Maximum allowable voltage: 27V
Load current: 5mA (at 24V)Internal resistance：4.7kΩ

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
Item

SymbolES

NameMulti-function
input or
Z-phase pulse
input
Multi-function
input

RST

or
B-phase pulse
input/Direction
signalContact input
orPulse input

Multi-function
input(Voltage input)
PLAor
A-phase pulse
input/Singlephase pulse input

Description
Assign "Pulse input Z [PLZ]" to input
terminal [ES] when inputting Z-phase
pulses in order to use the home return
function or orientation function.
When "Pulse input target function selection[CA-90]" is set to other than "Disable (00)", theinput terminal [RST] is a terminal for B-phase
pulse input or direction signal in single-phase
pulse input.
When [CA-90] is set to "Disable (00)", it
becomes an intelligent input terminal.
When "Pulse input target function
selection [CA-90]" is set to other than
"Disable (00)", the input terminal [PLA]
become 0/5 to 24V pulse input terminal.
When [CA-90] is set to "Disable (00)", it
becomes an intelligent input terminal.
In this case, use the source logic or provide anexternal power supply between this terminal
and the [COM] terminal.
(Note that the internal circuit differs fromthe input terminals [FR] through [RST].)Electrical characteristics

Input pulse:
min. 0.3Hz to Max. 32kHz[ES]/[RST] - [PLC] voltage:
ON voltage: min. 18V
OFF voltage: Max. 3V
Maximum allowable voltage: 27V
Load current: 8mA (at 24V)Internal resistance: 3.0kΩ

Input pulse:
min. 0.3Hz to Max. 32kHz[PLA] - [COM] voltage:
ON voltage: min. 4V
OFF voltage: Max. 1V
Maximum allowable voltage: 27VInternal resistance: 11kΩ

Digital output

Open collector
OutputRelay output

UPF
DRV

Multi-function
outputEach terminal function can be selectedwith the parameter setting of eachterminal. Both sink and source logic aresupported.
For details, refer to "5.4.3 Switching
Sink/Source Logic and Connecting
External Power Supply/Programmable
Controller".

OM

Common for
Multi-function
outputCommon terminal for output terminal[UPF] and [DRV].

Maximum allowable current:
100mA

1c contact output.
Output terminal function can be selected byparameter setting.
(The factory default setting is alarm output.)

Maximum contact capacity[MA] - [MC]:AC250V 2A (Resistance)
0.2A (Inductive load)
DC30V 3A (Resistance)
0.6A (Inductive load)[MB] - [MC]:AC250V 1A (Resistance)
0.2A (Inductive load)
DC30V 1A (Resistance)
0.2A (Inductive load)
Minimum contact capacity
AC100V, 10mA, DC5V, 100mA

MC
MA
MB

Multi-function
relay output■Logic for relay output operation
Power ON
CC-17

NormalAlarm

01 (normally close)Power OFF00 (normally open)
Initial setting

-

MC

MC

MB

MB

MC

MA

MA

MB

MC

MC

MA

MB

MB

MA

MA

5-19
5-19

Open collector output
Between each terminal and [OM]Max. allowable voltage: 27V
Max. allowable current: 50mA
Voltage drop when turned on: 4Vor lessWire Connection

Chapter 5
Item

SymbolName

AMI

Analog output(Voltage/Current)

AMV

Analog voltage
outputorPulse output

Monitor output

Description

Electrical characteristics

Terminal [AMI] can be switched between
Analog voltage output:
analog voltage output and analog current
Maximum allowable current: 2mA
output by parameter setting.
Output voltage accuracy: ±10%
(Ambient temp.: 25℃±10℃)- Analog voltage output
Analogcurrent output:
Output any monitor as a 0 to 10V
Allowableload impedance:
voltage signal.
250Ω or less- Analog current output
Output voltage accuracy: ±20%Output any monitor as a 4 to 20mA
(Ambient temp.: 25℃±10℃)
current signal.
Terminal [AMV] can be switched between
analog voltage output and pulse output Analog voltage output:by parameter setting.
Maximum allowable current: 2mA
Output voltage accuracy: ±10%
- Analog voltage output(Ambient temp.: 25℃±10℃)
Output any monitor as a 0 to 10V
voltage signal.
Pulse output:- Pulse output
Maximum allowable current: 2mA
Output any monitor as a 0/10V
Maximum output frequency: 32kHz
pulse signal or PWM signal.

Communication
Serialcommunication

SP
SN

Modbuscommunication

RS485 ports for Modbus-RTU/ EzCOM.
To connect the signal ground of theexternal control device, use [COM]terminal.

P24S+24V output+24V power supply dedicated for[ST1]/[ST2] input.

CMS

Common for+24V output

Common terminal for [P24S].

Maximum baud rate: 115.2kbps
Built-in termination resistor:120Ω (Switched by dip switch)
SP: RS485 differential (+) signal
SN: RS485 differential (-) signal
Maximum output current: 100mA

Safety function

Safety function

ST1
ST2

UPF
[EDM]

STO input 1
STO input 2

Input terminal for STO signal.
For details, refer to "14.1 Using the
Safety Function STO (Safe Torque Off)".

STO statemonitor

When EDM switch is turned ON, output
terminal [UPF] becomes "STO statemonitor output [EDM]".
For details, refer to "14.1 Using the
Safety Function STO (Safe Torque Off)".

5-20
5-20

Between [ST1]/[ST2] and [CMS]
ON voltage: Min. 15V
OFF voltage: Max. 5V
Max. allowable voltage: 27V
Load current: 5.8mA (at 27V)
Internal resistance: 4.7kΩ
Open collector output
Between [EDM] and [CM2]Max. allowable voltage: 27V
Max. allowable current: 50mA
Voltage drop when turned on:
4V or less

Wire Connection

Chapter 55.4.2 Recommended wire diameter and wiring method for control circuit terminals
・The control circuit terminal block of HF-620 is a spring clamp type terminal.
・For the convenience of wiring and improvement of connection reliability, it is recommended to use
ferrule terminals with the following specifications.
・When mounting the option board, use ferrules without a sleeve and wire it so that they do not hit theoption case.

Recommended wire diameter

Solid wire
mm2 (AWG)

Applicable wire
Stranded wire
mm2 (AWG)

Ferrule terminal
mm2 (AWG)

0.2 to 1.5(AWG 24 to 16)

0.2 to 1.0(AWG 24 to 17)

0.25 to 0.75
(AWG 24 to 18)

I te mControl terminal
Relay output terminal

8mm

Stripped length for solid wire andstranded wire: approx. 8 mm

Recommended terminal■Ferrule with sleeve
Wire size
mm2 (AWG)

Ferrulemodel Note

0.25 (24)0.34 (22)0.5 (20)0.75 (18)AI 0,25-8YE
AI 0,34-8TQ
AI 0,5-8WH
AI 0,75-8GY

L1 [mm]

L2 [mm]φd [mm]φD [mm]

8

12.5

0.8

2.0

8
8

14
14

1.1
1.3

2.5
2.8

■Ferrule without sleeve
Wire size
mm2 (AWG)

Ferrulemodel Note

L1 [mm]

L2 [mm]φd [mm]φD [mm]0.5 (20)

A 0,5-8

7.3

8

1.0

2.1

0.75 (18)A 0,5-8

7.3

8

1.2

2.3

Note: Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG Crimping tool: CRIMPFOX 6

Method of wiring/detaching wires(1) Push the orange part on the control terminal with a slotted screwdriver (with a wide of 2.5mm or less).
(Insertion hole will open)(2) Plug in the wire or ferrule terminal to the wire insertion hole (round hole) while pressing the orange
part with a slotted screwdriver.
(3) The wire is fixed to the circuit when release the screwdriver.

2.5mm

Push the orange part with aslotted screwdriver.

Insert the wire

The wire is fixed to thecircuit when release theslotted screwdriver.

・When pulling out the wire, press the orange part with a slotted screwdriver.

5-21
5-21

Wire Connection

Chapter 5

5.4.3 Switching sink/source logic and connecting external power supply/programmablecontroller
Method of switching sink/source logic for intelligent input terminals
・To switch the logic of the input terminals to source logic, remove the short-circuit bar between [P24]and [PCS] terminal on the control circuit terminal and connect it between [PCS] and [COM] terminal.
(The factory default of the logic depends on the destination.)・Refer to the figure below for wiring when using an external power supply and wiring with external
devices such as programmable controllers.
Sink logic
RR

FRCOM PCS

Source logic
P24

RR

FR

COM PCS

Switching the wiringof short-circuit bar

Short-circuit
bar

P24

Short-circuit
bar(Initial setting)Connecting the intelligent input terminals to a programmable controller■Sink logic
When using an external power supply(Remove the short-circuit bar from the control terminal.)

When using the inverter's internal power supply

P24

S
Short
circuit bar

+24V

S

PCS

PCS

COM

COM

FR

FR
RR

RR
COM

+24V

COM

Output module

+24V

P24

Inverter

Output module

Inverter■Source logic
When using an external power supply(Remove the short-circuit bar from the control terminal.)

When using the inverter's internal power supply

COM

COM

P24
Short
circuit
bar

+24V

PCS
COM

+24V

PCS
COM

FR

FR

RR

RR
S

S

Output module

P24

Inverter

Output module

5-22
5-22

Inverter+24VWire Connection

Chapter 5■No-voltage switch

When using an external power supply(Remove the short-circuit bar from the control terminal.)

When using the inverter's internal power supply

Short
circuit
bar

P24
PCS

P24

P24
DC24V

Short
circuit
bar

COM

PCS

+24V

+24V

PCS

COM

COM

FR

FR

RR

RR

RR

InverterInverterInverterFR+24V

Connecting the intelligent output terminals to a programmable controller
Sink logic

Source logic
OM

UPF

+24V
DRV

COM

UPF
COM
OM

Inverter

DRV

+24V

Inverter

Input module

5-23
5-23

Input module

Wire Connection

Chapter 5
Cautions when using multiple inverters

・When a common input (switch, etc.) is used for multiple inverters and the timing of power-on isdifferent, the current may run around as shown in the figure below, and it may be recognized as ON
even if the input is OFF. In that case, be sure to insert a diode (rated 50V/0.1A) in the positions shownin the figure to prevent the sneak current.
■Sink logic
Power ON

Power ON
Short
circuit
bar

P24

P24

PCS

PCS

COM

COM
ON

ON
FR

FR

Diode added

ShortPower OFFcircuit
bar
P24

P24

PCS

PCS

COM

COM

FR

FR

Power OFF

Switch OFF

Switch OFF

Diodes are installed instead of the shortcircuit wires to prevent the sneak current.

When there is no diode, the current willflow round and the input will turn on eventhough the switch is off.

■Source logic
Power ON

Short
circuitbar

Power ON

P24

P24

PCS

PCS
COM

COM

ON

FR

ON
FR

Diode added

Power OFF

Short
circuitbar

Power OFF

P24

P24

PCS

PCS

COM

COM

FR

FR

Switch OFF

When there is no diode, the current willflow round and the input will turn on eventhough the switch is off.

Switch OFF

Diodes are installed instead of the shortcircuit wires to prevent the sneak current.

5-24
5-24

Chapter 6

Operation check/Residual

Chapter 6 Operation check/Residual

6This chapter describes residual risks during operation and items to be checked.
The customer who uses the product should appropriately conduct risk assessment before trial run andusing the product, and properly protect their personnel and systems.
Although this chapter describes all the possible measures to make sure, it does not cover all the risks inyour systems. Please note that we will bear no responsibility for damages resulting from causes describedin this chapter. Be sure to conduct risk assessment of the system equipped with this product.
Also carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding chapters and pay
attention to safety.

6.1 Overview of residual risk checklist
・The residual risk checklist is classified according to the following two definitions based on "Chapter 1
Safety Instructions/Risks".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations, which have a highDANGER possibility of resulting in serious personal injury or death and may result in major
physical loss or damage.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous situations, which may result
CAUTION in moderate or slight personal injury or damage and may result in only physical loss
or damage.
・Even the content described as "CAUTION" may lead to serious danger depending on the situation.
They all contain important information. Be sure to follow these instructions.
・Other notes are also described with "". Pay attention to this information and be sure to observe it.

Check points for residual risk
・Please check for residual risks before turning on the power supply upon completion of the installation.

(C) Control circuit
terminal(A) Main circuit terminal(B) Cooling fan(D) Motor and wiring to the motor
6-1
6-1

Chapter 6

Operation check/Residual

6.2 Residual risk checklist
No.

Process

Work

Target Residual
section risk

Damage caused by careless
CAUTION
carrying.

1

Installation Installation

2

Reduction of component life
due to use in a location
Installation Installation General CAUTION exposed to direct sunlight or ata temperature outside of thespecification range.

3

Short-circuit failure due to use
in a location with humidity or
Installation Installation General CAUTION
condensation outside of thespecification range.

4

Installation Installation

5

6

7

8

9

(B)

Details of hazard(B)

DANGER

The cooling fin that is heated
to exceed 150°C ignites a
flammable wall.

Component failure due toInstallation Installation General CAUTION ingress of dust, corrosive gas,or other substances.
Reduction of a component life
due to degradation of cooling
Installation Installation General CAUTION
capability by horizontal
installation.
When the fin of the inverter isinstalled outside of cabinet,
Installation Installation General CAUTION
the cooling fan fails due todroplet, oil mist, etc.
The arc discharge due toInstallationscrews loosened by vibration
DANGER(A)
Maintenance Wiringand ignites the internal
components.
Installation
Maintenance

WiringUse
Wiring
10 Maintenance Inspection

Wiring
Use
11
Maintenance Inspection

The arc discharge due toscrews loosened by vibration
General DANGER
and ignites the flammablematerials.
When the cover is removed,
electric shock is caused in ahigh-voltage section.

(A)

DANGER(C)

When the operator removes
the cover, electric shock is
DANGER
caused when a tool ouches ahigh-voltage section.

6-2
6-2

Protection measures
Do not drop the product.
Do not carry the inverter in amanner that applies force tothe cover or the keypad.
Ensure that the ambient
temperature is within thestandard specification range
in the whole year by meansof cooling and ventilation.
Ensure that the ambient
temperature is within thestandard specification range
in the whole year by meansof cooling and ventilation.
Otherwise, install the
product in a location freefrom condensation.

✓

□

□

□

Install the inverter on an
inflammable metal wall.

□

Install the inverter inside a
totally enclosed panel.

□

Install the inverter vertically.

□

When the fin of the inverter isinstalled outside of cabinet,
install it in a location freefrom droplet, oil mist, etc.

□

Check screws areappropriately tightened on aregular basis.

□

Check screws areappropriately tightened on aregular basis. Do not place
flammable materials aroundthe installed inverter.
Do not remove the coverwhen power is supplied.
After power is turned off, wait
10 minutes or more to
perform working.
Do not remove the coverwhen power is supplied.
After power is turned off, wait
10 minutes or more to
perform working.

□

□

□

Chapter 6
No.

Process

Operation check/Residual
Work

Target Residual
section risk

12

Installation

Wiring(D)

DANGER

13

Installation

Wiring(D)

DANGER

14

Installation

Wiring15

WiringUse
Maintenance Inspection(A)

DANGER(D)

DANGER

Details of hazard

Protection measures✓

Due to long wiring length, theinsulation of the motor
degraded by surge(400V classmotor), which eventually burns
the motor.
By connecting a motor to thedifferent voltage class inverter,
insulation of the motor
degraded, which eventuallyburns the motor.
Due to unstable output caused
by imbalance of power supply
voltage, undervoltage, extreme
voltage drop or aging of motor,
the motor burns, andeventually the inverter fails.
The short circuit failure caused
by degradation of motor
insulation, cracking of aged
wires or other causes will
eventually cause the inverter
fails.

If the wiring length exceeds
20 m, shorten the motor
wiring length. Or install theoptional noise filter andoutput-side AC reactor.

□

Match the voltage class of
the inverter and the motor.

□

Check the receiving voltage
of inverter, power receiving
method, and power supply
capacity are appropriate.

□

Check there is no cracking ofwires and the screws are notlost by inspection.

□

Set appropriate values forparameters related to output
to the motor, such asparameters described in"Chapter 8 Mandatory
Setting for Motor Drive andTest Run" (load type, basefrequency, motor rated
voltage, motor constants,
and electronic thermal),control method, torqueboost ([AA121], [Hb140] to[Hb142], [HC101] to [HC102]),and DC braking setting([AF101] to [AF109]).

□

To restart the motor after
stopping it by a function,
define it in the system.

□

16

Installation
Use

Setting(D)

By performing inappropriate
parameter settings, highDANGER
current flows in the motor,
causing it to burn.

17

Use

Operation(D)

DANGER

The stopped motor
automatically starts running.

18

GeneralDamage and injury caused byGeneral General DANGER
hidden risks.

19

GeneralDamage and injury caused byGeneral General DANGER failure to obtain additional
information concerning risks.

Conduct risk assessment on
the system, and check thatthe fail-safe function isincorporated into the system.
Obtain the latest version ofUser's Guide so thatnecessary information can bechecked. Communicate
information to the end user
as necessary.

Note: Installation, wiring and setting work need to be performed by specialized technicians.

6-3
6-3

□

□

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7

Chapter 7 Using the Control Panel

This chapter describes the details of the operation panel and related functions of the inverter.
When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters and pay attention to safety.

7.1 Keypad of use
7.1.1 Part names and descriptions
・The names and descriptions of each part of the operation panel are shown below.
LED at the top of the display isshown below.

(9)Run command
Indicator LED (green)(1)Power indicator [PWR] (Green)(2)Current monitor lamp [A] (green)(3)Frequency monitor [Hz] (Green)(4)Program lamp [PRG] (Green)(5)Alarm lamp [AL] (Red)(6)Running lamp [RUN] (Green)(7)Minus lamp [-] (Red)(10)RUN key(11)STOP/RESET key(12)Esc key(13)SET key (center)(8)Displays (5-digit LED)
(14)Dial
Up (clockwise)
Down (counterclockwise)(15)RJ45 connector(16)USB connector

Name

Description(1) Power Indicator [PWR] (Green)(2) Current monitor lamp [A] (Green)(3) Frequency monitor lamp [Hz] (Green)

Lights up (green) while the inverter is supplying power.
Lights (green) when the data of the display unit is current.
Lights up (green) when the data in the display unit is frequency.
Lit (green) when the display shows changeable data (set value).
Flashes if the setting value is inconsistent. 『15.3 See "Troubleshooting theWarning Function".
Lights up (red) when the inverter trips. Refer to "Chapter 15 Troubleshooting" formore information on tripping actions.
Lights up (green) when the inverter is running.
(This lamp lights in OR of [With operation command] and [Inverter output inprogress]. This lamp also lights during deceleration after operation command OFF
or when an operation command is input at 0 Hz of the set frequency.)
Lights up (red) when the display data is negative.
Displays data (red) such as various parameters and frequency setting values.
Lit (green) when the operation command destination is "Operation panel".
(RUN button on the control panel is enabled.)
Even if the operation command destination is RUN key on the operation panel, thislamp blinks when RUN key is pressed while operation is disabled due to somefunction. For details, refer to section 10.3.7, Checking Inverter Warning Conditions.
Run the inverter. However, it is effective when the operation command destinationis "operation panel". Operation direction is set by "RUN key Operation direction
selection [AA-12]".

(4) Program lamp [PRG] (green)(5) Alarm lamp [AL] (Red)(6) Running lamp [RUN] (Green)(7) Minus lamp [ - ] (Red)(8) Displays (5-digit LED)

(9) Run command lamp (Green)(10) RUN key

7-1
7-1

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

Name

Description
Decelerates and stops the inverter. Use the "STOP key selection [AA-13]" to enable/disable the(11) STOP/RESET key(12) Esc key(13) SET key(14) Dial(15) RJ45 Connector(16) USB connector

operation stopping function.
Resets (recovers from trip state) when the inverter is tripping.
In case of parameter display, it moves to the next parameter group and displays the parameter set at theend of each group. Even after the power is turned off, the memory of the last set parameter ismaintained.
When displaying data, cancel setting and return to parameter display.
Regardless of the screen, press and hold (about 3 seconds) to display the data (output frequency) of"output frequency monitor [dA-01]".
When a remote operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards) is connected, pressing and holding Esc key for 1
second enables the remote operator. Press and hold Esc key again to return to the remote operator.
When displaying parameters, move to data display.
When displaying the data, the setting is determined and stored, and the display returns to the parameter
display. You can also memorize the last parameter that you pressed SET and view that parameter when
the power is turned on. For details, refer to "7.2.6 Setting Initial Screen of Operation Panel".
For each parameter group, the last parameter set is stored and becomes the first parameter displayedwhen Esc key is used to move the parameter group.
Change the parameter or increase/decrease the set data. Rotate clockwise to increase or rotate
counterclockwise to decrease.
The degree of increase/decrease and carry of parameters and setting data with respect to the speed ofturning dial can be set with "Dial sensitivity [UA-76]" and "Dial carry sensitivity [UA-77]".
Connector for optional remote operator connection (dedicated for RS-422). When a remote operator isconnected, the keys on the main unit do not work. The data to be displayed on the (8) display unit at thistime is set in the main unit display [UA-95] when the operator is connected.
Caution: The remote operator should be connected or disconnected with the power supply
disconnected.
This is a connector (USB 2.0 Micro-B connector) for connecting a personal computer.
Used to connect to PC software.

7-2
7-2

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.1.2 Key Operation System
How to display and change data using the operation panel
In case of parameter display, move to data display

Parameter display
d parameter
group

Data display

SET

dA-01
SET

Esc

dA-02

When SET button is used to return to the parameter display, the parameter at thattime is memorized and becomes the first display code when the parameter groupis moved. (see Supplement below)

dA-81

When the parameter is displayed, the unit moves to the following parameter byrotating dial. For the first or last parameter in a parameter group, move to the next
parameter group.

db-01

dE-50

Press Esc while a parameter is displayed to move to the next parameter group.
The parameter group changes in the following order:d→F→A→b→C→H→o→P→U→d→... (see Supplement 1 below)

Esc
Parameter display
F parametergroup

Note: Since the d parameter group is amonitor function, data cannot be
0.0changed. However, some parameters
Output frequency monitor can be changed depending on thesettings. For details, see section
10.1.1 Monitor the output frequency.

Memory

SET

50.00

FA-01
SET

SET
MemoryEscMain speed reference setting

In the case of data display of F parameter group, since the change is reflected
immediately, even if the data is changed, it does not blink display.
SET key: The value is stored in the memory. The display returns to the parameter
display.
Esc: Returns to the key display without storing the value in the memory.
(When the power is turned on again, the value before the change is restored.)Esc
Parameter display
A parameter
group

Esc
50.01

FA-02

FA-36

Data display

Data display

SET

AA100

00
Esc

Esc

AA102
MemorySET

01
Main speed input source selection

AA224
For data display other than d and F parameter groups, all digits will blink whendata is changed. While blinking, changes are not reflected.
SET key: The value is stored in the memory. The display returns to the parameter
display.
Esc: Returns to the data displayed prior to the change without storing the value in thememory.

Ab-01

AJ-19
Esc
Parameter display
b parameter
group

bA101

Supplement :When changing the parameter group, the parameters set last in each parametergroup are displayed in turn.
For example, if you press SET button when displaying [dA-02], [FA-12], [Ab-03], or[bb101], the first parameter displayed when you select the d, F, A, or b parametergroup will be [dA-02], [FA-12], [Ab-03], or [bb101].

7-3
7-3

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.1.3 Example of parameter setting key operation
Operation example when changing the parameter setting value
・The following shows an operation example in which the indication when the power is turned ON ischanged from "0.00" (factory-default status) in the data section of "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]"
to "[FR]/[RR] terminal (00)" from "RUN key (02)" on the operation panel for "Operation command
selection [AA111]".
② Press Esc or SET to view theparameters.
Output frequency
monitorSET

Esc① When the power is turned ON, "Output frequency
monitor [dA-01]" is displayed. (Factory setting)

0. 0 0

dA-0 1SET

Esc③ Press Esc to select the A parameter group.
For details, refer to "7.1.2 Key Operation System".

A A101④ Turn the dial. Set the parameter to [AA111].

SET
RUN command
input source
selection, 1st-motor⑤ Press SET to move to the data view.

A A111

02

Before changing data, all digits are lit.

⑥ Turn dial knob to set the dials to 00.
MemorySET

Esc

00⑦ Pressing SET button while all digits areblinking enables to determine and store
the setting.
(Pressing Esc button with all digits
blinking cancels the change and returns
to the present setpoint indication.)

Reference:

When changed, all digits will blink.
Changes have not yet been taken into accountduring blinking.
Note: The F parameter group does not blink whenchanged because the changed data isreflected in real time.

・Pressing and holding Esc button (about 3 seconds) enables you to jump to the display of the output frequency
monitor [dA-01].
・If there are parameters that cannot be displayed or changed, "Display selection [UA-10]" or "Soft lock selection[UA-16]" may be set. For details, refer to "7.2 Functions Related to Operation Panel".

■D
Display when changing setting data
・When the setting is changed and SET button is pressed, parameters and data are alternately displayed
for a short time so that it can be confirmed that the data has been changed, and then the display
returns to the parameter display.
Changeto 50.00

SET

Hb104

000 0

MemorySET

50. 00

Esc

7-4
7-4

Displayed alternately at short intervals

Hb104

50 . 0 0Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

Changing parameters/data for each digit (Individual input mode)・Parameter selection and data change can also be made in the individual input mode, in which the value
is increased or decreased by one digit after specifying the digit to be increased or decreased. It iseffective for changing setting value with large number of digits etc.
① Press and hold SET button (for 3 seconds or longer) to enter the individual entry mode.
The most significant digit starts flashing. (Press and hold SET again to exit Individual
Entry mode.)② In the individual entry mode, SET key is used to move the edited digit to the right, Esc
key to move the edited digit to the left, and dial is used to rotate the left or right todecrease/increase the value. (In the case of parameter groups (the most significant digit
when parameters are displayed), the values will change from d⇔F⇔A⇔b⇔C⇔•••••etc.)

FA-01
SET

Esc

Press
and hold③ Pressing SET at the lowest digit determines the parameter and switches to the data
editing window. However, if a parameter does not exist, the leftmost digit will return toblinking.
Note: If Esc key is pressed at the most significant digit, the individual entry mode isexited.

SET

SET

FA-01

FA-01

FA-01

Fb-01

SET

FA-01

FA-01

Esc

Esc

AA-01

SET

Esc

Esc

FA111

FA-02

FA-11

SET

50. 00SET
Press
and hold

Esc

SET

Esc

150. 00⑤ Pressing SET at the least significant digit causes all digits toblink. If you press SET in this state, the changes are stored.
Press Esc to cancel the change.

SET

50. 00050. 00④ As in ① above, key and hold SET to enter the individual input
mode. (3 seconds or more) As in ②, use SET/Esc keys tomove the edited digits and dial buttons to increase or
decrease the value.

50. 00Esc

60. 00

SET

SET

SET

50. 0050. 00
Esc

Esc

51. 0050.10

50. 01

MemorySET

50. 00

FA-01
Esc

Cancel・Individual input mode is valid for parameter display and when the setting range is numeric. It is invalid
when the setting range is a number selection such as 01, 02, 03...

7-5
7-5

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel■D
Digit movement display mode
・The display section of the main unit operation panel basically displays the upper five digits at all times,
but it is possible to check the hidden part temporarily by carrying out the following operation.
d A-3 2
Esc

SET

SET

SET

SET

7 654 3654 3 2SET

Esc

The display returns
to the initial display
after the lapse of time.

SET

5432 1
Esc

4321
Esc
Displaying the leastsignificant digit

7654 3
Esc

SET

Esc

76 54

Digit movement display mode
Press SET button to decrease the display
area by one digit.
Press Esc to move the display area by one
digit.

Displaying the most significant digit

・You can adjust the amount of increase or decrease when you turn dial using the following parameters.
Adjust the value if necessary.
Contents

Data

Initialvalue

Dial sensitivity

Sets the amount of increase or decrease by dialing.
The larger this setting is, the more dialing rotations are required toincrease or decrease the setting.

1 to 24

1

Dial carry sensitivity

Sets the degree of carry (carry down) performed when increasing or
decreasing with the dial. The smaller this setting is, the easier it is tocarry (carry down).

1 to 100

20

Code

Item

UA-76

UA-77

7-6
7-6

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.2 Functions related to operation panel
7.2.1 Limit parameter display
・Parameters displayed on the control panel can be partially hidden by setting "Display selection [UA-10]".
Refer to the table in this section for the parameters that are displayed at each setting.
・When the 2nd control function is not used, the number of displays can be reduced by setting "2nd setting
parameter display selection [UA-21]" to "Hide (00)". Refer to "9.7.13 Switching between Two Motors" forthe 2nd control function and the target parameter.
・When the communication option is not used, the number of displays can be reduced by setting "Optionalparameter display selection [UA-22]" to "Hide (00)". For details of communication options, see "Chapter 13
Communication Option".
・[UA-10] settings can also be password-protected. For details, see "7.2.5 Protecting data with password".
Code

Item

UA-10

Display restriction selection

UA-21

2nd-motor parameter display
selection

UA-22

Option parametersdisplay selection

UA-31 toUA-62

User-parameter 1
selection toUser-parameter 32 selection

Contents

Data

All indications (initial value)
Function-specific display
User Settings
Data comparison display
Monitor only
Hide the second setting parameter [** 2].
The second setting parameter [** 2] is displayed.
Hide the optional parameter [o ****].
The optional parameter [o ****] is displayed.
No registration
Register the parameter to be displayed. Up to 32
parameters can be registered.

00
01
02
03
04
00
01
00
01
no
UA-31 to UA-62
Other parameters

Initial
value

00

00
00
no

■Detailed information on the settings of "View selection [UA-10]"
Setting for"View selection [UA-10]"
Full display (00)Function-specific display (01)User Settings (02)Details
Displays all parameters.
Use this when you want to hide the parameters of a function that you are not using to reduce
its display. If a specific function is not selected, the parameters related to that function are
hidden. For more information on display conditions, refer to "Conditions and Displayed
Parameters of Function Individual Display ([UA-10]=01)" in this section.
Use this when you want to display only the parameters that are set by the user.
Up to 32 parameters can be registered in "User parameters 1 to 32 ([UA-31] to [UA-62]". When
"User setting (02)" is set after registration, only the parameters registered in [UA-31] to [UA-62],"Output frequency monitor [dA-01]", "Main speed command setting (monitor) [FA-01]", "Display
selection (UA-10) password [UA-01]" and "Display selection [UA-10]" are displayed.
The user parameter can also be set to automatically store the changed parameter. For details,
refer to "7.2.7 Automatic Registration of Changed Parameter History".

Data comparison display (03)This is used when you want to know the changed parameter from the factory setting, etc.
All monitor displays [d ****] and [F****], the display selection (UA-10) password [UA-01], and thedisplay selection [UA-10] are displayed at all times.

Monitor only (04)

Only the monitor displays [d ****] and [F****], the display selection (UA-10) password [UA-01],
and the display selection [UA-10] are displayed.

7-7
7-7

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel■Conditions and parameters displayed for Individual function display ([UA-10]=01)
・”in the table below indicates the parameters subject to the second setting function. If * is 1, it will be
the first setting, and if * is 2, it will be the second setting.
IM control parameter
Display conditions: [AA121]≦10 or [AA221]≦10SM(PMM) control parameter
Display conditions: [AA121]>10 or [AA221]>10

Code

Item

Code

Hb*02

* IM Motor Capacity Selection

Hd*02* SM(PMM) Motor Capacity Selection

Hb*03*No. of IM motor poles

Hd*03* SM(PMM) Motor pole selection

Hb*04

Base frequency, *IMst-motor

Hd*04* SM(PMM) Base frequency

Hb*05

Maximum frequency, *IMst-motor

Hd*05* SM(PMM) Maximum frequency

Hb*06

IM Motor Rated Voltage

Hd*06* SM(PMM) Rated Motor Voltage

Hb*08

IM Motor Rated Current

Hd*08* SM(PMM) Rated motor current

Hb*10

IM Motor Constant R1

Hd*10* SM(PMM) Motor parameter R

Hb*12

IM Motor Constant R2

Hd*12* SM(PMM) Motor constant Ld

Hb*14

IM motor parameter L

Hd*14* SM(PMM) Motor constant Lq

Hb*16

IM Motor Constant I0

Hd*16* SM(PMM) Motor constant Ke

Hb*18

IM motor constant J

Hd*18* SM(PMM) Motor constant J

Hb*30

Minimum frequency adjustment, *st-motor

Hd*30* SM(PMM) Minimum frequency (switching)

Hb*31

Reduced voltage start time setting, *st-motor

Hd*31*S Sync. Motor no-Load current

Hb*40

Manual torque boost operation mode selection, *stmotor

Hd*32* SM(PMM) Start mode selection

Hb*41

Manual torque boost value, *-motor

Hd*33* SM(PMM) Number of times of initial-position estimation 0V
wait

Hb*42

Manual torque boost peak speed, *-motor

Hd*34*S Sync. Motor IMPE detect wait number

Hb*45

Eco drive enable, *st-motor

Hd*35*S Sync. Motor IMPE detect number

Hb*46

Eco drive response adjustment, *st-motor

Hd*36*S Sync. Motor IMPE voltage gain

Hb*50

Free-V/f frequency *setting, 1-motor

Hd*37* SM(PMM) Initial position estimation magnetic pole position
offset

Hb*51

Free-V/f voltage *setting, 1-motor

Note: This parameter is SM(PMM) motor related function.

Hb*52

Free-V/f frequency *setting, 2-motor

Hb*53

Free-V/f voltage *setting, 2-motor

Hb*54

Free-V/f frequency *setting, 3-motor

Hb*55

Free-V/f voltage *setting, 3-motor

Position control parameter
Display conditions: [AA123]≠00 or [AA223]≠00

Hb*56

Free-V/f frequency *setting, 4-motor

Code

Hb*60

Free-V/f frequency *setting, 6-motor

AE-04

Positioning completed range setting

Hb*61

Free-V/f voltage *setting, 6-motor

AE-05

Positioning completed delay time setting

Hb*62

Free-V/f frequency *setting, 7-motor

Hb*63

Free-V/f voltage *setting, 7-motor

Hb*70

Slip compensation P-gain with encoder, *nd-motor

Orientation function
Display conditions: [AA123]=01 or [AA223]=01

Hb*71

I compensation P-gain with encoder, 2nd-motor

Code

Hb*80

Output voltage gain, *-motor

AE-10

Stop position selection of home search function

AE-11

Stop position of home search function

AE-12

Speed reference of home search function

AE-13

Direction of home search function

HC*01
HC*02

Automatic torque boost voltage compensation gain, *stmotor
Automatic torque boost slip compensation gain, *stmotor

HC*11*Start-up boost (SLV(IM)/CLV(IM))

HC*13

Secondary Resistance Correction Yes/No Selection

HC*14

Direction reversal protection, *st-motor

HC*20

Torque current reference filter time constant, *st-motor

HC*21

Speed feedforward compensation gain, *st-motor

HC*37

Flux settling level, *st-motor

HC*41* threshold, 1-motor

HC*42* threshold 2, -motor

7-8
7-8

Item

Item

Item

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

Absolute position control function
Display conditions: [AA123]>01 or [AA223]>01
Code

Item

Acceleration/Deceleration function
Display conditions: AC-02=01
Code

Item

AE-20 toPosition reference 0 to 15
AE-50

AC-30
AC-32

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 1

AE-52

Position control range (forward)

AC-34

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 2

AE-54

Position control range (reverse)

AC-36

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 2

AE-56

Position control mode selection

AC-38

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 3

AE-60

Teach-in function target selection

AC-40

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 3

AE-61

Save current position at power off

AC-42

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 4

AE-62

Pre-set position data

AC-44

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 4

AE-64

Deceleration stop distance calculation gain

AC-46

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 5

AE-65

Deceleration stop distance calculation bias

AC-48

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 5

AE-70

Homing function selection

AC-50

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 6

AE-71

Homing direction selection

AC-52

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 6

AE-72

Low-speed homing speed setting

AC-54

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 7

AE-73

High-speed homing speed

AC-56

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 7

AC-58

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 8Internal DC braking function
Display conditions: AF*01=01, 02

AC-60

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 8

AC-62

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 9

Code

AC-64

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 9

Item

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 1

AF*03

DC braking frequency, *st-motor

AC-66

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 10

AF*04

DC braking delay time, *st-motor

AC-68

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 10

AF*05

DC braking force setting, *st-motor

AC-70

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 11

AF*06

DC braking active time at stop, *st-motor

AC-72

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 11

AF*07

DC braking operation method selection, *st-motor

AC-74

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 12

AF*08

DC braking force at start, *st-motor

AC-76

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 12

AF*09

DC braking active time at start, *st-motor

AC-78

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 13

AC-80

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 13

AC-82

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 14

Acceleration/deceleration function
Display conditions: AC-02=00

AC-84

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 14

AC-86

Acceleration time for Multi-speed 15

Code

AC-88

Deceleration time for Multi-speed 15

Item

AC*15

Acceleration/deceleration change trigger, * -motor

AC*16

Accel1 to Accel2 frequency transition point, [#2]-motor

AC*17

Decel1 to Decel2 frequency transition point, [#2]motor

Brake control (forward/reverse common setting)
Display conditions: AF*30=01, 02

AC*20

Acceleration time 1, *-motor

Code

AC*22

Deceleration time 1, *-motor

AF*31

Brake release wait time, *st-motor (Forward)

AC*24

Acceleration time 2, *-motor

AF*32

Brake wait time for accel., *nd-motor (Forward)

AC*26

Deceleration time 2, *-motor

AF*33

Brake wait time for stopping, *nd-motor (Forward)

Item

AF*35

Brake confirmation signal wait time, *st-motor(Forward)
Brake release frequency setting, *st-motor (Forward)

AF*36

Brake release current setting, *st-motor (Forward)

AF*37

Braking frequency, *st-motor (Forward)

AF*34

7-9
7-9

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

Brake control (Reverse)
Display conditions: AF*30=02

Overvoltage Suppression Function
Display conditions: bA*40≠00

Code

Code

Item

Item

AF*38

Brake release wait time, *st-motor (Reverse)

bA*41

Overvoltage suppression active level, *st-motor

AF*39

Brake wait time for accel., *nd-motor (Reverse)

bA*42

Overvoltage suppression active time, *st-motor

AF*40

Brake wait time for stopping, *nd-motor (Reverse)

bA*44

Constant DC bus voltage control P gain, *st-motor

AF*41

Brake confirmation signal wait time, *st-motor(Reverse)

bA*45

Constant DC bus voltage control I gain, *st-motor

AF*42

Brake release frequency setting, *st-motor (Reverse)

AF*43

Brake release current setting, *st-motor (Reverse)

AF*44

Braking frequency, *st-motor (Reverse)

Overexcitation function
Display conditions: bA*40≠00
Code

Item

Free electronic thermal

bA*47

Display conditions: bC*11=02

bA*48

Over-magnetization function output filter time constant, *stmotor
Over-magnetization function voltage gain, *st-motor

Code

bA*49

Over-magnetization function level setting, *st-motor

Item

bC*20

* electronic thermal frequency-, 1-motor

bC*21* electronic thermal current-, 1-motorbC*22* electronic thermal frequency-2, -motorbC*23* electronic thermal current-2, -motor

Code

Item

bC*24

* electronic thermal frequency-3, -motor

PA-21

Error code selection for alarm testbC*25

* electronic thermal current-3, -motor

PA-22

Optional output selection for the output current monitor

PA-23

Optional output value setting for the output current monitor

Gain mapping 1
Display conditions: HA*20=00

PA-24

Optional output selection for the DC bus voltage monitor

PA-25

Optional output value setting for the DC bus voltage monitor

Code

Simulation mode
Display conditions: PA-20=01

PA-26

Optional output selection for the output voltage monitor

HA*21

ASR gain switching time setting, *st-motor

PA-27

Optional output value setting for the output voltage monitor

HA*27* gain mapping P control P-gain, 1-motor

PA-28

Optional output selection for the output torque monitor

HA*30* gain mapping P control P-gain 2, -motor

PA-29

Optional output value setting for the output torque monitor

PA-30

Optional frequency matching start enable setting

PA-31

Optional frequency matching start setting value

Item

Gain mapping 2
Display conditions: HA*20=01
Code

Item

PID function in general

HA*22* gain mapping intermediate speed, 1-motor

HA*23* gain mapping intermediate speed 2, -motor

Code

HA*24

ASR gain mapping maximum speed, *st-motor

AH-75

PID soft start function enable

HA*31* gain mapping P-gain 3, -motor

AH-76

PID soft start target level

HA*32* gain mapping I-gain 3, -motor

AH-78

Acceleration time setting for PID soft start function

HA*33* gain mapping P-gain 4, -motor

AH-80

PID soft start time

HA*34

* gain mapping I-gain 4, -motor

AH-81

PID soft start error detection enable

Display conditions: AH-01=01, 02 or AJ-01=01, 02
Item

AH-82

PID soft start error detection level

Instantaneous power failure non-stop
Display conditions: bA-30≠00

AH-85

PID sleep trigger selection

AH-86

PID sleep start level

Code

AH-87

PID sleep active time

AH-88

Enable set-point boost before PID sleep

AH-89

Set-point boost time before PID sleep

AH-90

Set-point boost value before PID sleep

AH-91

Minimum RUN time before PID sleep

AH-92

Minimum active time of PID sleep

AH-93

PID wake trigger selection

AH-94

PID wake start level

AH-95

PID wake start time

AH-96

PID wake start deviation value

bA-31
bA-32
bA-34
bA-36
bA-37
bA-38

Item
Instantaneous power failure non-stop function, start
voltage level
Instantaneous power failure non-stop function, target
voltage level
Instantaneous power failure non-stop function,
deceleration time
Instantaneous power failure non-stop function, startfrequency decrement
Instantaneous power failure non-stop function, DC bus voltage
control P gain
Instantaneous power failure non-stop function, DC bus voltage
control I gain

7-10
7-10

Chapter 7

Using the Control PanelPID function
Display conditions: AH-01=01, 02

PID function (continued)
Display conditions: AH-01=01, 02

Code

Item

Code

db-30

PID1 feedback value 1 monitor

AH-60

PID1 gain change method selection

db-32

PID1 feedback value 2 monitor

AH-61

PID1 proportional gain 1

db-34

PID1 feedback value 3 monitor

AH-62

PID1 integral time constant 1

db-42

PID1 target value monitor (after calculation)

AH-63

PID1 derivative gain 1

db-44

PID1 feedback data monitor (after calculation)

AH-64

PID1 proportional gain 2

db-50

PID1 output monitor

AH-65

PID1 integral time constant 2

db-51

PID1 deviation monitor

AH-66

PID1 derivative gain 2

db-52

PID1 Deviation 1 Monitor

AH-67

PID1 gain change time

db-53

PID1 deviation-2 monitor

AH-70

PID1 feed-forward input source selection

db-54

PID1 deviation-3 monitor

AH-71

PID1 output range

db-61

Current PID P-Gain monitor

AH-72

PID1 over deviation level

db-62

Current PID I-Gain monitor

AH-73

Turn-off level for the PID1 feedback compare signal

db-63

Current PID D-Gain monitor

AH-74

Turn-on level for the PID1 feedback compare signal

db-64

PID feed-forward input source monitor

FA-30

PID1 target setpoint 1 setting (monitor)

FA-32

PID1 setpoint 2 setting (monitor)

PID2 function
Display conditions: AJ-01=01, 02

FA-34

PID1 setpoint 3 setting (monitor)

Code

Item

AH-02

PID1 deviation inversion

db-36

PID2 feedback value [#2] monitor

AH-03

PID1 unit selection

db-55

PID2 output monitor

AH-04

PID1 scale adjustment (0%)

db-56

PID2 deviation monitor

AH-05

PID1 scale adjustment (100%)

FA-36

PID2 target setpoint (monitor)

AH-06

PID1 scale adjustment (decimal point position)

AJ-02

PID2 deviation inversion

AH-07

PID1 set-point 1 input source selection

AJ-03

PID2 unit selection

AH-10

PID1 set-point 1 setting

AJ-04

PID2 scale adjustment (0%)

AH-12

PID1 multistage set-point 1

AJ-05

PID2 scale adjustment (100%)

AH-14

PID1 multistage set-point 2

AJ-06

PID2 scale adjustment (decimal point position)

AH-16

PID1 multistage set-point 3

AJ-07

PID2 set-point input source selection

AH-18

PID1 multistage set-point 4

AJ-10

PID2 set-point setting

AH-20

PID1 multistage set-point 5

AJ-12

PID2 feedback [#2] input source selection

AH-22

PID1 multistage set-point 6

AJ-13

PID2 proportional gain

AH-24

PID1 multistage set-point 7

AJ-14

PID2 integral time constant

AH-26

PID1 multistage set-point 8

AJ-15

PID2 derivative gain

AH-28

PID1 multistage set-point 9

AJ-16

PID2 output range

AH-30

PID1 multistage set-point 10

AJ-17

PID2 over deviation level

AH-32

PID1 multistage set-point 11

AJ-18

Turn-off level for the PID2 feedback compare signal

AH-34

PID1 multistage set-point 12

AJ-19

Turn-on level for the PID2 feedback compare signal

AH-36

PID1 multistage set-point 13

AH-38

PID1 multistage set-point 14

AH-40

PID1 multistage set-point 15

AH-42

PID1 set-point 2 input source selection

AH-44

PID1 set-point 2 setting

AH-46

PID1 set-point 3 input source selection

AH-48

PID1 set-point 3 setting

AH-50

PID1 set-point calculation symbol selection

AH-51

PID1 Feedback Data 1 Destination Select

AH-52

PID1 Feedback Data 2 Destination

AH-53

PID1 Feedback Data 3 Destination Select

AH-54

PID1 Feedback Data Operator Selection

7-11
7-11

Item

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

Trace function
Display conditions: Ud-01=01
Code

Item

Ud-02

Trace start

Ud-03

Number of trace data setting

Ud-04

Number of trace signals setting

Ud-10 toTrace data 0 to 7 selection
Ud-17
Ud-20

Trace signal 0 input/output selection

Ud-21

Trace signal 0 input terminal selection

Ud-22

Trace signal 0 output terminal selection

Ud-23

Trace signal 1 I/O selection

Ud-24

Trace signal 1 input terminal selection

Ud-25

Trace signal 1 output terminal selection

Ud-26

Trace signal 2 I/O selection

Ud-27

Trace signal 2 input terminal selection

Ud-28

Trace signal 2 output terminal selection

Ud-29

Trace signal 3 I/O selection

Ud-30

Trace signal 3 input terminal selection

Ud-31

Trace signal 3 output terminal selection

Ud-32

Trace signal 4 I/O selection

Ud-33

Trace signal 4 input terminal selection

Ud-34

Trace signal 4 output terminal selection

Ud-35

Trace signal 5 I/O selection

Ud-36

Trace signal 5 input terminal selection

Ud-37

Trace signal 5 output terminal selection

Ud-38

Trace signal 6 I/O selection

Ud-39

Trace signal 6 input terminal selection

Ud-40

Trace signal 6 output terminal selection

Ud-41

Trace signal 7 I/O selection

Ud-42

Trace signal 7 input terminal selection

Ud-43

Trace signal 7 output terminal selection

Ud-50

Trace trigger 1 selection

Ud-51

Trigger 1 activation selection at trace data trigger

Ud-52

Trigger 1 level setting at trace data trigger

Ud-53

Trigger 1 activation selection at trace signal trigger

Ud-54

Trace trigger 2 selection

Ud-55

Trigger 2 activation selection at trace data trigger

Ud-56

Trigger 2 level setting at trace data trigger

Ud-57

Trigger 2 activation selection at trace signal trigger

Ud-58

Trigger condition selection

Ud-59

Trigger point setting

Ud-60

Sampling time setting

7-12
7-12

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.2.2 Initialize the parameters・After setting "Initialize selection [Ub-01]", you can clear the trip history or reset the parameters to the factoryshipped condition by setting "Initialize execution selection [Ub-05]" to "Initialize execution (01)".
Code

Ub-01

Item

Description

Initialize mode
selection

Data

Initialize mode disable

00

Trip clear

01

Parameter initialize

02

Trip history clear + parameter initialization

03

*1

05

for initializing all data except for I/O pin settings

Initialization

Note:1for all data except communication basic settings

Note:1

Ub-02

Ub-05

Initialize data
selection Note:2

Enable initialization

06

Initialization
for all data except for I/O terminal settings and basic
communication settings
Registered in "User parameter 1 to 32 selection [UA-31] to [UA-62]"
Parameter initialize
Registered in "User parameter 1 to 32 selection [UA-31] to [UA-62]"
Initialization parameters and data other than "View selection [UA-10]"

10Mode 0 (Japan/USA)

00

Mode 1 (Europe)01

Initial
value

00

07

11

Mode 3 (China)

03

Initialization disabled (initial value)

00

Execute initialization

01

00

00

Note: 1. When "Initialization selection [Ub-01]" is "other than terminal function (05)", "other than communication function(06)", and "other than terminal & communication function (07)", the "I/O terminal setting" and "communication basic
setting" are the parameters in the table below.
2. The setting of "Default selection [Ub-02]" (Pattern 0/Pattern 1/Pattern 3) is determined by HF-620 destination.
Normally, [Ub-02] should not be changed from the factory-shipped condition. For the default settings, see "18.2
Parameter /Modbus Holding Registers".

I/O terminal
setting

Communication
Preferences

Code

Item

Code

CA-01 to CA-08
CA-21 to CA-28
CA-41 to CA-48
Cb-40

Input terminal function
Input terminal active state
Input terminal response time
Thermistor type selection

CC-01 to CC-07
CC-11 to CC-17
CC-20 toCC-33
CC-40 to CC-48

Item

Code

Item

CF-20 to CF-38

EzCOM function related parameters

Code
CF-01 to CF-08

Parameters related to
RS485 communication

Item
Output terminal function
Output terminal active stateOutput terminal delay time
Logical operation function

・Set "Initialization Execution (01)" to "Initialization Execution Selection [Ub-05]" and press SET button.
Initialization starts immediately. Note that the data cannot be restored after initialization.
・"Cumulative time during RUN monitor [dC-22]", "Cumulative power ON time monitor [dC-24]", "Initial value
selection [Ub-02]", "Load specification selection [Ub-03]", "Operation system selection [Ub-04]" are notinitialized.
・When "Display selection [UA-10]" or "Soft lock selection [UA-16]" is set, initialization is not possible because
the settings of initialization parameters cannot be changed. Cancel display selection or soft lock before
initializing.

7-13
7-13

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

Initialization (Trip history clear + data initialization)
Step 2:
By setting to [Ub-05]=01
Press SET.

Step 1:
By setting to [Ub-01]=03
Press SET.
-01

-05

00

Step 3:
Initialization is complete
when initialization isdisplayed.

00

03

01

SET

SET

00

0.00

Initializing

Initialize
mode
completed

During initialization, the initialization
descriptions and the operation mode display
after initialization flash alternately.
Trip history
initialization

Step 1.5:
Set [Ub-01] and [Ub-02]
to partially initialize or toinitialize with Pattern1
initialization.

Initialize
mode

-01

0 0 Initialization pattern 0
0 1 Initialization pattern 1
0 3 Initialization pattern 3-02

Blink alternately
Operationmode after
initialization- n - Standard load rating- L - Light load rating

Trip clear method
Step 1:
By setting to [Ub-01]=01
Press SET.

Step 2:
By setting to [Ub-05]=01
Press SET.

Vb-01

Vb-05

00

Step 3:The display is completed
when the display isfinished in the history

00

01

01

SET

SET

Clearing

0.00

Initialize
mode
completed・To prevent accidental initialization, the "Initialization Selection [Ub-01]" and "Initialization/Mode Selection[Ub-05]" settings will return to "Disabled (00)" upon completion of initialization or power cycle. Set theseparameters each time initialization is performed.
・Refer to "8.1.2 Changing Inverter Load Specification" or "8.1.6 Changing Inverter Operating System" for theparameters "Load Specification Selection [Ub-03]" and "Operation System Selection [Ub-04]" that are notinitialized even after the initialization setting.

7-14
7-14

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.2.3 Restart communication settings
・In HF-620, the settings of communication-related parameters can be reflected without turning the power
off and then on again.
・When "Communication restart selection [Ub-06]" is changed to "Restart execution (01)", the changes ofcommunication-related parameters shown in the table below are reflected in the operation.
・Even if the communication-related parameters in the table below are changed, the power is turned OFF
and ON again or this function is used. It will not be reflected to the operation unless the communication
settings are restarted.
・When this operation is performed, the communication settings are reflected immediately.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

Ub-06

Restartcommunication

DisableExecute restart: Applies the changes of communication-related parameters.

00
01

00

■Communication-related parameters
Code

Item

Description

CF-01

RS485 communication
baud rate selection(baud rate selection)

Set the communication transmission speed.

CF-02

RS485 communication
node address

Assign the inverter station number.

CF-03

RS485 communication
parity selection

CF-04

RS485 communication
stop bit selection

CF-08

RS485 communication
mode selection

CF-11

Register data

No parity
Even parity
Odd parity
1 bit
2 bit
Modbus-RTU
Inter-inverter communication (EzCOM)
Inter-inverter communication (EzCOM control)
Sets the response data unit to A (current) and V(voltage).
Set the response data unit as a percentage of the
rated value.
Big endian
Little EndianSpecial endian

CF-12

RS485 endianness
selection

CF-20 to
CF-38

EzCOM function

Parameters related to EzCOM function

USB communication
node address
Register mapping
function
Optional
communication

Assign the station number used in PDN.

CF-50
CG-01 toCG-80
oA-10 tooA-13

oJ-01 tooJ-20

Flexible command

Parameters related to the register mapping
function (Modbus mapping function)
Parameters related to optional communication
function
Parameters Related to Flexible Command
Function

7-15
7-15

Data

Initialvalue

03 (2400bps)
04 (4800bps)
05 (9600bps)
06 (19.2kbps)
07 (38.4kbps)
08 (57.6kbps)
09 (76.8kbps)
10 (115.2kbps)

05

1 to 247

1

00
01
02
01
02
01
02
03

00
01
01

00
00
01
00
01
00
02
『11.4 Refer to "Inter-inverter
communication EzCOM function".
1 to 247
See About 11.3 Modbus Mapping
Feature.
Refer to "Chapter 13 Communication
Option".

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

Operation procedure・When communication is not established normally with the external control device and the inverter orcommunication setting is changed, the setting can be reflected by the operation of communication restart
selection after setting the communication-related parameters.
Example: Apply changes to "Communication station number selection [CF-02]"
Step 1:
By setting to [CF-02]=02
Press SET.

-02

01

Step 2:
By setting to[Ub-06]=01
Press SET.

Vb-06

Step 3:
When the communication
parameter restart iscompleted, it is completed.

00

02

01

SET

SET

Restarting

Vb-06

Restartcomplete

・Note that the communication between the external control device and the inverter is cut off when theoperation with the relevant parameter is performed.

7-16
7-16

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.2.4 Prohibit parameter changes
・Various data changes can be prohibited by the soft lock function. This function is used to prevent data
rewriting due to erroneous operation. You can select the software lock function and its method from thefollowing options. When using in conjunction with the intelligent input terminal, assign "Soft-lock[SFT](036)" to one of the "Input terminal function selection ([CA-01] to [CA-08])".
Code

Item

UA-16

Soft-Lock selection

UA-17

Soft-Lock target selection

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

Description

Data[SFT] Soft-lock operation when the input terminal is ON

00

Soft-lock function always active01

All data cannot be changed during soft lock operation

00

Parameters other than the frequency setting cannot bechanged during soft lock operation
Soft Lock [SFT]:
Used when the soft lock function is performed at the input
terminal.

01 Note036

Initial
value
00

00

-

Note: For parameters that are not subject to soft-lock when selected, refer to the table below "Parameters not subject
to change other than the set frequency" when data change is disabled.

・The setting of "Soft lock selection [UA-16]" can also be password-protected. For details, see "7.2.5
Protecting data with password".
・When the parameter is write-protected by the soft-lock function, the parameter cannot be batch-written(Write) by the remote operator with the data R/W function. However, parameter batch read is possible.
For details of the data R/W function, see "7.2.9 Functions of Remote Operator".
■Parameters that are not applicable when data change other than the set frequency is not selectable
Code
FA-01
FA-02
AA104
AA204
Ab110
Ab-11 to Ab-25
Ab210
bA102
bA103
bA202
bA203
CE-10
CE-11
CE-12
CE-13
UA-02
UA-16

Item
Main speed reference setting (monitor)
Sub speed reference setting (monitor)
Sub speed setting, 1st-motor
Sub speed setting, 2nd-motor
Multi-speed 0, 1st-motor
Multi-speed 1 speed to 15 speed
Multi-speed 0, 2nd-motor
Upper frequency limit, 1st-motor
Lower frequency limit, 1st-motor
Upper frequency limit, 2nd-motor
Lower frequency limit, 2nd-motor
Arrival frequency 1 value setting during acceleration
Arrival frequency 1 value setting during deceleration
Arrival frequency 2 during acceleration
Arrival frequency 2 during deceleration
Password for soft lockSoft Lock selection

7-17
7-17

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.2.5 Protecting data with passwords
・The password function can be used to protect the settings of "Select [UA-01]", "Soft lock selection [UA16]" and "Soft lock selection [UA-17]". Prevents the display and setting of parameters from being changed
on your own.
・If you forget the password you set, there is no way to unlock the password. Also, our factory or service station
cannot check the password, so please be careful when setting the password.
Code

Item

UA-01

Password for view select [UA-10]

Parameter for password A authentication.

UA-02

Password for soft lock [UA-16]

Parameter for password B authentication.

Data

Initialvalue

0000 to FFFF

0000

Description

Note: You cannot specify 0000 for the password.
0 to 9, A, b, C, d, E, F number of characters that can be set in passwords is 16 (hexadecimal).

■O
Outline of password function (Sample password setting for "View selection [UA-10]")

Password not set (default)[UA-01]=0000

The password is not protected.
You can change the [UA-10] setting
as desired.

[UA-01]←1234 Enter(Password setting)[UA-01]←0000 Enter(Delete Password)
Password authentication[UA-01]←1234 Enter

Password lock status[UA-01]=0000
The password is protected.
The [UA-10] setting cannot bechanged. When a remote operator(OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards) isconnected, [LKP] is displayed in theparameter area.

Turn the power off andon again or do not
operate or change
password for about 10
minutes.

Certification OK status[UA-01]=1234
After the password is authenticated, thepassword setting information is not deleted
but you can change the value of [UA-10].
If the power is turned on again or nooperation is performed for approximately
10 minutes, the monitor automatically
returns to the password lock state.

■Setting a Password(1) Set "View selection [UA-10]", "Soft lock selection [UA-16]" and "Soft lock selection [UA-17]" according
to the content to be protected.
(2) Enter a password of your choice in the password parameter ([UA-01]/[UA-02]).
(Note that 0000 cannot be used.)
VA-01

1234

0000
SET

+1

1234
SET

VA-01..
SET

SET

Esc
Move blinking digit to leftMove blinking digit to right-1(3) The password is locked. [UA-10]/[UA-16]/[UA-17] cannot be changed.

7-18
7-18

" . " The dot mark indicatesthat a password is being set.

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel■Password approval(1) Enter the password in the password parameter ([UA-01]/[UA-02]).
1 second display

VA-01..

0000

1234

VA-01

Good
SET

SET

Esc

1 second display

SET

123F

VA-01.

Err

SET(2) If the password is correct, "Good" is displayed and the [UA-10]/[UA-16]/[UA-17] can be changed.
If the password is incorrect, "Err" is displayed and the display returns to the original status (password
locked status). If no operation is performed for 10 minutes or the power is turned on again, themachine automatically returns to the password lock state.
■Change password(1) Authenticate your password.
(The password cannot be changed when the password is locked (0000 is displayed).)(2) Enter a different password in the password parameter ([UA-01]/[UA-02]).

VA-01..

1234

AbCd

SET

SET

Esc

VA-01..

AbCd
SET

SET

(3) Changing the password automatically transits to the password lock state.
■Deleting a password(1) Authenticate your password.
(The password cannot be changed when the password is locked (0000 is displayed).)(2) Enter 0000 in the password parameter ([UA-01]/[UA-02]).
(3) The password is reset to the default setting and all password information is cleared.

VA-01..

1234

0000

0000
SET

SET

Esc

SET

7-19
7-19

VA-01
SET

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.2.6 Setting the initial display of the operation panel
・With the "Initial screen selection [UA-91]", the display of the control panel at power-on can be selected fromthe following. (001 (output frequency [dA-01]) is selected as the default.)
・When "Initial screen auto transition function [UA-92]" is set to "Enable (01)", if there is no control panel
operation for 10 minutes, the screen is automatically displayed as set in "Initialization screen selection [UA91]".
Code

UA-91

Item

Description

Data

Initial display selection(Display at power-on)

The last parameter set is set as the initial screen. (including
when SET button is pressed in the [d ****] window)
When [d ****] is selected, the default parameter is displayed.
Otherwise, the default parameter is displayed.

noAll parameters except [UA-31] to [UA-62]
UA-92

Enable auto-return to theinitial display

Initial
value

dA-01

dA-01 toDisable (no automatic transition)

00

Enabled (automatic transition)

01

00

・When a remote operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards) is connected, you cannot select (no) for "Default window
selection [UA-91]". When selecting, use the control panel of the main unit.

7.2.7 Automatic registration of changed parameter history
・When "User parameter auto setting selection [UA-30]" is "Enable (01)", parameters that have been changed
from the default are automatically stored in the order of "User parameter 1 to 32 selection ([UA-31] to [UA62])". It can also be used as a change history.
・Parameters are memorized at the timing of pressing SET button. [UA-31] is the most recent parameter and[UA-62] is the oldest change parameter.
・If the same parameter is changed, the old memories are erased and new changes are remembered. If thenumber of parameters exceeds 32, it will be deleted from the [UA-62] of the older memory.
Code

UA-30

Item

User-parameter
auto setting
function enable

Description

Data

Disable:The changed parameter history is not retained.

00

Enable:
The changed parameters are saved as user parameters in the orderin which they were changed.

01

Initialvalue

00

・When [UA-30] is changed from "Disable (00)" to "Enable (01)", all parameters registered in "User parameter
1 to 32 selection ([UA-31] to [UA-62])" are initialized ("no" setting).

7-20
7-20

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.2.8 Fixed indication (DISP) function
・If "Display fixed [DISP](102)" is assigned to one of the "Input terminal function selection ([CA-01] to [CA08])" and that terminal is turned ON, the operator's display is fixed by the data display of the parameter
set in "Initial screen selection [UA-91]", and other parameter display becomes impossible.
Code

UA-91

Item

Initial display selection(Display at power-on)

Description

Data

The last parameter set is set as the initial screen.
(including when SET button is pressed in the [d ****]
window)no

All parameters except [UA-31] to [UA-62]
CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

Indication fixed [DISP]:Fix the display of the control panel to the display set in"Initial screen selection [UA-91]".

Initial
value

dA-01
dA-01 to102-

・When a remote operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards) is connected, you cannot select (no) for "Default window
selection [UA-91]". When selecting, use the control panel of the main unit.

7-21
7-21

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

7.2.9 Function of remote operator
・This section describes the details of various functions that operate when a remote operator(OS-44 ver.2.0
onwards) is connected.
・When a remote operator is connected, the operation on the operation panel of HF-620 main unit isdisabled. However, pressing and holding Esc key on the main unit operation panel (approx. 3 seconds)
will temporarily switch to the operation on the main unit. Press and hold Esc key again to return to theremote operator.

Data copy using remote operator
・The optional OS-44 (ver.2.0 onwards) is a remote operator with the capability of copying parametersetting data or backed up between models.
・Copying and backup of parameter setting data can be done by using PC software . For more information,
see section 12.1 PC software.

Detect disconnection of remote operator
・You can set the operation when the remote operator is disconnected. The wire is judged to bedisconnected approximately 5 seconds after communication with the remote operator is interrupted.
・Operation at disconnection can be changed by setting of "Operation selection at disconnection [UA-20]".
Code

UA-20

Item

Action selection at keypad
disconnection

Description

Data

When disconnection occurs, trip will be made with "Operation panel
communication error [E040]".

00

When the wire is broken, the motor trips due to "Operation panel
communication error [E040]" after decelerating and stopping.

01

Ignores disconnection detection.

02

Free-run stop is performed when the wire is disconnected.
No error occurs.

03

Decelerates and stops when the wire is broken. No error occurs.

04

Initialvalue

02

Detect the remote operator's low battery
・HF-620 allows a remote operator OS-44 (ver.2.0 onwards) with a built-in RTC(Real Time Clock toconnect. RTC operates according to the battery. However, if HF-620 fails to correctly read this RTC, it isjudged that the battery is exhausted, and a warning or trip can be generated.
When "Low battery alert selection [UA-19]" is set to "Warning (01)", the output terminal function "Batteryout [LBK]" will ON when the low battery is detected. When "Error (02)" is set, trip occurs due to "RTC error[E042]" in addition to ON of the [LBK] signal.
・If OS-44 is removed and no longer detectable, the battery is not judged as running out. However, theretained time data is cleared.
・To set "Low battery alert selection [UA-19]" to other than "Disabled (00)", insert the battery into thecontrol panel VOP and set [UA-19] after setting the time.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

Operator-panel battery depleted [LBK]:When the remote operator (VOP) is connected, the built-in RTC operation ismonitored and it is turned ON when it is judged that the batteries are
exhausted.

080

002
001
017

Disable00

UA-19

Low battery
warning enable

Warning : ON [LBK] as a warning.

01

Error: ON the [LBK] signal. At the same time, "RTC error [E042]" is outputted.

02

7-22
7-22

00

Chapter 7

Using the Control Panel

Prevent unnecessary data from being written・With "Data R/W selection [UA-18]", you can enable or disable batch parameter read (Read)/write (Write)by the remote operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards) with the data copy function. This is useful for securing
backup data and preventing unnecessary read/write operations after determining parameters.
・Even if "Data R/W selection [UA-18]" is set to "R/W enabled (00)", parameter batch write is not possible
when soft-lock is applied (batch read is possible). For details on the soft lock function, see "7.2.4
Disabling Parameter Changes".
Code
UA-18

Item
Data R/W selection

Description

Data

Enable batch read/write of parameters

00

Disable batch read/write of parameters

01

Initialvalue
00

Changing the parameters displayed on the main unit when connecting to the remote operator
・When a remote operator is connected, the operation on the operation panel of HF-620 main unit isdisabled. At this time, the monitor data set in the main unit display when the operator is connected [UA95] is displayed on the main unit screen.
・While the remote operator is connected, press and hold Esc key on the main unit operation panel (forabout 3 seconds) to temporarily switch to the operation on the main unit. Press and hold Esc key again to
return to the remote operator.
Code
UA-95

Item
Ex. operator
Main unit display

Description

Data

Initialvalue

Set the display of the main unit when the remote operator isconnected. [dA-**],[db-**], [dC-**],[FA-**] Parameters can be set.

[dA-**]/[db-**][dC-**]/[FA-**]
Parameter

dA-01

7-23
7-23

Chapter 8

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8

This chapter describes the mandatory setting items, setting procedures, and test operation to operate themotor and inverter.
Before actual operation, be sure to make the settings described in this chapter and perform a trial run.
Refer to the corresponding chapters for details of the installation, wiring and various inverter functions.
When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters, and pay attention to safety.

8.1 Essential sets for operation
8.1.1 Outline of required setting items
・This section describes the necessary parameter settings and procedures to drive the inverter and motor
correctly.
・It also describes the electronic thermal function to protect the motor.
・Perform trial run and adjustment after setting the parameters appropriately according to the sections in
the table below.
Item
8.1.3 Setting Motor Nameplate Data
to Parameters8.1.4 Setting Electronic Thermal

8.1.5 Setting Motor Constant
8.1.6 Changing the inverter operation
system

8.2 Test run

8.3 Performing auto-tuning of the
motor

Description
Set the load specifications according to the application.
Select from standard load ratings suitable for elevators, conveyors, etc. and light load
ratings suitable for fans, pumps, etc.
Set the motor specifications to be driven to the inverter.
Set the motor type, base frequency, maximum frequency, motor capacity, number ofmotor poles, motor receiving voltage, motor rated current, etc. before starting
operation.
The electronic thermal function protects the motor or inverter from burnout. Be sure to
set this according to the environment and system to be used.
When using automatic torque boost/sensorless vector control, the motor constantmust be set.
If the motor constant is unknown, obtain it from the motor manufacturer or measure
the motor constant referring to "8.3 Performing Auto-tuning of Motor".
To confirm that the inverter and the motor operate correctly, perform a test run withthe motor alone and a test run with the actual load connected.
When using automatic torque boost or sensorless vector control, set the motor
constant referring to "8.1.5 Setting the Motor Constant" or "8.3 Auto-tuning the Motor".
This section explains how to perform auto-tuning. When using a motor other than
Sumitomo standard or an unknown motor, measure the motor constant using the autotuning function.

・When to change max. frequency, change [Hb106] .
・When load inertia is large and motor speed fluctuates, adjust to increase motor constant J [Hb118].

8-1
8-1

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8.1.2 Load specification of the inverter
・The load specifications of the inverter can be selected from the standard load rating (ND) and the lightload rating (LD).
・The rated current, overload current rating, temperature rating, etc. of the inverter differ depending on
the difference in load specifications.
Choose either one according to your load.
■Features of standard load rating/light load rating
Item
Features
Application Examples
Rated output current(example)
Overload current ratingStandard load rating (ND)

Light load rating (LD)Suitable for loads requiring high torque atstarting, acceleration/deceleration, etc.
Elevators, cranes, conveyors, etc.

Suitable for loads with less drive than the rated torque,etc. It may be possible to drive the motor on one frame.
Fans, pumps, air conditioners, etc.

25.0A (three-phase 200V, 5. 5kW inverter)

30.0A (three-phase 200V, 5.5kW inverter)

150%/1min, 200%/3s

120%/1min, 150%/0.5s

・The load rating is set in "Load spec. selection [Ub-03]". When [Ub-03] is changed and SET is pressed,
the mode is changed immediately. The setting range/default value is switched by some parameters asshown in the table below. Note that the setting value at that time is also initialized or changed.
Code
Ub-03

Item
Load type selection

Description

Data

Light Duty Rating (LD: Light Duty)

01

Normal Duty Rating (ND: Normal Duty)

02

Initialvalue
02■List of parameters to be changed when changing from LD to ND
Code
AF136
AF143
bA123

Item
Brake release current
motor (Forward)
Brake release current
motor (Reverse)
Stall prevention 1
active level

Data-range for ND
selection

During ND selection
Initialization data initial
value

LD⇒ND
Value at thetime of change

Initial value(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated
output current A

1.00×Inverter
rated output current A

Converted
value

1.00×Rated
output current(0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter rated
output current A

1.50×Inverter
rated output current A

Converted
value

1.50×Rated
output current

bA127

Stall prevention 2
active level

bb-43

Active frequency matching
restart level(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated
output current A

1.00×Inverter
rated output current A

bb101

Carrier frequency

2.0 to 15.0 kHz

2.0(kHz) [pattern 0]
10.0(kHz) [pattern 1]
2.0(kHz) [pattern 3]

No change

2.0

bC110

Electronic thermal level

Inverter rated
output current A

Converted
value

1.00×Rated
output current

bC121
bC123
bC125

Free electronic thermal
current 1 to 3

0.00 A

Converted
value

0.00

CE102

Low current
detection level 1

CE103

Low current
detection level 2

Inverter rated
output current A

Converted
value

1.00×Rated
output current

CE106

Overload warning level 1

CE107

Overload warning level 2

1.15×Inverter
rated output current A

Converted
value

1.15×Rated
output current

PA-23

Optional output value
setting for the output
current monitor

0.00 A

Converted
value

0.00

(0.00 to 3.00) ×
Inverter rated
output current A(0.00 to 3.00) ×
Inverter rated
output current A(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated
output current )(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated
output current A(0.00 to 3.00) ×
Inverter rated
output current A

8-2
8-2

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run■List of parameters to be changed when changing from ND to LD
Code
AF136
AF143
bA123

Item
Brake release current
motor (Forward)
Brake release current
Motor (Reverse)
Overload restriction 1
active levelbA127

Overload restriction 2
active level

bb-43

Active frequency matching
restart level

bb101

Carrier frequency

bC110

Electronic thermal level

bC121
bC123
bC125

Free electronic thermal
current-1 to 3

CE102

Low current detectionlevel 1

CE103

Low current detectionlevel 2

CE106

Overload warning level 1

CE107

Overload warning level 2

PA-23

Optional output value
setting for the output
current monitor

Data range for LD
selection

During LD selection
Initialization data initial
value

ND⇒LD
Value at thetime of change

Initial Setting(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated output
current A

1.00×
Inverter rated
output current A

Converted
value

1.00×Rated
output current(0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter rated output
current A

1.50×
Inverter rated
output current A(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated output
current A

1.00×
Inverter rated
output current A
2.0(kHz) [pattern 0]
10.0(kHz) [pattern 1]
2.0(kHz) [pattern 3]

Light load
Initial value

1.50×Rated
output current

2.0kHz2.0

Inverter rated
output current A

Converted
value

1.00×Rated
output current

0.00 A

Converted
value

0.00

LD Inverter rated
output current (A)Converted
value

1.00×Rated
output current

1.15×Inverter rated
output current (A)Converted
value

1.15×Rated
output current

0.00 A

Converted
value

0.00

2.0 to 15.0 kHz(0.00 to 3.00) ×
Inverter rated output
current A(00.00 to 3.00) ×
Inverter rated output
current A(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated output
current A(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated output
current A(0.00 to 3.00) ×
Inverter rated output
current A

・The parameter described as "Converted Value" converts the current set value by the rated current ratio
of ND and LD.
(e.g.) When ND rated output current = 8.0A/LD rated output current = 10.0A, the set 4.0A at the timeof ND is converted as shown below when it is changed to LD.
(10/8)×4.0A = 5.0A
(For conversion from LD to ND, it is converted by the inverse ratio shown above.)
・When the load specifications are changed, the parameters may need to be reconfigured. Refer to theabove table to recheck each parameter. Also recheck the parameters related to inverter heatgeneration and cooling, such as torque and current setting related parameters, automatic carrier
reduction function, and cooling fan operation selection.
・The currently selected load specification can be checked in "Inverter load specification selection statusmonitor [dC-01]".

8-3
8-3

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8.1.3 Setting motor nameplate data to parameters
・To control and protect the motor, set the basic parameters of the motor in the table below.
・Set the motor type/motor capacity/number of motor poles/motor rated voltage/motor rated
current/base frequency (motor rated frequency) according to the specifications of the motor (value
indicated on the motor specification nameplate). Set the highest frequency required for the highest
frequency setting. However, please set so as not to exceed the specification of the maximum rotational
speed of the motor.
■For induction motor
Code
Hb101

Hb102
Hb103
Hb104
Hb105
Hb106
Hb108

Item
IM Motor type
IM Motor Capacity
SelectIM motor pole
selection
IM Base frequency
IM Maximum
frequency
IM motor rated
voltage
IM Motor Rated
Current

Description

Data

Initial value

00：Reserved
01：Sumitomo AF motor
02：Sumitomo d2G4 motor
03：Sumitomo IE3 motor

03

0.01 to 11.00 kW

Factory setting

00 to 23 (2 to 48 poles)

01

30.00 to Max. frequency Hz

60.00

Base frequency to 590.00 Hz

60.00

Set the rated voltage of the induction motor.

1 to 1000 V

200/400

Set the rated current of the induction motor.

0.01 to 10000.00 A

Depend on the
motor

Set the induction motor type

Set the capacity of the induction motor.
Set the number of poles of the induction
motor.
Sets the base frequency of the induction
motor.
Set the maximum frequency of the induction
motor.

・If the base frequency is set below the rated frequency of the motor, the motor may burn out. (Forstandard-type induction motors, the rated frequency is 50/60Hz.)
Caution ・Do not set the maximum frequency and motor rated voltage exceeding the motor specifications.
Burnout
The motor may burn out.
・When initialization is performed, set the basic parameters of the motor again. Continued use after
initialization may cause motor burnout.
・Whensetting the maximum frequency exceeding 60Hz, check with the motor manufacturer for theDOmaximum allowable frequency.

8-4
8-4

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run■Motor capacity and number of poles
・For induction motors, if "IM motor capacity selection [Hb102]" or "IM motor pole selection [Hb103]" ischanged, the motor constant parameter setpoint will change to the motor constant of Hitachi Standard
Motor stored in advance. Accurately setting the capacity and number of poles may prevent motor
nuisance or stabilize the motor drive. Refer to "8.1.5 Setting Motor Constant" for details of the motor
constant parameter.
・When setting the control method to V/f control (constant torque characteristic (VC), reduced torquecharacteristic (VP1.7 power) or free V/f characteristic) and driving two or more motors with one drive,
set the total motor capacity to [Hb102].
・For details on setting the motor constant, refer to "8.3 Auto-tuning of Motor".
■Frequency-voltage relation during typical V/f control (induction motor)
・When the base frequency and rated voltage are set, thevoltage is output in typical V/f control (constant torquecharacteristic (VC)) as shown in the diagram.
・The output voltage from the base frequency to thehighest frequency is the motor rated voltage at the
maximum. The maximum frequency setting is the
maximum value of the analog external input (forexample, 0 to 10V for analog voltage input).
・When an induction motor is used by setting the basefrequency to a value exceeding 60Hz, a special motor
is used. With a special motor, the rated current may belarger than the inverter even if the motor capacity is
the applicable capacity of the inverter. In this case,increase the inverter capacity.

Output voltage (V)
Motor
rated
voltage
Outputfrequency(100 %)(Hz)
Base frequency

Max. frequency■O
Overexcitation function
・The overexcitation function suppresses overvoltage
errors by increasing the loss of the motor and reducing
the energy that is regenerated. Operates when "V/f
DC between P-N (Vdc)
control (00) to (03)" is selected in "Control method[AA121]".
・When the over-excitation function is disabled in theTime
Output voltage (V)Overexcitation Function Selection (V/f)[bA146), therelation between the output voltage and the output
frequency selected in [AA121]. For example, when
Overexcitation
constant-torque characteristic (VC) is selected,
control is performed as shown in "Relation between
OverexcitationTimefrequency and voltage in common V/f control(induction motor)" above. For other characteristics,
refer to "9.5.1 Selecting Control Mode".
・Even if this function is used, voltage exceeding AC voltage equivalent to DC voltage between P-N
cannot be outputted.
・For the output voltage to the motor, refer to "9.9.4 Controlling the Output Voltage to Avoid
Overvoltage".
■O
Output current
・If the motor rated current is set beyond the inverter rated current, the desired characteristics may not
be met. In addition, inverter protection may be applied to the tip.

8-5
8-5

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8.1.4 Setting the electroniic thermal
Basic characteristics of electronic thermal
・The electronic thermal function provides thermal protection based on the output current, output
frequency, and electronic thermal characteristics. Two types of motor and inverter operate separately.
・Electronic thermal for motor is set according to "Electronic thermal level [bC110]" to the motor rated
current. If a current exceeding the rated current continues to flow through the motor, it will beprotected. If you want to apply protection earlier, set it lower than the motor rated current. In addition,
the duration until the protective function is applied also varies depending on the "Electronic thermal
accumulated gain [bC115]" setting. See "Changing the Heat Dissipation Characteristics of Electronic
Thermal" in this section.
・By setting "Electronic thermal characteristic selection [bC111]", you can set the thermal characteristic(reduction rate by operating frequency) according to the motor to be used. For details, refer to thefollowing pages.
・The operation level and thermal characteristics of the inverter electronic thermal cannot be changed
from the contents in the table below.
・The basic characteristics (time characteristics) of the electronic thermal depends on the setting of"Load-specification selection [Ub-03]". Each basic characteristic (time limit characteristic) is shown in
the figure below.
・If the motor current becomes unstable due to disturbance, etc., the motor may trip earlier than thespecified time.
Code

Item

Description

Data

bC110

Electronic
thermal level

If a current exceeding the set value continues to flow, protection
is applied and "Motor overload error [E005]" occurs.

bC115

Electronic
thermalaccumulation
gain

The load factor for each calculation cycle of the electronic
thermal for the motor is multiplied by this setting value to be
integrated as the load factor. The default value is 100%,
multiplied by 1. When the initial value is less than 100.0%, theprotection becomes slower and the motor burns out easily.

Initialvalue(0.00 to 3.00)×
1.00×Rated
inverter rated output output
current
current A

1.0 to 200.0 %100.0Electronic thermalTime characteristic

Electronic thermal level

Thermal characteristics

Trip

Motor electronic thermal

Properties of ND standards(Refer to the figure below.)

Calculate the accumulated loading
factor from [bC110] and [bC115].

Select with [bC111]

E005

Inverter electronic thermal

Characteristic by ND/LD(Refer to the figure below.)

ND/LD rated power current of theinverterConstant torque(Reduced magnification Note:in low-speed range)

E039

Note: The thermal characteristics (constant torque characteristics) of the electronic thermal for the inverter are
different from those of the electronic thermal for the motor. Refer to "Constant Torque Characteristics" in thissection for details.

■Electronic thermal time characteristics● Electronic thermal time characteristics for the motor
Electronic thermal time limit for inverter (ND)
Overload error time (s)● Electronic thermal time limit for inverters (LD)Overload error time (s)120%/1 min
150%/3 sec

150%/1 min
200%/3 sec
60

60

Outputcurrent (A)30110% 150%

Outputcurrent (A)

3
0

200%

Electron thermal level ratio

110% 120%

150%

Electron thermal level ratio

8-6
8-6

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

・This setting is necessary for motor protection. If the correct value is not input, the motor may burn out.
・Even if "Electronic thermal level [bC110]" is set larger, "Overcurrent error [E001]" may occur before"Motor overload error [E005]" if the current grows steeply.
・If overload occurs in the extremely low speed range below 0.2Hz, "Low speed range overload error[E038]" will occur. Refer to "Chapter 15 Troubleshooting" for the corrective actions to be taken whenan overload error [E005]/[E038]/[E039] occurs.
・If "Controller overload error [E039]" and "Electronic thermal subtraction function selection [bC112]" areset to "Disabled (00)", [E005] that occurs will not accept a trip reset for about 10 seconds after it
occurs. When [E038] or [bC112] is set to other than "Disabled (00)", [E005] can be canceled
immediately after tripping. For more information on [bC112], see "Changing the Heat Dissipation
Characteristics of Electronic Thermals" in this section.

Changing the electronic thermal characteristics
・By setting "Electronic thermal characteristics [bC111]", you can set the electronic thermal
characteristics for the motor according to the motor to be used. It is possible to set the protection
characteristics in consideration of the decrease in the cooling capacity of the motor at low speed.
Code

Item

Description

bC111

Electronic thermal
characteristic
selection

Data

Reduction characteristics: This pattern corresponds to a decrease incooling function in the low-speed range.

00

Constant torque characteristics: This pattern considers constant output.

01

Free setting: The pattern can be changed according to the motor
characteristics.

02

Initialvalue

00■Reduction characteristics
・By setting "Electronic Thermal Characteristic Selection [bC111]" to "Reduced Torque Characteristic(00)", it is possible to make the protective characteristic considering the cooling capacity reduction of
the motor at low speed.
・A general-purpose motor (self-cooling type motor) must be used with a reduced load (current) because
the cooling function of the self-cooling fan decreases when the motor speed decreases. (When thefrequency decreases, the reduction magnification also decreases, and the thermal level (current) also
decreases.)
・The reduced torque characteristics are matched to the heat generated by the self-cooling motor.
・The figure below (e.g. 1) shows an example of the reduced-torque characteristics when the "electronic
thermal level [bC110]" is 9.6A at the light-load rating.
(e.g. 1) Example of reduced torque characteristics
Three-phase 200V 1.5kW, Light duty rating, Electronic thermal level[bC110]=9.8A
Base frequency[Hb104]=60Hz
Since the reduction ratio is 1.0 times for 60Hz operation, tripping occurs after 60 seconds ofcontinuous flow of 14.7A (9.8A×150%).
20 Since the reduction ratio is 0.8 times when operating in Hz, 11.76A (9.8A×150％ ×0.8)
will be tripped after 60 seconds of continuous flow.
● 60Hz operation reduction ratio=×1.0
Overload error time (s)Reduction ratio● 20Hz operation reduction ratio=×0.8
Overload error time (s)

×1.0
×0.8

Outputfrequency
(Hz)

×0.6

0
0

5
6

16
20

50
60

Base frequency

60
30

10.78 14.7
(110%) (150%)

8-7
8-7

19.6
(200%)

Outputcurrent
(A)

60
3
0

8.62 11.76 15.68(88%) (120%) (160%)

Outputcurrent(A)Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run■Constant torque・When using a constant torque motor, set "Electronic Thermal Characteristics Selection [bC111]" to"Constant Torque Characteristics (01)".
・When the constant torque characteristic is selected, the reduction ratio does not apply to theelectronic thermal for the motor as shown in the figure below.
(e.g. 2) Constant torque characteristics three-phase 200V 1.5kW standard-load constant time,
Electronic thermal level = 8.0A
● 60Hz Reduction ratio＝×1.0

Reduction ratio

Overload error time (s)

×1.0

0

60

Outputfrequency
(Hz)

60
3
0

Output current (A)
16
8.8
12
(110%) (150%) (200%)

・Regardless of the "Electronic thermal level [bC110]", theinverter electronic thermal operates at a constant-torquecharacteristic based on ND/LD inverter-output current.
However, to protect the inverter main unit, the reduction ratio
is applied in the low-speed range below 3Hz as shown in the
diagram.
・When using a self-cooling motor that reduces motor cooling in
the low-speed range, pay attention to motor heat generation.
Depending on the motor's heat generation characteristics, usewith the reduction characteristics or free setting.

Reduction ratio

×1.0
×0.8

0

60

3

Output frequency (Hz)Free electronic thermal setting■F
・By setting "Electronic thermal characteristic selection [bC111]" to "Free setting (02)", you can freely set
the electronic thermal characteristic (reduction magnification characteristic) with the aim of protecting
the motor according to the loads at every speed.
Code

Item

bC120

Free electronic thermal frequency-1

bC122

Free electronic thermal frequency-2

bC124

Free electronic thermal frequency-3

bC121

Free electronic thermal current-1

bC123

Free electronic thermal current-2

bC125

Free electronic thermal current-3

Data

Initialvalue

Set the frequency at each segmental point.
Be sure to set each frequency to therelationship shown below.
[bC120]<[bC122]<[bC124]

0 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

Set the current value at each segmental point.

(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter rated
current A

0.00

Description(e.g. 3) Electronic thermal free setting three-phase 200V 1.5kW, standard-load, electroniclevel [bC110]=8.0A● Reduction ratio of the free electronic thermal● Free electronic thermal characteristics
Overloaderror time (s)Reduction ratio

Time response when
output-frequency is[bC122][bC125][bC123]

OutputFrequency (Hz)[bC121]0

thermal[bC120][bC124] Max. frequency[bC122][Hb105]

60

0

8-8
8-8

Outputcurrent (A)3[bC123] [bC123]
×110% ×150%[bC123]×200%

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

・If [bC121]/[bC123]/[bC125] is set to the default 0.0A and "Electronic Thermal Response Selection[bC111]" is set to "Free setting (02)", a [E005] occurs immediately after the setting is changed.
・Set the Free Electron Thermal frequency in the order of [bC124]→[bC122]→[bC120].

Changing the Heat Dissipation Characteristics of Electronic Therml
・When "Electronic thermal subtraction function selection [bC112]" is set to other than "Disabled (00)",
the electronic thermal counter subtraction function is enabled, and the electronic thermal loading rate
for the motor is subtracted when the output current is less than 110% of the electronic thermal level(when the reduction magnification is ×1.0).
・Subtraction property can be selected by "Electronic thermal subtraction function selection [bC112]".
Set according to the heat radiation characteristics of the motor.
Code

Item

bC112

Electronic
thermalDecreasefunction enable

bC113

Electronic
thermalSubtraction timebC115

Electronic
thermalAccumulation
gain

Description

Data

Invalid: The doubled counters are cleared every 10 minutes. In addition, theclearing timing is shifted by 5 minutes and is performed alternately.

00

Enabled (linear): Subtracts from 100% to 0% at the [bC113] setting.

01

Enabled (time constant): The [bC113] setting time is treated as a time
constant and is subtracted.
Subtraction time setting when [bC112] is set to "Enable (Linear) (01)" or"Enable (Time Constant) (02)". Please note that if the setting is less than thedefault 600.00s, the protective function becomes slower and the motor
tends to burn out.
The load factor for each calculation cycle of the electronic thermal for the
motor is multiplied by this setting value to be integrated as the load factor.
100.0% of the initial value is multiplied by 1. Note that if the setting is lessthan 100.0% of the initial value, the protection becomes slow and the motor
tends to burn out.

Initial
value

01

02
1 to
65535 s600

1.0 to200.0 %

100.0

・
「Electronic thermal decreasing time[bC113] Use to set the subtraction rate. Check the thermal time
constant of the motor with the motor manufacturer. In addition, set a larger value with sufficient margin
for the characteristics of the motor used.
・Regarding "Electronic thermal accumulated gain [bC115]", if the overload withstand value of the motor
is available, adjust it to a larger value as possible based on [(Trip time of electronic thermal time limit
characteristic)/ (Motor overload withstand time)]×100%.
・Even if the setting value of [bC113]/[bC115] is larger than the default value, the motor may burn out if
the value is inappropriate for the motor characteristic value. For these settings, set a value larger thanthe motor characteristic value with sufficient margin.
・If the motor characteristic value is not available, set [bC112] to "Disabled (00)" for use.
・Use [bC113] to set the subtraction rates for the individual patterns. Set a larger value with sufficientmargin to the characteristics of the motor used.
ubtraction function selection■Su
Disabled (00)・Clears the load factor every 10 minutes.
When one of the duplicated counters reaches
100%, the motor trips due to "Motor overload
error [E005]".
100%
Electric thermalload factor

Enabled (linear) (01)・The electronic thermal load ratio is subtracted
at the rate where the load ratio changes from
100% to 0% at the setting time of [bC113].

10 minutes

100%
Electric thermalload factor

10 minutes

Time

Time
0%

0%

8-9
8-9

[bC113]

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run■Whe
en subtraction function selection = enabled (time constant)・The electronic thermal loading ratio at the point when the output current falls below the electronic
thermal level is subtracted by the primary filter with the time constant set in [bC113]. Thermal-loadfactor becomes 0% in approximately five times longer than [bC113].

100%
Electric thermal
Load factor

Time
0%

[bC113][bC113]×5

During power shutdownSaving the accumulated value of the electronic thermal
・The accumulated value of the electronic thermal is saved when the power is turned off, and can beread when the power is turned on the next time.
Code

Item

Description

bC-14

Power-offElectronic thermal
counter memory
selection at

Data

Invalid: Integrated amount is set to zero when the power is turned on.

00

Enabled: Displays the accumulated value saved when the power was shut
off.

01

Initialvalue
01

Related functions
・The electronic thermal load factor for the motor can be checked in "Electronic thermal load factor
monitor (motor) [dA-42]", and the electronic thermal load factor for the inverter can be checked in"Electronic thermal load factor monitor (inverter) [dA-43]".
・If you want to output a warning signal when the electronic thermal load factor exceeds a certain level,
set the output terminal function "Electronic Thermal Warning (motor) [THM](026)", "Electronic Thermal
Warning (inverter) [THC](027)" and "Electronic Thermal Warning Level (motor) [CE-30]" and "Electronic
Thermal Warning Level (inverter) [CE-31]". For details, refer to "9.11.5 Outputting Warning Before
Electronic Thermal Protection of Motor" or "9.11.6 Outputting Warning Before Electronic Thermal
Protection of Inverter".
Code

Item

Description

dA-42

Electronic thermal load factor
monitor(motor)

Displays the accumulated value of the electronic
thermal for the motor. If this monitor reaches 100%,"Motor overload error [E005]" will occur.

dA-43

Electronic thermal load factor
monitor(inverter)

Displays the accumulated value of the electronic
thermal for inverter. When this monitor reaches
100%, "Controller overload error [E039]" occurs.
Electronic Thermal Warning (Motor) [THM]:
When the [dA-42] value reaches the level set to[CE-30], this signal turns ON.

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

CE-30

Electronic thermal warninglevel (Motor)

Electronic Thermal Warning (Inverter) [THC]:
When the [dA-43] value reaches the level set to[CE-31], this signal turns ON.
[THM] Sets the overload level that turns the signal
ON.

CE-31

Electronic thermal warninglevel (Inverter)[THC] Sets the overload level that turns the signal
ON.

8-10
8-10

Data

Initialvalue-

0.00 to 100.00 %
-

026

027

0.00 to 100.00 %

002
001
017

85.00

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8.1.5 Set the motor constant・When using the automatic torque boost function or sensorless vector control with an induction motor,
the motor constant must be set according to the motor to be used. There are three methods for setting
the motor constant as follows.
(1) Sumitomo standard motor
When using a Sumitomo standard motor, if "IM motor type selection [Hb101], IM motor capacity
selection [Hb102]" or "IM motor pole selection [Hb103]" is changed, the motor constant parameter
setpoint will automatically change to the motor constant of the Sumitomo standard motor (IE3).
(2) Measured by auto-tuning function
This function is used to measure the motor constant when a motor whose motor constant is
unknown is used. Even when using a Hitachi standard motor, if the moment of inertia is large or thewiring length is long, it may be better to perform auto-tuning. For details, refer to "8.3 Auto-tuning ofMotor".
(3) You set arbitrarily.
Values obtained from the motor manufacturer, etc. can be set directly to the parameters in the tablebelow. Or, after (1) or (2), change the parameters in the table below for fine adjustment.
・Sumitomo Standard Motor Constant Setting in the table below is the data for one phase of Yconnected motor converted to 200V/400V, 50Hz input.
・The motor constant parameters in the table below can also be adjusted and changed manually.
However, note that changing the motor capacity or number of motor poles will change to the Hitachi
standard motor constant. If you have an optional remote operator (VOP), it is recommended that you
back up the motor constants with the data R/W function.
・When using a motor with unknown motor constants, inquire about the motor constants from the motor
manufacturer or measure the motor constants using the auto-tuning function. For details, refer to "8.3
Auto-tuning of Motor".
・Refer to "Moving with 9.5.5 V/f Control Automatic Torque Boost" or "9.5.10 Moving with Sensorless
Vector Control" for the tuning of the Automatic Torque Boost function or Sensorless Vector Control
when the satisfactory performance cannot be obtained.
■When using a Sumitomo standard induction motor
Code

Item

Hb110

Async. Motor constant R1(Primary resistance)

Hb112

Async. Motor constant R2(Secondary resistance)

Hb114

Async. Motor constant L(Leakage inductance)

Hb116

Async. Motor constant I0(no-load current)

Hb118

Async. Motor constant J(Moment of inertia)

Description

Data

Parameter for setting the motor constant of an
0.000001 to
induction motor. Changing "IM motor capacity
1000.000000 Ω
selection [Hb102]" or "IM motor pole selection[Hb103]" initializes the motor constants to the
0.000001 tocorresponding Hitachi standard. It can also be
1000.000000 mH
adjusted and changed manually.
In addition, when the motor constant is measured 0.01 to 10000.00 A
by the auto-tuning function, this parameter will be
0.00001 to
overwritten.
10000.00000 kgm2

Initialvalue

Depend on
the motor
capacity

・The base (maximum) frequency is obtained from the rated speed (min-1) and number of poles of the
motor as shown below.
Base (Max. ) frequency (Hz) =Rated speed (min−1 ) × poles
120

8-11
8-11

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8.2 Test run
8.2.1 Simulation mode・If "Simulation mode selection [PA-20]" is set to "Enabled (01)" and the power is turned on again, thesimulation mode is entered and no longer outputting to the motor.
・To cancel the simulation mode, set [PA-20] to "Disabled (00)" and turn the power off and then on again.
・Operation operates in the same manner as normal except that the output to the motor is not present.
Therefore, it is possible to check the terminals and communication operation, etc.
・Although the output to the motor is not performed, internal data such as output current and output
voltage can be specified by parameters or analog input. It is possible to simulate the internal data
during actual operation.
・[P24] Operation can be checked even when power is supplied to the terminals with an external ＋24V
power supply.
・In simulation mode, if you set any error code (1 if "Overcurrent error [E001]") to "Alarm test error code
selection [PA-21]", a trip of the error code set at the time you set will be issued. To cancel the trip, use
the reset operation (press ON or STOP/RESET key of the "Reset [RST]" input terminal) as normal. After
resetting, [PA-21] automatically returns to 0.
・The motor cannot be driven in simulation mode.
・To check the actual operation by connecting the motor, set "Simulation mode selection [PA-20]" to"Disabled (00)" and turn the power on again.
・To operate the simulation mode, leave the input with ＋24V power supply if ＋24V power supply issupplied, or leave the main power input if the main power supply is input, and turn off the power at thestate of termination.
・The simulation mode simulates the terminal operation, and the function by the motor control operation
does not operate.
・If an error code that does not exist in the "Alarm test error code selection [PA-21]" is inserted in thesimulation mode, no error will occur and [PA-21] will automatically return to 0.
・In the simulation mode, if an error code judged as a major failure is inserted in [PA-21], the power mustbe turned on again to cancel the trip.
(Error codes judged as serious failure: [E008], [E011], [E014], and [E030])■Enable simulation mode.
(1) Set "Simulation mode selection [PA-20]" to "Enable (01)".
(2) Shut off the power and turn on the power again.
(3) The simulation mode starts.
■Disable simulation mode.
(1) Set "Simulation mode selection [PA-20]" to "Disable (00)".
(2) Shut off the power and turn on the power again.
(3) The simulation mode is canceled.

8-12
8-12

Chapter 8
CodeParameter Setting and Test Run
Item

Description
Disable00

Enable01

PA-20

Simulation mode
enablePA-21

Error code selection
for alarm test

PA-22

Simulation mode:
Optional output
Enabled (set by parameter [PA-23])
selection for the
output current monitor Enabled (set from [VRF])

Set the error code to be issued. An error that does
not exist does not occur.
Invalid: Although the detected value is displayed as
usual, it is virtually zero because the output
is shut off.

Enabled (set from [IRF])
PA-23

Optional output value
setting for the output
current monitor

PA-24

Simulation mode:
Optional output
selection for the DC
bus voltage monitor

The set value is treated as the internal output value.

0.0 to 3.00×
Inverter rated
output current A

01

Enabled (set from [VRF])

02

Enabled (set from [IRF])

03

The set value is treated as the internal output value.

200V class:
DC0.0 to 450.0 V
400V class:
DC0.0 to 900.0 V

01

01

00

Enabled (set by parameter [PA-28])

01

Enabled (set from [VRF])

02

Enabled (set from [IRF])

03

PA-30

Optional frequency
matching start settingvalue

The set value is treated as the internal output value.

The set value is treated as the internal output value.

-500.0 to 500.0 ％Invalid: Restart from the output frequency when aretry cause occurs.

00

Enabled (set by parameter [PA-31])

01

Enabled (set from [VRF])

02

Enabled (set from [IRF])

03

8-13
8-13

200V class
270.0
400V class
540.0

01

03

Invalid: Displays the output torque assumed incontrol.

Simulation mode:
Optional frequency
matching start enablesetting

01

02

200V class: 0.0 to 300.0 V
400V class: 0.0 to 600.0 V

PA-29

0.00

00

The set value is treated as the internal output value.

Optional output value
setting for the output
torque monitor

PA-31

0

02

Enabled (set by parameter [PA-25])

PA-26

PA-28

01

00

Invalid: Displays the output voltage expected forSimulation mode:
control.
Optional output
Enabled (set by parameter [PA-27])
selection for the
Enabled (set from [VRF])
output voltage monitor
Enabled (set from [IRF])

Simulation mode:
Optional output
selection for the
output torque monitor

00

00

Disable: Displays the detection value as usual.
+24V power feed will be zero.

PA-25

Optional output value
setting for the output
voltage monitor

0 to 255

Initialvalue

03

Optional output value
setting for the DC bus
voltage monitor

PA-27

Data

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.0

01

0.0

01

0.00

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run■((e.g.1) Check the operation when the output terminal function "Alarm [ML]" is output.
・Make sure that "Voltage monitor between P-N arbitrary output selection [PA-24]" is set to "Enable(Parameter setting) (01)" and "Voltage monitor between P-N arbitrary output selection [PA-25]" is within
the normal operation range. Then, start operation.
・After starting operation, set "Voltage monitor between P-N arbitrarily output selection [PA-25]" to themax.
・[PA-25] After setting, an "overvoltage error [E007]" occurs and the "alarm signal [ML]" is turned ON.

Overvoltage level[PA-25] Setting
P-N voltage
Monitor value

0V

Output frequency[ML] Output■((e.g. 2) Check the signal output level of the output terminal function "Overload warning [OL]".
・Set "output current monitor optional output selection [PA-22]" to "Enabled (set from VRF) (02)".
・Set "Overload notice level1 [CE106]" to begin operation.
・[VRF] Increase or decrease the voltage/current input to the terminal and change the value on the"Output current monitor [dA-02]".
・If the value displayed in [dA-02] exceeds [CE106], "Overload notice [OL]" is ON.

[VRF] input to terminal

Overload warninglevel 1 [CE106]
Output current
monitor value

0A

Output frequency[OL] Output

8-14
8-14

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8.2.2 Motor test run at no load
・To confirm that there are no basic problems with the inverter, motor, wiring, etc., carry out a test run
with no load with only the motor connected in the procedure described in the next section.
『8.1 Perform the necessary settings for the motor to be used in the trial operation according to the
Mandatory Settings for operation, and then perform the trial operation with no load to confirm that the
motor can be turned forward, backward, or stopped without any problems.
・Be sure to read "Chapter 1 Safety Precautions/Risks" carefully before starting operation.
It is recommended that the control method be used as V/f control in the test run of the motor only.
CautionBurnout

・Do not operate the motor with an extremely small capacity than the inverter capacity.
Also, when performing a trial run with a motor of capacity under several frames, set the control
method as V/f control, and set the basic settings of the motor such as motor capacity andelectronic thermal level according to the motor used.

DO・If the setting is incorrect, a current larger than the rated motor current may flow, causing motor
burnout.
・STOP/RESET buttons on the control panel can be enabled or disabled using STOP key selection[AA-13]. Prepare an emergency stop/emergency shut-off switch separately in case of a situation.

■Check items for test run at no load
・Check if the machine operation direction is correct, if the machine operates smoothly and there is noabnormal noise or vibration, and if the machine operates normally without abnormal noise or vibrationeven if the frequency command or operation direction is changed.
・Check that there is no trip during acceleration/deceleration, and that the speed and frequency meterare correct.
・Check that the current and voltage values have a margin to the trip value in "Output current monitor[dA-02]" and "DC voltage monitor [dA-40]."・If "Overcurrent error [E001]" or "Overvoltage error [E007]" occurs during a trial run, try increasing theacceleration/deceleration times. Refer to "Chapter 15 Troubleshooting" for more information on
tripping and corrective actions.

8-15
8-15

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

Operation by inputting operation command and frequency command from the operation panel(1) Before test operation, check that each parameter is set correctly according to "8.1 Mandatory Settings forOperation".
(2) Set "Output frequency setting (monitor) [FA-01]", "RUN key operation direction selection [AA-12]", "1st main speedcommand selection [AA101]" and "1st operation command selection [AA111]" as shown in the table below. It is
recommended that [FA-01] be at a low speed of about 10 Hz for safety at first.
The default setting of "Acceleration time setting (monitor) [FA-10]"/"Deceleration time setting (monitor) [FA-12]" is
10 seconds. Change it as necessary. In the no-load trial operation, the constant-torque property of V/f control isrecommended for the first control method [AA121].
(3) Check that "0.00Hz" is displayed in "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]".
(4) When RUN button is pressed, the operation indicator [RUN] on the control panel lights and the motor starts
rotating.
(5) Check that there is no abnormality in the output frequency monitor, actual motor rotation speed, motor rotation
direction, and inverter. Check the rotating direction of the motor by "Operation direction monitor [dA-03]".
(6) If it is OK, use [FA-01] to gradually increase the output frequency.
(7) After confirming the operation, press STOP button. When the motor starts to decelerate and stops, the operation
indicator [RUN] on the control panel turns off.

Code

Item

Description

dA-01

Output frequency monitor

Displays the inverter output frequency.

dA-03

Rotation direction monitor

Displays the inverter operation direction.

FA-01
FA-10
FA-12
AA-12
AA101
AA111
AA121

Main speed reference setting(monitor)
Acceleration time setting(monitor)
Deceleration time setting(monitor)

Set the output frequency command to the motor.

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to 590.00 Hz
F (Forward)r (Reverse)o (Stop)
0.00 toMaximum frequency Hz-

Set the acceleration time/deceleration time as
required. The default settings are both 10.00 s.

0.00 to 3600.00 s

RUN-key command rotation
direction

Set the rotational direction when operating with
RUN switch on the control panel.

00 (Forward)
01 (Reverse)00

Main speed input source
selection, 1st-motor
RUN command input source
selection, 1st-motor
Control mode selection, 1stmotor

Operation is performed with the frequency
command set to [FA-01].

07

07

Press RUN button to start operation.

02

02

Operation with the constant torquecharacteristic of V/f control is recommended.

00

00

Lights when the frequency data isdisplayed.
When the operation commanddestination is the operation panel,
RUN key is enabled and the operationcommand indicator lamp lights.
Lights up when operation starts
by pressing RUN button.

8-16
8-16

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

Operation by inputting operation and frequency command from the control circuit terminal(1) Before test operation, check that each parameter is set correctly according to "8.1 Mandatory Settings
for Operation".
(2) Set "Output frequency setting (monitor) [FA-01]", "First main speed command selection [AA101]","First operation command selection [AA111]", "Input terminal function [FR] selection [CA-01]", "Input
terminal function [RR] selection [CA-02]" as shown in the table below. It is recommended that [FA-01]
be at a low speed of about 10 Hz for safety at first.
(3) Check that "0.00Hz" is displayed in "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]".
(4) Check in [FA-01] that the analog voltage is 0V and the frequency command is 0.00Hz. When you
ON the "Forward [FR]" input terminal or the "Reverse [RR]" input terminal, the operation indicator[RUN] on the control panel lights.
(5) When the analog voltage, which is a frequency command, is gradually increased, the motor starts torotate.
(6) Check that there is no abnormality in the output frequency monitor, actual motor rotation speed,
motor rotation direction, and inverter. Check the rotational direction of the motor by "Operation
direction monitor [dA-03]".
(7) After confirming operation, turn OFF the [FW] input terminal or [RV] input terminal. When the motor
starts to decelerate and stops, the operation indicator [RUN] on the control panel turns off.
Code
dA-01

Item

Description

Output frequency monitor

Data

Displays the inverter output frequency.

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

Initial value
-

dA-03

Rotation direction monitor

Displays the inverter operation direction.

F (Forward)r (Reverse)/o (Stop)

FA-01

Main speed reference setting(monitor)

When the frequency command destination
is analog input, it is the main speedcommand monitor.

0.0 toMax. frequency Hz

10.0

Set the acceleration time and deceleration
time as necessary.
The default settings are both 10.00s.

0.00 to 3600.00 s

10.00

01

07

00

02

00

00

Assign "Forward rotation [FR]".

001

001

Assign "Reverse rotation [RR]".

002

002

FA-10
FA-12
AA101
AA111
AA121
CA-01
CA-02

Acceleration time 1 setting ormonitor, 1st-motor
Deceleration time 1 setting ormonitor, 1st-motor
Main speed input source
selection, 1st-motor
RUN command input source
selection, 1st-motor
Control mode selection, 1stmotor
Input terminal function [FR]selection
Input terminal function [RR]
selection[VRF] The analog input from the terminal isregarded as a frequency command.
Operate with forward rotation [FR]/reverse
rotation [RR] of the input terminal.
Operates with the constant-torquecharacteristic of V/f control.

■W
Wire control circuit terminal block example
10V
+24V

＋V

VRF

3

IRF

2

COM

DFL

RR

FR

COM

PCS

1

Frequency input source for use
variable resistor (1kΩ)

Reverse rotation [RR]
commandForward rotation [FR]commandThis is an example when using a power supply in this wiring diagram inside the inverter

8-17
8-17

P24

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8.2.3 Connect the machine load and test run
・If no problem is found in the no-load operation, perform a test run with the actual load to which themechanical system is connected, and confirm that there is no problem.

CautionBurnout
FailureDO・Be sure to read "Chapter 1 Safety Precautions/Risks" carefully before starting operation.
Before performing a test run with the mechanical load connected, be sure to perform the test run andoperation・check with the motor alone in accordance with "8.2.2 Connecting the Motor Only and Test Run."・Be sure to set the motor basic settings such as motor capacity and electronic thermal levelaccording to the motor to be used. Operation with incorrect settings may cause damage to the load
machine or burnout of the motor.
・STOP/RESET buttons on the control panel can be enabled or disabled using STOP key selection[AA-13]. Prepare an emergency stop/emergency shut-off switch separately in case of a situation.

onfirmation during trial operation under actual load
■Co・Confirm that the machine operation direction is correct and that the machine moves smoothly.
・If possible, check that there is no vibration or abnormal noise of the machine even if the frequency
command or the operation direction is changed.
・Check that there is no trip during acceleration/deceleration, and that the speed and frequency meterare correct.
・Check if "overcurrent error [E001]", "overload error ([E005], [E038], [E039])" or "overvoltage error[E007]" occurs during trial operation.
・In "Output current monitor [dA-02]", "DC voltage monitor [dA-40]", "Electronic thermal load ratio
monitor (motor) [dA-42]", and "Electronic thermal load ratio monitor (inverter) [dA-43]", confirm that
there is a margin for the value at which the values of the current, voltage, and load ratio monitor aretripped.
・If operation during V/f control is not stable, adjust it referring to "9.5.9 Stabilizing Motor Hunting".
・If adequate performance is not obtained, such as when starting with automatic torque boost or
operation with sensorless vector control, such as when the motor gets shocked or the motor is
distorted, refer to "Moving with 9.5.5 V/f Control Automatic Torque Boost" and "9.5.10 Moving with
Sensorless Vector Control".
・For more information about tripping and corrective actions, see "Chapter 15 Troubleshooting".

Test Run under Actual Load with Load Machine Connected(1) After confirming that the motor is completely stopped, connect the mechanical system and confirm
that there are no loose mounting screws, etc. If the inverter is connected, wait at least 10 minutes
after the power is turned off, use a tester or the like to check that there is no residual voltage between
the [P/+] and [N/-] terminals on the main circuit terminal block, and then perform the work after
confirming safety.
(2) When using automatic torque boost or sensorless vector control, be sure to set the motor constant of
the motor to be used. For details, refer to "8.1.5 Setting Motor Constant" or "8.3 Performing Autotuning of Motor". If auto-tuning cannot be performed with the load machinery connected, perform
auto-tuning with only the motor connected in advance and calculate the moment of inertia of the loadin terms of motor shaft and add it to "IM motor constant J [Hb118]."(3) Start operation using the operation command as a ON after making the required settings such as
frequency command selection and operation command selection. It is recommended to set thefrequency command to the low speed of 10Hz level for safety at first.
(4) Check the above items to see if there is no problem in the operating condition.

8-18
8-18

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

8.3 Auto-tuning
8.3.1 Procedure for auto-tuning of induction motor
・Auto-tuning is a function that measures and automatically sets the required motor constants in order toincrease the accuracy of automatic torque boost and sensorless vector control, etc.
・If you do not know the motor constant, perform auto-tuning to measure the motor constant.
・Auto-tuning can be selected from two methods of "Non-rotation (01)" and "Rotation (02)" in "Autotuning selection [HA-01]". Select according to the situation.
・When auto-tuning an induction motor (IM), set "Control method [AA121]" to IM control method "V/fcontrol (IM) ((00) to (03)" and "Sensorless vector control (IM) (08)".
・The measured motor constants are data (including wiring) for one phase of Y-connection.
・In the factory setting, the motor constant of the Sumitomo standard induction motor is set. When usinga Sumitomo standard induction motor, characteristics can be obtained without problems in most caseseven if auto-tuning is not performed.
・If you change "IM motor capacity selection [Hb102]" or "IM motor pole selection [Hb103]" after autotuning, the motor will be initialized to the corresponding Hitachi standard motor constants. [Hb102],
Be sure to set [Hb103] prior to performing auto-tuning.
・In the factory default parameter state, performing auto-tuning first enables smooth tuning.
・The motor capacity that can be measured is up to the maximum applicable frame and one lower frame
motor. Otherwise, the correct constant may not be obtained. When performing auto-tuning with a oneframe lower motor, set "Overload Limit 1 Select [bA122]" to "Enable at Acceleration/Constant Speed(01)", and set "Overload Limit 1 Level [bA123]" to 1.5 times the rated motor current.
■Parameters related to auto-tuning of induction motor (IM)
Code

Item

Description
DisableHA-01 Auto-tuning selection

HA-02

Auto-tuning RUN command
source selection

Data
00

Enabled: Motor non-rotating

01

Enabled: Motor rotation
Keypad (RUN-key)

02
00

Follow the [AA111]/[AA211] setting

01

Hb102 IM Motor Capacity Select0.01 to 11.00 kW

Hb103 IM motor pole selection

2/4/6/ to /46/48 pole
30.0 toMax. frequency Hz
Base frequency to590.00 Hz
1 to 1000 V
0.01 to 10000.00 A

Hb104 IM Base frequency

Set according to the motor specifications.

Hb105 IM Maximum frequency
Hb106 IM motor rated voltage
Hb108 IM Motor Rated Current
Hb110

IM motor constant R1(primary resistance)

IM motor constant R2
Hb112(secondary resistance)
Async. Motor constant L
Hb114(Leakage inductance)
Hb116

IM motor constant I0(no-load current)

Hb118

IM motor constant J(moment of inertia)

Initialvalue

Parameter for setting the motor constant of
an induction motor. When the motor
constant is measured with the auto-tuning
function, this parameter will be overwritten.
It is also possible to adjust and changemanually after performing auto-tuning.

00
Factory
setting
01
60.0
60.0
200/400

0.000001 to
1000.000000 Ω
0.000001 to
1000.000000 mH
0.01 to 10000.00 A
0.01 to10000.00000 kgm2

8-19
8-19

00

Depend on
the motor
capacityChapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

Auto-tuning execution step
1. Pre-setting of parameters(1) Select "IM motor capacity selection [Hb102]" and "IM motor pole selection [Hb103]" according to
the motor to be used.
(2) Set the "IM Base Frequency [Hb104]" and "IM Motor Rated Voltage [Hb106]" according to thespecifications of the motor to be measured.
(3) Set "DC braking selection [AF101]" to disable (00) and "Vector control mode selection [AA123]" to"Speed/torque control mode (00)". If it is not "speed/torque control mode (00)", the correct
measurement will not be performed.
(4) Do not ON "Torque control enable [ATR]" of the input terminal function. [ATR] If the input terminal
is ON, the instrument will not measure correctly.

2. Selection of "Motor rotation" and "Motor non-rotation"
・Set whether the motor rotates or not during auto-tuning to "Auto-tuning selection [HA-01]." Each ofthem has the following characteristics.
[HA-01] Setting

Description

Non-rotating (01)Measure the motor constant without rotating the motor. Use this function when the motor must not rotate.
Because the motor does not rotate, the motor constant I0 (no-load current) and motor constant J (momentof inertia) cannot be measured.
Even "Non-rotation (01)" may cause the motor to rotate slightly.

Rotation (02)Measure the motor constant by actually rotating the motor. Use it when there is no problem even if the motor
rotates.

・Note the following when "Rotate (02)" is selected.
- Rotation to around the base frequency of 80% is acceptable.
- The motor is not driven from the outside.
Warning- The brake must be open.
InjuryFailureDO・Since the output torque is not sufficient during auto-tuning, there is a possibility of slipping off inelevators, etc. In such applications, disconnect the motor from the load machine and perform autotuning with the motor alone. Since the measured motor constant J (moment of inertia) is a single
motor, separately set the value obtained by converting the moment of inertia of the load machine tothe motor shaft.
・During auto-tuning, when the moment of inertia of the load machine is large or the receiving voltage
is high, the deceleration stop tends to be slow. In this case, increase the deceleration time or perform
auto-tuning as the motor alone and set the motor constant J (moment of inertia) separately.
・In a machine (elevator, ball screw, etc.) where the motor shaft rotation amount is limited, themachine may be damaged due to the drive exceeding the allowable rotation amount. Select "Motor
non-rotation".

8-20
8-20

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

3. Auto-tuning
・When the operation command is turned ON from the operation command destination set in"Operation command selection [AA111]", auto-tuning starts according to the following steps. Whenthe operation command is OFF, auto-tuning can be stopped halfway. However, the tuning data is not
memorized.
・If abnormal termination or trip occurs during auto-tuning, refer to "Countermeasures for failure in the
middle of auto-tuning" in this section to clear the cause of the error.
(1) AC excitation first time (Motor does not rotate.)↓(2) Second time of AC excitation (Motor does not rotate.)↓[HA-01]: When "Non-rotation (01)" is selected.
(3) DC excitation 1st time (Motor does not rotate.)↓(4) V/f control operation (The motor rotates up to 80 % of the base frequency.) Note:1↓(5) Sensorless vector control operation (Motor rotates up to X % Note:2 of base frequency.) Note:1↓(6) DC excitation 2nd time (Motor does not rotate.)↓(7) Displays the tuning result.
The tuning result is displayed as follows.
If abnormal termination occurs, execute auto-tuning again.
The display is released by pressing STOP/RESET.
Normal completion Abnormal end

Note: 1. (4)(5) will not be executed in case of "Motor not rotating".
2. The rotational speed in (5) is as follows when the larger of the acceleration time anddeceleration time in (4) is taken as T.
When 0s ＜ T ＜ 50s: X＝40%
When 50s ≦ T ＜ 100s: X＝20%
When 100s ≦ T: X＝10%

4. Setting at the end of auto-tuning・After normal completion, the measured value will be overwritten in "IM motor constant ([Hb110] to[Hb118])".
・If auto-tuning is performed without rotating the motor, "IM motor constant I0 [Hb116] and "IM motor
constant J [Hb118]" are not measured. Make the following settings.
- No-load current I0: Measure and set the no-load current of the motor itself in advance when
operating at an output frequency equal to IM base frequency [Hb104], using "Control method[AA121]" as "V/f constant-torque characteristic (00)". Or, set the motor no-load current confirmedwith the motor manufacturer to "IM Motor Constant I0[Hb116".
- Moment of inertia J: Calculate the moment of inertia of the load in terms of motor shaft and set
the sum of the moment of inertia of the motor alone to "IM Motor Constant J [Hb118]."
・After auto-tuning is completed, "Auto-tuning selection [HA-01]" automatically returns to "Disabled (00)"regardless of normal end or abnormal end. To execute auto-tuning again, set it again.

8-21
8-21

Chapter 8

Parameter Setting and Test Run

Action to be taken when auto-tuning fails in the middle
・If abnormal termination or trip occurs and forced termination occurs during auto-tuning, refer to thefollowing troubleshooting and "Chapter 15 Troubleshooting" to clear the cause of abnormal termination
or trip. Then, set "Auto-tuning selection [HA-01]" to "Non-rotating (01)" or "Rotating (02)" again andperform auto-tuning again.
Possible cause

Example of remedy

The control system does not match the motor.

Set the control method [AA121] to "V/f constant torque characteristic (00)".
Otherwise, it may end abnormally.

The motor nameplate data setting is incorrect.
STOP/RESET button was pressed.

Incorrect parameter settings related to motor nameplate data may cause tripping
such as overcurrent. 『 8.1.3 Refer to "Setting Motor Nameplate Data to
Parameters" and check the parameter settings.
Press STOP/RESET key. Auto-tuning is interrupted. Check the auto-tuning setting
again and start.

A trip occurred due to external factors such as
braking.

The cause of the trip must be removed.

The input pin function was activated.

If the input terminal function operates during auto-tuning, tuning may behindered. Perform auto-tuning after confirming that the input terminal function isOFF.

The motor capacity is too small for theapplicable motor frame of the inverter.

If tuning does not finish normally, you must set the motor constant manually.

"Overvoltage error [E007]" occurred because
the machine loading is large or the
deceleration duration is short.
"Overcurrent fault [E001]" occurred during
acceleration or deceleration due to heavyloading.

・Increase the deceleration time. Return the deceleration time to the originalvalue after completion of auto-tuning.
・Perform auto-tuning as the motor alone.
Increase the acceleration time/deceleration time. After auto-tuning is completed,return the acceleration time/deceleration time to the original value before use.

8-22
8-22

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9

Chapter 9 Inverter Function

This chapter describes the various functions installed in the inverter. Select the function you want to use
and perform the setting.
Before you perform any work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Precautions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters to ensure safety.

9.1 Selecting RUN command
9.1.1 Types of RUN command・The RUN command input source can be set in "RUN command input source selection [AA111]".
For details, refer to the explanation in the following section and beyond.

RUN command input sources
Forward [FR]/Reverse[RR] (00)

RUN command source
selection when [F-OP] isactive [CA-71] (00 to 04)

3 wire [STA]/[STP]/[F/R] (01)【00】

Keypad (RUN-key) (02)
RS485 (03)

RUN command Input
source selection[AA111] (00 to 04)

Option (04)【02】

Force operation[F-OP](023)
ON

OFF

RUN
commandNote: The values in square brackets and the switch positions shown in the figure are the default values.
All functions not assigned to "Input terminal function ([CA-01] to [CA-08]) are turned off.
Code

AA111

Item

RUN
commandInput
sourceselection

Description
Input terminal function "Forward rotation [FR]", "Reverse rotation [RR]" set in thecontrol circuit terminal as RUN command.
Input terminal function "3-wire start [STA]", "3-wire stop [STP]" and "3-wire
Forward/Reverse [F/R]" set in the control circuit terminal is regarded as the RUN
command.

Data

Initial
value

00
01
02

Enter the RUN command from the keypad or optional remote operator.

02

Enter the RUN command via Modbus communication.

03

Enter the RUN command via communication option.

04

・When "Force operation [F-OP]" is turned ON, the RUN command source switches the one set to "RUN
command source selection when [F-OP] is active [CA-71]" regardless of the "operation command
selection [AA111]" setting. For details, refer to "9.1.7 Temporarily Changing the RUN Command Input
source". At the same time, Speed input source also switches to the input source set to "Speed reference
source selection when [F-OP] is enabled [CA-70]" regardless of the "Main speed input source selection[AA101]" setting. For details, refer to "9.2.1 Types of Frequency Command" or "9.2.14 Temporarily
Changing the Frequency command input source".
・When an operation command is given from the operation screen of PC software, [AA101] and [AA111]
are forcibly overwritten with [AA101] = "Parameter setting (07)" and [AA111] ="RS485 (03)",
respectively, when the operation screen is opened. When the operation screen is closed, they return tothe setting when the operation screen is opened.

9-1
9-1

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.1.2 Operation by RUN key on the keypad
・To start or stop the inverter using the RUN and STOP/RESET keys on the keypad or the optional remote
operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards), set the "RUN command input source selection [A]" parameter to"Keypad's RUN-key (02)".
・To start operation using the RUN key on the keypad, set the correct direction of operation with "RUNkey command rotation direction [AA-12]".
・When the [AA111] is set to " Keypad's RUN-key (02)", or when the RUN command is switched to the
keypad by the input terminal function "Force operation [F-OP]", the output terminal function "Runcommand = Keypad is selected [REF]" is turned ON. For details of [F-OP], refer to "9.1.7 Changing
Operation Command Destination Temporarily".
Code
AA111
AA-12
CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Item

Description

RUN command input
source selection
RUN-key commandrotation direction

Operation is started and stopped using the RUN and STOP/RESET keys on
the keypad or optional remote operator.
Forward rotation operation from the keypad.
Reverse rotation operation from the keypad.
Run command = Keypad is selected [REF]：
This output terminal turns on when inverter RUN command can beinitiated using the RUN key on the keypad or optional remote operator.

Output terminal
function

Data

Initial
value

02

02

00
01

00

011

002
001
017

・For the inverter to start operation, a frequency command is required in addition to a RUN command.

9.1.3 Operation by forward/reverse input terminals
・To perform forward/reverse rotation and stop operation using the input terminal function "Forward
rotation [FR]" and "Reverse rotation [RR]" on the control circuit terminal, set the "RUN command input
source selection [AA111]" to "[FR]/[RR] terminal (01)" and assign [FR] and [RR] to "Input terminal
function ([CA-01] to [CA-08])".
・In the factory default state, [FR] terminal is assigned to terminal [FR] and [RR] terminal to terminal [RR].
The terminal assignments can be changed by configuring [CA-01] to [CA-08].
・The a/b (NO/NC) contact state can be changed for each terminal by configuring the "Input terminal
active state ([CA-21] to [CA-28])".
・When the [FR] and [RR] terminals are both on at the same time, a stop command is issued. The
relationship between the [FR]/[RR] terminal input states and the RUN commands is shown in thefollowing table.
■"Forward rotation [FR]"/"Reverse rotation [RR]" states and RUN command
DFM

DFL

RR

Input terminal

Code

Item

AA111

RUN command
input source
selection

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

CA-21 toCA-28

Input terminal
active state

FR

COM

FR

RR

RUN command

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

Stop
Forward
ReverseStop

Data

Initialvalue

The RUN command from the control terminal is enabled, and inverter
operation can be started and stopped using the "Forward rotation[FR]"/"Reverse rotation [RR]" input terminals.

02

02

Forward rotation [FR]:When turned on, operation is in the forward direction.

001

Description

Reverse rotation [RR]:
When turned on, operation is in the reverse direction.
"a" contact state (NO: Normally Open)"b" contact state (NC: Normally Closed)

002
00
01

00

・For the inverter to start operation, a frequency command is required in addition to a RUN command.

9-2
9-2

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.1.4 Operation by 3-wire control function
・To perform forward/reverse rotation and stop operation using 3-wire control function, set "RUN command
input source selection [AA111]" to "3-wire (01)", and assign "3-wire start [STA](016)", "3-wire stop
[STP](017)", and "3-wire forward/reverse [F/R](018)" to "Input terminal function ([CA-01] to [CA-08])".
・When the [STP] terminal is ON, operation is started by a rising-edge input on the [STA] terminal. Whenthe [STP] terminal is turned off while the inverter is running, inverter will stop the operation.
・[STP] terminal is fixed to the b-contact (NC) input regardless of the setting of "Input terminal active state([CA-21] to [CA-28])" for the corresponding terminal.
■Example of terminal assignment and operation when using 3-wire control function
Input terminal[STA] input

ON

OFF

DFL
RR
FR
DFM
COM
[F/R] [STP] [STA][F/R] inputThis example shows a following terminal
assignment.
Terminal [FR] = [STA]
Terminal [RR] = [STP]
Terminal [DFL] = [F/R]

Outputfrequency

OFF

ON[STP] input

OFF

Forwardrotation

ON

Reverserotation

Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

AA111

RUN command
input source
selection

RUN and stop is performed using the [STA]/[STP] terminal from the control
circuit terminal.

01

02

Input terminal
function

3-wire start [STA]:
The start signal for the 3-wire control function.
Operation starts when [STA] is ON while [STP] is ON (circuit is normallyopen due to the "b" contact state).
3-wire stop [STP]:
The stop signal for the 3-wire control function. It switches to the "b" (NC)contact state during assignment. The inverter stops when it is OFF state.
3-wire forward/reverse [F/R]:
OFF = Forward rotation, ON = Reverse rotation

CA-01 to
CA-08

016
017
018

・For the inverter to start operation, a frequency command is required in addition to a RUN command.

9-3
9-3

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.1.5 Operation by Modbus-RTU communication (RS485 communication)
・To perform forward/reverse rotation and stop operation using Modbus-RTU communication (RS485
communication), set the "RUN command input source selection [AA111]" to "RS485 (03)".
Code

Item

AA111

RUN command input
source selection

Description
Modbus-RTU communication (RS485 communication) commands areused to start and stop inverter operation.

Data

Initial
value

03

02

・For the inverter to start operation, a frequency command is required in addition to a RUN command.
・For more information regarding Modbus-RTU communication (RS485 communication), refer to"Chapter 11 Modbus Communication".

9.1.6 Operation by communication option
・To perform forward/reverse rotation and stop operation using communication option, set the "RUN
command input source selection [AA111]" to "Option (04)".
Code

Item

AA111

RUN command input
source selection

Description
Commands from the communication option are used to start and stop
inverter operation.

Data

Initial
value

04

02

・For the inverter to start operation, a frequency command is required in addition to a RUN command.
・For more information regarding communication option, refer to "Chapter 13 Communication Option".

9.1.7 Temporarily changing RUN command input source
・When the "Force operation [F-OP](023)" input terminal is turned ON, RUN command input source set in"RUN command source selection when [F-OP] is active [CA-71]" is switched in preference to RUN
command input source set in "RUN command input source selection [AA111]".
■"Force operation [F-OP]" operation
Force operation[F-OP]

RUN command source selection
when [F-OP] is active [CA-71]

ON
RUN command

RUN command input source selection[AA111]OFF

Note: Functions not assigned to input terminals [FR] to [PLA] are OFF.

Code
CA-01 to
CA-08

CA-71

Item
Input terminal
function

RUN command
source selection
when [F-OP] isactiveDescription
Force operation [F-OP]：
When [F-OP] input terminal is ON, the RUN command input source andfrequency reference input source are switched to the setting of [CA-70]/[CA-71].
RUN/stop is performed using the "Forward [FR]"/"Reverse [RR]" input terminals
assigned to the control terminal.
RUN/stop is performed by the "3-wire start [STA]"/"3-wire stop [STP]" input
terminals assigned to the control terminal.
RUN/stop is performed with RUN key and STOP/RESET key on the keypad.
RUN/stop is performed by a command from Modbus-RTU communication(RS485 communication).
RUN/stop is performed according to the command from the communication
option.

9-4
9-4

Data

Initial
value

023

-

00
01
02
03
04

00

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

・When the "Force operation [F-OP]" input terminal is turned ON, the frequency reference input source isalso the input source set to "Speed reference source selection when [F-OP] is active [CA-70]" isenabled. For details, refer to "9.2.15 Temporarily Changing the Frequency Reference".
・When the [F-OP] input terminal is turned ON/OFF and the RUN command input source is changed
while the inverter is running, the drive will be stopped once. To start operation again, OFF the RUN
command and ON it again. If the change by the [F-OP] input terminal is only the frequency reference
input source, RUN state is continued.

9.1.8 Disabling the STOP/RESET key on the keypad
・When the "RUN command input source selection [AA111]" is set to anything other than "Keypad's RUNkey (02)", the inverter stop command from the keypad can be disabled by setting "STOP-key enable[AA-13]" to "Disable (00)" or "Enable at only trip reset (02)".
・To use the STOP/RESET-key only for trip reset, set the "STOP-key enable [AA-13]" to "Enable at only trip
reset (02)".
・To issue a stop command from the keypad in an emergency event, set the "STOP-key enable [AA-13]" to"Enable (01)". The STOP/RESET-key can stop output even if the RUN command is issued by a source
other than "Keypad's RUN-key (02)".
・When a stop command is issued from the keypad while the "Operation command selection [AA111]" isset to other than "Keypad's RUN-key (02)", the external command must be OFF once and ON again inorder to operate again.
・The setting of [AA-13] is enabled when "RUN command input source selection [AA111]" is set to otherthan "Keypad's RUN-key (02)".
Code

AA111

AA-13

Description

Data

Initialvalue

RUN/STOP command by "Forward [FR]"/"Reverse [RR]" input terminal
RUN/STOP command by the 3-wire control function
RUN/STOP command from keypad
RUN/STOP command from modbus comunication
RUN/STOP command from communication option
Disable:The keypad STOP/RESET-key is disabled when the "RUN command input
source selection [AA111]" is set to other than " Keypad's RUN-key (02)".
Enable:The STOP/RESET-key on the keypad is always enabled.
Enable at only trip reset：
The STOP/RESET-key on the keypad can be used to reset a trip
only after the inverter has tripped.

00
01
02
03
04

02

Item

RUN command input
source selection

STOP-key enable

9-5
9-5

00
01
02

00

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2 Selecting frequency reference
9.2.1 Types of frequency reference
・The following diagram shows the parameters and input terminal functions that affect the frequency
reference input source selection.
・The frequency reference input source is set according to the "Main speed input source selection[AA101]". Note that when multiple functions are turned on, the frequency reference for each input
terminal function is selected with the following order or priority: "Jogging [JOG]", "Force operation [FOP]" and then "Multi-speed ([DFL] to [DHH])" or "Multi-speed bit ([SF1] to [SF7])".
・When the frequency reference input source is the multi-speed 0, multi-speed 1 to 15, or jogging
frequency, the "Main speed reference setting (monitor) [FA-01]" can be used to change the frequency
reference. A setting change with the [FA-01] also changes the value of the selected frequency input
source parameter.
(For example, when the frequency reference input source is set to "Multi-speed 1 setting [Ab-11]", [Ab11] setting is displayed in [FA-01]. When [FA-01] is changed, this is also reflected in [Ab-11].)・When the frequency reference input source is an analog input or Modbus communication, etc., [FA-01]
is used to monitor the output frequency reference value.
[FA-01]Main speed reference setting(monitor)

Jogging029[JOG]
F-OP
selection[CA-70](01 to 15)[AG-20]
Jogging frequency[Ab110]Parameter setting (07)(Main speed 0 setting)Communication option (09)Pulse input (12)Parameter setting (07)(Sub speed setting)[FA-02]Sub speed reference setting(monitor)[AA106]
Add freq.
Force
operation
023[F-OP]ON

Multi-speed
003 to 006[DFL to DHH]
OFF
007 to 013[SF1 to 7]
Main speedON
Main⇔sub015[AUT]
OFF
ON

Main
speed
[AA101](01 to 15)【07】

PID operation (15)[AA104]OFF

Force operation

Multi-speed1 to 15

Modbus communication (08)Frequency
reference【01】[Ab-11] to [Ab-25]

Analog input VRF, IRF(01, 02)

ON

Sub
speed

+

OFF
Freq. addition
functionOFF[AA102](00 to 15)

Sub
speed

Freq. add
014 [ADD]
ON【00】

Calculation symbol[AA105](00 to 03)(00: Disable)【00】

Calculation
symbol[AA105]=00≠00

Calculation function
Note: The values in【 】and the switch positions shown in the figure are the default values. All input terminal
functions not assigned to "Input terminal function ([CA-01] to [CA-08])" are turned off.

9-6
9-6

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

・The following table shows the details of the frequency input sources that can be selected with the"Main speed input source selection [AA101]".
Code

AA101

Item

Description

Main speed input
source selection

The frequency reference is set using analog input to terminal [VRF] on the control
circuit terminal.
The frequency reference is set using analog input to terminal [IRF] on the control
circuit terminal.
The frequency reference is set according to the [FA-01] setting using the
keypad or remote operator.
The frequency reference is set using Modbus communication.

Data

Initial
value

01
02
07

07

08

The frequency reference is set using communication option.

09

The frequency reference is set using pulse input.
The frequency reference is set according to the calculation by PID function.

12
15

・When issuing a RUN command from the PC software, "Main speed input source selection [AA101]" ="Parameter setting (07)" and "RUN command input source selection [AA101]" = "RS485 (03)" areforcibly written when the operation screen is opened. When the operation screen is closed, thesevalues return to the original values set before the operation screen is opened.

9-7
9-7

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.2 Setting frequency reference by keypad
・To set the output frequency reference from the keypad or optional remote operator, set the "Mainspeed input source selection [AA101]" to "Parameter setting (07)".
・When [AA101] is set to "Parameter setting (07)", the output frequency is set by "Main speed reference
setting (monitor) [FA-01]" or "Multi-speed 0 setting [Ab110]". Similarly, when "Sub speed input source
selection [AA102]" is set to "Parameter setting (07)", the output frequency is set by "Sub speed
reference setting (monitor) [FA-02]" or "Sub speed setting [AA104]".
e.g. : When [FA-01] is changed, [Ab110] is also changed to same value.
When "2nd control [SET]" is ON, "Multi-speed 0 setting, 2nd motor [Ab210]" is changed.
・When [AA101] is set to "Parameter setting (07)", or the frequency reference from the keypad has beenswitched by the input terminal function "Force operation [F-OP]", the output terminal function"Frequency reference = Keypad selected [FREF]" is ON when the frequency reference from the keypador the remote operator is accepted. For details of [F-OP] input terminal, refer to "9.2.15 Temporarily
Changing the Frequency Reference".
・For details regarding operation when a remote operator is connected, refer to "7.2.9 Remote Operator
Functions".
Code

Item

FA-01

Main speed reference
setting (monitor)

FA-02

Sub speed reference
setting (monitor)

AA101

Main speed input
source selection

AA102

Sub speed input
source selection

AA104

Sub speed setting

Ab110

Multi-speed 0 setting

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

Description
This parameter is used when setting the frequency reference ofmain speed from the keypad. Changing [FA-01] will also change[Ab110].
This parameter is used when setting the frequency reference ofsub speed from the keypad. Changing [FA-02] will also change[AA104].
From the keypad, set the main speed with the parametersetting. Use [FA-01] or [Ab110] to set the output frequency ofmain speed.
From the keypad, set the sub speed with the parametersetting. Use [FA-02] or [AA104] to set the output frequency ofsub speed.
This parameter is used to set the sub speed from the keypad.
This parameter is used to set the main speed from the
keypad.
Frequency reference = Keypad selected [FREF]:
Turns on when the output frequency reference can be set
from the keypad.

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 toMax. frequency Hz
0.00 to 590.00 Hz

07

07

07

00

0.00 to 590.00 Hz
0.00 toMax. frequency Hz

0.00

010

10.00
002
001
017

・Main speed and sub speed are selected or calculated by ON/OFF of the input terminal function"Main/sub speed reference change [AUT]" and "Speed reference calculation symbol selection [AA105]".
For details, refer to "9.2.12 Setting Frequency Reference by selection/calculation two frequency
reference ".
・When the input terminal functions "Multi-speed ([DFL] to [DHH])", "Multi-speed Bit ([SF1] to [SF7])","Jogging [JOG]" or "Force operation [F-OP]" are turned on, those frequency references are given priority
regardless of the "Main speed input source selection [AA101]". Note that changing parameter [FA-01]
while any of these terminal functions are turned on will also change the frequency setting parameter of
each function.
・When [AA101] is set to "Parameter setting (07)" and "Enable frequency changes through monitor
display [UA-93]" is set to "Enable (01)", the frequency command can be changed using "Output
frequency monitor [dA-01]" or "Output frequency scale conversion monitor [dA-06]". For details, refer to"10.1.1 Monitor the Output Frequency".

9-8
9-8

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.3 Setting frequency reference by analog input (Voltage/Current)
・To set the output frequency reference with analog voltage input or analog current input from theterminal [VRF]/[IRF] on the control circuit terminal, set "Main speed input source selection [AA101]" to"Terminal [VRF] (01)" or "Terminal [IRF] (02)".
・When [AA101] is set to "Terminal [VRF] (01)" or "Terminal [IRF] (02)", "Main speed reference setting(monitor)[FA-01]" becomes the output frequency reference monitor and displays the output frequency
setting value corresponding to the selected analogue input value.
・Whether to use analog voltage input or analog current input can be selected by "[VRF] Input selection[Cb-08]" or "[IRF] Input selection [Cb-18]". By default, terminal [VRF] is set to analog voltage input (0 to
10V) and the terminal [IRF] is set to analog current input (4 to 20mA).
・HF-620 is adjusted at factory so that a 9.8V or a 19.8mA input from the terminal [VRF]/[IRF] are the fullscale of the input (the maximum frequency setting for frequency command). This can be fine-tuned asnecessary. For details regarding adjustment, refer to "9.15.3 Adjusting the Analog Input".
Code

Item

FA-01

Main speed reference
setting (monitor)

AA101

Main speed input source
selection

Cb-08 [VRF] Input selection
Cb-18 [IRF] Input selection

Description
Displays the output frequency set value according to
the selected analog input value. When analog input isselected as the frequency reference, this parameter istreated as a monitor and cannot be changed directly.
Set the output-frequency using the analog input to theterminal [VRF] on the control-circuit terminal.
Set the output-frequency using the analog input to theterminal [IRF] on the control-circuit terminal.

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 toMax. frequency Hz

-

01
07
02

Terminal [VRF] use analog voltage input.

01

Terminal [VRF] use analog current input.

02

Terminal [IRF] use analog voltage input.

01

Terminal [IRF] use analog current input.

02

9-9
9-9

01
02

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.4 Setting frequency command by multi-speed operation function
・The multi-speed operation function allows switching of several preset frequency references by ON/OFF
pattern of the "multi-speed ([DFL] to [DHH]) (003 to 006)" input terminal or the "multi-speed bit ([SF1]to [SF7]) (007 to 013)" input terminal.
・When multi-speed 1 to 15 is selected, priority is given to the multi-speed reference regardless of the"Main speed input source selection [AA101]" setting. However, when input terminal function "Jogging[JOG]" and "Force operation [F-OP]" are ON, the frequency command of every input terminal function
will be selected with precedence in this order.
・The following 2 modes can be selected for the multi-speed operation function according to the settingof "Multi-speed operation selection [Ab-03]".
- Binary operation mode:
It is possible to switch between up to 16 different speeds from multi speed 0 to 15 according to the
ON/OFF pattern of the 4 input terminal functions ([DFL] to [DHH]). The time until the frequency
reference is changed at the time of signal input can be set by "Multistage input determination time[CA-55]".
- Bit operation mode:
It is possible to switch between up to 8 different speeds from 0 to 7 according to which of the seven
input terminal function ([SF1] to [SF7]) is turned on. The setting of "Multistage input determination
time [CA-55]" is not applied to the bit operation mode.
・When all multi-speed input terminal functions [DFL] to [DHH] and [SF1] to [SF7] are off, multi-speed 0
operates at the frequency reference value set by the "Main speed input source selection [AA101]".
Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

FA-01

Main speed reference
setting (monitor)

Change the frequency reference of the multi-speed currently
selected.
(For example, when you change [FA-01] at the time of themulti-speed 2, [Ab-12] will be changed to the same value atthe same time.)

0.00 toMax. frequency Hz

-

Ab-03

Multi-speed
operation selection

Ab110

Multi-speed 0 setting

Ab-11

Multi-speed 1 setting

Ab-12

Multi-speed 2 setting

Ab-13

Multi-speed 3 setting

Ab-14 toAb-25

Multi speed 4 to 15
setting

Code

Binary operation mode up to 16 speeds

00

Bit operation mode of up to 8 speeds

01Multi-speed 0 when "Main speed input source selection[AA101]" is "parameter (07)".
Parameters for setting frequency reference ofmulti-speed 1.
Parameters for setting frequency reference ofmulti-speed 2.
Parameters for setting frequency reference ofmulti-speed 3.
Parameters for setting frequency reference of multi-speed
4 to 15.
Multi-speed selection 1 [DFL] to
Multi speed selection 4 [DHH]:
Multi-speed input terminal for binary operation(maximum. 16-speeds).

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

CA-55

Multistage input
determination timeMulti-speed selection Bit-1 [SF1] toMulti-speed selection Bit-7 [SF7]:
Multi-speed input terminal for bit operation(maximum. 8 speeds).
This is the time until the output frequency reference isdetermined when the multi-speed switching is performed in
the binary operation mode.

9-10
9-10

00
10.00
20.00

0.00 toMax. frequency Hz

30.00
40.00
0.00

003[DFL]004[DFM]005[DFH]
006[DHH]
007[SF1]008[SF2]009[SF3]010[SF4]011[SF5]012[SF6]013[SF7]-

0 to 2000 ms

0Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Binary operation mode (Maximum 16-speed commands: [Ab-03] = 00)
・Multi-speed 0 to 15 can be switched by assigning "Multi-speed selection ([DFL] to [DHH])" to "Input
terminal function ([CA-01] to [CA-08])".
■Bit operation mode control table
Multispeed

DHH

DFH

DFM

DFL

Frequency
refernece

0 Note
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Ab110
Ab-11
Ab-12
Ab-13
Ab-14
Ab-15
Ab-16
Ab-17
Ab-18
Ab-19
Ab-20
Ab-21
Ab-22
Ab-23
Ab-24
Ab-25

11
10
9

12
13
14

4
3
2

15
5

0
6
7

1

8
[DFL] Input[DFM] Input[DFH] Input[DHH ]Input[FR] Input

Note: Multi-speed 0 is the frequency reference set by the "Main speed input source selection [AA101]".

■Example of binary operation mode (When multi-speed 2 is selected)
・[CA-06]="Multi-speed seection 1 [DFL]" and [CA-07]="Multi-speed selection 2 [DFM]" are assigned.
[DFH] and [DHH] are not assigned.
When only the input terminal [RST] =[DFM] is ON, the frequency reference will be multi-speed 2, andthe setting of "Multi-speed 2 [Ab-12]" will be displayed in the "Main speed reference setting (monitor)[FA-01]".
Input terminal
DFM DFLFRCOM

Multi-speed

DHH

DFH

DFM

1

OFF

OFF

OFF

DFL
ON

2

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

3

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

・When using binary operation mode, the wait time until the multi-speed command is determined can be
set by "Multistage input determination time [CA-55]". This function can prevent unintended change ofmulti-speed during multi-speed terminal switching.
・After the last rising/falling edge input to the multi-speed terminal, the multi-speed command isdetermined after the [CA-55] set time has elapsed. Note that the input response will be slower when
the settling time is increased.
When the determination timeis set to 0. ([CA-55]=0)
Frequency reference

11

15
13

9

5
1

[DFL] Input[DFM] Input[DFH] Input[DHH] Input
Multistage input determination time [CA-55]

9-11
9-11

4

When the determination
time is set to a value otherthan 0. ([CA-55]≠0)Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Bit operation mode (Maximum 8-speed commands: [Ab-03] = 00)
・Multi-speed 0 to 7 can be switched by assigning "Multi-speed Bit ([SF1] to [SF7])" to "Input terminal
function ([CA-01] to [CA-08])".
・When multiple multi-speed bit input terminals are turned on simultaneously, the one with the lowest
number is given priority.
・In the cells marked with an "x" in the table below, ON/OFF state of the terminal is ignored.
■Bit operation mode control table
0

2

1

3

4 5
6
1

7

[SF1] Input[SF2] Input[SF3] Input[SF4] Input[SF5] Input[SF6] Input[SF7] Input[FR] Input

Multi-speed

SF7

SF6

SF5

SF4

SF3

SF2

SF1

Frequency
reference

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

OFF
×
×
×
×
×
×
ON

OFF
×
×
×
×
×
ON
OFF

OFF
×
×
×
×
ON
OFF
OFF

OFF
×
×
×
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
×
×
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
×
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

Ab110 Note
Ab-11
Ab-12
Ab-13
Ab-14
Ab-15
Ab-16
Ab-17

Note: Multi-speed 0 is the frequency reference set by the "Main speed input source
selection [AA101]".

■Example of bit operation mode (When multi-speed 3 is selected)
・[CA-05]="Multi-speed bit 1 [SF1]", [CA-06]="Multi-speed bit 2 [SF2]" and [CA-07]="Multi-speed bit 3 [SF3]"
are assigned. [SF4] to [SF7] are not assigned.
When only input terminal [RST] = [SF3] is ON, the frequency reference will be multi-speed 3, and the settingof "Multi-speed 3-speed [Ab-13]" will be displayed in " Main speed reference setting (monitor) [FA-01]".
Input terminal
RST ES AUT
COM[SF3] [SF2] [SF1]Multispeed

SF7

SF6

SF5

SF4

SF3

SF2

SF1

1
2

×
×

×
×

×
×

×
×

×
×

×
ON

ON
OFF

3

×

×

×

×

ON

OFF

OFF

・"Multistage input determination time [CA-55]" is valid only when binary operation mode is selected. Not
applicable to bit operation mode.

9-12
9-12

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.5 Setting frequency command for Jogging and inching operation
・Jogging operation allows positioning and fine adjustments while the motor is stopped.
After the "Jogging [JOG]" input terminal is turned on, jogging operation can be started by giving the
RUN command.
・During jogging operation, a frequency reference is set according to "Jogging frequency [AG-20]" setting
without including an acceleration time. This can easily lead to issue such as an overcurrent trip. Be sure
to appropriately adjust the [AG-20] to avoid a trip.
・Jogging operation is given priority over "Main speed input source selection [AA101]", "Multi-speed
selection ([DFL] to [DHH])", "Multi-speed Bit ([SF1] to [SF7])" and "Force operation [F-OP]".
Code

Item

Description

AG-20

Jogging frequency

AG-21

Jogging stopmode selection

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

Data

Set the frequency reference value during jogging operation.
Disable [JOG] input during RUN, free-run when stopped Note:1
Disable [JOG] input during RUN, deceleration stop when stopped
Disable [JOG] input during RUN, DC braking when stopped Note:2
Enable [JOG] input during RUN, free-run when stopped Note:1
Enable [JOG] input during RUN, deceleration stop when stopped
Enable [JOG] input during RUN, DC braking when stopped Not:2
Jogging [JOG]:
When the RUN command is ON after this terminal is turned
ON, the jogging operation is performed.

Initialvalue

0.00 to 10.00 Hz
00
01
02
03
04
05

5.00

029

-

01

Note: 1. When [AG-21] is "Free run when stopped (00, 03)", operation setting of free-run is required.
For details, refer to section 9.7.6, Starting after Stopping Free-run.
2. When [AG-21] is "DC braking when stopped (02, 05)", DC braking must be set. For details, refer to section
9.7.8, "Applying DC Braking to Stop."■Jogging operation disable during RUN[AG-21]＝ Disable at RUN (00, 01, 02)

・When the setting of "Jogging stop mode selection [AG-21]" is "Disabled at RUN (00, 01, 02)", thejogging operation cannot be performed when the RUN command ON first.
When jogging operation is activated[JOG] Input

When jogging operation is not activated[JOG] Input[FR] Input[FR] Input[RR] Input
Outputfrequency

Outputfrequency[AG-20][AG-20]■Jogging operation enable during RUN [AG-21]＝Enable at RUN (03, 04, 05)
・When the setting of "Jogging stop mode selection [AG-21]" is "Enabled at RUN (03, 04, 05)", the jogging
operation can be performed even if the RUN command ON first. However, when [JOG] input terminal OFF
first, it will become free-run stop.
[JOG] Input[FR] Input

Normaloperation

Restart according to the setting of"Restart mode after MBS release[bb-40]"

Jogging
operation

Outputfrequency
During deceleration

Free run

9-13
9-13

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.6 Setting frequency reference by Modbus-RTU communication
・To set output-frequency command by Modbus-RTU communication (RS485 communication), set "RS485(08)" to "Main speed input source selection [AA101]".
Code

Item

AA101

Main speed input
source selection

Description
Sets output-frequency command from Modbus communication (RS485
communication).

Data

Initial
value

08

07

・For details of Modbus communication, "Chapter 11 Modbus Communication".

9.2.7 Setting frequency reference by communication option
・To set the output frequency command using a communication option board, set the " Main speed input
source selection [AA101]" parameter to "Option (09)".
Code

Item

AA101

Main speed input
source selection

Description
Set the output frequency reference from the communication option.

・For details of communication option, "Chapter 13 Communication Option".

9-14
9-14

Data

Initial
value

09

07

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.8 Setting frequency reference by pulse input
・To set the output frequency reference by pulse input, set "Main speed input source selection [AA101]"
to "Pulse input (12)". At the same time, set "Pulse input target function selection [CA-90]" to "Frequency
reference (01)". Depending on the setting of [CA-90], the input terminal [8] becomes the terminal for Aphase pulse input and the input terminal [RST] becomes the terminal for B-phase pulse input.
・Set the input pulse frequency at which the frequency reference corresponds to the "Async. Motormaximum frequency [Hb105]" in "Pulse input frequency scale [CA-92]".
・Pulse input can be monitored by "Pulse input monitor [dA-70]".
・To limit the pulse input frequency reference, set "Pulse input frequency bias value [CA-94]", "Pulse
input upper frequency detection level [CA-95]" and "Pulse input lower frequency detection level [CA96]".
・Attempting to stop the inverter by turning 0Hz the pulse input frequency may cause the deceleration to
stagnate. If this happens, turn OFF the operation command to stop.
・When the pulse input frequency falls below [CA-96], it will be processed assuming that 0 Hz is being
input.
・When the setting of [CA-96] is large, the start may be slow.
Code

Item

dA-70

Pulse input monitor

AA101
CA-90

Main speed input source
selection
Pulse input target function
selection

Description

Data

Initialvalue

Monitor the frequency of the input pulse as a percentage
with [CA-92] as 100%. This monitor is enabled when [CA90] is set to "Frequency reference (01)".

-100.00 to 100.00 %-Setting when pulse input is used as frequency reference.

12

07

Setting when pulse input is used as frequency command.

01

01

0.05 to 32.00 kHz

25.00

CA-92

Pulse input frequency scaleEnter the pulse frequency equivalent to the highest
frequency.

CA-93

Pulse input frequency filter time
constant

Filters the input pulse frequency.

0.01 to 2.00 s

0.10

CA-94

Pulse input frequency bias value

Applies a bias to the input pulse frequency.

-100.0 to 100.0 %

0.0

CA-95

Pulse input upper frequency
detection level

CA-96

Pulse input lower frequency
detection levelSet the upper limit as a percentage of "Async. Motormaximum frequency [Hb105]" to 100% of the input
pulse frequency reference.
This parameter sets the frequency reference by pulse
input to be 0.0% below the frequency set by the ratiothat [Hb105] is 100%.

100.0
0.0 to 100.0 %1.0■Pulse frequency reference processing block diagram

Pulse input monitor [dA-70](-100.00 to 100.00%)
Pulse
frequency

Hz

1
G

%

1
1+sT

100(%)[CA-95]Filter time constant T[CA-93](0.01 to 2.00s)

Unit for Frequency reference%

Output(100%=[Hb105])[CA-96]0(%)

Pulse frequency scale G[CA-92](0.05 ro 32.00kHz)

Bias [CA-94](-100.0 to 100.0%)

Bias, Limit, Cut×Bias100(%)
Input(100%=[CA-92])

Upper level [CA-95](0.0 to 100.0%)

9-15
9-15

Max. frequency[Hb105]Lower level [CA-96](0.0 to 200.0%)

Frequency
referenceChapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.9 Setting frequency reference by PID control
・To use the calculation result by PID function as the frequency reference input source, set "PIDcalculation (15)" to "Main speed input source selection [AA101]". In addition, the parameters related to
PID function must be set. For details, refer to "Making 9.8 PID Processing Control".
Code

Item

Description

AA101

Main speed input source selection

Set the output frequency reference in PID function.

Data

Initial
value

15

07

9.2.10 Select and calculate two frequency references
・By setting of " Speed reference calculation symbol selection [AA105]", the following can be selected.
- When [AA105] is "Disable (00)":
By input terminal function "Main/Sub speed reference change [AUT](015)", the frequency reference
input source is switched between "Main speed input source selection [AA101]" and "Sub speed input
source selection [AA102]".
- When [AA105] is other than "Disable (00)":
The frequency reference is the result of the calculation (addition/subtraction/multiplication)
specified in [AA105] for the frequency specified in "Main speed input source selection [AA101]" and"Sub speed input source selection [AA102]".
・Only [AA102] can be set to "Disable (00)". The operation when another frequency reference input
source is set is the same as the setting of [AA101]. For details of each choice, refer to the description of[AA101].
Data

Initialvalue

For details, refer to "9.2.1 Types of Frequency Reference".

-07

Sub speed input
source selection

Disable (Sub speed only)
Terminal [VRF]
Terminal [IRF]
Parameter setting
Modbus communication
Communication option
Pulse input
PID control

00
01
02
07
08
09
12
15

00

AA104

Sub speed setting

Parameter for frequency reference input source setting of sub speed
when [AA102] is set to "Parameter setting (07)".

0.00 to590.00Hz

0.00

AA105

Speed reference
calculation symbol
selection

Code

Item

AA101

Main speed input
source selection

AA102

Description

Disable: Frequency reference = Main speed or Sub speed

00

Addition: Frequency reference = Main speed + Sub speed

01

Subtraction: Frequency reference = Main speed - Sub speed

02

Multiplication: Frequency reference = Main speed × Sub speed

0300

Main/Sub speed reference change [AUT]:
CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

When [AA105] is set to "Disable (00)", it is posible to switch between
main speed and sub speed with this input terminal function.

015-

ON: Sub speed enabled
OFF: Main speed enabled

・Input terminal function "Remote control speed-up function [UP]" and " Remote control speed-downfunction [DWN]" is enabled when the setting (parameter setting, multi-speed setting, or "analog
command hold [AHD]" operation in the analog input setting) in which this function is enabled as themain speed input source is selected.
・The same command destination can be selected for "Main speed input source selection [AA101]" and"Sub speed input source selection [AA102]", and can also be calculated by squared by theMultiplication.

9-16
9-16

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Example of frequency math function(e.g. 1) Applying gain
[AA101] = Terminal [VRF] (01)[AA102] = Parameter setting (07)[AA104] = 3.00Hz[AA105] = Multiplication (03)Main speed(e.g. 2) Addition[AA101] = Terminal [VRF] (01)[AA102] = Terminal [IRF] (02)[AA105] = Addition (01)Main speed[VRF] Input value[VRF] Input value

40Hz

20Hz
Sub speed

Sub speed
3Hz
Actualfrequency
reference[IRF] Input value[AA104] setting value

10Hz
50Hz
Actualfrequency 40Hz
reference

60Hz
Main×sub(e.g. 3) High-speed forward rotation and
Low-speed reverse rotation[AA101] = Terminal [VRF] (01)[AA102] = Parameter setting (07)[AA104] = 10.00Hz[AA105] = Subtraction (02)Main speed(e.g. 4) Switching between 2 references[AA101] = Terminal [VRF] (01)[AA102] = Parameter setting (07)[AA104] = 3.00 Hz[AA105] = Disable (00)

[VRF] Input value

Main speed

40Hz

Sub speed

Sub speed

Actualfrequency
reference 30Hz
10Hz

[VRF] Input value

40Hz

10Hz

10Hz

Main+sub[AA104] setting value[AA104] setting value

3Hz[AUT] Input

ForwardActualfrequency 40Hz
reference
3Hz

Main－subReverseON
Main or sub

Output frequency

9-17
9-17

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.11 Increasing/Decreasing frequency command・When the " Trigger for frequency addition [ADD](014)" input terminal is turned ON, the frequency set inthe "Add frequency setting [AA106]" is added or subtracted from the frequency reference.
・Addition and subtraction are determined by the sign of "Add frequency setting [AA106]".
Code

Item

Description

AA106

Add frequency
setting

Sets the frequency to add.

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

Trigger for frequency addition [ADD]:
When this terminal is turned ON, [AA106] is added
to the frequency reference.

Data

Initialvalue-590.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

014

-

・Frequency addition by "Trigger for frequency addition [ADD]" is performed within the frequency limit
range. Therefore, when the upper/lower limit setting or the maximum frequency setting is exceeded,
the frequency reference is limited.
・Frequency addition by [ADD] input terminal is disabled for the jogging function.
・"UP/DWN data save enable [CA-61]", the frequency reference value saved in the inverter internal
memory does not include the frequency addition by [ADD] input terminal. Note・When the sign of the frequency reference changes ((-) → (+), (+) → (-)), the rotation direction is reversed.
This function is also available for PID targets.
Note: For details, "9.2.14 Increasing/Decreasing Frequency Reference by Remote Control ".

9-18
9-18

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.12 Increasing/Decreasing frequency reference by remote control
Remote control function ([UP]/[DWN]/[UDC] input terminal function)
・The remote control function accelerates or decelerates the present frequency reference by turning on"Remote control speed-up function [UP](020)" or "Remote control speed-down function [DWN](021)"
input terminals.
・This function is enabled when the frequency reference input source is as follows. It is invalid for thejogging function.
- When "Main speed input source selection [AA101]" is "Parameter setting (07)".
- When the frequency reference input source is a multi-speed function.
- When "Main speed input source selection [AA101]" is the analogue input of "Terminal [VRF] (01)" or"Terminal [IRF] (02)", and "Analog command holding [AHD]" input terminal is ON.
・When "UP/DWN data save enable [CA-61]" is "Save (01)", the frequency reference value after[UP]/[DWN] input is stored in the inverter internal-memory when the power is turned off and when thefrequency reference input source is switched.
・The acceleration/deceleration time when [UP]/[DWN] input terminal is ON follows "Acceleration time
setting for UP/DWN function [CA-64]"/"Deceleration time setting for UP/DWN function [CA-66]".
・When the "Remote control Speed data clearing [UDC](022)" input terminal is turned ON, the frequency
reference value adjusted by the [UP]/[DWN] input terminal will be the original value saved prior toadjustment by the [UP]/[DWN] input terminal or 0 Hz according to the setting of the "UP/DWN/UDC
selection [CA-62]".
Code

CA-60

CA-61

CA-62
CA-64
CA-66

CA-01 to
CA-08

Item

Description

Overwrite the frequency reference value (multi-speed 0 ([Ab110]
or [FA-01]), multi-speed 1 to 15 ([Ab-11] to [Ab-25]) and analog
input holding value by [AHD] input terminal).
Overwrite PID1 target value 1.
Not save: When the power is turned off or the frequency input
source is switched, the frequency reference value that was
accelerated/decelerated by [UP]/[DWN] is not saved in the
UP/DWN data saveinternal memory.
enableSave: When the power is turned off or the frequency input sourceis switched, the frequency reference value that was accelerated/decelerated by [UP]/DWN] is saved in the internal memory.
0Hz: Cleared to 0Hz
UP/DWN/UDC selection Saved data: Change to the data saved before using [UP]/[DWN] input
terminals.
Acceleration time setting
Set the acceleration time when [UP]/[DWN] is turned on.
for UP/DWN function
Deceleration time
setting for UP/DWN
Set the deceleration time when [UP]/[DWN] is turned onfunction
UP/DWN overwrite target
selection

Input terminal function

Data
00
01

Initialvalue
00

Note:1

00
00
01
00
01

0.00 to3600.00 s

Remote control Speed-UP function [UP]:When this terminal is ON, the frequency reference is incleased.

020

Remote control Speed-DOWN function [DWN]:
When this terminal is ON, the frequency reference is decreased.

021

Remote control Speed data clearing [UDC]:
When this terminal is ON, the frequency rederence is cleared.
The value at clearing follows the setting of [CA-62].

022

00

10.00

-

・Do not ON/OFF [UP]/[DWN] input terminal or operate the dial on the keypad immediately after turning
off the power. The changed frequency reference may not be memorized correctly.
・When "[UP]/[DWN] data save enable [CA-61]" is set to "Save (01)", [Ab110]/[Ab-11] to [Ab-25], [FA-01],
and [dA-01]/[dA-06] Note:2 frequency references can be changed using the dial. In this case, even if SET
key is not pressed, the changed values are stored in the inverter's internal memory when the power isturned off.
Note: 1. For details, refer to "9.8.2 Using PID1 control".
2. For details, refer to "10.1.1 Monitor the output frequency".

9-19
9-19

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■[UP]/[DWN] Operation of the remote control function (When the frequency command is [FA-01])
Power supply
RUN command
ON[UP] Input[DWN] Input
ON
Main speed reference
setting (monitor) [FA-01]
Output frequency(Dashed line)[Acceleration/deceleration times at [UP]/[DWN]
terminal ON follow the setting of [CA-64]/[CA-66].

When [UP]/[DWN] input terminals
are ON at the same time,
acceleration/deceleration is not
performed.

[When [CA-61] is "Save (01)", if the power is shut off after
adjusting the frequency reference with the [UP]/[DWN] input
terminal, the adjusted frequency reference is stored in [FA-01].

■Operation of "Remote control Speed data clearing [UDC]"
When [CA-62] is set to "0Hz(00")

When [CA-62] is set to "Saved (01)"

RUN command[UP] Input

ON[UDC] Input

ON
ON

ON

Main speed reference setting(monitor) [FA-01]
Output frequency (Dashed line)[With the [UDC] input terminal ON,
the frequency reference becomes 0 Hz.

When [UDC] Input terminal is ON, the frequency referenceis changed to [FA-01] before adjustment by [UP]/[DWN].

Analog command holding function (Input terminal function [AHD])
・The analog command holding function holds the analog input when the "Analog command holding[AHD](019)" input terminal ON, and returns to the analog command when it OFF.
・While the [AHD] input terminal is ON, [UP]/[DWN] can be used to increase or decrease the analogue
input.
・When "[UP]/[DWN] data save enable [CA-61]" is "Save (01)", the analog input value adjusted by[FUP]/[FDN] input terminal is stored in the inverter as "Frequency command value of the analog input
held" when the power is cut off.
Code

Item

Description

Data

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal funciton

Analog command holding [AHD]:
This terminal retains the analog input-value at ON of this terminal for as long as it is ON.

019■Operation diagram of analog command holding function (Using [AHD] and [UDC] for Analog Frequency Reference)
Operation of basic analog command hold
[AHD] Input

ON

Analog input

ON[UDC] operation of the analog command holding function
Shut-off

Power supply[AHD] Input

ON[UDC] Input
Frequency
reference

Power onON
ON

Analog input andFrequency
reference
When [CA-61] is "Save (01)", the held frequency referenceat shut off is saved to the internal memory.

When [CA-62] is "Saved data (01)", the frequency
reference become the previous held analog input value.

・When the power is turned on with "Analog command holding [AHD]" turned ON or "Reset [RS]" input
terminal turned ON → OFF, the data held immediately before is adopted.
・When the 1st/2nd control is switched by the "2nd-motor control [SET]" input terminal while [AHD]
input terminal is ON, the held analog input remains as it is. To switch the 1st/2nd control, turn OFF andhold the [AHD] input terminal.

9-20
9-20

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.2.13 Temporarily changing the frequency reference input source
・When the "Force operation [F-OP](023)" input terminal is turned ON, the frequency reference input
source set in the "Speed reference source selection when [F-OP] is active [CA-70]" takes precedence
over the frequency command destination set in the "Main speed input source selection [AA101]".
■Operation of "Force operation [F-OP]"
Speed reference source selection
when [F-OP] is active [CA-70]

Force operation[F-OP]ON"Main speed input source selection[AA101]" or other parameter setting

Output frequency
referenceOFF

Note: Input terminal functions not assigned to input terminals [FR] to [PLA] are OFF.

Code
CA-01 to
CA-08

CA-70

Item
Input terminal
function

Speed reference
source selection
when [F-OP] is active

Description
Force operation [F-OP]:
When this terminal is ON, the RUN command and frequency reference input
source are switched to the setting of [CA-70]/ [CA-71].
Set the output-frequency using the analog input to the [VRF] terminal on thecontrol-circuit terminal.
Set the output-frequency using the analog input to the [IRF] terminal on thecontrol-circuit terminal.
From the keypad, set the output frequency using the parameter settings.
Use [FA-01] or [Ab110] to set the output frequency.
Set the output-frequency from Modbus-RTU communication(RS485 communication).
Set the output-frequency from communication option.
Set the output-frequency by pulse input to the control terminal.
Set the target value when PID function is enabled.

Data

Initial
value

023

-

01
02
07

01

08
09
12
15

・When the "Force operation [F-OP]" input terminal is turned ON, the RUN command source is also set to"RUN command source selection when [F-OP] is active [CA-71]". For details, refer to "9.1.7 Temporarily
Changing RUN Command Input Source".
・When [F-OP] input terminal is turned ON/OFF and the RUN command input source is changed while
the inverter is running, the drive will be stopped once. To start operation again, OFF the RUN command
and ON again. When the change by [F-OP] input terminal is only the frequency reference input source,
the operation state is continued.

9-21
9-21

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.3 Acceleration/Deceleration function
9.3.1 Change the acceleration/deceleration time・Set the acceleration/deceleration time of the motor. Set a long time for slow acceleration/deceleration
and a short time for fast acceleration/deceleration.
・The acceleration/deceleration time sets the time from 0Hz to the maximum frequency setting.
・The acceleration/deceleration time can also be changed during operation according to the command of
the two-stage acceleration/deceleration function. For details, refer to "9.3.2 Switching
Acceleration/Deceleration Time in Two Stages".
・Acceleration/deceleration can be slowly started by "Acceleration pattern selection [AC-03]","Deceleration pattern selection [AC-04]". For details, refer to "9.3.4 Changing Acceleration/Deceleration
Pattern".
・When the "LAD Cancellation [LAC](071)" input terminal is turned ON, the acceleration/deceleration time
becomes 0 seconds and the output frequency instantaneously follows the frequency command.
For details, refer to "9.3.5 Momentarily following a frequency to a command".
PID soft start function
enabled

[AH-78]ON

Acceleration time setting for PID
soft start function(Only when PID soft start is enabled)[AC-03]/[AC-04]
Acceleration curve selection
Deceleration curve selection[FA-10]/[FA-12]

Acceleration
Deceleration time0s
Acceleration
Deceleration
cancellation
071[LAC]

Acceleration
Deceleration Pattern
Selection function

OFF

ON

Other than 00
Pattern calculationOFF【00(linear)】Acceleration time setting (monitor)
Deceleration time setting (monitor)

Multi-Speed
1 to 15003 to 006[DFL to DHH],
007 to 013[SF1 to 7][AC-30] to [AC-88]
Multi-speed 1 to 15
Acceleration/deceleration timeON

Acceleration/
Deceleration
selection[AC-02]01(Multi-stage
acceleration/
deceleration)[AC124]/[AC126]
OFF

Acceleration time 2, 1st-motor
Deceleration time 2, 1st-motor[AC120]/[AC122]
1st acceleration time 1
1st deceleration time 1 (00)

Acceleration/
Deceleration
time
Input selection[AC-01]

2- Accel./Decel.
change trigger
Switch according to[AC115]【00(common)

Acceleration/
deceleration time 2【00】
Communication Options ( (01)Acceleration/
deceleration time 2

Note: In the figure, [ ] and the position of the switch for each parameter indicates the initial value.
Also, the input terminal functions that are not assigned to "Input terminal function selection [CA-01] to [CA-08]" will be OFF.

・If "Acceleration pattern selection [AC-03]" and "Deceleration pattern selection [AC-04]" are other thanlinear and the acceleration/deceleration hold function is ON/OFF, the acceleration/deceleration pattern
will be recalculated with the frequency command at hold function OFF as the starting point, and theacceleration/deceleration will be re-accelerated/decelerated.

9-22
9-22

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Actual acceleration/deceleration time setting
・To set the acceleration/deceleration time parameter, set the acceleration/deceleration time for 0Hz tomaximum frequency setting.
For example, if the maximum frequency setting is 60Hz and the acceleration time setting is 30 seconds,
the actual acceleration time until the frequency command reaches the command in 30 Hz is 15 seconds.
・Even if the acceleration/deceleration time is set as short as possible, the actual motor's
acceleration/deceleration time will not be shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time
determined by the moment of inertia J of the mechanical system and the motor torque. Setting theacceleration/deceleration time setting shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time may
cause "overcurrent error [E001]", "motor overload error [E005]", "overvoltage error [E007]", etc.
See“Chapter 15 Troubleshooting”for more information.
Speed 0 → Acceleration ts at NM

Output frequency [Hz]Max.
frequency[Hb105]

Min. Acceleration tS

ts ＝ (JL＋JM)×NM
9.55×(Ts－TL)

Min. Deceleration tB

Frequency
reference[FA-01]

Speed NM → Deceleration tB at 0

tB ＝ (JL＋JM)×NM
9.55×(TB+TL)

Min .frequency[Hb130]Time [s]In practiceDecelerationtime

In practiceAccelerationtime
Acceleration time

setting [FA-10]

Deceleration time
setting [FA-12]

JL : J (kg･m2) of the load converted into the motor axis
JM : J (kg･m2) of the motor
NM : Motor speed (r/min) <min-1
Ts : Maximum acceleration torque with inverter drive(Nm)
TB : Maximum. decelerating torque (Nm) with drive
TL : Load Torque (Nm)

Description

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to 3600.00 s

-

Code

Item

FA-10

Acceleration time
setting (monitor)

Monitors or changes sets for the currently selected
acceleration time.

FA-12

Deceleration time
setting (monitor)

Monitors or changes the currently selected decelerationtime.
Parameter setting

00

AC-01

Acceleration
Deceleration time
input source
selection

Communication option

01

AC120

Acceleration time 1

AC122

Deceleration time 1

0 Set the acceleration duration from Hz to the highest
frequency.
0 Set the decelerating duration from Hz to the highest
frequency.
Multi speed selection 1 to 4 [DFL] to [DHH]:
Operates the multi-speed command.
Multi-speed bit1 to 7 [SF1] to [SF7]:
The multi-speed bit command is operated.

CA-01 to
CA-08

Hb105

Input terminal
function

IM Max.frequency

2-stage Acceleration/Deceleration [AD2]:
When [AC115] is "Switching by [AD2] Terminal (00)",
acceleration/deceleration times are switched by ON/OFFof this signal.
LAD Cancellation [LAC]:
When this signal is turned ON, acceleration/deceleration
is canceled and the output frequency is made to follow
the frequency command.
Set the highest frequency of the induction motor (IM).

9-23
9-23

0.00 to 3600.00 s

00

10.00

003[DFL]/ 004[DFM]
005[DFH]/ 006[DHH]
007[SF1]/ 008[SF2]009[SF3]/ 010[SF4]011[SF5]/ 012[SF6]013[SF7]
031

071
Base frequency to590.00 Hz

60.00

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.3.2 To switch the acceleration/deceleration time in two steps
・The 2-step acceleration/deceleration function can be switched during operation by setting "2-step
acceleration/deceleration selection [AC115]".
・Assign "2-stage acceleration/deceleration [AD2](031)" to one of the "input terminal function selection([CA-01] to [CA-08])" when switching by the signal to the control terminal block.
Code

AC115

Item

2- Accel/Decelchange trigger

AC120
AC122
AC124
AC126

Two-stageacceleration
frequency
2-speed reduction
frequency
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

AC116
AC117

Description

Data[AD2] Acceleration/deceleration time switching by input terminal
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Switching by Two-Stage
Acceleration/Deceleration Frequency
Acceleration/deceleration time switching only at forward/reverse
rotation switching00

Set the switching frequency when [AC115] is set to "Switching by
setting (01)" and in acceleration mode.
Set the switching frequency when [AC115] is "Switching by setting(01)" and in decelerating status.
0 Set the acceleration duration from Hz to the highest frequency.
0 Set the decelerating duration from Hz to the highest frequency.
0 Set the acceleration duration from Hz to the highest frequency.
0 Set the decelerating duration from Hz to the highest frequency.
2-stage Acceleration/Deceleration [AD2]:
When [AC115] is "Switching by [AD2] Terminal (00)",
acceleration/deceleration times are switched by ON/OFF of thissignal.

■[AD2] Wh
hen switching acceleration/deceleration time by input terminal[FR] Input

ON[AD2] Input

Output frequency

ON

Deceleration Deceleration
time 2time 1

Acceleration Acceleration
time 2time 1■When switching the acceleration/deceleration time at the set frequency[FR] Input

ON[AC117][AC116]

Output frequency

Acceleration
time 1

Acceleration
time 2

Deceleration Deceleration
time 2time 1■When switching acceleration/deceleration time by rotation command direction[FR] Input

ON
ON[RR] Input

Output frequency

Acceleration
time 2

Forwardrotation
Acceleration
time 1

Deceleration
time 29-24
9-24

Deceleration
time 1

Reverserotation

01

Initial
value

00

02

0.00 to590.00 Hz

0.00

0.00 to3600.00 s

10.00

031

-

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.3.3 Acceleration/Deceleration hold function
・The acceleration/deceleration hold function temporarily stops acceleration/deceleration and performs
constant speed operation at the frequency at that time.
・The hold function is effective when the moment of inertia of the mechanical system is large.
・Acceleration hold can be used for applications such as preventing overcurrent trip at startup by waiting
until the slippage of the motor at startup becomes small.
・ The deceleration hold can be used for applications such as preventing an overvoltage trip during
deceleration by waiting until the slippage of the motor at deceleration becomes small.
・There are the following two methods of acceleration/deceleration stop, both of which can be used
together.
- Automatically stops at any frequency and stop time.
- Stops when the "Acceleration/Deceleration Stop [HLD](100)" input terminal is ON.
・If the acceleration/deceleration hold function is turned ON when "Acceleration/deceleration patternselection [AC-03]/[AC-04]" is other than "Linear (00)," the acceleration/deceleration pattern is notcleared and re-acceleration/deceleration is performed in the same acceleration/deceleration pattern at
the timing of the hold OFF.
Code
AG110
AG111
AG112
AG113
CA-01 to
CA-08

Data

Initialvalue

Set the frequency to stagnate during acceleration.

0.00 to590.00 Hz

0.00

Set the time to stagnate during acceleration.

0.0 to 60.0 s

0.0

Set the frequency to stagnate at deceleration.

0.00 to590.00 Hz

0.00

Set the time to stagnate at deceleration.

0.0 to 60.0 s

0.0

100

-

Item
Acceleration stopfrequency
Acceleration stoptime
Deceleration stopfrequency
Deceleration stoptime
Input terminal
function

Description

Acceleration/deceleration stopping [HLD]:
Acceleration/deceleration is stopped once when this signal is ON.
When it becomes OFF, it will re-accelerate and decelerate.

■To hold at any set frequency and time・When the frequency command set at acceleration or deceleration is reached,acceleration/deceleration stops for the set time. Hold frequency and hold time can be set for
acceleration and deceleration respectively.
Output frequency[AG112][AG110][AG113][AG111]Time■ [HLD] Holding at the input terminal・Acceleration/deceleration stops when the "Acceleration/deceleration stop [HLD]" inputterminal is ON.
Output frequency

Time[HLD] Input

ON

OFF

ON

9-25
9-25

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.3.4 Change the acceleration/deceleration pattern
・The pattern of acceleration/deceleration corresponding to each system can be set.
・In "Acceleration pattern selection [AC-03]" and "Deceleration pattern selection [AC-04]", the pattern
can be set individually for acceleration and deceleration.
・Even when the acceleration/deceleration pattern is set, the time from 0Hz to the maximum frequency
or from the maximum frequency to 0Hz arrival is the set acceleration/deceleration time.
Code

AC-03

AC-04
AC-05

AC-06
AC-08
AC-09
AC-10
AC-11

Item

Acceleration curve
selection

Deceleration curve
selection
Acceleration curve
constant
Setting
Deceleration curve
constant
Setting
EL-S-curve ratio at startof acceleration
EL-S-curve ratio at end ofacceleration
EL-S-curve ratio at startof deceleration
EL-S-curve ratio at end of
deceleration

Description

Data

The acceleration pattern is linear.

00

The acceleration pattern is an S-curve.

01

The acceleration pattern is a U-shaped curve.

02

The acceleration pattern is an inverted U-shaped curve.

03

The acceleration pattern is an elevator S-curve(EL-S curve).
Curve pattern selection at deceleration equivalent toacceleration pattern selection.

01

04

Set the curvature (degree of bulge) in S-curve, U curve andinverted U-curve.
When set to 1, the bulge of the curve becomes thesmallest.
By increasing the set value, the bulge can be increased.
Specifies the ratio of the curved part when using a EL-S
character. (for acceleration)

Initialvalue

00 to 0401

1(small bulge) to10(bulging)2

0 to (100 - [AC-09]) %0 to (100 - [AC-08]) %10

Specifies the ratio of the curved part when using a EL-S
character. (for deceleration)

0 to (100 - [AC-11]) %0 to (100 - [AC-10]) %Types of acceleration/deceleration curve patterns and application examples
Pattern
Setting

S-curve (01)Time

Acceleration/deceler
ation is performed up
to the frequency
setting value in astraight line.

Enabled in preventing
load collapse inelevators, conveyors,
etc.

Time

Time

Effective for tension control of take-up
machine, etc. and prevention of breakage ofwound material.
It can also be used to take-up and feed one
shot.

9-26
9-26

Time

Output frequency

Output frequency

Time

Time

EL-S (04)Output frequency

Time
Output frequency

Output frequency

Application
Examples

Output frequency[AC-04](Deceleration)

Time

Inverted U (03)Output frequencyTime

U (02)
Output frequency

Output frequency

Output frequency[AC-03](acceleration)

Linear (00)Time

Similar shock-less start/stop
as S-shape, but the middle
part becomes straight line.
Effective for elevator
applications, etc.

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Setting of curve constant (swelling degree) of acceleration/deceleration pattern(S-shape, U-shape, inverted U-shape curve)
・When S-shape, U-shape or inverted U-shape curve pattern is selected in [AC-03]/[AC-04], the curveswelling condition can be set in [AC-05]/[AC-06].
・The figure below shows an example of an S-shaped, U-shaped, or inverted U-shaped curve and an
example in which the curve constant is set to 2 or 10.
Example of S-curve Acceleration
Output frequency (%) (Reference value = 100 %)Example of U-shaped acceleration
Output frequency (%) (Reference value = 100 %)

10

2

100

93.8
87.5
68.4
64.6

65.0
35.4
17.6

2

3.1
0

25

2

31.6
12.5
6.3
0.4

10
50

75 100Acceleration time (as a percentage of the set value to 100%)

Output frequency (%) (Reference value = 100 %)

100
99.6

100
96.9
82.4

Example of inverted U-shaped acceleration

10
2

35.0
10

0

25 50

75

100

Acceleration time (as a percentage of the set value to 100%)

0

25

50

75

100

Acceleration time (as a percentage of the set value to 100%)■Setting of curve ratio at acceleration/deceleration (for EL-S curve)
・When using an elevator S-shape (EL-S shape), it is possible to set the curve ratio ([AC-08] to [AC-11]) at
acceleration/deceleration.
・[AC-08], [AC-09], [AC-10] and [AC-11] are set by dividing 100%, so the sum of the two parametersettings is 100 % at most (e.g. [AC-09] can be set from 0 to 75% for [AC-08]=25%]).
・When all the curve ratios are set to 50%, the curve is equivalent to an S-shape curve. When either ofthe curve ratios 1/2 is set to 100%, the curve is equivalent to a U-shape curve or an inverted U-shape
curve.
Output frequency ratio (%)

100

Curve ratio at deceleration 1[AC-10]Curve ratio at
acceleration 2[AC-09]50
Curve ratio at
acceleration 1 [AC-08]

Curve ratio at deceleration 2[AC-11]Time (s)・Note the following when the acceleration/deceleration pattern is set to other than "Linear (00)".
- The slope of the acceleration/deceleration time becomes partially steep. If overcurrent or
overvoltage occurs, it is necessary to adjust the acceleration/deceleration time.
- Use a frequency command other than the analog input command. If the command value is notstable, the acceleration/deceleration pattern is recalculated and the actual
acceleration/deceleration time may be extended.
- If the frequency command or acceleration/deceleration time is changed during acceleration/
deceleration, or the acceleration/deceleration pause is performed by the "Acceleration/deceleration
stop [HLD]" input terminal, the acceleration/deceleration pattern will be recalculated based on thetime the change was made. Note that an impact may be generated at the changed part as shown in
the example below.

9-27
9-27

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Output frequency
After change
Before change

When the acceleration/deceleration time or frequency
command is changed, the acceleration/deceleration
pattern is recalculated based on that point and thecurve acceleration/deceleration operation restarts.

acceleration time
Before change0After change

9.3.5 Momentarily cause the frequency to follow a command・When the "LAD Cancellation [LAC](071)" input terminal is turned ON, the acceleration/deceleration
time is ignored and the output frequency instantaneously follows the frequency command value.
・Since the output follows the command when LAD cancellation function is used, if theincrease/decrease range of the frequency command becomes large, it becomes a factor such as"overcurrent error [E001]", "overload error ([E005], [E038], [E039])" or "overvoltage error [E007]", socare must be taken.
・The "LAD Cancellation [LAC]" inputterminal is valid for any frequencycommand such as the commandfrom the parameter setting and communication option.
Code
CA-01 to
CA-08

Item

Description

Data

Input terminal function

LAD Cancellation [LAC]:
When this signal is turned ON, acceleration/deceleration is canceled
and the output frequency is made to follow the frequency command.

071■Operation of LAD cancel function
Output frequency
Follow command
Output frequency
Accord to theacceleration/
deceleration time

AnalogFrequency
referenceTime
Accord to theacceleration/deceleration time
[LAC] Input

ON

ON

9-28
9-28

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.3.6 Switching acceleration/deceleration time during multi-speed operation
・When this function is set, the acceleration/deceleration times can be changed according to the multispeed command by the "multi-speed ([DFL] to [DHH]) (003 to 006)" or "multi-speed bit ([SF1] to [SF7])(007 to 013)" input terminal.
・For details of the acceleration/deceleration time adopted for each multi-speed command, refer to the"Example of multi-speed acceleration/deceleration operation" in this section.
・When switching the multi-speed by the input terminal function, assign "Multi-speed ([DFL] to [DHH])" or"Multi-speed bit ([SF1] to [SF7])" to any of "Input terminal function selection ([CA-01] to [CA-08])" tooperate.
・When "Multi-stage acceleration/deceleration selection [AC-02]" is "Multi-stage acceleration/
deceleration (01)", the 2-stage acceleration/deceleration function is disabled. For details of the 2-step
acceleration/deceleration function, refer to "9.3.2 Switching Acceleration/Deceleration Time in Two
Stages".
Code

AC-02

Ab-11
Ab-12
Ab-13
Ab-14 to Ab-25
AC-30, AC-34
AC-38, AC-42
AC-46, AC-50
AC-54, AC-58
AC-62, AC-66
AC-70, AC-74
AC-78, AC-82
AC-86
AC-32, AC-36
AC-40, AC-44
AC-48, AC-52
AC-56, AC-60
AC-64, AC-68
AC-72, AC-76
AC-80, AC-84
AC-88

Ab-03

Item

Description

Acceleration/deceleration times are[AC120]/[AC122] or [AC124]/[AC126] follow
Acceleration/Deceleration (when 2-step acceleration/deceleration function
is enabled).
selection
The acceleration/deceleration time changes
according to the multi-speed command.

Data

Initial
value

00
00
01

Multi-speed 1
Multi-speed 2
Multi-speed 3
Multi-speed 4 to 15

The multi-speed command is set in the single
speed [Ab-11] to 15 speed [Ab-25] of the multispeed.

0.00 toMax. frequency Hz

20.00
30.00
40.00
0.00

Multi-Speed 1 to 15
Acceleration time

Set the acceleration duration from 0Hz to the
maximum frequency for each multi-speedcommand.

0.00 to 3600.00 s

0.00

Multi-Speed 1 to 15
Deceleration time

Set the deceleration times from the maximum
frequency to 0Hz for each multi-speed command.

0.00 to3600.00 s

0.00

Multi-speed operation
selection

CA-01 to CA-08 Input terminal function

16-speed binary operation.
Multi-speed operation is performed by "Multispeed ([DFL] to [DHH])".
8-speed bit operation.
Multi-speed operation is performed with the"Multi-speed bit ([SF1] to [SF7])".
Multi-speed 1 [DFL] to Multi-speed 4 [DHH]:
Multi-speed input terminal for binary operation(maximum. 16-speed).
Multi-speed bit 1 [SF1] to Multi-speed bit 7 [SF7]:
Multi-speed input terminal for bit operation(up to 8 speeds).

9-29
9-29

00
00
01

003 to 006
007 to 013

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

・The table below shows the correspondence between the multi-speed and multi-speed
acceleration/deceleration times when "Binary operation (00)" is selected for "Multi-speed selection[Ab-03]" and "Bit operation (01)".
■Bit operation mode operation table■Binary operation mode operation table
Multi-speed
selection
0 speed
1st speed2-speed
3-speed
4-speed
5-speed
6-speed
7-speed8 speed9 speed
10-speed
11-speed
12-speed
13-speed
14-speed
15-speed

DHH

DFH

DFM

DFL

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Multi-speed
selection
0 speed
1st speed2-speed
3-speed
4-speed
5-speed
6-speed
7-speed

S F7

S F6

S F5

S F4

S F3

S F2

S F1

OFF
ON

OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

■Acceleration/Deceleration operation example
e.g. ➂ Different acceleration/deceleration times can be set even when the frequency command is the same.
3rd [Ab-13] and 4th [Ab-14]
Outputfrequency

2nd speed [Ab-12]
1st speed [Ab-11]

e.g.①
e.g.②

Acceleration
Deceleration
time
Multi speed selection

1st Accel 2nd accel. 3rd accel. 3rd Decel 4th Accel
3rd Decel 4th Accel 4th Decel
Same[AC-30] [AC-34] [AC-38] [AC-40] [AC-42] command [AC-40] [AC-42] [AC-44]

1st speed2-speed 3-speed 2-speed 4-speed 3-speed 1st speed

4-speed[FR] Input

e.g. ① When the multi-speed three-speed gear is engaged, if the actuator is in the acceleration
direction, the multi-speed three-acceleration time [AC-38] is valid.
e.g. ② When a multi-speed single speed gear is engaged, if it is in the deceleration direction, themulti-speed three-speed deceleration time [AC-40] of the multi-speed three prior to the entryof the multi-speed one speed gear is enabled.
e.g. ③ When the multi-speed 3-speed and multi-speed 4-speed are the same, different settings ofthe multi-speed 3-acceleration time [AC-38] and multi-speed 4-acceleration time [AC-42]
possible different acceleration times to be set for the same frequency command as shown in
the above figure.

9-30
9-30

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Acceleration/Deceleration operation example
・The table below shows the correspondence between multi-speed command and acceleration/
deceleration time.
Setting status

Multi-speedcommand
1-speed ON
2-speed ON

Higherfrequency
after ON
To theaccelerationstate

3-speed ON
4-speed ON
5-speed ON
6-speed ON

M speed

7-speed ON
8-speed ON
9-speed ON

Multi speed
selection M
Acceleration
time

Lower
frequency
after OFFTo thedecelerationstate
N speedMulti speed
selection N
Decelerationtime

Acceleration/deceleration time
to be adopted

State of the command
Multi-speed 1st speed [Ab-11] > Frequency prior to 1st
speed ON
Multi-speed 2-speed [Ab-12] > Frequency prior to 2-speed
ON
Multi-speed 3-speed [Ab-13] > Frequency prior to 3-speed
ON
Multi-speed 4-speed [Ab-14] > Frequency prior to 4-speed
ON
Multi-speed 5-speed [Ab-15] > Frequency prior to 5-speed
ON
Multi-speed 6-speed [Ab-16] > Frequency prior to 6-speed
ON
Multi-speed 7-speed [Ab-17] > 7-speed ON pre-frequency
Multi-speed 8-speed [Ab-18] > Frequency prior to 8-speed
ON
Multi-speed 9-speed [Ab-19] > Frequency prior to 9-speed
ON

Multi-speed 1st speed acceleration time[AC-30]
Multi-speed 2-speed acceleration [AC-34]
Multi-speed 3-speed acceleration time[AC-38]
Multi-speed 4-speed acceleration time[AC-42]
Multi-speed 5-speed acceleration time[AC-46]
Multi-speed 6-speed acceleration time[AC-50]
Multi-speed 7-speed acceleration time[AC-54]
Multi-speed 8-speed acceleration time[AC-58]
Multi-speed 9-speed acceleration time[AC-62]

10-speed ON

Multi-speed 10-speed [Ab-20] > 10 speed prior to ON

Multi-speed 10-speed acceleration time[AC-66]

11-speed ON

Multi-speed 11st speed [Ab-21] > 11 speed ON prefrequency

Multi-speed 11-speed acceleration time[AC-70]

12-speed ON
13-speed ON
14-speed ON
15-speed ON
Without
multi-speed
1-speed OFF
2-speed OFF
3-speed OFF
4-speed OFF
5-speed OFF
6-speed OFF
7-speed OFF
8-speed OFF
9-speed OFF
10-speed OFF
11-speed OFF
12-speed OFF
13-speed OFF
14-speed OFF
15-speed OFF
Without
multi-speed

Multi-speed 12 speed [Ab-22] > 12 speed prior to ON

Multi-speed 12-speed acceleration time[AC-74]

Multi-speed 13-speed [Ab-23] > 13 speed prior to ON

Multi-speed 13-speed acceleration time[AC-78]

Multi-speed 14-speed [Ab-24] > 14 speed ON pre-frequency

Multi-speed 14-speed acceleration time[AC-82]

Multi-speed 15-speed [Ab-25] > 15 speed prior to ON

Multi-speed 15-speed acceleration time[AC-86]

Other than the above

Acceleration time 1[AC120]

Multi-speed 1st speed [Ab-11] > Frequency after 1st speed
OFF

Multi-speed 1st deceleration time[AC-32]

Multi-speed 2-speed [Ab-12] > Frequency after 2-speed OFF

Multi-speed 2-speed deceleration time[AC-36]

Multi-speed 3-speed [Ab-13] > Frequency after 3-speed OFF

Multi-speed 3-speed deceleration time[AC-40]

Multi-speed 4-speed [Ab-14] > Frequency after 4-speed OFF

Multi-speed 4-speed deceleration time[AC-44]

Multi-speed 5-speed [Ab-15] > Frequency after 5-speed OFF

Multi-speed 5-speed deceleration time[AC-48]

Multi-speed 6-speed [Ab-16] > Frequency after 6-speed OFF

Multi-speed 6-speed deceleration time[AC-52]

Multi-speed 7-speed [Ab-17] > Frequency after 7-speed OFF

Multi-speed 7-speed deceleration time[AC-56]

Multi-speed 8-speed [Ab-18] > frequency after 8-speed OFF

Multi-speed 8-speed deceleration time[AC-60]

Multi-speed 9-speed [Ab-19] > Frequency after 9-speed OFF

Multi-speed 9-speed deceleration time[AC-64]

Multi-speed 10-speed [Ab-20] > 10 speed after OFF

Multi-speed 10 speed deceleration time[AC-68]

Multi-speed 11st speed [Ab-21] > 11 speed after OFF

Multi-speed 11 speed deceleration time[AC-72]

Multi-speed 12-speed [Ab-22] > 12 speed after OFF

Multi-speed 12 speed deceleration time[AC-76]

Multi-speed 13-speed [Ab-23] > 13 speed after OFF

Multi-speed 13 speed deceleration time[AC-80]

Multi-speed 14-speed [Ab-24] > 14 speed after OFF

Multi-speed 14-speed deceleration time[AC-84]

Multi-speed 15-speed [Ab-25] > 15 speed after OFF

Multi-speed 15-speed deceleration time[AC-88]

Other than the above

Deceleration time 1[AC122]

・Switching timing between frequency command and deceleration time by multi-speed terminal
command is different.
[Ab-12][Ab-12][Ab-11][Ab-11][AC-34]

Outputfrequency

Frequency
reference
Accelerationtime[AC-36]

Outputfrequency

1st speed

Frequency
reference

2nd speed2-speedDeceleration
time

9-31
9-31

2-speed

1st speed2-speedChapter 9

Inverter Function

9.4 Limiting frequency reference/RUN command
9.4.1 Limiting frequency reference
・The frequency limiter function can limit the frequency reference range. In addition, the upper
frequency limiter can be specified with analog input, etc. by setting "Frequency upper limit selection[bA101]".
・Even if a frequency reference outside the frequency upper/lower limiter range is input, it will be limitedby this function.
・Upper frequency limit setting can be checked by "Frequency upper limit monitor [dA-14]".
・To enable the upper frequency limiter, set "Upper frequency limit source selection [bA101]" to otherthan "disabled (00)".
・When [bA101] is set to "Parameter setting (07)", be sure to set "Upper frequency limit [bA102]". Notethat the frequency setting upper limit is 0.00Hz because the upper frequency limiter operates even in
the default 0.00Hz.
・Be sure to set the frequency limit function so that the upper limit does not exceed "Async. Motormaximum frequency setting [Hb105]". Note that inconsistent settings may trigger a warning message.
・When setting "Lower frequency limit [bA103]", be sure to set [bA103] after setting [bA102] to larger
value than lower limiter.
・The lower limit of the frequency command can also be set by "Minimum frequency adjustment[Hb130]". However, note that the operation when [Hb130] is changed is different from the lower
frequency limiter. For more information on [Hb130], refer to "9.7.1 Starting with Gradually Increasing
Voltage".
・When the remote operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards) is connected, [LIM] icon is displayed during the
restriction due to the upper/lower limiter and minimum frequency.
Code

Item

dA-14

Frequency upper limit
monitorbA101

Upper frequency limit
source selection

bA102

Upper frequency limit

bA103

Lower frequency limit
Async. Motormaximum frequency
setting

Hb105

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

-

00
01
02
07
08
09
12

00

Description
Monitors the current upper frequency limit.
DisableTerminal [VRF]
Terminal [IRF]
Parameter setting
RS485
OptionPulse input
Set the upper frequency limit when [bA101] set to"Parameter setting (07)".
Set the lower frequency limit.
Set the maximum frequency of the motor.

0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

Base frequency to 590.00 Hz■Example of upper/lower frequency limiter operation for frequency command

Frequency command
input
Upper frequency limit [bA102]

Actual frequency
Lower frequency [bA103]
command

9-32
9-32

0.00

0.00 to Upper frequency limit Hz
60.00

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.4.2 Limiting RUN command direction
・By setting the "RUN direction restriction selection [AA114]" parameter, it is possible to limit the RUN
command direction to either forward or reverse rotation.
・This function can also limit reverse rotation command that are triggered by the frequency command
sign changing to negative.
・When the operation direction limit function is activated, andis displayed on the inverter
display.
・This function works by limiting RUN command direction. Therefore, it is not effective in cases such as
when using control methods other than V/f control where control calculations can result in an output
that causes reverse operation. To limit the output, enable "Direction reversal protection [HC114]". For
details, refer to "9.4.3 Limiting Rotation Output Direction".
・Even when this function is used, the motor may rotate in the reverse direction when subject to external
forces. When using this function as a protection against reverse rotation, the system must be free ofexternal forces that are applied in the reverse direction.
Code

AA114

Item

RUN direction restriction selection

Description
No restriction
Only forward rotation commands are enabled.
(Reverse rotation is limited.)
Only reverse rotation commands are enabled.
(Forward rotation is limited.)

Data

Initial
value

00
01

00

02

9.4.3 Limiting rotation output direction
・In some cases, the control system may result in a output that is in the opposite direction of the RUN
command, such as when operating at low speeds. The "Direction reversal protection [HC114]" can be set
to limit the rotation output so it keeps the same direction as the command.
・This function should be enabled in cases when reverse rotation of the motor results in equipment damage.
・This function is enabled when "Control mode selection [AA121]" is set to "Sensorless vector control (IM)(08)".
・Even when this function is used, the motor may rotate in the reverse direction when subject to high-loadexternal forces. When using this function as a protection against an improper rotation direction, be sureto thoroughly confirm that the equipment does not rotate in the reverse direction.
Code

Item

AA121

Control mode selection

HC114

Direction reversal protection

Description
Sensorless vector control (IM)DisableEnable:Prohibit rotation in the opposite direction.

9-33
9-33

Data
08
00
01

Initial
value
00
01

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.4.4 Disabling output until RUN command permission
・To ensure that the system configuration remains safe, inverter operation can be disabled until anoperation permission signal that is separate from the RUN command is input.
・When "RUN enable [REN] (84)" input terminal is assigned to a control circuit terminal, the inverter
operation is not permitted until the [REN] input terminal is turned on.
・This function is enabled by assigning "RUN enable [REN]" input termina to one of the control circuit
terminals.
・When the [REN] input terminal is assigned and the signal is off, the inverter is prevented from operating.
When performing temporary operation such as commissioning, the [REN] input terminal must be set to"No assignment [no]".
Code
CA01 toCA08

Item
Input terminal function

Description

Data

RUN enable [REN]：
Control enable/disable of operation.
ON: Operation Enable
OFF: Operation Disable

101■Example of the "RUN enable [REN]" operation
Outputfrequency[REN] Input

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

RUN command[FR], [RR] Input

ON

9-34
9-34

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5 Motor control mode selection
9.5.1 Motor control mode selection
・Set the appropriate control method according to the motor to be driven and the application using thecontrol method [AA121]. For details, refer to the table below and the description of each control
method in the following sections.
・When using the sensorless vector control or automatic torque booth, be sure to set the motor constantof the motor to be used. For details, refer to "8.1.5 Setting Motor Constant" or "8.3 Performing Autotuning of Motor".
・When driving multiple induction motors (IM) with one inverter, use V/f control other than auto torqueboost.
・By feeding back the actual speed of the motor with an external encoder, high accuracy and stablespeed control can be achieved. For details, refer to "9.5.8 Moving with Sensor-equipped Speed
Control".
・When using synchronous (permanent magnets) motors (SM(PMM)), please contact your supplier.

Code

AA121

Item

Controlmode
selection

Description
Applicable motor

Induction motor (IM)

Synchronous (permanent-magnet)
motor (SM(PMM)

Data

Control mode selection[V/f] Fixed torque characteristics (IM)VC characteristics
V/f Control Reduction Torque Characteristics(VP1.7 Power Characteristics)
V/f controlled free V/fV/f control auto torque boost
Sensorless vector control
Synchronous activation type sensorless vector
control

Initial
value

00
01
02
03
08

00

11

■Features of each control mode
Control mode
selection

Overview

ManualtorqueBoost

V/f control
Constant-torquecharacteristics(VC characteristics)

Suitable for applications that require acertain amount of torque, such as
conveyors and buckets, and for
applications that want to simplify
setting and adjustment, etc.

〇

〇

〇

〇

Not
requiredV/f control
Reduced TorqueCharacteristics(VP1.7 PowerCharacteristics)

Suitable for applications that do not
require large torque, such as fans andpumps, and for applications that wantto make setting and adjustment easier.

〇

〇

〇

〇

Not
requiredV/f control
Free-V/f
V/f control
Automatic torqueboost
Sensorless vector
control
Synchronous
Activation
Sensorless Vector
Control

Automatic
With sensor
energy saving
Speed control
Operation

MultiplemotorsDrive

Setting a
motor
constant

Suitable for applications such as
special motors where you want tofreely set the output voltage withrespect to the output frequency.
If the torque is insufficient, thefrequency and output voltage areautomatically adjusted to improve thetorque shortage.
It is suitable for applications where alarge torque is required from a low
speed or a high-precision output
frequency is required.

×

〇

〇

〇

Not
required

×

×

〇

×

Mandatory

×

×

〇

×

Mandatory

Setting for driving a synchronous
motor (SM)/permanent-magnet motor(PMM).

××××

Mandatory

9-35
9-35

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.2 V/f control constant-torque characteristics (VC characteristics)
・V/f control is a method for controlling a motor by setting the output voltage-characteristics to thefrequency output by the inverter. It is not necessary to set the motor constant of the motor to be used,
and it can be used easily.
・The output voltage of the constant-torque characteristic is output to be proportional to the frequency
command in a straight line connecting 0Hz/0V and the base frequency/rated voltage.
・0 From Hz to the base frequency, the output voltage is determined in proportion to the frequency, but
the output voltage from the base frequency to the highest frequency is constant regardless of thefrequency.
・When the manual torque boost function is used, the boost voltage is added to the basic proportionalline for output. The manual torque boost function is effective when torque is insufficient at low speeds.
For details, refer to "9.5.6 Using the Manual Torque Boost Function".
Output voltage(V)Motor rated
voltage[Hb106]Frequency
reference(Hz)0Base frequency[Hb104]Max. frequency[Hb105]・If the motor humbles or vibrates, it may be improved by adjusting the "V/f, A.bst) [HA110".
・If the motor vibrates when more than one motor is being moved by one inverter, it may be stabilized byadjusting the [HA110] in the downward direction.
Code

Item

Description

AA121

Control mode selection

HA110

Stabilization constant

Hb104

IM Base frequency

Sets the base frequency of IM motor.

Hb105

IM Maximum frequency

Set the maximum frequency of IM Motor.

Hb106

IM motor rated voltage

Set the rated voltage of IM motor.

Used in V/f control constant torquecharacteristics (IM).
Adjusts the control to suppress the motor
hunting when V/f control is selected.

9-36
9-36

Data

Initial
value

00

00

0 to 1000 %100

30.00 to
IM Max. frequency Hz
IM Base frequency to590.00 Hz
1 to 1000 V

60.00
60.00
200/400

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.3 V/f control reduced torque characteristics (VP1.7 power characteristics)
・V/f control is a way of controlling the motor by setting the voltage-characteristics to be output withrespect to the frequency output by the inverter. It is effective when you do not need to set theindividual motor constant of the motor to be used and you want to use it easily.
・The reduced torque characteristic (VP1.7 power characteristic) is suitable for applications such as
fans/pumps that do not require large torque in the low-speed range. In the low-speed range, the output
voltage is reduced to improve efficiency, reduce noise, and reduce vibration.
・When the manual torque boost function is used, the boost voltage is added to V/f pattern of the
reduced torque characteristic. The boost voltage is then output. The manual torque boost function iseffective when torque is insufficient at low speeds. For details, refer to "9.5.6 Using the Manual Torque
Boost Function".
Output voltage(V)Motor rated
voltage[Hb106]

1.7

1.7th power (f )Proportional

0
10 % of thebase frequencyab

Output frequency(Hz)Base frequency Max. frequency[Hb104][Hb105]cPeriod a: The range from 0Hz to 10% of the base frequency is a constant-torque characteristic.
(e.g.) If the base frequency is 60Hz, the range from 0 to 6Hz is the constant-torque characteristic.
Period b: The range from 10% of the base frequency to the base frequency is the reduced torque characteristic.
The voltage is output with a curve of the power of 1.7 with respect to the frequency.
Period c: The voltage from the base frequency to the highest frequency is a constant output characteristic.

・If the motor humbles or vibrates, it may be improved by adjusting the "V/f, A.bst) [HA110".
・If the motor vibrates when more than one motor is being moved by one inverter, it may be stabilized byadjusting the [HA110] in the downward direction.

Code

Item

Description

AA121

Control mode selection

HA110

Stabilization constant

Hb104

IM Base frequency

Sets the base frequency of IM motor.

Hb105

IM Maximum frequency

Set the maximum frequency of IM Motor.

Hb106

IM motor rated voltage

Set the rated voltage of IM motor.

Used in V/f control reduction torquecharacteristics (IM).
Adjusts the control to suppress the motor
hunting when V/f control is selected.

9-37
9-37

Data

Initial
value

01

00

0 to 1000 %100

30.00 to
IMMax. frequency Hz
IM Base frequency to590.00 Hz
1 to 1000 V

60.00
60.00
200/400

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.4 V/f controlled free V/f
・V/f control is a way of controlling the motor by setting the voltage-characteristics to be output withrespect to the frequency output by the inverter. It is effective when you do not need to set theindividual motor constant of the motor to be used and you want to use it easily.
・The free V/f is suitable for applications in which the load varies greatly depending on a special motor or
rotational speed. Therefore, it is suitable for applications in which the output voltage is freely set withrespect to the output frequency. It is also effective when adjusting the voltage characteristics optimallymanually for energy saving.
・In the free V/f setting, any V/f response can be set by setting 7 output voltageand output frequency.
Description

Data

Initial
value

02

00

0 to 1000 %

100

Code

Item

AA121

Control mode selection

Used in V/f control free V/f (IM).

HA110

Async. Motor stabilization
constant (V/f, A.bst)

Adjusts the control to suppress the motor
hunting when V/f control is selected.

Hb104

IM Base frequency

Sets the base frequency of IM motor.

Hb105

IM Maximum frequency

Set the maximum frequency of IM Motor.

Hb106

IM motor rated voltage

Set the rated voltage of IM motor.

Hb150

Free-V/f frequency 1

0.00 to Hb152 Hz

Hb152

Free-V/f frequency 2

Hb150 to Hb154 Hz

Hb154

Free-V/f frequency 3

Hb152 to Hb156 Hz

Hb156

Free-V/f frequency 4

Hb158

Free-V/f frequency 5

Hb156 to Hb160 Hz

Hb160

Free-V/f frequency 6

Hb158 to Hb162 Hz

Hb162

Free-V/f frequency 7

Hb160 to Base frequency Hz

Hb151

Free-V/f voltage 1

Hb153

Free-V/f voltage 2

Hb155

Free-V/f voltage 3

Hb157

Free-V/f voltage 4

Hb159

Free-V/f voltage 5

Hb161

Free-V/f voltage 6

Hb163

Free-V/f voltage 7

30.00 to
IM Max. frequency Hz
IM Base frequency to590.00 Hz
1 to 1000 V

Set the frequency at each segmental point.

Hb154 to Hb158 Hz

Set the output voltage at each segmental
point.

0.0 to 1000.0 V

Output voltage(V)Motor rated
voltage [Hb106]

V7

V6
V5
V4
V1
V2,V3

OutputFrequency(Hz)
0

f1

f2

f3

f4

f5

f6

f7

Max. frequency[Hb105]

Base frequency[Hb104]

9-38
9-38

60.00
60.00
200/400

0.00

0.0Chapter 9

Inverter Function

・If the motor humbles or vibrates, it may be improved by adjusting the "V/f, A.bst) [HA110".
・The frequency of the free V/f setting should always be f1≦f2≦f3≦f4≦f5≦f6≦f7 ≦ base frequency. The
defaults for the Free V/f setting are all 0Hz. After setting the maximum frequency and the basefrequency, set 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 in order from Free V/f setting 7.
・Even if 1000V is set to the free V/f voltage 1 to 7, the inverter cannot output the input voltage or a
voltage higher than the "IM motor rated voltage [Hb106]".
・If the characteristics are not set properly, it may cause overcurrent during acceleration/deceleration or
vibration of the motor or machine. Be very careful.
Output voltage(V)V7Motor rated
Voltage [Hb106]

Output voltage or
Motor rated voltage

V6

0

f6

f7

OutputFrequency(Hz)Base frequency[Hb104]9-39
9-39

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.5 V/f controlled auto-torque boost
・Automatically adjusts the frequency and output voltage to produce torque.
・In automatic torque boost, the frequency and output voltage are corrected in order to control the
motor. For this reason, the motor constant must be taken in by auto-tuning, etc.
・If the motor humbles or vibrates, it may be improved by adjusting the "V/f, A.bst) [HA110".
・For automatic torque boost, set the motor capacity, number of motor poles, base frequency, rated
voltage, and rated current appropriately to perform motor control.
・If the characteristics are not obtained, perform auto-tuning referring to "8.3 Auto-tuning of Motor". If
the characteristics do not appear after auto-tuning, adjust the following page.

Code

Item

AA121

Control mode selection

HA110

Stabilization constant

Hb104

IM Base frequency

Sets the base frequency of IM motor.

Hb105

IM Maximum frequency

Set the maximum frequency of IM Motor.

Hb106

IM motor rated voltage
Automatic torque boost
voltage compensation
gain
Automatic torque boost
slip compensation gain

Set the rated voltage of IM motor.

HC101
HC102

Description
Used for V/f control auto torque boost (IM).
Adjusts the control to suppress the motor
hunting when V/f control is selected.

Adjusts the voltage addition of the automatic
torque boost.

Data

Initial
value

03

00

0 to 1000 %100

30.00 to
IM Max. frequency Hz
IM Base frequency to590.00 Hz
1 to 1000 V

200/400

0 to 255 %

100

60.00
60.00

Adjusts the frequency addition of the automatic
torque boost.

・If the desired characteristics cannot be obtained even after inputting the motor constant or performing
auto-tuning, perform the adjustment referring to the remedy example in the table below.
・If the rotation of the motor is obstructed by brake or motor lock due to foreign matter, overcurrent may
occur. If it is not improved by adjustment, it may be improved by checking around the motor.
・If the display of "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]" changes significantly when a load is applied, theoverload limit function, instantaneous power failure non-stop function, overvoltage control function, orother function to change the frequency in a moving manner may be activated depending on the settingof the function. Refer to "Chapter 15 Troubleshooting" for more information.
Phenomena

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Output voltage is insufficient andtorque is not output.
Slow motor rotation at low speed

When the load becomes heavy,
the motor rotation frequency
decreases.
When the load becomes heavy,
the motor rotation frequency
increases.
Overcurrent error occurs when
the load becomes heavy or
accelerates.

The frequency correction is
insufficient and the torque is not
output.
The frequency correction is
insufficient and the torque is not
output.
Frequency correction isexcessive and frequency
increases.
Excessive voltage correction
results in increased current.
Frequency correction isexcessive and frequency
increases.

9-40
9-40

Increase the Auto Torque Boost Voltage Compensation
Gain [HC101] by 5%.
Decrease the carrier frequency [bb101].
Increase the Auto Torque Boost Sliding Compensation
Gain [HC102] by about 5%.
Increase the Auto Torque Boost Sliding Compensation
Gain [HC102] by about 5%.
Adjust "Auto torque boost slip compensation gain
[HC102]" in increments of about 5 %.
Adjust the Auto Torque Boost Voltage Compensation
Gain [HC101] in increments of about 5 %.
Adjust "Auto torque boost slip compensation gain
[HC102]" in increments of about 5 %.

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.6 Manual torque boost function
・Manual torque boost is a function that adds the outputvoltage so that torque can be produced even at
low speeds by V/f control.
・In V/f control, no extra compensation is made to control the motor. For this reason, when the output
voltage is low, the voltage applied to the motor drops due to the resistance component inside themotor or the voltage drop caused by wiring. The torque boost function improves the torque drop in the
low-speed range by correcting the voltage.
・With this function,When the "Control method [AA121]" is "V/f control constant torque characteristic(00)" or "V/f control reduced torque characteristic (01)", the manual torque boost function is available.
・When increasing the set value of manual torque boost, pay attention to overexcitation of the motor.
Boosting may increase the current flow, resulting in motor burnout.
・In "Manual torque boost amount [Hb141]", set the ratio when "Motor rated voltage [Hb106]" is regarded
as 100%. The set value is the maximum. addition value at the "manual torque boost segmental point[Hb142]".
・For the manual torque boost break point [Hb142], set the ratio assuming that the "Base frequency[Hb104]" is 100%.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

00
01
02
03

01

Hb140

Manual torque boost
operation mode selection

DisableAlways enabled
Valid only for forward rotation
Valid only in reverse rotation

Hb141

Manual torque boost value

Manual Torque Boost Sets the amount of boost at the
break point. Set the ratio assuming that "motor rated
voltage [Hb106]" is 100%.

0.0 to 20.0 %

1.0

Hb142

Manual torque boost peakspeed

Set the manual torque boost break point (the point at
which the summed voltage becomes the maximum). Set"Base frequency [Hb104]" as a percentage (100%).

0.0 to 50.0 %0.8■Manual Torque Boost Setting Ex.: [Hb140] = Valid only when in forward rotation (01)V/f Response when torque boost s not used

Reverse side

Output voltage(%)
Motor rated
voltage100 %[Hb106]

Forward side

V/f response when "Enable only for forward rotation (01)" is set
Output voltage(%)
Reverse side

Outputfrequency(Hz)
Base frequency[Hb104]0%Motor rated
voltage[Hb106]

Base frequency[Hb104]100%

Forward side

[Hb141]
Outputfrequency(Hz)

Boost value with manual torque boost value

Reverse side

Output voltage(%)
Motor rated
voltage100%[Hb106][Hb141]
Base frequency[Hb104]

Base frequency[Hb104]
Forward side

Outputfrequency(Hz)0% [Hb142] Base frequency[Hb104]9-41
9-41

0% [Hb142]

Base frequency[Hb104]

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.7 Energy-saving mode
・The automatic energy-saving operation function automatically adjusts the inverter output power so that
it is minimized during constant speed operation. Suitable for load with reduced torque characteristics
of fan and pump.
・To use this function, set "Energy saving operation selection [Hb145]" to "Enabled (01)". Response andaccuracy can be adjusted with Energy Saver Response and Accuracy Adjustment [Hb146].
・This function is available when "Control method [AA121]" is "V/f control constant torque characteristic(00)", "V/f control reduced torque characteristic (01)" or "V/f control free V/f(02".
・Since this function is controlled relatively slowly, if a sudden load fluctuation such as an impact load
occurs, the motor may stall and cause an overcurrent trip.
Code

Item

Hb145

Eco drive enable

Hb146

Eco drive response adjustment

Description
DisableEnableData: 0 ⇔ 100
Response: Slow ⇔ Fast
Accuracy: High ⇔ Low

9-42
9-42

Data

Initial
value

01
01

00

0 to 100 %50Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.8 Speed control with sensor
・The speed control function with sensor is a function that performs high-precision frequency control byusing an encoder to feed back the actual speed of the motor. It can be used when "control method[AA121]" is either V/f control or sensorless vector control.
・When velocity feedback is used in sensorless vector control, be sure to set "Vector control mode
selection [AA123]" to "Speed/torque control mode (00)".
・In order to control the motor, this function corrects PI control so that the motor revolutions follow thefrequency command.
・When "Pulse input detection target selection [CA-90]" is set to other than "Disable (00)", the input
terminal [RST] becomes the B-phase input of the encoder signal and the input terminal [PLA] becomes
the A-phase input of the encoder signal, regardless of the parameter setting, and a/b(NO/NC) setting is
also disabled.
・If the motor operation is unstable or the follow-up to the command is slow, adjustment "SlipCompensation P Gain with Sensor [Hb170]" and "Slip Compensation I Gain with Sensor [Hb171]" byreferring to "Adjustment Methods for Velocity Control with Sensor" in this section.
・Refer to "9.5.11 Set Encoder Feedback" for details on settings for performing encoder feedback and theprotection function when used.

Frequency
Reference+-Controlfrequency

PI control

Deviation ε

1
Kp（1+
）
Ti･S

+
+

Frequency
Voltage control

M

Encoder

Kp: Proportional gain setting Ti: Integral time s: Operator ε: Deviation
Ki: Integral gain setting (Ki=Kp/Ti)

Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value
00

AA123

Vector control mode selection

Mode of speed control to torque control

00

AA124

Speed compensation with encoder
selection

Disable00

Enable

01

CA-07
CA-08

Input terminal function [RST] selection
Input terminal function [PLA] selection

CA-27

Input terminal [RST] active state

CA-28

Input terminal [PLA] active state

CA-81

Encoder constant setting

CA-86
CA-90
CA-91

Hb170
Hb171

00

000 to 110

028
103

00、01

00

Set the number of pulses per revolution of theencoder.

1 to 65535 pls

512

Speed feedback filter

Filter time constant for the detection speed byencoder pulse input.

0 to 1000 ms

20

Pulse input target function selection

Velocity feedback

02

01

90° phase difference pulse input

00

Forward and reverse command and pulse input

01

Single phase pulse input

03

Pulse input mode selection
Slip compensation with sensor
P gainSlip compensation with sensor
I gainWhen (01) to (03) are selected for [CA-90], thissetting is disabled, and input terminals [RST]
and [PLA] become input terminals for encodersignal.

Proportional (P) gain for slip compensation of
speed control with sensor.
Integral (I) gain for slip compensation of speed
control with sensor.

9-43
9-43

0 to 1000 %

03

100

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Adjustment method for speed control with sensor
・If sufficient characteristics cannot be obtained, adjust each item referring to the table below.
・If the rotation of the motor is obstructed by brake or motor lock due to foreign matter, overcurrent may
occur. If it is not improved by adjustment, it may be improved by checking around the motor.
・If the "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]" changes significantly when a load is applied, the functionthat automatically changes the frequency, such as the overload limiting function, instantaneous power
failure non-stop function, and overvoltage suppression function, may be working depending on thesetting status of the function. Refer to "Chapter 15 Troubleshooting" for more information.
Phenomena
Slow motor speed follow-up tocommand.
Motor operation is not stable.
Overshoot and hunting occur.

Possible causal

Increase "Sensor equipped slip compensation
P gain [Hb170]".

The response to the feedback value is
too fast.

Decrease "Slip Compensating P Gain with sensor[Hb170]".

The integral action reacts slowly.

Increase "Slip Compensating I Gain with Sensor[Hb171]".

The integral action reacts quickly.

Increase "Slip Compensating I Gain with Sensor[Hb171]".

Motor speed vibrates gently.
It takes time for the operation tostabilize.
The motor speed vibrates anddoes not match the command
speed well.

Example of remedy

Slow output response and slow motor
speed (feedback value) change.

9-44
9-44

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.9 Stabilize the motor hunting
・"Stabilization constant (V/f, A.bst)[HA110)" is a function that adjusts to stabilize the motor when the motor
is hunting. Find and adjust the point within the setting range where the tuning will stop.
・When driving more than one motor with one inverter, setting [HA110] to 0% may improve the performance.
・ When rotating a fan/fan or other highly inertial load, reduce the [HA110] by 10% to improve theperformance.
・If the motor capacity is smaller than the rated capacity of the inverter, an improvement may be made byincreasing the setting value by 10%. Conversely, if the motor capacity is large, you can improve bydecreasing the setting value by 10%.
・[HA110] can be used to set the output-frequency response based on the stabilization end ratio (V/f, A.bst)[HA112) and the stabilization start ratio (V/f, A.bst) [HA113).
・If the motor gets blurred or vibrated, check if the motor capacity, number of motor poles, base frequency,
maximum frequency, motor rated voltage, and motor rated current are properly set. For details, refer to"8.1.3 Setting Motor Nameplate Data to Parameters".
・The following methods can be used to suppress hunting. If there is no effect, return the value.
- Adjust by gradually lowering the "Carrier frequency [bb101]" to 2kHz.
- Gradually decrease the "Output-voltage gain [Hb180]" to 80%.
・"Stabilization constant (V/f, A.bst) [HA110)" and "Output-voltage gain [Hb180]" are enabled when "V/fcontrol (00 to 03)" is set to "Control method [AA121]".
■Stabilization end/start rate setting
・When "Stabilization End Ratio (V/f, A.bst) [HA112)"
Stabilization constant(%)
and "Stabilization Start Ratio (V/f, A.bst) [HA113)"[HA110]are set, the characteristics of "Stabilization End
Ratio (V/f, A.bst) [HA110)" are as shown in the
diagram.
・If the output frequency is [HA113] or less, thestabilization constant will be 0%. If the output
0
frequency is [HA113] to [HA112], the stabilization[HA113] [HA112]
constant will increase proportionally from 0 % to the[HA110] setting. If the output frequency is [HA112]
or more, the stabilization constant will be the [HA110] setting.
Code

Item

Description

OutputFrequency(Hz)100%(Base frequency)

Data

Initialvalue

2.0 to 15.0 kHz(ND: Normal duty)
2.0 to 10.0 kHz(LD: Light duty)

2.0

100

bb101

Carrier frequency

Change the carrier frequency of PWM out.
Decrease the value if you are hunting.

HA110

Async. Motorstabilization constant(V/f, A.bst)

If the motor is distorted, adjust it.

0 to 1000 %HA112

Stabilization end ratio(V/f, A.bst)

Adjusts the output frequency characteristics of thestabilization constant.
Set the base frequency as a percentage (100%).

0 to 100 %If the motor is distracting, lower it.
Decreasing the setting decreases the output voltage.

0 to 255 %HA113

Stabilization start rate
(V/f, A.bst)

Hb180

Output voltage gain

9-45
9-45

30
10
100

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.10 Sensorless vector control
・ The sensorless vector control system estimates and controls the motor speed and output torqueaccording to the inverter output voltage and current and the set motor constant. High starting torquefrom the low frequency range (0.5 Hz) and high accuracy operation with little rotational speed variationeven if the load varies.
・When using sensorless vector control, be sure to set the specifications and motor constant of the motor
to be used. For details, refer to "8.1.3 Setting Motor Nameplate Data to Parameters", "8.1.5 Setting Motor
Constant", or "8.3 Auto-tuning Motor".
・The "Speed Response [HA115]" can be used to adjust the follow-up possible of the actual speed in
response to a frequency command, such as when a load fluctuates.
・If the motor is shaky or vibrates, it may be improved by adjusting [HA115] or "Torque current command
filter time constant [HC120]".
・In the low-speed range (several Hz or less), the motor may rotate in reverse to the operation commanddirection. If this happens, enabled "Reverse prevention selection [HC114]". For details, refer to "9.4.3
Limiting the Rotation Output Direction".
・If the torque at start is insufficient and the desired performance cannot be obtained, set "Boost at Start(IM-SLV)[HC111)" to a larger value.
・At startup, acceleration starts after the magnetic flux of the level set in "magnetic flux establishment level[HC137]" is established. When [HC137] is set to a large value, the operation at start can be stabilized,
but the standby time until acceleration starts is longer.
・The upper level can be adjusted by setting "Modulation ratio level ([HC141], [HC142])".
If the [HC141]/[HC142] is adjusted to a large value, the output current may be suppressed as the output
voltage increases. On the other hand, however, the distortion of the output waveform may increase andthe operation may become unstable.
・If the wire length is long (more than the reference 20m) or a motor other than us is controlled, thecharacteristics may not be satisfactory.
・Sufficient characteristics may not be obtained if a motor of 2 frames or less of the maximum applicablemotor is operated.
・In low-speed operation, the Carrier Frequency [bb101] is automatically reduced to 2kHz even if it is set
to a value exceeding 2kHz. In addition, since the carrier frequency increases with acceleration,
electromagnetic noise, etc. from the motor may change depending on the output frequency.
・Be sure to set the same value when changing the "Modulation rate level ([HC141], [HC142])".
Description

Data

Initialvalue

Sensorless vector control (IM)Adjusts the response of the control. Increasing the value
increases the follow-up ability to the frequency
command.

0800

0 to1000 %

100

Code

Item

AA121

Control mode selection

HA115

Async. Motor speed response

Hb110
Hb112

Async. Motor constant R1
Async. Motor constant R2

Hb114

Async. Motor constant L

Hb116

Async. Motor constant I0

Hb118

Async. Motor constant J

HC111

Boost value at -motor (IM-SLV)Disable00

HC114

Direction reversal protection selection

Reverse prevention function is enabled. Limit output toprevent it from being output in the opposite direction.

01

HC120

Adjust the torque current filter.

0 to 100 ms

2

Adjusts the feedforward control of the speed controller.

0 to 1000 %

0

HC137

Torque current command filter
Speed feedforward compensation motor
Flux settling -motor

80.0

Modulation factor level 1

HC142

Modulation factor level 2

Adjust the magnetic flux establishment level at start.
Adjust the upper limit level of the output voltage.
Be sure to set the same value when adjusting[HC141]/[HC142].

0.0 to 100.0 %HC141

0 to 133 %

115

HC121

0.000001 to
1000.000000 Ω
For details, refer to "8.1.3 Setting Motor Nameplate Data
to Parameters", "8.1.5 Setting Motor Constant", or "8.3
Auto-tuning Motor".

Adjust the current command at start when the starting
torque is insufficient.

9-46
9-46

0.000001 to
1000.000000 mH
0.01 to 10000.00 A
0.00001 to
10000.00000 kgm2

Dependon themotor

0 to 50 %001Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Adjustment method in sensorless vector control
・If the desired characteristics cannot be obtained, first perform auto-tuning to set the motor constant.
Then, perform the adjustment referring to the table below.
・Before adjusting "Velocity Response [HA115]", set "IM Motor Constant J [Hb118]" as the sum of the
moment of inertia of the motor shaft conversion and the moment of inertia of the motor.
・If the rotation of the motor is obstructed by brake or motor lock due to foreign matter, overcurrent may
occur. If it is not improved by adjustment, it may be improved by checking around the motor.
・If the "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]" changes significantly when a load is applied, the functionthat automatically changes the frequency, such as the overload limiting function, instantaneous power
failure non-stop function, and overvoltage suppression function, may be working depending on thesetting status of the function. Refer to "Chapter 15 Troubleshooting" for more information.
Phenomena

Shock occurs when starting.

Possible causal
The speed response of the control
system is high.

Example of remedy
Decrease the "Velocity Response[HA115]" by 5%.
Reduce IM motor parameter J [Hb118] by 5%.
Reduce the starting boost [HC111] by 5%.

The time from the input of theoperation command to the actual startis long.

Large magnetic flux at start.

Reduce the magnetic flux probability [HC137] by
5 %.

Operation at start is unstable.

Started before the magnetic flux
becomes large enough.

Increase the Magnetic Flux Establishment[HC137] by 5%.

As a result of the control, acommand in the reverse direction
is issued for a moment.

Enable "Reverse rotation prevention selection[HC114]".

During start or low-speed operation,
the motor rotates in the direction
opposite to the commanded rotation
direction for a moment.
Rotation is not stable during lowspeed operation and unevenness
occurs.
When the motor is loaded in the
direction of rotation (regeneration)
during low-speed operation (several
Hz), the rotation frequency increases.
The motor is distorted.
When a load in the stopping direction(power running) is applied to themotor, the rotation frequency
decreases.
When a load in the stopping direction(power running) is applied to themotor, the rotation frequency
increases.
The output current value is large
during high-speed operation (above
the base frequency).
Operation at high speed operation(above base frequency) is not stable.

The speed response of the control
system is low.
Insufficient regenerative torque in
low-speed operation.
The speed response of the control
system is high.

Increase the velocity response [HA115] by 5 %.
Increase IM motor parameter J [Hb118] by 5%.
Increase the "IM motor constant R1 [Hb110]" by
5% in increments of 1.2 times of the set limit.
Increase the "IM motor constant I0 [Hb116]" by
5% in increments of 1.2 times of the set limit.
Decrease the "Velocity Response[HA115]" by 5%.
Reduce IM motor parameter J [Hb118] by 5%.

The motor constant R2 is set low.

Increase 1.2 times of the set value. Increase the"IM motor constant R2 [Hb112" by 5%.

The motor constant R2 is set high.

Adjust "IM motor constant R2 [Hb112]" 0.8 times
as small as the limit in increments of 5 %.

The upper level of the output
voltage is low.

Increase the modulation factor ([HC141],[HC142]) by 5%.

High modulation factor level.

Reduce the modulation factor ([HC141],[HC142]) by 5%.

9-47
9-47

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.5.11 Encoder feedback
・Speed control function with sensor or position control function can be used by inputting encoder
feedback.
・To use the speed control function with sensor or position control function, set "Pulse-input detection
target selection [CA-90]" to "Speed Feedback (02)". When [CA-90] is set to other than "Disabled (00)",
input terminals [RST] and [PLA] become terminals for pulse input or encoder feedback input. When using
encoder feedback, connect the A phase to the input terminal [PLA] and the B phase to the input terminal[RST].
・The detection speed by encoder-feedback can be checked in "Speed detection value monitor [dA-08]".
[dA-08] operates by setting "Velocity Feedback (02)" to "Select Pulse-Input Detection Object [CA-90]".
Also, when using [dA-08], set "Motor pole count [Hb103]", "Encoder setting ([CA-81] to [CA-84])" and"Pulse-input-mode selection [CA-91]" correctly.
・Set the encoder constant in units of (pulse/revolution) of the motor shaft conversion.
・If the detection speed by the encoder-feedback is not stable, set "Detection speed filter time constant[CA-86]" to larger value.
・In HF-620, pulse input can also be used for pulse input frequency command or pulse counting function.
To enable each function, refer to "Combination of related functions and settings using pulse input" in thissection, and set each parameter.
Code

Item

Description

dA-08

Detect speed monitor

AA123

Vector control mode
selection

AA124

Speed compensation withencoder selection

CA-81

Encoder constant setting

CA-82

Encoder phase sequence
selection

Monitors the feedback detection speed. This item
is enabled when "Velocity Feedback (02)" isselected for "Pulse-input Detection Object Select[CA-90]".
Mode of speed control to torque control
Absolute position control mode
High-resolution absolute position control mode
DisableEnableSet the number of connected encoder pulses in thenumber of pulses (multiplied by 1) of motor 1
rotation conversion.
Phase A lead
B phase lead

CA-83

Motor gear ratio numerator

Set the numerator of motor gear ratio.

CA-84

Motor gear ratio denominator

Set the denominator of the motor gear ratio.

CA-86

Detecting speed filter time
constant

CA-90

Pulse input target function
selection

CA-91

Pulse input mode selection

Hb103

IM motor pole selection

Sets the filter time constant for the detection speedby the input from the encoder.
DisablePulse input frequency directive
Velocity feedback
Pulse count90° phase difference pulse input
Forward and reverse command and pulse input
Single phase pulse input
Set the number of motor poles.

9-48
9-48

Data

Initialvalue-590.00 to 590.00 Hz

-

00
02
03
00
01

00
00

1 to 65535 pls

512

00
01

00

1 to 10000

1

0 to 1000 ms

20

00
01
02
03
00
01
03
2 to 48 poles

01

03
01

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Combination of related functions and settings that use pulse input
Effective function

Setting

Reference

Pulse input frequency
command function[CA-90] = Pulse input frequency command (01)『9.2.8 Setting Frequency Reference from Pulse
Input"

Speed control function
with sensor[CA-90] = Speed feedback (02)[AA123] = Speed/torque control mode (00)
[AA124] = Enabled (01)『9.5.8 Move with Sensor-equipped Speed Control

Pulse count function

Position control
function[CA-90] =Disabled (00)[CA-01] to [CA-08]=[PLB](103)、[PLA](104)or[CA-90] = Pulse count (03)[CA-90] = Speed feedback (02)[AA123] = Absolute position control mode (02)orHigh-resolution absolute position
control mode (03)『9.15.5 Checking the Number of Pulses
Entered"『9.14 Performing positioning operation"

Pulse input mode connecting the encoder・If "Pulse input detection target selection [CA-90]" is set to other than "Disabled (00)", input terminals[RST] and [PLA] are automatically switched to terminals for B-and A-phase input of pulse input,
respectively. At this time, the setting of "Input terminal a/b (NO/NC) selection ([CA-21] to [CA-28])" isdisabled. Also note that the hardware specifications differ between input terminal [RST] and input
terminal [PLA]. Hardware-specific specifications, rotational direction-recognition, and wiring of "Pulse
input mode selection [CA-91]" setpoints for input terminals [RST] and [PLA] are shown below.
■Hardware specifications of input terminals [RST]/[PLA]
Pulse input mode selection[CA-91]

Input terminal [RST](24V/ max. 32kHz)

Input terminal [PLA](5 to 24V/ max. 32kHz)

90° phase difference pulse input (00)

B phase pulse(PNP open-collector or voltage-output
encoders)

A phase pulse(PNP open-collector or voltage-output
encoders)

Forward/reverse command and pulse
input (01)Direction signal(sink/source transistor or switchingswitch)Single phase pulse(PNP open-collector or voltage-output
encoders)

Single phase pulse input (03)Single phase pulse(PNP open-collector or voltage-output
encoders)-■Feedback rotation direction recognition
Pulse input mode selection[CA-91]

Operation command
Forward
Reverserotation FR
rotation RR

Input terminal[RST]

Feedback
Rotation direction recognition

90° phase difference pulse input (00)

Either ON-

Encoder detection (90° phase difference)OFF

Forward/reverse command andpulse input (01)Single phase pulse input (03)

Either ON
ON

Forward rotation (according to input
terminal [RST])
Reverse rotation (according to input
terminal [RST])

ON

OFF

-

Forward rotation

OFF

ON

-

Reverse rotation

9-49
9-49

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Wiring of AB phase 90° phase differential pulse. ([CA-91]=00)
・Wire AB phase 90° phase differential pulses to the input terminals [RST] and [PLA] as shown in the
figure below. Input of phase B is from input terminal [PLA], so use all intelligent input terminals
including input terminal [PLA] with source logic (voltage-output type encoder or PNP open-collector
type encoder). In addition, input-voltage high level must be within the specifications (18 to 24V) of theintelligent input terminal.
Voltage-output or
PNP open-collector encoders

Forward rotation:
Advance 90°

P24

A

PLA
A phaseB

RST
B phaseVcc

FR to ES

Encoder

GND

PCS
COM

9-50
9-50

HF-620Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Wiring of single-phase pulse and forward/reverse command ([CA-91]=01, 03)
・For single-phase pulse or forward/reverse command and single-phase pulse, wire as shown in the
figure below.
Input single-phase pulse to input terminal [PLA] and direction signal to input terminal [RST]. The input
terminal [PLA] can be used for both synchro logic and source logic by changing the position of theshort circuit line. When the input terminal [RST] is OFF, it is forward and inverted when it is ON.
Voltage-output or
PNP open-collector encoders

P24

Vcc
Out

Direction

Encoder

HF-620

PLA
A phaseRST
B phase

PCS
GND

COM

Voltage-output or
PNP open-collector encoders

P24

Out

RST
B phaseDirection

Encoder

HF-620

PLA
A phase

Vcc

PCS
GND

COM
Sink transistor

Voltage-output or
PNP open-collector encoders

P24

Vcc

PLA
A phaseOut

RST
B phase

Encoder
Direction

PCS
GND

COM
Source transistor

9-51
9-51

HF-620Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Protection function during encoder feedback
・When encoder feedback is enabled, the following protection functions can be set. Use it according to theapplication.
■Over speed error detection
・If the feedback-detection speed exceeds "Overspeed-detection-level [bb-80]" and "Overspeeddetection-time [bb-81]" or more has elapsed, the inverter trips due to "Overspeed error [E107]".
Set it according to the maximum speed of the application. This function is enabled when pulse
input/detection target selection [CA-90] = "Velocity Feedback (02)" and [bb-80]≠0.0%].
■Speed deviation error detection
・During operation, if the absolute value of the speed deviation (output frequency-detection speed)
exceeds the "speed deviation error detection level [bb-83]" and exceeds the "speed deviation error
detection time [bb-84]" or more, the "speed deviation excess [DSE]" signal is turned ON. If excessive
speed deviation is detected by setting of "Operation [bb-82] at speed deviation error", it can also be
tripped by "Speed deviation error [E105]". To enable this function, set [bb-83] to a value other than
0.00%.
・If the signal is stopping the output, the "Velocity Error Excessive [DSE]" will not be output.
■Encoder disconnection
・If the output frequency is greater than or equal to the "creep speed setting [AE-15]" and the detection
speed is less than the "minimum frequency [Hb130]" for the duration of the "encoder disconnection
detection time [CA-85]", the inverter trips due to the "encoder disconnection error [E100]". Adjust [AE15] and [CA-85] according to the application if false detection occurs due to heavy loads and slow
start-up, etc.
Code

Item

AE-15

Creep speed setting

bb-80

Over-speed detection
level

bb-81

Over-speed detection
time

bb-82

Speed deviation error
mode selection

bb-83

Speed deviation error
detection levelbb-84

Speed deviation error
detection time

CA-85

Encoder disconnection
Time

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

Description
Low-speed operation speed before positioning
completion of position control and speed of encoder
disconnection detection determination.
Sets the level at which the detection speed is judged to
be excessive. Set IM maximum frequency [Hb105] to100%.
Set the duration from when the detection speed
exceeds [bb-80] to when tripping at "Overspeed error[E107]".
Even if a speed deviation error is detected, the motor
does not trip.
If a speed deviation error is detected, the motor trips
with "Speed deviation error [E105]".
Sets the level at which the deviation between thedetection speed and the target speed is judged to be
excessive.
Set the duration from when the velocity error exceeds[bb-83] to when it is judged to be abnormal.
Sets the time to detect encoder disconnection.
Disconnection detection is disabled when the set value
is 0.0.
Excessive velocity error [DSE]:
This signal is turned ON when the conditions below
are met during operation and [bb-84] or longer arecontinued.
|Output Frequency-Detect Speed|≧ [bb-83]

9-52
9-52

Data

Initialvalue

Min.frequency[Hb130]
to 10.00 Hz

5.00

0.0 to150.0 %115.0

0.0 to 5.0 s

0.5

00
00
01
0.00 to 100.00 %15.0

0.0 to 5.0 s

0.5

0.0 to 10.0 s

1.0

041

002
001
017

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Check after setting encoder wiring and related parameters・After setting the encoder wiring and related parameters, check the wiring and settings by referring to
the table below.
・Check whether the inverter is correctly counted by running the inverter in the forward or reverse
direction while checking the "Current position monitor [dA-20]".
・If the wiring and setting are correct, [dA-20] will be displayed when the motor rotates one display
rotation in the forward direction, and [CA-81] will be added when the motor rotates one full revolution
in the reverse direction.
(When the phase sequence of R, S, T phase of the inverter and U, V, W phase of the motor is correctly
wired, and when the encoder-output is a 90° phase-difference pulse, the A-phase is a 90° lead phaseduring forward rotation.)
Phenomena
Forward rotation andreverse rotation are
reversed.

Possible causal

Example of remedy

The motor or encoder wiring is reversed.

A/B phase pulse from the encoders is not
outputted correctly.
[dA-20] does not count.

[dA-20] does not countonly during forward orreverse rotation.

Check the motor wiring U, V, W and the wiring ofphase A and phase B of the encoder. Re-wirecorrectly if reversed.
Measure the voltage waveforms of the A-and B-phasewiring with a tester to check for any abnormalities.
If the voltage waveform is abnormal, check thepower, wiring, disconnection, etc. of the encoder.

Inverter setting is not correct.

Refer to this section and set the inverterparameters correctly.

The inverter input circuit is faulty.

Inverter repair.

The same reason as the above "[dA-20] does
not count" for the A-phase or B-phase only.

Using the above as a reference, check the outputof the A-or B-phase of the encoder and the input of
the A-or B-phase of the inverter.

The pulse-input cannot be counted
correctly due to the effect of crosstalk of theencoder A/B phase signal-output.

Use a shielded cable for A/B phase distribution
cable and connect the shield to the L terminal.

9-53
9-53

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.6 Torque control
9.6.1 Speed control and torque control
・The following two control modes are used to control the motor with high accuracy using the inverter.
Both control modes can be used by setting "control method [AA121]" to "sensorless vector control(IM)(08)".
(1) Speed control: A method of controlling the output so that the motor speed is tracked to the
speed command and torque is generated at a constant speed.
(2) Torque control: A method of controlling the output so that the output torque is constantregardless of the speed by following the output torque with respect to the torquecommand.
・Each function related to torque described in this section is valid only when the control method is
sensorless vector control. For details on setting and adjustment of sensorless vector control, refer to"9.5.10 Operating with Sensorless Vector Control".
・The 100% reference value of the torque value for each function is the rated torque of the motor
calculated from "IM motor capacity selection [Hb102]", "IM number of motor poles selection [Hb103]",and "IM base frequency [Hb104]" which is set as the output torque at the time of inverter rated current
output or the motor constant by the setting of "Torque conversion method selection [HC115]" as 100%.
Refer to "9.6.3 Torque Command Operation" for details.
■Difference between speed control and torque control
Controlmode
selection

Speed control

Torque control

Operation

Speed control is a control method to make the motor
speed follow the speed command. Therefore, control
is performed so that the speed is kept constant evenwhen the torque of the load fluctuates.

Torque control is a control method that causes the output
torque to follow the torque command. Therefore, therotation speed of the motor fluctuates according to thefluctuation of the torque of the load.

■Related function overview of speed control to torque control
Function
Output torque monitor
function
Response gain setting
Gain switching
Gain Mapping
Drooping control

Torque limit function
Switching of speed
control to torque control
Torque the bias function

Torque control operation

Overview
Output torque estimate in sensorless vector control can be monitored by "Output
torque monitor [dA-17]". Analog voltage/current output from the [AMI] connector
and analog voltage/pulse output from the [AMV] connector are available.
For details, refer to "9.16.4 Pulse Output of Monitor Data" and "9.16.5 Analog
Output of Monitor Data".
Adjust the speed control response gain to increase or stabilize speed tracking.
Gain switching and gain mapping functions are used when the load inertia
changes due to changes in the load characteristics or speed.
This function is used to perform load balancing operation, etc., in which one load
is driven by multiple motors.
This function controls the motor so that the output torque does not exceed thespecified torque limit value even if the load condition changes. Used inapplications where force is not applied unnecessarily during pushing operation,etc.
Switching function of speed control ⇔ torque control.
In speed control or torque control, the torque bias value is separately added tothe command torque.
Control is performed so that the output torque follows the torque command value.
Used for applications that require a constant output torque even when an
irregularly fluctuating external force is applied, such as applications that require a
constant tension of a take-up machine. In the torque control mode, if the load
becomes too light for the torque command, the motor speed continues toincrease. Therefore, the speed limit function can be set during torque control.

9-54
9-54

Control mode
Speed control
Torque control

Speed control
Speed control
Speed control
Torque control
Speed control
Torque control
Speed control
Torque control

Torque control

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.6.2 Switching between speed control and torque control
・Torque control and velocity control can be switched for operation by turning ON/OFF the inputterminal
function "Torque control enable [ATR](067)".
・Torque control can be used when "Vector Control Mode Selection [AA123]" is set to "Speed/TorqueControl Mode (00)" after "Control Method [AA121]" is set to "Sensorless Vector Control (IM) (08)".
・If shock occurs when switching from speed control to torque control, set "Speed/torque control switchingtime [Ad-04]" longer.
・If the torque command changes stepwise when switching from speed control to torque control, thecurrent may increase instantaneously.

Code

Item

AA121

Control mode selection
Vector control mode
selection
Switching time of
speed control totorque control

AA123
Ad-04
CA-01 to
CA-11

Input terminal function

Data

Initialvalue

Sensorless vector control (IM)0800

Mode of speed control to torque control

00

00

0 to 1000 ms

100

067

-

Description

Switches the torque command gently according to the set
time when switching from speed control to torque control.
Torque control enable [ATR]:
ON: Torque control
OFF: Velocity control

9-55
9-55

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.6.3 Operate by commanding the torque・When operating in torque control, assign "torque control enable [ATR](067)" to the input terminal.
[ATR] ON the terminal to switch from velocity control to torque control.
・Torque control can be used when "Sensorless Vector Control (IM) (08)" is set in "Control Method[AA121]".
・Input destination of torque command is selected by "Torque command input selection [Ad-01]".
・When [Ad-01] is "Parameter setting (07)", the torque command value is set by "Torque commandsetting [Ad-02]". In addition, the torque command setting (monitor) [FA-15] can also be changed or
saved. This change/save is also reflected in [Ad-02].
・When [Ad-01] is other than "Parameter setting (07)", the [FA-15] is a monitor that displays the torquecommand currently entered in the way set in [Ad-01].
・It is also possible to add bias to the torque command value. For details, refer to "9.6.5 Operation by
Adding Torque Command".
・The present output torque can be checked in "Output torque monitor [dA-17]". The filter can also be
set using the "Output torque monitor filter time constant (dA-17 and similar communication data) [CF62]." For details, refer to "10.1.5 Monitoring Torque Command/Output Torque Related Data".
・When switching between speed control and torque control, a shock may occur in motor operation due
to differences in control. It can be adjusted with "Speed/torque control switching time [Ad-04]" toreduce shocks when switching. Longer setting times reduce shock.
・The 100% reference value of the torque value in this function is the rated torque of the motor
calculated from the output torque at inverter rated current output or "IM motor capacity selection[Hb102]]", "IM number of motor poles selection [Hb103]", and "IM base frequency [Hb104]" which is set
as the motor constant by the setting of "Torque conversion method selection [HC115]" as 100%.
Therefore, note that the absolute value of torque changes depending on the combined motor.
・Since the speed in torque control is determined by the balance with the load, the output speed
increases when the actual output torque is smaller than the torque command. Therefore, set "Speed
Limit Value in Torque Control [Ad-40]" as the speed limit value for preventing runaway.
[FA-15][Ad-02]Torque reference setting (monitor)
Torque command monitor(after calculation) [dA-15]

Torque command parameters set(enabled when [Ad-01]=(07) is set)

RUN command input
source direction

Analog input VRF/IRF(01/02)

Option (09)Torquereference
Input
selection[Ad-01](01 to15)

Pulse input (12)【01】

Parameter setting (07)RS485 communication (08)Torque reference
Polarity selection[Ad-03](00 = as signed,
01 = depending on
operation direction)【01】

Torque bias

Torque control
enabled067[ATR]ON

PID operation (15)

Speed limit value in torquecontrol (forward/reverse side)[Ad-41]/[Ad-42]

+

OFF

+
－

Speed control

Speed limit input
source selection at
torque control[Ad-40]【07】+

Torque reference(Command value
for current control)

Speedmonitoring

Detect speed

Torque limit

Torque limit monitor[dA-16]

If the speed detection value exceeds the speed limit value during torque control, speed control will operate.

Note: In the figure, [] and the position of the switch for each parameter indicates the initial value.
Input terminal functions that are not assigned to the input terminal function selection [CA-01] to [CA-08] will be OFF.

9-56
9-56

Chapter 9
CodeInverter Function
Item

Description

dA-15

Torque referencemonitor(after calculation)

Monitors the current torque command value.

dA-17

Output torque monitor

Monitors the output torque value.

FA-15

Torque reference
setting (monitor)

Ad-01

Torque reference
input source
selection

Ad-02

Torque reference
value setting

Ad-03

Torque reference
polarity selection

Ad-04

Ad-40

Switching time of
speed control totorque control

Speed limit input
source selection at
torque control

Monitors or changes sets of the currently selected torquecommand value. When [Ad-01] is set to "Parameter setting (07)",changing/saving [FA-15] will also change/save the setting valueof [Ad-02].
[VRF] Input torque command by analog input of terminal.
0 to 100% of analog input is 0 to 500% torque.
[IRF] Input torque command by analog input of terminal.
0 to 100% of analog input is 0 to 500% torque.
The [Ad-02] parameter is used for the torque command.
Torque command is set by Modbus communication.

Ad-42
CA-01 to
CA-08
CF-62

HC115

Speed limit at torquecontrol (Forward)
Speed limit at torquecontrol (Reverse)
Input terminal
function
Filter time constant for
output torque monitor(dA-17 and similar
communication data)

Torque conversion motor

Initialvalue-1000.0 to
1000.0 %--500.0 to
500.0 %

0.0

01
02
07
08

Set the torque command from the communication option.

09

Set the torque command by pulse input.

12

PID calculation is used for the torque command.

15

When [Ad-01] is "Parameter setting (07)", set the torquecommand value.
Regardless of the direction of the operation command, thetorque increases in the forward direction when the value is (+)
and in the reverse direction when the value is (-).
The sign of the value and the direction in which the torque bias
acts change depending on the direction of the operation command.

-500.0 to
500.0 %

Set the switching time of speed control/torque control.
The longer the setting time, the lower the shock when switching.

0 to1000 ms[VRF] Input the speed upper limit value at torque commandusing the analog input of the terminal. 0 to 100% of analogue input.
Hz is from 0Hz to maximum frequency.
[IRF] Input the speed upper limit value at torque command using
the analog input of the terminal. 0 to 100% of analogue input.
The frequency is from 0 Hz to maximum frequency.
The value entered in [Ad-41]/[Ad-42] is used for the upper limitof speed at torque command.
Set the upper limit of speed at the command of torquecommand by
Modbus communication.
Set the speed upper limit value at torque command from thecommunication option.
Set the speed upper limit value at torque command by pulse input.

Ad-41

Data

01

0.0

00
01
01
100

01

02
07

07

08
09
12

Set the speed limit value on the forward rotation side in torque0.00 tocontrol.
Max.
frequency Hz
Set the speed limit value on the reverse side in torque control.

0.00

Torque control enable [ATR]:
Switches to torque-control when this signal is ON.

067-

Filters can be set for "Torque output monitor [dA-17]".

0 to1000 ms

100

Torque: The torque reference value (100%) is calculated asfollows:
Torque reference value =79.58 x Motor capacity x number of poles/base frequency(Example) Torque reference value =79.58×5.5(kW)×4(P)/50(Hz)≒35 Nm
Current: The torque reference value (100%) is the motor
output torque at rated current output.

9-57
9-57

00
01

01

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.6.4 Torque limit
・When "Vector control without sensor (IM) (08)" is set in "Control method [AA121]", and velocity control
is performed, the motor output torque is limited.
・Torque limit command destination is set by "Torque limit selection [bA110]".
・The valid torque limit can be checked in "Torque limit monitor [dA-16]".
・If "Torque limit enable [TL](060)" is set to the input terminal, the torque limit function according to the
input methods set in [bA110] will be enabled only when the [TL] input terminal is turned ON. For OFF,the torque limit function is disabled.
・When "TRQ1][TRQ2] terminal switching (01)" is set to "Torque limit parameter mode selection [bA111]",four torque limits set to "Torque limit 1 to 4 [bA112] to [bA115]" can be switched and used by
combining ON/OFF of "Torque limit switching 1 [TRQ1](061)" and "Torque limit switching 2[TRQ2](062)".
・If torque pulsation occurs when releasing after torque limit operation, it may be improved by enabling"Torque LAD stop selection [bA116]".
・When "Torque limit in progress [OTQ](019)" is set to the output terminal, the [OTQ] signalturns ON
when the output torque exceeds "Over torque level [CE120] to [CE123]".
・If "Torque limit in progress [TRQ](022)" is set to the outputterminal, the [TRQ] signalturns ON when thetorque limit function described above operates.
・If "Torque limit enable [TL]" is not assigned, the torque limit function set in "Torque limit select [bA110]"is always enabled.
・If the torque limit function is used in the low-speed range, the motor may not start, resulting in overload
protection. In this case, use the overload limit function together. For details of the overload limiting
function, refer to "9.9.1 Limiting to Avoid Overload".
・The reference torque in this function is calculated based on the output torque at the time of inverter
rated current output or the rated torque of the motor calculated from "IM Motor Capacity Selection[Hb102]", "IM Motor Pole Number Selection [Hb103]" and "IM Base Frequency [Hb104]" which is set as
the motor constant by the setting of "Torque Conversion Method Selection [HC115]" as 100%. Refer to"9.6.3 Torque Command Operation" for details.
・Input terminal functions [TL], [TRQ1], [TRQ2] and output terminal functions [TRQ] and [OTQ] areenabled only when "Sensorless Vector Control (IM) (08)" is assigned to "Control Method [AA121]".
・When "Torque limit enable [TL]" is assigned to an input terminal for OFF, or "4 quadrants individual(00)" is set to "Torque limit parameter mode selection [bA111]", "Torque limit monitor [dA-16]" isdisplayed as 0.0%.

9-58
9-58

Chapter 9
Code
dA-16
dA-17

bA110

bA111
bA112

bA113

bA114

bA115

bA116

CA-01 to
CA-08

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

CE120
CE121
CE122

Inverter Function
Item

Torque limit monitor
Output torque monitor

Torque limit selection

Torque limit parameter mode
selection
Torque limit 1(4 quadrants: Forward
powering)
Torque limit 2(4 quadrants: Reverse
regeneration)
Torque limit 3(4 quadrants: Reverse
powering)
Torque limit 4(4 quadrants: Forward
regeneration)
Torque limit LADSTOP
selection

Input terminal function

Output terminal function

Over/ Under-torque level(Forward drive)
Over/ Under-torque level(Reverse regenerative)
Over/ Under-torque level(Reverse drive)

CE123

Over/ Under-torque level(Forward regenerative)

CE124

Over/ Under-torque output
signal mode selection

CE125

Over/ Under-torque selection

CE-62

Output torque related filter
for terminal function

Description

Data

Displays the currently set torque limit value. If torquelimit is disabled or [bA111] is set to "4 quadrants
individual (01)", it will be 0.0.

0.0 to 500.0 %Monitors the estimated output torque.
Disable[VRF] Set the torque limit value using analog input fromthe terminal.
[IRF] Set the torque limit value using analog input fromthe terminal.
Torque limit set in [bA112] to [bA115] is used.
Set the torque limit using Modbus communication.
Set the torque limit value from the communication
option.
4 Specify the quadrant individually.
[TRQ1]/[TRQ2] Specified by terminal combination.
Set the torque limit value.
When [bA110] is set to "Parameter setting (07)" and[bA111] is set to "4-phenomenon individual setting (00)",
set the forward powering/reverse powering/reverse
powering/forward regeneration individually.
When [bA110] is set to "Parameter setting (07)" and[bA111] is set to "[TRQ1][TRQ2] terminal switching (01)",
the limit specified by the [TRQ1]/[TRQ2] input terminal
combination is applied to all four phenomena.
DisableEnabled:Stops deceleration temporarily when the output
torque reaches the torque limit operation level.
Torque limited [TL]:
Enables or disables the torque limit function.
Torque limit selection bit 1/2 [TRQ1]/[TRQ2] :If [bA111] is set to "[TRQ1][TRQ2] Terminal Switching(01)", specify the torque limit by combining this signal.
Over torque/Under torque [OTQ]:This signal turns ON when the output torque monitor
exceeds [CE120] to [CE123] or falls below.
Torque limit in progress [TRQ]:
This signal is turned ON while the torque limit function
is operating.
[OTQ] The output torque level at which the signal is
output can be set in each of the four quadrants: Forward
powering, Reverse regeneration, Reverse powering, andForward regeneration.
If [CE125] is "Over torque (00)", the [OTQ] output signal
turns ON when the output torque monitor value exceeds
the respective level-setting value.
When [CE125] is "Under Torque (01)", the opposite istrue.
Operation enabled: The [OTQ] signal is detected during
operation at all times.
Valid only at constant speed: The [OTQ] signal isdetected only in constant speed status, and not during
acceleration/deceleration.
Over-torque
Under torqueFilters can be set for torque-output-related output
terminal functions ([OTQ] signal and [TRQ] signal).

9-59
9-59

Initialvalue-1000.0 to
1000.0 %
00
01
02

07

07
08
09
00
01

00

0.0 to 500.0 %

200.0

00
01

00

060
061/062019

022

0.0 to 500.0 %

002
001
017

100.0

00
01
01
00
01

00

0 to 2000 ms

100

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Torque limit set methods■Torque limit selection [bA110] = "Parameter setting (07)" and "Torque limit parameter mode selection[bA111] = "4 quadrants individual setting (00)"
・In this mode, the torque limit in the four quadrants of forward power running, forward regeneration,
reverse power running, and reverse regeneration is individually set by "Torque Limit 1 to 4 [bA112] to[bA115]." (4) The relationship between the quadrant and the torque limit value is shown in the figure
below.
TorqueRegenerative[bA113]
Reverserotation

Powering[bA114]

Powering[bA112]
Regenerative[bA115]

Forwardrotation■Torque limit selection [bA110] = "Parameter setting (07)" and "Torque limit parameter mode selection[bA111]"="[TRQ1][TRQ2] terminal switching (01)"・As shown in the figure below, by combining the "Torque limit switching [TRQ1](061)"/"Torque limit
switching [TRQ2](062)" input terminal function, the set value of the parameter selected from "Torquelimit 1 to 4 ([bA112] to [bA115])" will be the torque limit value in all operating conditions.
Allocation input

RSTES[TRQ1] [TRQ2]

COM

TRQ1

TRQ2

Value of torque limit

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

bA112
bA113
bA114
bA115

■"Torque limit selection [bA110]"="VRF terminal input (01)" or "IRF terminal input (02)"・Specify the torque limit using the analogue input applied to the [VRF]/[IRF] terminal on the control
terminal block. In the default setting, voltage-input 0 to 10V/ current input 4 to 20mA correspond totorque limit 0 to 500%. The input torque limit value is the torque limit value in all operation status.
・When specifying torque limit value with analog input, be careful not to make other command input
such as frequency command become analog input setting.
・For details on adjusting the analog input, see section 9.15.3, Adjusting the Analog Input.
■"Torque limit selection [bA110]"="RS485 setting (08)"・Setting when torque limit is specified by Modbus communication. For more information, see "Chapter
11 Modbus Communication".
■"Torque limit selection [bA110]" = "Option (09)"・Setting when torque limit value is specified from communication option. For details, refer to "Chapter
13 Communication Options" and the operation manual of each communication option.

9-60
9-60

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Monitor of torque limit value
・The currently selected torque limit can be checked in the torque limit monitor [dA-16].
Code
dA-16

Item

Description

Data

Torque limit monitor

Displays the currently set torque limit value.
If torque limit is disabled or [bA111] is set to "4 quadrants individual (01)",
0.0% will be applied.

0.0 to 500.0 %Torque LAD stop function
・If the motor is shocked by torque pulsation, etc. when the torque limit function operates or is released
during deceleration, it may be improved by setting "Torque LAD stop selection [bA116]" to "Enabled(01)". This function stabilizes the operation of the motor when the torque limit function is activated orreleased by temporarily stopping the deceleration operation.
Output frequency

Torque limit in operation
Output-frequency when torque limit operates during
deceleration and [bA116] = "Enabled (01)"Time[TRQ] Output

Code

ON

Item

bA116

Torque limit LAD stop selection

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Description

Data

DisableEnable:Stops deceleration temporarily when the output torquereaches the torque limit operation level.
Torque limit in progress [TRQ]:
This signal is turned ON while the torque limit function is
operating.

00
01

022

Initial
value
00
02
01
17

Output filter torque-related output signals
・You can set filters for the torque to be used for judgment in response to the judgment of the output
terminal function "Over torque/Under torque [OTQ]" and "Torque limit in progress [TRQ]" related totorque output.
・The time constant of the filter can be adjusted by "Torque output related output terminal function filter
time constant (OTQ/TRQ) [CE-62)".

Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

CE-62

Output torque related filter
for terminal function

Filters can be set for torque-output-related output terminal
functions ([OTQ] and [TRQ] signals).

0 to 2000 ms

100

9-61
9-61

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Output signal when the torque rises or fall・By assigning "Over torque/Under torque [OTQ]" to the output terminal, it is possible to detect when the
output torque exceeds or falls below a desired level and output the signal. Use this function to detect awarning before a trip occurs due to an abnormal high load in the system.
・You can set the detection level for each of the four quadrants: Forward powering, Forward
regeneration, Reverse powering, and Reverse regeneration.
・It is possible to select whether the detection target is at or above any level (over-torque) or below any
level (under-torque) with "Over/Under-torque selection [CE125]."
・By setting "Over/Under torque output signal mode selection [CE124]", it is possible to select whether toalways detect the [OTQ] signal during operation or only during constant speed operation.
Example: When [CE125] = "Over torque (00)"TorqueOver torqueOver torque[CE121]
Reverse rotation[CE122]

Code

Item

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

CE120
CE121
CE122
CE123

CE124

CE125

Over/ Under-torque level(Forward drive)
Over/ Under-torque level(Reverse regenerative)
Over/ Under-torque level(Reverse drive)
Over/ Under-torque level(Forward regenerative)

Over/ Under-torqueoutput signal mode
selection

Over/ Under-torqueselection[CE120]Regenerative

Powering

Powering

Regenerative

Forward rotation[CE123]
Over torqueOver torqueDescription
Over torque/Under torque [OTQ]:This signal turns ON when the output torque monitor
exceeds [CE120] to [CE123] or falls below.
[OTQ] The output torque level at which the signal is output
can be set in each of the four quadrants:
Forward powering, Reverse regeneration, Reverse powering,and Forward regeneration.
If [CE125] is "Over torque (00)", the [OTQ] output signal
turns ON when the output torque monitor value exceeds therespective level-setting value.
When [CE125] is "Under Torque (01)", it is the opposite of
the above operation.
Operation enabled: The [OTQ] signal is detected during
operation at all times.
Valid only at constant speed:
The [OTQ] signal is detected only when operating atconstant speed.
No detection is performed during acceleration/
deceleration.
Over torque
Under torque

9-62
9-62

Data

Initial
value

019

002
001
017

0.0 to 500.0 %

100.0

00
01
01

00
01

00

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.6.5 Run by adding torque command・A torque bias function that adds more torque to the torque command value can be used.
・This function is enabled when "Vector control without sensor (IM) (08)" is set to "Control method[AA121]". It also operates in both speed control and torque control.
・When "Torque bias enable terminal [TBS] selection [Ad-14]" is "enable (01)", torque bias is enabled only
when "Torque bias enable [TBS] (068)" is turned ON. For OFF, the torque bias is 0.0. When [Ad-14] is"disabled (00)", the torque bias value is always added to the torque command value.
・When [Ad-11] is "Parameter setting (07)", the torque bias setting is set with "Torque bias setting [Ad12]". In addition, the torque command can be changed and saved even in "Torque bias setting(monitor) [FA-16]". This change/save is also reflected in [Ad-12].
・When [Ad-11] is other than "Parameter setting (07)", the [FA-16] is a monitor that displays the torquecommand currently entered in the way set in [Ad-11].
・"Torque command monitor (after calculation) [dA-15]" displays the value obtained by adding the torquebias value to the present torque command.
・Torque bias value can be switched in addition direction of torque by switching forward/reverse
direction of operation command by setting of "Torque bias polarity selection [Ad-13]".
- [Ad-13] = In the case of "code (00)":
Regardless of the operation direction, the torque increases in the forward direction when
the torque bias value is (+), and the torque increases in the reverse direction when it is(-).
- [Ad-13] = "Depends on operation direction (01)":
Torque bias value is added with the direction of operation command as (+). When thetorque bias value is (+), the torque increases in the operation command direction, andwhen it is (-), the torque increases in the reverse direction of the operation command.
Example) When the operation command is reverse: Torque bias value is (+), the reverse
torque increases.
When the torque bias value is (-), the forward rotation torque increases.
・Since the torque bias function adds the torque command, the current increases.
・The 100% reference value of the torque value in this function is the rated torque of the motor
calculated from the output torque at the time of the inverter rated current output or the motor capacity[Hb102], the number of motor poles [Hb103], and the base frequency [Hb104], which is set as the
motor constant, according to the setting of "Torque conversion method selection [HC115]", as 100%.
Therefore, note that the absolute value of torque changes depending on the combined motor.
・The set torque value assumes that the torque equivalent to the rated output current of the inverter is100%. Therefore, note that the absolute value of torque changes depending on the combined motor.
[FA-16][Ad-12]Torque bias setting (monitor)

Torque bias parameter setting(enabled when set to [Ad-01]=(07))
Analog input VRF/IRF (01/02)
Parameter setting (07)RS485 communication (08)Torque bias
Input selection[Ad-11](00 to 15)

Torque bias polarity
selection [Ad-13](00 = as signed,
01 = depending on
operation direction)

Pulse input (12)PID operation (15)00(Disable)

Torque bias value=01(Enable)【00】

Option (09)【00】

Torque bias
Enabled terminal[TBS] selection[Ad-14]=00(Disable)

RUN command
input source
direction
0 command

Torquebias enable
068[TBS]ON
OFF

Note: In the figure, [] and the position of the switch for each parameter indicates the initial value.
Input terminal functions that are not assigned to the input terminal function selection [CA-01] to [CA-08] will be OFF.

9-63
9-63

Chapter 9
CodeInverter Function
Item

dA-15

Torque referencemonitor (after
calculation)

FA-16

Torque bias value
setting (Monitor)

Ad-11

Torque bias input
source selection

Ad-12

Torque bias value
setting

Ad-13

Ad-14

CA-01 toCA-08

Torque bias polarity
selection

Enable terminal [TBS]Input terminal
function

Description
Monitors the current torque command value.
Monitors or changes sets for the currently selected torque bias.
If [Ad-11] is set to 07 (Parameter) and you change or save [FA-16],
the [Ad-12] setting is also changed or saved.
Torque bias function disabled.
[VRF] Input torque bias using the analog input of the terminal.
0 to 100% of analog input is 0 to 500% torque.
[IRF] Input torque bias using the analog input of the terminal.
0 to 100% of analog input is 0 to 500% torque.
Input of [Ad-12] is used for torque bias.
Set the torque bias by Modbus communication.
Set the torque bias from the communication option.
Torque bias is set by pulse input.
PID operation is used for torque bias.
Set the torque bias when [Ad-11] is set to "Parameter setting (07)".
As indicated: Regardless of the operation direction, the torqueincreases in the forward direction when the value is(+) and in the reverse direction when the value is (-).
According to the rotation direction: Torque bias is added by
setting the direction of operation command as (+).
Disable: Torque biasing function is enabled regardless of the statusof the [TBS] inputterminal.
Enable: [TBS] ON/OFF of torque bias function can be selected by
input terminal.
Torque bias enable [TBS]:[TBS] When [Ad-14] = "Enabled (01)" is assigned to an input
terminal, the enabling/disabling of bias is switched by ON/OFF of
the terminal.
ON: Enable/OFF: Disable

9-64
9-64

Data

Initialvalue-1000.0 to
1000.0 %-500.0 to
500.0 %
00
01
02
07
08
09
12
15
-500.0 to
500.0 %

00

0.0

00
00
01
00
00
01

068

-

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.6.6 Setting the Motor Control Gain
・Speed control gain (ASR(Automatic Speed Regulatr) of motor control can be switched according toterminal input/output frequency.
・When "Gain switching selection [HA120]" is set to "[CAS] terminal switching (00)", two types of control
gains can be switched and applied according to ON/OFF of the "Control gain switching [CAS](064)"
inputterminal. [CAS] Switching time when inputterminal is ON/OFF can be set by "Gain switching time
[HA121]".
・When "Gain switching selection [HA120]" is set to "Switching by setting (01)", the gain mapping
function is enabled. With the gain mapping function, it is possible to change the control gain in up to
four stages according to the output frequency.
・P control and PI control can also be switched using the "P/PI control switching [PPI](063)" input
terminal. For details, refer to "9.6.7 Moving a single load with multiple motors (true-ping control)".
・When this function is used, "control method [AA121]" must be set to "sensorless vector control (IM)(08)".
Code

Item

HA120

ASR gain switching mode
selection

HA121

Gain change time

HA122

HA123
HA124

ASR gain mapping
intermediate speed,
1-motorASR gain mapping
intermediate speed 2,-motor
ASR gain mapping
maximum speed

HA125

Mapping P-gain -gain, 1-

HA126

Mapping I-gain -gain, 1-

HA127

Gain mapping control
P-gain -gain, 1-

HA128

Mapping P-gain -gain 2,

HA129

Mapping I-gain -gain 2,

HA130

Gain mapping control
P-gain -gain 2,

HA131

Mapping P-gain -gain 3,

HA132

Mapping I-gain -gain 3,

HA133

Mapping P-gain -gain 4,

HA134

Mapping I-gain -gain 4,

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

Description

Data[CAS] Gain 1 and 2 are switched by the input terminal.

00

The speed changes according to the setting.

01[CAS] When the terminal is turned ON/OFF, the gain willchange by this setting. Refer to the illustrations in this section
for details.

Initial
value
00

0 to
10000 ms

100

0.00 to590.00Hz

0.00

0.0 to1000.0 %100.0

The frequency to which control gain 2 of the gain mapping
function is applied.
The frequency to which control gain 3 of the gain mapping
function is applied.
The frequency to which control gain 4 of the gain mapping
function is applied.
[CAS] Set the P gain of PI control when OFF of the input
terminals or the 0 (zero) Hz of gain mapping.
[CAS] Sets the I-gain of PI control at OFF of input pins or
0 (zero) Hz of gain mapping.
[CAS] Set the P gain of P control when OFF of the input
terminal or 0 (zero) Hz of gain mapping.
[CAS] Sets the input-terminal ON or P-gain for PI control ofintermediate velocity 1 of gain mapping.
[CAS] Sets the I-gain of the input-terminal ON or PI control ofthe mid-speed 1 for gain mapping.
[CAS] Sets the P gain for P control of the mid-speed 1 of the
input-terminal ON or gain mapping.
Sets the P gain for PI control of intermediate velocity 2 for gain
mapping.
Sets the I gain for PI control of intermediate velocity 2 for gain
mapping.
Sets the P gain of PI control for maximum-speed of gain
mapping.
Sets the I gain of PI control for maximum-speed of gain
mapping.
P/PI control switching [PPI]:
Switches between PI control and P control by ON/OFF.
Control gain switching [CAS]:
Gain is switched by ON/OFF.

9-65
9-65

063
064

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■[CAS] For input-terminal switching ([HA120] ="[CAS] terminal-based switching (00)")

Control gain(%)[HA121] Set time
Terminal
Functions[HA125]/[HA126][HA128]/[HA129][CAS] Input[PPI] OFF[CAS] OFFPI control P gain 1 = [HA125]
PI control I gain 1 = [HA126][CAS] ON

PI control P gain 2 = [HA128]
PI control I gain 2 = [HA129]

ON■[PPI] For [CAS] input terminal switching in input terminal ON (Switching by [HA120] ="[CAS] terminal(00)")
Control gain(%)[HA121] Set time
[HA127]

Terminal
Functions[HA130][PPI] ON[CAS] OFFP control P gain 1 = [HA127][CAS] ON

P control P gain 2 = [HA130]

ON[CAS] Input
ON[PPI] Input■Switching by setting (Gain mapping function) ([HA120] = "Switching by setting (01)")
Control gain(%)[HA125]/[HA126][HA127][PPI] Input terminal OFF[HA131]/[HA132][HA128]/[HA129][PPI] Input terminal ON[HA130][HA133]/[HA134]
0Hz

Gain switchingat intermediate
frequency 1[HA122]Frequency
0 Speed (Zero Hz)
Gain switching intermediate
frequency 1 [HA122]
Gain switching intermediate
frequency 2 [HA123]
Maximum gain mapping frequency[HA124]Gain switchingat intermediate
frequency 2[HA122]

Applicable gain
Gain 1Gain 2Gain 3Gain 4Gain mapping
Max. frequency
Max. frequency [Hb105][HA124][PPI]OFFPI control P gain 1 = [HA125]
PI control I gain 1 = [HA126]
PI control P gain 2 = [HA128]
PI control I gain 2 = [HA129]
PI control P gain 3 = [HA131]
PI control I gain 3 = [HA132]
PI control P gain 4 = [HA133]
PI control I gain 4 = [HA134]

9-66
9-66

[PPI]ON
P control P gain 1 = [HA127]

P control P gain 2 = [HA130]

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.6.7 Moving a single load with multiple motors（Droop speed control）
・When two motors and inverters are used to drive one drive by distributing the torques, ON of the "P/PI
control switching [PPI](063)" inputterminal of one inverter switches from PI control to P control.
・By switching the speed-control gain (ASR (Automatic Speed Regulator) of one motor control from PI
control to P control, the inverter automatically increases or decreases the frequency according to the
output torque of the other motor to balance the load.
・In P control, (X) in the figure below increases when the P control P gain is decreased. Adjust according
to the actual system.
・P control P gain can be set in two ways: "P control P gain 1 [HA127]" and "P control P gain 2 [HA130]".
P gain is switched by ON/OFF of "Control gain switching [CAS](064)".
・When this function is used, "Control Method [AA121]" must be selected "Sensorless Vector Control (IM)(08)".
・When one load is driven by more than one inverter with PI control, it may be improved by making theinverter that generates "overcurrent error [E001]" or "overvoltage error [E007]" to P control. Set theinverter to be changed to P control and its P control gain adjustment according to the actual system.
During
P control

TorqueDuringPI control

X

0

Motor speed■[CAS] Control Gain (Switching by [HA120] ="[CAS] Terminal (00)) that is enabled for terminal switching
Terminal
Functions[CAS] OFF[CAS] ON

[PPI] OFF[PPI] ON

PI control P gain 1 = [HA125]
PI control I gain 1 = [HA126]
PI control P gain 2 = [HA128]
PI control I gain 2 = [HA129]

P control P gain 1 = [HA127]
P control P gain 2 = [HA130]■Control gain ([HA120] = "Switching by setting (01)") to be enabled when switching by setting (gainmapping function)
Frequency
0 Speed (Zero Hz)
Gain switching intermediate
frequency 1 [HA122]
Gain switching intermediate
frequency 2 [HA123]
Maximum gain mapping frequency[HA124]

Applicable gain
Gain 1Gain 2Gain 3Gain 4[PPI]OFFPI control P gain 1 = [HA125]
PI control I gain 1 = [HA126]
PI control P gain 2 = [HA128]
PI control I gain 2 = [HA129]
PI control P gain 3 = [HA131]
PI control I gain 3 = [HA132]
PI control P gain 4 = [HA133]
PI control I gain 4 = [HA134]

9-67
9-67

[PPI]ON

P control P gain 1 = [HA127]

P control P gain 2 = [HA130]

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7 Changing the start and stop method
9.7.1 Reduced voltage startup
・This function slowly increases the voltage while outputting "Min. frequency [Hb130]" when the motor
starts.
・If you want to increase the torque at startup, etc., reduce the setting of "Reduced voltage startup time
[Hb131]". However, when the setting is made smaller, it becomes like a direct-on start, so it is easier totrip over current.
・If you want to prevent the current from jumping during startup, or if overcurrent trips during startup,
increase the [Hb131] setting. However, the torque at start may be insufficient.
・This function is enabled when the control method is V/f control.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

Hb130

Minimum
frequency

This is the frequency at which the drive starts outputting when
an RUN command is ON.

0.01 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

Hb131

Reduced voltage
start time

The output voltage is increased over the set time from the startof operation to the voltage command equivalent to theminimum frequency.

0 to 2000 ms

12■When the voltage reduction start-time setting is
0ms ([Hb131] = 0)

■When the voltage reduction start-up period
other than 0ms ([Hb131]≠0)

RUN
command

RUN
commandMin. frequency[Hb130]Min. frequency[Hb130]

Outputfrequency

Outputfrequency

Outputvoltage

Outputvoltage0ms

Small ← Reduced voltage start time → Large[Hb131]

9-68
9-68

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.2 Starting after applying DC braking
・Start the motor after stopping the motor by performing DC braking (DB) before outputting thefrequency to the motor.
・The following settings are required to perform DC braking at startup.
- Set "Internal DC Braking: Enable (01)" in "DC Braking Selection [AF101]."- Set the braking force required for the DC braking force at start [AF108].
- Set other than 0.00 s to the DC Braking Duration at Start [AF109].
・DC braking at startup performs DC braking for the time set in "DC braking time at startup [AF109]" after
the operation command is input.
・DC braking is performed with a braking force equivalent to ND rated output current when [AF108] is set
to 100% when standard load (ND) is selected.
・DC braking is performed with a braking force equivalent to 70% of LD rated output current when
[AF108] is set to 100% when light load (LD) is selected.
・「Set and operate the DC braking force at start [AF108]" and "DC braking duration at start [AF109]"
paying attention to heat generation of the motor.
・When "Enable (Operation with Setting Frequency Only) (02)" is set to "DC Braking Selection [AF101]",
DC braking starts when both the frequency command and the output frequency are less than "DC
Braking Frequency [AF103]", regardless of start/stop. For details, refer to section 9.7.8, "Applying DC
Braking to Stop."・If "Carrier frequency [bb101]" exceeds 2kHz, the DC braking force is limited.
For details, refer to section 9.7.8, "Applying DC Braking to Stop."
Code

AF101

Item

Description

DC braking selection Note

AF108

DC braking force at start

AF109

DC braking active time at start

Data

Internal DC Braking: Disable

00

Internal DC Braking: Enable

01

Internal DC Braking: Enable (Operations with set
frequency only)
Adjust the DC braking force at start.
The maximum braking force when set to 100%.
Set the DC braking duration at start when "Enable(01)" is selected for [AF101].

Initial
value

00

02
0 to 100 %00.00 to 60.00 s

0.00

Note: Internal DC braking means that DC braking is performed according to the output frequency and operating
status by setting parameters, regardless of external signals. When DC braking is performed by an externalsignal, this is called external DC braking. For details of the external DC braking, refer to "9.7.8 Applying DC
Braking to Stop."■DC Braking at Start ([AF101]=01)
RUN
commandON

Outputfrequency[AF109]DC braking

9-69
9-69

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.3 Starting with the frequency matching function
・By HF-620 in the restart function When Frequency Adjustment Restart is selected, the same operation
as the frequency retraction restart from the cutoff frequency is executed. (Operation when "Frequency
retraction restart" is selected in Restart method selection and "Start frequency selection at frequency
retraction restart" [bb-47] is set to "Frequency at shutoff (00)")
・The frequency matching restart function can be set for each of the following functions.
- Momentary power failure/undervoltage restart (Refer to 9.9.6 "Restarting after Momentary power
failure/undervoltage" in [bb-24]=01.")- Overcurrent restart (Refer to 9.9.7 "Restarting after Overcurrent" in [bb-28]=01 Setting")- Overvoltage restart (Refer to 9.9.8 "Restarting after Overvoltage" in [Set to bb-30]=01")- Restart after cancellation of coasting. (Refer to "9.7.6 Start after Coasting Stop" in [Set to bb40]=01.")- Restart after reset release (when power is turned on)([Set to bb-41]=01, see "9.7.5 Start after Trip Reset or Power On"))・For detailed operation when frequency matching restart is selected for one of the above functions,refer to "9.7.4 Using the Frequency Pull-in Function to Start".
・When "Operation command selection [AA111]" is "Operation panel RUN key (02)", operation commandis also OFF when "Free run [MBS]" or "Reset [RS]" input terminal is ON. If restart after cancellation ofcoasting or resetting is set at this time, the retry operation will start when RUN key on the control panel
is pressed to start operation. In the event of instantaneous power failure/undervoltage restart,
overcurrent restart, or overvoltage restart, the operation command is maintained in ON status, so retry
operation is started without pressing RUN key.
・For the restart function, also refer to "9.9 Using the Tripleless Function".
・When using the frequency matching function in synchronous (permanent magnets) motors (SM(PMM),
the operation differs from the above. Contact the place of purchase for details.

9-70
9-70

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.4 Frequency entry function to start・With the frequency pull-in restart function, the motor can be quickly pulled from the rotation speed of
the idling motor to the set frequency and restarted while suppressing the increase in current. Refer to"(Example 1) Restarting frequency retraction" for details of operation.
・The frequency retraction restart function can be set for each of the following functions.
- Momentary power failure/undervoltage restart (Refer to 9.9.6 "Restarting after Momentary power
failure/undervoltage" in [bb-24]=02.")- Overcurrent restart (Refer to 9.9.7 "Restarting after Overcurrent" in [bb-28]=02 Setting")- Overvoltage restart (Refer to 9.9.8 "Restarting after Overvoltage" in [Set to bb-30]=02")- Restart after cancellation of coasting. (Refer to "9.7.6 Start after Coasting Stop" in [Set to bb40]=02.")- Restart after reset release (when power is turned on)([Set to bb-41]=02, see "9.7.5 Start after Trip Reset or Power On"))・When restarting after canceling free status or restarting after canceling reset, restarting starts after
waiting for "momentary power failure/undervoltage retry wait time [bb-26]" after free run or reset iscanceled and the operation command is ON.
・Frequency retraction restart function is available only for induction motor drive.
・When "Operation command selection [AA111]" is "Operation panel RUN key (02)", operation commandis also OFF when "Free run [MBS]" or "Reset [RST]" input terminal is ON. If restart after cancellation ofcoasting or resetting is set at this time, the retry operation will start when RUN key on the control panel
is pressed to start operation. In the event of instantaneous power failure/undervoltage restart,
overcurrent restart, or overvoltage restart, the operation command is maintained in ON status, so retry
operation is started without pressing RUN key.
Code

Item

Description

Data

bb-42

Frequency matching
minimum restart frequency

If the starting frequency is less than this setting due tothe setting of [bb-47], it will be restarted 0Hz.

bb-43

Active frequency matching
restart level

Sets the current limit level at restart of frequency
retraction.

bb-44

Restart constant (speed) of
Active frequency matchingbb-45

Active frequency matching
restart constant (voltage)bb-46

OC-suppress level at active
frequency matching

Set the deceleration time when the current isincreased.
Sets the output voltage increase rate when thefrequency pull-in restart.
(e.g. 10.00s = output-voltage 0 → 100% for 10s)
If the current increases to the [bb-46] setting whenrestarting, the over-current suppression function will
be activated.

bb-47

Restart speed
Active frequency matching

0.00 to0.00
590.00 Hz(0.00 to 2.00)
1.00×rated
Inverter rated
outputcurrent
output current A
0.10 to0.50
30.00 s0.10 to30.00 s00

Start at the highest frequency setpoint.

01

Starts with the current frequency command value.

02①After the retry wait time, it starts outputting at
the frequency set in [bb-47].

Shut-off factor②At the same time, the output power is gradually Output current
increased to prevent an overcurrent or the likefrom occurring according to the setting in [bb- Output frequency45]. (dashed line in the right figure)(output voltage(dashed line))③If the output current exceeds [bb-43],
decelerate the output frequency according to Motor speed
the setting of [bb-44] tosuppress the output
current.
④When the output frequency and the output
voltage are balanced, normal operation takes
place.

1.20(0.30 to 1.80)× 1.80×rated
outputInverter rated
current
output current A

Start at the frequency at the previous cut-off.

■(e.g. 1) How to restart frequency luffing

Initialvalue

00

Active frequency matching restart level [bb-43]①③[bb-47]④
Free run②

Active frequency matching restart

Retry wait time after instantaneous power failure/under-voltage
error [bb-26]

9-71
9-71

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Restart at momentary power loss and undervoltage ([bb-24]=02)
・To restart frequency pull-in when instantaneous power failure or undervoltage occurs, set"Instantaneous power failure or undervoltage retry selection [bb-24]" to "Frequency pull-in restart (02)".
・Even if the frequency-pull-in restart is set, a trip will occur if the instantaneous power failure orundervoltage time exceeds the "instantaneous power failure allowable time [bb-25]".
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

bb-21

Number of retries after
under voltage

When the DC voltage between P-N drops to the undervoltage
0 timelevel, it trips immediately without restarting.
When the DC voltage between P-N drops to theundervoltage level, restart is performed for the set numberof times, and the motor trips at the next error. The count of
1 to 16 times
the number of times is cleared by reset input or power
shutdown.
When the DC voltage between P-N drops to theundervoltage level, restart is performed.
255
The number of restarts is unlimited and no trip occurs.

bb-24

Restart mode selection after
instantaneous
power failure/under-voltage
errorFrequency pull-in restart.

bb-25

Instantaneous power
failure allowed time

If the power is restored within this set time, the unit will
restart. (Example 2)
If the instantaneous power failure or undervoltage time islonger than this setting time, the motor trips. (Example 3)

0.3 to 25.0 s

1.0

bb-26

Retry wait time after
instantaneous power
failure/under-voltage error

Sets the waiting time from power restoration to restart.

0.3 to 100.0 s

1.0Enable instantaneous
power failure/under-voltage
error while in stop status

During stoppage, if the DC voltage between P-N drops to theundervoltage level, it will not be judged as an instantaneous
power failure or undervoltage.
When the DC voltage between P-N drops to the undervoltage
level, even when the operation is stopped, it is judged as an
instantaneous power failure or undervoltage.
During stop and deceleration stop, if the DC voltage between
P-N drops to the undervoltage level, it will not be judged as
an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage.

bb-27■ (e.g. 2) When power is restored within "Allowable
momentary power failure time [bb-25]"

0

02

01

00

01

00

02

■(e.g. 3) When power is restored after "Allowable
momentary power failure period [bb-25]"
PowersupplyPower supply

Inverter output
Free run
Motor speedt0t2

Inverter
outputMotor
speed

Free runt1

t0[E[009] trip
Active frequency
matching restartt0: Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage time t1: "Instantaneous power failure allowable time [bb-25]"
t2: "Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage retry standby time [bb-26]"
t1

・Instantaneous power failure or undervoltage trip during selection [bb-27], which disables
instantaneous power failure or undervoltage error during inverter stop or deceleration due to operationcommand OFF. However, even if [bb-27] is set to stop instantaneous power failure/undertrip while
stopped, it will trip if the instantaneous power failure/undervoltage time is equal to or greater than the"Instantaneous power failure allowable time [bb-25]."
・Even when restarting is set, "Undervoltage Error [E009]" will occur if the instantaneous power
failure/undervoltage status continues for approximately 40 seconds.

9-72
9-72

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

・When the power-off time is long and the inverter-controlled microcomputer is turned off, it operates
according to the setting of "Restart after release from reset [bb-41]" instead of "Momentary power
failure/undervoltage retry selection [bb-24]" after power restoration.

Restart at frequency when overcurrent occurs ([bb-28]=02)
・To perform frequency retraction restart when overcurrent occurs, set "Overcurrent trip retry selection[bb-28]" to "Frequency retraction restart (02)".
・If Restart is selected when overcurrent occurs, restart is performed for the number of times set in"Overcurrent retry count selection [bb-22]" and trips at the next time. If [bb-22] is set to 0 times, restart
is not performed and the motor trips immediately.
Code

Item

bb-22

Number of retries after overcurrent

bb-28
bb-29

Description
Set the number of retries when overvoltage orovercurrent occurs.

Restart mode selection after an
overcurrent error
Retry wait time after an overcurrent
error

Frequency pull-in restart.
Sets the wait time between the occurrence ofovercurrent or overvoltage and the start of restart.

Data

Initialvalue

0 to 5 times

0

02

01

0.3 to 100.0 s

0.3■(e.g. 4) Frequency pull-in restart when overcurrent occurs[FR] Input
Over current
Outputcurrent

Free run

Motor speed[bb-29]Active frequency matching restart

Frequency-pull restart when overvoltage occurs ([bb-30]=02)
・To perform frequency retraction restart when an overvoltage occurs, set "Overvoltage trip retry
selection [bb-30]" to "Frequency retraction restart (02)".
・If Restart is selected when an overvoltage occurs, restart is performed for the number of times set in"Overvoltage retry count selection [bb-23]" and tripped at the next time. If [bb-23] is set to 0 times,
restart is not performed and the motor trips immediately.
Code

Item

bb-23

Number of retries after over voltage

bb-30
bb-31

Description

Restart mode selection after an
overvoltage error
Retry wait time after an overvoltage
error

Set the number of retries when overvoltage orovercurrent occurs.
Frequency pull-in restart.
Sets the wait time between the occurrence ofovercurrent or overvoltage and the start of restart.

Data

Initialvalue

0 to 5 times

0

02

01

0.3 to 100.0 s

0.3■(e.g. 5) Frequency pull-in restart when overvoltage occurs at deceleration[FR] Input
Over voltage
DC bus voltage
Free run
Motor speed[bb-31]
Active frequency matching restart・Even if the retry operation at trip is selected, trip will be detected again if the trip factor has not beencancelled after the retry standby time. In this case, increase the retry wait time.

9-73
9-73

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Frequency retraction restart after cancellation of coasting or reset ([bb-40]/[bb-41]=02)
・To perform frequency retraction restart after releasing free-run stop, set "Restart after releasing free-run[bb-40]" to "Frequency retraction restart (02)".
・To perform frequency retraction restart after reset release, set "Restart after reset release [bb-41]" to"Frequency retraction restart (02)".
・When the retry standby time has elapsed after the "Coasting [MBS]" or "Reset [RST]" input terminal isOFF, frequency retraction restart is performed without stopping the motor.
・If an overcurrent trip occurs when the frequency is retracted and restarted, increase the retry wait time.
Data

Initialvalue

0.3 to 100.0 s

1.0Frequency pull-in restart.

0200

Frequency pull-in restart.

02

00

Code

Item

Description

bb-26

Retry wait time after instantaneous
power failure/under-voltage error

Sets the waiting time from free-run release or reset
release to restart start.

bb-40

Restart mode after MBS releasebb-41

Restart mode after RS release■(e.g. 6) Frequency retraction restart after free-run/reset[FR] Input[MBS] Inputor[RST] Input

Free run

Motor speed[bb-26]

Active frequency matching restart・When Restart after reset release [bb-41] is set to "Frequency retraction restart (02)", the first operation
after power-on will also be the frequency retraction operation.

■(e.g. 7) Frequency pull-in restart at power-on
Power supply[FR] Input
Free run
Motor speed

After the power is turned on,
only the first operation commandis subject to restart.

0[bb-26]

Active frequency matching restart

9-74
9-74

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.5 Start after trip reset or power on
・By "Restart after reset release [bb-41]", the starting methods after trip reset and when the power isturned on can be selected from 0 Hz restart, frequency matching restart Note:1, frequency retraction
restart Note:2, and restart from the detected speed by the encoder feedback.
・The setting of restart after trip reset is valid for any method such as "Reset [RST]" input terminal and
STOP/RESET key on the control panel.
・0 For Hz restart, retry wait time cannot be set.
・The startup method when the power is turned on and the restart when returning from a reset arecommon settings.
・When frequency retraction restart is performed, the operation command direction at the start ofretraction operation is the same as the operation command direction at the reset input.
・If the power supply shutdown time is long and the internal power supply for control of the inverter isturned off, the inverter operates by restarting after releasing the reset, not by instantaneous power
failure or undervoltage restart.
・When "Operation command selection [AA111]" is "Operation panel RUN key (02)", the operationcommand is OFF when the [RST] input terminal is turned ON. In such cases, if the operation is started
from the operation panel after the "Reset [RS]" input terminal is turned OFF, the restart set in "Restart
after reset release [bb-41]" will be performed.
Note: 1. For details, see section 9.7.3, Using the Frequency Adjustment Function to Start.
2. For details, see section 9.7.4, Using the Frequency Pull-in Function to Start.

Code
bb-26

bb-41

Item

Description

Retry wait time after
instantaneous power
Sets the waiting time from power-on or recovery to restart.
failure/under-voltage error
0Hz restart is performed.
Restart the frequency adjustment (restart the frequency retraction
Restart mode after RST
from the cutoff frequency).
releaseFrequency pull-in restart.
Restart is performed from the detection speed by encoder feedback.

■(e.g. 1) Example of operation while stopped andafter resetting the power ON
Power ONor
[RST] Input

Initialvalue

0.3 to100.0 s

1.0

00
01

00

02
03

■(e.g. 2) Example of operation while stopped and after
resetting the power ON
Power ONor
[RST] Input

ON
ON

RUN command

Data

ON

ON
ON
ON

RUN command

Free run
Motor speed

Motor speed[bb-26][0 Hz restart for bb-41]=00

If an operation command is ON after the power is turned on or reset, theactuator will start up with an operation that conforms to the [bb-41]
setting.

■(e.g. 3) Example of operation during operation
and after OFF of [RST] inputterminal■(e.g. 4) Example of operation during operation andafter OFF of [RST] inputterminal[RST] Input

ON[RST] Input

ON

RUN
command

ON

RUN
command

ON

Free runFree run

Motor speed

Motor speed[bb-26]0Hz restart(Retry wait time is invalid.)[bb-41]=01: Frequency-adjusted restart[bb-41]=02: Active frequency matching restart[bb-41]=03: Restart from search velocity

9-75
9-75

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.6 Start after free run stop・By "Restart after coasting release [bb-40]", you can select the starting method when the "Free run stop
[MBS]" input terminal is turned OFF from ON from 0Hz restart, frequency matching restart Note:1,
frequency retraction restart Note:2 and restart from the detected speed by the encoder feedback.
・When "Stop method selection [AA115]" is "Free-run stop (01)", the inverter is in the free-run stop statuswhen the operation command is OFF (stop command), and it follows the setting of [bb-40] at the next
operation. For more information on [AA115], see "9.7.7 Selecting Stopping Operation".
・0 For Hz restart, there is no setting for the retry wait period.
・The startup method when the power is turned on and the restart when returning from a reset arecommon settings.
・When frequency retraction restart is performed, the operation command direction at the start ofretraction operation is the same as the operation command direction at the reset input.
・If the power supply shutdown time is long and the internal power supply for control of the inverter isturned off, the inverter operates by restarting after releasing the reset, not by instantaneous power
failure or undervoltage restart.
・If the "Operation command selection [AA111]" is "Operation panel RUN key (02)", the operationcommand will be OFF when the "Free run stop [MBS]" inputting terminal is ON. In this situation, if
operation is started from the operation panel after the [MBS] input terminal is turned OFF, the restart
set in "Restart after cancellation of coasting [bb-40]" will be performed.
Note: 1. For details, see section 9.7.3, Using the Frequency Adjustment Function to Start.
2. For details, see section 9.7.4, Using the Frequency Pull-in Function to Start.

Code

Item

bb-26

Retry wait time after instantaneous
power failure/under-voltage error

bb-40

Restart mode after MBS release

Description
Sets the waiting time from power restoration to restart.
0Hz restart is performed.
Restart the frequency adjustment (restart the frequency
retraction from the cutoff frequency).
Frequency pull-in restart.
Restart is performed from the detection speed by encoder
feedback.

Data

Initialvalue

0.3 to100.0 s

1.0

00
01
02

00

03

■(e.g. 1) Operation example when "Stop method selection ■(e.g. 2) Example of operation when the [MBS] input terminal is turned[AA115]" = free-run stop (01)ON→OFF while stopped
RUN
command[MBS] Input

ON OFF
Free runON

RUN
command

ON
Free run

Motor speed[bb-26] To [bb-40] startin accordance with

Motor speed[bb-26]・When the [MBS] input terminal is ON⇒OFF and the run command is ON,
the actuator will start up according to the [bb-40] setting.

■(e.g. 3) When the [MBS] inputterminal is turned ON/OFF ■(e.g.4) When the [MBS] inputterminal is turned ON/OFF
during operation: Operation example (bb-40≠00)
during operation: Operation example (bb-40≠00)[MBS] Input

ON

RUN
command

ON
Free run

Motor speed[MBS] Input
RUN
command

ON
ON
Free run

Motor speed[bb-26]0Hz restart(Retry wait time is invalid.)[bb-40]=01: Frequency-adjusted restart[bb-40]=02: Active frequency matching restart[bb-41]=03: Restart from search velocity

9-76
9-76

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.7 Select the stop operation
・Select either decelerating stop according to the decelerating time setting when a stop command is
input or immediately shut off the output to make the inverter coast to the free run state by using the"Stop method selection [AA115]".
・Assign "Free-run stop [MBS](032)" to one of the input pins when free-run stop is performed using the
input of the control pin.
・If "Free-run stop (01)" is selected for [AA115], the drive will be shut off and the motor will be idling at
the timing when the operation command is OFF.
・When a coasting stop is performed, the next time an operation command is input, the start will follow
the selection of "Restart after coasting release [bb-40]".
Code

Item

AA115

STOP mode
selection

bb-40

CA-01 toCA-08

Description

Data

Initialvalue

When it stops, it performs normal deceleration stop.

00

When stopped, free-run stop will occur due to output shutdown of theinverter.

01

Restart mode after
MBS release

0Hz restart is performed.
Perform frequency matching restart.
Frequency pull-in restart.
Restart is performed from the detection speed by encoder feedback.

00
01
02
03

00

Input terminal
function

Free Run Stop [MBS]:This signal ON shuts off the inverter. The motor idles.

032-■Operation when "Stop method selection [AA115]" = free-run stop (01)
RUN command ON

OFFFree run

Motor speed

Restart according to "Restart after free-run release [bb-■ [MBS] Typical operation after OFF of terminal[MBS] Input

ON

RUN command
Free run
Motor speed

Restart according to "Restart after free-run release [bb-40]"

9-77
9-77

00

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.8 DC braking
・Rotation of the motor can be stopped by operating the DC braking (DB) when the motor is stopped.
There are three DC braking methods.
- External DC braking : Assign "External DC braking [DB](030)" to the input terminal and control theDC braking with ON/OFF of the [DB] input terminal.
- DC Braking at Stop: How to start DC braking when "DC Braking Frequency [AF103]" or less at
deceleration stop after operation command OFF.
- Frequency command DC braking: How to initiate DC braking when the frequency command value
and the output frequency become less than "DC braking frequency [AF103]".
・DC braking is performed with a braking force equivalent to ND rated output current when [AF105] is set
to 100% when standard load (ND) is selected.
・DC braking is performed with a braking force equivalent to 70% of LD rated output current when
[AF105] is set to 100% when light load (LD) is selected.
・Set and operate "DC braking force at standstill [AF105]" and "DC braking time at standstill [AF106]"
paying attention to heat generation of the motor.
・When DC braking is performed with the "External DC Braking [DB](030)" input terminal, an overcurrent
error or overvoltage error may occur if the product is used in a condition where the output frequency ishigh or the inertial load is large.
Code

AF101

Item

DC braking selection Note

Description
Internal DC Braking: Disable

00

Internal DC Braking: Enable

01

Internal DC Braking: Enable(Operates only with speed command)
When [AF101] is set to "Enabled (01)" or "Enabled (Operation
with velocity command only) (02)", DC braking starts when
the frequency falls below the frequency of this setting during
deceleration stop.
[DB] Delay after ON or [AF103] is reached until DC braking
starts. Coasting (output shutoff) takes place during this time.

AF103

DC braking frequency

AF104

DC braking delay time

AF105

DC braking force

Adjust the direct current braking power. The maximum braking
force when set to 100%.

AF106

DC braking active time atstop

Set the DC braking duration when [AF107] is set to "Edgeaction (00)".

AF107

CA-01 toCA-08

DC braking operation
method selection

Input terminal function

Data

Edge operation:
DC braking is performed for the duration set to [AF106].
(Operation 1-a to 7-a)Level operation:
DC braking is performed only when the conditions are
satisfied. (Operation 1-b to 7-b)
External DC Braking [DB]:DC braking is applied at ON of this signal. Only enabled
when [AF101] is set to "Disabled (00)" and "Enabled (01)".

Initial
value

00

02
0.00 to590.00 Hz

0.50

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

0 to 100 %50

0.00 to 60.00 s

0.50

00
00
01

030

-

Note: Internal DC braking means that DC braking is performed according to the output frequency and operating statusby setting parameters, regardless of external signals.

9-78
9-78

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

DC braking force and carrier frequency
・If the "Carrier frequency [bb101]" exceeds 2kHz, the DC braking force is limited as shown in the figure
below.
100

(100)

50

Max. braking force(%)

(50)

(10)

10

0 2
5
15
Carrier frequency [bb101] (kHz)DC braking with the "External DC braking [DB]" input terminal
・When DC braking is performed using an input signal to the control circuit terminal block, assign"External DC braking [DB]" to the input terminal and set "DC braking force when stopped [AF105]."
・[DB] DC braking by input terminal is enabled when "DC braking selection [AF101]" = "Disabled (00)" or"Enabled (01)". Regardless of operation commands, DC braking operates when the [DB] input terminal
is ON.
・Operation of DC braking varies depending on the setting of edge/level operation of "DC braking trigger
selection [AF107]". Set the edge operation or level operation according to the system. If edge
operation is selected, set the DC braking time at standstill [AF106].
■(e.g. 1) To ON/OFF [DB] input terminals during operation.
(e.g. 1-a) [AF107) = "Edge operation (00)"ON

RUN commandON[DB] Input
Outputfrequency

RUN commandON[DB] Input

ON

Outputfrequency[AF106]

DC braking(e.g. 1-b) [AF107) = "Leveling (01)"DC braking

・For edge operation, DC braking will operate for the duration set in [AF106] from ON edge input of the [DB] input terminal.
・For level-operation, DC braking is activated while the [DB] input terminal is ON.
■(e.g. 2) To ON/OFF the [DB] input terminal while the inverter is decelerating by the operation command OFF. [AF104] The setting is 0.0 (s).
(e.g. 2-a) [AF107) = "Edge operation (00)"
RUN commandON

RUN commandON[DB] Input
Outputfrequency

ON
ON[DB] Input[AF106]

DC braking(e.g. 2-b) [AF107) = "Levelling (01)"Outputfrequency
DC braking

・When "DC braking delay time [AF104]" is 0.0s, DC braking starts immediately after the [DB] input terminal is turned ON.
■(e.g. 3) When a value other than 0.0 (s) is set in "DC Braking Delay Time [AF104]" and the operation is the same as (e.g. 2).
(e.g. 3-a) [AF107) = "Edge operation (00)"
RUN command[DB] Input
Outputfrequency
DC braking(e.g. 3-b) [AF107) = "Leveling (00)"
RUN command

ON
ON
Free run[AF104] [AF106][DB] Input
Outputfrequency
DC braking

ON
ON
Free run[AF104]

・If a value other than 0.0 s is set to the "DC braking delay time [AF104]", DC braking will be started after a free run (output-off) of
the set time. However, if the [DB] input terminal is turned ON when the inverter is stopped, DC braking starts immediately.

9-79
9-79

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

DC braking when stopped ([AF101] = "Enable (01)")
・When the inverter is stopped, DC braking can be applied even if the [DB] input terminals are notoperated.
・To perform DC braking at stop, set "DC braking selection [AF101]" = "Enable (01)" and set "DC braking
frequency [AF103]" and "DC braking force at stop [AF105]."
・When the operation command becomes OFF and the output frequency falls below [AF103], DC braking
is applied.
・Operation of DC braking varies depending on the setting of edge/level operation of "DC braking trigger
selection [AF107]". In addition, when "DC braking delay time [AF104]" is set to other than 0.00s, freerun (output-shut-off) is performed prior to DC braking. Set the edge operation or level operationaccording to the system. Set the DC braking duration [AF106] at standstill when edge operation is
selected, referring to the operation example in the figure below.
■(e.g. 4) When ON/OFF operation command. [AF104] The setting is 0.00s.
(e.g. 4-a) [AF107) = "Edge operation (00)"(e.g. 4-b) [AF107) = "Leveling (01)"

RUN command

RUN commandON

Outputfrequency

Outputfrequency

DC braking
frequency [AF103]

DC braking
frequency [AF103][AF106]

DC braking

ON

DC braking

・For edged operation, DC braking will operate for the [AF106] set period when the output frequency becomes less than orequal to [AF103].
・For level operation, DC braking will operate until the operation command becomes ON when the output frequency becomes[AF103] or less.
■(e.g. 5) When a value other than 0.00 s is set to "DC Braking Delay Time [AF104]" and the operation is the same as (e.g. 4).
(e.g. 5-a) [AF107) = "Edge operation (00)"
RUN command
Outputfrequency
DC braking
frequency [AF103]
DC braking

ON
Free run[AF104][AF106](e.g. 5-b) [AF107) = "Leveling (00)"
RUN commandON
Outputfrequency
DC braking
frequency [AF103]
DC braking

Free run[AF104]

・If a value other than 0.00 s is set to the "DC braking delay time [AF104]", DC braking will be started after a free run (output-off)of the set time.

・When "DC Braking Selection [AF101]" is "Enabled (01)", DC braking can be operated at start when theoperation command is ON. For details, see section 9.7.2, "Applying DC Braking before Starting."

9-80
9-80

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Frequency reference DC braking ([AF101] = "Enable (Operation at set frequency only) (02)")
・To perform frequency command DC braking, set "DC braking selection [AF101]" = "Enable (operating
only at set frequency) (02)" and set "DC braking frequency [AF103]" and "DC braking force at standstill[AF105]".
・When Frequency-Command DC Braking is enabled, External DC Braking with the [DB] input terminals
will not operate.
・DC braking is activated when both the frequency command and the output frequency are below[AF103] in the operating condition.
・If the frequency command becomes [AF103]+2 Hz or more in the operation status, DC braking isreleased and normal operation starts.
・The DC braking will not operate if [frequency command over AF103]+2Hz is set prior to operation andthen operation command is ON. (e.g. 6)
・If the frequency command before operation is "0 Hz" and then the operation command is ON, theoperation starts from DC braking because both the frequency command and the output frequency are[AF103] or less. (e.g. 7)
・Operation of DC braking varies depending on the edge/level operation setting of "DC braking trigger
selection [AF107]". Set the edge operation or level operation according to the system.
Set the DC braking duration [AF106] at standstill when edge operation is selected, referring to theoperation example in the figure below.
■(e.g. 6) Set a frequency command higher than [AF103] prior to operation. When the frequency command is less than orequal to [AF103] during operation.
(e.g. 6-a) [AF107) = "Edge operation (00)"
RUN command
Frequency
Reference
DC braking
frequency [AF103][AF103]
Outputfrequency
DC braking

ON(e.g. 6-b) [AF107) = "Leveling (01)"
RUN command
Frequency
ReferenceON

DC braking
frequency [AF103][AF103]
Outputfrequency[AF106]

DC braking

・DC braking starts when the frequency command is [AF103] or less in the operation command ON.
For edged operation, DC braking operates during [AF106] after the frequency command and the output frequency
become less than [AF103].
For level-operation, from when the frequency command and the output frequency are below [AF103] until the frequency
command is above [AF103],■(e.g. 7) Before operation, set the frequency command below [AF103] for analogue frequency command, etc.
When the frequency command becomes [AF103] or less/or more after the operation.
(e.g. 7-a) [AF107) = "Edge operation (00)"(e.g. 7-b) [AF107) = "Leveling (01)"

RUN command

RUN command
DC braking
frequency[AF103]Frequency
ReferenceON

DC braking
frequency[AF103]Frequency
Reference[AF103]
Outputfrequency
DC braking[AF106][AF106]

ON[AF103]
Outputfrequency
DC braking

・DC braking starts when the frequency command is [AF103] or less in the operation command ON.
For edged operation, DC braking operates during [AF106] after the frequency command and the output frequency becomeless than [AF103].
For level-operation, DC braking operates until the operation command OFF is reached after the frequency command andthe output frequency become [AF103] or less.

9-81
9-81

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.9 Switch to commercial power supply
・Commercial power supply change, this function can be used for a system with a large load moment ofinertia where the acceleration/deceleration is driven by an inverter and the drive is driven by acommercial power supply at a constant speed.
・When the commercial switching [CS] input terminal is turned ON with the operation command ON, theinverter-output is shut off and the motor coasts. [CS] When the input terminal is turned ON to OFF, theinverter restarts by pulling the frequency to the frequency (cutoff frequency) immediately before the[CS] input terminal turns ON after the "momentary power failure/undervoltage retry standby time [bb26]" (frequency pull-in restart).
・Operation of the "Commercial switching [CS]" input terminal is the same as when the "Free run stop
[MBS]" input terminal is ON/OFF with "Frequency retraction restart (02)" for "Restart after free run
release" and "Start frequency selection at frequency retraction restart [bb-47]" as "Cutoff frequency(00)". For details, see section 9.7.4, Using the Frequency Pull-in Function to Start.
Code
CA-01 to
CA-08

Item

Description

Input terminal function

Data

Commercial power supply change [CS]:This function is used during commercial switching. [CS] When the input
terminal is turned ON, the inverter shuts off the output.

035■Example of connection diagram and timing chart in commercial switching operation
・For FRY, RRY, CSY, use relays for low voltage.
・Take the mechanical interlock of MC3 and MC2. Otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.
・The commercial circuit does not operate when the earth leakage breaker ELCB trips due to a ground
fault or the like. Connect a commercial circuit of another system to MC2 when back-up is required.
MC2

MCB

ELCB

MC1

Three-phase
Power supply

U

R
S
T

MC3

THR
M

V
W
Inverter

FRY
RRY
CSY

FR
RR
CS
COM

■Timing of switching from inverter to commercial
power supply
MC1

ON[FR] Input

ON
ON
Run

MC2 and MC3 interlock times(0.5 to 1 s)

ON

MC1 and CS interlock times(0.5 to 1 s)

MC2

MC2 and MC3 interlock times(0.5 to 1 s)

ON[CS] Input
Outputfrequency

MC1
ON

MC2
MC3

■Switching timing from commercial power supply
to inverter

MC3

ON

[FR] Input

ON[CS] Input

ON

Outputfrequency[bb-26]

Run

Active frequency matching restart

9-82
9-82

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.10 Brake control
・With the brake control function, an inverter can control the external brake used for elevating systems,
etc. To use this function, set "Brake control selection [AF130]" to "Brake control enable (01)" or "Brake
control enable (forward/reverse individual) (02)", and assign "Brake release [BRK]" to the output
terminal.
・Setting [AF130] to "Braking Control Enable (Forward/Reverse Individual)" (02) allows you to set a
different operation between forward and reverse rotation. This function is effective when the operationdiffers between hoisting and lowering. When "Braking control enable (01)" is set to [AF130], the forward
setting ([AF131] to [AF137]) is enabled for both forward and reverse.
・To operate this function while interlocking by inputting a confinement/release check signal from theexternal brake to the inverter, assign "Brake check [BOK]" to the input terminal and set "Brake checkwait time ([AF134] and [AF141])". Also, assign "Braking error [BER]" to the output terminals as required.
・The brake control function can also be used in combination with position control. For details, refer to"9.14.4 Operation of absolute position control and brake control in conjunction".
・For the control method when the brake control function is used, sensorless vector control ("control
method [AA121]" = "sensorless vector control (IM) (08)") that generates high torque at start isrecommended.
・If an error occurs in the brake sequence, the inverter trips at the "Brake error [E036]" and turns ON the"Brake error [BER]" signal is. Refer to the operation sequence described below for the detailed
conditions to trip.
・In brake control, trip occurs in the following cases.
- When the output current is less than the "brake release current ([AF136], [AF143])" after the "brakerelease establishment wait time ([AF131], [AF138])" has elapsed.
- When using the "Brake check [BOK]" input terminal, if the [BOK] input terminal does not ON withinthe "Brake check wait time ([AF134], [AF141])" when starting.
- When using the "Brake check [BOK]" input terminal, if the [BOK] input terminal does not OFF withinthe "Brake check wait time ([AF134], [AF141])" when stopping.
- When the "Brake check [BOK]" input terminal is used, the "Brake release [BRK]" signal is output, but
the [BOK] input terminal is turned OFF.

9-83
9-83

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Parameters for brake control
Code

AF130

Item

Brake control enable Note:1

AF131

Brake release wait time (Forward)

AF138

Brake release wait time (Reverse)

AF132

Brake wait time for accel.(Forward)

AF139

Brake wait time for accel. (Reverse)

AF133
AF140
AF134
AF141
AF135
AF142

Brake wait time for stopping(Forward)
Brake wait time for stopping(Reverse)
Brake confirmation signal wait motor (Forward)
Brake confirmation signal wait motor (Reverse)
Brake-open frequency(Forward)Note:2
Brake-open frequency(Reverse) Note:2

AF136

Brake-open current (Forward) Note:3

AF143

Brake-open current (Reverse) Note:3

AF137
AF144

Brake-on frequency (Forward) Note:2
Brake-on frequency (Reverse) Note:2

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Description

Data

DisableBrake control enabled
Brake control enabled(Forward/Reverse individual setting)Set the time from when the brake releasefrequency is reached until the output current
reaches the brake release current.
Set the mechanical delay time from the brake
confirmation signal (or brake release signal) until
the brake is released.

00
01

Initial
value

00

02
0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

Set the mechanical delay period from OFF of thebrake release signal until the brake is restrained.

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

Set a time longer than the time from when thebrake release signal is output until the release
completion signal output from the brake is input
to the inverter.

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

Sets the frequency to ON the brake-release signal.

0.00 to590.00 Hz

0.00(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output
current A
Set the frequency at which the brake is closed when
0.00 tostopped.
590.00 Hz
Braking confirmation [BOK]:
Check this input signal as an answerback of the037[BRK] output signal to the external brake.
Brake release [BRK]:
This signal is for restraining/releasing the037
external brake.
Braking error [BER]:
This relay is ON when a sequence error occurs
in the brake control function. With ON of this038
signal, the inverter trips with "Brake error[E036]".

1.00×
rated
outputcurrent

Sets the output current that enables brakerelease.

0.00
-

002
001
017

Note: 1. The brake-control-related parameters that are enabled differ depending on the [AF130] setting.
Refer to the table below for details.
2. Set a value greater than the minimum frequency [Hb130].
3. Note that the torque may not be sufficient when the brake is released if the setting is low.

■[AF130]= "Brake control enable (01)"Parameters that is enabled
Item■[AF130]= "Brake control enabled(forward/reverse individual) (02)”Parameters that is enabled
Valid parameters

Valid parameters(forward/reverse
common)Item

Forwardrotation

Reverserotation

Brake release wait time

AF131

Brake release wait time

AF131

AF138

Brake wait time for accel.

AF132

Brake wait time for accel.

AF132

AF139

Brake wait time for stopping

AF133

Brake wait time for stopping

AF133

AF140

Brake confirmation signal wait time

AF134

Brake confirmation signal wait time

AF134

AF141

Brake release frequency

AF135

Brake release frequency

AF135

AF142

Brake release current

AF136

Brake release current

AF136

AF143

Braking frequency

AF137

Braking frequency

AF137

AF144

9-84
9-84

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Operation sequence of the brake control function
・The following figure shows the operation sequence of the brake control function. In the following, thedetails of the brake control function are explained in this figure. (The figure below shows a case where"Braking check [BOK](037)" is assigned to the input terminal.)

Brake release frequency

Braking frequency

Output frequency(1)
RUN command[BRK] Output

(5)

(7)

Brake wait time for stopping(2) Release wait time(4)

Brake wait time for accel.

[BOK] Input

(6)

(3)
Brake confirmation signal wait time

Brake confirmation signal wait time(1) When the RUN command is issued, the inverter accelerates to the "brake release frequency([AF135], [AF142])".
(2) After the output frequency reaches [AF135] or [AF142] and the time "Brake release establishment
wait time ([AF131], [AF138])" has elapsed, the "Brake release [BRK]" signal is turned ON.
However, if the output current at this time is less than the "brake release current ([AF136], [AF143])",the [BRK] signal will not be ON, and the "brake error [E036]" trip will occur instead, and the "brakeerror [BER] signal will be turned ON.
(3) The operation differs depending on whether the "Braking confirmation [BOK]" input terminal isassigned to the input terminal.
- [BOK] With assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns ON, the signal does not accelerate and waits
for the [BOK] input terminal to become ON during the "Brake-check wait time ([AF134], [AF141])".
If the [BOK] input terminal does not turn ON within the waiting time, a "Braking error [E036]" trip
will occur and the [BER] signal will be turned ON.
- [BOK] No assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns ON, go to step (4).
(4) [BOK] After ON of the input terminal (or ON of the [BRK] signal.), when the time of "Acceleration wait
time ([AF132], [AF139])" has elapsed, the machine accelerates to the set frequency again.
(5) When the operation command is OFF, the inverter decelerates to the "brake-on frequency ([AF137],[AF144])" and OFF [BRK].
(6) The operation differs depending on whether the [BOK] input connectors are assigned to the input
connectors.
- [BOK] With assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns OFF, the inverter does not decelerate andwaits for the [AF134] or [AF141] to turn OFF the [BOK] input terminal. If the [BOK] input terminal
does not turn OFF within the waiting time, a "Braking error [E036]" trip occurs and the [BER] signal
turns ON.
- [BOK] No assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns OFF, proceed to step (7).
(7) The operation differs depending on whether the [BOK] input connectors are assigned to the input
connectors.
- [BOK] With assignment: After the [BOK] input terminal is turned OFF, if the time "Stopping wait
time ([AF133], [AF140])" has elapsed, the actuator will decelerate to 0 Hz again.
- [BOK] No assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns OFF, when the time "Stop wait time ([AF133],[AF140])" has elapsed, the actuator decelerates to 0Hz.

9-85
9-85

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.11 Control the contactor
・When performing contactor operation, set "Contactor control selection [AF120]" to "Enabled (primaryside) (01)" or "Enabled (secondary side) (02)".
・Input terminal function "Contactor check signal [COK]" and output terminal function "Contactor control[CON]" are available.
・This function must be used for contactor control, since operating the contactor during inverter output
may cause surge and inverter damage.
・If an error occurs in the contactor sequence, the drive trips due to a contactor error [E110].
・In contactor control, trip occurs in the following cases when the input terminal function "Contactor
check signal [COK]" is used.
- When the [COK] input terminal does not ON within the Contactor Check Duration [AF123].
- If the [COK] input terminal does not OFF within the Contactor Check Duration [AF123], when
stopped.
- When the [COK] input terminal turns OFF while the Contactor Control [CON] signals ON.
■Required setting items for contactor control function
Code

Item

Description
DisableAF120

Contactor -motor

AF121

Run delay -motor

AF122

Contactor off delay -motor

AF123

Contactor response check-motor

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Data

Initialvalue

00

Enable (Primary):
A contactor is installed on the primary side of theinverter to reduce standby power.
Enable (secondary side):A contactor is installed on the secondary side of theinverter to function as a brake sequence.
Sets the standby time from the input of operationcommand to the start of inverter output.
Sets the time from inverter output shutoff to contactor
control.
Set the time from the input of the operation command tothe control of the contactor.
Contactor check signal [COK]:
OFF: Contactor released
ON: Contactor is operating
Contactor Control [CON]:
OFF: Contactor release command
ON: Contactor operation command

9-86
9-86

01
00
02
0.00 to 2.00 s

0.20

0.00 to 2.00 s

0.10

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.10

107

-

039

002
001
017

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Example of energy conservation at the primarycontactor(AF120=0: Enabled (primary))
・Reduced standby power when combined withexternal ＋24V inputs. For the external ＋24V
power supply to the control circuit, refer to "5.4.1
Configuration of Control Circuit Terminals".

3 phasePower
Supply・By ON/OFF the contactor MC of the main circuit
power supply with the output of the setting terminalof the output terminal function "Contactor control[CON]", the power input to the inverter main circuit
can be shut off while the inverter output is stopped,
thereby realizing an energy saving operation
sequence.

MC

External +24V
Power supply

FR
RR

R
S
T

U
V
W

M

[CON]
P24
COM
[FR]
[RR]
COM

Inverter output in progress
Output frequency

RUN command[FR]/[RR] Input[CON] Output[COK] Input

Starting
StandbyTime

Contactor off delay -motor

(1)

(4)
(3)
Contactor response(5) check -motor(2)
Contactor response check -motor(6)(1) After ON of the RUN command, the inverter waits until the start wait time [AF121] elapses.
(2) The "Contactor control [CON]" signal turns ON at the same time as the operation command ON.
Subsequent operation differs depending on whether "Contactor check signal [COK]" is assigned to the
input terminal.
- [COK] Assignment available: If the [COK] input terminal is not ON within the contactor check period[AF123], the inverter trips due to a contactor error [E110].
- [COK] No assignment: Wait for the elapse of "Start standby time [AF121]" after ON the [CON] signal.
(3) Acceleration starts after "Start standby time [AF121]" has elapsed.
(4) Wait until "Contactor release delay time [AF122]" has elapsed after the inverter has stopped
outputting.
(5) After the "Contactor release delay time [AF122]" setting time has elapsed, the [CON] signal turns OFF.
Subsequent operations differ depending on whether the [COK] input terminal is set for the input
terminal function.
- [COK] With assignment: If the [COK] input terminal is not OFF within "Contactor check time
[AF123]", it trips with "Contactor error [E110]".
- [COK] No assignment: The inverter does not do anything as it is

9-87
9-87

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■Example of control with secondary contactor(AF120=02: Enabled (Secondary))
・When enabled (secondary side) is selected, it can be used in combination with brake control.
Brake release frequency

Braking frequency

(1)

(7)

Output frequency(6)

Brake wait time for accel.

(9)

Brake wait time for stopping

RUN command(2)[CON] Output

RUN delay-motor(10)⑩[COK] Input

Contactor off delay -motor(11)(3) Contactor response check -motor[BRK] Output

Contactor
Check time(4) Brake release wait time
[BOK] Input(8)(5)
Brake confirmation signal wait time

Brake confirmation signal wait time(1) When the RUN command is issued, the inverter ON the contactor control [CON] signal.
(2) Wait until the "Start standby time [AF121]" has elapsed.
(3) Subsequent operation differs depending on whether "Contactor check signal [COK]" is assigned to the
input terminal.
- [COK] With assignment: If the [COK] input terminal is not ON within "Contactor check time
[AF123]", it trips with "Contactor error [E110]".
- [COK] No assignment: Move to (4).
(4) The inverter starts outputting and after the time "Brake release establishment wait time ([AF131],[AF138])" has elapsed, the "Brake release [BRK]" signal turns ON. However, if the output current at thistime is less than the "brake release current ([AF136], [AF143])", the [BRK] signal will not be ON, andthe "brake error [E036]" trip will occur instead, and the "brake error [BER] signal will be turned ON.
(5) Subsequent operations differ depending on whether "Braking confirmation [BOK]" is assigned to the
input terminal.
- [BOK] With assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns ON, the signal does not accelerate and waits forthe [BOK] input terminal to become ON during the "Brake-check wait time ([AF134], [AF141])".
[BOK] When the input terminal is ON, it will go to (6), but if the [BOK] input terminal does not turn
ON within the waiting time, it trips due to "Braking error [E036]", and the [BER] signal turns ON.
- [BOK] No assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns ON, go to (6).
(6) When the time of "Acceleration wait time ([AF132], [AF139])" has elapsed, the actuator accelerates tothe set frequency again.
(7) When the operation command is OFF, the inverter decelerates to the "brake-on frequency ([AF137],[AF144])" and OFF [BRK].

9-88
9-88

Chapter 9

Inverter Function(8) Subsequent operations differ depending on whether "Braking confirmation [BOK]" is assigned to the
input terminal.
- [BOK] With assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns OFF, the signal does not decelerate and waits
for the [BOK] input terminal to become OFF during the "Braking Confirmation Wait Time ([AF134],[AF141])". If the [BOK] input terminal does not turn OFF within the waiting time, it trips due to"Braking error [E036]", and the [BER] signal turns ON.
- [BOK] No assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns ON, go to (9).
(9) [BOK] After the input terminal is turned OFF (or the [BRK] signal is turned OFF), when the time "Stopwait time ([AF133] and [AF140])" has elapsed, the speed is decelerated and the output is shut off.
(10) After "Contactor release delay time [AF122]" has elapsed, the [CON] signal turns OFF.
(11) Subsequent operation differs depending on whether "Contactor check signal [COK]" is assigned tothe input terminal.
- [COK] With assignment: If the [COK] input terminal is not OFF within "Contactor check time
[AF123]", it trips with "Contactor error [E110]".
- [COK] No assignment: The inverter is still in the stop state.

9-89
9-89

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.12 Perform compulsory operation
・When this function is activated, the output operates in the compulsory operation mode (Em-Forcemode) where the inverter runs at a constant rate without shutting down the drive until the power supply
is shut off.
・The forced operation mode is entered by setting "Forced operation mode selection [PA-01]" to "Enable(01)" and turning ON "Emergency forced operation [EMF]" assigned to the input terminal function.
・The operation command in the compulsory operation mode is set with "Compulsory operation
frequency setting [PA-02]" and "Compulsory operation rotational direction command [PA-03]".
・Whether the present status corresponds to normal, forced operation or bypass mode can be checkedin the "Forced operation mode monitor [dC-49]".
Code

dC-49

PA-01

Item

Emergency-force drivemode monitor

Enable Emergency-force
drive mode

PA-02

Emergency-force drive
frequency reference

PA-03

Emergency-force drive
direction command

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Description

Data

Disabled: Not in forced operation mode and bypass mode.

00

Forced operation: Operation is in progress in forced
operation mode.

01

Bypass: Operation in Bypass mode.

02

Disable: Forced operation mode is invalid.
[EMF] The compulsory operation mode is not
activated even if the input terminals are turnedON.
Enable: Forced operation mode is enabled.
[EMF] When the input terminal is set to ON, theunit enters the compulsory operation.

-

00
00
01

Set the frequency command in the forced operation mode.

0.00 to590.00 Hz

Forward rotation is performed during forced operation.

00

Reverse operation is performed during forced operation.

01[EMF]: Forced emergency operation
OFF: Disable
ON: Forced operation mode. ([For PA-01]=01)[EMFC]: Forced operation in progress signal
OFF: Disable
ON: Forced operation in progress[EMBP]: Signal during bypass mode
OFF: Disable
ON: In Bypass Mode

Initial
value

105

076

077

0.00
00

-

002
001
017

・In forced operation mode, once it is turned ON, it continues operation until the power supply of theinverter is cut off.
・Overcurrent retry, overvoltage retry, and instantaneous power failure/undervoltage retry areautomatically activated. To change the operation details, a separate setting is required.
・After the input terminal function "Emergency forced operation [EMF]" is ON, the input terminal function
is disabled except "Contactor check signal [COK]".

9-90
9-90

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Operation in compulsory operation
・ON the input terminal function "Emergency forced operation [EMF]" to enter the forced operation
mode.
・The drive outputs the frequency set in "Compulsory operation frequency setting [PA-02]" and therotation direction set in "Compulsory operation rotation direction command [PA-03]" until the power isshut off.
Power supply
ON
OFF[FR] Input[PA-02]Inverter
Output frequency[EMF] Input

ON
OFF[EMFC] Output

ONOFF

Rotation is based on [PA-03]

・In the forced operation mode, the following functions operate automatically. In addition, otherfunctions operate according to their settings.
(1) Soft-lock status (equivalent to [UA-16]=01)
Parameters cannot be changed. To return the setting, set the [EMF] input terminal to OFF, turnthe power back on, and then change the parameters.
(2) Auto-reset ([Extension bb-10]=02 to Operating Range)
If a trip occurs, it will automatically reset and restart.
(3) STOP disabled (equivalent to [AA-13]=00)
Disables STOP/RESET button on the control panel.
(4) Operation enabled during optional startup ([oA-13]=01)
Operation is permitted even during option start.
Code

PA-01

Item

Description

Enable Emergency-force
drive mode

Disable: Forced operation mode is invalid.
[EMF] The compulsory operation mode is not
activated even if the input terminals are turned ON.
Enable: Forced operation mode is enabled.
[EMF] When the input terminal is set to ON, the unit
enters the compulsory operation.

PA-02

Emergency-force drive
frequency reference

PA-03

Emergency-force drive
direction command

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Set the frequency command in the forced operation mode.

Data
00

00
01
0.00 to590.00 Hz

Forward rotation is performed during forced operation.

00

Reverse operation is performed during forced operation.

01[EMF]: Forced emergency operation
OFF: Disable
ON: Forced operation mode. ([For PA-01]=01)[EMFC]: Forced operation in progress signal
OFF: Disable
ON: Forced operation in progress

9-91
9-91

Initial
value

0.00
0

105

-

076

002
001
017

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Automatic reset operation during forced operation
・When an error occurs during forced operation and the inverter trips, resetting is performed
automatically equivalent to when the power is turned on.
・Automatic reset operation during compulsory operation differs from that described in 9.15.7, Resetting
Alarms Automatically. For details, refer to the table "Automatic Reset Operation during Compulsory
Operation" in this section.
Trip

Restart according to [bb-41]

Trip

Restart according to [bb-41]

Output frequency[EMF] Input
Note[AL] Output

Automatic reset

Note

Follow [bb-11]

Follow [bb-11][bb-12][bb-12]

Note: In the case of intelligent relay terminal, it operates momentarily even if anything is assigned due to the effect of system reset.

■Automatic reset operation during forced operation
Code

Item

bb-10

Automatic error reset
selection

bb-11

Alarm signal selection at
automatic error reset

bb-12
bb-13
bb-41

Automatic error reset wait
time
Automatic error reset
numberRestart mode after
RST release

Operation in Compulsory Operation
Regardless of the setting, [bb-10] = "Valid (02) after the set period" is forcibly
extended to the entire error.
The setting in [bb-11] is valid.
However, the intelligent relay terminal operates only momentarily at system
reset. Therefore, if "Alarm signal [AL]" is assigned to "Output terminal function[ML] selection [CC-07]", the [AL] signal will ON for a moment even if [bb-11] is
set to "Not output (01)".
The setting in [bb-12] is valid.
Performs an infinite number of automatic resets forcibly regardless of thesetting.
The setting in [bb-41] is valid.
The settings for the other retry functions ([bb-20] to [bb-31]) are valid in thesame way.

9-92
9-92

Initial
value
00

00

2
3
00

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Switch to commercial operation (bypass mode)
・When "Bypass function selection [PA-04]" is set to "Enabled (01)", this function can be switched to thecommercial operation mode (bypass mode) during forced operation and when the specified operation
status is not reached.
・During bypass mode, the output terminal function "Bypass mode in progress signal [EMBP]" is ON and
the inverter output is shut off.
・For the bypass mode operation, refer to the connection diagram and timing in the commercial
switching operation shown below.
・In the example below, the main power supply of the inverter is also shut off. In such cases, the external＋24V power supply must be connected to prevent loss of the power supply for internally controllingthe inverters.
・[EMBP] Perform contactor control based on the signal.
・When using the bypass mode, an interlock must be provided that considers the operation delay of thecontactor when switching to commercial operation. Make sure that system operation is safe before use.
・The output-terminal function "Bypassing mode in progress signal [EMBP]" can be used as a contactor
control signal to timing the contactor control. Use interlocks for the commercial power contactor andthe inverter output contactor.
・The commercial circuit does not operate when the earth leakage breaker ELCB trips due to a ground
fault or the like. Connect a commercial circuit of another system to MC2 when back-up is required.
■ INV-> Commercial Operation Timing
MC2

During compulsory operation, [PA-05] accumulated
operation (See the next page for details.)
Inverter output[EMF] Input[EMFC] Output

MCB

MC1

ON
ON

[EMBP] Output

MC1

ON

External ＋24V
Power supplyON
MC2 and MC3 Interchange
Locking duration (0.5 to 1s)

ON

FR

FR

RR

RR
COM

Code

Item

PA-04

Commercial power supply
Bypass function selection

PA-05

Commercial power supply
Bypass function delay time

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

U
V

M

W

MC
MB
MA
UPF

EMBP

OM

Description

Data

Disabled: Bypass feature is disabled.

00

Enabled: Bypass feature enabled.

01

During forced operation, if the output frequency cannot
reach the compulsory operation frequency setting [PA-02],
and the [PA-05] setting has elapsed, the unit will enter
bypass mode.
[EMF]: Forced emergency operation
OFF: Disable
ON: Forced operation mode. ([For PA-01]=01)[EMFC]: Forced operation in progress signal
OFF: Disable
ON: Forced operation in progress[EMBP]: Signal during bypass mode
OFF: Disable
ON: In Bypass Mode

9-93
9-93

THR

MC3
R
S
T
P24
+V
VRF
COM

ON

MC2
MC3

ECLB

Operation

To the contactor
control circuit

Initialvalue
00

0.0 to1000.0 s

5.0

105

-

076

077

002
001
017

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

Determination of switching to bypass mode
・When "Commercial power bypass function selection [PA-04]" is set to "Enabled (01)", if the time that
"Forced operation frequency setting [PA-02]" cannot be reached during forced operation elapses"Commercial power supply bypass function delay time [PA-05]" and the inverter enters the operation
ready status (output terminal function "Operation ready [IRDY]" is OFF), the inverter operation is regarded
as impossible and the inverter enters the commercial operation mode (bypass mode).
・Bypass mode continues to be shut down until power to the inverter is shut down once ON.
・While the inverter is starting immediately after resetting, the "Operation ready [IRDY]" signal is OFF for
about 1 second, but this section does not change to the bypass mode.
・When the upper limiter function operates and the "compulsory operation frequency setting [PA-02]"
cannot be reached, the bypass function delay time accumulated is accumulated.
[IRDY] OFF

Output arrival[PA-02]
Output frequency[EMF] Input[IRDY] Output[PA-05]
Accumulated value[EMFC] Output[EMBP] Output

StatusForced operation

Bypass mode・In Bypass mode, the following functions operate automatically. In addition, other functions operateaccording to their settings.
(1) Soft-lock status (equivalent to [UA-16]=01)
Parameters cannot be changed. To return the setting, set the [EMF] input terminal to OFF, turnthe power back on, and then change the parameters.
(2) Auto-reset ([Extension bb-10]=02 to Operating Range)
The automatic reset function is disabled.
(3) STOP disabled (equivalent to [AA-13]=00)
Disables STOP/RESET button on the control panel.
(4) Operation enabled during optional startup ([oA-13]=01)
Operation is permitted even during option start.

9-94
9-94

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

9.7.13 Switch and use two motors
・The target parameters are switched by turning ON the "2nd control [SET](024)" of the input terminal
function. Two types of motors with different parameters can be switched and controlled by the second
control function.
・[SET] It is linked with ON of the input terminal, and the "2nd control being selected [SETM](012)" of theoutput terminal function turns ON.
・Parameters whose parameter number is 200 are the 2nd control parameter.
(e.g.) 2nd control parameter corresponding to "1st main speed command selection [AA101]" is "2ndmain speed command selection [AA201]".
・Even if the "2nd control [SET]" input terminal is switched during inverter operation, the parameter will
not be switched. In this case, it will be switched after the output is shut off.
・[SET] Even if you want to switch the input terminals for immediate operation, take a switching time of
1 second or longer.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initialvalue

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

2nd control [SET]:
Switches to the 2nd control parameter ON this function.

024

-

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

While the second control is selected [SETM]:[SET] When switching to the 2nd control parameter after ON
the input terminal, this signal is turned ON.

012

002
001
017

9-95
9-95

Chapter 9

Inverter Function■[SET] List of parameters switched by ON/OFF of input terminalFirst/second
codeFirst/second
code

Name

AG103 AG203

Setting item

AA101

AA201

Main speed input source selection

Jump frequency 2, 1st-motor

AA102

AA202

Sub speed input source selection

AG104 AG204

Jump frequency width 2, 1st-motor

AA104

AA204

Sub speed -motor

AG105 AG205

Jump frequency 3, 1st-motor

AA105

AA205

Speed reference calculation symbol -motor

AG106 AG206

Jump frequency width 3, 1st-motor

AA106

AA206

Add frequency -motor

AG110 AG210

Acceleration stop frequency

AA111

AA211

RUN command input source selection

AG111 AG211

Acceleration stop time

AA114

AA214

RUN direction restriction selection

AG112 AG212

Deceleration stop frequency

AA115

AA215

STOP mode selection

AG113 AG213

Deceleration stop time

AA121

AA221

Control mode selection

bA101

bA201

Upper frequency limit source selection

AA123

AA223

Vector control mode selection

bA102

bA202

Upper frequency limit

AA124

AA224

Speed compensation with encoder
selection

bA103

bA203

Lower frequency limit

Ab110

Ab210

Multi-speed 0

bA110

bA210

Torque limit selection

AC115

AC215

2- Accel/Decel change trigger

bA111

bA211

Torque limit parameter mode selection

AC116

AC216

Two-stage acceleration frequency

bA112

bA212

Torque limit 1 (Forward drive)

AC117

AC217

2-speed reduction frequency

bA113

bA213

Torque limit 2 (Reverse regenerative)

AC120

AC220

Acceleration time 1

bA114

bA214

Torque limit 3 (Reverse drive)

AC122

AC222

Deceleration time 1

bA115

bA215

Torque limit 4 (Forward regenerative)

AC124

AC224

Acceleration time 2

bA116

bA216

Torque limit LADSTOP selection

AC126

AC226

Deceleration time 2

bA120

bA220

Overcurrent suppression enable

AF101

AF201

DC braking selection

bA121

bA221

Overcurrent suppression -motor

AF103

AF203

DC braking frequency

bA122

bA222

Overload restriction 1 mode selection

AF104

AF204

DC braking delay time

bA123

bA223

Overload restriction 1 active level

AF105

AF205

DC braking force

bA124

bA224

Overload restriction 1 action time

AF106

AF206

DC braking active time at stop

bA126

bA226

Overload restriction 2 mode selection

AF107

AF207

DC braking operation method selection

bA127

bA227

Overload restriction 2 active level

AF108

AF208

DC braking force at start

bA128

bA228

Overload restriction 2 action time

AF109

AF209

DC braking active time at start

bA140

bA240

Overvoltage suppression enable

AF120

AF220

Contactor -motor

bA141

bA241

Overvoltage suppression active -motor

AF121

AF221

Run delay -motor

bA142

bA242

Overvoltage suppression active time

AF122

AF222

Contactor off delay -motor

bA144

bA244

Constant DC bus voltage control P gain

AF123

AF223

Contactor response check -motor

bA145

bA245

Constant DC bus voltage control I gain

AF130

AF230

Brake control enable

bA146

bA246

Over-magnetization function selection

AF131

AF231

Brake release wait -motor (Forward)

bA147

bA247

Over-magnetization function output filter time
constant

AF132

AF232

Brake wait time for accel. (Forward)

bA148

bA248

Over-magnetization function -motor

AF133

AF233

Brake wait time for stopping (Forward)

bA149

bA249

Over-magnetization function -motor

AF134

AF234

Brake confirmation signal wait -motor(Forward)

bb101

bb201

Carrier frequency

AF135

AF235

Brake release frequency -motor (Forward)

bb102

bb202

Sprinkle carrier pattern selection

AF136

AF236

Brake release current -motor (Forward)

bb103

bb203

Automatic carrier reduction selection

AF137

AF237

Braking -motor (Forward)

bb160

bb260

Overcurrent detection -motor

AF138

AF238

Brake release wait -motor (Reverse)

bC110

bC210

Electronic thermal level

AF139

AF239

Brake wait time for accel. (Reverse)

bC111

bC211

Electronic thermal characteristic selection

AF140

AF240

Brake wait time for stopping (Reverse)

bC112

bC212

Electronic thermal decrease function enable

AF141

AF241

Brake confirmation signal wait -motor(Reverse)

bC113

bC213

Electronic thermal decreasing time

AF142

AF242

Brake release frequency -motor (Reverse)

bC115

bC215

Electronic thermal accumulation gain

AF143

AF243

Brake release current -motor (Reverse)

bC120

bC220

Free electronic thermal frequency-1

AF144

AF244

Braking -motor (Reverse)

bC121

bC221

Free electronic thermal current-1

AG101

AG201

Jump frequency 1, 1st-motor

bC122

bC222

Free electronic thermal frequency-2

AG102

AG202

Jump frequency width 1, 1st-motor

bC123

bC223

Free electronic thermal current-2

9-96
9-96

Chapter 9

Inverter Function

First/second
code

Name

First/second
code

Setting item

bC124

bC224

Free electronic thermal frequency-3

Hb142 Hb242

Manual torque boost peak speed

bC125

bC225

Free electronic thermal current-3

Hb145 Hb245

Eco drive enable

CE101

CE201

Low current signal output mode selection

Hb146 Hb246

Eco drive response adjustment

CE102

CE202

Low current detection level 1

Hb150 Hb250

Free-V/f frequency 1

CE103

CE203

Low current detection level 2

Hb151 Hb251

Free-V/f voltage 1

CE105

CE205

Overload signal output mode selection

Hb152 Hb252

Free-V/f frequency 2

CE106

CE206

Overload warning level 1

Hb153 Hb253

Free-V/f voltage 2

CE107

CE207

Overload warning level 2

Hb154 Hb254

Free-V/f frequency 3

CE120

CE220

Over-torque level (Forward drive)

Hb155 Hb255

Free-V/f voltage 3

CE121

CE221

Over-torque level (Reverse regenerative)

Hb156 Hb256

Free-V/f frequency 4

CE122

CE222

Over-torque level (Reverse drive)

Hb157 Hb257

Free-V/f voltage 4

CE123

CE223

Over-torque level (Forward regenerative)

Hb158 Hb258

Free-V/f frequency 5

CE224

Over/Under-torque output
Signal mode selection

Hb159 Hb259

Free-V/f voltage 5

CE124
CE125

CE225

Over/Under-torque selection

Hb160 Hb260

Free-V/f frequency 6

HA110

HA210

Stabilization parameter (V/f,A.bst)

Hb161 Hb261

Free-V/f voltage 6

HA112

HA212

Stabilization end ratio (V/f,A.bst)

Hb162 Hb262

Free-V/f frequency 7

HA113

HA213

Stabilized start rate (V/f,A.bst)

Hb163 Hb263

Free-V/f voltage 7

HA115

HA215

Async. Motor speed response

Hb170 Hb270

Slip compensation P-gain with encoder

HA120

HA220

ASR gain switching mode selection

Hb171 Hb271

Slip compensation I-gain with encoder

HA121

HA221

Gain change time

Hb180 Hb280

HA122

HA222

ASR gain mapping intermediate speed
1-motorHC101 HC201

HA123

HA223

ASR gain mapping intermediate speed
2-motor

HC102 HC202

HA124

HA224

ASR gain mapping maximum speed

HC111 HC211

Boost value at -motor (IM-SLV)

HA125

HA225

ASR gain mapping P-gain, 1-motor

HC114 HC214

Direction reversal protection selection

HA126

HA226

ASR gain mapping I-gain, 1-motor

HC115 HC215

Torque conversion -motor

HA127

HA227

Gain mapping P control -gain, 1-

HC120 HC220

Torque current reference filter time constant

HA128

HA228

ASR gain mapping P-gain 2, -motor

HC121 HC221

Speed feedforward compensation -motor

HA129

HA229

ASR gain mapping I-gain 2, -motor

HC137 HC237

Flux settling -motor

HA130

HA230

Gain mapping P control -gain 2,

HC141 HC241

Modulation factor level 1

HA131

HA231

ASR gain mapping P-gain 3, -motor

HC142 HC242

Modulation factor level 2

HA132

HA232

ASR gain mapping I-gain 3, -motor

Hd102 Hd202

SM(PMM) Motor capacity selection

HA133

HA233

ASR gain mapping P-gain 4, -motor

Hd103 Hd203

SM(PMM) Motor pole selection

HA134

HA234

ASR gain mapping I-gain 4, -motor

Hd104 Hd204

SM(PMM) Base frequency

HA181

HA281

Reserved

Hd105 Hd205

SM(PMM) Maximum frequency

Hb101

Hb201

IM Motor type selectHd106 Hd206

SM(PMM) Motor rated voltage

Hb102

Hb202

IM Motor capacity selectHd108 Hd208

Sync. Motor rated current

Hb103

Hb203

IM motor pole selection

Hd110 Hd210

Sync. Motor constant R

Hb104

Hb204

IM Base frequency

Hd112 Hd212

Sync. Motor constant Ld

Hb105

Hb205

IM Maximum frequency

Hd114 Hd214

Sync. Motor constant Lq

Hb106

Hb206

IM motor rated voltage

Hd116 Hd216

Sync. Motor constant Ke

Hb108

Hb208

IM Motor Rated Current

Hd118 Hd218

Sync. Motor constant J

Hb110

Hb210

Async. Motor constant R1

Hd130 Hd230

SM(PMM) Minimum frequency (switching)

Hb112

Hb212

Async. Motor constant R2

Hd131 Hd231

Sync. Motor no-Load current

Hb114

Hb214

Async. Motor constant L

Hd132 Hd232

SM(PMM) Starting method selection

Hb116

Hb216

Async. Motor constant I0

Hd133 Hd233

SM(PMM) Initial Position Estimation 0V Wait Count

Hb118

Hb218

Async. Motor constant J

Hd134 Hd234

Sync. Motor IMPE detect wait number

Hb130

Hb230

Lowest frequency

Hd135 Hd235

Sync. Motor IMPE detect number

Hb131

Hb231

Reduced voltage start time

Hd136 Hd236

Sync. Motor IMPE voltage gain

Hb140

Hb240

Manual torque boost operation mode selection

Hb141

Hb241

Manual torque boost value

Hd137 Hd237

SM(PMM) Initial position estimation magnetic
pole position offset

9-97
9-97

Output voltage gain
Automatic torque boost voltage compensation
gain
Automatic torque boost slip compensation
gain

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
9.8 PID processing control
9.8.1 PID control

・PID function enables process control of flow rate, air volume, pressure, etc. In addition, HF-620 has two
independent PID functions (PID1/PID2) that can be set individually for PID control.
・When using PID1, set "PID1 selection [AH-01]". When using PID2, set "PID2 selection [AJ-01]" to"Enabled (01)" or "Enabled (with reversing output) (02)", and adjust each related parameter.
・The two PID functions can be switched by the "PID Output Switching 1 [PIO1]" input terminal and used
for motor control.
・PID functions that are not used for motor control can be freely used for external PID calculation that is
not related to the control of inverters.
・While "PID1 disabled [PID]"/"PID2 disabled [PID2]" of the input terminal function is ON, PID function isdisabled and the inverter performs normal frequency-output. The frequency at this time is set to 100 %of the target value setting as the highest frequency.
・PID cascading is also available to connect PID1 operation to PID2 target. This enables moresophisticated PID control such as more stable control and disturbance-suppression.
・The following functions are available in PID1. Please note that it cannot be used in PID2. For details on
the functions, see "Using 9.8.2 PID1".
- Three PID target values/feedback data sets
- Two types of gain settings- PID target value multi-stage switching function- PID feed-forward input source function- PID soft start function- PID sleep function
・When controlling the motor with PID function, "Main speed command selection [AA101]" must be set to"PID calculation (15)".
・"Frequency upper/lower limiter function ([bA101] to [bA103])" operates for the frequency command
after PID calculation. Does not operate against PID target.
・If the acceleration/deceleration time setting is longer than PID operation, output-frequency tracking
may be delayed and PID control may not work well. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration timeshorter.
Pressure gaugePump

HF-620

PID1 target value

Motor
control+-

PID2 target value

+
-

Motor

PID1
External
device

PID2

9-98
9-98

SensorInverter Function

Chapter 9
Basic configuration and operation of PID control■PID control block diagram
Target value
0 to 10V
4 to 20mA
Deviationε+-Feedforward
disable/0 to 10V/4 to 20mA
PID calculation
Kp（1+ 1 +Td･S）
Ti･S+

Manipulated
variableSensorInverter
control

Fs

M＝

Transducer

Feedback 0 to 10V/4 to 20mA
Kp: Proportional gain, Ki: Integral gain (Ki=1/Ti), Kd: Differential gain (Kd=Td)
Ti: Integral time, Td: Derivative time, s: Operator, ε: Deviation■Operation of PID control(1) P action: proportinal gain・Operation in which the manipulated variable of PID command value is proportional to the deviation
between PID target value and the present feedback value (FB value).
Target value changes to step
PID target value

Feedback value

Target value changes to ramp
PID target value

Large
Manipulated
variable

P gainFeedback value
Large

Manipulated
variable

P gain

Small

Small

(2) I action: integral gain
・This is an operation in which the manipulated variable of PID command value is proportional to thetime-integrated value of the deviation between PID target value and the present feedback value (FBvalue).
・Integration can be cleared by "PID1 Integration Reset [PIDC]" and "PID2 Integration Reset [PIDC2]" of
the input terminal function.
・In P operation, when PID target value and FB value approach each other, the manipulated variable
becomes smaller, and it takes time to reach the target value. Therefore, it is supplemented by I
operation.
Target value changes to step

Target value changes to ramp
PID target value

Feedback value

PID target value

Large
Manipulated
variable

I gainFeedback value
Large

Manipulated
variable

I gain

Small

Small

(3) D action: differential gain
・This is an operation in which the manipulated variable of PID command value is proportional to thechange in the deviation between PID target value and the present feedback value (FB value).
・D action has the effect of supplementing the responsiveness of P action and I action, and performs
correction when receiving a disturbance, etc.
Target value changes to step
PID target value

Target value changes to ramp
PID target value

Feedback value
Large

Manipulated
variable

D gainSmall

Feedback value
Large

Manipulated
variable

D gain
Small

9-99
9-99

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.8.2 Use PID1

・Three PID1 can be entered for both PID target value /PID feed back value. Refer to the block diagram
below for an overview.
・PID gains 1 and 2 can be switched by input terminal function "PID gain switching [PRO]".
・Target value 0 to target value 15 can be set as PID target value, and can be switched by inputterminal
function "PID1 multi-stage target value ([SVC1] to [SVC4])".
・Feed-forward control is available to stabilize the disturbance in advance.
・Soft-start function to perform normal speed control for a certain period of time from start of operation
can be used.
・With PID sleep function, the output is stopped when PID output drops or a signal is input. After that,
restart can be performed automatically when the condition is satisfied.
■PID1 block diagram[AH-07]

FA-30

PID1 target value 1[AH-42]

FA-32

PID1 target value 2[AH-46]

FA-34

PID1 target value
operator selection[AH-50]+(01), -(02),×(03), ÷(04)Min. deviation (05)Max. deviation (06)

PID1 target value 3[AH-51]

PID1 deviation monitor

db-30

db-32

PID1 deviation
negative[AH-02]+

PID1 feedback data
operator selection[AH-54]+(01), -(02), ×(03), ÷(04),square root of FB1 (05)square root of FB2 (06)square root of FB1-FB2 (07)mean (08)Min. (09), Max. (10)PID1 feedback data 2[AH-53][db-51]【01】

PID1 feedback data 1[AH-52][db-42]
PID1 target value monitor(after calculation)

PID overdeviation [OD]

00

×(-1)

01

[db-44]
PID1 feedback value monitor(after calculation)

db-34

PID1 feedback data 3
PID feedback compare [FBV]【01】

PID1 integral resetting [PIDC]

PID1 control[AH-70]

P control+
I control+
D control++

PID1 feedforward selection+
db-64
0 command

PID1 selection[AH-01]00[PRO] terminal
PID1 P gain 1
PID1 P gain 2
PID1 I gain 1
PID1 I gain 2
PID1 D gain 1
PID1 D gain 2[AH-61]OFF[AH-64]ON[AH-62]OFF[AH-65]

ON[AH-63]OFF[AH-66]

ON

01
db-61

db-62

db-63

02

[db-50]
PID1 output
monitor
PID output command

Note: In the figure, [ ] and the position of the switch for each parameter indicates the initial value.
Input terminal functions that are not assigned to the input terminal function selection [CA-01] to [CA-08] will be OFF.

9-100
9-100

Inverter Function

Chapter 9・The following shows an example of setting steps when performing PID control.
(e.g.) When simple PID control is performed by entering the target value [VRF] and feedback value [IRF]from the default parameter.
① Set "PID1 selection [AH-01]" to "Enable (01)".
② Set "Main speed command selection [AA101]" to "PID operation (15)".
③ Set the [VRF] jack input (01) to "PID1 target value1 input destination selection [AH-07]."④ Set the [IRF] connector input (02) to "PID1 feedback data 1 input destination selection [AH-51]."⑤ Set PID gain to "PID proportional/integral/differential gain 1 ([AH-61] to [AH-63])".
⑥ Enter the command set in "Operation command selection [AA111]" and begin PID control.

List of PID1 related parameters
・The table below lists the parameters related to PID1. For details of each parameter, please refer to theindividual function description in this section.
■PID1 related monitor
Code

Item

FA-30

PID1 target setpoint 1 setting(monitor)

FA-32

PID1 target setpoint 2 setting(monitor)

FA-34

PID1 setpoint 3 setting (monitor)

db-30
db-32
db-34

PID1 feedback value 1 monitor
PID1 feedback value 2 monitor
PID1 feedback value 3 monitor
PID1 target value monitor(after calculation)
PID1 feedback data monitor(after calculation)

db-42
db-44

Description
Monitor or change the setting of the currently selected
PID1 target 1.
If [FA-30] is changed or saved when the input destinationof target value 1 is parameter setting (=[AH-10]) or PID1
multi-stage target value 1 to 15(=[AH-12] to [AH-40], theset value of the selected target value input destination
will also be changed or saved.
Monitors or changes the settings of the currently
selected PID1 target value-2.
If the target value is set to parameter setting (=[AH-44]),changing/saving [FA-32] will also change/save [AH-44].
Monitor or change the setting of the currently selected
PID1 target value-3.
If the target value is set to parameter setting (=[AH-48]),changing/saving [FA-32] will also change/save [AH-48].
Displays PID1 feedback-value 1.
Displays the feedback-value 2 of PID1.
Displays PID1 feedback-value 3.

Data-100.00 to 100.00 % Note

Displays the target after calculation in [AH-50].
Displays the feedback value after calculation in [AH-54].

db-50

PID1 output monitor

Displays PID1 output.

db-51

PID1 deviation monitor

Displays PID1 deviation.

db-52

PID1 deviation 1 monitor

db-53

PID1 deviation 2 monitor

db-54

PID1 deviation 3 monitor

When [AH-50] is "Deviation minimum. (05)" or"Deviation max. (06)", monitor the three deviations of
PID1.

db-61

Current PID P-gain monitor

Displays the current P gain.

db-62

Current PID I-gain monitor

Displays the current I gain.

0.0 to 3600.0 s

db-63

Current PID D-gain monitor

Displays the current D gain.

0.00 to 100.00 s

db-64

PID feedforward input source
monitor

Displays the feedforward command value.

0.00 to 100.00 %Noter: "PID1 Scale Adjust ([AH-04] to [AH-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Unit Converter Function".

9-101
9-101

-100.00 to 100.00 %-200.00 to 200.00 %0.0 to 100.0

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■PID1 related parameters
Code

AH-01

Item

PID1 enable

AH-02

PID1 deviation minus

AH-03
AH-04
AH-05

PID1 unit selection
Adjust PID1 scale (0%)
PID1 Scale Adjust (100%)
Adjust PID1 scale(decimal point)

AH-06

AH-07

PID1 target value1 input
destination selection

AH-10

PID1 Target1set values

AH-12
AH-14

Multi set-point selection 1
Multi set-point selection 2

AH-16

Multi set-point selection 3

AH-18

Multi set-point selection 4

AH-20

PID1 multi-stage target value 5

AH-22

PID1 multi-stage target value 6

AH-24
AH-26

PID1 multi-stage target value 7
PID1 multi-stage target value 8

AH-28

PID1 multi-stage target value 9

AH-30

PID1 multi-stage target value 10

AH-32

PID1 multi-stage target value 11

AH-34

PID1 multi-stage target value 12

AH-36
AH-38

PID1 multi-stage target value 13
PID1 multi-stage target 14

AH-40

PID1 multi-stage target value 15
PID1 target value 2 input
destination selection

AH-42

Description
Disabled

00

Enabled:Even if the command by PID operation becomes
negative, it will not be outputting in the reverse
direction.

01

Enabled (with reverse output):
When the command by PID calculation becomes
negative, it will be outputting in the reverse direction.
Disabled
Enabled: Deviation is the difference between the target
value and the feedback data multiplied by (-1).

00
02
00
01

00

01
0
-10000 to 10000
10000
0 to 4None00

Terminal [VRF]01

Terminal [IRF]

02

Parameter setting
RS485 Setting

07
08

Option09

Pulse input
When "Parameter setting (07)" is selected as PID1 target
value 1 input destination, set PID1 target value 1.

12

Set the multi-stage target value 1 to 15.

Same as [AH-07]

PID1 target 2 set values

When "Parameter setting (07)" is selected as PID1 target
value 2 input destination, set PID1 target value 2.

AH-46

PID1 target value 3 input
destination selection

Same as [AH-07]

AH-48

PID1 target 3 set values

PID1 Target 1 Operator Selection

Initialvalue

00 to 58

Change the units and scale of somemonitors/parameters of PID1. For more information,please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".

AH-44

AH-50

Data

When "Parameter setting (07)" is selected as PID1 target
value 3 input destination, set PID1 target value 3.
Addition

0.00

00 to 1200

-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

0.00

00 to 1200

-100.00 to
100.00 % Note
01
02

Multiplication

03

Division04

Deviation minimum05

Maximum deviation

06

9-102
9-102

07

-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

Subtraction

Note: "PID1 Scale Adjust ([AH-04] to [AH-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Unit Converter Function".

2

0.00

01

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

AH-51
AH-52
AH-53

Item

PID1 feedback 1/2/3 input
source selection

AH-54

PID1 feedback data operator
selection

AH-60

PID1 gain switching mode
selection

AH-61
AH-62
AH-63
AH-64
AH-65
AH-66

PID1 proportional gain 1
PID1 integral gain 1
PID1 differential gain 1
PID1 proportional gain 2
PID1 integral gain 2
PID1 differential gain 2

AH-67

PID1 gain switching time

AH-70

PID1 feedforward selection

AH-71

PID1 variable range

AH-72

Excessive PID1 deviation

AH-73
AH-74

PID1feedback
compare Signal OFF
PID1 feedback
compare Signal ON

AH-75

PID soft start function enable

AH-76

PID soft start target level

AH-78
AH-80

AH-81

AH-82

AH-85

Acceleration time setting for
PID soft start function
PID soft start time

PID soft start error detection
enablePID soft start error detectionlevel
PID sleep trigger selection

Description

Data

None

00

Terminal [VRF]01

Terminal [IRF]02

RS485 Setting

08

Option09

Pulse input
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
FB1 square root
FB2 square root
FB1-FB2 square root
Average
Minimum
Maximum
Constant gain (only gain 1 is used)[PRO] Switching by input terminal
Set PID proportional gain 1.
Sets PID integral gain 1.
Set PID differential gain 1.
Set PID proportional gain 2.
Set PID integral gain 2.
Set PID differential gain 2.
[PRO] Sets the time from when the input terminal operates
until the gain switches.
None
Terminal [VRF]
Terminal [IRF]
PID output-variable range is limited by PID target ± thissetting. Set the maximum frequency as 100% in % units.
Sets the target value of PID1 and the level at which thedeviation of the feedback data is judged to be excessive.
For more information, please refer to "Signaling of 9.8.4 PID
function".

02
00
00

12
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
00
01
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 3600.0 s
0.00 to 100.00 s
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 3600.0 s
0.00 to 100.00 s

1.0
1.0
0.00
0.0
0.0
0.00

0 to 10000 ms

100

00
01
02

00

01

00

0.00

3.00
0.00 to 100.00 %100.00

Sets the tolerance of PID1 feedback data.
For more information, please refer to "Signaling of 9.8.4 PID
function".
Disabled
Enabled
Sets the target value in % for the soft-start section assumingthat the maximum frequency is 100%.

Initial
value

0.00
00
01

00

0.00 to 100.00 %100.00

Set the acceleration time at soft start.

0.00 to 3600.00 s

30.00

Sets the duration of PID soft start function.
Disable0.00 to 600.00 s
00

0.00

Enabled (error output):
When the start error is judged, the motor trips with "PID
start error [E120]".
Enabled (warning):
When the start error is judged, "PID soft start error [SSE]"
will be ON.
Sets the start error status when PID soft start function is
activated.
DisableOutput drop: Starts sleep operation when output drops[SLEP] Pin: Starts operation on the rising edge of the[SLEP] inputpin

9-103
9-103

01
00
02
0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

00
01

0

02

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

AH-86

PID sleep start level

When [AH-85] is set to "Output Drop (01)",
Sets the frequency at which the sleep operation starts.

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

AH-87

PID sleep active time

Sets the waiting time before the machine enters sleep mode.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

AH-88
AH-89
AH-90
AH-91
AH-92

AH-93

Enable set-point boost
before PID sleep
Set-point boost time before
PID sleep
Set-point boost value
before PID sleep
Minimum RUN time before
PID sleep
Minimum active time of PID
sleep

PID wake trigger selection

AH-94

PID wake start level

AH-95

PID wake start time

AH-96

PID wake start deviation
value

Disable00

Enabled: PID target is increased (boosted) prior to starting thesleep operation.

01

Sets the time for the boost before the sleep operation starts.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

0.00 to 100.00 %0.00

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

Sets the amount of addition (boosting amount) to PID target
prior to starting the sleep operation.
Until [AH-91] elapses after starting, the machine will not go
into sleep operation even if the conditions are met.
After the machine enters the sleep state, the machineremains in the sleep state until [AH-92] elapses, even if theconditions are met.
Deviation amount:
If the status where the deviation is [AH-96] or more
continues for [AH-95] or longer, the sleep status iscanceled.
Feedback drop:
If the status below [AH-94] for the feedback data continues
for [AH-95] or longer, the sleep status is canceled.
[WAKE] Terminals:[WAKE] Sleep mode is canceled after [AH-95] time elapses
after ON of the input terminals is input.
When [AH-93] is set to Feedback Low (02), set the feedback
to cancel the sleep operation.

00

01

02

01

03
0.00 to 100.00 %0.00

Sets the standby time for canceling sleep operation.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

When [AH-93] is set to "Deviation amount (01)", set thedeviation between the target value and the feed-back value
for opening the sleep operation.

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

9-104
9-104

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■PID1related I/O terminal functions
Code

Item

CA-01 to Input terminal
CA-08 function

Description

Data

PID1 disabled [PID]:
When this signal is turned ON, PID operation is disabled and the normal
frequency operation is performed.

041

PID1 integration resetting [PIDC]:
When this signal is turned ON, the integral of PID control is cleared to 0.

042

PID1 multi-stage target value 1 to 4 ([SVC1] to [SVC4]):
By combining [SVC1] to [SVC4], PID1 target value 1 is switched to multistage target value 1 to 15.

051([SVC1])052([SVC2])053([SVC3])054([SVC4])

PID gain switching [PRO]:The gain 1 and gain 2 of PID1 can be switched by ON/OFF this signal.
The present PID gain can be checked on the monitor below.
"PID present P gain monitor [db-61]""PID present I gain monitor [db-62]""PID present D gain monitor [db-63]"055

PID output switching 1[PIO1]:This ON/OFF can be used to switch between PID1 and PID2.

056

SLEEP condition-satisfied [SLEP]:
When "PID Sleep Condition Selection [AH-85]" is set to "[SLEP] Terminal(02)", the sleep function is started by this signal.

058

WAKE condition-satisfied [WAKE]:
When "PID Wake Condition Selection [AH-93]" is set to "[WAKE] Terminal(03)", the sleep function is canceled by this signal.
Over deviation for PID control [OD]:This signal is turned ON when PID1 deviation exceeds the set level of"PID1 deviation excess level [AH-72]".
CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

045 Note

046 Note

PID soft start error [SSE]:
When "PID start error determination execution selection [AH-81]" is set to"Enabled (Warning) (02)", if a start error is judged, this signal is turned ON.

093

9-105
9-105

-

059

PID Feedback Compare [FBV]:PID1 Feedback Value and "PID1 Feedback Compare Signal ON/OFF Level([AH-73], [AH-74])" are compared to perform signal ON/OFF.

Note: For more information, please refer to "Signaling of 9.8.4 PID function".

Initial
value

002
001
017

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID1 target selection

・If "PID1 target value 1 input destination selection [AH-07]" is "PID1 target value 1 set value [AH-10]","PID1 multi-stage target value 1 to 15([AH-12] to [AH-40]", PID1 target value 1 input destination canalso be changed/saved by changing/saving "PID1 target value 1 set (monitor) [FA-30]".
・When "PID1 target value 2/3 input destination selection ([AH-42], [AH-46])" is "PID1 target value 2/3
setting value ([AH-44]/[AH-48])," it is also possible to change/save PID1 target value 2/3 input
destination by changing/saving "PID1 target value 2 setting (monitor)[FA-32]" and "PID1 target value 3
setting (monitor)[FA-34]".
e.g. If [AH-07] is referring to [AH-10], the [AH-10] setting will also be applied to [FA-30].
If [FA-30] is changed in this condition, [AH-10] is changed in the same way.
・If PID target value can be changed with [FA-30]/[FA-32]/[FA-34], the value will be reflected as theentered value just by changing the value with dialing on the control panel. However, if it is not saved,
it will return to before the change by turning on the power again. If PID target value cannot be changed,[FA-30]/[FA-32]/[FA-34] is the target value monitor.
・To set the target value input to PID1 target value 1 only, set the target value 2/3 input destination
selection [AH-42]/[AH-46] to 00 (none), and set PID1 target value 1 operator selection [AH-50] to 01(addition).
・Select "None (00)" for the target value and feedback value that are not used.
・Data set to 00 (none) in the input destination selection is excluded from the calculation target.
・"Frequency upper/lower limiter function ([bA101] to [bA103])" operates for the frequency command
after PID calculation. Does not operate against PID target.
■Operation of PID1 target operator selection [AH-50]
・[AH-50] The operation changes between (01) to (04) and between (05) and (06).
(1) When [AH-50] is "addition, subtraction, multiplication, division ((01) to (04))":The calculation target is target value 1 and target value 2. Multiplication (03) and division (04) arecalculated as follows. The operation result is limited within the range of-100.00 to 100.00%.
e.g. When target value 1 = 20% and target value 2 = 40%
Multiplication: 20 × 40% = 20 × 0.4 = 8%, Division: 20/40% = 20/0.4 = 50%■PID1 target value selection block diagram when [AH-50] is 01 to 04[AH-12] to [AH-40]
PID1 multi-stage target value1 to 15[AH-10]
PID1 target value 1
parameter setting (07)Analog input VRF, IRF (01, 02)
RS485 communication (08)Option (09)Pulse input (12)[AH-44]
PID1 target value 2
parameter setting (07)

PID1 target
value 1
input source
selection[AH-07](00 to 12)

Multi- stage
target value
051 to 054[SVC1-4]【07】(00: Disabled)
PID1 target
value 2
input source
selection[AH-42](00 to 12)

PID1 target value 2
setting (monitor)[FA-32][AH-48]

PID1 operator selection[AH-50](Calculation of target value 1
and target value 2)
01 (addition)
02 (subtraction),
03 (Multiplication)
04 (Division)
【01】

【00】
PID1 target value 3
setting (monitor)[FA-32](00: Disabled)

PID1 target value 3
Parameter setting (07)

PID1 target value 1
setting (monitor) [FA-30]

PID1 target
value 3
input source
selection[AH-46](00 to 12)【00】[db-42]
PID1 target value monitor(after calculation)
PID1 target value(00: Disabled)

Note: The values in [ ] in the figure are initial values.
Input terminal functions that are not assigned to the input terminal function selection [CA-01] to [CA-08] will be OFF.

9-106
9-106

Inverter Function

Chapter 9(2) When [AH-50] is "Deviation min. (05)" and "Deviation max. (06)":
・When [AH-50] is "Deviation min. (05)" or "Deviation max. (06)", deviation 1 to deviation 3 are
calculated as follows, and then PID operation is performed using the minimum or maximum
deviation.
(deviation 1) = (target value 1)-(feedback value 1)(deviation 2) = (target value 2)-(feedback value 2)(deviation 3) = (target value 3)-(feedback value 3)
・PID1 target and PID1 feedback data used for PID1 related functions are the calculation source
data for deviations selected in the operation. Each is displayed in "PID1 Target Monitor (after
calculation) [db-42]" and "PID Feedback Data Monitor (after calculation) [db-44]".
・When 05 (minimum deviation) or 06 (maximum deviation) is selected in [AH-50], operator selection[AH-54] is disabled.
■PID1 target/feedback value selection block diagram when [AH-50] is 05 or 06＋[db-42]

PID1 target value 1

PID1 feedback value 1

PID1 target value 2[db-52]
PID1deviation1 monitor＋-

PID1 deviation 2 monitor

PID1 feedback value 2

PID1 target value 3[db-53]Calculation＋

PID1 feedback value 3

Code
FA-30
FA-32
FA-34
db-42

AH-07
AH-42
AH-46

PID1 desired value 1/2/3
Input source selection

AH-10

PID1 Target 1 set value

AH-44
AH-48

PID1 Target 2 set value
PID1 Target 3 set value

AH-50

PID1 Target 1 Operator
Selection

PID1 target value monitor(after calculation)[db-44]
PID1 feedback value monitor(after calculation)

PID1 deviation[db-54]
PID1 deviation 3 monitor

Item
PID1 target value 1 setting(monitor)
PID1 target value 2 setting(monitor)
PID1 target value 3 setting(monitor)
PID1 target value monitor(after calculation)

PID1 target
value operator
selection[AH-50]Min. deviation(05)
Max. deviation(06)

Description

Monitors the currently selected PID1 target or changes
the settings.

Data

Initialvalue-100.00 to
100.00 % Note-

Displays the target after calculation in [AH-50].
None
Terminal [VRF]00
01

Terminal [IRF]

02

Parameter setting

07

RS485 Setting

08

Option09

Pulse input

12

Set PID1 target value when "Parameter setting (07)" isselected as PID1 target value input destination.
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Deviation minimum
Maximum deviation

Note: PID1 Scale Adjust ([AH-04] to [AH-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".

9-107
9-107

07
00
00

-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

0.00

01
02
03
04
05
06

01

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID target value multi-stage switching function

・PID1 multi-stage target value 1 to 15 can be selected by assigning "PID1 multi-stage target value([SVC1] to [SVC4]) (051 to 054)" to "Input terminal function selection [CA-01] to [CA-08]".
・The wait time until terminal input is confirmed can be set in "Multi-stage input confirmation time [CA55]". The transition state during terminal switching operation can be prevented from being adopted.
・If there is no change, the setting of [CA-55] will elapse and the setting will be confirmed. Please notethat the input response will be slower if the settling time is increased.
■Operation table
Multi-stage
target point
Selection 0
Target value 1
Target value 2
Target value 3
Target value 4
Target value 5
Target value 6
Target value 7
Target value 8
Target value 9
Target value 10
Target value 11
Target value 12
Target value 13
Target value 14
Target value 15■operation grafh

SVC4

SVC3

SVC2

SVC1

Parameter

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

AH-10 Note
AH-12
AH-14
AH-16
AH-18
AH-20
AH-22
AH-24
AH-26
AH-28
AH-30
AH-32
AH-34
AH-36
AH-38
AH-40

11
10
9
4

0
Target
value

3
2
1

12
13
14
15

5

0
6
7
8

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

SVC1
SVC2

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

SVC3
SVC4

Note: When "PID1 target value1 input destination selection [AH-07] = "Parameter setting (07)".
When [SVC1] tp [SVC4] is set to all OFF, PID1 target 1 follows the setting of [AH-07].

Code

FA-30

Item

PID1 target 1 setting(Monitor)

Description
Monitor or change the setting of the currently selected PID1
target 1.
If [FA-30] is changed or saved when the input destination oftarget value 1 is parameter setting (=[AH-10]) or PID1 multistage target value 1 to 15(=[AH-12] to [AH-40], the set
value of the selected target value input destination will also
be changed or saved.
When "Parameter setting (07)" is selected as PID1 target
value input destination, set PID1 target value 1.

Data

Initialvalue-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

AH-10

PID1 Target1set values

AH-12 to
AH-40

PID1 Multi-stage Target
Value 1 to 15

Set the multi-stage target value 1 to 15.

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

PID1 multi-stage target value 1 to 4 ([SVC1] to [SVC4]):
By combining [SVC1] to [SVC4], PID1 target value 1 isswitched to multi-stage target value 1 to 15.

051([SVC1])052([SVC2])053([SVC3])054([SVC4])

-

CA-55

Multistage input
determination time

Set the time until the frequency is fixed when the multispeed, multi-step position command, or multi-step target
value is switched.

０ to 2000 ms

0Note: "PID1 Scale Adjust ([AH-04] to [AH-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".

9-108
9-108

0.00

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID1 feedback data selection

・To set the feedback data input to PID1 feedback data 1 only, set "Feedback data 2/3 input destination
selection ([AH-52], [AH-53])" to "None (00)", and set "PID1 feedback data operator selection [AH-54]" to"Addition (01)".
・When (01) to (07) is selected in [AH-54], feedback data 1 and feedback data 2 become calculation
targets. When (08) to (10) is selected in [AH-54], feedback data 1 to 3 become calculation targets.
・The [AH-54] operation is limited to a range between-100.00% and 100.00%.
・Select "None (00)" to select the input destination of feedback data that is not used.
・The data set to "None (00)" in the input destination selection is excluded from the calculation target.
・The calculation of "PID1 Feedback Data Operator Selection [AH-54]" is enabled only when (01) to (04)are selected in "PID1 Target Value 1 Operator Selection [AH-50]". When [AH-50] is set to (05) or (06),the calculation of [AH-54] is not executed.
■Feedback data selection block diagram

Analog input VRF, IRF (01, 02)
RS485 communication (08)Option (09)Pulse input (12)Feedback data 1
destination
selection[AH-51]00, 01, 02
08, 09, 12

db-30

【02】

PID1 feedback data
operator selection [AH-54](00: Disabled)
Feedback data 2
destination
selection[AH-52]00, 01, 02
08, 09, 12

addition(01)】,subtraction(02)multiplication(03), division(04)square root of FB1(05),square root of FB2(06),square root of FB1-FB2(07)
db-32

【00】
(00: Disabled)db-34

Feedback data 3
destination
selection[AH-53]00, 01, 02
08, 09, 12

mean of FB1 to FB3(08)Min. FB1 to FB3(09)Max. FB1 to FB3(10)01 to 07 are FB1,FB2、
08 to 10 are FB1,FB2,FB3
calculation target
Calculation[db-44]
PID1 feedback value monitor【00】(after calculation)(00: Disabled)
PID1 feedback value

Note: The values in [ ] in the figure are initial values.

9-109
9-109

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

Item

Description

db-30

PID1 feedback value 1 monitor

Displays PID1 feedback-value 1.

db-32

PID1 feedback value 2 monitor

Displays the feedback-value 2 of PID1.

db-34

PID1 feedback value 3 monitor

Displays PID1 feedback-value 3.

db-44

PID1 feedback data monitor(after calculation)

Displays the feedback value
after calculation in [AH-54].
None
Terminal [VRF]
Terminal [IRF]
RS485 Setting
OptionPulse input
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
FB1 square root
FB2 square root
FB1-FB2 square root
Average
Minimum
Maximum

AH-51
AH-52
AH-53

PID1 feedback 1/2/3 input source selection

AH-54

PID1 Feedback Data Operator Selection

Data

Initialvalue-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

-

00
01
02
08
09
12
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10

02
00
01

01

Note: "PID1 Scale Adjust ([AH-04] to [AH-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".

PID1 reverse output
・In normal PID control, if PID operation result is negative, the inverter limits the frequency command by
0Hz without outputting it in negative. When "PID1 selection [AH-01]" is set to "Valid (with reverse
rotation output) (02)", the frequency command can be output in the reverse rotation direction if PID
operation result is negative.
・If "PID1 selection [AH-01]" is set to "Valid (with reverse output) (02)", the output limit due to "PID1
variable range [AH-71]" is extended to the minus direction.
Code

AH-01

Item

Description

Data
00

PID1 enable

Disabled
Enabled:Even if the command by PID operation becomes negative, it will not be outputting in
the reverse direction.
Enabled (with reverse output):
When the command by PID calculation becomes negative, it will be outputting in thereverse direction.

9-110
9-110

Initial
value

01
00
02

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID1 deviation ± switching output

・PID1 deviation ± can be switched for outputting.
・PID1 deviation is calculated as (PID target value-FB value) when "PID1 deviation minus [AH-02]" is"disabled (00)". When [AH-02] is "Enabled (01)", PID1 error is the same as (FB-PID target value).
・This function is used when PID target and FB deviations do not match the inverter command due to thesensor's properties.
(e.g.) A compressor for a refrigerator whose temperature sensor specification is-20 to 100℃ is
controlled.
If feedback data is received at analog voltage input 0 to 10V and the target value is 0°C, if thepresent temperature is 10°C (FB value) > (PID target value), the speed will decrease undernormal PID control.
In such cases, [AH-02] =01 can increase the inverter speed.

PID target value

PID1 deviation
negative[AH-02]+00-

Feedback data

PID calculation

01

×(-1)

PID1 deviation monitor[db-51]

Note: The switches of the parameters in the figure show the initial values.

Code

Item

AH-02

PID1 deviation minus

Description

Data

Disabled
Enabled: Deviation is the difference between the target value and thefeedback data multiplied by (-1).

Initial
value

00
01

00

PID feed-forward input source function
・By setting the setting of "PID1 feedforward selection [AH-70]" to other than "none (00)", thefeedforward input can be enabled and the input destination can be selected.
・Feed-forward control is enabled only in PID1.

Analog input VRF, IRF(01, 02)

Note: The values in [ ] in the figure are initial values.

Code

AH-70

PID1
Feedforward
select [AH-70](00 to 02)

PID feedforward input source monitor【00】

PID feedforward input source value(00: Disabled)

Item

PID1 feedforward selection[db-64]

Description
None: Feed forward disabled[VRF] Terminal input:
Input from the [VRF] connector is used for feedforward.
[IRF] Terminal input:
Input from the [IRF] connector is used for feedforward.

9-111
9-111

Data

Initial
value

00
01
02

00

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID1 variable-range restriction

・For PID1 output. Limits the output to a variable range based on PID1 target.
When [AH-71] PID1 is set to 0.00%, the limiting function is disabled.
・Set "PID1 variable range [AH-71]" with the maximum frequency set to 100%. PID1 output is limited
within PID1 target ±[AH-71].
PID output(%)
PID1 output range

PID1target value
PID1variable range[AH-71]
PID1 valuable range[AH-71]
Time(s)

Code

Item

Description

AH-71

PID1 variable range

PID output-variable range is limited by PID target ± this setting.
Set the maximum frequency in %, where 100%.

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to100.00 %0.00

PID1 Integration reset function
・This function clears the integral of PID1 operation. Please do this when PID1 is not operating, when the"PID1 integration reset [PIDC]" inputterminal is turned ON.
・If the "PID1 Integration Reset [PIDC]" input terminal is turned ON during PID1 operation, theaccumulated value that has been added to PID1 output command will be cleared, causing PID1 output
command value to fluctuate suddenly, leading to an overcurrent error, etc.
Code

Item

Description

Data

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

PID1 integration resetting [PIDC]:
When this signal is turned ON, the integral of PID control is cleared to 0.

042

PID1 disable function
・PID1 disabled [PID] The operation of PID1 is temporarily disabled by turning ON the inputterminal, and
it is outputted according to the frequencycommand.
・When PID1 is disabled, the frequency command is set assuming that PID1 target value of 100% is thehighest frequency.
Code

Item

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

Description
PID1 disabled [PID]:
When this signal is turned ON, PID operation is disabled and the normal
frequency operation is performed.

9-112
9-112

Data
041

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID1 gain switching/gain adjusting■ PID1 gain switching

・PID gain can be switched between Gain 1 and Gain 2 by ON/OFF "PID gain switching [PRO]".
・[PRO] When using the inputterminal, set "PID1 Gain Switching Method Selection [AH-60]" to "[PRO]Terminal Switching (01)".
P control+
I control

PID deviation++

PID operation

D control

Proportional gain 1[AH-61]
Proportional gain 2[AH-64]
Integral time constan1[AH-62][PRO] terminal
OFF
db-62

db-63

OFF

Integral time constan2[AH-65]

ON

Derivative gain 1[AH-63]

OFF

Derivative gain 2[AH-66]

db-61

ON

ON

・PID gain is continuously switched at the time of "PID1 gain switching time [AH-67]".
The gains of PID1 used can be checked in "PID present P/I/D gain monitor ([db-61] to [db-63])".
ON[PRO] Input
Gain 2Gain 1[AH-67][AH-67]■ PID1 gain adjusting・When PID1 function does not respond stably, adjust as described below.
・If the acceleration/deceleration time setting is long, the output frequency tracking may be delayed andcontrol may not work well. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time shorter.
Phenomena

Example of remedy

・Even if PID target value is changed, the output responses slowly and thefeedback value changes slowly.

To "PID1 proportional gain 1/2([AH-61], [AH-64])
Raise it.

・Feedback value changes quickly and does not stabilize.
・Overshoot and hunting occur

To "PID1 proportional gain 1/2([AH-61], [AH-64])
Decrease it.

・The feedback value vibrates slowly.
・It takes time for the operation to stabilize.

To "PID1 integral gain 1/2([AH-62], [AH-65])
Raise it.

・PID target value and the feed-back value do not agree well.

To "PID1 integral gain 1/2([AH-62], [AH-65])
Decrease it.

・The response is slow even if the proportional gain is increased.
・Fine hunting occurs.

To "PID1 differential gain 1/2([AH-63] and [AH-66]"
Raise it.

・The reaction by the disturbance becomes large, it takes time to stabilize.

To "PID1 differential gain 1/2([AH-63] and [AH-66]"
Decrease it.

9-113
9-113

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

Item

Description

Data

Constant gain (only gain 1 is used)

00[PRO] Switching by input terminal

01

Initial
value

AH-60

PID1 gain switching mode
selection

AH-61

PID1 proportional gain 1

Set PID proportional gain 1.

0.0 to 100.0

1.0

AH-62

PID1 integral gain 1

Sets PID integration gain 1.

0.0 to 3600.0 s

1.0

AH-63

PID1 derivative action gain 1

Sets PID derivative gain 1.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

AH-64

PID1 proportional gain 2

Set PID proportional gain 2.

0.0 to 100.0

0.0

AH-65

PID1 integral gain 2

Sets PID integration gain 2.

0.0 to 3600.0 s

0.0

AH-66

PID1 derivative action gain 2

Sets PID derivative gain 2.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

0 to 10000 ms

100

055

-

AH-67

PID1 Gain switching time

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function[PRO] Sets the time from when the input terminal
operates until the gain switches.
PID gain switching [PRO]:The gain 1 and gain 2 of PID1 can be switched by
ON/OFF this signal.
The present PID gain can be checked on the monitor
below.
"PID present P gain monitor [db-61]""PID present I Gain monitor [db-62]""PID present D Gain monitor [db-63]"

00

PID1 target value1 remote control function ([UP]/[DWN]/[UDC] input terminal function)
・The remote control function is used to ON the "Remote control speedup [UP](020)" or "Remote control
deceleration [DWN](021)" input terminal to increase or decrease the target 1 of the present PID1.
・This function is enabled when PID1 target setpoint 1 destination is as follows.
- When "PID1 target value1 input destination selection [AH-07]" is "Parameter setting (07)".
- When PID1 target value 1 destination is a multi-stage target value command.
- For "PID1 target value1 input destination selection [AH-07]" of "[VRF] terminal input (01)" or "[IRF]
terminal input (02)"Analog input, when the "Analog command hold [AHD]" input terminal is ON.
・When [UP]/[DWN] memory selection [CA-61] is "Save (01)", PID1 target value 1 command value after[UP]/[DWN] is stored in the drive when the power is turned off and when the command destination isswitched.
・[UP]/[DWN] The acceleration/deceleration time when the inputterminal is ON follows "[UP]/[DWN]
Acceleration time for function [CA-64]"/"[UP]/[DWN] Deceleration time for function [CA-66]".
・When the "Remote control data clear [UDC](022)" input terminal is turned ON, PID1 target value 1
command value adjusted by the [UP]/[DWN] input terminal will be the value originally stored prior toadjustment by the [UP]/[DWN] input terminal or 0Hz according to the setting of "UP/DWN [UDC]
terminal mode selection [CA-62].
・Do not ON/OFF the [UP]/[DWN] connector or operate dialing on the control panel immediately after
turning off the power. The changed PID1 target value1 command may not be stored correctly.
・Refer to "9.2.16 Increasing/Decreasing the Frequency Command by Remote Control" for detailed
information on the operations at input terminal functions "Remote Control Acceleration [UP]", "Remote
Control Deceleration [DWN]", "Remote Control Data Clearing [UDC]" and "Analog Command Hold
[AHD]".

9-114
9-114

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

Item

CA-60

[UP]/[DWN]
UP/DWN overwrite
target selection

CA-61[UP]/[DWN] data
save enable

CA-62

CA-64

CA-66

[UP]/[DWN][UDC] Pin Mode
Selection[UP]/[DWN]
Acceleration time
setting for
UP/DWN function[UP]/[DWN]
Deceleration time
setting for
UP/DWN function

Description

Data

Overrides the frequency command value.
It is overwritten to PID1 target value 1 (PID1 target value 1 ([AH-10] or [FA30]), multi-stage target value 1 to 15([AH-11] to [AH-40] by parametersetting, and [AHD] hold command value *1 of analogue input.
Not saved: PID1 target 1, which was accelerated/decelerated by [UP]/[DWN]
is not saved in the internal-memory when the power is turned off
and when switching the command destination.
Saving: When the power is turned off or when switching the commanddestination, PID1 target 1 that was accelerated/decelerated by[UP]/[DWN] is saved in the internal-memory.
Cleared to 0Hz:0Hz.

00 Note
01

00

00
00
01
00

Saved data: Use [UP]/[DWN] to change the saved data to the previous saved
data.

01

00

[UP]/[DWN] Set the acceleration time for the function.
0.00 to
10.00
3600.00 s[UP]/[DWN] Set the deceleration time for the function.
Remote control speedup [UP]:When this terminal is ON, PID1 target value1 command is accelerated.
Remote control deceleration [DWN]:
When this terminal is ON, PID1 target value1 command is decelerated.
Remote control data clear [UDC]:
When this terminal is turned ON, PID1 target value1 command is cleared.
The value at clearing follows the setting of [CA-62].

CA-01 to Input terminal
CA-08 function

Initial
value

020
021

-

022

Note: For details, refer to "9.2.16 Increasing/Decreasing Frequency Command by Remote Control."PID soft start function■ PID soft start function
・To use this function, set PID1 Control to Enable ([AH-01]=01,02]) and set "PID soft start function
selection [AH-75]" to "Enable (01)".
・When this function is started, the actuator accelerates with PID soft start acceleration period [AH-78]
until PID soft start target level [AH-76] is reached.
・After the time set in "PID soft start time [AH-80]" has elapsed, the unit automatically shifts to PID
control.
・PID soft start is only available in PID1.
Output frequency
PID soft starttarget level [AH-76]
Acceleration according to [AH-78]
PID operation

Code

PID soft start time [AH-80]

Item

Time
ON

Description

Data

Disabled

00

Enabled

01

Initial
value

AH-75

PID soft start function enable

AH-76

PID soft start target level

Sets the target value for the soft-start interval in % units,
assuming the maximum frequency is 100%.

0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00

AH-78

Acceleration time setting for PID
soft start function

Set the acceleration time at soft start.

0.00 to 3600.00 s 30.00

AH-80

PID soft start time

Sets the duration of PID soft start function.

0.00 to 600.00 s

9-115
9-115

00

0.00

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■ PID soft start error detection

・This function is intended to detect damage to the piping such as water leakage.
・If PID soft start time [AH-80] has elapsed and FB value is lower than the "PID start error determinationlevel [AH-82]", it is judged as abnormal.
・If it is judged to be abnormal, the abnormal operation changes according to the setting of "PID start error
judgment execution selection [AH-81]".
- When [AH-81] is set to "Disabled (00)":
Do nothing.
- When [AH-81] is set to Enabled (Error Out) (01):
Trip at "PID start error [E120]" when the set time of [AH-80] has elapsed.
- When [AH-81] is set to "Enabled (Warning) (02)":
PID soft start error [SSE] ON the output terminal function when the [AH-80] setting elapses.
[SSE] The signal remains ON while the drive is running.
Feedback value
OK

PID start error
threshold [AH-82]

NG
Abnormal occurrence

Output frequency
Soft starttarget level [AH-76]
Acceleration according to [AH-78]
Time

Depending on the setting of [AH-81],
error by [E120],[AL] Output[SSE] Output

ONSoft start time [AH-80]

Code

AH-81

Item

Description

Data
00

PID soft start error
detection enable

Disabled
Enabled (error output):
In "PID start error error [E120]" at start error judgment
The motor trips.
Enabled (warning):
When the start error is judged, "PID soft start error [SSE]" will be ON.

01

Initial
value

00

02

AH-82

PID soft start error
detection level

Sets the start error status when PID soft start function is activated.

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

PID soft start error [SSE]:
When "PID start error determination execution selection [AH-81]"
is set to "Enabled (Warning) (02)", if a start error is judged, thissignal is turned ON.

093

002
001
017

9-116
9-116

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID sleep function■ PID sleep function

・To use this function, set "PID sleep condition selection [AH-85]" to "Output drop (01)" or "SLEP terminal(02)".
・You can change the start and release times and levels of sleep operations to suit your needs.
・To cancel PID sleep state, you can select "Deviation (01)", "Feedback Reduction (02)" or "WAKETerminal (03)" of "PID Wake Condition Selection [AH-93]".
・When canceling PID sleep with deviation, even if ± of PID deviation is switched by setting "PID1
deviation minus [AH-02]" to "Enabled (01)," it will be canceled only when PID deviation expands to plus
and PID output becomes 0 or more. For example, if the target level is set to 0 during sleep and PID
output=0 continues, the sleep mode cannot be canceled.
・PID sleep function is available only in PID1.
■ PID sleep setting
Code

AH-85

Item

PID sleep trigger
selection

AH-86

PID sleep start level

AH-87

PID sleep active time

CA-01 toInput terminal function
CA-08

Description

Data

Disabled
Output drop: Starts sleep operation when output drops[SLEP] Pin: Starts operation on the rising edge of the [SLEP]
inputpin
Set the frequency at which the sleep operation starts when[AH-85] is set to "Low output (01)".

00
01

Initial
value

00

02
0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

Sets the waiting time before the machine enters sleep mode.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

SLEEP condition-satisfied [SLEP]:
When "PID Sleep Condition Selection [AH-85]" is set to"[SLEP] Terminal (02)", the sleep function is started by thissignal.

058-

Description

Data

Initialvalue■ PID wake setting
Code

AH-93

Item

PID wake trigger
selection

AH-94

PID wake start level

AH-95

PID wake start time

Deviation amount:
If the status where the deviation is [AH-96] or more continues
for [AH-95] or longer, the sleep status is canceled.
Feedback drop:
If the status below [AH-94] for the feedback data continues for[AH-95] or longer, the sleep status is canceled.
[WAKE] Terminals:[WAKE] Sleep mode is canceled after [AH-95] time elapses after
ON of the input terminals is input.
When [AH-93] is set to Feedback Low (02), set the feedback tocancel the sleep operation.

01

02

01

03
0.00 to 100.00 %0.00

Sets the standby time for canceling sleep operation.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

PID wake startdeviation value

When [AH-93] is set to "Deviation amount (01)", set the deviation
between the target value and the feed-back value for opening thesleep operation.

0.00 to 100.00 %0.00

CA-01 to Input terminal
CA-08 function

WAKE condition-satisfied [WAKE]:
When "PID Wake Condition Selection [AH-93]" is set to "[WAKE]
Terminal (03)", the sleep function is canceled by this signal.

059

-

AH-96

9-117
9-117

Inverter Function

Chapter 9(e.g. 1)
・[AH-85] Sleep start: Output drop (01)When the output frequency drops below the "Sleep Start Level [AH-86]" level continuously for the time
set to "Sleep Operation Time [AH-87]", the machine enters the sleep operation.
・[AH-93] Sleep release: Deviation (01)When PID deviation exceeds the "Wake starting deviation quantity [AH-96]" continuously for the time
set in "Wake operation time [AH-95]", the sleep cancel operation will be started. The [AH-02] setting
can be set to "Disable (00)" or "Enable (01)." However, be sure that the relation between the target
setpoint and the feed-back value expands PID output in the positive direction.
Feedback value

Wake operating time
[AH-95]
PID deviation

PID target value

Output frequency

Sleep operating time
[AH-87]

Sleep start level[AH-86]

Wake start deviation value[AH-96]
Time(e.g. 2)
・[AH-85] Sleep start: Output drop (01)
If the output frequency drops below [AH-86] continuously for the time set to [AH-87], the camera willenter the sleep mode.
・[AH-93] Sleep release: Feedback low (02)
If the feed-back falls below [AH-94] continuously for the duration set to [AH-95], the camera will enter
the sleep cancel operation.
Wake operating time
[AH-95]

Feedback value
PID target value
Wake start level[AH-94]
Output frequency

Sleep operating time
[AH-87]

Sleep start level[AH-86]
Time(e.g. 3)
・[AH-85] Starting sleep: 02([SLEP terminal)[SLEP] After the [AH-87] setting elapses from ON of the input terminal, the unit enters the sleep mode.
・[AH-93] Sleep cancel: 03([WAKE terminal)[WAKE] After [AH-95] has elapsed from ON of the input terminal, the unit enters the sleep cancel
operation.
Feedback value
PID target value

Output frequency[SLEP] Input

Wake operating time [AH-95]

Sleep operating time [AH-87]

ON[WAKE] Input

ON

9-118
9-118

Time

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Boost function before sleep

・Increase PID target prior to sleep to increase the feed-back volume. This function allows you to maintainsleep state for a longer period of time.
・The following diagram shows the condition when "PID sleep condition selection [AH-85]" is set to "Output
drop (01)" and "PID wake condition selection [AH-93]" is set to "Feedback drop (02)".
・When "PID pre-sleep boost selection [AH-88]" is "enabled (01)," if the output frequency continuously falls
below the "PID sleep start level [AH-86]" set to "PID sleep operation time [AH-87]", the "PID pre-sleep
boost amount [AH-90]" will be added to PID target value during "PID pre-sleep boost time [AH-89]".
Feedback value

PID pre-sleep boost [AH-90]
PID pre-sleep boost time [AH-89]

PID target value
PID wake start level[AH-94]
Output speed

PID wake operatingtime [AH-95]
PID sleep operatingtime [AH-87]

PID sleep start level[AH-86]
Without boost
With boost

Code

Item

AH-88

Enable set-point boost before
PID sleep

AH-89
AH-90

Set-point boost time before
PID sleep
Set-point boost value before
PID sleep

Description

Data

Initialvalue

Disabled

00

Enabled: PID target is increased (boosted) prior to starting
the sleep operation.

01

Sets the time for the boost before the sleep operation starts.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

Sets the amount of addition (boosting amount) to PID target
prior to starting the sleep operation.

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

9-119
9-119

00

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■ PID sleep function disable time・You can prevent frequent switching between PID sleep state and PID wake state by specifying the "PID
pre-sleep minimum operating time [AH-91]" and the "PID sleep state minimum holding time [AH-92]."
Feedback value

PID pre-sleep boost [AH-90]

PID target value
PID wake start level[AH-94]

PID wake operating time
[AH-95]

Output frequency
PID sleep operating time
[AH-87]
PID sleep start level[AH-86]
Before PID sleep
min. RUN time
[AH-91]

Code
AH-91
AH-92

Min. active time of PID sleep[AH-92]Item

Description

Data

Initialvalue

Minimum RUN time
before PID sleep
Minimum active timeof PID sleep

Until [AH-91] elapses after starting, the machine will not go into
sleep operation even if the conditions are met.
After the machine enters the sleep state, the machine remains in thesleep state until [AH-92] elapses, even if the conditions are met.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

9-120
9-120

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.8.3 Use PID2

・PID1 and PID2 operate independently.
・Switching PID1, PID2 by inputterminal can be used for batch-control switching, etc.
・PID2 is capable of selecting PID1 output as the target. This allows cascade control considering theeffects from the two systems.
■PID2 block diagram[db-56][FA-36]
PID2 target setpoint (monitor)

Select by [AJ-07]+

PID2 target value

PID2 over deviation [OD2]00-

Select by [AJ-12]

PID2 deviation monitor

PID2 deviation
minus[AJ-02]

×(-1)

PID2 feedback data

01

PID2 feedback data compare [FBV2][db-36]
PID2 feedback data monitor

PID2 control

PID2 integral reset [PIDC2]

P control+

I control+

0 command+

D control

PID2 selection[AJ-01]
00
01
02

PID2 proportional gain
PID2 integral gain
PID2 differential gain

[AJ-13][AJ-14][db-55]

db-61
db-62

db-63

PID2 output monitor[AJ-15]
PID2 output

Note: The switches of the parameters in the figure show the initial values.

9-121
9-121

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Switching between PID1 and 2

・PID1, PID2 can be switched by ON/OFF the input terminal function "PID output switching 1 [PIO1]".

PID function

PIO1

PID1 enabled
PID2 ebabledOFFON

PID output
switching 1[PIO1]

PID1 control
db-50
PID2 control

PID
Output command

db-55■Cascade-connection for PID1 and PID2
・PID2 can be cascaded with PID1 by setting PID2 target to PID1 output. ([AJ-07]=15)
・To perform cascade-connection, set "PID2 target valueinput selection [AJ-07]" to "PID1 output (15)"and enable the output command of PID2 as shown below at the "PID output switching 1 [PIO]" input
terminal.

PID function

PIO1

PID2 enabledON

PID output
switching 1[PIO1]

PID1 control
db-50
PID2 control

PID
Output command

db-55■PID2 rerated monitor
Code

Item

Description

FA-36

PID2 target setpoint (monitor)

Monitors or changes the settings of the currently selected
PID2 target.
If the target value is set to parameter setting (=[AJ-10]),changing/saving [FA-36] will also change/save [AJ-10].

db-36

PID2 feedback value monitor

Displays PID2 feedback.

db-55

PID2 output monitor

Displays PID2 output.

-100.00 to 100.00 %db-56

PID2 deviation monitor

Displays PID2 deviation.

-200.00 to 200.00 %db-61

Current PID P-Gain monitor

Displays the current P gain.

db-62

Current PID I-Gain monitor

Displays the current I gain.

0.0 to 3600.0 s

db-63

Current PID D-Gain monitor

Displays the current D gain.

0.00 to 100.00 s

Note: "PID2 Scale Adjust ([AJ-04] to [AJ-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".

9-122
9-122

Data

-100.00 to 100.00 % Note

0.0 to 100.0

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■PID2 rerated parameters
Code

AJ-01

Item

Description

PID2 enable

AJ-02

PID2 deviation minus

AJ-03

PID2 unit selection

AJ-04

PID2 Scale Adjust (0%)
PID2 Scale Adjust (100%)

AJ-06

Adjust PID2 scale(decimal point)

AJ-10

AJ-12

Disabled

00

Enabled:Even if the command by PID operation becomes negative,
it will not be outputting in the reverse direction.

01

Enabled (with reverse output):
When the command by PID calculation becomes negative, itwill be outputting in the reverse direction.

02

Disabled

00

Enabled: Deviation is the difference between the target value
and the feedback data multiplied by (-1).

01

Change the units and scale of some monitors/parameters of
PID2. For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units
Converter Function".

-10000 to 10000
0 to 4

PID2 target destination
selection

PID2 target setpoint

PID2 feedback
Input source selection

None

00

Terminal [VRF]01

Terminal [IRF]

02

Parameter setting

07

RS485 Setting

08

Option09

Pulse input

12

PID1 output

15

Set PID2 target value when "Parameter setting (07)" isselected as PID2 target value input destination.

Initialvalue

00

00 to 58

AJ-05

AJ-07

Data

-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

None

00

Terminal [VRF]01

Terminal [IRF]02

RS485 Setting

08

Option09

Pulse input

12

00
01
0
100000
2

07

0.00

12

AJ-13

PID2 proportional gain

Sets PID proportional gain.

0.0 to 100.0

1.0

AJ-14

PID2 integral gain

Sets PID integration gain.

0.0 to 3600.0 s

1.0

AJ-15

PID2
gain

Sets PID proportional gain.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

AJ-16

PID2 variable range

PID2 output-variable range is limited by PID2 target ± thissetting. Set the maximum frequency as 100% in % units.

Excessive PID2 deviation

Sets the target value of PID2 and the level at which thedeviation of the feedback data is judged to be excessive.
For more information, please refer to "Signaling of 9.8.4 PID
function".

PID2 feedback compare
signal OFF
PID2 feedback compare
signal ON

Sets the tolerance of PID2 feedback data. For more
information, please refer to "Signaling of 9.8.4 PID function".

AJ-17

AJ-18
AJ-19

derivative

actionNote: "PID2 Scale Adjust ([AJ-04] to [AJ-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".

9-123
9-123

0.00

0.00 to 100.00 %3.00

100.000.00

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■PID2 related I/O terminal functions
Code

CA-01 to
CA-08

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Item

Input terminal
function

Output terminal
function

Description

Data

Disable PID2 [PID2]:
When this signal is turned ON, PID operation is disabled and the normal
frequency operation is performed.

043

PID2 integration reset [PIDC2]:
When this signal is turned ON, the integral of PID control is cleared to
zero.

044

PID output switching 1[PIO1]:This ON/OFF can be used to switch between PID1 and PID2.
Over deviation for PID2 control [OD2]:When PID2 deviation exceeds the level set in "PID2 Error Excessive Level[AJ-17]", this signal turns ON.
PID2 feedback comparison [FBV2]:
PID2 feedback value is compared with the "PID2 Feedback Compare
Signal ON/OFF Level ([AJ-18]/[A J-19])", and the signal is ON/OFF.

Initial
value

-

056
047 Note

048 Note

002
001
017

Note: For more information, please refer to "Signaling of 9.8.4 PID function".

PID2 reverse output
・In normal PID control, if PID operation result is negative, the inverter limits the frequency command by
0Hz without outputting it in negative. When "PID2 selection [AJ-01]" is set to "Valid (with reverse
rotation output) (02)", the frequency command can be output in the reverse rotation direction if PID
operation result is negative.
・If "PID2 selection [AJ-01]" is set to "Valid (with reverse output) (02)", the output limit due to "PID2
variable range [AJ-16]" is extended to the minus direction.
Code

AJ-01

Item

Description

PID2 enable

Data

Disabled

00

Enabled:Even if the command by PID operation becomes negative, it will not be outputting in thereverse direction.

01

Enabled (with reverse rotation output):
When the command by PID operation becomes minus, output is performed in thereverse direction.

02

Initialvalue

00

PID2 deviation ± switching output
・PID2 deviation ± can be switched for outputting.
・PID2 deviation is calculated (PID target value-FB value) when "PID2 deviation minus [AJ-02]" is"disabled (00)". When [AJ-02] is "Enabled (01)", PID2 deviation is the same as (FB-PID target value).
・This function is used when PID target and FB deviations do not match the inverter command due to thesensor's properties.

PID target value

PID2 deviation
negative[AJ-02]00+-

Feedback data

01

×(-1)

PID2 deviation monitor[db-56]
PID calculation

Note: The switches of the parameters in the figure show the initial values.
Code

Item

AJ-02

PID1 deviation minus

Description

Data

Disabled

00

Enabled: Deviation is the difference between the target value and thefeedback data multiplied by (-1).

01

9-124
9-124

Initialvalue
00Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID2 variable-range restriction

・For PID2 output. Limits the output to a variable range based on PID1 target.
When [AJ-16] PID2 is set to 0.00%, the limiting function is disabled.
・Set "PID2 variable range [AJ-16]" with the maximum frequency set to 100%. PID2 output is limited
within PID2 target ±[AJ-16].
PID output(%)

PID2 output range

PID2 target value
PID2 valuable range [AJ-16]
PID2 valuable range [AJ-16]
Time(s)

Code

Item

AJ-16

PID2 variable range

Description
PID2 output-variable range is limited by PID2 target ± this setting.
Set the maximum frequency as 100% in % units.

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to 100.00 %0.00

PID2 integration resetting function
・This function clears the integral of PID2 operation. Please do this when PID2 is not operating, when the"PID2 integration reset [PIDC]" inputterminal is turned ON.
・If the "PID2 Integration Reset [PIDC]" input terminal is turned ON during PID2 operation, theaccumulated value that has been added to PID2 output command will be cleared, causing PID2 output
command value to fluctuate suddenly, leading to an overcurrent error, etc.
Code
CA-01 to
CA-08

Item
Input terminal function

Description
PID2 integration reset [PIDC2]:
When this signal is turned ON, the integral of PID control is cleared to 0.

Data
044

PID2 disable function
・PID2 disable [PID2] The operation of PID2 is temporarily disabled by turning ON the inputterminals,
and it is outputted according to the frequencycommand.
・When PID2 is disabled, the frequency command is set assuming that PID2 target value of 100 % is thehighest frequency.
Code
CA-01 to
CA-08

Item
Input terminal function

Description
PID2 disabled [PID]:
When this signal is turned ON, PID operation is disabled and the normal
frequency operation is performed.

9-125
9-125

Data
043

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID2 adjusting the gain
■ PID2 tune the operation

・When PID2 function does not respond stably, adjust as described below.
・If the acceleration/deceleration time setting is long, the output frequency tracking may be delayed andcontrol may not work well. In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time shorter.
Phenomena

Example of remedy

・Even if PID target value is changed, the output responses slowly and thefeedback value changes slowly.
・Feedback value changes quickly and does not stabilize.
・Overshoot and hunting occur
・The feedback value vibrates slowly.
・It takes time for the operation to stabilize.

Decrease "PID2 proportional gain [AJ-13]".
Increase "PID2 integration gain [AJ-14]".

・PID target value and the feed-back value do not agree well.
・The response is slow even if the proportional gain is increased.
・Fine hunting occurs.
・The reaction by the disturbance becomes large, it takes time to stabilize.

Code

Increase "PID2 proportional gain [AJ-13]".

Item

Decrease "PID2 integral gain [AJ-14]".
Increase "PID2 differential gain [AJ-15]".
Decrease "PID2 differential gain [AJ-15]".

Description

Data

Initial
value
1.0

AJ-13

PID2 proportional gain

Sets PID2 proportional gain.

0.0 to 100.0

AJ-14

PID2 integral gain

Sets PID2 integration gain.

0.0 to 3600.0 s

1.0

AJ-15

PID2 derivative action gain

Sets PID2 derivative gain.

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

9.8.4 Signal output of PID function
PID deviation excessive signal
・If PID deviation (difference between the target value and the feedback value) exceeds the range set in"PID deviation excess level ([AH-72], [AJ-17])", the "PID deviation excess ([OD], [OD2])" signal will be
outputted.
PID deviation(%)

PID over deviation level[AH-72]/[AJ-17]

PID1 deviation
PID2 deviation 0%[OD]/[OD2] Output

Time(s)

ON

ON

Code

Item

db-51

PID1 deviation monitor

Displays PID1 deviation.

db-56

PID2 deviation monitor

Displays PID2 deviation.

AH-72

Excessive PID1 deviation[OD] Sets the output judgment level of the signal.

AJ-17

Excessive PID2 deviation[OD2] Sets the output judgment level of the signal.

Output terminal function

Over deviation for PID control [OD]:This signal is turned ON when PID1 deviation exceeds
the set level of "PID1 deviation excess level [AH-72]".
Over deviation for PID2 control [OD2]:When PID2 deviation exceeds the level set in "PID2
Error Excessive Level [AJ-17]", this signal turns ON.

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Description

9-126
9-126

Data

Initialvalue-200.00 to 200.00 %-0.00 to 100.00 %

3.00

045

047

002
001
017

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
PID feedback compare signal

・If PID1 or PID2's PID feedback data exceeds the respective "PID feedback signal OFF level ([AH-73],[AJ-18])", the "PID feedback compare ([FBV], [FBV2])" signal will be OFF.
・If the signal is turned OFF, the signal will ON again when PID feedback data falls below the "PID
feedback signal ON level ([AH-74], [AJ-19])".
・Set PID feedback compare signal ON/OFF level so that OFF level ≧ ON level. When OFF level < ONlevel is set, OFF operation takes precedence.
・By setting ON level /OFF level to a value other than 0.00, the feedback compare signal starts
outputting. In such cases, the "PID Feedback Compare ([FBV], [FBV2])" signal remains ON until the "PID
Feedback Signal OFF Level ([AH-73], [AJ-18])" is exceeded from the start of operation.
OFF level[AH-73]/[AJ-18]
PID feedback (%)

ON level[AH-74]/[AJ-19]

PID1 feedback
PID2 feedback

Time(s)0%
RUN command
PID feedback compare signal[FBV]/[FBV2] Output

Code
db-36
db-44
AH-73
AH-74
AJ-18
AJ-19

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Item
PID2 feedback
Data Monitor
PID1 feedback data
monitor (after
calculation)
PID1 Feedback Compare
Signal OFF
PID1 Feedback Compare
Signal ON
PID2 Feedback Compare
Signal OFF
PID2 Feedback Compare
Signal ON

Output terminal function

ON
ON

ON

Description

Data

Displays PID2 feedback.

-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:1

Displays the feedback-value after PID1 calculation.

-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:2Initialvalue-[FBV] Sets PID1 feedback value at which the signal
is turned OFF.
[FBV] Sets PID1 feedback value at which the signal
is turned ON.
[FBV2] Sets PID2 feedback value at which the signal
is turned OFF.
[FBV2] Sets PID2 feedback value at which the signal
is turned ON.
PID Feedback Compare [FBV]:PID1 feedbacks and [AH-73]/[AH-74]) arecompared and ON/OFF is performed.
OFF: OFF level[AH-73] has been exceeded.
ON: ON level[AH-74] was lowered.
PID2 feedback comparison [FBV2]:
PID2 feedbacks and [AJ-18]/[AJ-19] arecompared for ON/OFF.
OFF: OFF level[AJ-18] has been exceeded.
ON: ON level[AJ-19] was lowered.

Note: 1. "PID2 Scale Adjust ([AJ-04] to [AJ-06]) will change the setting.
2. "PID1 Scale Adjust ([AH-04] to [AH-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".

9-127
9-127

100.000.00
0.00 to 100.00 %100.00
0.00

046
002
001
017
048

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.8.5 PID unit converter function

・The unit and scale of the following parameters can be changed using this function.
■PID unit conversion function target parameters
PID function

PID1

PID2

Code

Item

FA-30

PID1 target value 1 setting (monitor)

FA-32

PID1 target value 2 setting (monitor)

FA-34

PID1 target value 3 setting (monitor)

db-30

PID1 feedback value 1 monitor

db-32

PID1 feedback value 2 monitor

db-34

PID1 feedback value 3 monitor

db-42

PID1 target value monitor (after calculation)

db-44

PID1 feedback data monitor (after calculation)

AH-10

PID1 Target1set values

AH-12 to
AH-40

PID1 Multi-stage Target Value 1 to 15

AH-44

PID1 Target2set values

AH-48

PID1 Target3set values

FA-36

PID2 target setpoint (monitor)

db-36

PID2 feedback value monitor

AJ-10

PID2 target setpoint

・For PID target value setting and PID feedback monitor value, the internalscale-100.00% to 100.00%
can be converted to the desired setting range/unit by the unit conversion parameter. The default
factory settings for "PID1 Target 1 Setting (Monitor)[FA-30]" are "PID1 Unit Selection [AH-03]"="% (01)","PID1 Scale Adjustment (0%)[AH-04]" = 0, and PID1 Target 1 Setting Range is-100.00% to 100.00%
from "PID1 Scale Adjustment (100%)[AH-05]"= 10000, "PID1 Scale Adjustment (Decimal Point) [AH06]" = 2 (Decimal Point 2-digit). (solid line part in the figure below)(e.g.) If [AH-04]=5000, [AH-05]=10000, [AH-06] = 2(2decimal places) is set, the converted area willbe 0.00 to 100.00 as shown by the broken linein the figure on the right.
In this case, when the input destination is analog
input or pulse input, the range after conversion
is 50.00 to 100.00 on the + side (range ①) only
as shown in the figure on the right. When the
input destination is the operation panel setting,the range ② is 0.00 to 100.00.

Data after unit conversion[AH-05]100.00%①[AH-04]50.00%➁

00
Insidescale-100.00%-100.00%

0.00%

100.00%・When performing the unit and scale conversion, note that [AH-04] is set to the conversion value of 0%(the center point between-100.00% and 100.00% of the inner scale)(Adustment exsample)
When 0 to 10V (0 to 100%) are displayed as
0.10 to 0.50 kPa in [db-30] while analogue
0.5
Display
input1 [VRF] is feeding back voltage.
description- Units selection [AH-03]=kPa(56)0.1- Scale adjustment (0%) [AH-04]=10- Scale Adjust (100%)[AH-05]=50)
0V- Decimal point position [AH-06]=02

9-128
9-128

[VRF] Input

10Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Parameter
Code

Item

AH-03

PID1 unit selection

AH-04

Adjust PID1 scale (0%)

AH-05
AH-06

PID1 Scale Adjust(100%)
Adjust PID1 scale(decimal point)

AJ-03

PID2 unit selection

AJ-04

Adjust PID2 scale (0%)

AJ-05
AJ-06

PID2 Scale Adjust(100%)
Adjust PID2 scale(decimal point)

Description
Sets the unit of PID1 display/conversion target parameters.
Refer to the table below for details.
Sets the input-0% reference for PID1 display/conversion
target parameter.
Sets the reference for 100% of PID1 display/conversion target
parameter.
0:00000. / 1:0000.0 / 2:000.00
3:00.000 / 4:0.0000
Sets the unit of PID2 display/conversion target parameters.
Refer to the table below for details.
Sets the input-0% reference for PID2 display/conversion
target parameter.
Sets the reference for 100 % of PID2 display/conversion target
parameter.
0:00000. / 1:0000.0 / 2:000.00
3:00.000 / 4:0.0000■[AH-03], List of units that can be set with [AJ-03]
Data

Item

Data

Item

Data

Item

00

non

21

mVs/rad

42

t/min

01

%

22

Nm

43

t/h

23

-1

44

gal/s

02

A

03

Hz

24

m/s

45

gal/min

04

V

25

m/min

46

gal/h

05

kW

26

m/h

47

ft3/s

06

W

27

ft/s

48

ft3/min

07

hr

28

ft/min

49

ft3/h

08

s

29

ft/h

50

lb/s

09

kHz

30

m

51

lb/min

10

ohm

31

cm

52

lb/h

11

mA

32

°F

53

mbar

12

ms

33

l/s

54

bar

13

P

34

l/min

55

Pa

2

min

14

kgm

35

l/h

56

kPa

15

pls

36

m3/s

57

PSI

37

3

m /min

58

mm

Vdc

38

3

18

°C

39

kg/s

19

kWh

40

kg/min

20

mF

41

kg/h

16
17

mH

m /h

9-129
9-129

Data

Initialvalue

00 to 5801
0-10000 to 10000
10000
0 to 42

00 to 5801
0-10000 to 10000
10000
0 to 42

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
9.9 Trip-less function
9.9.1 Overload limit function

・The overload limit function monitors the motor current at acceleration or at constant speed, and when it
reaches "Overload limit 1 level [bA123]", it automatically lowers the outputfrequency according to"Overload limit 1 operation time [bA124]". Operation is as follows according to "Overload limit 1 selection[bA122]".
・[bA124] is the duration to decelerate from "IM max. frequency [Hb105]" to 0Hz or to accelerate from
0Hz to [Hb105].
・Two independent overload limit operations can be set. The overload limit 1/2 can be switched byassigning "Overload limit switching [OLR](038)" to the inputterminal and ON/OFF the terminal. See"Switching Two Types of Overload Limit Settings" in this section for details.
Stall prevention mode
selection [bA122]

Operation

Enable during accel. andconstant speed (01)Monitors the output current at acceleration or constant speed. Suppresses current by decelerating
against excessive load during acceleration and rapid load fluctuation at constant speed.

Valid at constant speed(02)

Monitors the output current only at constant speed.
Current suppression by deceleration is performed only for sudden load fluctuation at constant speed.

Enable during accel. And
constant speed(Speed increase during
regeneration) (03)Monitors the output current at acceleration or constant speed. In addition to the operation of "Effectiveat Acceleration and Constant Speed (01)", when a regenerative load is applied at constant speed, it isaccelerated to prevent overload.

・If this function is activated during acceleration, the acceleration time until the frequency command isreached becomes longer than the setting.
・If the overload limit operation time is shortened too much, an overvoltage trip may occur due toregenerative energy from the motor due to the automatic deceleration of this function.
・If this function is activated during acceleration and the output frequency does not reach the target
frequency, the following adjustments may be made.
- Increase the acceleration time
- Adjust the torque boost- Increase the overload limit level
Code

Item

bA122

Overload
restriction 1
mode selection

bA123

bA124

Overload
restriction 1
active level
Overload
restriction 1
action time

Description
Disabled
Enable during accel. and constant speed
Enable during . and constant speed
Enable during accel. and constant speed(accel. during regeneration)

Data
00
01
02

Initial
value

01

03

Sets the current value at which the overload limit operates.

(0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.50×Rated
outputcurrent

Set the deceleration time when the overload limit operates,in the deceleration time from the highest frequency to 0 Hz.

0.10 to 3600.00 s

1.00

9-130
9-130

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Switching two types of over load limit setting
・Two independent settings of "Overload limit 1 ([bA122] to [bA124])" and "Overload limit 2 ([bA126] to[bA128])" can be set for the overload limit.
・Switching between Overload Limit 1 and Overload Limit 2 is performed by ON/OFF of the "Overload
Limit Switching [OLR]" inputterminal. [OLR] Overload limit 2 is enabled by ON the inputterminal.

Output current

Overload restriction level 1 [bA123]
Overload restriction level 2 [bA127]

Output frequency
Max. frequency
Set frequency

Overload restriction 1 action time [bA124]

Overload restriction 2 action time [bA128][OLR] Input

Code
bA126

bA127

bA128

CA-01 to
CA-08

ON

Item

Description

Overload
restriction 2 mode
selection
Overload
restriction 2 active
level
Overload
restriction 2 action
time[OLR] Sets operation of overload limit 2, which
operates when the input terminal is ON. The setting is
the same as that of [bA122]/[bA123]/[bA124].

Input terminal
function

Overload limit switching [OLR]:
The overload limit 1/2 is switched by ON/OFF of
this signal.
OFF: Overload limit 1 enabled
ON: Overload limit 2 enabled

9-131
9-131

Data

Initialvalue

00 to 0301

(0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.50×Rated
outputcurrent

0.10 to 3600.00 s

1.00

038

-

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.9.2 Limit the output frequency during acceleration to prevent overcurrent
・The overcurrent suppression function suppresses overcurrent caused by steep current growth during
rapid acceleration, etc.
・When "Overcurrent suppression selection [bA120]" is set to "Enabled (01)" or "Enabled (voltage
reduction status enabled) (02)", the overcurrent suppression function operates when the output
current exceeds the setting of "Overcurrent suppression level [bA121]".
・Setting [bA120] to "Enable (with voltage reduction) (02)" reduces the outputvoltage during theovercurrent suppression function operation, increasing the current suppression effectiveness. Use thisfunction when "overload error ([E005], [E038], [E039])" or the like occurs when this function is operated
with "Enabled (01)". However, torque shortage is likely to occur because the output voltage is reduced.
・Disable this function when using this product for an elevator. Suppressing the current may cause
insufficient torque, resulting in slippage of the load cage or lifted objects.
・Even if this function is enabled, an overcurrent trip may occur if the current grows steeply due to an
impact load, etc.
・The output current at which overcurrent occurs can be set using the overcurrent detection-level[bb160]. When using the overcurrent suppression function, be sure to set the overcurrent suppression
level [bA120] to a value lower than [bb160].
・This function is automatically enabled during DC braking or frequency retraction restart. However, theovercurrent suppression level at frequency retraction restart is set by "Overcurrent suppression level atfrequency retraction restart [bb-46]". For details, see section 9.7.4, Using the Frequency Pull-in
Function to Start.
・This function is automatically disabled during auto-tuning.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Overcurrent
suppression enable

Disabled

00

bA120

Enabled01

Enabled (with voltage reduction)

02

bA121

Overcurrent
suppression -motor

Sets the operation level of the overcurrent
suppression function.

bb-46

OC-suppress level at
active frequency
matching

Sets the operation level of the overcurrent
suppression function at the time of frequency
retraction restart.

bb160

Overcurrent detection motor

Sets the level at which overcurrent is detected.

9-132
9-132

Initialvalue
00(0.30 to 1.80)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.80×Rated
outputcurrent(0.30 to 2.20) ×Inverter
rated output current A

2.20×Rated
outputcurrent

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.9.3 Control the output frequency during deceleration to prevent an overvoltage
・The overvoltage suppression function can suppress the occurrence of an overvoltage trip during
deceleration.
・Set "Overvoltage suppression function selection [bA140]" to other than "Disable (00)", and when DC
voltage between P-N of the inverter exceeds "Overvoltage suppression level setting [bA141]", thisfunction will operate.
・Actual deceleration time is longer than the set value due to operation of this function.
・Depending on the moment of inertia of the load, it may take a long time to stop.
・Even if this function is enabled, overvoltage trip may occur depending on the deceleration rate andload conditions.
・Set "Overvoltage suppression level setting [bA141]" so that the received power voltage × √2 × 1.1 ormore. If a value lower than the DC voltage between P-N during operation is set, the motor may not beable to be stopped.
Initial
value

Code

Item

Description

Data

bA140

Overvoltage
suppression enable

Disabled
DC voltage constant control (deceleration stop)
With acceleration (at deceleration)
With acceleration (at constant speed and deceleration)

bA141

Overvoltage
suppression active motor

Sets the operation level of the overvoltage suppressionfunction.

00
01
02
03
200V class:
DC330.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:DC660.0 to 800.0 V

200V class:
380.0
400V class:
760.0

0.00 to 3600.00 s

1.00

0.00 to 5.00

0.20

0.00 to 150.00 s

1..00

bA142

bA144

bA145

Overvoltage
suppression active
timeConstant DC bus
voltage control
P gainConstant DC bus
voltage control
I gainAcceleration time when overvoltage suppressionfunction is activated.
Proportional gain for PI control of DC voltage-constantcontrol.
Integral gain for PI control of DC voltage-constantcontrol.

00■When "Over-voltage suppression selection [bA140]" = "DC voltage constant control (deceleration-stop)(01)"
・When "DC voltage constant control (deceleration stop) (01)" is selected for [bA140], the motor
decelerates automatically while performing PI control so that the DC voltage across P-N does notexceed the "overvoltage suppression-level setting [bA141]" at deceleration.
・If "DC voltage constant control P gain [bA144]" is set larger or "DC voltage constant control I gain
[bA145]" is set shorter, the response will be faster, but it will be easier to trip.
DC bus voltage(Vdc)
Overvoltage suppression
active-motor[bA141]
Time
Output frequency(Hz)Constant DC bus voltage
control
Deceleration startTime

Set deceleration time
Actual deceleration time

9-133
9-133

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■When "Over-voltage suppression selection [bA140]" = "Acceleration present (at deceleration) (02)"・When "Acceleration present (at deceleration) (02)" is selected for [bA140], if the DC voltage across P-N
exceeds the "overvoltage suppression level setting [bA141]" at deceleration, the acceleration operationis performed according to the "overvoltage suppression operation duration [bA142]". After that, when
DC-voltage between P-N becomes less than [bA141], normal deceleration resumes.
DC bus voltage(Vdc)
Overvoltage suppression
active-motor[bA141]

Time
Output frequency(Hz)Deceleration start

Accelerate according to[bA142]Time

Set deceleration time
Actual deceleration time

■When "Over-voltage suppression selection [bA140]" = "Acceleration present (at constant speed anddeceleration) (03)"・When "Acceleration present (at constant speed and deceleration) (03)" is selected for [bA140], if the DC
voltage across P-N exceeds the "overvoltage suppression level setting [bA141]" at constant speed anddeceleration, acceleration operation is performed according to the "overvoltage suppression operation
time [bA142]". After that, when the DC voltage between P-N falls below the overvoltage suppression level,normal deceleration resumes.
DC bus voltage(Vdc)
Overvoltage suppression
active-motor[bA141]

Time

Output frequency(Hz)Deceleration start

Accelerate according to[bA142]Time

Set deceleration time
Actual deceleration time・When "Over-voltage suppression selection [bA140]" is set to "Acceleration present (at deceleration)(02)" or "Acceleration present (at constant speed and deceleration) (03)", acceleration is controlled tothe maximum frequency setting.
・If "Overvoltage suppression operation time [bA142]" is shortened, the increase in the outputfrequency
due to acceleration may exceed the decrease in the frequency due to deceleration, making it
impossible to stop. In such cases, increase the setting of "Over-voltage suppression level setting[bA141]".

9-134
9-134

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.9.4 Overexcitation function

・The overexcitation function increases the outputvoltage in response to an increase in the DC voltage
between P-N to increase the loss of the motor and reduce the energy to be regenerated, thereby
preventing the occurrence of overvoltage errors.
・Setting "Overexcitation function selection (V/f)[bA146)" to other than "Disable (00)" enables thisfunction.
・Even if "Disable (00)" is set, a voltage exceeding the received power voltage cannot be output.
・When the overexcitation function is enabled, the motor heat generation may increase due to anincrease in the output current caused by an increase in the output voltage or due to overexcitation of
the motor.
・Even if the overexcitation function is enabled, the overvoltage may trip depending on the deceleration
rate and load conditions.
・Overexcitation function is enabled when "V/f control (00) to (03)" is set to "Control method [AA121]".
・When using AVR function OFF operation of the conventional model, set "Overexcitation function
selection (V/f)[bA146)" as follows. Always AVR OFF: [bA146]=01, During decelerationAVR OFF: [bA146]=02
Description

Data

Initial
value

00
01
02
03
04

00

Overexcitation function output
filter time constant (V/f)
Overexcitation function
voltage gain (V/f)

DisableAlways active
Operation only at deceleration
Level operation
Level action only at deceleration
Filter time constant for the output
voltage in the overexcitation status.
Gain with respect to the output
voltage in the overexcitation status.

0.000 to 10.000 s

0.300

50 to 400 %

100

bA149

Overexcitation function
operation level (V/f)

Sets the operation level of theovervoltage suppression function.

200V class: DC330.0
to 400.0 V
400V class: DC660.0
to 800.0 V

Hb106

IM motor rated voltage

Set the rated voltage of the motor.

1 to 1000 V

200V class:
380.0
400V class:760.0
200V class:200
400V class:400

Code

bA146

bA147
bA148

Item

Overexcitation function
selection (V/f)■When "Overexcitation function selection (V/f) [bA146)" = "Disabled (00)"DC bus voltage(Vdc)

Time
Output voltage(V)Even if the DC voltage (incoming voltage) fluctuates between P-N,
the voltage output to the motor is kept at the [Hb106] setting.
Note: Voltage exceeding the receiving voltage cannot be output.

[Hb106]

Time■When "Overexcitation function selection (V/f)[bA146)" = "Always operation (01)"DC bus voltage(Vdc)

Time
Output voltage(V)Large[bA148][bA147]=0.000s

Small
Set [bA147] to anything other than 0.000s[bA146]=00

Time

9-135
9-135

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■When "Overexcitation function selection (V/f)[bA146)" = "Operation only at deceleration (02)"DC bus voltage(Vdc)

Large

Output voltage(V)

Small
Deceleration
start

Time
[bA148]Set [bA147] to anything other than 0.000s[bA147]=0.000s[bA146]=00
Time
Follow the set deceleration time

■When "Overexcitation function selection (V/f)[bA146)" = "Level operation (03)"DC bus voltage(Vdc)
Overexcitation
suppression level[bA149]Time

Output voltage(V)Larger[bA148]Small[bA147]=0.000s

Set [bA147] to anything other than 0.000s[bA146]=00

Time■When "Overexcitation function selection (V/f)[bA146)" = "Level-operated only at deceleration (04)"DC bus voltage(Vdc)

Not responding

Overexcitation
suppression level[bA149]Time

Output voltage(V)Deceleration
start[bA147]=0.000 s

Large[bA148]Small
Set [bA147] to anything other than 0.000s[bA146]=00

Time
Follow the set deceleration time

9-136
9-136

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.9.5 Braking resistor operating circuit (DBTR)

・During deceleration, the motor acts as a generator and energy is regenerated to the inverter. As aconsequence, the DC voltage rises between P-N of the inverter and trips when the over-voltage is
exceeded. To prevent this, DBTR function uses an external resistor to dissipate regenerative powerfrom the motor.
・When using this function, connect an external braking resistor referring to "5.3.5 Wiring Braking
Resistor and Regenerative Braking Unit" and set each parameter in the table below.
・It is also possible to obtain a larger regenerative torque by using the optional regenerative braking unit
without using the built-in braking resistor operating circuit (DBTR). If this happens, set "Braking Resistor
Operation Circuit (DBTR) Select [bA-61]" to "Disable (00)".
・The "Braking Resistor Operating Circuit (DBTR) On Level [bA-62]" is the level setting of the main circuit
DC smoothing capacitor in the inverter. Be sure to set a value exceeding √2 times the received voltage.
It may lead to burnout of the braking resistor.
・The minimum resistance value that can be connected varies depending on the model.
For details, refer to "Chapter 17 Specifications".
Code
dA-41

Item
DBTR load ratio
monitorDescription
Displays according to DBTR use.

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to 100.00 %-0.0 to 10.0 × ([bA-63]/
Min. resistance)2 %10.0

When this setting is 0.0, DBTR function does
not operate.
The upper limit of [bA-60] changes dependingon the "Braking Resistor Operating Circuit(DBTR) Resistance Value [bA-63]" setting. Be
sure to set [bA-63] first. Then, set DBTR duty
cycle to the allowable %ED or less of thebraking resistor to be connected, referring to
the figure below.
bA-60

Dynamic brake use
ratio

t1

t2

t3

ON

ON

ON

DBTR
operation
DBTR %ED =bA-61

Dynamic brake
activation selectionbA-62

Dynamic brake
activation levelbA-63

Dynamic brake resistor
value

100s
(t1+t2+t3)

×100

100s

If the set usage rate is exceeded, the motor trips
due to "Braking resistor overload error [E006]".
Disabled
Enabled (disabled during stop)
Enabled (enabled during stop)
ON at which DBTR operates. This function isused to adjust the operation of DBTR function
according to the power input of the inverter.
Be sure to set a value exceeding √2 times thereceived voltage.
Set the actually connected braking resistancevalue. The upper limit of DBTR utilization of theinverter is calculated automatically. This makes
it better to set [bA-60] considering only theallowable %ED of the braking resistor.

9-137
9-137

00
01
02
200V class
DC330.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:DC660.0 to 800.0 V

Min resistance to600.0 Ω00
200V class:
380.0
400V class:760.0

Min. resistanceInverter Function

Chapter 99.9.6 Restart after instantaneous power failure or undervoltage

・When DC voltage between P-N falls below the undervoltage level and power is restored afterwards, theinverter can be set to trip or restart without tripping by "undervoltage retry count selection [bb-21]".
・If [bb-21] is set to 0 times, "Undervoltage Error [E009]" will occur when undervoltage occurs, and restart
will not be performed. When [bb-21] is set to 1 to 16 times, restarting is performed for the set numberof times when power is restored from undervoltage, and then tripped. If [bb-21] is set to 255, thenumber of restarts is unlimited.
・The restart method can be selected by "Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage retry selection [bb24]".
・If Frequency Adjustment Restart is selected ([bb-24]=01, 04), the actual operation will be thefrequency retraction restart from the frequency at cutoff. For details, see section 9.7.3, Using theFrequency Adjustment Function to Start.
・When frequency pull-in restart is selected ([bb-24]=02), refer to "9.7.4 Using Frequency Pull-in
Function to Start" for more information.
・When the power is turned off while the inverter is stopped for energy saving, etc., the undervoltage trip
during stop can be avoided by setting "Momentary power failure/undervoltage trip selection during
stop [bb-27]" to "Disabled (00)" or "Disabled during stop and deceleration stop (02)".
・If the power failure time is long and the control microcomputer power is completely turned off, theoperation at power on is performed at power restoration. In such cases, restart can be performed by
setting "Restart [bb-41] after releasing reset". For details, refer to "9.7.5 Start after Trip Reset or PowerOn".
・When the DC voltage across P-N drops below the undervoltage level (approx. DC173V for 200 V class,approx. DC345V, 400V class), the inverter shuts off the output. The motor coasts. If the time until
power restoration is "Under-voltage Time", "Undervoltage Error [E009]" will occur in the following cases.
- [bb-21] = "0 times" and "Undervoltage time" ≦ "Allowable instantaneous power failure/undervoltage
time [bb-25]"- [bb-21] When "≠ 0 times" and "Undervoltage time" > "Momentary power failure/undervoltage
allowable time [bb-25]"- When "Under-voltage time" is about 40 seconds or more, "Undervoltage error [E009]" occurs
without waiting for power restoration.
・If "Trip after deceleration stop (04)" is set for "Momentary power failure/undervoltage retry selection[bb-24]", if a trip such as overvoltage or overcurrent occurs during deceleration after restart,"Undervoltage error [E009]" will be displayed and the motor will free-run. In this case, increase thedeceleration time.
・The undervoltage signal [UV] signalwill be outputted in an undervoltage condition as well as with orwithout a trip. It also continues outputting while the inverter-controlled power supply remains(including external +24V power supply).

9-138
9-138

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

bb-21

bb-24

Item

Number of retries after undervoltage

Restart mode selection after
instantaneous power
failure/undervoltage error

bb-25

Instantaneous power failure
allowed timebb-26

Instantaneous power
failure/undervoltage
Retry wait time after an error

bb-27

Enable instantaneous power
failure/ undervoltage trip
while in stop status

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Data

Initialvalue

0 to 16 times/255

0

Description
Sets the number of restarts when power is restored fromundervoltage.
0 times: Tripped when undervoltage occurs.
1 to 16 times: Restart is performed by the set numberof times, and then trips.
255: The number of restarts is unlimited.
0 Restart Hz.
Restart the frequency adjustment (restart the frequency
retraction from the cutoff frequency).
Frequency pull-in restart.
Restart at feedback detection speed (frequency).
After the frequency adjustment restart (frequency
retraction restart from the cutoff frequency) is completed,the motor decelerates to a stop and trips.
If the power is restored within this set time, the unit will
restart.
If the instantaneous power failure/undervoltage time islonger than this setting time, the motor trips regardless ofthe setting of [bb-21].

00
01
02
03

01

04

0.3 to 25.0 s

1.0Sets the waiting time from power restoration to restart.

0.3 to 100.0 s

1.0Invalid: Does not trip during stop.
Enabled: Trip also occurs during stop.
Disabled during stop and deceleration stop:
Does not trip during stop or decelerating stop at
operation command OFF.
Undervoltage [UV]:This signal is turned ON when the DC voltage between
P-N is below the undervoltage level.

00
01
00
02

021

002
001
017

Operation when power is restored from instantaneous power failure or undervoltage■Trip ([bb-21]＝0)・When an instantaneous power failure or undervoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off andthe motor coasts. Then, if power is restored to [bb-25], "Undervoltage error [E009]" is generated and"Alarm signal [AL]" is outputted.
Power supply
DC bus voltage
Inverter output

Undervoltage detection level
Undervoltage detection
Free run

Motor speed[AL] Output

Undervoltage error [E009] occurs[UV] Output

9-139
9-139

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■0Hz start ([bb-21]≠0, [bb-24]＝00)

・When instantaneous power failure or undervoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the
motor coasts. After the power is restored, the inverter starts restarting 0Hz after the retry wait time ofthe [bb-26] setting. At this time, "Alarm signal [AL]" is not outputted.
Power supply
DC bus voltage

Undervoltage detection level
Undervoltage detection

Inverter output
Free run
0 Hz restart

Motor speed
Undervoltage time
Instantaneous power failure
allowed time

Retry
Standby time

[UV] Output■Frequency alignment restart ([bb-21]≠0, [bb-24]＝01)
・When instantaneous power failure or undervoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the
motor coasts. After the power is restored, after the retry wait time of the [bb-26] setting, the inverter
starts frequency retraction restart from the frequency at the time of shutdown. At this time, "Alarm
signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・For details, see section 9.7.3, Using the Frequency Adjustment Function to Start.
Power supply
Dc bus voltage

Undervoltage detection level
Undervoltage detection

Inverter output
Free run

Active frequency matching restart

Motor speed
Undervoltage time
Instantaneous power failure
allowed time

Retry
Standby time

[UV] Output■Frequency retract restart ([bb-21]≠0, [bb-24]＝02)
・When instantaneous power failure or undervoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the
motor coasts. After the power is restored, after the retry wait time of the [bb-26] setting, the inverter
starts frequency retraction restart from the frequency at the time of shutdown. At this time, "Alarm
signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・For details, see section 9.7.3, Using the Frequency Adjustment Function to Start.
Power supply
DC bus voltage

Undervoltage detection level
Undervoltage detection

Inverter output
Free run
Motor speed
Undervoltage time
Instantaneous power failure
allowed time

Active frequency matching restart

Retry
Standby time

[UV] Output

9-140
9-140

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Detect velocity ([bb-21]≠0, [bb-24]＝03)

・When instantaneous power failure or undervoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the
motor coasts. After the power is restored, the inverter starts outputting from the rotational velocity
detected by the encoder feedback after the retry standby time of the [bb-26] setting. At this time,"Alarm signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・When this setting is used, a setting related to encoder feedback is separately required. For details, referto "9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback".
Power supply
Undervoltage detection level

DC bus voltage
Undervoltage detection
Inverter output
Outputfrequency
Motor speed
Undervoltage time
Instantaneous power failure
allowed time

The motor speed at restart is detected,
and output starts from the detected
frequency.

Free run
RetryStandby time

[UV] Output■Trip after decelerating stop ([bb-21]≠0, [bb-24]＝04)
・Instanteneous power failure and undervoltage detection shut off the inverter output and coasts the
motor. After the power is restored, after the retry wait time of the [bb-26] setting, the inverter performs
frequency retraction restart from the frequency at the time of shutdown. Then, decelerating stop is
performed, and "Alarm signal [AL]" is outputted after stop.
・For details, see section 9.7.3, Using the Frequency Adjustment Function to Start.
Power supply
DC bus voltage

Undervoltage detection level
Undervoltage detection

Inverter output
Free run
Motor speed
Undervoltage time
Instantaneous power failure
allowed time[AL] Output

Active frequency matching restart
Decelerating-stop after restart and"Under-voltage trip [E009]" occurs

RetryStandby time

[UV] Output

9-141
9-141

Inverter Function

Chapter 9

Operation of Momentary Power Loss/Undervoltage Trip Selection [bb-27] during Stop
・Use [bb-27] to select whether or not a trip signal is output when an instantaneous power failure orundervoltage occurs during standstill.
・The trip signal is output while the inverter's control power remains.
■[bb-27] ＝"Invalid (00)"Power supply

During constant
speed

DuringStoppeddeceleration

During constant
speed

Duringdeceleration Stopped

RUN command
Outputfrequency[AL] Output[RST] Input■[bb-27] ＝"Valid (01)"Power supply
RUN command
Outputfrequency[AL] Output[RST] Input■[bb-27] ＝"Disabled during stop and deceleration stop (02)"During constant
speed

Duringdeceleration

Power supply
RUN command
Outputfrequency[AL] Output[RST] Input

9-142
9-142

StoppedInverter Function

Chapter 99.9.7 Restart after overcurrent

・When overcurrent is detected, it can be set by "Overcurrent retry count selection [bb-22]" whether the
inverter trips or restarts without tripping. If [bb-22] is set to 0 times, "overcurrent error [E001]" will
occur immediately when overcurrent is detected. When [bb-22] is set to 1 to 5 times, restart isperformed according to the setting of "Overcurrent trip retry selection [bb-28]" for the number of times
set to [bb-22] at overcurrent detection, and when the overcurrent detection count exceeds [bb-22], trip
is performed at [E001].
・The output current value that is judged as overcurrent can be set in "Overcurrent detection level[bb160]".
・When Frequency Adjustment Restart is selected ([bb-28]=01, 04), refer to "9.7.3 Using the Frequency
Adjustment Function to Start" for more information.
・When restarting the frequency pull-in function ([bb-28]=02), refer to "9.7.4 Using the Frequency Pull
Function to Start" for more information.
・If an overcurrent error occurs continuously, it may be due to too short acceleration time, heavy load, or
locked motor.
Code

bb-22

bb-28

Item
Number of retries
after overcurrent

Restart mode
selection afteran overcurrent error

bb-29

Retry wait time afteran overcurrent error

bb160

Overcurrent
detection -motor

Description
Sets the number of restarts in the event of an
overcurrent. In case of 0 times, it trips
immediately due to overcurrent error without
restarting.
0 Restart Hz.
Restart the frequency adjustment (restart thefrequency retraction from the cutoff frequency).
Frequency pull-in restart.
Restart at feedback detection speed (frequency).
After the frequency adjustment restart(frequency retraction restart from the cutoff
frequency) is completed, the motor decelerates
to a stop and trips.
Sets the waiting time from overcurrent detection
to restart start.
Sets the level at which overcurrent is detected.

9-143
9-143

Data

Initialvalue

0 to 5 times

0

00
01
02
03

01

04

0.3 to 100.0 s

0.3(0.30 to 2.20)×Inverter
rated output current A

2.20×Rated
outputcurrent

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Operation when overcurrent is detected■Trip ([bb-22]＝0)

・When overcurrent is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the motor coasts. "Over current error[E001]" occurs and "Alarm signal [AL]" is outputted.
Overcurrent
detection level

Overcurrent detection

Output current
Inverter output
Motor speed

Free run[AL] Output

Overcurrent error [E001] occurs■0Hz start ([bb-22]≠0、[bb-28]＝00)
・When overcurrent is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the motor coasts. After that, theinverter starts restarting 0Hz after the retry wait time of the [bb-29] setting. At this time, "Alarm signal[AL]" is not outputted.
Overcurrent
detection level
Output current

Overcurrent detection

Inverter output
Free run

0 Hz restart

Motor speed
Retry wait time after an error■Frequency alignment restart ([bb-22]≠0, [bb-28]=01)
・When overcurrent is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the motor coasts. After that, after the
retry standby time of the [bb-29] setting, the inverter starts frequency retraction restart from thefrequency at the time of shutdown. At this time, "Alarm signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・Refer to "9.7.3 Using the Frequency Adjustment Function to Start" for details on frequency adjustment
restart.
Overcurrent
detection level
Output current

Overcurrent detection

Inverter output
Free run
Motor speed

Active frequency matching restart
Retry wait time after an error

9-144
9-144

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Frequency retract restart ([bb-22]≠0, [bb-28]＝02)

・When overcurrent or overvoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the motor coasts. After
that, after the retry wait time of the [bb-31] setting, the inverter starts active frequency matching restart.
At this time, "Alarm signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・Refer to "9.7.4 Using the Frequency Pull Function to Start" for details on restarting the frequency pull-in.
Output current
Outputfrequency

Overcurrent detection

Free run

Motor speed

Active frequency matching restart
Retry wait time after an error■Detect velocity ([bb-22]≠0, [bb-28]＝03)
・When overcurrent or overvoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the motor coasts. Then,after the retry wait time of the [bb-31] setting, the inverter starts outputting from the rotational velocity
detected by the encoder feedback. At this time, "Alarm signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・When this setting is used, a setting related to encoder feedback is separately required. For details, referto "9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback".
Overcurrent
detection level
Output current

Overcurrent detection

Inverter output
Outputfrequency

The motor speed at restart is detected,
and output starts from the detected
frequency.

Free run
Motor speed
Retry wait time after an error■Trip after decelerating stop ([bb-22]≠0, [bb-28]＝04)
・The overvoltage detection shuts off the inverter output and coasts the motor. After that, after the retry
wait time of the [bb-31] setting, the inverter performs the frequency retraction restart from thefrequency at the time of shutdown. Then, decelerating stop is performed, and "Alarm signal [AL]" isoutputted after stop.
・Refer to "9.7.4 Using the Frequency Pull Function to Start" for details on restarting the frequency pullin.
Overcurrent
detection level
Output current

Overcurrent detection

Inverter output
Active frequency matching restartFree run
Motor speed
Retry wait time after an error[AL] Output

9-145
9-145

Decelerating-stop after restart and"overvoltage error [E007]" occurs

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.9.8 Restart after overvoltage

・When overvoltage is detected, it can be set by "Overvoltage retry selection [bb-23]" whether the
inverter trips or restarts without tripping. If [bb-23] is set to 0 times, an "overvoltage error [E007]" will
immediately occur when overvoltage is detected. When [bb-23] is set to 1 to 5 times, at overvoltage
detection, restart is performed according to the setting of "Overvoltage trip retry selection [bb-30]" bythe number of times set to [bb-23]. If the overvoltage detection count exceeds [bb-23], it trips at[E007].
・When Frequency Adjustment Restart is selected ([bb-30]=01, 04), refer to "9.7.3 Using the Frequency
Adjustment Function to Start" for more information.
・When restarting the frequency pull-in function ([bb-30]=02), refer to "9.7.4 Using the Frequency Pull
Function to Start" for more information.
・If overvoltage is applied continuously, the deceleration time may be too short, the load may be heavy,or the motor may be turned by an external force.
・Even if Restart is selected, the inverter will detect a trip again if the trip factor has not been cleared
after the "overvoltage retry wait time [bb-31]". In this case, increase the retry wait time.
Code

Item

bb-23

Number of retries
after over voltage

bb-30

bb-31

Restart mode
selection afteran overvoltage error

Retry wait time afteran overvoltage error

Description
Sets the number of restarts if an overvoltage occurs. In case of 0
times, it trips immediately due to overvoltage error without
restarting.
0 Restart Hz.
Restart the frequency adjustment(restart the frequency retraction from the cutoff frequency).
Frequency pull-in restart.
Restart at feedback detection speed (frequency).
After the frequency adjustment restart (frequency retraction
restart from the cutoff frequency) is completed, the motor
decelerates to a stop and trips.
Sets the waiting time from overvoltage detection to restart
start.

9-146
9-146

Data

Initialvalue

0 to 5 times

0

00
01
02
03

01

04

0.3 to 100.0 s

0.3Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Overvoltage detection mode selection■Trip ([bb-23]＝0)

・The overvoltage detection shuts off the inverter output and coasts the motor. "Over voltage error[E007]" will occur and "Alarm signal [AL]" will be outputted respectively.
DC bus voltage

Overvoltage detection level
Overvoltage detection

Inverter output
Free run
Motor speed[AL] Output

Overvoltage error [E007]」occurs■0Hz start ([bb-23]≠0, [bb-30]＝00)
・The overvoltage detection shuts off the inverter output and coasts the motor. After that, after the retry
wait time of the [bb-31] setting, the inverter starts 0Hz restart. At this time, "Alarm signal [AL]" is not
outputted.

DC bus voltage

Overvoltage detection level

Overvoltage detection

Inverter output
Free run

0 Hz restart

Motor speed
Retry wait time after an error■Frequency Alignment Restart ([bb-23]≠0, [bb-30]＝01)
・The overvoltage detection shuts off the inverter output and coasts the motor. After that, after the retry
standby time of the [bb-31] setting, the inverter starts frequency retraction restart from the frequency at
the time of shutdown. At this time, "Alarm signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・Refer to "9.7.3 Using the Frequency Adjustment Function to Start" for details on frequency adjustment
restart.
Overvoltage detection level

DC bus voltage
Overvoltage detection
Inverter output
Free run

Active frequency matching restart

Motor speed

Retry wait time after an error

9-147
9-147

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Frequency retract restart ([bb-23]≠0, [bb-30]＝02)

・When overcurrent or overvoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the motor coasts. After
that, after the retry wait time of the [bb-31] setting, the inverter starts active frequency matching restart.
At this time, "Alarm signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・Refer to "9.7.4 Using the Frequency Pull Function to Start" for details on restarting the frequency pullin.
DC bus voltage

Overvoltage detection level
Overvoltage detection

Inverter output
Free run
Motor speed
Retry wait time after an error

Active frequency matching restart■Detect velocity ([bb-23]≠0, [bb-30]＝03)
・When overcurrent or overvoltage is detected, the inverter output is shut off and the motor coasts. Then,after the retry wait time of the [bb-31] setting, the inverter starts outputting from the rotational velocity
detected by the encoder feedback. At this time, "Alarm signal [AL]" is not outputted.
・When this setting is used, a setting related to encoder feedback is separately required. For details, referto "9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback".
Overvoltage detection level

DC bus voltage
Overvoltage detection
Inverter output
Outputfrequency

The motor speed at restart is detected,
and output starts from the detected
frequency.

Free run
Motor speed
Retry wait time after an error■Trip after decelerating stop ([bb-23]≠0, [bb-30]＝04)
・The overvoltage detection shuts off the inverter output and coasts the motor. After that, after the retry
wait time of the [bb-31] setting, the inverter performs the frequency retraction restart from thefrequency at the time of shutdown. Then, decelerating stop is performed, and "Alarm signal [AL]" isoutputted after stop.
・Refer to "9.7.4 Using the Frequency Pull Function to Start" for details on restarting the frequency pullin.
Overvoltage detection level

DC bus voltage
Overvoltage detection
Inverter output
Free run

Active frequency matching restart

Motor speed
Retry wait time after an error[AL] Output

9-148
9-148

Decelerating-stop after restart and"overvoltage error [E007]" occurs

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.9.9 Instantaneous power failure non-stop function

・The instantaneous power failure non-stop function decelerates and stops the inverter without shutting
off the output, while keeping the overvoltage level from being exceeded, even if a power shutdown
occurs during operation. If the power is restored during this function, it is possible to return to thenormal operation state in addition to decelerating stop.
・Three decelerating stop operation modes can be selected according to the setting of "Instantaneous
power failure non-stop selection [bA-30]".
Refer to the next page for details on the operation of each setting.
・When the instantaneous power failure non-stop function is operating, "Power failure deceleration [IPS]"
is outputted.
・Instantaneous power failure non-stop function, DC voltage between P-N is "Instantaneous power failure
non-stop starting voltage [bA-31]"It operates when it falls below.
・Keep [bA-31] and "Momentary power failure non-stop target level [bA-32]" at least the undervoltage
level (200V class: approx. DC172.5V, 400V class: approx. DC345V). This function does not operate
when undervoltage occurs.
・If "Instantaneous power failure non-stop selection [bA-30]" is set to "enable (deceleration stop) (01)" or"enable (no return) (02)", after this function operation, it will not be released until deceleration stop iscompleted. To restart operation, check that the power reception is restored after deceleration-stop by
this function is completed, and turn OFF the operation command once to ON again.
・When [bA-30] is set to "Valid (with return) (03)", if DC voltage between P-N recovers during
deceleration, it starts to accelerate to the original frequency again. However, if decelerating stop occurs
prior to recovery, the operation command must be turned OFF once and then ON again to restart
operation.

Code

bA-30

Item

Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function,mode selection

Description

Data

Disabled
Enabled (decelerating stop): Decelerates to a stop.
Enabled (no recovery):
Decelerates and stops at a constant DC voltage control.
Even if the power is restored during this function,
the decelerating stop will continue.
Stop (with recovery)
Decelerates and stops at a constant DC voltage control.
If the power is restored during this function operation,
the unit will return to the operating state.

00
01

bA-31

Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function,
start voltage level

When DC between P-N becomes less than or equal to thissetting, deceleration starts.

bA-32

Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function,
target voltage level

After deceleration starts, if DC between P-N exceeds thissetting by regeneration, deceleration stops once.

bA-34

bA-36
bA-37
bA-38
CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function,
deceleration time
Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function,
start frequency decrement
Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function, DC
bus voltage control P gain
Instantaneous power
failure non-stop function, DC
bus voltage control I gain

Output terminal function

Initial
value

02
00

03

200V class:
DC0.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:
DC0.0 to 800.0 V

200class:
220.0
400 class:440.0
200 class:
360.0
400 class:
720.0

Set the deceleration time when this function is activated.

0.01 to 3600.00 s

1.00

Set the frequency to start deceleration by the difference fromthe output frequency.

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.00

0.00 to 5.00

0.20

Integral gain for PI control of DC voltage-constant control.

0.00 to 150.00 s

1.00

During power failure deceleration [IPS]:
Outputs a signal during instantaneous power failure nonstop deceleration.
OFF: The function is not working.
ON: Momentary power failure non-stop deceleration.

023

002
001
017

Proportional gain for PI control of DC voltage-constantcontrol.

9-149
9-149

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Instantaneous power failure non-stop operation■Instantaneous power failure non-stop decelerating stop ([bA-30]=01)

・If the power is cut off during operation, once the DC voltage falls below the "instantaneous power
failure non-stop start voltage [bA-31]" between P-N, the output frequency will be lowered to the"instantaneous power failure non-stop deceleration start width [bA-36]" and then the deceleration will
start with the "instantaneous power failure non-stop deceleration time [bA-34]." At that time,
decelerating stop is performed while the DC between P-N does not exceed the "instantaneous power
failure non-stop target level [bA-32]".
・During deceleration, when DC voltage between P-N exceeds [bA-32] due to regenerative energy,
deceleration is stopped and constant speed operation is performed until DC voltage between P-N
becomes less than [bA-32].
DC bus voltage(Vdc)[bA-32][bA-31]
Undervoltage
level

Time

Output frequency(Hz)[bA-36][bA-34]
Time[IPS] Output

ON

Time

・Set "Instantaneous power failure non-stop starting voltage [bA-31]" so that it is smaller than "Instantaneous Momentary power failure non-stop target level [bA-32]". If the [bA-31] setting is greaterthan [bA-32], the instantaneous power failure non-stop target level will internally operate as the samevalue as [bA-31]. However, the [bA-32] setting itself does not change.
・Be sure to set [bA-32] to a value greater than √2 times of the receiving voltage. If [bA-32] is less than √2times of the incoming voltage, if power is duplicated during this function operation, the constant speed
operation status is retained and deceleration cannot be performed. In this state, the change of stop
command and frequency command is also not accepted. The power must be turned off and on again,or [bA-32] must be set again during operation.
・If " Instantaneous power failure non-stop deceleration starting range [bA-36]" is too large, sudden
deceleration may occur during this function operation, causing an overcurrent error. In addition, if "Instantaneous power failure non-stop deceleration starting range [bA-36]" is too small or "Instantaneous power failure non-stop deceleration time [bA-34]" is too long, "Undervoltage error[E009]" may occur due to insufficient regenerative force.

9-150
9-150

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Instantaneous power failure non-stop DC voltage-constant control ([bA-30]=02, 03)
・When the DC voltage drops during an instantaneous power failure or P-N, and the DC voltage falls
below the "instantaneous power failure non-stop starting voltage [bA-31]", the motor decelerates
automatically while holding the DC voltage between P-N at the "instantaneous power failure non-stoptarget level [bA-32]".
・If the instantaneous power failure time is short, operation can be continued without output shutdown
by this function. However, if an undervoltage occurs due to a momentary power failure, the output isimmediately shut off and this function terminates operation. After that, the operation at recovery froman instantaneous power failure follows "Instantaneous power failure/undervoltage retry selection [bb24]". For details, refer to "9.9.6 Restarting after instantaneous power failure or undervoltage."・If "Instantaneous power failure non-stop selection [bA-30]" is "Enabled: Restore (03)", if power isrestored prior to power shutdown, normal operation can be resumed. However, depending on thesetting of [bA-32], it will decelerate and stop. Details are as follows.
Instantaneous power failure non-stop
function, mode selection [bA-30]

Instantaneous power failure non-stop function,
target voltage level [bA-32]

Operation[bA-32] > Vre Note[bA-32] < Vre Note[bA-32] > Vre Note[bA-32] < Vre Note

Deceleration stop (DC voltage constant control) (e.g.1)
Deceleration stop (Normal operation) (e.g. 2)
Deceleration stop (DC voltage constant control) (e.g. 1)
Operation (normal operation) (e.g. 2)

Valid (no return) (02)
Valid (with return) (03)Note: [Vre] DC-voltage between P-N when receiving power and restoring power■With the instantaneous power failure non-stoptarget level [bA-32]
DC bus voltage(Vdc)

Vre (DC bus voltage whenpower is received/restored)■With the instantaneous power failure non-stoptarget level [bA-32]
DC bus voltage(Vdc)[bA-32]Vre

Vre[bA-32][bA-31][bA-31]
DC voltage constantVre (DC bus voltage whenpower is received/restored)

DC voltage constantTime

Output frequency(Hz)Time
Output frequency(Hz)[bA-30]="With return (03)"[bA-30]="No return (02)"[bA-30]=02, 03(Decelerating-Stop)

Time

Time

To recover from power

To recover from power[IPS] Output

ON[IPS] Output
Time

ON

Time

Note: Depending on the proportional (P) gain/integral (I) gain ([bA-37], [bA-38]) setting of DC voltage constant control for the
instantaneous power failure non-stop function, the DC voltage between P-N may be lower than [bA-32].

・If the difference between the "instantaneous power failure non-stop starting voltage [bA-31]" and the"instantaneous power failure non-stop target level [bA-32]" is large, if the "DC voltage constant control
P gain [bA144]" is made too large, rapid acceleration may occur immediately after this function starts
operation, causing an overcurrent error.
・Adjust this function using "Instantaneous power failure non-stop DC voltage constant control P gain[bA-37]" and "Instantaneous power failure non-stop DC voltage constant control I gain [bA-38]". Setting
a larger proportional (P) gain [bA-37] or a shorter integral (I) gain [bA-38] will make the answer fasterbut will make it easier to trip. If the proportional (P) gain [bA-37] is too low, an undervoltage error[E009] may occur due to a drop in voltage immediately after this function starts operation.

9-151
9-151

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.10 Protective function
9.10.1 Adjust the carrier frequency

・The carrier frequency is the frequency of PWM wave outputting from the inverter.
・Metallic noise from the motor can be reduced by setting "Carrier frequency [bb101]" to a large value.
However, electromagnetic noise and leakage current generated by the inverter may increase. Changing
the carrier frequency may also be effective to avoid resonance in the mechanical system and the motor.
・The setting of "Load-specification selection [Ub-03]" automatically limits the carrier frequency setting.
・Carrier frequency may be automatically reduced by the setting of "Auto Carrier Reduction Select[bb103]" or the DC braking function, etc.
・The higher the carrier frequency, the greater the heat generated by the inverter. Therefore, derating
may be required for the rated output current. The relationship between the carrier frequency and theoutput current derating varies depending on the model. For details, refer to "17.3 Current derating".
・When the "control method [AA121]" is set to "sensorless vector control (IM) (08)", in order to secure thetorque during operation in the low-speed range, even if the "carrier frequency [bb101]" is set to a value
exceeding 2.0kHz, operation is performed by automatically lowering it to 2.0kHz. In addition, since thecarrier frequency increases with acceleration, electromagnetic noise, etc. from the motor may change
depending on the output frequency.
・Set the carrier frequency to be 10 times or more of the "IM max. frequency [Hb105]" or more.
(e.g.) [bb101]=5.9kHz or more for Hb105]=590.00Hz
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

bb101

Carrier frequency

Set the carrier frequency of PWM wave
outputting from the inverter to the motor.

2.0 to 15.0 kHz (ND: Normal load)
2.0 to 10.0 kHz (LD: Light load)

2.0■Carrier frequency and its influence range
Carrier frequency
Electromagnetic noise of
the motor
Electromagnetic noise andleakage current
Heat generated by the
inverter

Lo w

High

Large

Small

Small

Large

Callier frequency: Low

Callier frequency: HighSample Output VoltageWaveform of Inverter (PWM
Output)

9-152
9-152

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.10.2 Automatically reduce the carrier frequency

・The higher the carrier frequency, the higher the internal temperature of the inverter will rise, which may
result in shorter life or failure. The automatic carrier reduction function reduces the life of the inverterby automatically reducing the carrier frequency according to the output current or the cooling fin
temperature.
・Depending on the current derating specification, it may be necessary to reduce the carrier frequency
further than this function. If this happens, reduce the "Carrier frequency [bb101]" or review theoperation pattern/system so that the max. output current may be reduced to meet the current derating
specifi cations for each model. For details, refer to "17.3 Current derating".
・The variation of carrier frequency is within the upper limit "carrier frequency [bb101]" to lower limit
3kHz. This function is disabled when [bb101] is less than or equal to 3kHz.
・This function is disabled regardless of the setting of "Auto Carrier Reduction Select [bb103]" when
"Sprinkle Carrier Pattern Select [bb102]" is set to other than "Disabled (00)".
・When the carrier frequency is changed, the operation rate is 2kHz per second.
Code

bb103

Item
Automatic carrier
reduction selection

Description
The automatic carrier reduction function does not work.
Reduces the carrier according to the output current.
Reduce the carrier according to the cooling fin temperature.

Data

Initial
value

00
01
02

00

■Reduction Curve for Output-Current-Dependent ([bb103]=01)
・If the output current exceeds a certain percentage of the rated output current, the carrier frequency is
reduced.
・The carrier frequency automatically recovers when the output current drops.
Carrier frequency(kHz)15.0kHz12.0kHz55%

9.0kHz67%

6.0kHz79%

3.0kHz91%
050
60% 72%

Output current(%)

100
84% 96%■Reduction Curve for Cooling-Fin Temperature Dependence ([bb103]=02)
・When the cooling fin temperature exceeds a certain value, the carrier frequency is reduced.
・The carrier frequency automatically recovers when the temperature drops.
Carrier frequency (kHz)15.0kHz12.0kHz
9.0kHz6.0kHz3.0kHz
0

40

45

50

55

60

65

9-153
9-153

70

75

80

Fin temperature(°C)

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.10.3 Reduce motor electromagnetic noise

・Enabling "Sprinkle Carrier Pattern Selection [bb102]" may reduce the electromagnetic noise of the
motor due to low carrier frequency.
・When [bb102] is set to "Pattern 1 valid (01)", it is possible to cut electromagnetic sound in a certain
area and change the electromagnetic sound from the motor.
・When "Sprinkle carrier pattern selection [bb102]" is set to "Pattern 1 valid (01)",The carrier frequency of
the inverter is about the same as when "Carrier frequency [bb101]" is set to 2.5kHz.
・The electromagnetic noise reduction effect of the motor varies depending on the motor used.
Depending on the motor characteristics, there may be no effect.
Code

bb102

Item

Description

Sprinkle carrier pattern selection

Disabled:
Carrier frequency set in "Carrier frequency [bb101]" is used
for operation.
Pattern 1 valid:
Changing the carrier frequency at a fixed cycle may reduce
electromagnetic noise from the motor.

Data

Initial
value

00
00
01

9.10.4 Trip the inverter externally
・The external trip function generates an "external trip error [E012]" by assigning an "external error[ES](033)" input terminal to the "input terminal function ([CA-01] to [CA-08])" and ON the terminal.
・Use this function when the inverter is to be tripped by an error (trip) signal generated by a peripheral
system, etc.
・If "External trip error [E012]" occurs, trip is not canceled even if the "External error [ES]" inputterminal isturned OFF. Reset the trip by resetting or turning the power off and then on again.
・[ES] If the trip release is performed while the inputterminals remain ON, the [E012] occurs again. Before
releasing the trip, make sure that the [ES] inputterminal is OFF.
・Restart after reset follows the setting of "Restart after reset release [bb-41]". For details, refer to "9.7.5
Start after Trip Reset or Power On".
・[E012] occurs when the [ES] inputterminal is ON even when the inverter is stopped outputting.
Code

Item

CA-06

Input terminal function

Description
External error [EXT]:
When this signal is turned ON, "External trip error [E012]" will occur.

RUN command[ES] Input
Motor speed

ONFree run[RST] Input[AL] Output

ON
ON

9-154
9-154

Data

Initial
value

033

033

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.10.5 Prevent starting immediately after power-on

・The power restoration restart prevention function generates "USP error [E013]" when the power is turnedon while the operation command to the inverter remains ON to prevent a sudden start. To use thisfunction, assign "Prevent restart after power restoration [USP](034)" to the input terminal or set "[USP]
setting selection [CA-73]" to "Enabled (01)". When "Disable (00)" is selected, this function operates whenthe [USP] pin input is ON, and when "Enable (01)", this function operates at all times regardless of the
input pin status.
・The "USP error [E013]" trip can also be released by turning OFF the operation command in addition to
the resetting operation. (e.g. 1)
・If the trip is released while the operation command is ON, the inverter starts operation at the same timeas the release. (e.g. 2)
・If the operation command is ON after the power is turned on, normal operation will occur. (e.g. 3)
・Unlike other trips, "USP error [E013]" is automatically cancelled when the operation command is turnedOFF.
・This function performs judgment for up to 2 seconds after the control power supply is established.
Code

Item

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

CA-73[USP] active selection

Description
Preventing power restoration restart [USP]:
If the power is turned on while this signal and the operationcommand are ON, a "USP error [E013]" will occur.
Disabled: [USP] input-pin enabled
Enabled: Always enable the power restart prevention function(e.g. 1) Turning the power ON with the(e.g. 2) Turning the power ON with theoperation command ON
operation command ON(Cancel by operation command OFF)
(Cancel by [RST] connector)
Power supply

Power supply[FR]/[RR] Input[FR]/[RR] Input[FR]/[RR] Input[USP] Input[USP] Input[USP] Input[AL] Output
Output frequency[RST] Input[RST] Input[AL] Output[AL] Output

Output frequency

Output frequency

9-155
9-155

Initial
value

034

-

00
01

00

(e.g. 3) Operation command after
power ON(normal operation)

Power supply[RST] Input

DataInverter Function

Chapter 99.10.6 Jump frequency

・The frequency jump function is used when the actuator is operated avoiding the resonance point of theload machine system.
・Three jump frequencies can be set.
・The output frequency outside the range of the jump command changes continuously according to thenormal acceleration/deceleration time.
・When this function is set, acceleration or deceleration stops at a frequency outside the jump frequency
range when the output frequency is set within the jump frequency range to avoid constant speed
operation within the jump frequency range. In addition, "Icon 2 LIM detailed monitor [dC-37]" displays"Upper/lower limit, jump frequency setting limit in progress (05)". For details on [dC-37], refer to "10.3.7
Checking the details of the warning status of the inverter".
Code
AG101
AG103
AG105
AG102
AG104
AG106

Description

Data

Initialvalue

Sets the center of the frequency range that you want tojump. 0.00 For Hz, the frequency-jump function is disabled.

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

Set 1/2 of the frequency width to be jumped. Jumps therange of ± jump frequency width from the jump frequency.

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

Item
Jump frequency 1,
1st-motor
Jump frequency 2,
1st-motor
Jump frequency 3,
1st-motor
Jump frequency
width 1, 1st-motor
Jump frequency
width 2, 1st-motor
Jump frequency
width 3, 1st-motor

Output frequency[AG106][AG105][AG106][AG104][AG103][AG104][AG101][AG102][AG102]Frequency reference

9.10.7 Select cooling fan operation
・The following cooling fan operations can be selected by the setting of cooling fan operation selection[bA-70].
- Always run the cooling fan.
- Operate the cooling fan under any conditions when the cooling fin temperature reaches 60°C or higher
for 3 minutes during inverter operation and after shutdown.
- Operate the cooling fan when the cooling fin temperature reaches approximately 40°C or higher.
・If an undervoltage status occurs due to a momentary power failure or power shutdown while the cooling
fan is running, the cooling fan will pause and automatically recover after power is restored.
・Refer to "9.11.10 Outputting Cooling Fan Life Warning" and "10.3.3 Monitoring Life Warning" and "16.2.6Life Warning Output" for more information on the cooling fan life diagnosis, "Fan Life Indication [WAF]"
and "Cooling Fan Cumulative Operating Time Monitor [dC-26]".
・The cooling fin temperature can be checked in "Cooling fin temperature monitor [dC-15]". For details,
refer to "10.3.2 Monitoring Cooling Fin Temperature".

9-156
9-156

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

bA-70

Item

Description

Data

Cooling fan
controlmethodselection

Continuous operation:
The cooling fan operates at all times.
ON during operation:
When the inverter enters the operating state, the cooling fan operates automatically.
It also operates for 3 minutes after the inverter operation is stopped.
However, if the cooling fin temperature still exceeds 50°C after three minutes, thecooling fan will continue to operate until the temperature drops below 50°C andthen stop after a further three minutes.
Note: Even when operation is stopped, if the cooling fin temperature exceeds
60°C, the cooling fan will start operating.
Depends on temperature
If the temperature of the cooling fins in the inverter exceeds approximately 40°C, thecooling fan will operate.
When the cooling fin temperature is 40°C or less for 3 minutes, it stops.

Initial
value

00

01
01

02

9.10.8 Monitor the temperature of the motor
・Thermistors installed in external devices such as motors can be wired to the inverter and set functions toprotect the temperature of the external devices.
・When using an external thermistor, wire between the [AUT]-[COM] terminals of the control terminal block
after setting "Thermistor selection [Cb-40]" to "PTC (resistor) enable (01)". In this case, the common is
the [COM] terminal regardless of the sink/source logic.
・If the resistance of PTC thermistor is greater than or equal to the thermistor error level [bb-70], "thermistor
error [E035]" will occur. Adjust [bb-70] or "Thermistor Adjust [Cb-41]" according to the characteristics ofthe thermistor to be used.
・When "Thermistor selection [Cb-40]" is set to "PTC (resistance) enable (01)", the setting of "Input terminal
function [AUT] selection [CA-05]" is disabled.
・Separate the wiring of the external thermistor from other common wires as twisted wires. Keep the wire
length within 20 m. For wiring, refer to "5.4 Control Circuit Terminal Block".
・Since the current flowing through the thermistor is a weak current, consider wiring separation, etc. sothat the thermistor will not be affected by noise caused by motor current, etc.
Code

Item

bb-70

Thermistor error
level

Cb-40

Thermistor typeselection

Cb-41

Thermistor gain
adjustment

Description
Set the thermal resistance to generate a thermistor error [E035]
according to the thermistor specifications.
Valid when "Thermistor selection [Cb-40]" is "PTC (resistor) valid (01)".
Disabled
PTC (resistor) enabled
Use this for gain adjustment.

Data

Initialvalue

0 to
10000 Ω

3000

00
01
0.0 to1000.000
100.0

9.10.9 Detect a ground fault
・Set the ground fault detection protective function in the ground fault detection selection [bb-64].
・When the ground fault detection protective function is enabled, the ground fault detection is performed
when the power is turned on. If the output of the inverter (between the inverter output terminal andmotor) is grounded, "Ground fault error [E014]" will occur.
・If the ground fault is detected when the motor has the induced voltage (which is running in coastingmode), the ground fault error [E014] may be detected incorrectly. In this case, disable the ground fault
detection selection or turn on the power with the induced voltage dropped sufficiently.
・If a trip has occurred, it will not operate even if the ground fault detection protection function is enabled.
[E014] is a serious failure error. It cannot be cleared by resetting operation. Shut off the power supply,
check the insulation and wiring of the motor, and check that there is no problem before turning the poweron again.
・This function detects a ground fault between the inverter output and the motor. It cannot detect a ground
fault on the input side.

9-157
9-157

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

Item

Description

bb-64

Detect ground fault selection

Data

Disabled: Earth fault detection function is disabled.

00

Enabled: Earth fault detection function is enabled.

01

Initialvalue
00

9.10.10 Detect an input phase loss
・Set the input open-phase protective function with the input open-phase selection [bb-65].
・If [bb-65] is set to "Enabled (01)", "Input Phase Loss Error [E024]" will occur if the input power line is
disconnected or disconnected and the phase loss status continues.
・「If an input open-phase error [E024] occurs, the power supply to the inverter must be disconnected andthe status of the wires and breakers must be checked. ([E024] may also occur when the voltage imbalanceof the three-phase input power supply is significant.)
・If the "Input-Phase Loss Judgment Level [bb-77]" is set to a small value, false detection is likely to occur
during normal operation. If it is set to a large value, false detection may not be possible during phase loss.
In addition, the detection accuracy will deteriorate when the motor is in the regenerative state or when
the output current is very small with respect to the inverter rated current. Adjust [bb-77] according to
your system. Be sure to check that there is no problem. If it does not improve by adjusting [bb-77], set"Input Phase Loss Selection [bb-65]" to "Disabled (00)".
Code

Item

Description

bb-65

Input phase loss detection enablebb-77

Input phase loss detection level

Data

Disabled: Input phase loss function disabled.
Enabled: Input phase loss function is enabled.
Adjust the judgment level of the input phase loss.

00
01
0 to 200

Initial
value
00
50

9.10.11 Output phase loss detection sensitivity
・Set the output phase loss protective function with the output phase loss selection [bb-66].
・If [bb-66] is set to "Enabled (01)", "Output Phase Loss Error [E034]" will occur if the status of phase loss
continues due to disconnection or disconnection of the motor wire, etc.
・This function operates when the outputfrequency is equal to or greater than 5 Hz and equal to or lessthan 100Hz.
・Set "Output-phase failure detection sensitivity [bb-67]" to a value less than or equal to the current thatflows constantly, assuming that the rated current is 100%.
・If the drive motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity or the "Carrier frequency [bb101]" is lower,
an out-of-phase may be incorrectly detected. Detection accuracy may also deteriorate depending on theenvironment of your system. Adjust [bb-67] and [bb101] according to your system. Be sure to check that
there is no problem. If it does not improve by adjusting [bb-67] or [bb101], set "Output Phase Loss
Selection [bb-66]" to "Disable (00)".
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

bb-66

Output phase loss
detection enable

Disabled: Output phase loss function disabled.
Enabled: Output phase loss function is enabled.

00
01

00

bb-67

Output phase loss
detection sensitivity

Adjusts the sensitivity of the output phase loss.

1 to 100 %

10

bb101

Carrier frequency

Set the carrier frequency of PWM wave
outputting from the inverter to the motor.

2.0 to 15.0 kHz (ND: Normal load)
2.0 to 10.0 kHz (LD: Light load)

2.0

9-158
9-158

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11 Warning signal
9.11.1 Alarm signal

・By assigning "Alarm signal [AL](017)" to any of the output terminal function selections ([CC-01]/[CC02]/[CC-07]), a signal is output when the inverter trips.
・In the "Output terminal a/b(NO/NC" selections ([CC-11], [CC-12], and [CC-17]), the output specifi cationsof the a-contact (NO: normally open) or b-contact (NC: normally closed) can be set individually for the
output terminals [UPF]/[DRV] and the relay output terminals.
- A contact (the contact closes in NO):ON and the contact opens in OFF)- Contact b (Contact closes at NC):OFF and contact opens at ON)
・In the default status, the [AL] signal is assigned to the c-contact relay of [MB]-[MC]/[MA]-[MC].
- "Output terminal function [AL] selection [CC-07]" = "Alarm signal [AL](017)"- "Output terminal [ML]a/b(NO/NC) selection [CC-17]" = "Normally closed (01)"・If the system recognizes an error when the inverter power is cut off, this may be improved by changing
the wiring and contact selection.
・In the default setting, [MA]-[MC] closes when the power is turned OFF and opens when there is no
problem with the inverter at the power ON, as shown in the table below. To avoid this condition, set"Output terminal [ML]a/b (NO/NC)[CC-17]" to "a contact (NO) (00)", or change the error detecting wire.
・Refer to Section 5.4 "Control Terminal Block" for the electric specifi cations of the relay contacts ([MB][MC] and [MA]-[MC]).
Output terminal [ML] active state[CC-17]

Power supply
ON

00(Initial setting)

OFF
ON

01

OFF

Code

Status output terminal

Inverter status

MA - MCMB - MC

Abnormal condition

Close

Open

Normal condition

Open

Close

-

Open

Close

Abnormal condition

Open

Close

Normal condition

Close

Open

-

Open

Close

Data

Initialvalue

Alarm signal[AL]:This signal turns ON when a trip occurs.

017

002
001
017

Operates as a-contact (NO: normally open).

00

Operates as a b-contact (NC: normally closed).

01

Item

Description

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

CC-11
CC-12
CC-17

Output terminal active state00■Logic for relay output operation
Power ON
CC-17

Normalcondition

Abnormalcondition

01 (Normal close)Power OFF00 (Normal open)(Initial setting)

MC

MC

MB

MB

MA

MA

MC

MC

MB

MB

MA

MA

9-159
9-159

-

MC
MB
MA

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.2 Output a serious failure signal

・By assigning "major failure signal [MJA](018)" to one of the output terminal function selections ([CC01]/[CC-02]/[CC-07]), the output of a major failure signal is enabled.
・The trips judged as serious failures are as shown in the table below. If these conditions occur, the trip
release by resetting cannot be performed.
・When this signal is output, the hardware of the inverter may have failed. Check the trip history and takeappropriate action.
Error Code

Name

Contents

E008

Memory error

There is an error in the storage element of the inverter.

E011

CPU failure

There is an error in the inverter CPU of the drive.

E014

Earth fault error

The inverter has a ground fault.

E030

IGBT(Driver) error

There is an error in the main elements of the inverter.

Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Heavy Fault Signaling [MJA]:This signal turns ON when an error (trip in the table above)that is judged to be a serious failure occurs.

018

002
001
017

9-160
9-160

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.3 Outputs warning in case of overload

・The overload notice can be output by assigning "Overload notice [OL](035)"/"Overload notice 2[OL2](036)" to any of the output terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07]).
・[OL]/[OL2] The signal is output when the output current exceeds the respective overload forewarninglevel.
・Signal can be output according to the operation status by changing "Overload notice signal output
mode selection [CE105]".
・If the overload notice level is set too high, an overcurrent error may occur before the overload noticesignal is output. In this case, lower the overload forewarning level.
・When "Overload notice signal output mode selection [CE105]" is set to "Constant speed medium only(01)" and the output frequency command destination is the analogue input, if the frequency command
input fluctuates finely, it may not be judged as constant speed operation. In such cases, change[CE105] to "Acceleration/Deceleration, Constant Speed (00)" or increase "Output Current-related
Output Terminal Function Filter Time Constant (LOC/LOC2/OL/OL2)[CE-61)".
Code

Item

CE105

Overload signal output
Mode selection

CE106
CE107
CE-61

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Overload warning level 1
Overload warning level 2
Output current related
filter for terminal
function

Output terminal function

Description

Data

Valid during acceleration/deceleration andconstant speed
Valid only during constant speed
Sets the current level at which the overload
notice signal is output.
[LOC]/[LOC2]/[OL]/[OL2] Sets the filter forthe detection level.

00

Initial
value
00

01
(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.15×Rated
output current

0 to 2000 ms

300

Overload warning notice [OL]:This signal is turned ON when the output
current exceeds the overload forewarninglevel 1.
Overload warning notice 2[OL2]:
This signal is turned ON when the output
current exceeds the overload forewarninglevel 2.

035
002
001
017
036

■When overload warning signal output mode is in acceleration/deceleration or enabled during constant speed
operation ([CE105] = 00))
Overload warning level[CE106][CE107]

Output current

Output frequency[OL] Output

ON[OL2] Output

ON■When overload warning signal output mode is enabled only during constant speed operation ([CE105] = 01])
Overload warning level[CE106][CE107]

Output current

Output frequency[OL] Output[OL2] Output

ON
ON

9-161
9-161

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.4 Warning signal in case of low current

・Low-current signals can be output by assigning "Low-current signals [LOC](033)"/ "Low-current signals
2 [LOC2](034)" to any of the output terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07]).
・[LOC]/[LOC2] The signal is output when the load becomes lighter and the output current falls below"Low current detection level 1 [CE102]"/"Low current detection level 2 [CE103]."・Signal can be output according to the operation status by changing "Low current signal output mode
selection [CE101]".
・If "Low current signal output mode selection [CE101]" is set to "Constant speed medium only (01)" andthe output frequency command destination is an analog input, the operation may not be judged as
constant speed operation if the frequency command input fluctuates finely. In such cases, change[CE101] to "Acceleration/Deceleration, Constant Speed (00)" or increase "Output Current-related
Output Terminal Function Filter Time Constant (LOC/LOC2/OL/OL2)[CE-61)".
Code

CE101

Item
Low current signal output
mode selection

Data

Valid during acceleration/deceleration andconstant speed

00

Valid only during constant speed01

Initialvalue
01

Low current detection level 2

Sets the output current level at which theoverload warning signal is output.

(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.00×Rated
outputcurrent

Output current related filter
for terminal function[LOC]/[LOC2]/[OL]/[OL2] Sets the filter forthe detection level.

0 to 2000 ms

300

Output terminal function

Low Current Signaling [LOC]:
This signal turns ON when the output
current falls below the low-current
detection level.
Low-current indication 2[LOC2]:This signal turns ON when the output
current falls below the low-current
detection level 2.

CE102

Low current detection level 1

CE103
CE-61

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Description

033
002
001
017

034

■When the low-current signal mode is enabled during acceleration/deceleration or constant speed operation([CE101] = 00))
Low current detection level[CE102][CE103]

Output current

Output frequency[LOC] Output[LOC2] Output

ON
ON■Low-current signal mode is enabled only during constant speed operation ([CE101] = 01).
Low current detection level[CE102][CE103]

Output current

Output frequency[LOC] Output[LOC2] Output

ON
ON

9-162
9-162

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.5 Warning signal before electronic thermal protection of motor

・Electronic thermal warning signal can be output by assigning "Electronic thermal warning (motor)[THM](026)" to one of the output terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07]).
・Before "Motor overload error [E005]" occurs in the electronic thermal function, the status can be known
by outputting a warning signal.
・An "Motor overload error [E005]" occurs when the accumulated flow of electronic thermal load ratio
monitor (motor) [dA-42]" reaches 100.00%.
・Refer to "8.1.4 Electronic Thermal Setting" for details of the electronic thermal setting for the motor.
Code

Item

Description

dA-42

Electronic thermal loadfactor monitor (Motor)

Electronic thermal load factor monitor (Motor) If this monitor reaches
100.00%, "Motor overload error [E005]" occurs.

CE-30

Electronic thermal
warning level (Motor)

Set the level to turn ON the electronic thermal warning (motor)[THM]. When [dA-42] exceeds this setting, the [THM] signal turns ON.
It does not work when set to 0.00%.

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

Electronic thermal warning (motor) [THM]:
When [dA-42] exceeds the [CE-30] setting, this signal turns ON.

Output current

ON

9-163
9-163

Initialvalue-

0.00 to100.00 %
85.00

026

Electronic thermal
warning level (Motor)[CE-30]Electronic thermal loadfactor monitor (Motor)[dA-42[THM] Output

Data

002
001
017

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.6 Warning signal before electronic thermal protection of the inverter・Electronic thermal warning signal can be output by assigning "Electronic thermal warning (inverter)[THC](027)" to one of the output terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07]).
・Before "Controller overload error [E039]" occurs in the electronic thermal function, the status can be
known by outputting a warning signal.
・「The controller overload error [E039] occurs when the totalized value of the electronic thermal loadfactor monitor (inverter) [dA-43] reaches 100.00%.
・The characteristics of the inverter electronic thermal are fixed for each type to protect the inverter.
Adjustment by parameters is not possible.
・Regardless of the "Load spec. selection [Ub-03]" setting, the overload current rating at ND rating
applies to the electronic thermal of the inverter. To protect the inverter, if it is less than 3.0Hz, thereduction ratio is applied as shown in the figure below. Therefore, due to operation in the low-speed
range, the electronic thermal warning (inverter) [THC] may be outputted faster.
Reduction magnification
At ND rating
Overload current rating×1.0 times
×0.9 times
×0.8times

0

1.5

3

Output frequency(Hz)・When the output current is less than the rated output current of the inverter, the integrated electronic
thermal load factor of the inverter subtracts 0% from 100% at a rate that changes linearly in 10
seconds.

Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

dA-43

Electronic thermal loadfactor monitor (Inverter)

Electronic thermal load factor monitor (Motor) If this monitor
reaches 100.00%, "Controller overload error [E039]" occurs.

0.00 to 100.00 %

-

CE-31

Electronic thermal
warning level (Inverter)

Set the level to turn ON the electronic thermal warning(inverter) [THC]. When [dA-43] exceeds this setting, the [THC]
signal turns ON.
It does not work when set to 0.00%.

0.00 to 100.00 %

85.00

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Electronic Thermal Warning (Inverter) [THC]:
When [dA-43] exceeds the [CE-31] setting, this signal turns ON.

027

002
001
017

Rated output current×110%
Rated output current

Output current

Electronic thermal warninglevel (Inverter)[CE-31]

Electronic thermal load factor
Monitor (inverter)[dA-43][THC] Output

ON

Note: Example of operation during constant speed operation at the highest frequency

9-164
9-164

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.7 Warning signal when the received power voltage is high・By assigning "Receiving overvoltage [OVS](081)" to one of the output terminal function selections ([CC01], [CC-02], and [CC-07]), a signal is output when the power of the inverter is high.
・The power receiving overvoltage signal is turned ON when the DC voltage across P-N continuously
exceeds the voltage level set in "Power receiving voltage level selection [bb-62]" for 100 seconds.
・When "Power receiving overvoltage selection [bb-61]" is "warning (00)", the [OVS] signal is outputted.
・When [bb-61] is "Error (01)", the [OVS] signal is outputted, and tripped at "Receiving overvoltage error[E015]".
・This function does not operate during operation and is detected only when the inverter is stopped.
・Even if the power receiving overvoltage state continues, the trip can be cancelled. However, if thepower-receiving overvoltage status continues for 100 seconds after releasing the trip, it trips again with
"Power-receiving overvoltage error [E015]".
Code

Item

Description[OVS] Outputs the signal.

00[OVS] Outputs a signal.
Trip at "Receiving overvoltage error [E015]".

01

bb-61

Power supply
overvoltage selection

bb-62

Power supply
overvoltage level setting

Sets the incoming overvoltage level.

Output terminal function

Receiving overvoltage [OVS]:
When [bb-62] setting or higher is maintained for
100 seconds while the inverter is stopped, a signal
is output.
OFF: Level than incoming overvoltage
ON: Incoming overvoltage or higher

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Data

9-165
9-165

Initialvalue
00

200V class:DC300.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:
DC600.0 to 800.0 V

200V class
390.0
400V class
780.0

081

002
001
017

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.8 Warning signal when the temperature of the cooling fin rises

・Allocation of "Cooling fin overheat warning [OHF](032)" to any of the "Output terminal function
selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07])" enables output of a warning signal when the cooling fin
overheats.
・Monitor the temperature of the cooling fins inside the inverter. Before "Temperature error [E021]"
occurs, the status can be known by signal ling.
・If the cooling fin temperature exceeds 105°C max, "Temperature error [E021]" will occur.
Data

Initialvalue

Monitors the temperature of the cooling fins.

-20.0 to 200.0 ℃-

Cooling fin overheat warning levelSet the cooling fin temp. to turn ON the cooling
fin overheat warning [OHF].

0 to 200 ℃

100Output terminal function

Cooling fin overheat warning [OHF]:
When the [dC-15] value exceeds the [CE-34]
setting, this signal is turned ON.

032

002
001
017

Code

Item

dC-15

Cooling fin temperature monitor

CE-34
CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Description

Output current

Cooling fin overheat
warning level[CE-34]

Cooling fin temperaturemonitor [dC-15][OHF] Output

ON

9-166
9-166

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.9 Warning signal of electrolytic capacitor life on the board

・By assigning "Capacitor life notice [WAC](029)" to any of the output terminal function selections ([CC01], [CC-02], and [CC-07]), a warning signal for the electrolytic capacitor life on the PCB can be output.
・The life of the capacitor on the board is diagnosed from the temperature inside the inverter and theambient temperature set to "Average ambient temperature of cooling fan [bA-72]".
・The status of this signal can also be monitored in the Life Diagnostic Monitor [dC-16].
・When the warning of the electrolytic capacitor life occurs, it is recommended to replace the inverter
body.

Code

Item

Description

Initial
value

Data
ON

dC-16

Life assessment
monitorbA-72

Ambient temperature

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

Displays the life judgment of the electrolytic
capacitor on the board, the cooling fan, thepower module that is the main element of theinverter, and the internal circuit (inrush
current prevention circuit) that suppresses
inrush current to the inverter.

Set the ambient temperature of the operating
environment.
Capacitor life indicator [WAC]:
Outputs a warning of the life of theelectrolytic capacitor on the board.
OFF: No warning
ON: Circuit board replacement due tothe life of the capacitor

9-167
9-167

OFF
4 3 2 1
ON: Life span 1: Capacitor on board
OFF: Normal 2: Cooling fans
3: Power modules
4: Inrush current
prevention circuit--10 to 50 ℃

40

029

002
001
017

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.10 Warning signal of cooling fan life

・By assigning "Fan life notice [WAF](030)" to any of the output terminal function selections ([CC-01],[CC-02], and [CC-07]), a warning signal for the cooling fan life can be output.
・The life of the cooling fan is estimated from the cumulative operating hours of the cooling fan and theambient temperature set to "ambient temperature [bA-72]", and when it is time to replace the coolingfan, a signal is outputted.
・After replacing the cooling fan, the accumulated operating time is cleared by Clear Cooling Fan
Cumulative Time [bA-71]. This enables the life assessment of the cooling fan after replacement.
・The status of this signal can also be monitored in the Life Diagnostic Monitor [dC-16].
・Check for clogging of the cooling fan when the "Fan life indicator [WAF]" signal is output.
・Do not clear the cumulative operation time except when replacing the cooling fan, as the life diagnosisof the cooling fan will not work properly.
・When the fan is stopped in the "Cooling fan operation selection [bA-70]", the accumulated operation
time of the cooling fan is not performed.
Code

Initial
value

Item

Description

Data

dC-16

Life assessment
monitor

Displays the life judgment of the electrolytic
capacitor on the board, the cooling fan, thepower module that is the main element of theinverter, and the internal circuit (inrush
current prevention circuit) that suppresses
inrush current to the inverter.

Disable00

bA-71

Cooled fan
accumulated
time clearing
selectClears the accumulated operating time of thecooling fan.

01

Ambient
temperature

Set the ambient temperature of the operating
environment.

-10 to 50 ℃

40Output terminal
function

Fan life indicator [WAF]:
Outputs the life indicator of the coolingfan.
OFF: No warning
ON: Time to replace cooling fan due tolifetime

030

002
001
017

ON

bA-72

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

9-168
9-168

OFF
4 3 2 1
ON: Life span 1: Capacitor on board
OFF: Normal 2: Cooling fans
3: Power modules
4: Inrush current prevention
circuit-00

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.11 Warning signal of inverter main element life

・By assigning "Power Module Life Indication [WAP](097)" to any of the output terminal function
selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07]), a signal can be output to warn that the life of the power
module, which is the main element of the inverter, is approaching.
・By assigning "Inrush-proof circuit life notice [WAIC](098)" to any of the "output terminal function
selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07])", a signal can be output to alert the user that the life of theinternal circuit (inrush current prevention circuit) that suppresses inrush current flowing through theinverter is approaching.
・The status of this signal can also be monitored in the Life Diagnostic Monitor [dC-16].
・When the warning of the power module life or the inrush current prevention circuit life occurs, it
indicates that the replacement time of the inverter main unit is near. Consider early replacement.
Code

Item

Description

Life assessment
monitor

Displays the life judgment of the electrolytic
capacitor on the board, the cooling fan, thepower module that is the main element of
the inverter, and the internal circuit (inrush
current prevention circuit) that suppresses
inrush current to the inverter.

Output terminal
function

Power Module life indicator [WAP]:
Outputs the power module life indicator.
OFF: No warning
ON: The power module is near the end ofits life.
Consider updating the inverter.
Emergency protection circuit life indicator[WAIC]:
Outputs a warning of the life of the inrush
current prevention circuit.
OFF: No warning
ON: The inrush current circuit is nearing
the end of its service life. Consider
updating the inverter.

Initial
value

Data
ON

dC-16

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

9-169
9-169

OFF
4 3 2 1
ON: Life span 1: Capacitor on board
OFF: Normal 2: Cooling fans
3: Power modules
4: Inrush current prevention
circuit

-

097

002
001
017
098

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.12 Warning signal when the operating time has elapsed/power ON time has elapsed
・By assigning "RUN time over [RNT](024)" or "Power ON time over [ONT](025)" to any of the output
terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07]), a signal can be output when the operation
time or power ON time exceeds the set time.
・When the cumulative operation time of the inverter exceeds the setting time of "RUN time/power ON
time level[CE-36]", the [RNT] signal is outputted. Cumulative operation time can be checked in"Cumulative time during RUN monitor [dC-22]".
・When the cumulative power ON time exceeds the set time of "RUN time/power ON time level[CE-36]",
the [ONT] signal is issued. Cumulative power ON time can be checked in "Cumulative power ON time
monitor [dC-24]".
・When setting the value as a guide for replacing the inverter, set it with a margin.
・The power ON times include not only the main-circuit power supply but also the power supply status ofonly the external ＋24V power supply.
Code

Item

dC-22

Accumulated RUN time monitor

The inverter operation time is accumulated
and stored for monitoring.

dC-24

Accumulated power-on
time monitor

The power ON hours of the inverter are
accumulated and stored for monitoring.

CE-36

Accumulated RUN time (RNT)
Accumulated Power-on time (ONT)
setting[RNT], [ONT] Sets the elapsed time when thesignal is output.

Output terminal function

RUN time-over [RNT]:
RUN time-over signal is outputted.
OFF: Less than set duration
ON: Set duration or longer
Power ON time-over [ONT]:
Power ON time-over signal is outputted.
OFF: Less than set duration
ON: Set duration or longer

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Data

Initialvalue

0 to 1,000,000 hr-

0 to 100,000 hr

0

Description

024
002
001
017
025

Setting of RUN time over [RNT]/Power ON time over [ONT]■S
RUN time-over [RNT]/Power ON time-over [ONT]e.g. 1e.g. 2e.g. 3e.g. 4

When the inverter is operated for 250 days/year × 8 hours × 5 years = 10000 hours for the
first time after shipping from the factory, a warning is issued.
After (Example 1), when the inverter is operated for 250 days/year x 8 hours x 3 years =6000 hours, a warning is issued.
When the inverter is turned ON for 300 days/year × 24 hours × 3 years = 21600 hours forthe first time from the factory-shipped condition, an alarm is issued.
After (Ex. 3), 250 days/year × 8 hours × 5 years = 10000 hours, a warning is issued when
the inverter is turned ON.

9-170
9-170

RUN time/power ON timelevel [CE-36] setting
10000
16000
(10000+6000)
21600
31600
(21600+10000)

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.13 Detection for disconnection and out of range of analog input

・By assigning "Analog burnout VRF[VRFDc](050)" or "Analog burnout IRF[IRFDc](051)" to any of theoutput terminal function selections ([CC-01]/[CC-02]/[CC-07]), analog burnout can be output.
However, when "[VRF] Operating level selection at disconnection [CE-51]"/"[IRF] Operating levelselection at disconnection ([CE-53])" is "Disabled (00)", this signal is not output. When used, it must be
set to "Valid (in range) (01)" or "Valid (out of range) (02)".
・Window comparator signal can be output by assigning "Window comparator VRF [WCVRF](056)" and"Window comparator IRF[WCIRF](057" to any of "Output terminal function selection ([CC-01]/[CC02]/[CC-07])".
・The [VRF]/[IRF] signal is output when the input value of the analog input [WCIRF]/[WCIRF] is within therange of "Window comparator [VRF] upper limit level [CE-40]" to "Window comparator [VRF] lower limit
level [CE-43]" or "Window comparator [IRF] upper limit level [CE-40]" to "Window comparator [IRF]
lower limit level [CE-44]". In addition, a hysteresis width can be provided at the upper/lower limit level.
・The window comparator signal output range is also applied to the analog disconnection signal. The
signal ON/OFF status can be changed by setting [CE-51]/[CE-53]. Refer to the table below for details.
・The inverter can be operated with a specific frequency command even when the analog input becomesmaximum due to a short-circuit failure or when the analog input becomes 0% due to disconnection. If
this happens, set [CE-51]/[CE-53] to "Valid (Within Range) (01)" or "Valid (Out of Range) (02)", and set
the analogue input value (%) equivalent to the frequency command that you want to output to "[VRF]
Operating level at burnout [CE-50]" or "[IRF] Operating level at burnout [CE-52]". Refer to the tablebelow for the analogue input type according to the setting of [CE-51]/[CE-53].
Operation set level
implement timing[CE-51]/[CE-53]

Window comparator[WCVRF]/ [WCIRF]

Analogdisconnection[VRFDc]/[IRFDc]

Analog input use value

Disable (00)

ON
OFF

OFF
OFF

The analog input value is used without change.
The analog input value is used without change.

Valid (within range) (01)

ON
OFF

ON
OFF

[CE-50]/[CE-52] Use set value
The analog input value is used without change.

Valid (out of range) (02)

ON
OFF

OFF
ON

The analog input value is used without change.
[CE-50]/[CE-52] Use set value・[VRFDc]/[IRFDc] When outputting a signal, "Operating level at disconnection ([CE-50], [CE-52])" can beused as the analog input instead of the actual analog input. However, if "Analogue command hold
[AHD]" of the inputterminal function is ON, the held frequency command takes precedence.
・To use the analog disconnection signal as disconnection detection (analog input value: min.), set theanalog input value to be judged as disconnection to the window comparator upper limit level ([CE-40]
and [CE-43]).
・To use the analogue disconnection signal as short circuit detection (analogue input value: max.), set
the analogue input value to be judged as short circuit to the window comparator lower limit level ([CE41], [CE-44]).

9-171
9-171

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code
CE-40
CE-43
CE-41
CE-44
CE-42
CE-45
CE-50
CE-52

CE-51

CE-53

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Item

Description[VRF] Window comparator higher
limit

Sets the upper limit level of the window comparator.
(For each of the lower limits of VRF/IRF upper limit,[CE-40]+([CE-42]×2), [CE-44]+([CE-45]×2)[IRF] Window comparator upper limit
It becomes)[VRF] Window comparator lower limit Sets the lower limit level of the window comparator.
(The upper limit of VRF/IRF lower limit is:[IRF] Window comparator lower limit [CE-40]-([CE-42]×2), [CE-43]-([CE-45]×2)
It becomes. )[VRF] Window comparator hysteresis
Sets the hysteresis width for the upper/lower limit level.
width(The upper limit of VRF/IRF hysteresis-range setting is:[IRF] Window comparator hysteresis([CE-40]-[CE-41])/2, ([CE-43]-[CE-44])/2 It becomes. )width[VRF] Operation set levelat disconnection or compare event [WCVRF]/[WCIRF]/[VRFDc]/[IRFDc] For output, set theanalogue input adoption value.
[IRF] Operation set levelat disconnection or compare event[VRF] Operating Level Selection
at Disconnection[IRF] Operating Level Selection
at Disconnection

Output terminal function

Data

Initialvalue

0 to 100 %100

0 to 100 %0

0 to 10 %0

0 to 100 %0

Disabled

00

Enabled (within range)

01

Enabled (out of range)

02

Disabled

00

Enabled (within range)

01

Enabled (out of range)

02

Analog burnout VRF[VRFDc]/Analog burnout IRF[IRFDc]:Outputs analog disconnection signal
Window comparator VRF[WCVRF]:
Window comparator IRF[WCIRF]:
Outputs the window comparator signal.

050/051056/057■Window comparator operation e.g. 1[CE-51]/[CE-53] = Operation when "Disabled (00)" is set
・ When [CE-51]/ [CE-53] is "Disabled (00)", the [WCVRF]/[WCIRF] signal is outputted when theanalogue input is within the window comparator upper/lower limit level range. However, the[VRFDc]/[IRFDc] signal does not operate.
[VRF]/[IRF] Input
Max(100%)
Hysteresis width[CE-42]/[CE-45]
Analog input value

Window comparator
higher limit[CE-40]/[CE-43]

Window comparator lower
limit[CE-41]/[CE-44]
Min(0%)[WCVRF]/[WCIRF]
outputON

ON

ON[VRFDc]/[IRFDc]
output

9-172
9-172

00

00

002
001
017

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Window comparator operation e.g. 2[CE-51]/[CE-53] = Disconnection detection when "valid (within range) (01)" is set
・If the lower limit level, upper limit level, or operating level at disconnection is set as shown in the figure
below, if the analog input becomes the smallest value due to disconnection, the analog disconnection
signal will be turned ON, and the operating level set value at disconnection will be adopted as theanalog input value instead of the actual analog input value.
・When [CE-51]/ [CE-53] is "valid (within range) (01)", the [VRFDc]/[IRFDc] signal has the same operation
as the [WCVRF]/[WCIRF] signal.
[VRF]/[IRF] Input
Max(100%)

Analog input use value
Operation set level at
disconnection orcompare event[CE-50]/[CE-52]

Hysteresis width[CE-42]/[CE-45]

Window comparator
higher limit[CE-40]/[CE-43]

Analog input value

Window comparator
lower limit[CE-41]/[CE-44]

Min(0%)

Disconnection[WCVRF]/[WCIRF]
outputON[VRFDc]/[IRFDc]
outputON■Window comparator operation e.g. 3[CE-51]/[CE-53] = Short-circuit detection when "valid (out of range) (02)"・If the lower limit level, upper limit level, or open circuit operating level is set as shown in the figure
below, if the analog input reaches its max. value due to a short circuit, the analog disconnection
signalbecomes ON, and the operating level setting value at the break is adopted as the analog input
value instead of the actual analog input value.
・When [CE-51]/ [CE-53] is set to "Valid (Out of Range) (02), [VRFDc]/[IRFDc] signal has the opposite
action to the [WCVRF]/[WCIRF] signal.
[VRF]/[IRF] Input

Window comparator
higher limit[CE-40]/[CE-43]

Short circuit↓

Max(100%)
Analog input value

Window comparator
higher limit[CE-40]/[CE-43]

Hysteresis width[CE-42]/[CE-45]

Operation set level at
disconnection orcompare event[CE-50]/[CE-52]
Analog input use valueMin(0%)[WCVRF]/[WCIRF]
output[VRFDc]/[IRFDc]
output

ON

ON

9-173
9-173

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.11.14 Unsteady detection function

・The unsteady detection function outputs and protects a signal when a specified monitor value such as
output current or output torque deviates from the specified range (steady state) according to a specificoperation pattern in advance.
・This function is enabled when "Non-stationary detection selection (bE-01)" is "Enabled (Frequencymode) (01)" or "Enabled (Time mode) (02)". In "Enable (Frequency mode) (01)", the steady state of themonitor value is set according to the output frequency. On the other hand, in "Enable (time mode)(02)", it is set according to the elapsed time starting from the operation start point. In both modes, theupper and lower limit levels that define the steady range of the monitored object are set, and the upper
limit is exceeded and less than the lower limit are detected, and it is judged as non-steady. (Refer to thenext section for the setting of each mode and level.)・Set the parameters of the monitor that you want to monitor for the "Non-stationary object (bE-02)". For
the parameters that can be set, see "9.16.3 Selecting the monitor to be output".
・By assigning "non-steady upper limit exceeded state [ABU](082)" and "non-steady lower limit less state[ABL](083)" to any of the output terminal function selection ([CC-01]/[CC-02]/[CC-07]), the state ofexceeding the upper limit and the state of less than the lower limit can be output individually. However,these signals are not output if the "Non-Constant Detection Selection (bE-01)" is "Disabled (00)".
・For the [ABU] non-steady upper limit exceeding state and [ABL] non-steady lower limit exceeding state,
delay can be set separately by "Non-steady upper limit detecting time [bE-06]" and "Non-steady lower
limit detecting time [bE-08]".
・The motor can be tripped when [ABU] or [ABL] is outputted in the "Operation at non-stationary upper
limit detection [bE-05]" or "Operation at non-stationary lower limit detection [bE-07]" sets. If [bE05]/[bE-07] is set to "Trip (02)", it trips at "Non-stationary upper limit detection error [E121]"/"Nonstationary lower limit detection error [E122]" at the same time as the outputting of [ABU]/[ABL]. In
addition, if "Trip after deceleration stop (03)" is set, it forcibly shifts to stop operation at the same time
as outputting [ABU]/[ABL], and when it stops, it trips at [E121]/[E122].
・The upper and lower limits of non-stationary detection can also be automatically obtained during
operation by setting "Non-stationary detection auto-tuning selection [bE-03]" to "Enabled (01)". Refer tothe next section for details.
■Unsteady Detection Frequency Mode (bE-01=01)
・This function specifies the unsteady detection frequency ([bE-10] to [bE-18]) and the upper and lower
limit levels at the frequencies, and monitors the unsteady state according to the output frequency.
Detect Level(%) (Target: [bE-02] specify monitor)
bE-25

Non-steady state(upper limit exceeded)

Upper limit level

bE-24

bE-23

Lower limit level
bE-29

bE-22

bE-30

bE-28

bE-21

Non-steady state(less than the lower limit)

bE-27

Output frequency(Hz)

bE-26
0

bE-10

bE-12

bE-14

bE-16

bE-18

■Correspondence table between set point (frequency) and upper and lower limit levels
Set point
Abnormal detection minimum frequency
Abnormal detection intermediate frequency 1
Abnormal detection intermediate frequency 2Abnormal detection intermediate frequency 3
Abnormal detection maximum frequency

Upper limit at object code

Lower limit at target code

bE-21
bE-22
bE-23
bE-24
bE-25

bE-26
bE-27
bE-28
bE-29
bE-30

bE-10
bE-12
bE-14
bE-16
bE-18

9-174
9-174

Inverter Function

Chapter 9・Regarding the upper and lower limit levels from 0Hz to "Lowest frequency of non-stationary detection[bE-10]", the "Lowest frequency of upper limit level [bE-21]" and the "Lowest frequency of lower limit
level [bE-26]" are applied, and from "Highest frequency of non-stationary detection [bE-18]", the"Highest frequency of upper limit level [bE-25]" and the "Highest frequency of lower limit level [bE-30]"
are applied.
・The % criteria for the upper and lower limits are based on the full scale of 100 % of the target selectedin [bE-02] for non-stationary detection.
■ Non-stationary detect time-mode (bE-01=02)
・This function specifies the "unsteady detecting time ([bE-31] to [bE-40])" and the upper and lower limits
at every time, and monitors the unsteady status according to the elapsed time from the start ofoperation.
・Does not operate while stopped. When operation is restarted after stopping once, monitoring restarts
from zero seconds.
Detect Level(%) (Target: [bE-02] specify monitor)
bE-44

bE-45

Non-steady state(upper limit exceeded)

bE-42

bE-54

bE-43

bE-55

bE-46

bE-48

bE-47

bE-49

bE-41

bE-51
0 bE-31

Non-steady state(less than thelower limit)
bE-56
bE-53

bE-52
bE-32

bE-33

bE-34

bE-35

bE-36

bE-50
Upper limit level
bE-57

bE-58
bE-59

bE-37

bE-38

bE-39

bE-60

Lower limit levelbE-40 Time(s)■Correspondence table between set point (operation time) and upper and lower limit levels
Set point
Abnormal time detection operating time 1
Abnormal time detection operating time 2
Abnormal time detection operating time 3
Abnormal time detection operating time 4
Abnormal time detection operating time 5
Abnormal time detection operating time 6
Abnormal time detection operating time 7
Abnormal time detection operating time 8
Abnormal time detection operating time 9
Abnormal time detection operating time 10

Upper limit at object code

Lower limit at target code

bE-41
bE-42
bE-43
bE-44
bE-45
bE-46
bE-47
bE-48
bE-49
bE-50

bE-51
bE-52
bE-53
bE-54
bE-55
bE-56
bE-57
bE-58
bE-59
bE-60

bE-31
bE-32
bE-33
bE-34
bE-35
bE-36
bE-37
bE-38
bE-39
bE-40

・For the setting of "Non-steady time detection operation time 1 [bE-31]" to "Non-steady time detection
operation time 10 [bE-40", set the elapsed time with operation starting set to zero.
・Regarding the upper and lower limit levels, "Non-steady time detection upper limit level 1 [bE-41]" and"Non-steady time detection lower limit level 1 [bE-51]" are applied respectively for less than [bE-31],
and "Non-steady time detection upper limit level 10 [bE-50]" and "Non-steady time detection lower
limit level 10 [bE-60] are applied respectively for [bE-40] and later.
・Set the [bE-31] to [bE-40] as shown below. Otherwise, the subsequent settings are ignored and the endof the valid part is the terminal setting.
0≦[bE-31]≦[bE-32]≦[bE-33]≦[E-34]≦[bE-35]≦[bE-36]≦[bE-37]≦[bE-38]≦[bE-39]≦[bE-40]
・The % criteria for the upper and lower limits are based on the full scale of 100 % of the target selectedin [bE-02] for non-stationary detection.

9-175
9-175

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Execution step of non-stationary detection automatic tuning
1. Pre-setting of parameters(1) Set "Non-steady detecting selection [bE-01]" to "Frequency mode (01)" or "Time mode (02)"according to the desired operation.
(2) Set the non-stationary object [bE-02] to the data you want to monitor.
(3) Set each measurement point according to the mode set in (1) (see below). In operation, themonitor data specified in (2) is acquired when passing through these set points.
bE-01

Automatic measurement point- (Disabled)

Disabled (00)
Enabled (frequency mode) (01)Measuring point (frequency): [bE-10] [bE-12] [bE-14] [bE-16] [bE-18]

Enabled (time mode) (02)Measuring point/time: [bE-31] to [bE-40](4) Set the allowable range for automatic-tuning in "Non-stationary tuning allowable range [bE-04]".
The value set here is reflected to the value of the upper and lower limit levels to be saved as theallowable range width based on the automatic acquisition value.

2. Implementation of automatic measurement (operation)
・Set "Non-stationary detecting auto-tuning selection [bE-03]" to "Enable (01)".
・Start operation in the actual operating environment. During operation, pass the measurement point
set in the previous section (3) several times. In the time mode, repeat the operation several times
from the stop state.

3. Setting and Checking at End of Measurement
・Stop operation and set "Non-steady detection auto-tuning selection [bE-03]" to "Disable (00)".
・Check that the following parameters (upper limit and lower limit level) have been updated.
(If the measurement fails, it is not updated.)bE-01
Disabled (00)
Enabled (frequency mode) (01)Enabled (time mode) (02)Automatic measurement point- (Disabled)
Upper limit: [bE-21] to [bE-25]
Lower limit: [bE-26] to [bE-30]
Upper limit: [bE-41] to [bE-50]
Lower limit: [bE-51] to [bE-60]

・During automatic tuning, the non-stationary detection function is disabled.
・Automatically acquired data will be saved at the timing when "Auto-tuning selection [bE-03]" ischanged from "Enabled (01)" to "Disabled (00)". However, if the data from the automatic acquisition is
not confirmed, the value is not updated.

9-176
9-176

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Unsteady detection related parameters
Code

bE-01

bE-02

Item

Unsteady detection enable

Unsteady detection target

Description
Disabled

00

Enabled: Specifies the steady state according tothe output frequency. (Frequency mode)

01

Enabled: The steady state is specified according to
the elapsed time of operation.
(time mode)

02

Select the data to be monitored by this function.

Refer to "9.16.3
Selecting themonitor to be
output"DisabledbE-03

Unsteady detection auto tuning selection

bE-04

Unsteady detection tuning tolerance

bE-05

bE-06

bE-07

Unsteady upper level detecting action

Unsteady upper level detecting time

Unsteady lower level detecting action

bE-08

Unsteady lower level detecting time

bE-10
bE-12
bE-14
bE-16
bE-18
bE-21

Unsteady detection minimum frequency
Unsteady detection intermediate frequency 1
Unsteady detection intermediate frequency 2
Unsteady detection intermediate frequency 3
Unsteady detection maximum frequency
Upper limit at minimum frequency

bE-22
bE-23

Upper limit at intermediate frequency 1
Upper limit at intermediate frequency 2

bE-24

Upper limit at intermediate frequency 3

bE-25

Upper limit at maximum frequency

bE-26

Lower limit at minimum frequency

bE-27
bE-28

Upper limit at intermediate frequency 1
Lower limit at intermediate frequency 2

bE-29

Lower limit at intermediate frequency 3

bE-30
bE-31
bE-32
bE-33
bE-34
bE-35
bE-36
bE-37
bE-38
bE-39
bE-40

Lower limit at maximum frequency
Unsteady time detection operating time 1
Unsteady time detection operating time 2
Unsteady time detection operating time 3
Unsteady time detection operating time 4
Unsteady time detection operating time 5
Unsteady time detection operating time 6
Unsteady time detection operating time 7
Unsteady time detection operating time 8
Unsteady time detection operating time 9
Unsteady time detection operating time 10

Data

Enabled: Automatically acquires the value
specified by [bE-02] according to thesetting of [bE-01] during operation andsaves the value to the upper/lower limit
level.
At [bE-03]=(01), the obtained value ± [bE-04] issaved to the upper/lower limit.

01

0.00 to100.00 % Note

Nothing

01
02

Trip at "Non-stationary lower limit detection error[E122]"The stop command is forcibly issued. After thestop, the motor trips with "Non-steady lower limit
detection error [E122]."
Sets the period from when the data specified in[bE-02] falls below the lower limit of nonstationary detection until the data is judged as
non-stationary.

Sets the fixed point of the steady-state range in thefrequency mode ([bE-01]=(01)).

00

dA-01

00

Trip at "Non-stationary upper limit detection error[E121]"The stop command is forcibly issued. After thestop, the motor trips with "Non-stationary upper
limit detection error [E121]."
Sets the time from when the data specified in [bE02] exceeds the upper limit of non-stationary
detection until the data is judged as nonstationary.
Nothing

Initial
value

00

0.10

01

03

0.00 to 600.00 s

0.00

01
02
01
03

0.00 to 600.00 s

0.00

0.00 toMax. frequency Hz

0.00-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

0.00

0.00 to 600.00 s

0.00

Specifies the upper limit of the steady-state range
in frequency-mode ([bE-01]=(01)).
Set point-by-point for [bE-10] to [bE-18].

Specifies the lower limit of the steady-state range infrequency-mode ([bE-01]=(01)).
Set point-by-point for [bE-10] to [bE-18].

Sets the stipulated points of the steady-state area inthe time-mode ([bE-01]=(02)).
Set the operation start to zero and the elapsed timefrom there.

9-177
9-177

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

Item

bE-41

Unsteady time detection upper level 1

bE-42

Unsteady time detection upper level 2

bE-43

Unsteady time detection upper level 3

bE-44
bE-45

Unsteady time detection upper level 4
Unsteady time detection upper level 5bE-46

Unsteady time detection upper level 6

bE-47

Unsteady time detection upper level 7

bE-48

Unsteady time detection upper level 8

bE-49
bE-50

Unsteady time detection upper level 9
Unsteady time detection upper level 10

bE-51

Unsteady time detection lower level 1

bE-52

Unsteady time detection lower level 2

bE-53

Unsteady time detection lower level 3

bE-54

Unsteady time detection lower level 4

bE-55

Unsteady time detection lower level 5

bE-56

Unsteady time detection lower level 6

bE-57

Unsteady time detection lower level 7

bE-58

Unsteady time detection lower level 8

bE-59

Unsteady time detection lower level 9

bE-60

Unsteady time detection lower level 10

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Data

Initialvalue-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

0.00

Description

Specifies the upper limit of the steady-state range in time-mode([bE-01]=(02)).
Set point-by-point for [bE-31] to [bE-40].

Specifies the lower limit of the steady-state range in time-mode([bE-01]=(02)).
Set point-by-point for [bE-31] to [bE-40].

Unsteady exceeded Upper limit/[ABU]:[bE-02] Outputs when the specified data continuously
exceeds the upper limit of unsteady detection for the period
set to [bE-06].

082

Unsteady fall below Lower limit/[ABL]:[bE-02] Outputs when the specified value is continuously
below the lower limit for non-stationary detection for theperiod set to [bE-08].

083

dC-31

Unsteady detection value monitor[bE-02] Displays the specified monitor value.

dC-32

Unsteady detection upper level monitor

Displays the current value of the upper limit level.

dC-33

Unsteafy detection lower level monitor

Displays the current value of the lower limit level.

002
001
017

-100.00 to
100.00 % Note

Note: Assume that the full scale of the target selected in "Non-stationary object [bE-02]" is 100%.

9-178
9-178

-

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.12 Output the operating status to the terminals
9.12.1 Output signal during operation

・By assigning "In-operation [DRV](001)" to any of the "output terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC02], and [CC-07])", the inverter-in-operation signal can be output.
・In addition to the normal operation of the motor, if the motor is in the status of outputting voltage
during DC braking, etc. the "Operation in Progress [DRV](001)" signal will ON.
・During retry wait or DC braking standby, the [DRV] signal is not output because no voltage is output tothe motor.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

During operation [DRV]:This signal is output when the inverter is outputting to the motor.

001

002
001
017

Output frequency

RUN command

ON

ON[DRV] Output

9.12.2 Output signal during forward or reverse rotation
・By assigning "Forward run in progress [FRR](008)" or "Reverse run in progress [RRR](009)] to any of"output terminal function selection ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07])," the output of the inverter forward
run in progress/reverse run in progress signal is enabled.
・[FRR] The signal is outputted only during forward operation and the [RRR] signal is outputted only
during reverse running.
・The "Forward operation in progress [FRR]"/ "Reverse run in progress [RRR]" signal will not be output
during DC voltage output to the motor by DC braking.
Code
CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Item

Output terminal function

Output frequency

Description

Data

During forward operation [FRR]:This signal is output during the inverter forward operation.

008

During reverse operation [RRR]:
This signal is output during inverter reverse operation.

009

Forwardrotation
Reverserotation

RUN command[FR] Input

ON
ON[RR] Input[FRR] Output

ON[RRR] Output

ON

9-179
9-179

Initial
value
002
001
017

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.12.3 Output signal RUN command

・RUN command signals can be output by assigning "RUN command signals [FS](031)" to anyof the "Output terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07])."
・The [FS] signal is outputted while the inverter is accepting the operation command.
・[FS] Even if the RUN command destination is other than the [FR]/[RR] input terminal, the signal is
outputted according to the RUN command acceptance status.
・When an RUN command is input from the input terminal, if "Forward rotation [FR]" and "Reverse
rotation [RR]" are input at the same time, a command mismatch will occur and a stop command will be
issued. In this situation, "RUN command [FS]" will not be outputted.
・Besides the output for normal motor rotation, the [FS] signal is output even when DC voltage is being
output to the motor by DC braking, etc.
Code

Item

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Description
RUN command active [FS]:This signal is output when an operation command is input.

RUN command[FR] Input

Data

Initial
value

031

002
001
017

ON

ON

[RR] Input[FS] Output

ONON

9.12.4 Output signal when operation preparation is completed
・The operation preparation completion signal can be output by assigning "Operation preparation
completion [IRDY](007)" to one of the "output terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC07])".
・The [IRDY] signal is issued when the inverter is ready to accept RUN commands.
・If the "Operation ready [IRDY] signal is not output, the product will not operate even if an RUN
command is input.
・This signal is turned OFF when the unit is not ready to start when the power is turned on, when the
input voltage is insufficient, when the unit is tripping, when the free-operation stop command is
executed, or when STO is input.
Code

Item

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Description
Operation ready [IRDY]:
This signal is output when the inverter is ready to accept RUN
commands.

ON

Reset [RST] Input

ON

Alarm [AL] Output[IRDY] Output

ON

ON

9-180
9-180

Data

Initial
value

007

002
001
017

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.13 Compare the output frequency and output it to the terminal
9.13.1 Output signal when the frequency reaches the target

・By assigning "[UPF1](002" to any of the "output terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and[CC-07])", when the set output frequency is reached, a signal can be output.
・When the output frequency reaches the valid frequency command, [UPF1] is output.
・If the frequency command is an analog input command, "Constant speed reaching [UPF1]" may not be
output stably. This may be improved by ON/OFF delaying function of the OUT jack. For details, seesection 9.16.2, Delay and Hold the Output Signal.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initial
value

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Constant-frequency reached [UPF1]:
This signal turns ON when the output frequency reaches the set
frequency.

002

002
001
017

Set frequency

fon

foff

Output frequency[UPF1] Output

fon: 1% of Max. frequency
foff: 2% of Max. frequency(Operation example)
Max. frequency 60Hz
When set frequency=50Hz
・fon=60×0.01=0.6Hz
・foff=60×0.02=1.2Hz
・Acceleration: ON at 50-0.6=49.4Hz
・Deceleration: OFF at 50-1.2=48.8Hz

ON

9-181
9-181

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.13.2 Output signal when the output frequency exceeds the set value

・Signals over the set frequency can be output by assigning "Set frequency or more [UPF2](003)"/ "Setfrequency or more 2 [UPF4](005)" to any of "Output terminal function selection ([CC-01], [CC-02], or[CC-07])".
・This signal turns ON when the output frequency exceeds the setting of "Acceleration arrival frequency 1[CE-10]" and turns OFF when the [UPF2] signal falls below the setting of "Deceleration arrival frequency
1 [CE-11]."
・This signal turns ON when the output frequency exceeds the setting of "Acceleration arrival frequency 2[CE-12]" and turns OFF when the [UPF4] signal falls below the setting of "Deceleration arrival frequency
2 [CE-13]."・Signals above two set frequencies "[UPF2] above set frequency"/"above set frequency 2 [FA4]" areoperated independently and can be outputted separately.
Code

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Item

Output terminal function

Description

Data

Set frequency overreached [UPF2]:
This signal turns ON when the output frequency
exceeds the [CE-10] setting and turns OFF when the
output frequency falls below [CE-11].

003

CE-10

Arrival frequency 1 value
setting during acceleration

Set frequency overreached 2 [UPF4]:
This signal turns ON when the output frequency
exceeds the [CE-12] setting and turns OFF when the
output frequency falls below [CE-13].
[UPF2] turns ON when the output frequency exceeds
this setting during acceleration.

CE-11

Arrival frequency 1 value
setting during deceleration

During deceleration, [UPF2] turns OFF when the output
frequency falls below this setting.

CE-12

Arrival frequency 2 during
acceleration[UPF4] turns ON when the output frequency exceeds
this setting during acceleration.

CE-13

Arrival frequency 2 during
deceleration

During deceleration, [UPF4] turns OFF when the output
frequency falls below this setting.

Initial
value

002
001
017
005

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00[CE-13][CE-12][CE-10]
Output frequency[UPF2] Output[UPF4] Output

foff

fon

foff

fon

[CE-11]

fon: 1% of Max. frequency
foff: 2% of Max. frequency(Operation example)
Max. frequency 60Hz
When set [CE-10]=[CE-11]=50Hz
・fon=60×0.01=0.6Hz
・foff=60×0.02=1.2Hz
・Acceleration: ON at 50-0.6=49.4Hz
・Deceleration: OFF at 50-1.2=48.8Hz

ON

ON

9-182
9-182

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.13.3 Output signal when the output frequency is near the set value

・By assigning "Set frequency only [UPF3](004)"/"Set frequency only 2 [UPF5](006)" to any of the "Output
terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07])", it is possible to output a signal when the
output frequency becomes near the set frequency.
・The [UPF3] signal is turned ON when the output frequency reaches "Acceleration arrival frequency 1[CE-10]" during acceleration or "Deceleration arrival frequency 1 [CE-11]" during deceleration. After
that, it becomes OFF when the output frequency is away from [CE-10]/[CE-11] due toacceleration/deceleration.
・When the output frequency reaches "Acceleration arrival frequency 2 [CE-12]" during acceleration orreaches "Deceleration arrival frequency 2 [CE-13]" during deceleration, the [UPF5] signal turns ON.
After that, it becomes OFF when the output frequency is away from [CE-12]/[CE-13] due toacceleration/deceleration.
・The signals "set frequency only [UPF3]"/"set frequency only 2 [UPF5]" output around the two set
frequencies are operated independently, and can be output separately.
Code

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Item

Description

Output terminal function

Data

Set frequency reached [UPF3]:
This signal turns ON when the output frequency
reaches [CE-10] during acceleration or [CE-11]
during deceleration.

003

CE-10

Arrival frequency 1 value
setting during acceleration

Set frequency reached 2[UPF5]:This signal turns ON when the output frequency
reaches [CE-12] during acceleration or [CE-13]
during deceleration.
The [UPF3] signal turns ON when the output frequency
reaches this setting during acceleration.

CE-11

Arrival frequency 1 value
setting during deceleration

If the output frequency reaches this setting during
deceleration, the [UPF3] signal turns ON.

CE-12

Arrival frequency 2 during
acceleration

The [UPF5] signal turns ON when the output frequency
reaches this setting during acceleration.

CE-13

Arrival frequency 2 during
deceleration

If the output frequency reaches this setting during
deceleration, the [UPF5] signal turns ON.

fon[CE-12][CE-10]
Output frequency

foff

foff

[CE-13][CE-11]

Initial
value

002
001
017
005

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

fon: 1% of Max. frequency
foff: 2% of Max. frequency

fon[UPF3] Output

ON[UPF5] Output

ON(actual ON/OFF frequency)
Max. frequency 60Hz
When set [CE-10]=[CE-11]=50Hz
・fon=60×0.01=0.6Hz
・foff=60×0.02=1.2Hz
・Acceleration: ON at 50-0.6=49.4Hz
OFF with 50+1.2=51.2Hz
・Deceleration: ON at 50+0.6=50.6Hz
OFF with 50-1.2=48.8Hz

9-183
9-183

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.13.4 Output signal when the output frequency becomes near 0Hz

・0Hz detection signal can be output by assigning "0Hz detection [ZS](040)" to one of the "output
terminal function selections ([CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC-07])".
・When the output frequency of the inverter drops below the level set in "0Hz detection value level [CE33]", the [ZS] signal is output.
・[ZS] The time constant of the temporary delay filter can be set in "Output frequency-related terminal
function filter time constant (ZS) [CE-60)". If the output frequency fluctuates around the frequency set
in [CE-33], adjust [CE-60].
・During 0Hz operation such as when stopped or during DC braking, the "0Hz detection [ZS]" signal
becomes ON because frequency is 0Hz.
・When encoder feedback is used, this signal is output after determining the actual motor speed. For
details of encoder feedback, refer to "9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback".
Code

Item

Description

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

CE-33

Zero speed detection level

CE-60

Output frequency related
filter for terminal function

Zero speed detection [ZS]:
Output frequency outputs analog disconnection
signalThe [ZS] signal turns ON when the output frequency
falls below this setting.
[ZS] Sets the time constant of the temporary delay
filter for the signal.

Output frequency

Initial
value

040

002
001
017

0.00 to 100.00 Hz

0.00

0 to 2000 ms

20[CE-33]

RUN command[FR][ZS] Output

Data

ON

ON

ON

9-184
9-184

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.13.5 Output by combining two output signals

・Since the logical operation of the output signal can be performed inside the inverter, various signals
can be output by combining the operation of the output terminal function.
・There are three types of logical operators that can be selected: logical AND (AND), logical OR (OR), andexclusive OR (XOR).
・Target all output signals. However, the logical operation result ([LOG1] to [LOG3]) cannot be theoperation target.
Code

Description

Data

Initialvalue

Logical operation result 1 to 3 ([LOG1] to [LOG3]):
The logical operation of the output signal selected by the logicaloperation target 1 and the logical operation object 2 isperformed, and the result is output.

062
063
064

002
001
017

Select output
terminalfunction(except [LOG1]
to [LOG3])

000

00
01
02

00

Item

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

CC-40
CC-43
CC-46
CC-41
CC-44
CC-47

Selection
LOG1 to LOG3
selection 1
Selection
LOG1 to LOG3
selection 2

CC-42
CC-45
CC-48

Selection
LOG1 to LOG3
operator selection

Selects logical operation target 1.

Selects logical operation destination 2.
AND operation (logical AND) of target 1 and target 2 is outputted.
OR operation (logical OR) of target 1 and target 2 is outputted.
Outputs XOR operations (exclusive-OR) of target 1 and target 2.

■(e.g. 1) Logical AND operation example
・If the output current drops when the output frequency is greater than or equal to the pre-set value, set[LOG1] to ON and output from the output terminal [UPF].
[UPF2] Output

ON[LOC] Output

ON[LOG1] Output(Setting example)
・Output terminal function [UPF] selection [CC-01] = logicaloperation result 1 [LOG1]
・LOG1 selection 1 [CC-40] = above set frequency [UPF2]
・LOG1 selection 2 [CC-41] = Low current signal ling [LOC]
・LOG1 operator selection [CC-42]=AND(00)

ON
ON

ON

■(e.g. 2) Logical OR operation example
・"Output current goes out of range. Signal that becomes ON in either overload or electronic thermal
overload condition" is set to [LOG2], and output from output terminal [UPF].
[OL] Output[THM] Output[LOG2] Output

ONON(Setting example)
・Output terminal function [UPF] selection [CC-01] = logicaloperation result 2 [LOG2]
・LOG2 selection 1 [CC-43] = Overload warning [OL]・LOG2 selection 2 [CC-44] = electronic thermal alarm (motor)[THM]
・LOG2 operator selection [CC-45]=OR(01)

ON

ON

ON

ON
ON

■(e.g. 3) Logical exclusive or (XOR) operation example
・Set the "Signal when the output current is within the specified range" to [LOG3] and output from theoutput terminal [DRV].
[OL] Output[OL2] Output[LOG3] Output(Setting example)
・Output terminal function [DRV] selection [CC-02] = logicaloperation result 2 [LOG3]
・LOG3 selection 1 [CC-46] = Overload warning [OL]・LOG3 selection 2 [CC-47] = Overload notice 2 [OL2]
・LOG3 operator selection [CC-48]=XOR(02)

ON

ON

ON
ON

ON

ON

9-185
9-185

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.14 Perform positioning operation
9.14.1 Absolute position control

・HF-620 is equipped with an absolute position control function that enables simple positioning
operation by feeding back pulse signals from external encoders and other devices to the drive.
・In absolute position control,(1) Position reference(2) Speed command (Frequency command)(3) Acceleration time and deceleration time
After moving to the target position according to the direction, it becomes a direct current braking state.
After that, the DC braking status is held until the operation command is OFF.
・Frequency command and acceleration/deceleration command in absolute position control follow
those selected at that time.
・If the position command is small, deceleration → positioning may occur without reaching the speedcommand value.
・The direction of the operation command (forward/reverse) has no meaning as the rotation direction in
the absolute position control mode. Operates as a signal for operation and stop. The rotation direction
is forward if (target position-current position) is positive, or reverse if negative.
・If the origin return operation (described later) is not performed, if "Current position memory at power
shutdown [AE-61]" is "disabled (00)", the position at power-on will be treated as the origin ("Current
position monitor [dA-20]" = 0). When [AE-61] is "valid (01)", the position at the last power-off ([dA-20])
is treated as the present position.
・When the deviation between the position command and the present position ([dA-20]) is 0, thepositioning operation is performed on the spot when the operation command is ON.
・The position command can be switched from "Position command selection 1 [CP1](076)" to "Positioncommand selection 4 [CP4](079)" of the input terminal function in 16 steps of "Position command 0[AE-20]" to "Position command 15[AE-50]. You can also change/save the currently selected positioncommand by changing/saving "Position command setting (monitor) [FA-20]".
・When using this function, set "Vector control mode selection [AA123]" to "Absolute position control
mode (02)" or "High resolution absolute position control mode (03)".
・This function requires the use of encoder feedback.
・When "Vector control mode selection [AA123]" is set to "high-resolution absolute position control mode(03)", control is performed by the number of pulses of 4 multipliers used for the internal calculation.
Set the multi-stage position command and position range specification with an accuracy of 4
multipliers.
・The current position counter is not cleared by trip reset or reset signal input.
・In absolute position control, if the input terminal function "Clear position error [PCLR]" is assigned, thepresent position counter is cleared by ON of the [PCLR] input terminal.
・In the absolute position control mode, the input terminal function "Torque control enable [ATR]" does
not function. (Torque control does not work.)
・When changing the position command with [FA-20], simply change the value with the dial. The value
will be reflected as the command value. However, if SET button is not used to save the data, the display
returns to the previous state when the power is turned on again.

9-186
9-186

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

Item

dA-08

Detect speed monitor

Monitors the feedback detection speed.

-590.00 to 590.00 Hz

dA-20

Current position
monitorMonitor the current position.

FA-20

Position reference
setting (Monitor)

Monitors or changes the setting of the currently
selected position command destination. When
you change or save [FA-20], the settings of thecurrently selected position commands 0 to 15 arealso changed/saved.

For AA123≠03:-268435455 to
268435455 pls
For AA123=03:-1073741823 to1073741823 pls

AA123

Vector control mode
selection

AE-04

Positioning completed
range setting

AE-05

Positioning completed
delay time setting

AE-15

Creep speed setting

Set the low-speed operation just before thecompletion of positioning.

AE-16

Position displacementat creep speed

AE-17

Positioning restart
range

AE-20

Position command 0

AE-22

Position command 1

AE-24

Position command 2

AE-26

Position command 3

AE-28

Position command 4

AE-30

Position command 5

AE-32

Position command 6

AE-34

Position command 7

AE-36

Position command 8

AE-38

Position command 9

AE-40

Position command 10

AE-42

Position command 11

AE-44

Position command 12

AE-46

Position command 13

AE-48

Position command 14

AE-50

Position command 15

AE-52

Position control range(Forward)

AE-54

Position control range(Reverse)

AE-56

Position control mode
selection

Description

Data

Absolute position control mode

02

High-resolution absolute position control mode

03

When the present position falls within the rangeof the target position ± [AE-04], the [POK] signal
will be outputted assuming that the positioning iscomplete. (4 multiplication setting)Specify how long it takes for the [POK] signal tobe output after positioning is complete.

Initial
value

-

00

0 to 10000 pls

50

0.00 to 10.00 s

0.00

Min. frequency[Hb130] to 10.00 Hz

5.00

Set the move distance to operate at the [AE-15]
speed.

0 to 16384 pls

2560

When the present position is out of the range ofthe target position ± [AE-17] after the completionof positioning, the positioning operation is
performed again. (4 multiplication setting)

0 to 10000 pls

0[AE-52] to [AE-54]

0

For AA123≠03:
0 to 268435455 pls
For AA123=03:
0 to 1073741823 pls

268435455

For AA123≠03:-268435455 to 0 pls
For AA123=03:-1073741823 to 0 pls-268435455

Set the position command for the multi-stage
position command respectively.

Set the position control range on the forward
rotation side.
If [AE-56] is "Limit (00)", the motor trips due to"Position control range error [E104]" if the present
position counter exceeds this setting.
Set the position control range on the reverse side.
If [AE-56] is "Limit (00)", the motor trips due to"Position control range error [E104]" if the present
position counter exceeds this setting.
Limit: Position range specification ([AE-52], [AE54]) is enabled.

00

No limit: Shortest position control is enabled.

01

9-187
9-187

00

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code
AE-64
AE-65

Item
Deceleration stop
distance calculation gain
Deceleration stop
distance calculation bias

AF101

DC braking selection

AF105

DC braking force

CA-55

Multistage input
determination time

CA-90

Pulse input targetfunction selection

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal function

Description
Adjustment is made for the stop distance at deceleration stop.
Adjusts the output frequency during positioning operation.
Set "Disable (00)". With the position control function, DC
braking is automatically applied when positioning is complete
even if "Disabled (00)".
Set the DC braking force at completion of positioning.
This is the time until the position command is determinedwhen the multi-stage position command switching is
performed.
Set "Speed Feedback (02)".
Multistage position settings selection 1 to 4
[CP1]/[CP2]/[CP3]/[CP4]:
Select the position command in the combination of ON/OFF of
the pin functions.
Positioning complete [POK]:
When the present position falls within ±[AE-04] of the target
position, this signal is turned ON.

Data
50.00 to200.00 %0.00 to655.35 %Initial
value
100.0
0.00

00

00

0 to 100 %

50

0 to
2000 ms

002

01076([CP1])077([CP2])078([CP3])079([CP4])

-

043

002
001
017

Operation procedure of absolute position control function
1. Pre-setting of parameters(1) Wire the encoder and set the related parameters. For details, refer to "9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback".
(2) To enable the absolute position control function, set "Pulse-input detection target selection [CA-90]" to"Velocity Feedback (02)", and "Vector Control Mode Selection [AA123]" to "Absolute Position Control Mode(02)" or "High Resolution Absolute Position Control Mode (03)".
(3) Set "DC braking selection [AF101]" to "Disabled (00)" (In absolute position control, DC braking is automatically
activated when positioning is complete even if [AF101] is "Disabled (00)"). Set the DC braking force at standstill[AF105] so that the required braking force can be obtained when positioning is completed.
(4) The rotation direction in absolute position control is forward if the position deviation (target position-current
position) is positive, or reverse if it is negative. Therefore, the input of "Forward rotation [FR]" or "Reverse
rotation [RR]" does not mean the direction of rotation and operates only as the input signal for operation/stop.
(5) Set "Creep speed setting [AE-15]" and "Creep speed movement [AE-16]" according to the operation pattern. In
addition, set 0.00Hz for the frequency lower limit [bA103]. 0.00 If it is not Hz, that value is the lower limit valueof [AE-15].
(6) Set "Positioning completion area setting [AE-04]" with the number of 4 multiplied pulses (the number when the
A-phase 1 pulse cycle is 4 pulses). When the present position falls within ±[AE-04] of the target position, the"Positioning complete [POK]" signal turns ON. [POK] Assign signals to output pins as required.
(7) Set the target position of positioning operation, speed command (frequency command), acceleration time anddeceleration time. The target position is set to "Position command 0 [AE-20]" to "Position command 15 [AE-50]"
and selected by the combination of "Position command selection 1 to 4 ([CP1] to [CP4])" of the input terminal
function. The speed command (frequency command) and acceleration/deceleration time follow the frequency
command and acceleration/deceleration time setting from each command selection destination when an
operation command is input.
(8) When "Limit (00)" is set to "Positioning mode selection [AE-56]", the position range designation is enabled. Set
the position control range to "Position range specification (forward rotation side) [AE-52]" and "Position range
specification (reverse rotation side) [AE-54]." When the present position is out of the specified position range,
the inverter trips due to "Position control range over error [E104]". When "Do not limit (01)" is set to [AE-56], theposition range designation is disabled and the shortest position control function is enabled. For details, refer to"Minimum position control function" in this section.

9-188
9-188

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
2. Positioning operation

・The figure below shows the positioning operation when the RUN command is turned ON.
RUN command

ON
(1-1)

The area of this trapezoidal operation patternis the movement amount (target position).

Output frequency(Hz)(3)

Velocity command

(1-2)
(2)

If the position command is small, theactuator decelerates and performs(4)
positioning without reaching the
speed command.

Creep speed setting [AE-15]
Time

Position deviation(Remaining distance)
Positioning completed
range setting [AE-04]

Position displacementat creep speed [AE-16](5)
DC braking[POK] Output

Positioning completed delay time setting [AE-05](6)ON(1) When an RUN command is input (1-1), the positioning operation is automatically started in the trapezoidal
operation pattern shown in the above figure according to the position command, speed command (frequency
reference), acceleration time, and deceleration time selected from each command destination at that time.(1-2)
The rotation direction is forward if the position deviation (target position-current position) is positive, or reverse
if it is negative.
(2) Accelerate according to the acceleration time until the speed command (frequency reference) is reached. At
this time, if the movement amount to the target position is small, the actuator decelerates before reaching the
speed command (broken line in the figure).
If the movement amount is smaller than "creep speed movement amount [AE-16]", it will move to the target
position with "creep speed setting [AE-15]", and if the movement amount is within "positioning complete range
setting [AE-04]", DC braking will operate on the spot.
(3) From the target position, deceleration starts before the move distance at deceleration + creep-speed travel
distance [AE-16].
(4) It decelerates and operates at that speed when the output frequency becomes "creep speed setting [AE-15]".
If the motor revolution becomes unstable in the low speed range, increase [AE-15].
(5) When the present position reaches within the target position ± "Positioning complete range setting [AE-04]",
DC braking will operate. DC braking is released when the operation command is OFF.
DC braking after stopping is not controlled to hold the position, so the stop position may be shifted when
external force is applied. Use an external brake if position retention is required.
(6) After the present position reaches within the target position ± "Positioning completion range setting[AE-04]", after the "Positioning completion delay time setting [AE-05]" has elapsed, the "Positioning completion[POK]" will be outputted.

・For single-phase pulsing ([CA-91]=03), the position is not counted if the motor is rotated while nooperation command is input. To prevent the position from shifting while the motor is stopped, preventthe motor shaft from rotating while the motor is stopped by braking or change to the 90° phasedifference pulse input or forward/reverse command and pulse so that the motor is counted even whenthe motor is stopped.
・For single-phase pulses ([CA-91]=03), if the rotation direction command is switched during operation,
an error may occur in the position counting due to the time difference between the switching of thedirection of the inverter's output frequency and the switching of the actual motor rotation direction. In
position control with single-phase pulses, stop it securely and then change the rotation direction.

9-189
9-189

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Multi-stage position command switching function

・The position command can be selected from "Position command 0 [AE-20]" to "Position command
15[AE-50]" by combining "Position command selection 1 [CP1](076)" to "Position command selection 4[CP4](079)" of the input terminal function with the multi-stage position command switching function.
・Position commands 0 to 15 are set at an absolute position with reference to the origin.
・If there is no assignment of [CP1] to [CP4] to the input terminal, "Position command 0 [AE-20]" is the
position command.
・When inputting position command selection 1 to 4, the time until the input terminal status (positioncommand selection) is confirmed can be adjusted with "Multi-stage input confirmation time [CA-55]".
Incorrect selection due to the input time difference of position command selection 1 to 4 can beprevented. The selection will be confirmed after the [CA-55] setting has elapsed without any changes.
Note that the input response will be worse if the settling time is increased.
Code

Item

AE-20 to
AE-50

Positioncommand 0 to
positioncommand 15

AE-52

Position control
range (Forward)

AE-54

Position control
range (Reverse)

CA-55

Multistage input
determinationtime

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

Data

Initialvalue[AE-52] to [AE-54]

0

For AA123≠03:
0 to 268435455 pls
For AA123=03:
0 to 1073741823 pls

268435455

For AA123≠03:-268435455 to 0 pls
For AA123=03:-1073741823 to 0 pls-268435455

0 to 2000 ms

0076([CP1])077([CP2])078([CP3])079([CP4])-

Description
Set position command 0 to 15. If the value is positive,
it will be in the forward direction. If it is negative, it will
be in the reverse direction.
(The setting range is limited to "Position range
designation (reverse rotation side) [AE-54]" to "Position
range designation (forward rotation side) [AE-52]".)
Set the position control range on the forward rotation
side.
If [AE-56] is "Limit (00)", the motor trips due to "Position
control range error [E104]" if the present position
counter exceeds this setting.
Set the position control range on the reverse side.
If [AE-56] is "Limit (00)", the motor trips due to "Position
control range error [E104]" if the present position
counter exceeds this setting.
This is the time until the position command isdetermined when the multistage position command
switching is performed.
Multistage position settings selection 1 to 4([CP1]/[CP2]/[CP3]/[CP4]):
Select the position command in the combination of
ON/OFF of the pin functions.

Position command

CP4

CP3

CP2

CP1

Position command 0

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Position command 1

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

Position command 2

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

Position command 3

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Position command 4

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Position command 5

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Position command 6

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Position command 7

OFF

ON

ON

ON

Position command 8

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Position command 9

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

Position command 10

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Position command 11

ON

OFF

ON

ON

Position command 12

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Position command 13

ON

ON

OFF

ON

Position command 14

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Position command 15

ON

ON

ON

ON

Using [CP1] to [CP3] as an input connector

7

Positioncommand

3
0

Fix

Fix
5 4

1

[CP1] Input[CP2] Input[CP3] Input

9-190
9-190

Multistage input determination time [CA-55]

0Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Teaching operation function

・This function rotates and stops the motor optional and stores the position as a position command in anarbitrary position command.
・In position teaching, use "Teach selection [AE-60]" to store the "Present position monitor [dA-20]" to"Position command 0 [AE-20]" to "Position command 15[AE-50].
■Basic operation of teaching(1) Move the workpiece to the position to be memorized by normal operation or manually to adjust theposition.
(2) Key [AE-60] to select X00 to X15, and then press SET.
Thus, the position data of "Present Position Monitor [dA-20]" is stored in the corresponding positioncommand. (X00=[AE-20] to X15=[AE-50] is supported. Refer to the table below for details.)■Example of teaching procedure during absolute position control operation(1) Select the position command number to be set in "Teach selection [AE-60]" (No SET key is pressed).
(2) Move the workpiece. Turn ON the input terminal function "Teach signal [TCH]" to enable velocity
control, and then input the RUN command. The speed command and acceleration/deceleration
time depend on the selection status at this time.
(3) When the workpiece reaches the target position, select the position command to be set with [AE-60]
and press SET. Thus, the present position is saved in the position command destination (see thetable below) set in "Teach selection [AE-60]" (the saving of the position itself is independent of
ON/OFF status of the [TCH] input terminal).
(4) To store the position continuously, repeat from step (1).
Note: The [AE-60] setting is not saved. If power shutdown or resetting is performed, "X00(00)" will occur.
[AE-60] Set value

Position command to be set

00: X00
01: X01
02: X02
03: X03
04: X04
05: X05
06: X06
07: X07
08: X08
09: X09
10: X10
11: X11
12: X12
13: X13
14: X14
15: X15[AE-20]: Position command 0[AE-22]: Position command 1[AE-24]: Position command 2[AE-26]: Position command 3[AE-28]: Position command 4[AE-30]: Position command 5[AE-32]: Position command 6[AE-34]: Position command 7[AE-36]: Position command 8[AE-38]: Position command 9[AE-40]: Position command 10[AE-42]: Position command 11[AE-44]: Position command 12[AE-46]: Position command 13[AE-48]: Position command 14[AE-50]: Position command 15[TCH] Input

ON

RUN command
Outputfrequency

ON
Follows the setting of the selected
speed command destination.

Position

Absolute position
control mode

Speed control mode

Code

Item

Description

AE-60

Teach-in function
target selection

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

The "Present position monitor [dA-20]" is stored in the corresponding
position command.
Teaching signal[TCH]:
With this signal turned ON, the teaching operation function operates
by inputting an operation command.

Absolute position
control mode

Data

Initialvalue

00 to 15

00

110

-

・Regardless of the control mode or operation status, if you select "X00(00)" to "X15(15" in "Teachselection [AE-60]" and press SET key, the corresponding position command ([AE-20] to [AE-50]) will bechanged with the content of "Present position monitor [dA-20]".
・Do not use [AE-60] for purposes other than position teaching.

9-191
9-191

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Minimum position control function

・When "OFF limit (01)" is selected in "Positioning mode select [AE-56]", the rotational direction isdetermined so that the travel distance to the target position is the shortest for applications like theturntable shown in the figure below.
■Application example) Turntable with 8 positioning points
・Assume that an attempt is made to move from the present position (1000 pls) to the target position(6000 pls) of a turntable whose position area is set as shown below. (Be sure to set each positioning
point within the position range.)
Position control range (Forward) [AE-52] = 7999
Position range designation (Reverse) [AE-54] = 0- [AE-56] = "Limit (00)"(Target position)-(Present position) = +5000 pls, so rotate in the forward
direction.
- [AE-56] = "Do not limit (01)" will cause the actuator to move in the reverse direction in which the
movement distance in the forward direction is smaller than that in the reverse direction.
Forward move: + 5000 pls
Reverse move: -3000 pls
Current position

0

1000

7000

[AE-56]=「"No limit"

Target position
6000

2000

5000

3000
4000

[AE-56]= "Limit" caseNote: Depending on the position range setting, the following settings can also be made.
[AE-52] = +3999[AE-54] = -4000
Current position

-4000

-3000

3000

[AE-56]= 「"No limit"

Target position
2000

-2000

1000

-1000
0

[AE-56]= "Limit" case・If "Positioning mode selection [AE-56]" = "No limit (01)", "Position control range error [E104]" will notoccur.
・In the above cases, when moving from 7000 pls position to 1000 pls position, the position 7999 pls will
move from the present position counter to 1000 pls position instead of 8000 pls.

9-192
9-192

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Positioning restart function

・With this function, positioning operation is performed automatically again if the position is misaligned
due to external force during DC braking after positioning of the position control operation iscompleted.
・This function is activated when the present position is out of the range of the target position ±"positioning restart range setting [AE-17]".
・When [AE-17] is set to other than 0 pls, this function is enabled. [It does not work for AE-17] = 0 pls.
・This function does not operate when the RUN command is turned OFF after the completion of
positioning.
・Set [AE-17] in the same way as [AE-04] in 4 multiplications (A-phase 1 pulse cycle is 4 pulses).
・Depending on the setting of "Positioning restart range setting [AE-17]" and "Positioning completion
range setting [AE-04]", the repositioning function may start and stop repeatedly. Set and adjust so that[AE-17]>[AE-04] is selected to prevent frequent start/stop operations.
・Do not use this function if the brake is used to hold the stop position. Brake opening and closing may
become frequent and the load may drop or overload trip may occur.
Code

AE-04

AE-17

Item
Positioning completed
range setting

Positioning restart range

Description
When the present position falls within the range of the target
position ±[AE-04], the [POK] signal will be outputted assumingthat the positioning is complete.
(4 multiplication setting)
When the present position is out of the range of the target
position ±[AE-17] after the completion of positioning, thepositioning operation is performed again.
(4 multiplication setting)

9-193
9-193

Data

Initialvalue
50

0 to 10000 pls
0Inverter Function

Chapter 9Function signal of homing function

・Three types of origin return operations can be selected by "Origin return mode selection [AE-70]".
・When using the home-return function, assign "home limit signal [ORL](080)" and "home-return startsignal [ORG](081)" to the input terminals. [ORL] Input a home signal using a limit sensor, etc. to the
input terminal.
・Origin return rotation direction is selected by "Origin return direction selection [AE-71]". When origin
return ends, the current position is cleared to zero.
・The operation when the [ORG] connector is ON can be changed by setting "ORG Pin Operation
Selection [AE-74]". If "No operation command (00)" is set, the [ORG] input terminal must be turned ON
and the RUN command must be input further in order to initiate the home-return operation. When
"RUN command multiplexed (01)" is set, ON of the [ORG] input terminal will immediately initiate Home
Return operation.
・In relation to origin return, please also use the current position clear function, current position presetfunction, and position data hold function at power shutdown, which are described below, in
combination according to the application.
・Assign "Pulse input Z [PLZ](109)" to "Input terminal function [ES] selection [CA-06]" and input Z pulse of
encoder to input terminal [ES] when "Home return mode selection [AE-70]" is set to "High-speed Home
return 2 (02)".
Code

dA-20

Current position
monitor

AE-70

Homing function
selection

AE-71

AE-72
AE-73
AE-74

CA-01 toCA-08

Description

Data

Initialvalue

The value of this monitor is cleared to zero when the
power is turned off and return to origin is completed.
It is also possible to change to an arbitrary value by thecurrent position preset function described later or saveto the internal memory of the current position by thecurrent position storage function when the power isturned off.

For AA123≠03:-268435455 to+268435455 pls
For AA123=03:-1073741823 to+1073741823 pls

-

Item

Homing direction
selection
Low-speed homing
speed setting
High-speed homing
speed
ORG action selection

Input terminal function

Low-speed homing

00

High-speed homing 1

01

High-speed homing 2

02

The direction of rotation when returning to the origin istaken as the forward direction.
The direction of rotation when returning to the origin isassumed to be the reverse direction.

00

00
01
01

Set the speed of the low-speed origin return mode.

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

5.00

Set the speed of high-speed origin return mode.

0.00 toMax. frequency Hz

5.00

RUN command input source none00

RUN command input source combined use

01

Home limit [ORL]:
Input signal from the home limit switch, etc. duringhome return operation.

080

Origin return start signal[ORG]:
When this signal is turned ON in absolute position
control, the home-return operation starts.

081

Pulse-input Z[PLZ]:
Accepts Z-phase pulse input.

109

9-194
9-194

01

-

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Low-speed homing ([AE-70] = 00)

・The following figure explains the operation when "Origin return mode selection [AE-70]" is "Low speed
origin return (00)" and "ORG terminal operation selection [AE-74]" is "Operation command also (01)".
[ORG] Input

ON[ORL] Input

ON

Output frequency

(2)
(1)

Low-speed homing speed setting [AE-72]
OriginCurrent position(3)

Current Zero clear of position= Set current position to origin(1) When the "Origin return start signal [ORG]" input terminal becomes ON, the actuator accelerates inthe direction of "Origin return direction selection [AE-71]". At this time, do not input the operationcommand because the absolute position control starts.
(2) Run at "Low-speed zero return speed [AE-72]".
(3) When the "Home limit [ORL]" input terminal is ON, the "Present position monitor [dA-20]" is cleared
to zero. At the same time, DC braking operates. [ORG] OFF the INPUT terminal to cancel DC
braking.
■High-speed homing 1 ([AE-70] = 01)
・The following figure shows the operation when "Home Return Mode Selection [AE-70]" is "High-speed
Home Return 1 (01)" and "ORG Terminal Operation Selection [AE-74]" is "RUN Command (01)".
ON[ORG] Input

ON[ORL] Input(2)
Output frequency(1)High-speed homing speed setting[AE-73](3)
Origin
(4)

(5)

Time
Low-speed homing speed setting[AE-72]Current Zero clear of position= Set current position to origin

Current position

Time(1) When the "Origin return start signal [ORG]" input terminal becomes ON, the actuator accelerates inthe direction of "Origin return direction selection [AE-71]". At this time, do not input the RUN
command because the absolute position control starts.
(2) Run at "high-speed home return speed [AE-73]"(3) When the "Home limit [ORL]" input terminal is ON, decelerating starts.
(4) After stopping, re-accelerate in the direction opposite to "Origin return direction selection [AE-71]"
and run at "Low-speed Origin return velocity [AE-72]".
(5) [ORL] When the input terminal is OFF, "Present Position Monitor [dA-20]" is cleared to zero. At thesame time, DC braking operates. [ORG] OFF the INPUT terminal to cancel DC braking.

9-195
9-195

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■High-speed homing 2 ([AE-70] = 02)

・The following figure shows the operation when "Home Return Mode Selection [AE-70]" is "High-speed
Home Return 2 (02)" and "ORG Terminal Operation Selection [AE-74]" is "RUN Command (01)".
[ORG] Input

ON
ON[ORL] InputON[PLZ] Input(2)
Output frequency(1)High-speed homing
speed setting [AE-73]
(6)

(3)

(7)
(4)
Low-speed homing speed
setting [AE-72]

Low-speed homing
speed setting [AE-72]

OriginTime(5)Current Zero clear of position= Set current position to origin

Current position

Time(1) When the "Origin return start signal [ORG]" input terminal becomes ON, the actuator accelerates inthe direction of "Origin return direction selection [AE-71]". At this time, do not input the RUN
command because the absolute position control starts.
(2) Run at "high-speed home return speed [AE-73]"(3) When the "Home limit [ORL]" input terminal is ON, decelerating starts.
(4) After stopping, re-accelerate in the direction opposite to "Origin return direction selection [AE-71]"
and run at "Low-speed Origin return velocity [AE-72]".
(5) [ORL] When the terminal is OFF, decelerating starts.
(6) Accelerate in the direction of "Origin return direction selection [AE-71]" and run at "Low speed
origin return speed [AE-72]". To do this, ON the [ORL] connector again.
(7) [ORL] When the first Z-pulse ("pulse input Z [PLZ]" input terminal) is input after the input terminal isturned ON, the "present position monitor [dA-20]" is cleared to zero. At the same time, DC braking
operates. [ORG] OFF the INPUT terminal to cancel DC braking.

9-196
9-196

Inverter Function

Chapter 9Home position setting by the current position clear function

・Assign "current position clear [PCLR](072)" to the input terminal and ON the terminal to clear "current
position monitor [dA-20]" to zero.
・Move to the home position in advance and set the [PCLR] terminal to ON to fix the home position.
・"Clearance of position deviation[PCLR]", if "Vector control mode selection [AA123]" is set to "Velocity
Feedback (02)", the "Pulse-input detection target selection [CA-90]" will be enabled regardless of the"Vector control mode selection [AA123]" setting.
Code
CA-01 to
CA-08

Item
Input terminal
function

Description

Data

Clearing present position [PCLR]:
If "Pulse-input detection target selection [CA-90]" is "Velocity Feedback (02)","Present Position Monitor [dA-20]" will be cleared to zero when this signal isturned ON.

072

Home position setting by current position preset function
・The current position preset function overwrites the position data set in "Preset position data [AE-62]" tothe current position. It can be used to restart from the middle of the positioning process, etc.
・This function is used when the home position set by the "home limit signal [ORL]" input terminal or the"pulse input Z [PLZ]" input terminal and the actual home position are offset.
・By assigning "Position data preset [PSET](085)" to the input terminal and ON the terminal, "Present
position monitor [dA-20]" can be set to "Preset position data [AE-62]".
・Overwriting is performed at ON of the [PSET] connector.
・「Position data presetting[PSET] If "Vector control mode selection [AA123]" is set to "Velocity Feedback(02)", the "Pulse-input detection target selection [CA-90]" will be enabled regardless of the "Vector
control mode selection [AA123]" setting.
Code

Item

AE-52

Position control
range (forward)

AE-54

Position control
range (reverse)

AE-62

Pre-set positiondata

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

Description

Data

Set the position control range on the forward rotation
side. When [AE-56] is 00, if the present position counter
exceeds this setting, it will trip due to "Position control
range error [E104]".
Set the position control range on the reverse side. When
[AE-56] is 00, if the present position counter exceeds thissetting, it will trip due to "Position control range error[E104]".
Set the position data preset value.
(The setting range is limited to "Position range
designation (reverse rotation side) [AE-54]" to "Position
range designation (forward rotation side) [AE-52]".)
Position data preset [PSET]:
When "Speed Feedback (02)" is selected for "Pulseinput detection target selection [CA-90]", "Present
Position Monitor [dA-20]" is set to [AE-62] when thissignal is turned ON.

For AA123≠03:
0 to 268435455 pls
For AA123=03:
0 to 1073741823 pls
For AA123≠03:-268435455 to 0 pls
For AA123=03:-1073741823 to 0 pls

9-197
9-197

Initialvalue
268435455-268435455[AE-52] to [ AE-54]

0

085

-

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Current position memory function when the power is shut off

・When "Current position storage at power shutdown [AE-61]" is set to "Enabled (01)", the value of"Current position monitor [dA-20]" is saved in the inverter internal memory when the power is shut
down, and the value stored at the next power on is set as the current position.
・If the motor is rotated while the power is turned off, the position at that time will not be counted,
resulting in a position shift. Therefore, when using this function, use a brake, etc. to prevent the motor
from rotating when the power is cut off.
・Even if the motor is restrained by the brake when the power is cut off, the positional deviation may
accumulate due to backlash of the rotating shaft, etc. Therefore, check the operation of theapplication, and eliminate the positional shift by the power supply restoration function, etc., ifnecessary.
Code

Item

Description

AE-61

Power-offCurrent position
memoryDataDisabled: Do not save position data when power is cut off.

00

Enabled: The current position is memorized when the power is cut off, and theposition memorized when the power is turned on next time is set as
the current position.

01

Initialvalue

00

Forward/reverse drive stopping function ([FOT]/[ROT])・This function is used to prevent deviation from the operating range by a signal from the control range
limit switch.
・When "Forward drive stop [FOT](082)" of the input terminal function is input, the torque limit on theforward reverse side is limited to 10% when "Forward drive stop [ROT](083)" is input. It can be applied
as a limit switch at the mechanical end.
・[FOT]/[ROT] is enabled when "Control method [AA121]" is "Vector control without sensor (IM) (08)".
Code

CA-01 to
CA-08

Item

Description

Input terminal function

Forward drive stopped [FOT]:
When the control method [AA121] is "sensorless vector control (IM) (08)",
if this signal is turned ON, the forward torque limit is limited to 10%.
Reverse drive stopped [ROT]:
When the control method [AA121] is "sensorless vector control (IM) (08)",
if this signal is turned ON, the torque limit on the reverse side is limited to 10%.

9-198
9-198

Data
082

083

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.14.2 Orientation function

・In absolute position control, orientation control can be performed.
・Set "Vector control mode [AA123]" to "Speed-torque control mode (00)" and use it.
・This function allows positioning at any point during one rotation of the motor. It can be used for toolchange of machine tool spindle, etc.
・Absolute position control, for encoder feedback, see also "9.14.1 Controlling to the absolute position of
the reference point (absolute position control)" and "9.5.11 Using encoder feedback".
・The Z pulse (single rotation position signal) is used as the reference signal for positioning. Whenconnecting an encoder to the control terminal block, assign the input terminal function "Pulse input Z[PLZ](109)" to the input terminal [ES] and input Z pulses.
RUN command([FR]/[RR] Input)

ON[ORT] Input

ON
(2)
(1)

Outputfrequency

Speed reference of home search function [AE-12](3)

Positioning completed range
setting [AE-04][PLZ] Output[POK] Output

ON

Speed
control

Positioncontrol(4)
Positioning completed delay time
setting [AE-05](1) When the RUN command is ON while the "Orientation [ORT]" input terminal is ON, the actuator
accelerates to the "Orientation speed setting [AE-12]" and enters constant speed operation. In thiscase, the operation direction follows the "Orientation direction setting [AE-13]".
(If it is during operation, if it is the same as the operation direction set to [AE-13], the speed willchange to the orientation speed when the [ORT] input terminal is turned ON, and if it is different, it
will re-accelerate according to the setting of [AE-13] after decelerating stop.)(2) After reaching the orientation velocity set in [AE-12], it will switch to position control when the first
Z-pulse is detected.
(3) Position control will be performed with "Orientation stop position [AE-11]" plus one revolution forforward rotation and "Orientation stop position [AE-11] + one revolution for reverse rotation as thetarget. (Does not follow deceleration time setting.)(4) After "Positioning completion delay time setting [AE-05]" elapses after the remaining number ofpulses falls within "Positioning completion range setting [AE-04]", the "Positioning completion [POK]"
signal is outputted. DC braking operation is performed after positioning is completed. DC braking
operation and [POK] will continue until the operation command is OFF.
・If the "Orientation velocity setting [AE-12]" is large and the "Positioning complete range setting [AE-04]"
is small, overshoot may occur and the "Positioning complete [POK]" signal may not be outputted. If thishappens, reduce the [AE-12] or increase the [AE-04].

9-199
9-199

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code
AA123
AE-04
AE-05
AE-10
AE-11
AE-12

Data

Initialvalue

Mode of speed control to torque control

00

00

Encoder 4 multiplication equivalent value

0 to 10000 pls

50

Specify how long it takes for the [POK] signal to be output
after positioning is complete.

0.00 to10.00 s

0.00

Item

Description

Vector control mode
selection
Positioning completed
range setting
Positioning completed
delay time setting
Stop position selection ofhome search function
Stop position of home
search function Note:1
Speed reference of home
search function Note:2

Parameter setting ([AE-11])00

Communication Options

01

Set the stop position for orientation control.
Sets the output frequency during orientation control.

0 to 4095

00.00 to 120.00 Hz

5.00

Starts in the forward direction during orientation control.

00

Starts in the reverse direction during orientation control.

01

AE-13

Direction of home searchfunction

CA-01 toCA-05

Input terminal function

CA-06

Input terminal function[ES] selection

Orientation [ORT]:
Orientation control starts when the operation signal isturned ON while this signal is ON.
Pulse-input Z[PLZ]:
Accepts Z-phase pulse input.

CA-81

Encoder constant setting

Set the number of pulses.

Encoder phase sequence
selection

A phase lead00

B phase lead

01

CA-82

CA-90

CA-91
CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

00

069

-

109

033

1 to 65535 pls

512

Disable00

Pulse input frequency directive

01

Velocity feedback

02

Pulse count03

Pulse input mode
selection

90° phase difference pulse input

00

Forward and reverse command and pulse input

01

Single phase pulse input

03

Output terminal function

Positioning complete [POK]:
When the present position falls within ±[AE-04] of thetarget position, this signal is turned ON.

043

Pulse input targetfunction selection

00

00

01

03
002
001
017

Note: 1. The orientation stop position is set as one rotation 4096 division (0 to 4095) from the reference point in theforward direction, regardless of the number of pulses of the encoder. The reference point is the point whereZ pulse is input, and the stop target position is arranged as shown in the figure below when viewed from the
motor shaft load side. (For positive-phase connection)
2. Do not set the orientation speed setting to a high frequency, as the deceleration operation will be in thepositioning state within two rotations. Overvoltage protection may trip or overshoot.
Position of the Z pulse
Reference point

Position of the Z pulse
Reference point

0

0

1024

3072

3072

1024

2048

2048

Forward rotation

Reverse rotation

Note: When looking at the motor shaft from the motor shaft load side

9-200
9-200

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.14.3 Switching operation between speed control and position control

・In the absolute position control mode, when the "Speed/position switching [SPD](084)" of the input
terminal function is turned ON, the normal frequency operation (speed control operation) is performed.
The rotation direction follows the direction command at the time of operation command.
・[SPD] While the input terminal is ON, the present position counter is 0. If the [SPD] input terminal isturned OFF during operation, the unit switches to position control operation from that point.
・If the position command when switching from speed control to position control is 0, stop operation
starts on the spot.
・[SPD] While the input terminal is ON, the actuator moves in the direction dependent on the operationcommand. When switching from speed control to position control, pay attention to the sign of theoperation command.
Code
CA-01 to
CA-08

Item

Description

Input terminal function

Data

Speed/position switching [SPD]:
When this signal is ON, it runs in velocity control, and when it becomes OFF,it switches to position control operation.

Output frequency
Start position counting

Speed control

Position control

Time

DC braking (DB)[SPD] Input
Operationcommand([FR]/[RR] Input)

Target position

ON
ON

9-201
9-201

084

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.14.4 Operate absolute position control and brake control in conjunction
・If "Brake control selection [AF130]" = "Brake control enable (01)" or "Brake control enable(forward/reverse individual setting) (02)" is set in the absolute position control mode, the absolute
position control and brake control are automatically linked.
・Setting [AF130] to "Braking Control Enable (Forward/Reverse Individual)" (02) allows you to set a
different operation between forward and reverse rotation. When "Braking control enable (01)" is set to[AF130], the forward setting ([AF131] to [AF137]) is enabled for both forward and reverse.
・This section describes when "Brake control selection [AF130]" = "Brake control enable (01)". When thisfunction is used in reverse rotation with "Brake control selection [AF130]" = "Brake control enable(forward/reverse individual setting) (02)", replace [AF131] to [AF136] with the reverse setting ([AF138]
to [AF143]).
・When using this function, assign "Brake release [BRK](037)" to the output terminals.
・To operate this function while interlocking by inputting a confinement/release check signal from theexternal brake to the inverter, assign "Brake check [BOK](037)" to the input terminal and set "Brake
check wait time ([AF134]/[AF141])". Also, assign "Braking error [BER](038)" to the output terminals as
required.
・『9.7.10 Perform related settings referring to "Start/Stop" and "9.14.1 Control to Absolute Position ofReference Point Reference (Absolute Position Control)" respectively.
・At deceleration, when the "creep rate setting [AE-15]" is reached, the "brake release [BRK]" signal isOFF, and the brake is restrained and the motor is stopped. For this reason, it will be stopped before the"creep-speed travel distance [AE-16]" at the largest from the actual target position. Considering theaccuracy of the stopping position, set "creep-speed movement [AE-16]" and "positioning completionarea setting [AE-04]."
Code

Item

AE-14

DC braking control selection forsimple positioning

AF130

Brake control enable

AF131

Brake release wait -motor (Forward)

AF138

Brake release wait -motor (Reverse)

AF132

Brake wait time for accel. (Forward)

AF139

Brake wait time for accel. (Reverse)

AF133
AF140

Brake wait time for stopping (Forward)
Brake wait time for stopping (Reverse)
Brake confirmation signal wait -motor(Forward)
Brake confirmation signal wait -motor(Reverse)
Brake release current -motor(Forward)

AF134
AF141
AF136

Description
Simple positioning DB control disabled
Simple positioning DB control enabled
Brake control enabled
Brake control enabled(Forward/Reverse individual setting)Set the time from when the brake releasefrequency is reached until the output current
reaches the brake release current.
[BOK] Set the mechanical delay from ON of the
input terminal (or the [BRK] signal to the releaseof braking).
[BRK] Sets the mechanical delay between OFF
and braking.

Data
00
01
01
02

Initial
value
00
00

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output
current A

1.00×
rated
outputcurrent[BRK] After the signal is output, set the time
longer than the time until the release
completion signal output from the brake turns
ON the [BOK] input terminal of the inverter.
Sets the output current that enables brakerelease.

AF143

Brake release current -motor (Reverse)

AA123

Vector control mode selection

AE-04

Positioning completed range

AE-15

Creep speed setting

Set the low-speed operation just before thecompletion of positioning.

AE-16

Position displacement at creep speed

Set the move distance to operate at the [AE-16]
speed.

Absolute position control mode

02

High-resolution absolute position control mode
When the present position falls within the rangeof the target position ± [AE-04], the [POK] signal
will be outputted assuming that the positioning
is complete. (4 multiplication setting)

03

9-202
9-202

0 to 10000 pls
Min. frequency[Hb130] to
10.00 Hz
0 to16384 pls

00

50

5.00
2560

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code

Item

Description

Data

CA-01 to
CA-08

Input
terminalfunction

Braking confirmation [BOK]:
Check this input signal as an answerback of the [BRK] signal to the external brake.

037

Outputterminalfunction

Brake release [BRK]:
This signal is for restraining/releasing the external brake.
Braking error [BER]:
This relay is ON when a sequence error occurs in the brake control function.
With ON of this signal, the inverter trips with "Brake error [E036]".

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

037

Initial
value

002
001
017

038

Creep speed setting [AE-15]

Creep speed setting [AE-15]

Position displacement at
creep speed [AE-16]

Output frequency
(5)

(1)

(7)

DC braking
RUN command[BRK] Output(2)

Brake wait time forstopping [AF133](8)

Brake release establishment wait time (forward) [AF131](4)

Acceleration wait time
(forward) [AF132][BOK] Input
(3)

(6)

Braking Confirmation Wait Time (Forward) [AF134]

Braking Confirmation Wait Time (Forward) [AF134](1) When an RUN command is issued, the inverter accelerates to the creep-speed setting [AE-15].
The rotation direction is forward if (current position-target position) is positive, and reverse if negative.
In addition, if the target position is within ± "Positioning completion area [AE-04]", it will be stopped on the spot
without releasing the brakes. Whether to perform DC braking depends on the [AE-14] setup.
(2) After the output frequency reaches the "creep velocity setting [AE-15]" and the time "Brake releaseestablishment wait time (forward) [AF131]" has elapsed, the "Brake release [BRK]" signal turns ON.
However, if the output current at this time is less than the "brake release current (forward rotation side)[AF136]", the [BRK] signal will not be ON, the "brake error [E036]" trip will occur instead, and the "brake error[BER]" signal will be turned ON.
(3) The operation differs depending on whether "Braking confirmation [BOK]" is assigned to the input terminal.
[BOK] With assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns ON, the inverter does not accelerate and waits for the [BOK]
input terminals to become ON during the "Braking Confirmation Wait Time (Forward) [AF134]". If the [BOK]
input terminal does not turn ON within the waiting time, a "Braking error [E036]" trip will occur and the "Braking
error [BER]" signal will be ON.
[BOK] No assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns ON, go to step (4).
(4) [BOK] When the time of "Acceleration wait time (forward side)[AF132]" has elapsed after the input terminals ON(or after the [BRK] signal is turned ON), the motor accelerates to the set frequency again. If the movement to thetarget position is small, deceleration starts while reaching the set frequency.
(5) Deceleration starts at the position before (movement during deceleration + creep speed movement [AE-16])from the target position. The inverter decelerates to the "creep-speed setting [AE-15]" and OFF [BRK].
(6) The operation differs depending on whether "Braking confirmation [BOK]" is assigned to the input terminal.
[BOK] With assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns OFF, the inverter does not decelerate and waits for the [BOK]
input terminals to become OFF during the "Braking Confirmation Wait Time (Forward) [AF134]". If the [BOK]
input terminal does not turn OFF within the waiting time, a "Braking error [E036]" trip will occur and the "Braking
error [BER]" signal will be ON. [BOK] No assignment: After the [BRK] signal turns OFF, proceed to step (7).
(7) [BOK] After the input terminal OFF (or [BRK] signal is turned OFF), the Motor decelerates to 0Hz again when the"Stop wait time (forward)[AF133]" or the "Creep velocity move distance [AE-16]" travel time elapses, whicheveris longer.
(8) After stopping, the inverter follows the setting of "Simple positioning DB control at braking control [AE-14]". If"simple positioning DB control disabled (00)", it will be shut off. When "Simple positioning DB control enabled(01)" is selected, DC braking is activated, and when the operation command is OFF, the output shuts off.

9-203
9-203

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.15 Input signal
9.15.1 Input signal function

・Input connectors [FR] through [PLA] are intelligent input connectors. By assigning the functions in the
input terminal function list shown on the next page to "Input terminal function selection ([CA-01] to[CA-08])", the functions specified for input terminals [FR] to [PLA] are assigned. For details of eachfunction, refer to the chapter in the reference column of the input pin function list.
・For input terminals [FR] through [PLA], either a-contact (NO) input or b-contact (NC) input can beselected individually according to the setting of "Input terminal a/b (NO/NC) selection ([CA-21] to [CA28])".
- Contact a (NO): ON when the contact is closed, OFF when the contact is opened- Contact b (NC): OFF when the contact is closed, ON when the contact is opened
・The same function cannot be assigned to multiple input pins. When assignment is set to multiple pins,
the last assigned pin is enabled, and the previous assignment is "No assignment [no]".
・The electrical specifications of input terminal [PLA] differ from those of input terminals [FR] through[RST]. For details, refer to the table below and "5.4.1 Configuration of Control Circuit Terminals".
・When receiving encoder feedback or using an external thermistor, the input terminal function assigned
to some pins is disabled depending on the setting of the parameter related to each. For details, refer to"9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback" or "9.10.8 Monitoring Motor Temperature".
Code

Item

Description

Data

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

Assign the input terminal function to input terminals [FR] through [PLA].
The [CA-01] to [CA-08] settings correspond to the [FR]-[PLA] connectors.

Refer to "List of Input
Terminal Functions" inthis section

CA-21 toCA-28

Input terminal
active state

Operates as a-contact (NO: normally open).

00

Operates as a b-contact (NC: normally closed).

01

Input terminal
PLA

RST

ES

AUT DFM DFLRRFRCOM PCS P24

Example of external wiring (sink logic)
Input terminal [PLA] only voltage input (common always [COM] terminal)
Input terminal[FR] to [AUT][ES], [RST][PLA]Electric Characteristics
ON: Min. 18V
OFF: Max. 3V
Max. allowable voltage: 27V
Load current: 5mA (24V)Internal resistance: 4.7kΩ
Input-pulse: min. 0.3Hz to max. 32kHz
ON: Min. 18V
OFF: Max. 3V
Max. allowable voltage: 27V
Load current: 8mA (24V)Internal resistance: 3kΩ
Input-pulse: min. 0.3Hz to max. 32kHz
ON: Min. 4V
OFF: Max. 1V
Max. allowable voltage: 27VInternal resistance:11kΩ

9-204
9-204

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Table of input terminal functions
Function
No.

Symbol000

no

Not use001

FR

Forward rotation

002

RR

Reverse rotation

003

DFL

Multi speed selection 1

004

DFM

Multi speed selection 2

005

DFH

Multi speed selection 3

006

DHH

007
008
009

Function name

Referenc eFunction
No.

Symbol

-

055

PRO

PID gain change

9-114

056

PIO1

PID output switching 1

9-124

058

SLEP

SLEEP condition activation

059

WAKE

WAKE condition activation

9-2

Function name

9-117

060

TL

061

TRQ1

Torque limit selection bit 1

Multi speed selection 4

062

TRQ2

Torque limit selection bit 2

SF1

Multi speed Bit-1

063

PPI

P/PI control mode selection

SF2

Multi speed Bit-2

064

CAS

Control gain change

9-65
9-67

SF3

Multi speed Bit-3

067

ATR

Permission of torque control

9-55

068

TBS

Torque Bias enable

9-64

069

ORT

Home search function

9-200

9-11
9-30

9-12
9-30

Torque limit enable

Refere
nce

9-59
9-60

010

SF4

Multi speed Bit-4

011

SF5

Multi speed Bit-5

012

SF6

Multi speed Bit-6

071

LAC

Acceleration/Deceleration
cancellation

9-23

013

SF7

Multi speed Bit-7

072

PCLR

Clearance of position deviation

9-197

Multistage position settings
selection 1
Multistage position settings
selection 2
Multistage position settings
selection 3
Multistage position settings
selection 4

9-190

014

ADD

Trigger for frequency addition

9-18

076

CP1

015

AUT

Main/Sub speed referencechange

9-16

077

CP2

016

STA

3-wire Start

078

CP3

017

STP

3-wire Stop

079

CP4

018

F/R

3-wire forward/reverse

019

AHD

Analog command holding

9-3

9-20

Remote control speed-up
function
Remote control
Speed-down function
Remote control Speed dataclearing

9-19

080

ORL

Limit signal of Homing function

9-194

081

ORG

Start signal of Homing function

9-194

082

FOT

Forward Over Travel

083

ROT

Reserve Over Travel

084

SPD

Speed/position switching

9-201

PSET

Position data presetting

9-197

020

UP

021

DWN

022

UDC

023

F-OP

Force operation

9-8
9-21

085

024

SET

2nd-motor control

9-95

086

028

RST

Reset

9-214

087

029

JOG

Jogging

9-13

088

030

DB

External DC braking

9-78

089

031

AD2

2-stage
Acceleration/Deceleration

9-24

090

032

MBS

Free run stop

9-77

091

033

ES

External fault

9-154

092

034

USP

Unattended start protection

9-155

093

CS

Commercial power supply
change

9-82

097

PCC

035

9-198

-

036

SFT

Soft-Lock

7-17

098

ECOM

037

BOK

Answer back from Brake

9-84

099

-

Overload restriction
selection
Accumulated input powermonitor clear
Accumulated output powermonitor clear

038

OLR

039

KHC

040

OKHC

041

PID

Disable PID1

042

PIDC

PID1 integration reset

043

PID2

Disable PID2

044

PIDC2

PID2 integration reset

051

SVC1

Multi set-point selection 1

052

SVC2

Multi set-point selection 2

053

SVC3

Multi set-point selection 3

054

SVC4

Multi set-point selection 4

Reserved-

Pulse counter clearing

9-211

EzCOM activation

11-25

Reserved

-

9-131

100

HLD

Acceleration/Deceleration
disable

10-7

101

REN

RUN enable

9-34

10-8

102

DISP

Display lock

7-21

103

PLA

Pulse input A

104

PLB

Pulse input B

9-112

9-125

9-108

9-205
9-205

9-25

9-211

105

EMF

Emergency-force drive activation

9-90

107

COK

Contactor check signal

9-86

108

DTR

Data trace start

109

PLZ

Pulse input Z

110

TCH

Teach-in signal

12-3
9-194
9-200
9-191

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.15.2 Adjust the response of the signal input

・Setting the response time to the input signal can prevent false input due to chattering or noise.
・Response time can be set for each input terminal.
・All input signals ON/OFF immediately depending on the conditions. However, chattering may occur
depending on the selected signal. Use this for holding/delaying such signals.
・Response time is ignored at power ON and at resetting. For example, if the power is turned on with the"Forward rotation [FR]" input terminal turned ON, the operation starts immediately after the internal
reset process, regardless of the response-time setting.
Code

Description

Data

Initialvalue

Sets ON of the inputterminal and the response time (detection
delay time) at OFF. The [CA-41] to [CA-48] settings correspond to
the [FR]-[PLA] connectors.

0 to 400 ms

2

Item

CA-41 toCA-48

Input terminal
response time

Operation of Input
terminal

OFF

Operation ofinternal functions

OFF

ON

ON

Input terminal response time setting

9-206
9-206

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.15.3 Adjust the analog input

・From the [VRF] and [IRF] terminals in HF-620 Analog input can be performed. [VRF] The terminal is"[VRF] terminal input switching [Cb-08]" and the [IRF] terminal can be switched between analog voltage
input and analog current input by setting "[IRF] terminal input switching [Cb-18]".
・The [VRF] terminal is set to analog voltage input and the [IRF] terminal is set to analog current input
after factory-shipped condition or initialization.
・The analog start-end function allows you to change any analog input range to any frequency command
range (or torque command, PID feedback input, etc.).
・When both the start and end quantities are set to 0.00Hz, the analog start and end functions are
disabled and the analog inputs operate from 0.00Hz to the highest frequency.
・9.8V and current inputs are factory-adjusted to the full scale of the input voltage by 19.8mA.
Make fine adjustments as necessary.
■ [VRF] terminal analog input adjustment parameters
Code

Item

Cb-01

[VRF] Filter time constant

Cb-03[VRF] Start value

Cb-04[VRF] End value

Cb-05[VRF] Start rate

Cb-06

[VRF] End rate

Cb-07

[VRF] Start value selection

Cb-08
Cb-30
Cb-31

[VRF] Input selection[VRF] Voltage/current bias
adjustment
VRF] Voltage/current
adjustment gain

Description
Sets the primary filter for analog input.
Set the frequency command value when the analog
input value is [Cb-05].
Set the maximum frequency as a percentage of 100%.
Set the frequency command value when the analog
input value is [Cb-06].
Set the maximum frequency as a percentage of 100%.
Set the start voltage/current of the analog command asa percentage of 10 VDC or 20 mA as 100 %.
Set the end voltage/current of the analo command asa percentage of 10V or 20mA as 100%.
The command value between the start quantity [Cb03]: 0.0% to [Cb-05] is the [Cb-03] setting value.

Data

Initialvalue

1 to 500 ms

500
0.00

0.00 to 100.00 %100.000.0 to [Cb-06] %0[Cb-05] to 100.0 %100.0000

0%: The reference between 0.0% to [Cb-05 is 0.00Hz.

01[VRF] Analog voltage input to the terminal is possible.

01[VRF] Analog current input to the terminal is possible.

02[VRF] Fine-adjust the input value by applying a bias tothe analog input from the terminal.
[VRF] Apply gain to the analog input from the terminal
to fine-tune the input value.

9-207
9-207

01

01

-100.00 to 100.00 %0.00

0.00 to 200.00 %100.00Inverter Function

Chapter 9■ [IRF] terminal analog input adjustment parameters
Code

Item

Description

Cb-11[IRF] Filter time constant

Cb-13[IRF] Start value

Sets the primary filter for analog input.

Cb-14[IRF] End value

Cb-15[IRF] Start rate

Cb-16

[IRF] End rate

Cb-17

[IRF] Start value selection

Cb-18
Cb-32
Cb-33

[IRF] Input selection[IRF] Voltage/current bias
adjustment[IRF] Voltage/current
adjustment gain

Set the frequency command value when the analog
input value is [Cb-15].
Set the maximum frequency as a percentage of 100%.
Set the frequency command value when the analog
input value is [Cb-16].
Set the maximum frequency as a percentage of 100%.
Set the start voltage/current of the analogue command
as a percentage of 10V or 20mA as 100%.
Set the end voltage/current of the analogue command
as a percentage of 10V or 20mA as 100%.
The command value between the start quantity [Cb13]: 0.0% to [Cb-15] is the [Cb-13] setting value.

Data

Initialvalue

1 to 500 ms

500
0.00

0.00 to 100.00 %100.000.0 to [Cb-16] %20.0[Cb-15] to 100.0 %

100.0

00

0%: The reference between 0.0% to [Cb-15 is 0.00Hz.

01[IRF] Analog voltage input to the terminal is possible.

01[IRF] Analog current input to the terminal is possible.

02[IRF] Fine-adjust the input value by applying a bias to-100.00 to 100.00 %the analog input from the terminal.
[IRF] Apply gain to the analog input from the terminal to
0.00 to 200.00 %fine-tune the input value.

01

02
0.00
100.00Setting example of analog input start selection
・By setting "[VRF] terminal start selection [Cb-07]" or "[IRF] terminal start selection [Cb-17]", it is possible
to select the operation outside the setting of analogue input.
・The operation selected in [Cb-07] or [Cb-17] differs depending on the relation between the starting
quantity and the end quantity. For details of operation in each setting, see the example in the figure
below.
(e.g. 1-1) Start selection = Start amount (00)Start amount < End amount(e.g. 1-2) Start selection = Start amount (00)Start quantity > End quantity

Frequency referenceMax.
frequency100%[Cb-04]Frequency referenceMax.
frequency100%[Cb-03][VRF] terminal
setting example
Frequency commandfrom 0% to [Cb-05] is[Cb-03].

[Cb-03]0% [Cb-05](0V/0mA)

Analog input(%)

Frequency referenceMax.
frequency
100%[Cb-14]

Analog input(%)
0% [Cb-05] [Cb-06] 100%
(0V/0mA)(10V/20mA)(e.g. 2-2) Start selection = 0% (01)Start quantity > End quantity[IRF] terminal
setting example

Max. Frequency reference
frequency
100%[Cb-13]Frequency
command from 0%
to [Cb-15] is 0Hz.
[Cb-13]0% [Cb-15] [Cb-16](0V/0mA)[Cb-04] for frequency
commands up to [Cb06] to100 %[Cb-04][Cb-06] 100%
(10V/20mA)(e.g. 2-1) Start selection = 0% (01)Start amount < End amount[VRF] terminal
setting example[IRF] terminal
setting example
0Hz for frequency
commands up to [Cb-16]
to 100%[Cb-14]

Analog input(%)

0%

100%

Analog input(%)[Cb-15] [Cb-16] 100 %(0V/0mA)(10V/20mA)

9-208
9-208

(10V/20mA)

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Fine adjustment by analog input adjustment gain

・If there is a deviation in the command value input from the analog input, fine adjustment can be
performed by bias/gain adjustment as shown below.
・Use this function as a fine adjustment when there is a deviation even in the analog start/end function.
・When performing fine adjustment of analog input, adjust the start rate/end amount/start ratio/end
ratio setting of each analog input as the initial setting value. Fine adjustment may be difficult.
・9.8V and current inputs are factory-adjusted to the full scale of the input voltage by 19.8mA.
Make fine adjustments as necessary.
■Analog input bias adjustment
Frequency referenceMax.
frequency

For [Cb-30]/[Cb-32]=50%

100%
50%

■ アナログ入力ゲイン調整
For [Cb-30]/[Cb-32]= -50%
-50%

0%

Analog input [VRF]/[IRF]

0V/0mA

10V/20mA-50%

Frequency referenceMax.
frequency

For [Cb-31]/[Cb-33]=200%
200%
100%

For [Cb-31]/[Cb-33]= 50%

50%
Analog input [VRF]/[IRF]
0V/0mA

Code
Cb-30
Cb-31
Cb-32
Cb-33

10V/20mA

Item

Description[VRF] Voltage/current bias
adjustment[VRF] Voltage/current
adjustment gain
[IRF] Voltage/current bias
adjustment[IRF] Voltage/current adjustment
gain[VRF] Fine-adjust the input value by applying abias to the analog input from the terminal.
[VRF] Apply gain to the analog input from theterminal to fine-tune the input value.
[IRF] Fine-adjust the input value by applying abias to the analog input from the terminal.
[IRF] Apply gain to the analog input from theterminal to fine-tune the input value.

9-209
9-209

Data

Initialvalue-100.00 to 100.00 %0.00

0.00 to 200.00 %100.00-100.00 to 100.00 %0.00

0.00 to 200.00 %100.00Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Command content selection and input scale at analog input

・The table below shows the command selection parameters that can be analog input and the full scale
range at analog input.
・The input ranges in the table below apply when the Start amount/Start ratio parameter is set to 0% and
the End amount/End ratio is set to 100% for each analog input.
・9.8V and current inputs are factory-adjusted to the full scale of the input voltage by 19.8mA. Make fineadjustments as necessary.
・Refer to the table for details of each function listed in the table below.
Code

Full scale of each commandat analog input

Item

AA101, AA102, AA201, AA202
Ad-01, Ad-11
Ad-40

Main/Sub speed reference enable
Torque command and torque bias input
selection
Speed limit input source selection at torquecontrol

AH-07, AH-42, AH-46, AJ-07

PID set-point input source selection

AH-51, AH-52, AH-53, AJ-12

PID feedback input source selection

AH-70

0.00 to Max. frequency Hz
0.0 to 500.0 %0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

0.00 to 100.00 %PID1 feedforward selection
Upper frequency limit source selection

bA110, bA210

Torque limit selection
Speed reference source selection when [F-OP] isactiveSimulation Mode:
Simulation mode: Optional output selection forthe output current monitor
Simulation Mode:
Simulation mode: Optional output selection
for the DC bus voltage monitor
Simulation Mode:
Simulation mode: Optional output selection
for the output voltage monitor
Simulation Mode:
Simulation mode: Optional output selection
for the output torque monitor
Simulation Mode:
Simulation mode: Optional frequency
matching start enable setting

PA-22

PA-24

PA-26

PA-28

PA-30

9-6
9-57
9-64
9-57
9-102
9-123
9-103
9-123
9-103

bA101, bA201

CA-70

Reference

0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

9-32

0.0 to 500.0 %9-59

0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

9-21(0.00 to 3.00) ×Inverter
rated output current A
200V class: DC0.0 to 450.0 V
400V class: DC0.0 to 900.0 V
200V class: DC0.0 to 300.0 V
400V class: DC0.0 to 600.0 V

8-13

0.0 to 500.0 %0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

Analog input filter
・When the frequency command is performed by an external analog signal, the analog input filter time
constant can be set for voltage input or current input.
・This setting is effective for noise rejection of analog input signals. If stable operation cannot be
achieved due to the influence of noise, increase the setting value.
・When using analogue input for PID control system, please note that if this setting is increased, PID
control will respond more slowly, so it may not be the desired property.
Code

Item

Description

Cb-01[VRF] Filter time constantSet the primary filters for the analog input [VRF].

Cb-11[IRF] Filter time constantSet the primary filters for the analog input [IRF].

9-210
9-210

Data

Initialvalue

1 to 500 ms

500

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.15.4 Pulse count function

・The pulse count function includes the terminal input monitoring mode and the phase coefficientmonitoring mode.
・When "Pulse input detection target selection [CA-90]" is set to "Disabled (00)" to "Speed Feedback(02)", the terminal input monitoring mode is enabled. When [CA-90] is set to "Pulse Count (03)", thephase factor monitoring mode is enabled.
・To perform pulse counting in pin input monitoring mode, assign "Pulse input A [PLA]" and "Pulse input
B [PLB]" to the multi-function input terminals. However, if "Pulse input frequency (01)" or "Speed
feedback (02)" is selected for [CA-90], the input terminals [RST] and [PLA] will be dedicated terminals
for each function, so assign them to any of the input terminals [FR] to [ES].
・When performing pulse counting in phase coefficient monitoring mode, connect so that input terminal[RST] is the B-phase pulse input and input terminal [PLA] is the A-phase pulse input. There is no needto set the [PLA] input jack and [PLB] input jack.
・The acquired pulses can be monitored by the pulse counter monitor as a cumulative counter.
When the "Pulse counter clear [PCC]" input pin is turned ON, the accumulated counter can be cleared.
・Maximum input pulse in phase factor monitoring mode is the maximum 32kpps (approx. 50% Duty).
・The accumulated counter value cannot be memorized. After the power is turned on, it becomes zero.
・The maximum. input pulse in terminal input monitoring mode depends on the setting of the input
terminal response function [CA-41] to [CA-48].
Initialvalue

0 to2147483647

-

Item

dA-28

Pulse count monitor

Displays the counter accumulated value.

Input terminal function

Pulse counter clear [PCC]:
Clears the accumulated value of pulse count.
Pulse-input A [PLA]:
Accepts A-phase pulse input.
Pulse-input B [PLB]:
Accepts pulse input of phase B.

103[PCMP]: Pulse count compare match output signal
is output.

044

CA-01 to
CA-08

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

CA-90

CA-91

CA-97
CA-98
CA-99

Output terminal function

Pulse input target function
selection

Pulse input mode selection
Pulse counter compare match
output ON value
Pulse counter compare match
output OFF value
Pulse counter compare match
maximum value

Description

Data

Code

097

104

Disable00

Pulse input frequency directive

01

Velocity feedback

02

Pulse count03

90° phase difference pulse input

00

Forward and reverse command and pulse input

01

Single phase pulse input

03

The [PCMP] signal is turned ON when the pulse
count reaches this setting.
The [PCMP] signal is turned OFF when the pulse
count reaches this setting.
When the number of pulses reaches the setting
value, the internal counter is cleared. When thissetting is 0, the pulse is one-shot.

9-211
9-211

-

002
001
017

01

03

0
0 to 65535

0
65535

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Terminal watch ([CA-90]=00 to 02)

・Monitor ON of the "Pulse input A [PLA]" input terminal and the "Pulse input B [PLB]" input terminal.
・[PLA] Input terminal and [PLB] input terminal can be set to respective terminals by "Input terminal
function selection ([CA-01] to [CA-08])". However, if "Pulse input frequency (01)" or "Speed feedback(02)" is selected for [CA-90], the input terminals [RST] and [PLA] will be dedicated terminals for eachfunction, so assign them to any of the input terminals [FR] to [ES].

A phase pulse input[PLA] Input

B phase pulse input[PLB] Input

Number of detected pulses

Negativ

Positive (+)

Time

Phase factor monitoring mode ([CA-90]=03)・The input terminal [RST] is the terminal for B-phase pulse input or forward/reverse command input,
and the input terminal [PLA] is the terminal for A-phase pulse input or single-phase pulse input.
(1) Mode 0: 90° Phase angle ([CA-91]=00)
Input terminal [PLA](A-phase (pulse input)
Input terminal [RST](B-phase pulse input)

Number of detected pulses
Negative(-)

Positive (+)Time(2) Mode-1: Forward/reverse command and pulse-input ([CA-91]=01)
Input terminal [PLA] (pulse input)
Input terminal [RST](Forward/Reverse command)
Number of detected pulses
Negative(-)

Positive(+)Time(3) Mode-3: Single-phase pulse input. ([CA-91]=03)
Input terminal [PLA] (Pulse input)

Number of detected pulses
Positive(+)
Time

9-212
9-212

Inverter Function

Chapter 9Compare match function

・The compare match function enables output of a signal corresponding to the number of counted
pulses.
・When the number of pulses exceeds the "pulse count compare match output ON level [CA-97]", the"pulse count compare match output [PCMP]" signal is turned ON. Then, the counter advances further
and if the pulse count compare match output OFF level [CA-98] is exceeded, the [PCMP] signal isturned OFF.
・The maximum value of pulse count can be set by "pulse count compare match output maximum value[CA-99]". When the pulse count reaches the maximum value, the count value starts counting from zeroagain.
・If the "Pulse counter clear [PCC]" input pin is turned ON during counting, the count value is cleared tozero.
■Pulse count operation example
Internal count value

Max. counter value [CA-99]

OFF level [CA-98]

ON level [CA-97]
0

Pulse input[PCC] Input[PCMP] Output

Code
CA-01 to
CA-08
CC-01
CC-02
CC-07
CA-97
CA-98
CA-99

Item

Description

Data

Initialvalue

Input terminal function

Pulse counter clear [PCC]:
Clears the accumulated value of pulse count.

097-

Output terminal function[PCMP]: Pulse count compare match output signal is
output.

044

002
001
017

Pulse counter compare match
output ON value
Pulse counter compare match
output OFF value
Pulse counter compare match
maximum value

The [PCMP] signal is turned ON when the pulse
count reaches this setting.
The [PCMP] signal is turned OFF when the pulse
count reaches this setting.
When the number of pulses reaches the setting
value, the internal counter is cleared.
When this setting is 0, the pulse is one-shot.

9-213
9-213

0
0 to 65535

0
65535

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.15.5 Reset the alarm・By the Reset input terminal [RST](028) or Stop/Reset key on the control panel, Inverter trip release canbe performed.
・[RST] The input terminal operates with an NO contact (NO) regardless of the setting of "Input terminala/b(NO/NC) selection ([CA-21] to [CA-28])".
・"Reset selection [CA-72]" allows you to select the timing for releasing the trip by the [RST] input
terminal. The [RST] terminal can also be enabled only at the trip release timing when an error occurs.
・Restart after reset operation can be selected in "Restart after reset release [bb-41]". For details, refer to"9.7.5 Restarting after a trip reset or power on".
・Do not use the "Reset [RST]" input terminal to shut off the inverter output. When output cutoff of theinverter is performed by signal input, use "Free-run stop [MBS]" of the input terminal function.
・[RST] Even if resetting by the input terminal, the internal data such as the electronic thermal-loadfactor, DBTR utilization factor, and present position counter are not cleared.
・If "Frequency at shut-off (00)" is set in "Start frequency selection at frequency retraction restart [bb47]", even if a reset signal is inputted during retry wait, the frequency at shut-off will not be cleared andrestart will be performed.
Code

bb-41

CA-72

CA-01 to
CA-08

Item

Restart mode after RST
release Note

Reset mode selection

Input terminal function

Description

Data

0Hz restart is performed.

00

Perform frequency matching restart.

01

Frequency pull-in restart.

02

Restart is performed from the speed detected by the encoder signal.

03

In case of ON, trip release (operation 1, 3)
Normal: Output shutoff
Abnormal: Release trip
In OFF, trip release (Operation 2, 3)
Normal: Output shutoff
Abnormal: Release trip
In ON, trip release (operation 1, 4)
Normal: Disabled
Abnormal: Release trip
In OFF, trip release (Operation 2, 4)
Normal: Disabled
Abnormal: Release trip
Reset [RST]:
Performs a reset operation.

Note: For details, refer to "9.7.5 Restarting after a trip reset or power on".

9-214
9-214

Initial
value

00

00

01
00
02

03
028

-

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Reset operation example(e.g. 1) When tripping is canceled at ON([CA-72]=00, 02)(e.g. 2) When tripping is canceled at OFF([CA-72]=01, 03)[RST] Input[RST] Input

Alarm [AL] Output

Alarm [AL] Output(e.g. 4) When normal reset is disabled([CA-72]=02, 03)(e.g. 3) When resetting is enabled in normal status([CA-72]=00, 01)
Restart according to [bb-41]

Reset disabled during operation

Output frequency

Outputfrequency

Operation command

Operationcommand[RST] Input[RST] Input

9-215
9-215

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.15.6 Automatic reset

・When the automatic reset selection [bb-10] is enabled (01) in the operation command OFF, the reset is
performed after the lapse of the "automatic reset standby time [bb-12]" from the time when theoperation command is OFF.
・If [bb-10] is set to "Valid after set time (02)", resetting will be performed after [bb-12] has elapsed fromwhen an error occurs.
・By setting "Alarm output selection when automatic reset is enabled [bb-11]" to "No output (01)," during
automatic reset operation, the output of "Alarm signal [AL]" can be disabled.
・If the auto-reset is performed as many times as set in the auto-reset count setting [bb-13], the error will
not be cleared and the unit will be in the trip status.
・「When "Auto reset selection [bb-10]" is set to "Enable (01)" in the operation command OFF and"Operation command selection [AA111]" is set to "RUN key (02) on the operation panel", counting of
the auto reset standby time starts from when an error occurs.
・Errors that cannot be cleared by the reset operation or errors that can be reported optional cannot becleared by the automatic reset function. For errors that cannot be cleared, see "List of Errors Not
Subject to Automatic Reset Function" in this section.
・If the counter is reset manually or the control power supply is turned on again, the number of automatic
resets that had been counted internally is cleared.
■Example of automatic reset operation(e.g. 1) [For bb-10]=01(e.g. 2) [For bb-10]=02
Restart according to [bb-41]

Restart according to [bb-41]
Output frequency

Output frequency

Forward rotation[FR] Input

Forward rotation[FR] Input[AL] Output[AL] Output[bb-12][bb-12]

Code

Item

bb-10

Automatic error reset
selection

bb-11

Alarm signal selection
at automatic error reset

bb-12
bb-13

bb-41

Automatic error reset
wait time
Automatic error reset
numberRestart mode after RST
release Note

Description

Data

Disabled
Operation command OFF starts resetting.
Reset starts after set time
OutputNo output
Sets the waiting time from when the reset starts until the actual
reset is performed.

00
01
02
00
01

Sets the number of times to reset automatically.
0Hz restart is performed.
Perform frequency matching restart.
Frequency pull-in restart.
Restart at the detection speed.

Note: For details, refer to "9.7.5 Restarting after a trip reset or power on".

9-216
9-216

Initial
value
00
00

0 to 600 s

20 to 10 times

3

00
01
02
03

00

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■List of errors not covered by the automatic reset function
・For details of each error, see "15.2 Troubleshooting Protection Functions".
Error code
E008
E010
E011
E012
E014
E022
E030
E035
E069
E090
E091
E092
E093
E100

Name
Memory error
Current detector error
CPU failure
External trip error
Earth fault error
CPU communication failure
IGBT(Driver) error
Thermistor error
Option 1 Error 9
STO shut-off error
STO internal error
STO route 1 error
STO route 2 error
Encoder disconnection error

9-217
9-217

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.16 Output signal
9.16.1 Output signal function

・The output terminals [UPF], [DRV], and [MC]-[MB]/[MC]-[MA] are intelligent output terminals. By
assigning the functions in the output terminal list shown on the next page to [CC-01], [CC-02], and [CC07], the specified functions are assigned to the corresponding output terminals.
・For output terminals [UPF], [DRV], and [MC]-[MB]/[MC]-[MA], either a-contact (NO) input or b-contact(NC) input can be selected individually according to the settings of [CC-11], [CC-12], and [CC-17].
・Output terminals [UPF] and [DRV] are open-collector outputs, and output terminals [MC]-[MB]/[MC][MA]are c-contact relay outputs.
・When using c-contact relay, check the status of the power supply and open/close status of the relay
output terminals.
Code

Item

CC-01

Output terminal [UPF] function

CC-02

Output terminal [DRV] function

CC-07

Output terminal [ML] function

CC-11

Output terminal [UPF] active state

CC-12

Output terminal [DRV] active state

CC-17

Output terminal [ML] active state

Initialvalue

Description

Data

Assign the output terminal functions to the output
terminals [UPF], [DRV], and [MC]-[MB]/[MC]-[MA].
[CC-01], [CC-02], The [CC-07] sets correspond tothe output terminals.

Refer to "List of
Output terminal
Functions"in this section.

Operates as a-contact (NO: normally open).

00

Operates as a b-contact (NC: normally closed).

01

Operates as a-contact (NO: normally open).

00

Operates as a b-contact (NC: normally closed).

01

Operates as a-contact (NO: normally open).

00

Operates as a b-contact (NC: normally closed).

01

002
001
017

00

■Open collector output terminal specifications
Outputterminal
UPF
DRV

OM

Electrical Characteristics
Voltage-drop 4V or less at ON
Allowable Max. 27V
Permissible current carrying
capacity 50mA
[UPF], Common terminal of [DRV]
Permissible current carrying
capacity100mA

Output terminal
active state

Power
state

00
(NO contact)ON01(NC contact)

ON

Off

Off

Output terminal
functionsOpencollector operation

ON

Close

OFF

Open

-

-

ON

Open

OFF

Close

-

-

Open collector output terminal

OM

DRV

UPF

Note: The names of the output terminal functions are an example of the assignment functions
at the time of initial setting/initialization.

9-218
9-218

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Relay output terminal specifications

Electrical Characteristics
Resistive load
Inductive load

Output terminal

MB-MC

MA-MC

Max. contact
capacity

AC250V, 2A
DC30V, 3A

Min. contact
capacity
Max. contact
capacity

AC100V, 10mA
DC5V, 100mA
AC250V, 1A
DC30V, 1A

Min. contact
capacity

Output terminal
Power state
active state00(b-contact)(Initial setting)01(a-contact)

Relay output terminal

AC250V, 0.2A
DC30V, 0.6A

AC250V, 0.2A
DC30V, 0.2A

AC100V, 10mA
DC5V, 100mA

Output of pin functions(Inverter alarm status)

ON

ON

Status output terminal
MA - MCMB - MAON (Alarm)

Close

Open

Open

close

-

Open

Close

ON (Alarm)

Open

Close

OFF (Normal)

Close

Open

-

Open

Close

OFF

■Logic for relay output operation
Power ON
CC-17

Normalcondition

Abnormalcondition

01 (Normal close)MC

Note: The assignment function of the relay output
terminals at the time of shipping/initialization is"Alarm signal [AL]".

OFF (Normal)

OFF

MB

MA

Power OFF00 (Normal open)(Initial setting)

MC

MC

MB

MB

MA

MA

MC

MC

MB

MB

MA

MA

9-219
9-219

-

MC
MB
MA

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Table of output terminal functions
Function
No.

Symbol000noFunction nameNot useReference

Function
No.

Symbol-040

ZS

Zero speed detection

Function name

Reference
9-184

001

DRV

Running

9-179

041

DSE

Speed over deviation

9-52

002

UPF1

Constant-frequency reached

9-181

043

POK

Positioning completed

9-187

003

UPF2

Set frequency overreached

9-182

044

PCMP

Pulse count compare match
output

9-213

004

UPF3

Set frequency reached

9-183

045

OD

Over deviation for PID control

9-126

005

UPF4

Set frequency overreached 2

9-182

046

FBV

PID feedback comparison

9-127

006

UPF5

Set frequency reached 2

9-183

047

OD2

Over deviation for PID2 control

9-126

007

IRDY

Inverter ready

9-180

048

FBV2

PID2 feedback comparison

9-127

008

FRR

Forward rotation

049

NDc

050

VRFDc

9-8

051

IRFDc

9-2

056

WCVRF

Window comparator VRF

9-95

057

WCIRF

Window comparator IRF

9-179
009

RRR

Reverse rotation
Speed command =Keypad is selected
Run command =Keypad is selected

Communication line
disconnection
Analog VRF disconnection
detection
Analog IRF disconnection
Detection

010

FREF

011

REF

012

SETM

2nd-motor control is selected

016

OPO

Option output

-

062

LOG1

Logical operation result 1

017

AL

Alarm

9-159

063

LOG2

Logical operation result 2

018

MJA

Major failure

9-160

064

LOG3

Logical operation result 3

019

OTQ

Over-torque

9-59

069

-

021

UV

Undervoltage

9-139

070

-

022

TRQ

Torque limited

9-58

071

-

023

IPS

IP-nonstop function is active

9-149

076

EMFC

Emergency-Force Drive indicator

024

RNT

Accumulated operation time over

9-170

077

EMBP

Bypass mode indicator

Reserved

11-1

9-172

9-172

9-185

-

9-93

025

ONT

Accumulated power-on time over

9-170

078

WFT

Trace function waiting for trigger

026

THM

Electronic thermal alarm (Motor)

9-163

079

TRA

Trace function data logging

027

THC

Electronic thermal alarm(Inverter)

9-164

080

LBK

Low-battery of keypad

7-22

029

WAC

Capacitor life warning

9-167

081

OVS

Over-Voltage power supply

9-165

030

WAF

Cooling-fan life warning

9-168

082

ABU

Abnormal exceeded Upper limit

031

FS

RUN command active

9-180

083

ABL

Abnormal fall below Lower limit

032

OHF

Heat sink overheat warning

9-166

088

FSC

STO input discrepancy

14-6

033

LOC

Low-current indication

093

SSE

PID soft start error

9-116

034

LOC2

Low-current indication 2

094

SFM1

ST1 feedback monitor

035

OL

Overload warning notice

095

SFM2

ST2 feedback monitor

036

OL2

Overload warning notice 2

096

EDM

STO state monitor

037

BRK

Brake release

WAP

Power module life warning

BER

Brake error

9-84
9-202

097

038

098

WAIC

Inrush circuit life warning

039

CON

Contactor control

9-86

9-162

9-161

12-3

9-178

14-6
14-4
9-169

Note: The "Optional Output [OPO]" is a future extension function and is not currently functioning. Do not assign thisfunction.

9-220
9-220

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.16.2 Delay and hold the output signal

・An on delay time and an off delay time can be provided for each output terminal.
・All signals will ON/OFF immediately if the conditions are met. Depending on the selected signal,
chattering may occur. Use this for holding/delaying such signals.
Code

Item

CC-20
CC-22
CC-32
CC-21
CC-23
CC-33

Output terminal [UPF] on-delay time
Output terminal [DRV] on-delay time
Output terminal [ML] on-delay time
Output terminal [UPF] off-delay time
Output terminal [DRV] off-delay time
Output terminal [ML] off-delay time

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

Description

Operation of allocation
functionOFF

Output terminal operation

OFF

Sets the on delay time to the output
terminal.
Sets the off delay time to the output
terminal.

ON
ON

Output terminal on-delay time

Output terminal off-delay time

9.16.3 Select the monitor
・The monitor parameter list in the table below can be externally outputted from the [AMI] terminal or the[AMV] terminal.
・[AMI] Analog voltage output and analog current output are available from the terminals.
・[AMV] Analog voltage output and pulse output are available from the terminal.
・For the data with "(±)" written in the Remark column of the following table, the output range can bechanged by setting "[FRQ] output data type selection [Cd-12]", "[AMI] output data type selection [Cd22]" and "[AMV] output data type selection [Cd-32]". When "Absolute value (00)" is set, output isperformed with a positive value of the absolute value. When "Signed (01)" is set, a negative value canalso be output.
・To output a negative value by setting sign (01) to one of [Cd-12]/[Cd-22]/[Cd-32], the bias of therespective output needs to be adjusted with "[FRQ] bias adjustment [Cd-13]", "[AMI] bias adjustment(voltage/current common) [Cd-23]", or "[AMV] bias adjustment (voltage) [Cd-33]".
・The output range shown in the table below assumes that the bias adjustment for each output is 0% andthe gain adjustment is 100%.
・[AMI] Switching between analog voltage output and analog current output of pins is performed by
setting "[AMI] Pin Output Switching [Cd-26]".
・[AMV] Switching between analogue voltage output and pulse output of pins is performed by setting"[AMV] Pin Output Switching [Cd-36]".
・For details of analog voltage/current output, refer to "9.16.5 Analog Output of Monitor Data" and for
details of pulse output, refer to "9.16.4 Pulse Output of Monitor Data".
List of Configurable Monitor Parameters■L
Code

Output range(Corresponds to 0 to 10V/
0 to 20mA/0 to 100%)

Name

dA-01

Output frequency monitor

dA-02

Output current monitor

Remarks

0.00 to Max. frequency Hz(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated output current A-

0.00 to ±Max. frequency Hz

Output possible in (±)

0.00 to Max frequency Hz
Torque reference×(-500.0 to 500.0 %) Note:3, 6--

Note:1

dA-04

Frequency command (after calculation) (signed)

dA-08
dA-12
dA-14

Detect speed monitor
Output frequency monitor (signed)
Frequency upper limit monitor

dA-15

Torque-command monitor (after calculation) Note:1,2

9-221
9-221

Output possible in (±)

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
CodeOutput range(Corresponds to 0 to 10V/
0 to 20mA/0 to 100%)

Name

Torque reference×(0.0 to 500.0 %) Note:3
Torque reference×(-500.0 to 500.0 %) Note:3, 6

dA-16

Torque limit monitor Note:2dA-17

Output torque monitor Note:2dA-18

Output voltage monitor (rms)

dA-30
dA-34

Input power monitor
Output power monitor

0.00 to Inverter capacity×200% (kW)dA-40

DC bus voltage monitor

200V class: DC0.0 to 400.0 V
400V class: DC0.0 to 800.0 V

dA-41

DBTR load ratio monitor

dA-42

Electronic thermal load factor monitor (Motor)

dA-43
dA-61

Electronic thermal load factor monitor (Inverter)
Analog input [VRF] monitor

dA-62
dA-70
db-18

Analog input [IRF] monitor
Pulse input monitor

db-19
db-30

0 to Rated voltage×133% V

Remarks
Output possible in (±)
75% of full scale,equivalent to rating

0.00 to 100.00 %Reserved-100.00 to 100.00 %Output possible in (±)--

PID1 feedback value 1 monitor-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:4

db-32

PID1 feedback value 2 monitor

db-34

PID1 feedback value 3 monitor

db-36

PID2 feedback value [#2] monitor-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:5

db-42
db-44

PID1 target value monitor (after calculation)
PID1 feedback value monitor (after operation)-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:4db-50

PID1 output monitor

db-51
db-52
db-53
db-54
db-55
db-56
db-64
dC-15
FA-01
FA-02
FA-15
FA-16
FA-30
FA-32
FA-34
FA-36

PID1 deviation monitor
PID1 Deviation 1 Monitor
PID1 deviation-2 monitor
PID1 deviation-3 monitor
PID2 output monitor
PID2 deviation monitor
PID feed-forward input source monitor
Cooling fin temperature monitor
Main speed reference setting (monitor)
Sub speed reference setting (monitor)
Torque-command setting (monitor) Note:2
Torque-bias setting (monitor) Note:2
PID1 target setpoint 1 setting (monitor)
PID1 target setpoint 2 setting (monitor)
PID1 setpoint 3 setting (monitor)
PID2 target setpoint (monitor)

Output possible in (±)-200.00 to 200.00 %-100.00 to100.00 %-200.00 to 200.00 %0.00 to 100.00 %-20.0 to 200.0 °C
0.00 to Max. frequency Hz-

Torque reference x(-500.0 to 500.0 % Note:30.00 to 100.00 % Note:4

Output possible in (±)

0.00 to 100.00 % Note:5

Note: 1. (After calculation) means that it is after calculation of auxiliary speed, addition frequency, and torque bias.
2. Torque control related function is enabled when the setting of "Control method [AA121]" is "Vector control
without sensor (IM) (08)".
3. The torque reference (100%) can be selected in "Torque conversion method selection [HC115]". Refer to "9.6.3
Torque Command Operation" for details.
4. "PID1 Scale Adjust ([AH-04] to [AH-06]) will change the setting. For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID
Units Converter Function".
5. "PID2 Scale Adjust ([AJ-04] to [AJ-06]) will change the setting. For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID
Units Converter Function".
6. The data range of the monitor may exceed 500.0% depending on the torque command and torque bias settings.
In this case, adjust the output gain and bias referring to "9.16.4 Pulse Output of Monitor Data" or "9.16.5 Analog
Output of Monitor Data".

9-222
9-222

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.16.4 Pulse output of monitor data

・Monitored values such as output frequency and output current can be pulsed from the [AMV] terminal.
If this happens, set the parameter of the monitor you want to output to "[FRQ] terminal output selection[Cd-03]". For the parameters that can be set, see "9.16.3 Selecting the monitor to be output".
・To perform pulse output, select "Pulse (03)" for "[AMV] Pin Output Selection [Cd-36]."
・PWM output (e.g. 1) or Digital-frequency output (e.g. 2) can be selected by setting "[FRQ] Pin Output
Type Selection [Cd-01]". Be sure to set the "[FRQ] Terminal Reference Frequency [Cd-02]" when using
the digital frequency output.
・Use an analog meter when using PWM output. Use a digital frequency counter when using digitalfrequency output.
・The output-characteristics when biasing is adjusted change according to the setting of "Analog
adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]". See "PWM/Digital-Frequency Output Gain/Bias
Adjustment" in this section for more information.
・When "Analog Monitor Adjustment Mode Select [Cd-10]" is set to "Enable (01)", the pulse output
function is in the adjustment mode, and the value set to "Output Level [Cd-15] in [FRQ] adjustment
mode" is output. Please use it for checking the gain/bias setting of the pulse output and for adjusting
the external device, etc.
・For digital-frequency output, the output cannot exceed the max. output range (32kHz) of the [AMV]
connector.
・[AMV] When using analog voltage output ("[AMV] terminal Output Selection [Cd-36]" = "Voltage (01)"),
refer to "9.16.5 How to Analog Output Monitor Data".
(e.g. 1) PWM output ([Cd-01]=00)(e.g. 2) Digital-frequency output ([Cd-01]=01)

t

T/2

T

T
Period T: Constant (6.4 ms)
Duty cycle t/T: Change

Period T: Change
Fixed duty ratio 1/2

9-223
9-223

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Code
Cd-01

Cd-02
Cd-03

Item
[FRQ] Output wave form
selection[FRQ] Output basefrequency(at frequency output)[FRQ] Output monitor
selection

Description

Data

PWM output (6.4 ms Period)

00

Digital frequency output

01

Set the output frequency at full scale when
"Frequency (01)" is selected for [Cd-01].
[AMV] Select PWM or digital-frequency output fromthe terminals.

1440『9.16.3 See "Selecting
the Monitor to Output".

dA-01

Analog adjust gain basis
selection

Bias quantity standard

00

Full scale fixed

01

Cd-10

Analog monitor adjustmentmode enable

Adjustment mode of the analog monitor is invalid.

00

Adjustment mode of analog monitor is effective.

01

Cd-11

[FRQ] Output filter time
constant[AMV] Filters PWM/ digital-frequency output from aterminal.

Cd-12[FRQ] Data type selection

Cd-13[FRQ] Bias adjustment

Cd-14[FRQ] Gain adjustment

Cd-15

Adjustment mode
[FRQ] output level

Cd-16

Pulse input/output
scale conversion value
coefficient[AMV] Output
type selection

01

0 to 32000 Hz

Cd-06

Cd-36

Initialvalue

1 to 500 ms

Outputs the absolute value of data.

00

Signed data is output.

01

Adds bias to PWM/ digital-frequency data. Adjusts
the zero-point.
Apply gain to PWM/ digital-frequency data andadjust the data inclination.
When [Cd-10] is set to "Enable (01)" and "Pulse (03)"is selected in "[AMV] Terminal Output Switching [Cd36]", set the level output from the [AMV] terminal.
When "Pulse Input Monitor [dA-70]" is selected in[Cd-03], the input pulse frequency is scaled and

00
00
10
00

-100.0 to 100.0 %0.0-1000.0 to 1000.0 %100.0-100.0 to 100.0 %100.0

0.01 to 100.00

1.0

03

01

outputted.
[AMV] PWM signal or digital-frequency signal is
output from the terminal.

PWM/ Digital-frequency output-gain/bias adjustment
・When "Pulse (03)" is selected in "[AMV] terminal Output Switching [Cd-36]", you can set the addition of
the bias by "[FRQ] Bias Adjustment [Cd-13]" and the output gain by "[FRQ] Gain Adjustment [Cd-14]" forthe output from the [AMV] pin.
・The output-characteristics when biasing is adjusted change according to the setting of "Analog
adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]".
・If the output of the parameter selected in "[FRQ] Pin Output Selection [Cd-03]" is negative, you canselect whether to use the absolute value or the signed value as it is in "[FRQ] Output Data Type
Selection [Cd-12]."・Adjustments made using [Cd-13] and [Cd-14] are valid regardless of the selection of "[FRQ] Terminal
Output Type Selection [Cd-01]".
Code

Item

Cd-01

[FRQ] Output wave form
selection

Cd-06

Analog adjust gain basis
selection

Cd-12[FRQ] Data type selection

Cd-13[FRQ] Bias adjustment

Cd-14[FRQ] Gain adjustment

Description

Data

InitialSetting

PWM Out (6.4ms Period)
Digital frequency output
Bias amount reference:
The bias amount was adjusted.
Full scale fixed
Outputs the absolute value of data.
Signed data is output.
Adds bias to PWM/ digital-frequency data.
Adjusts the zero-point.
Apply gain to PWM/ digital-frequency data and adjust
the data inclination.

00
01

01

9-224
9-224

00
01
00
01

00
00

-100.0 to 100.0 %0.0-1000.0 to 1000.0 %100.0Inverter Function

Chapter 9■When [Cd-01] is set to "PWM (00")(1) When "Analog adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]" = "Bias quantity reference (00)"・You can translate the output characteristic byadding "[FRQ] Bias Adjust [Cd-13]" to PWM output.
・Regardless of the bias setting value, if the gain
setting value is the same, the slope of the output
characteristics will be the same.
The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[FRQ] gain adjust [Cd-14]" is 100.0%.

・The slope of the output characteristic can bechanged by multiplying PWM output by "[FRQ] Gain
Adjust [Cd-14]".
・If the gain settings are the same, the slope of theoutput characteristics will be the same even if thebias settings are changed.
The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[FRQ] bias adjustment [Cd-13]" is 0.0%.

[Cd-13]=50.0%
t/T(%)
100[Cd-14]=200.0%
t/T(%)
100

In this range
Output.

50

0[Cd-13]=0.0%[Cd-14]=50.0%

Tilt change

Translating0[Cd-14]=100.0%

In this range
Output.

50

Max. Output
Full scale

0-50

Max. Output
Full scale0[Cd-13]=-50.0%-50[Cd-14]=-50.0%(2) When "Analog adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]" = "Full scale fixed (01)"・"[FRQ] bias adjustment [Cd-13]" can be added to
the zero point of PWM outputting.
・Depending on the bias setting, the slope of theoutput characteristic changes so that 0 to 100% of
the output full scale becomes the bias setting to
100% of the duty ratio.
The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[FRQ] gain adjust [Cd-14]" is 100.0%.

・The slope of the output characteristic can bechanged by multiplying PWM output by "[FRQ] Gain
Adjust [Cd-14]".
・Note that even if the gain setting value is the same,the slope of the output characteristics changes
depending on the bias setting.
The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[FRQ] bias adjustment [Cd-13]" is 0.0%.

[Cd-13]=50.0%
t/T(%)
100[Cd-14]=200.0%[Cd-14]=100.0%

t/T(%)
100
50

In this range
Output.

Tilt change

In this range
Output.

50
00[Cd-13]=0.0%-50Max. Output
Full scale
Zero point change[Cd-14]=50.0%00[Cd-13]=-50.0%

-50

9-225
9-225

Max. Output
Full scale[Cd-14]=-50.0%

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■When [Cd-01] is set to "Frequency (01)"(1) When "Analog adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]" = "Bias quantity reference (00)"・The output characteristic can be translated byadding "[FRQ] Bias Adjust [Cd-13]" to the digitalfrequency output.
・Regardless of the bias setting value, if the gain
setting value is the same, the slope of the output
characteristics will be the same.
・The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[FRQ] gain adjust [Cd-14]" is 100.0%.

Digital frequency(Hz)[Cd-02][Cd-13]=50.0%[Cd-14]=100.0%[Cd-14]=200.0%
Digital frequency(Hz)[Cd-02]In this range
Output.

[Cd-02]/20・The slope of the output characteristic can bechanged by multiplying the digital-frequency output
by "[FRQ] Gain Adjust [Cd-14]".
・If the gain settings are the same, the slope of theoutput characteristics will be the same even if thebias settings are changed.
・The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[FRQ] bias adjustment [Cd-13]" is 0.0%.

[Cd-14]=50.0%

Tilt change[Cd-02]/2

In this range
Output.

Translating

0

Max. Output
Full scale[Cd-13]=0.0%- [Cd-02]/2

0Max. Output
Full scale0[Cd-14]=-50.0%[Cd-13]=-50.0%- [Cd-02]/2(2) When "Analog adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]" = "Full scale fixed (01)"・It is possible to add "[FRQ] bias adjustment [Cd-13]"
to the zero point of digital frequency output.
・Depending on the bias setting, the slope of theoutput characteristic changes so that 0 to 100% of
the output full scale becomes the bias setting valueof the digital frequency to [Cd-02].
・The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[FRQ] gain adjust [Cd-14]" is 100.0%.

Digital frequency(Hz)・The slope of the output characteristic can bechanged by multiplying the digital-frequency output
by "[FRQ] Gain Adjust [Cd-14]".
・Note that even if the gain setting value is the same,the slope of the output characteristics changes
depending on the bias setting.
・The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[FRQ] bias adjustment [Cd-13]" is 0.0%.

[Cd-13]=50.0%[Cd-14]=200.0%[Cd-02]

Digital frequency(Hz)[Cd-02]In this range
Output.

[Cd-02]/20[Cd-13]=0.0%- [Cd-02]/2[Cd-14]=100.0%

0

Tilt change[Cd-02]/2[Cd-14]=50.0%
In this range
Output.

0Max. Output
Full scale
Zero point change

0Max. Output
Full scale[Cd-14]=-50.0%[Cd-13]=-50.0%- [Cd-02]/2

9-226
9-226

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■Typical adjustment(e.g. 3-1) PWM output of "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]"
・When the bias amount is set, there is no need to change
the gain setting because the output characteristics aretranslated while maintaining the slope.
Setting: [Cd-13]=0.0%, [Cd-14]=100.0%
t/T(%)
100％
PWM
output50%
Outputfrequency(Hz)0%0Hz(e.g. 2) PWM output of "Output current monitor [dA-02]"
・When the output current is the rated current, assume that
PWM output is 100%.
Since the full scale of [dA-02] is 200%, the rated current
output = 100% PWM output at the gain setting of 200%
Setting: [Cd-13]=0.0%, [Cd-14]=200.0%
t/T(%)
100%
PWM
output
50%

30Hz
60Hz
(Max. frequency setting =60Hz)

0A

When [Cd-06] = "Bias quantity reference (00)")
・50 to 100% of PWM power is specified as 0Hz tomaximum frequency/2.
・When the bias amount is set, there is no need to change
the gain setting because the output characteristics aretranslated while maintaining the slope.
Setting: [Cd-13]=50.0%, [Cd-14]=100.0%
t/T(%)
100％[Cd-13]=50.0%

50%

0%

Outputcurrent(A)0%(e.g. 3-1) PWM output of "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]"

PWM
output[Cd-14]=200.0%

Rated current

Rated current×2(e.g. 3-2) PWM output of "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]"([Cd-06] = "Full scale fixed (01)")・50 to 100% of PWM power is specified as0 Hz tomaximum frequency/2.
・The slope of the output characteristics changes according
to the bias amount. If [Cd-13] is set to 50.0%, 50 to 100%of PWM output is the highest frequency from 0Hz, so set
as follows.
Setting: [Cd-13]=50.0%, [Cd-14]=200.0%
t/T(%)
100％[Cd-14]=200.0%
PWM
outputOutputfrequency(Hz)50%[Cd-13]=50.0%

0%

0Hz
30Hz
60Hz
(Max. frequency setting =60Hz)

0Hz
30Hz
60Hz
(Max. frequency setting =60Hz)

Outputfrequency(Hz)(e.g. 4-1) PWM output of "Output torque monitor [dA-17]"(signed)(e.g. 4-2) PWM output (absolute value) of "Output torquemonitor [dA-17]"・When [Cd-06] is based on the bias quantity, the signed
output torques are 0 to ±200%, and PWM output is 0 to100%.
・In such cases, set the values so that -200 to 0% and 0 to
200% of the output torque are 0 to 50% and 50 to 100%of PWM output, respectively. Since the full scale of [dA-17]
is ±500%, set as shown below.

・Assume that output torques of 0% to ±200% are absolutevalues. PWM output is 0% to 100%.
・In such cases, the output torques of-200 to 0% and 0 to
200% are both 0 to 100% of PWM output. Set them asshown below.

[Cd-13]: Since PWM power is 50% at the center of theoutput torque range (-200 to 200%) (output torque =0%), set 50%.
[Cd-14]: Since gain setting value x 100%/500% =50%/200%, set 125%.
Setting: [Cd-12]=01, [Cd-13]=50.0%, [Cd-14]=125.0%-200% torque100%
PWM
output50%+200% torquet/T(%)[Cd-14]=125.0%0%0(-)500% of rated torque[Cd-13]: Set 0% since output torque0% = PWM output
0%.
[Cd-14]: Since gain setting value x 100%/500% = 100%,
set 250%.
Setting: [Cd-12]=00, [Cd-13]=0.0%, [Cd-14]=250.0%-200% torquet/T(%)

100%
PWM
output50%

0%(-)500% of rated torque(+)500% of rated torque

9-227
9-227

[Cd-14]=250.0%[Cd-13]=0.0%[Cd-13]=50.0%
Outputtorque(%)+200% torque0

Outputtorque(%)(+)500% of rated torqueInverter Function

Chapter 9(e.g. 5) PWM output of "Output Voltage Monitor (RMS)[dA-18]"
・When the output voltage is the rated output voltage, assume that PWM output is 100%. Since the full scaleof [dA-18] is the rated output voltage x 133%, set the gain to 133% so that 100% PWM output is obtained at
the rated output voltage of 100%, as shown in the figure below.
Setting: [Cd-13] = 0.0%, [Cd-14] = 133.0%
t/T(%)[Cd-14]=133.0%

100%
PWM
Output 50%

Outputvoltage(V)0%0V
100V 200V 200V×133%(When the rated output voltage =200V)(e.g. 6) Digital frequency output of "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]"
・Outputs the digital frequency output so that the maximum value corresponds to the highest frequency.
If the maximum frequency setting is 60Hz, set it to [Cd-02]=60Hz].
Setting: [Cd-02]=60Hz, [Cd-13]=0.0%、[Cd-14]=100.0%
Digital frequency(Hz)
60Hz

30Hz
Outputfrequency(Hz)
0Hz

30Hz

60Hz

(e.g. 7) Digital-frequency output of "Output current monitor [dA-02]"
・There are the following two methods when outputting in 1500Hz when a current equivalent to the inverter
rated current is flowing.
(1) Since the full scale of [dA-02] is the rated inverter
current × 2, if it is [Cd-02]=3000Hz], the output
current is equivalent to the rated current and it
becomes the digital-frequency output 1500Hz as
shown in the figure below.
Setting: [Cd-02]=3000Hz, [Cd-13]=0.0%[Cd-14]=100.0%(2) When the max. digital-frequency output is [Cd02]=1500Hz], the [dA-02] full scale is set to 200%of the gain setting because the inverter rated
current × 2.

Digital frequency(Hz)Setting: [Cd-02]=1500Hz, [Cd-13]=0.0%[Cd-14]=200.0%
Digital frequency(Hz)

3000

1500

1500

750

0
0A

Rated current

Outputcurrent(A)Rated current ×2

0
0A

9-228
9-228

Rated current[Cd-14]=200.0%

Outputcurrent(A)Rated current ×2

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Analog monitor adjustment mode (for pulse output)

・When "Analog monitor adjustment mode selection [Cd-10]" is set to "Enabled (01)", the analog monitor
adjustment mode is enabled. This function applies to all outputs from the [AMI] and [AMV] terminals.
・When "Pulse (03)" is selected in "[AMV] Terminal Output Switching [Cd-36]", the output from the [Ao2]
Pin is fixed at the output set in "[FRQ] Output Level [Cd-15]" for the monitor full scale value selected in"[FRQ] Pin Output Selection [Cd-03]".
・The minimum output of [Cd-15] changes according to the setting of "[FRQ] output data type selection[Cd-12]". 0.0% when "Absolute value (00)" is set, and-100.0% when "Signed (01)" is set.
Code

Item

Cd-10

Analog monitor
adjustment mode enable

Cd-12[FRQ] Data type selection

Cd-15

Adjustment mode
[FRQ] output level

Cd-36[AMV] Output typeselection

Description

Initial
value

Data

Adjustment mode of the analog monitor is invalid.

00

Adjustment mode of analog monitor is effective.

01

Outputs the absolute value of data.

00

Signed data is output.

01

When [Cd-10] is set to "Enable (01)" and "Pulse (03)" is selected in"[AMV] Terminal Output Switching [Cd-36]", set the level output
from the [AMV] terminal.
[AMV] PWM signal or digital-frequency signal is output from theterminal.

0000-100.0 to
100.0 %

100.0

03

01

■(e.g.) Adjusting PWM output of the output current monitor
・Adjust to output at 100% PWM output at the rated inverter current.
Code

Name

Output range(Corresponds to 0 to 10 VDC/0 to 20 mA/0 to 100 %)dA-02

Output current monitor(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated output current A(1) Set [Cd-01] to "PWM(00" and [Cd-03] to "Output current monitor [dA-02]". When [Cd-10] is set to"Enable (01)", the [Cd-15] setpoint is outputted from the [AMV] terminal in PWM form.
(2) If the reference point you want to output is the rated
current value, set the point at half of it because the fullscale of [dA-02] is (0.00 to 2.00) × the inverter rated
current.
First, by setting [Cd-15] to 50.0% (equivalent to therated inverter current), a PWM with a 50% duty, which is
the output when the rated current (= rated current ×
2.0×50.0%) is output from the [AMV] terminal.
(3) Then use [Cd-14] to adjust the tilt. Change the [Cd-14] toadjust PWM to the point where 100% duty is generated.
Under these conditions, if [Cd-14] is set to 200.0%, theduty cycle is 100% at the rated inverter current as shownin the figure on the right.

t/T(%)
10050

0Outputcurrent(A)0A

Rated currentt/T(%)[Cd-14]=200.0%

100

50

0
(4) When [Cd-10] is returned to "Disable (00)", the analog
0A Rated current
monitor adjusting mode is finished, and PWM output
based on the actual output current is started from the [AMV] terminal.

9-229
9-229

Rated current×2

Outputcurrent(A)Rated current×2

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Pulse input monitor scale conversion

・In "[FRQ] terminal Output Selection [Cd-03]", "Pulse Input Monitor [dA-70]" can be selected.
・[dA-70] is valid only when "Pulse input detection target selection [CA-90]" is set to "Pulse input
frequency command (01)". For details, refer to section 10.2.2, Monitoring Analog Input and Pulse Input.
・If "[FRQ] Pin Output Type Selection [Cd-01]" is "PWM(00," PWM output is performed with the duty ratio
equivalent to the value obtained by multiplying the monitored value (%) of [dA-70] by the "pulse
input/output scale conversion value coefficient [Cd-16]."
・If [Cd-01] is set to "Frequency (01)", digital frequency is output at the frequency of the value obtainedby multiplying [Cd-16] and [FRQ] terminal reference frequency [Cd-02] to the monitor value (%) of[dA-70].
Code
dA-70

Pulse input monitor

Cd-01[FRQ] Output
wave form selection

Cd-02[FRQ] Output
base frequency(at frequency output)

Cd-03[FRQ] Output
monitor selection

Cd-16

Description

Data

Initialvalue

The frequency of the input pulse is displayed with the value of"pulse frequency scale [CA-92]" as 100%.

-100.00 to
100.00 %-Item

Pulse input/output scaleconversion value
coefficient

PWM out (6.4 ms Period)

00

Digital frequency output

01

Set the output frequency at full scale when "Frequency (01)" isselected for [Cd-01].
[AMV] Select PWM or digital-frequency output from theterminals.

01

0 to 32000 Hz

1440

dA-70

dA-01

0.01 to 100.00

1.00

When "Pulse Input Monitor [dA-70]" is selected in [Cd-03], theinput pulse frequency is scaled and outputted.
[Cd-01]=「PWM(00)」:
Duty cycle (%) = [dA-70]×[Cd-02][Cd-01] ="Frequency (01)":
Output pulse frequency(Hz) = [dA-70]×[Cd-02]×[Cd-16]

Pulse output filter time constant・[AMV] A filter can be set for the pulse output from the terminal.
・Filter time constant of pulse output can be set by "[FRQ] Output filter time constant [Cd-11]".
Code
Cd-11

Item
[FRQ] Output filter time
constant

Description

Data

Initialvalue[AMV] Filters PWM/ digital-frequency output from a terminal.

1 to 500 ms

10・[AMV] When using the analogue voltage output from the terminal ("[AMV] Pin Output Selection [Cd-36]"= "Voltage (01)"), the filter can be set with "[AMV] Output Filter Time Constant [Cd-31]". For details,
refer to "9.16.5 Analog Output of Monitor Data".

9-230
9-230

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.16.5 Output monitor data in analog

・[AMI] Terminals can be switched between analog voltage-output and analog current-output by setting"[AMI] Terminal Output Switching [Cd-26]". [AMI] To use the analogue voltage/current output from theterminal, set the parameters of the monitor you want to output to "[AMI] Terminal Output Selection [Cd04]". For the parameters that can be set, see "9.16.3 Selecting the monitor to be output".
・[AMV] Terminals can be switched between analog-voltage output and pulse-output by setting "[AMV]
Terminal Output Switching [Cd-36]". [AMV] To use analog-voltage output from the terminal, set theparameters of the monitor that you want to output to "[AMV] Terminal Output Selection [Cd-05]".
For the parameters that can be set, see "9.16.3 Selecting the monitor to be output".
・The output-characteristics when biasing is adjusted change according to the setting of "Analog
adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]". For details, refer to "Analog output gain/bias adjustment"in this section.
・When "Analog Monitor Adjustment Mode Select [Cd-10]" is set to "Enable (01)", the analog output
function is in adjustment mode, and the value set to "[AMI] output level in adjustment mode [Cd-25]" isoutput from the [AMI] terminal, and the value set to "[AMV] output level in adjustment mode [Cd-35]" isoutput from the [AMV] connector. Use this to check the analog output gain/bias setting or adjust theexternal device, etc.
・Analog output may not be stable immediately after power-on or power-off.
・[AMV] Refer to "9.16.4 Pulse Output of Monitor Data" when using pulse output from terminals ("[AMV]
Terminal Output Select [Cd-36]" = "Pulse (03)").
■ [AMI] Parameters related to terminal analog output
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initialvalue『9.16.3 See "Selecting
the Monitor to Output".

dA-01

Cd-04

[AMI] Output monitor
selection[AMI] Select the data to be analog output(voltage/current) from the terminal.

Cd-06

Analog adjust gain basis
selection

Bias quantity standard

00

Full scale fixed

01

Cd-10

Analog monitor adjustmentmode enable

Adjustment mode of the analog monitor is invalid.

00

Adjustment mode of analog monitor is effective.

01

Cd-21

[AMI] Output filter time
constant[AMI] Apply a filter to the analog output(voltage/current) from the terminals.

Cd-22[AMI] Data type selection

Cd-23[AMI] Bias adjustment(common to voltage/current)

Cd-24[AMI] Gain adjustment(common to voltage/current)

Cd-25

Adjustment mode [AMI]
output level

Cd-26[AMI] Output type selection

1 to 500 ms

Outputs the absolute value of data.

00

Signed data is output.

01[AMI] The bias is added to the analog output(voltage/current) from the terminal and the zero
point is adjusted.
[AMI] Apply a gain to the analog output(voltage/current) from the terminal and adjust thedata slope.
With [Cd-10] set to "Enabled (01)", set the [AMI]
terminal output-level.
[AMI] The analog voltage is output from theterminal.
[AMI] The analog current is output from theterminal.

9-231
9-231

00
00
100
00

-100.0 to 100.0 %20.0-1000.0 to 1000.0 %80.0-100.0 to 100.0 %

100.0

01
02
02

Inverter Function

Chapter 9■ [AMV] Parameters related to terminal analog output
Code
Cd-05

[AMV] Output monitor
selection

Cd-06

Analog adjust
selection

Cd-10

Analog monitor adjustmentmode enable

Cd-31[AMV] Output filter time
constant

Cd-32[AMV] Data type selection

Cd-33[AMV] Bias adjustment(voltage)

Cd-34
Cd-35
Cd-36

Description

Data

Initialvalue[AMV] Select the data to output analog voltage
from the terminal.

『9.16.3 See "Selecting
the Monitor to Output".

dA-01

Item

gain

basis

[AMV] Gain adjustment(voltage)
Adjustment mode [AMV]
output level[AMV] Output type selection

Bias quantity standard

00

Full scale fixed01

Adjustment mode of the analog monitor is invalid.

00

Adjustment mode of analog monitor is effective.

01[AMV] Apply a filter to the analog voltage output
from the terminal.

1 to 500 ms

Outputs the absolute value of data.

00

Signed data is output.

01[AMV] The bias is added to the analog voltage
output from the terminal and the zero point isadjusted.
[AMV] Apply a gain to the analog voltage output
from the terminal and adjust the data inclination.
With [Cd-10] set to "Enabled (01)", set the [AMV]
terminal output-level.
[AMV] The analog voltage is output from theterminal.

00
00
100
00

-100.0 to 100.0 %0.0-1000.0 to 1000.0 %100.0-100.0 to 100.0 %

100.0

01

01

Analog output gain/bias adjustment
・[AMI] When analog voltage/current output is performed from the terminal or analog voltage output isperformed from the [AMV] terminal, the gain/bias of the analog output can be adjusted according to
the connected meter.
・The output-characteristics when biasing is adjusted change according to the setting of "Analog
adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]".
・If the output range of the parameter selected in "[AMI] Terminal Output Selection [Cd-04]" or "[AMV]Pin Output Selection [Cd-05]" takes a negative value, you can select whether it should be an absolutevalue or treated as signed with "[AMI] Output Data Type Selection [Cd-22]" or "[AMV] Output Data Type
Selection [Cd-32]".
Code

Item

Cd-06

Analog adjust gain basis
selection

Cd-22[AMI] Data type selection

Cd-23[AMI] Bias adjustment(common to voltage/current)

Cd-24[AMI] Gain adjustment(common to voltage/current)

Cd-32[AMV] Data type selection

Cd-33
Cd-34

[AMV] Bias adjustment(voltage)[AMV] Gain adjustment(voltage)

Description

Data

Bias quantity standard

00

Full scale fixed01

Outputs the absolute value of data.

00

Signed data is output.

01[AMI] The bias is added to the analog output(voltage/current) from the terminal and the zero
point is adjusted.
[AMI] Apply a gain to the analog output(voltage/current) from the terminal and adjust thedata slope.

00

20.0

-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

80.0

00

Signed data is output.

01

9-232
9-232

00

-100.0 to 100.0 %Outputs the absolute value of data.
[AMV] The bias is added to the analog voltage output
from the terminal and the zero point is adjusted.
[AMV] Apply a gain to the analog voltage output fromthe terminal and adjust the data inclination.

Initialvalue

00-100.0 to 100.0 %0.0-1000.0 to 1000.0 %100.0Inverter Function

Chapter 9■When "Analog adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]" = "Bias quantity reference (00)"・The output characteristic can be translated byadding "[AMI] bias adjustment (voltage/current
common) [Cd-23]" or "[AMV] bias adjustment(voltage) [Cd-33]" to the analogue output.
・Regardless of the bias setting value, if the gain
setting value is the same, the slope of the output
characteristics will be the same.
・The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[AMI] gain adjustment (voltage/current
common) [Cd-24]"/"[AMV] gain adjustment (voltage)[Cd-34]" is 100.0%.

・The slope of the output characteristic can bechanged by multiplying the analogue output by"[AMI] gain adjustment (voltage/current common)[Cd-24]" or "[AMV] gain adjustment (voltage) [Cd34]".
・If the gain settings are the same, the slope of theoutput characteristics will be the same even if thebias settings are changed.
・The figure below shows theoutput-characteristics when "[AMI] bias adjustment(voltage/current common) [Cd-23]"/"[AMV] bias
adjustment (voltage) [Cd-33]" is 0.0%.

[Cd-23]/[Cd-33]= 50.0%(mA)/(V)20/10[Cd-24]/[Cd-34]=200.0%[Cd-24]/[Cd-34]=100.0%(mA)/(V)In this range
output

10/5

20/10

[Cd-24]/[Cd-34]=50.0%

Tilt change

10/5
0[Cd-23]/[Cd-33]=0.0%

0 Translating

In this range
outputMax. Output fullscale

0Max. Output full scale0-10/-5[Cd-23]/[Cd-33] =-50.0%[Cd-24]/[Cd-34]=-50.0%-10/-5■When "Analog adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]" = "Full scale fixed (01)"・You can add "[AMI] bias adjustment(voltage/current common) [Cd-23]" or "[AMV] bias
adjustment (voltage) [Cd-33]" to the 0 points of theanalogue output.
・Depending on the bias setting, the slope of theoutput characteristic changes so that 0 to 100% of
the output full scale becomes the bias setting to
100% of the analog input.
・The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[AMI] gain adjustment (voltage/current
common) [Cd-24]"/"[AMV] gain adjustment (voltage)[Cd-34]" is 100.0 %.

・The slope of the output characteristic can bechanged by multiplying the analogue output by"[AMI] gain adjustment (voltage/current common)[Cd-24]" or "[AMV] gain adjustment (voltage) [Cd34]".
・Note that even if the gain setting value is the same,the slope of the output characteristics changes
depending on the bias setting.
・The figure below shows the output-characteristics
when "[AMI] bias adjustment (voltage/current
common) [Cd-23]"/"[AMV] bias adjustment (voltage)[Cd-33]" is 0.0 %.
[Cd-24]/[Cd-34]=200.0%[Cd-23]/[Cd-33]=50.0%(mA)/(V)20/10(mA)/(V)
20/10
Tilt change
In this range
output10/5

0[Cd-23]/[Cd-33]
=0.0%
-50

0

Max.
Zero point change

10/5[Cd-24]/[Cd-34]=50.0%In this range
output0

Output fullscale

[Cd-23]/[Cd-33] =-50.0%[Cd-24]/[Cd-34]=100.0%0-10/-5

9-233
9-233

Max. Output full scale[Cd-24]/[Cd-34]=-50.0%Inverter Function

Chapter 9(e.g. 1) [AMI] voltage output of "Output frequency monitor(e.g. 2) [AMI] current output of "Output frequency monitor[dA-01]"[dA-01]" (When [Cd-06]="Bias quantity reference (00)")

・When the output frequency is from 0Hz to the highest
frequency, 0 to 10V output is set from [AMI].
・Since the full scale of [dA-01] is the highest frequency,
the gain setting should remain at 100% of the default
setting.

・When the output frequency is from 0Hz to the highest
frequency, 4 to 20mA current output from [AMI].
[Cd-33]: When output frequency =0Hz, the output 4mA is
20% of 20mA, so set 20%.
・Since the full scale of [Cd-34]:[dA-01] is the highest
frequency (100%), set the value as a percentage of
20mA=100 (80% by 20-4)=16mA).

Setting: [Cd-23]=0.0%、[Cd-24]=100.0%(V)
10

Setting: [Cd-23]=20.0%, [Cd-24]=80.0%

5

(mA)
20
Outputfrequency(Hz)

0
30

0

[Cd-24]=80.0%

10[Cd-23]=20.0%60
4((Max. frequency setting =60Hz)

0

0
50
25
(Max. frequency setting =50Hz

Outputfrequency(Hz)(e.g. 3-1) [AMV] current output of "Output current monitor(e.g. 3-2) [Ao2] current output of "Output current monitor[dA-02]" (When [Cd-06] = "Bias quantity reference (00)")[dA-02]" ([Cd-06] = "Full scale fixed (01)")

・When "Bias amount reference (00)" is selected for "Analog

・When "Full Scale Fixed (01)" is selected for "Analog
Adjustment Gain Reference Select [Cd-06]", set 0 A to rated
current of inverter output current as 4 to 20mA output fromthe [AMV] terminal as follows.

adjustment gain reference selection [Cd-06]", set 0A to
rated current of inverter output current as 4 to 20mA
output from the [AMV] terminal as follows.
[Cd-33]: When the inverter output current is 0 A, if theoutput from the [AMV] terminal is 4mA, set as 4mA/

[Cd-33]: When the inverter output current is0 A, if theoutput from the [AMV] terminal is 4 mA, set as 4 mA/20
mA=20%.

20mA=20%.

・Since the full scale of [Cd-34]:[dA-02] is 200%, set it to200% so that 100% (= rated current) is achieved.

・Since the full scale of [Cd-34]:[dA-02] is 200%, set thevalue as a percentage of 20mA= 200 (160% by 204)=16mA).

Setting: [Cd-33]=20.0%, [Cd-34]=200.0%

Setting: [Cd-33]=20.0%、[Cd-34]=160.0%(mA)[Cd-34]=160.0%
20

20

10

[Cd-33]=20.0%

10

4
0

Outputcurrent(A)Rated current×2

0

Rated current(mA)[Cd-34]=200.0 %[Cd-33]=20.0 %400Outputcurrent(A)Rated current

Rated current×2(e.g. 4) [dA-17] Output torque monitor [AMV] voltage output
・Assume that output torque of 0 to ±200% is signed and that output is 0 to 10V voltage from [AMV]. In this case, set so that-200 to
0% and 0 to 200% of the output torque become 0 to 50% and 50 to 100% of the voltage output, respectively. Since the full scaleof [dA-17] is ±500 %, set as shown below.
[Cd-33]: Since the voltage output is 5V at the center of the output torque range (-200 to 200%) (output torque = 0%), set thevalue to 50%.
[Cd-34]: Since gain setting value x 100%/500% = 50%/200%, set 125%
Setting: [Cd-32]=01, [Cd-13]=50.0%、[Cd-14]=125.0%(V) -200% torque10+200% torque[Cd-34]=125.0%
Output in this range.

0

Output torque(Nm)0[Cd-33]=50.0%-10(-)Rated torque 500%(+)Rated torqueNote: If [Cd-32] = "Absolute (00)" is set in the above example, 5 to 10V will be outputted for (-)torque-side 0 to-200%(black dotted line in the above figure).

9-234
9-234

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Analog monitor adjustment mode (for analog output)

・When "Analog monitor adjustment mode selection [Cd-10]" is set to "Enabled (01)", the analog monitor
adjustment mode is enabled. This setting applies to both the [AMI] and [AMV] terminals.
・[AMI] The output from the terminal is fixed to the full scale value of the monitor selected by "[AMI]
Terminal Output Selection [Cd-04]" at the value set by "[Cd-25] Output Level in [AMI] Adjustment
Mode."
・When "Voltage (01)" is selected in "[AMV] Terminal Output Switching [Cd-36]", the output from the[Ao2] Pin Output Selection [Cd-05] is fixed at the value set in "[AMV] Output Level [Cd-35]" for the fullscale value of the monitor selected in "[AMV] Terminal Output Selection [Cd-05]".
・[Cd-25], The minimum output of [Cd-35] varies depending on the setting of "[AMI] output data typeselection [Cd-22]" or "[AMV] output data type selection [Cd-32]". 0.0% when "Absolute value (00)" isset, and-100.0% when "Signed (01)" is set.
Code

Item

Description

Data

Analog monitor
adjustment mode
enableAdjustment mode of the analog monitor is invalid.

00

Cd-10

Adjustment mode of analog monitor is effective.

01

Cd-22

[AMI] Data typeselection

Outputs the absolute value of data.

00

Signed data is output.

01

Cd-32

[AMV] Data typeselection

Outputs the absolute value of data.

00

Signed data is output.

01

Cd-25

Adjustment mode
[AMI] output level

Cd-35

Adjustment mode
[AMV] output level

When [Cd-10] is set to "Enabled (01)", this sets the analog
voltage/current level output from the [AMI] terminal.
When [Cd-10] is set to "Enable (01)", and when "[AMV] Terminal Output
Switching [Cd-36]" is selected to "Voltage (01)," set the analogue voltage
level output from the [AMV] terminal.

InitialSetting-100.0 to
100.0 %

00

00
00

100.0

■(Example) Adjusting the analog-voltage output from the [AMI] terminal of the output current monitor
・Adjust the analog voltage output to 100% output at the rated inverter current.
Code

Name

dA-02

Output current monitor

Output range(Corresponds to 0 to 10 VDC/0 to 20 mA/0 to 100 %)(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter rated output current A(1) Set [Cd-04] to "Output current monitor [dA-02]". When [Cd-10] is set to "Enable (01)", the [Cd-25]
setting is outputted from the [AMI] terminal.
(2) If the reference point you want to output is the
rated current value, set the point at half of thatsince the full scale of [dA-02] is the rated current x
2.00. First, by setting [Cd-25] to 50.0 % (equivalent
to the rated inverter current), 5V that is the output
when the rated current (= rated current x 2.00 x 50.0%)
is output from the [AMI] terminal.
(3) Then use [Cd-24] to adjust the tilt. Change the [Cd-24]
to adjust 10V output.
(4) When [Cd-10] is returned to "Disabled (00)", the analog-voltage output of the adjusted [AMI] starts.

(V)
10

5
Outputcurrent(A)

0
0A

(V)
10

Rated current[Cd-24]=200.0%

5Outputcurrent(A)

0
0A

9-235
9-235

Rated current×2

Rated current

Rated current×2

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Analog output filter

・[AMI] Filters can be set for analog voltage/current output from terminals or analog voltage output from
[AMV] terminals.
・Filter time constant of analogue output can be set by "[AMI] Output filter time constant [Cd-21]" or"[AMV] Output filter time constant [Cd-31]".
Code

Item

Cd-21

[AMI] Output filter time constant

Cd-31[AMV] Output filter time constant

Description

Data

Initialvalue[AMI] Sets the filter to the data of analog voltage output
and analog current output from the terminal.
[AMV] Sets the filter to the data of analog voltage output
from the terminal.

1 to 500 ms

100

・[AMV] When using pulse output from the terminal ("[AMV] Pin Output Selection [Cd-36]" = "Pulse (03)"),the filter can be set with "[FRQ] Output Filter Time Constant [Cd-11]". For details, refer to "9.16.4 Pulse
Output of Monitor Data".

9-236
9-236

Inverter Function

Chapter 99.16.6 Input/Output synchronization function[DRV] I/O Synchronization Function[UPF1] Input-side: Torque limit enable [TL]
[UPF2] Output-side: Overload warning [OL]
…
[OL]
…
[WAP]
[WAIC]

[FR]
[RR]
[CF1]
…
[TL]
…
[PLZ]
[TCH]

Input terminal function

Output terminal function

・With the contact input/output synchronization function, information on the output terminal function
can be synchronized with the input terminal function without going through physical wiring. The input
terminal function is set in "Contact sync input selection ([CH-01] to [CH-06])", and the output terminal
function is set in "Contact sync output selection ([CH-11] to [CH-16])", and the channel (combined
output terminal function and input terminal function) can be set in six ways.
・ON/OFF status of the output pin function and the logical level of ON/OFF status of the input pinfunction can be inverted. Settings can be made for each channel (combination of output and input
terminal functions).
・Delay times for ON/OFF can be set for each channel. If the operation is unstable, setting a longer delay
time may solve the problem.
・You cannot duplicate the function except for " No assignment [no]". When the same function is
selected, the channel that was selected first is changed to "No assignment [no]", and the channel thatwas set last becomes valid.

[OL] Output[TL] Input
ON-delay time

OFF-delay time

Code

Item

CH-01 toCH-06

Sync input terminal
function selection 1 to 6

Select the input function to besynchronized.

CH-11 toCH-16

Sync output terminal
function selection 1 to6

Select the output function tosynchronize.

CH-21 toCH-26

Sync terminal logic
selection 1 to 6

Normally open:
Logical inversion disabled
Normally closed:
Logical inversion enabled

Sync terminal on-delay
time 1 to 6

Sets the duration until ON status isconfirmed when the status of theoutput function selected during sync
contact output selection changes to
OFF→ON.

Sync terminal off-delay
time 1 to 6

Sets the duration until OFF status isconfirmed when the status of theoutput function selected during sync
contact output selection changes to
ON→OFF.

CH-30
CH-32
CH-34
CH-36
CH-38
CH-40
CH-31
CH-33
CH-35
CH-37
CH-39
CH-41

Description

Data
Refer to "List of Input Pin Functions"in "9.15.1 Functions Used forExternal Signal Input".
See "List of Output Pin Functions" in"9.16.1 Using the External Signal
Output Function".

000

00

00
00
01

0.00 to 100.00 s

9-237
9-237

Initial
value

0.00

Inverter Function

Chapter 9
Logic inversion function

・The relation between the output pin function and ON/OFF of the input pin function can be inverted.
・The setting can be set for each channel by "Logical synchronous logical selection ([CH-21] to [CH-26])".
Code

Item

Description

Data

Initialvalue

CH-21 toCH-26

Sync terminal logic selection 1 to 6

Normally open: Logical inversion disabled
Normally closed: Logical inversion enabled

00
01

00

Output terminal function
ON-delay time

OFF-delay time

Input terminal function
Logical inversion: Disable
Input terminal function
Logical inversion: Enable[CH-21] to [CH-26]
Set value

ON/OFF status of outputting
function

ON/OFF status of inputting
function

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

OFF
ON
ON
OFF

Normally open (00)Normally closed (01)

ON delay/OFF delay function
・A delay time can be set for each channel from the operation of the output pin function to the operationof the input pin function.
・The delay time can be set individually for the on-delay time from when the output pin function changes
to OFF→ON until the input pin function turns ON (logic inversion: OFF) and for the off-delay time fromwhen the output pin function changes to ON→OFF until the input pin function turns OFF (logic
inversion: ON).
Code
CH-30
CH-32
CH-34
CH-36
CH-38
CH-40
CH-31
CH-33
CH-35
CH-37
CH-39
CH-41

Item

Description

Sync terminal on-delay time 1 to 6

Sync terminal off-delay time 1 to 6

Initialvalue

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

Sets the duration until ON status is confirmed
when the status of the output function selectedduring sync contact output selection changes to
OFF→ON.

Sets the duration until OFF status is confirmed
when the status of the output function selectedduring sync contact output selection changes to
ON→OFF.

Function output

Function input

ON delay time

Data

OFF delay time

9-238
9-238

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10

Chapter 10 Monitor Functions

This chapter describes various types of data that can be monitored by the inverter's keypad or remote
operator. For more information on using keypad to view the monitors, refer to "Chapter 7 Keypad andRelated Functions".
When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters, and pay attention to safety.

10.1 Operation data
10.1.1 Monitor the output frequency
Output frequency monitor [dA-01]
・Displays the output frequency of the inverter. "0.00" is displayed during stop.
When the content of "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]" is displayed, "Frequency monitor LED [Hz]" on
the keypad lights.
・[dA-01] displays the absolute value of the output frequency regardless of whether the rotation is
forward or reverse. When checking the present rotational direction with the display content of themonitor, refer to "Output-frequency monitor (signed) [dA-12]".
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dA-01

Output frequency
monitor

Displays the output frequency of the inverter. "0.00" isdisplayed during stop. The "Frequency monitor LED [Hz]"of the keypad lights while this data is displayed.

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

Frequency reference monitor (after calculation) (signed) [dA-04]
・Displays the final frequency command value based on the results of main speed command, auxiliary
speed command or calculation.
・This monitor displays the value before the upper/lower limiter or the maximum frequency limit isapplied to the setting range.
Code
dA-04

I te mFrequency reference monitor(after calculation) (signed)

Description

Data

Displays the frequency reference value.

-590.00 to 590.00 Hz

Output frequency scale conversion monitor [dA-06]
・Displays the value obtained by converting "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]" with the factor set in"Frequency conversion gain [Ab-01]". Used when changing the display unit, such as changing thedisplay from the output frequency to the motor rotation speed.
(Example) Displays the motor rotation speed.
Motor rotation speed N (min-1) = (120×f (Hz)) / P (number of motor poles)
Therefore, when [Ab-01] = 30.0 for a 4-pole motor, 1800 is displayed at 60Hz.
Code

I te mDescription

dA-06

Output frequency scaleconversion monitor

Displays the [dA-01]×[Ab-01] setting.

Ab-01

Frequency conversion gain

[dA-06] Set the conversion factor for display.

10-1
10-1

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to59000.00-

0.01 to 100.00

1.00

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

Output-frequency monitor (signed) [dA-12]
・Displays the inverter output frequency in signed form.
・The positive value (+) is displayed for forward rotation and the negative value (-) is displayed for reverse
rotation.
・"Output frequency monitor (signed) [dA-12]" is not subject to the frequency change during monitoring
function. "Monitoring data change selection [UA-93]" is "Enabled (01)"You cannot change thefrequency from the control panel while [dA-12] is displayed.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dA-12

Outputfrequency
monitor (signed)

Displays the inverter output frequency in signed form. During stop,"0.00" is displayed. During forward rotation, the + value is displayed.
During reverse rotation, the-value is displayed. "Monitor indicator[Hz]" on the control panel lights while this data is displayed.

-590.00 to
590.00 Hz

Frequency change function of monitor
・When "Monitor in progress data change selection [UA-93]" is "Enabled (01), "Main speed command
selection [AA101]" is "Parameter setting (07)" and only during inverter operation, the frequency
command can be changed by keypad on the operation panel while "Output frequency monitor [dA01]"/"Output frequency conversion monitor [dA-06]" is displayed.
By "Multi-speed command change during monitoring selection [UA-94]", disable/enable of monitoring
frequency change function for multi-speed operation can be selected. When "Disable (00)" is set, thisfunction is valid only when "Multi-speed 0 speed ([Ab110]/[Ab210])" is selected as the frequency
command. When set to "Enabled (01)", this function is enabled for all multi-speed commands set to・"Multi-speed 0th speed ([Ab110]/[Ab210])" to "Multi-speed 15th speed ([Ab-11]/[Ab-25])".
・When SET key is pressed after the frequency command is changed, the changed frequency command isstored in the inverter's internal memory.
・"Output frequency monitor (signed) [dA-12]" is not subject to the frequency change during monitoring
function. "Monitoring data change selection [UA-93]" is "Enabled (01)"You cannot change thefrequency from the control panel while [dA-12] is displayed.
If "UP/DWN memory selection [CA-61]" is "Save (01)", after "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]"/"Output frequency conversion monitor [dA-06]" is changed, please note that the changed frequency
command value will be stored in the inverter internal memory when the power is cut off. For details,
refer to "9.2.14 Increasing/Decreasing Frequency Command by Remote Control."・Since "Output frequency setting (monitor) [FA-01]" is rewritten while displaying [dA-01]/[dA-06], there
may be a time difference between key operation and display depending on acceleration/deceleration
time setting.
・Frequency cannot be changed while the inverter is stopped, PID is operating, or in the individual input
mode by pressing and holding SET key.
・When using the remote operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards), the setting of this function is disabled.
Code

I te mUA-93

Enable frequencychanges throughmonitor display

UA-94

Enable multispeed
frequency changes
through monitor
display

Description
The frequency command cannot be changed in Disable:[dA-01]/[dA-06]
The frequency command can be changed in Enable:[dA-01]/[dA-06]
Disable: Only "Multi-speed 0 speed ([Ab110]/[Ab210])" can beedited.
Enable: "Multi-speed 0 speed ([Ab110]/[Ab210])" to "Multispeed 15 speed ([Ab-11]/[Ab-25])" can be edited

10-2
10-2

Data

Initial
value

00
00
01
00
00
01

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.1.2 Monitor the output current
Output current monitor [dA-02]
・Displays the output current flowing to the motor. The monitor lamp [A] on the control panel lights while
the current monitor [dA-02] is displayed.
・First order lag filters can be set for the [dA-02] readout. If the display of [dA-02] is shaking in detail,adjust the time constant of the filter by referring to "Output current monitor filter time constant (dA-02
and similar communication data) [CF-61]".
・Depending on PWM type of the inverter, the lower the carrier frequency is, the more the value of themonitor may be shaken.
・"0.00" is displayed while output is stopped.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

Initialvalue

0.00 to 655.35 A-

0 to 1000 ms

300

dA-02

Output current monitor

Displays the output current from theinverter.
The data is displayed as the rms valueof the output current.

CF-61

Filter time constant for output
current monitor(dA-02 and similar communication
data)

Filters can be set for "Output current
monitor [dA-02]".

10.1.3 Monitor the rotation direction
Rotation direction monitor [dA-03]
・Displays the inverter operation direction. When the drive is running (forward or reverse), the "Running
Indicator [RUN]" on the control panel lights.
・The rotation direction is determined by the operation command method and the sign of the frequency
command.
・For 0Hz operation such as DC braking function, "Outputting 0Hz (01)" is displayed in [dA-03].
Code

I te mDescriptionDatao (Stopped (00))

dA-03

Rotation direction
monitor

Displays the inverter operation direction.

d (0Hz outputting (01))
F (Forward (02))
r (During reverse rotation (03))

Generally, the motor rotates counterclockwise in the forward direction when viewed from the axial direction.

Forward rotation

10-3
10-3

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.1.4 Monitor the motor detect speed
Detect speed monitor[dA-08]
・Displays the actual rotation frequency fed back from the motor when performing speed control withsensor or position control.
・This monitor is enabled when "Velocity Feedback (02)" is set to "Pulse-input detection target selection[CA-90]".
・When using this monitor, set "IM motor pole selection [Hb103]" and "Encoder parameter setting [CA81]" correctly. For details, refer to "9.5.11 Using Encoder Feedback".
・If the value of "Velocity detection value monitor [dA-08]" changes finely due to the effect of noises, etc.,
and the Velocity detection value is not stable, set "Velocity detection filter time constant [CA-86]"
larger.
Code

I te mdA-08

Detect speed
monitorCA-81

Encoder constantsetting

CA-86
CA-90
Hb103

Speed feedback
filterPulse input targetfunction selection
IM motor pole
selection

Description
Displays the actual rotation frequency during
encoder feedback.
Set the number of connected encoder pulses
in the number of pulses (multiplied by 1)
converted to one rotation of the motor.
Filter time constant for the detection speed byencoder pulse input.
Velocity feedback
Set the number of motor poles.

10-4
10-4

Data

Initialvalue-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

1 to 65535 pls

512

0 to 1000 ms

20

02

01

00 to 23
(2 to 48 poles)

01

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.1.5 Monitor the torque command and output torque
Torque command monitor (after calculation) [dA-15]
・Displays the currently set torque command value used in torque control.
This monitor is enabled when "Torque control enable [ATR]" of the input terminal function is ON
and in torque control status.
・The torque equivalent to 100% of this monitor can be selected from the torque calculated by the
motor constant, etc. or the torque equivalent to the rated current of the inverter by setting "Torqueconversion method selection [HC115]". Refer to "9.6.3 Torque Command Operation" for details.
・This monitor displays the sum of the torque command value and the torque bias value. For details of
the torque bias function, refer to "9.6.5 Operation by Adding Torque Command".
Code

I te mdA-15

Torque reference monitor(after calculation)

Description

Data

Displays the current torque command
value.

-1000.0 to 1000.0 %Torque limit monitor [dA-16]
・Displays the currently set torque limit value used in torque control.
・For details of the torque limit function, refer to "9.6.4 Limiting Torque to Move".
Code

I te mdA-16

Torque limit monitor

Description

Data

Displays the current torque limit value.

0.0 to 500.0 %Output torque monitor [dA-17]
・In sensorless vector control, the output torque estimate during speed control/torque control isdisplayed.
・In this monitor, the regeneration is a negative value (-) when the motor runs in the forward direction
with a positive value (+), and the regeneration is a positive value (-) when the motor runs in the reverse
direction with a negative value (-).
・First order lag filters can be set for the [dA-17] readout. If the display of [dA-17] is shaking in detail,adjust the time constant of the filter in "Output torque monitor filter time constant (dA-17 and similar
communication data) [CF-62]".
・The torque equivalent to 100% of this monitor can be selected from the torque calculated by the motor
constant, etc. or the torque equivalent to the rated current of the inverter by setting "Torque conversion
method selection [HC115]". Refer to "9.6.3 Torque Command Operation" for details.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

Initial
value

dA-17

Output torque monitor

Displays the output torque estimate.

-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

-

CF-62

Filter time constant for output
torque monitor(dA-17 and similar
communication data)

Filters can be set for "Torque output
monitor [dA-17]".

0 to 1000 ms

100

10-5
10-5

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.1.6 Monitor the position control
Current position monitor [dA-20]
・Indicates the current position during position control. For details of the position control function, referto "9.14 Performing Positioning Operation".
・When "Velocity Feedback (02)" is set to "Pulse-input detection target selection [CA-90]", this monitor isenabled. In addition, "Clear position error [PCLR]", "Preset position data [PSET]" and "Memorize present
position at power-off [AE-61]" of the input terminal functions are also enabled. For details, refer to"9.14.1 Control to Absolute Position of Reference Point Reference Point (Absolute Position Control)".
Code

dA-20

I te mDescription

Current position
monitor

Data
Absolute position control mode:-268435455 to 268435455 pls

Displays the current position
during position control.

High-resolution absolute position control mode:-1073741823 to 1073741823 pls

10.1.7 Monitor the output voltage
Output voltage monitor (rms) [dA-18]
・The output voltage currently output to the motor can be checked in the Output Voltage Monitor (rms)[dA-18].
・The output-voltage displayed in [dA-18] is calculated.
・First order lag filters can be set for the [dA-18] readout. If the display of [dA-18] is shaking in detail,adjust the time constant of the filter by referring to "Output-voltage monitor filter time constant (dA-18
and similar communication data) [CF-63]".
・When the input voltage is low or "Motor rated voltage [Hb106]" is not set correctly, the correct value
may not be displayed.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

Initial
value

dA-18

Output voltage monitor (rms)

Displays the voltage output to the motor.

0.0 to 800.0 V

-

CF-63

Output voltage monitor filter
time constant(dA-18 and similar
communication data)

Filters can be set for "Output voltage
monitor (rms) [dA-18]."

0 to 1000 ms

100

10-6
10-6

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.1.8 Monitor the input power/integrated input power
Input power monitor [dA-30]
・Displays the power (instantaneous value) currently input to the inverter.
・First order lag filters can be set for the readout of "Input power monitor [dA-30]". If the display of [dA30] is shaking finely, adjust the time constant of the filter using the "I/O power monitor filter time
constant [CF-64]".
I te mDescription

Data

Initial
value

dA-30

Input power monitor

Displays the input power (instantaneous value).
The displayed value varies depending on the
input power factor.

0.00 to 655.35 kW

-

CF-64

Input/Output power
filterFilters can be set for "Input-power monitor [dA30]" and "Output-power monitor [dA-34]".

0 to 1000 ms

400

Code

Integrated input power [dA-32]
・Displays the integrated data of the input power to the inverter.
"Integrated input power display gain [UA-13]" can be used to convert the displayed content to gain.
[dA-32] = [Actual cumulative incoming power (kWh)] /[UA-13)](e.g.) When [UA-13] is 100 and [dA-32] is 1000, the actual cumulative incoming power is 100,000
kWh.
・This monitor value is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power supply is cut off. To
clear the data, use one of the following methods.
- Clear cumulative input power [UA-12] is changed to "Clear (01)", and the [dA-32] setting is clearedby pressing SET button on the control panel.
- Assign "Clear integrated input power [KHC]" to the input terminal and ON the terminal to clear [dA32] to zero.
Code

I te mdA-32

Integrated input
power monitor

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

UA-12

Integrated input
power monitor
clear

UA-13

Display gain for the
integrated input
power monitor

Description
Displays the integrated value of input power.
Clearing cumulative incoming power [KHC]:
When this signal is turned ON, [dA-32] is cleared
to 0.
Disable: Clear Disable
Clear execution:
Pressing SET button on the control panel withthis setting clears the "Integrated input powermonitor [dA-32]" to zero.
(This setting becomes "Invalid (00)" after
clearing is executed.)
Choose the zoom factor used for [dA-32].

10-7
10-7

Data

Initialvalue

0.0 to1000000.0 kWh

-

039

-

00

01

1 to 1000

00

1Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.1.9 Monitor the output power/integrated output power from the Inverter
Output power monitor [dA-34]
・Displays the power (instantaneous value) currently output from the inverter to the motor.
・First order lag filters can be set as displayed in "Output power monitor [dA-34]". If the display of [dA-34]
is shaking finely, adjust the time constant of the filter using the "I/O power monitor filter time constant[CF-64]".
Code

I te mDescription

Data

Initial
value

dA-34

Output powermonitor

Displays the output power (instantaneous value).

0.00 to 655.35 kW

-

CF-64

Input/Output
power filter

Filters can be set for "Input-power monitor [dA-30]"
and "Output-power monitor [dA-34]".

0 to 1000 ms

400

Integrated output power monitor [dA-36]
・Displays the integrated output power from the inverter to the motor.
"Integrated calculated power display gain [UA-13]" can be used to convert the displayed gain.
・[dA-36] = [Actual integral power (kWh)] /[UA-15)](e.g.) When [UA-15] is 100 and [dA-36] is 1000, the actual cumulative power is 100,000 kWh.
・This monitor value is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power supply is cut off. To
clear the data, use one of the following methods.
- Clear cumulative power [UA-14] is changed to "Clear (01)", and the [dA-36] is cleared by pressing
SET button.
- When "Clear cumulative power output [OKHC]" is assigned to the input terminal and the terminal isturned ON, the [dA-36] value is cleared to zero.
Code
dA-36

I te mIntegrated output
power monitor

CA-01 to Input terminal
CA-08 function

UA-14

Integrated output
power monitor clear

UA-15

Display gain
for the Integrated
output power monitor

Description
Displays the integrated output power.
Clearing cumulative power consumption [OKHC]:
When this signal is turned ON, [dA-36] is cleared
to 0.
Disable: Clear Disable
Clear execution:
When this setting is selected and SET button on
the control panel is pressed, "Integral powermonitor [dA-36]" is cleared to zero.
(This setting becomes "Invalid (00)" after
clearing is executed.)
Choose the zoom factor used for [dA-36].

10-8
10-8

Data

Initialvalue

0.0 to1000000.0 kWh

-

040

-

00

01

1 to 1000

00

1Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.1.10 Monitor the DC bus voltage
DC bus voltage monitor [dA-40]
・Displays the DC voltage charged in the main circuit capacitor of the inverter (DC voltage between the[P] and [N] terminals of the inverter main circuit terminal block).
・During operation, the monitored value also fluctuates according to the actual DC voltage.
・If the DC voltage between P-N exceeds approx. DC400V (200V class)/approx. DC800V (400V class, an
overvoltage error [E007] occurs.
・[E007] For more information on troubleshooting in case of occurrence, see 15.2 Troubleshooting
Protection Features.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dA-40

DC bus voltage monitor

Displays the DC voltage between P-N of the inverter.

0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc

10.1.11 Monitor the load factor of the braking resistor
Braking resistor operation circuit (DBTR) load factor monitor [dA-41]
・Displays the duty factor of the braking resistor operation circuit (DBTR).
・To use the braking resistor operation circuit (DBTR), the "braking resistor operation circuit (DBTR)
usage rate [bA-60]" and "braking resistor operation circuit (DBTR) selection [bA-61]" sets are required.
For details, refer to "9.9.5 Suppressing overvoltage with a braking resistor".
・If this monitor value exceeds the value set in "Braking Resistor Operating Circuit (DBTR) Usage Rate[bA-60]", "Braking Resistor Overload Error [E006]" will occur.
・For details on troubleshooting when "Braking resistor overload error [E006]" occurs, refer to "15.2
Troubleshooting of protective functions".
Code
dA-41

I te mBrake resistor operation
circuit (DBTR)
load factor monitor

Description

Data

Displays the load factor of the braking resistor.

0.00 to 100.00 %

10-9
10-9

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.1.12 Monitor the electronic thermal load ratio
Electronic thermal load ratio monitor (Motor) [dA-42]
・Displays the electronic thermal load factor of the motor. If this monitor exceeds 100%, "Motor overload
error [E005]" will occur.
・In order to perform the overload protection of the motor correctly, perform the basic setting of the
motor and the electronic thermal function setting properly. For details, refer to "8.1.3 Setting Motor
Nameplate Data to Parameters" and "8.1.4 Setting Electronic Thermal".
・For details on troubleshooting when "Motor overload error [E005]" occurs, refer to "15.2
Troubleshooting of protective functions".
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dA-42

Electronic thermal load factor
monitor (Motor)

Displays the electronic thermal load factor of the
motor.

0.00 to 100.00 %Electronic thermal load ratio monitor (Inverter) [dA-43]
・Displays the electronic thermal load factor of the inverter. If this monitor exceeds 100%, "Controller
overload error [E039]" will occur.
・The electronic thermal function of the inverter is to protect the inverter itself. It is operating separatelyfrom the thermal function.
・The characteristics of the inverter electronic thermal are fixed for each inverter model, and there are no
parameters for adjustment. Regardless of the setting, the rated current at ND rating is used as areference. Even when "Light load (LD) (01)" is set to "Load spec. selection [Ub-03]", the increment of[dA-43] to the output current does not change.
・For details on troubleshooting when "Controller overload error [E039]" occurs, refer to "15.2
Troubleshooting of protective functions".
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dA-43

Electronic thermal load factor
monitor (Inverter)

Displays the electronic thermal load factor of theinverter.

0.00 to 100.00 %

10-10
10-10

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.2 Monitor the input/output terminal
10.2.1 Monitor the status of input/output terminals
Input terminal monitor [dA-51]
・LED on the control panel lights up to indicate the input status of the input terminals.
・This monitor displays ON/OFF of the functional terminals. a/b(NO/NC) Not affected by selection.
・The response of this monitor is slow depending on the setting of "Input terminal response time ([CA-41]
to [CA-48])".
・If the monitoring status does not change even when the terminal is turned ON/OFF, the control wire
may be disconnected.
・When "Thermistor selection [Cb-40]" is set to "PTC (Resistance)" Enable (01)," OFF is maintained at all
times regardless of the input status.
・The operation of the output terminal [UPF] when the safety function STO input terminal [ST1]/[ST2]and EDM function selector switch are ON can be checked in "Safety STO terminal monitor [dA-44]". For
details, refer to section 14.1.3 Changing Status/Error Display by Setting.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

The 7-segment LED on the control panel indicates ON/OFF status of
the input terminals.
(e.g.) Input terminal [RST], [RR], [FR]: ON
Input terminal [PLA], [ES], [AUT], [DFM], [DFL]: OFF
dA-51

Input terminal
monitor

DisplayON：LED ON-

OFF：LED OFFFRPLA RST ES AUT DFM DFL RR(OFF) (ON) (OFF) (OFF) (OFF) (OFF) (ON) (ON)Output terminal monitor [dA-54]
・Indicates the output status of the output terminals with the positions of LED on the control panel.
・This monitor displays ON/OFF of the physical terminals. a/b(NO/NC) Not affected by selection.
・The response of this monitor is slow depending on the setting of "Output terminal on delay time ([CC20]/[CC-22]/[CC-32])" and "Output terminal off delay time ([CC-21]/[CC-23]/[CC-33])".
・If the monitoring status does not change after the terminal is turned ON/OFF, the control wire may bedisconnected.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

The 7-segment LED on the control panel indicates ON/OFF statusof the output terminals.
(e.g.) Output terminal [UPF]: ON
Output terminal [DRV], [ML] : OFF
dA-54

Output terminal
monitorON
OFFML
DRV UPF(OFF) (OFF) (ON)

10-11
10-11

Display：LED ON：LED OFF-Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.2.2 Monitor the analog input and pulse input
Analog input [VRF] monitor [dA-61] /Analog input [IRF] monitor [dA-62]
・[VRF]/[IRF] The analog voltage/current (0 to 10V/4 to 20mA) input to the pin is displayed as 0.00 to
100.00%.
・You can monitor A/D immediately after converting the analog signal.
・The unit is factory-adjusted so that MAX is slightly smaller than 10V/20mA, taking into accountvariations in the input circuitry.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dA-61

Analog input[VRF] monitor[VRF] Indicates the analogue input 0 to MAX of the terminal as
0.00 to 100.00%.

dA-62

Analog input[IRF] monitor[IRF] Indicates the analogue input 0 to MAX of the terminal as
0.00 to 100.00 %.

0.00 to 100.00 %Pulse input monitor [dA-70]
・This monitor operates only when "Pulse input detection target selection [CA-90]" is "Pulse input
frequency command (01)," and displays the frequency of pulses input to input terminal [RST] (B-phase)and input terminal [PLA] (A-phase) in %, where "Pulse input frequency scale [CA-92]" is 100 %.
・When "Pulse-input detection target selection [CA-90]" is "Disabled (00)", the operation will not be
performed.
・For details, refer to "9.2.8 Setting Frequency Reference from Pulse Input".
・When "Velocity Feedback (02)" is set to "Select Pulse-input Detection Object [CA-90]",Confirmation"Velocity detected value monitor [dA-08]" or "Present position monitor [dA-20]".
・If [CA-90] is set to "Pulse Count (03)", or if pulse is input to the input terminal function "Pulse Input A[PLA]" or "Pulse Input B [PLB]" assigned to any input terminal by setting [CA-90] to other than (03),confirmation "Pulse Counter Monitor [dA-28]".
Code

I te mDescription

Data

Initialvalue-100.00 to 100.00 %

-

dA-70

Pulse input monitor

Displays the entered pulse frequency as apercentage of [CA-92] as 100%.

CA-90

Pulse input targetfunction selection

Setting when pulse input is used as frequency
command.

01

01

CA-92

Pulse input frequency
scaleEnter the pulse frequency equivalent to thehighest frequency.

0.05 to 32.00 kHz

25.00

10-12
10-12

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.2.3 Monitor the status of analog input/output
Analog Input/Output status monitor [dA-60]
・The setting status of analog input and analog output can be checked.
・[AMV] For the terminal, pulse output and analog voltage output can be selected, but the voltage isalways displayed on this monitor.
・The analogue input terminal [VRF]/[IRF] and analogue output terminal [AMI]/[AMV] can be changed in
the selection status by "[VRF] terminal input switching [Cb-08]", "[IRF] terminal input switching [Cb-18]","[AMI] terminal output switching [Cd-26]", and "[AMI] terminal output switching [Cd-36]. For details,
refer to "9.15.3 Adjusting Analog Input", "9.16.4 Pulse Output of Monitor Data", and "9.16.5 Analog
Output of Monitor Data".
Code

I te mDescription

Data

The 7-segment LED on the control panel indicates theselection status of the analog input terminal [VRF]/[IRF] andanalog output terminal [AMI].

dA-60

Voltage

Analog Input/Output statusmonitorCurrent
[AMI]
[VRF]
[AMV]
[IRF]
(Always Display Voltage)

10-13
10-13

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.2.4 Monitor the unsteady state of the analog output
Abnormal detection value monitor [dC-31]
・When the non-stationary detection function is used, the monitor data specified in "Non-stationary
detection target [bE-02]" can be checked in "Non-stationary detection value monitor [dC-31]".
・For details of the non-stationary detection function, refer to "9.11.14 Detecting a State Different fromthe Steady State (Non-Steady Detection Function)".
Code
dC-31
bE-02

I te mDescription

Abnormal detection
value monitor
Abnormal detection
target

The monitor data specified in [bE-02] isdisplayed.
Select the data to be monitored by thenon-stationary detection function.

Data

Initialvalue-100.00 to 100.00 % Note-

『9.16.3 Refer to "Selecting
the monitor to be output"

dA-01

Note: Assume that the full scale of the target selected in "Non-stationary object [bE-02]" is 100 %.

Abnormal detection upper level monitor [dC-32]
・The upper limit of the unsteady detection function can be checked in the current operation state.
・For details of the non-stationary detection function, refer to "9.11.14 Detecting a State Different fromthe Steady State (Non-Steady Detection Function)".
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dC-32

Abnormal detection
upper level monitor

Displays the current value of the upper limit level
for the non-stationary detection function.

-100.00 to 100.00 % Note

Note: Assume that the full scale of the target selected in "Non-stationary object [bE-02]" is 100%.

Abnormal detection lower level monitor [dC-33]
・The lower limit of the unsteady detection function can be checked in the current operation state.
・For details of the non-stationary detection function, refer to "9.11.14 Detecting a State Different fromthe Steady State (Non-Steady Detection Function)".
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dC-33

Abnormal detection
lower level monitor

Displays the current value of the lower limit level
for the non-stationary detection function.

-100.00 to 100.00 % Note

Note: Assume that the full scale of the target selected in "Non-stationary object [bE-02]" is 100%.

10-14
10-14

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.3 Monitor the status of inverter
10.3.1 Monitor the operation information for the inverter
Accumulated number of starts monitor [dC-20]
・Displays the number of times the inverter has started outputting to the motor from the stop state to theoperation state.
・This data is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power supply is cut off.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dC-20

Accumulated numberof starts monitor

Displays the number of times the inverter has started outputting
to the motor from the stop state to the operation state.

1 to 65535
times

Accumulated number of power-on times monitor [dC-21]
・Displays the number of times the inverter has been turned on.
・This data is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power supply is cut off.
・It does not count when restarting due to an instantaneous power failure.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dC-21

Accumulated number of
power-on times monitor

Displays the number of times the inverter has been
turned on.

1 to 65535 times

Accumurated RUN time monitor [dC-22]
・The inverter enters the operating state and displays the accumulated time output to the motor.
・This data is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power supply is cut off.
Code
dC-22

I te m
Accumulated RUN
time monitor

Description

Data

Displays the total operation time of the inverter after
shipment from the factory. This data is stored in theinternal memory when the power supply is cut off.

0 to 1000000 hr

Accumulated power-on time monitor [dC-24]
・Displays the time the inverter has been powered on.
・This data is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power supply is cut off.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dC-24

Accumulated power-on
time monitor

Displays the total energizing time of the inverter after
shipping from the factory. This data is stored in theinternal memory when the power supply is cut off.

0 to 1000000 hr

Accumulated cooling-fan run time monitor [dC-26]
・Displays the amount of time the inverter cooling fan has been running.
・This data is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power supply is cut off.
・"Cooling fan cumulative operation time monitor [dC-26]" can be cleared by setting "Cooling fan
cumulative operation time clear selection [bA-71]"。 For details, see section 9.11.10, Outputting a
Cooling Fan Life Warning.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dC-26

Accumulated cooling-fan run
time monitor

Displays the accumulated operating time of
the cooling fans.

0 to 1000000 hr

・[dC-20]/[dC-21]/[dC-22]/[dC-24]/[dC-26] is not cleared even if the parameter is initialized.

10-15
10-15

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.3.2 Monitor the cooling fin temperature
Cooling fin temperature monitor [dC-15]
・Displays the cooling fin temperature near the main element of the inverter.
・If the cooling fin temperature exceeds 120°C max, "Temperature error [E021]" will occur.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dC-15

Cooling fin temperature monitor

Displays the temperature of the cooling fins.

−20.0 to 200.0 ℃

10.3.3 Monitor the life assessment results
Life assessment monitor [dC-16]
・This indicator lights up on 7segLED of the control panel. It indicates the status of the life part.
・The following four conditions can be checked on the life diagnosis monitor.
1: Life of the electrolytic capacitor on the substrate
2: Cooling fan life
3: Power module life
4:Life of the inrush current prevention circuit
・The life can be diagnosed by "Capacitor Life Possible [WAC]", "Fan Life Indication [WAF]", "Power
Module Life Indication [WAP]" and "Sudden Circuit Life Indication [WAIC]" of the output terminal
function. For details, refer to "9.11.9 Outputting Warning of Electric Capacitor Life on Board", "9.11.10
Outputting Warning of Cooling Fan Life", and "9.11.11 Outputting Warning of Inverter Main Element
Life".
・The life of the electrolytic capacitor on the board is calculated once every 10 minutes. If the power isturned ON/OFF repeatedly in this period or less, the service life cannot be diagnosed normally.
・When "Cooling fan operation selection [bA-70]" is set to other than "Always ON(00"), the fan is
automatically stopped due to failure. Lifetime diagnostics are not performed while the fan is stopped.
For details on cooling fan operation, see section 9.10.7, Selecting Cooling Fan Operation.
・The life diagnostic function of the cooling fan does not operate for models under the single-phase
200V class 0.75kW, under the three-phase 200V class 0.75kW, or under the three-phase 400V class
0.4kW, because the cooling fan is not installed.
Code

dC-16

I te mLife assessment monitor

Description

Data

The 7-segment LED on the control panel indicates the status of
the life components.
1: Electrolytic capacitor on the substrate
2: Cooling fan
3: Power modules
4: Inrush current prevention circuitLifeevaluation
Normal
4

10-16
10-16

3

2

1

―

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.3.4 Monitor the operating mode of the inverter
Inverter load type selection status monitor [dC-01]
・Displays the current load specification selection status.
・The load specification of the inverter is changed in "Load specification selection [Ub-03]". For details,
refer to "8.1.2 Changing Inverter Load Specifications".
・The rated current and current derating characteristics vary depending on the selection of the load
specifications. Please also check them.
Code
dC-01

I te mDescription

Inverter load type status

Data

Light Duty rating (LD) selected01

Normal Duty rating (ND) selected

02

Rated currrent monitor [dC-02]
・Displays the rated output current for the currently selected load specification.
・The load specification of the inverter is changed in "Load specification selection [Ub-03]". For details,
refer to "8.1.2 Changing Inverter Load Specifications".
・The rated current and current derating characteristics vary depending on the selection of the load
specifications. Please also check them.
Code

I te mDescription

Data

dC-02

Rated current monitor

Displays the rated output current of the inverter in thecurrently selected load specification.

0.0 to 6553.5 A

IM/SM monitor [dC-45]
・Indicates whether the drive is set to run induction motor (IM) or synchronous (permanent magnet)
motor (SM(PMM).
・The motor to be operated is changed by "Control method [AA121]". For details, refer to "9.5.1 Selecting
Control Mode".
・Correct the motor using an inverter for operation, parameters related to motor specifications must be
set before operation. Refer to "Chapter 8 Mandatory motor drive sets and commissioning".
Code

I te mdC-45

IM/SM monitor

Description

Data

Induction motor (IM) selected

00

Synchronous (permanent magnets) motor (SM(PMM)) being selected

01

Auto-chuning mode monitor [dC-47]
・It is possible to check whether the executed auto-tuning was completed normally or aborted due tosome factor.
・For details on auto-tuning, refer to "8.3 Auto-tuning of Motor".
Code

dC-47

I te mAuto-tuning
mode monitor

Description
Auto-tuning complete:
The previous auto-tuning was successful, or auto-tuning has notbeen executed.
Auto tuning failure:
Last auto-tuning is finished in the middle.

10-17
10-17

Data
01
02

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

Emergency-force drive mode monitor [dC-49]
・You can check whether the forced operation mode or bypass mode is operating.
・For details of the forced operation mode or bypass mode, refer to "9.7.12 Performing forced operation".
Code

I te mdC-49

Emergency-force drivemode monitor

Description

Data

Disabled: Not in forced operation mode and bypass mode.

00

Forced operation: Operation is in progress in forced operation mode.

01

Bypass: Operation in Bypass mode.

02

10-18
10-18

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.3.5 Monitor the frequency command destination and operation command destination
Main speed input source monitor [dC-07]
・The currently enabled main speed command destination can be checked.
・The main speed command destination changes according to the status of the input terminal function andother functions in addition to the setting of "main speed command selection [AA101]". For details, referto "9.2 Selecting Frequency Reference".
Code

I te mDescription

01

Terminal [IRF]02

Keypad (Multi-Speed 0 [Ab110])
Multi-speed 1 to 15 ([Ab-11] to [Ab-25])
dC-07

Main speed input source monitor

Data

Terminal [VRF]07
09 to 23

Jogging [AG-20]

24

RS485 Setting

25

Communication Options

26

Pulse input
PID operation

29
32

Holding frequency by analog command holding function

34

Sub speed input source monitor [dC-08]
・The currently enabled auxiliary speed command destination can be checked.
・The frequency command destination varies depending on the status of the input terminal function andother functions in addition to the setting of "Auxiliary speed command selection [AA102]". For details,
refer to "9.2 Selecting Frequency Reference".
Code

dC-08

I te mSub speed input source monitor

Description

Data

Disable00

Terminal [VRF]01

Terminal [IRF]02

Control panel (Aux. speed setting [AA104])

08

RS485 Setting

25

Communication Options

26

Pulse input

29

PID operation

32

RUN command input source monitor [dC-10]
・The operation command destination currently enabled can be checked.
・Operation the command destination varies depending on the status of the input terminal function andother functions in addition to the setting of "Operation command selection [AA111]". Refer to "9.1
Operation Command Selection and Alarm Reset" for details.
Code

dC-10

I te m

RUN command input source monitor

Description

Data

Terminal [FR]/[RR]00

3 Wire ([STA]/[STP]/[F/R] terminal)

01

Keypad (RUN-key)

02

RS485 Setting

03

Option

04

10-19
10-19

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.3.6 Monitor the dual monitor
Dual monitor [dC-30]
・You can set any two monitor items and switch between monitors by turning JOG dialing left and right.
Set the function code of the monitor target to "2 kinds of monitor target item 1 [UA-96]" and "2 kinds ofmonitor target item 2 [UA-97]".
・Even if "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]" or "Output frequency conversion monitor [dA-06]" is set to "2
types monitor object item 1 [UA-96]" and "2 types monitor object item 2 [UA-97]" and "Monitoring inprogress data change selection [UA-93]" is set to "Enabled (01)", the frequency cannot be changed from[dC-30].
Code

I te mdC-30

Dual monitor
Dual monitor
parameter 1
Dual monitor
target 2 selection

UA-96
UA-97

Description[UA-96], Monitor the two items set in [UA-97].
Except [dC-30], you can set the parameters of thefunction grouping dA/db/dC/FA.

Data

InitialSetting--

dA-**, db-**, dC-**, FA-**(excluding dC-30)

dA-01
dA-02

SET

D 0 -3 0
SET

SET50.. 00

Monitor item 1 set in [UA-96].

12. 3

Monitor item 2 set in [UA-97].

Esc

Esc

10.3.7 Monitor the warning of the inverter
Icon 2 LIM detailed monitor [dC-37]
・Displays the currently operating motor drive limit function.
・For details of each restricted function, refer to the items of each function in this manual.
Code

dC-37

I te mDescription

Data

Detailed Icon 2
LIM Monitor

This is not a motor drive limit state.
The overcurrent suppression function is operating.
The overload restriction function is operating.
The overvoltage suppression function is operating.
The torque limit function is operating.
The upper/lower limit function and frequency jump function are operating.
The output frequency is set to less than the minimum frequency.

00
01
02
03
04
05
06

10-20
10-20

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

Icon 2 ALT detailed monitor [dC-38]
・Displays the advance notice function that is currently operating.
・For details of each notice function, refer to the items of each function in this manual.
Code

dC-38

I te mDetailed Icon 2
ALT Monitor

Description

Data

This is not the operation status of the advance notice function.
An overload warning is output.
Motor thermal warning is output.
Controller thermal warning is output.
Motor overheat warning is output.

00
01
02
03
04

Icon 2 RETRY detailed monitor [dC-39]
・Displays the current retry/restart status.
・For details of the retry function, see "9.7 Changing the Start and Stop Method" and "9.9 Using the Triple
less Function".
Code
dC-39

I te mDetailed Icon 2
RETRY Monitor

Description

Data

No retry or restart is in progress.

00

Retry operation is waiting.

01

Waiting for a restart operation.

02

Icon 2 NRDY detailed monitor [dC-40]
・If the inverter cannot be operated, the cause is displayed.
・When "Icon 2 NRDY detailed monitor [dC-40]" displays "Ready status (00)", at the same time "Operation
ready [IRDY]" is ON.
・To start operation, the displayed abnormal condition must be cleared. If multiple sources are occurringat the same time, the smaller number is displayed first.
e.g.: When the "Free run stop [MBS]" input terminal is turned ON during trip.
= "Trip (01)" is displayed in [dC-40].
When the trip state is released, "Free run (08)" is displayed.
Code

dC-40

I te mDetailed Icon 2
NRDY Monitor

Description
Operation preparation is complete.
The "Operation ready [IRDY]" signal is ON.
A trip has occurred.
Power is lost or under-voltage.
It is in the reset state or the reset release wait state.
STO is enabled.
Waiting until the internal processing of the inverter is completed.
There is an inconsistency in the set data. (Warning)Abnormalities exist in sequence operation.
Free Run Stop is valid.
Operation is prohibited by the "Operation permission signal [REN]".

10-21
10-21

Data
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.4 Monitor the PID control
PID rerated monitor [db-30] to [db-64]
・The following PID related data can be monitored. For details, refer to "9.8 Driving by PID Process
Control".
Code

I te mdb-30

PID1 feedback value 1
monitor

db-32

PID1 feedback value 2
monitor

db-34

PID1 feedback value 3
monitor

db-36

PID2 feedback value
monitor

db-42

PID1 set-point monitor(after calculation)

db-44

PID1 feedback value
monitor(after calculation)

db-50

PID1 output monitor

db-51

PID1 deviation monitor

db-52

PID1 deviation 1 monitor

db-53

PID1 deviation 2 monitor

db-54

PID1 deviation 3 monitor

db-55
db-56
db-61
db-62
db-63
db-64

PID2 output monitor
PID2 deviation monitor
Current PID P-Gain monitor
Current PID I-Gain monitor
Current PID D-Gain monitor
PID feedforward monitor

Description

Data

Displays the feedback data 1/2/3 of PID1.
The data range and unit vary depending on
the parameter setting.

-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:1

Displays the feedback data value of PID2.
The data range and unit vary depending on
the parameter setting.
Displays PID1 target value after the
calculation performed according to thesetting of "PID1 target value operator
selection [AH-50]". The data range and unit
vary depending on the parameter setting.
Displays PID1 feedback data after the
calculation performed according to thesetting of "PID1 feedback data operator
selection [AH-54]". The data range and unit
vary depending on the parameter setting.
Displays PID after the limiter as apercentage of the maximum frequency as
100%.
Displays the final deviations used to control
PID1.
Displays the deviation between the target
setpoint 1 of PID1 and the feedback data1.
Displays the deviation between the target
setpoint 2 of PID1 and the feedback data2.
Displays the deviation between the target
value-3 of PID1 and the feedback data-3.
Displays PID2 output.
Displays the deviations used to control PID2.
Displays the current P gain.
Displays the current I gain.
Displays the current D gain.
Displays the feedforward command value.

Note: 1. "PID1 scale adjustment ([AH-04] to [AH-06])" changes the data-range.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".
2. "PID2 Scale Adjust ([AJ-04] to [AJ-06]) will change the setting.
For more information, please refer to "9.8.5 PID Units Converter Function".

10-22
10-22

-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:2-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:1-100.00 to 100.00 % Note:1-100.00 to 100.00 %-200.00 to 200.00 %-100.00 to 100.00 %-200.00 to 200.00 %0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 3600.0 s
0.00 to 100.00 s
0.00 to 100.00 %Chapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.5 Trip, retry and warning related information
10.5.1 Monitor the number of trips and trip history
Trip counter [dE-01]
・Displays the number of times the inverter has tripped.
・This data is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power is shut off.
Code
dE-01

I te mDescription

Data

Trip counter

Displays the number of times the inverter has tripped.
This data is stored in the internal memory when the power is shut off.

0 to 65535 times

Trip monitor 1 to 10 ([dE-11] to [dE-20])
・The trip history data up to the past 10 times is displayed.
・This data is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power is shut off.
・The latest trip information can be monitored in "Trip monitor 1 [dE-11]".
・For details about what is displayed in "Trip monitor 1 to 10 ([dE-11] to [dE-20])", refer to "15.2
Troubleshooting for Protection Functions Related Error ".
Code

dE-11 todE-20

I te mDescription

Data

Trip monitor 1 to
Trip monitor 10

Displays the following information when the inverter trips.
(1) Trip factor (2) Output frequency (signed) (3) Output current(4) DC bus voltage (5) Inverter state (6) LAD state(7) Inverter control mode (8) Restricted state (=[dC-37])(9) Special state (10) Accumulated RUN time(11) Accumulated power-on time
This data is stored in the internal memory when the power is shut off.

-

Trip monitor 1
When there is no trip history, - - - - -d E -1 1

is displayed.

Esc

SET

E 00 760. 0 0

(1) Trip factor(2) Output
frequency (Hz)18.
(11) Accumulated
power-on time (hr)400. 21-00

2-00(4) DC bus voltage(Vdc)(5) Inverter state(6) LAD state4.
(3) Output
current (A)15.
(10) Accumulated
RUN time (hr)

5-00

4-00

(9) Special state((8) Restricted state(= [dC-37])

10-23
10-23

3-00
(7) INV control
modeChapter 10

Monitor Functions

10.5.2 Monitor the retry history
Retry monitor 1 to 10 ([dE-31] to [dE-40])
・The trip history data up to the past 6 times is displayed.
・This data is stored in the internal memory of the inverter when the power is shut off.
・The latest trip information can be monitored in "Retry monitor 1 [dE-31]".
・ For details about what is displayed in "Retry monitor 1 to 10 ([dE-31] to [dE-40])", refer to "15.2
Troubleshooting for Protection Functions Related Error ".
CodedE-31 todE-40

I te mDescription

Data

Retry monitor 1 to
Retry monitor 10

Displays the following information when the inverter retry.
(1) Retry factor (2) Output frequency (signed) (3) Output current(4) DC bus voltage (5) Inverter state (6) LAD state(7) Inverter control mode (8) Restricted state (=[dC-37])(9) Special state (10) Accumulated RUN time(11) Accumulated power-on time
This data is stored in the internal memory when the power is shut off.

-

Retry monitor 1

dE-31

When there is no retry history,

Esc

SET

r001

60.00

(1) Retry factor(2) Output
frequency (Hz)18.

(3) Output
current (A)(10) Accumulated
RUN time (hr)is displayed.

400.2

1-00

2-00

(4) DC bus voltage(Vdc)(5) Inverter state(6) LAD state

4.0

15.

(11) Accumulated
power-on time (hr)

-----

5-00

4-00

3-00

(9) Special state(8) Restricted state(= [dC-37])(7) INV control
mode

10.5.3 Monitor the warning information
Warning monitor [dE-50]
・A warning is displayed when the set parameter is inconsistent with other settings.
During a warning, "Program LED [PRG]" on the keypad blinks until the data is corrected.
・Refer to "15.3.1 Warning Display" for details of the warning display.
Code
dE-50

I te mWarning monitor

Description

Data

A warning is displayed when the set parameter isinconsistent with other settings.

-

10-24
10-24

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

Chapter 11 Modbus Communication

11

HF-620 supports RTU for Modbus communication mode the physical layer as RS485.
This chapter describes the communication methods that can operate in RS485 communication.
Inter-inverter communication EzCOM function using Modbus protocol can also be used.
Select the communication function that you want to use and configure the settings.
When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters and pay attention to safety.

11.1 Modbu-RTU communication
11.1.1 Communication specifications and setting parameters
・HF-620 is standard-equipped with a RS485 compliant Modbus-RTU port. It can communicate withexternal networked control devices. The basic specifications and setting parameters of communication
are as follows.
・In Modbus communication of HF-620, the data which does not fit in 1 word is set as "2 register lengthparameter", and there is the data which is constrained when accessing. For more information, see theexception code [27h] in "11.2.9 Exception Response".
■Modbus communication protocol
I te mProtocolTransmission speed
Communication method

Specifications
Modbus-RTU (Slaves)
2400/4800/9600/19.2k/38.4k/57.6k/76.8k/115.2 kbps
Half-duplex communications.

Synchronous system

Asynchronous method

Transmission code

BinaryTransmission method

Transmit from low bit (LSB first)
RS485

Data bit length
Parity8 bitsNone/Even/Odd

Stop bit length
Starting method
Wait time

1 bit/2 bits
One-Sided Activation by Host-Side Commands
Silent interval + 0 to 1000 ms

Error checking

Set by parameter-

Compliant interface

Connection type

Remarks

1: N (N=max. 247) (Up to 32 units can be connected without
repeaters (including master))
Overrun/Framing /CRC-16/ Horizontal Parity

Set by parameterSet by parameter-■Parameters related to Modbus communication
Code

Item

AA101

Main speed input source selection

AA111
CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

RUN command input source selection

CF-01
CF-02

Output terminal function
RS485 communication baud rate
selection (baud rate selection)
RS485 communication node address

Description
Set to Modbus communication
Communication disconnection [NDc]:
This signal is turned ON when a communication
error occurs.

Data

Initial
value

08

07

03

02
002
001
017

049

Set the communication transmission speed.

03 to 1005

Assign the inverter station number.

1 to 247

1

11-1
11-1

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

Code

Item

CF-03

RS485 communication
parity selection

CF-04

CF-05

RS485 communication
stop bit selection

RS485 communication
error selection

CF-06

RS485 communication
timeout setting

CF-07

RS485 communication
wait time setting

CF-08

RS485 communication
mode selection

CF-11

Register data AV<=>%
conversion function

CF-12

RS485 endianness
selection

Description

Data

No parity

00

Even parity

01

Odd parity
1 bit

02
01

2 bitsWhen communication error occurs, it trips at "RS485
communication error [E041]".

02

01

Ignore communication errors. No trip occurs.

02

Free-run stop will be performed in case of communication
error. For the trip does not occur.

03

Set the time until the inverter returns.

02

0.00 to100.00 s

2

0 to 1000 ms

5

00

Use inter-inverter communication (EzCOM)

01

Set the response data unit as a percentage of the rated
value.
Big endian

01

04

Use Modbus-RTU
Inter-inverter communication (EzCOM) is used (control
inverter)
Sets the response data unit to A (current) and V (voltage).

00

00

When communication error occurs, after decelerating stop,
trip at "RS485 communication error [E041]".

Decelerates to a stop when communication error occurs.
No trip occurs.
If communication is interrupted and this set time has
elapsed, the motor trips due to "RS485 communication
error [E041]". When 0.00 s, timeout is not judged.

Initial
value

01

02
00
01

00

00

Little Endian

01

Special endian

00
1

CF-20

EzCOM start node No.

02
1 to 8

CF-21

EzCOM end node No.

1 to 8

1

CF-22

EzCOM start method
selection

00, 01

00

CF-23

EzCOM number of data

1 to 5

5
1

CF-24
CF-27
CF-30
CF-33
CF-36

EzCOM destination
address 1 to 5

CF-25
CF-28
CF-31
CF-34
CF-37

EzCOM destination
registers 1 to 5

CF-26
CF-29
CF-32
CF-35
CF-38

EzCOM source
registers 1 to 5

CG-01

2
1 to 247

3
4

Parameters related to inter-inverter communication(EzCOM) function. Refer to "11.4 Inter-inverter
Communication EzCOM Function" for more information.

50000h to
FFFFh

0000h

Register mapping
function selection

00, 0100

CG-11 to
CG-20

External register 1 to
100000h to
FFFFh

0000h

CG-31 toCG-40

External register 1 to
10 format

00, 0100

CG-51 to
CG-60

External register 1 to
10 scaling

0.001 to65.5351.000

CG-71 to
CG-80

Internal register 1 to 10

0000h to
FFFFh

0000h

Parameters related to Modbus mapping function. For more
information, see "About 11.3 Modbus Mapping feature".

11-2
11-2

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.1.2 Communication wiring and connection
・The figure below shows an example of connecting Modbus communication wires. When multiple units
are connected, each inverter is connected in parallel.
・Use a 3-wire shielded cable for connection between the twisted-pair cable for communication andground. Connect the signal ground (SG) of the external controller to the [COM] terminal of the inverter.
・Attach terminating resistors that match the characteristic impedance of the cable to both ends of thecommunication cable. If the last stage is HF-620, turn ON the terminating resistor selector. When
Modbus communication is performed with one inverter, turn ON the terminating resistor selector
switch of that inverter. (The terminating resistor built into HF-620 is 120Ω.)Terminating resistanceselector switchON
PLA RST ES AUT DFM DFL RR

FR COM PCS P24

SP SN ＋V VRF IRF COM AMV AMIDRV UPF

Modbus communication
terminal

External Control
device (Master)
－
＋
Note
SG

OFF
(Initial setting)

ShieldNote

HF-620 (No.1)

SP SN COM

120Ω
Termination

SP SN COM
HF-620 (No.2)

SP SN COM
HF-620 (No.3) ……

SP SN COM
HF-620 (No.n)

Note: Attach a terminating resistor that matches the characteristic
impedance of the cable to both ends of the communication
cable, or use the terminating resistor built into theequipment at the final stage as a ON.

・Communication is possible using only a 2-wire twisted pair cable. However, communication may
become unstable due to noise, which is not recommended.
・The communication cable must be separated from the high-voltage circuit such as the power line andalarm relay wiring and must not be laid in parallel.
・Communication may become unstable depending on the operating environment of the inverter, cables
used for communication lines, and wiring conditions. In such a case, follow the instructions below.
(1) Check that the terminating resistors are connected to both ends of the communication cable or,use a terminating resistor that matches the characteristic impedance of the cable.
(2) Check the connection between the signal ground (SG) of the external control device (master) andthe [COM] terminal of the inverters.
(3) Normally, wire shields should be grounded at a single point SG the external controller or, change
the grounding method of the wiring shield while checking whether communication is stable. (Forexample, grounding to the [L] terminal of any inverter, wiring shield grounding, etc.)(4) If the communication range is long (more than 100m), lower the transfer rate or insert a repeater.

11-3
11-3

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.1.3 Communication procedure
Communication procedure・Modbus-RTU communication between the external controller and the inverter is performed as follows.

External control
device(1) Query(1) Query

Time

Inverter(3) Response(4) RS485 communication timeout(2) Wait time
setting [CF-06]
Silent interval (3.5 characters) + "Communication wait time [CF-07]"(Modbus-RTU: 1 character =11bit)(1) A query message is sent from the external control device to the inverter.
(2) The inverter waits for the silent interval time and the setting time of "communication wait time [CF07]" after receiving a query message.
(The silent interval is 3.5 characters long as the wait time determined in Modbus-RTU
communication. For Modbus-RTU communication, 1 character is 11bit.)(3) The response message is returned from the inverter to the external control device.
(4) After sending the response message, the inverter waits for the completion of receiving the following
query message during the time set in "Communication timeout time [CF-06]". (If [CF-06] is 0.00
seconds, timeout judgment is not performed.) When a query message is received, the inverter
performs processing according to the message, and then the operation shown in (2) is performed.
When timeout occurs, the inverter will wait for the reception of a query message and will operateaccording to the setting of "Communication error selection [CF-05]".
・Monitoring of communication time-out starts after the first transmission/reception is established after
power-on or reset. If transmission/reception has never been established, a communication timeout
does not occur.

11-4
11-4

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.1.4 Message configuration
・A command message sent from the master to the slave is called a query, and a response message fromthe slave is called a response. The following shows the transmission format for queries and responses.
Query

Response

Slave address
Function code
Query data
Error checking (CRC-16)

Slave address for checking
Function code for checking
Response data
Error checking (CRC-16)(1) Slave address (ommunication station number）
・The slave address is a number in the range of 1 to 247 that is set in advance for each inverter (slave).
(Only the inverter matching the slave address of the query will fetch the query.)・If "0" is specified for the slave address of the transmission destination on the master side,broadcasting (simultaneous broadcasting) to all stations can be performed. In the case of broadcast,
all slaves receive data but do not return a response.
・Data cannot be read or looped back during a broadcast.
・In Modbus spec, the slave address is 1 to 247. However, if the slave address 250 to 254 is used in
the master, broadcasting can be performed only for a particular slave address. (The slave does not
return a response. The broadcast is valid only for the write command (05h, 06h, 0Fh, 10h).)
Slave address

Destination

250 (FAh)
251 (FBh)
252 (FCh)
253 (FDh)254 (FEh)Broadcast to slave addresses 01 to 09
General broadcast to slave addresses 10 to 19
Broadcast to slave addresses 20 to 29
Broadcast to slave addresses 30 to 39
Simultaneous broadcast to slave addresses 40 to 247(2) Function code
・Specifies the function to be executed by the inverter in function code.
・The corresponding function code is shown below.
Function
code
01h
03h
05h
06h
08h
0Fh
10h
17h

Function
Read coil status
Read multiple registers
Write to coil
Writing to holding registers
Loop-back Test
Writing to multiple coils
Write multiple registers
Read/write to multiple
holding registers

Can be handled by one message
Maximum number of data bytes
4
32
2
2
4
32
32/32

Can be handled by one message
Maximum number of data items
32 Coils (in bits)
16 registers (in byte)
1 Coil (in bits)
1 register (in byte)
32 Coils (in bits)
16 registers (in byte)
16/16 Registers (in byte)(3) Data
・Sends data related to function codes.
・The data transmission format varies depending on the function code.
・The following data formats are supported among the data used for Modbus communication.
Data name

Description

Coil
Holding register

2-value data that can be read/written (1-bit length)16-bit data that can be read/written

・In Modbus communication of HF-620, there is a restriction on writing to "2 register lengthparameter". For more information, see the exception code [27h] in "11.2.9 Exception Response".

11-5
11-5

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication(4) Error checking
・Modbus-RTU error checking uses CRC(Cyclic Redundancy Check).
・Generation polynomials of CRC-16 (X16+X15+X2 + 1) are used to generate CRC.
・A CRC is a 16bit of data generated for a block of any length of data in 8bit.
＜CRC-16 calcuration procedure＞*1. CRC formats
CRC-16 Operation

Hi

Low

CRC register (2-byte)
CRC*1=FFFFh

Yes
CRC*1= CRC*1 XOR target data

Object data

Target data
Exit

Exit

8bit shifting

With remaining bit
As Hi byte of CRC*1
Swap Low bytes

CRC*1= CRC*1 shifted 1 bit to the right0
Bit flooded with shifting

1
Exit

CRC*1= CRC*1 XOR A001h
Shifting by 1 byte for the target(5) Communication time・The response of the inverter after the inverter receives a query is as follows: Silent interval (3.5characters) + "Communication wait time [CF-07]" + "Processing time (several ms) for response
messaging etc.
・Always allow an interval of at least the silent interval (3.5 characters or more) between the receptionof a response from the inverter and the transmission of the next query by the external control device.
(6) Normal response
・Responses are returned in the format-for-query format description in 11.2 Modbus-RTU Function
Codes.

11-6
11-6

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication(7) Abnormal response
・If there is a fault (except communication error) in the content of the query, the inverter returns an
exception response without performing anything.
・Check the function code of the response for error judgment. The function code of the exception
response is 80h added to the function code of the query.
For details on the error details, see "11.2.9 Exception response".
Configuring Exception Response Fields
Slave address
Function code
Excepton code
CRC-16(8) No response
・The inverter ignores the query and does not return a response in the following cases:- When a broadcast (a query with a slave address of "0") is received.
- When a communication error is detected in the query reception processing.
- When the slave address of the query and the inverter setting slave address do not match.
- When the time interval between the data comprising the message and the data is 3.5 characters or
less.
- When the data length of a query is invalid.
- When the reception interval exceeds 1.5 characters in a frame.
- When the error check code of the query does not match (CRC error).
- When a group-based broadcast (a query with a slave address in the range of 250 to 254) isreceived.
・In the external control device, provide a timer to monitor response messages from the inverter, andprovide retransmission processing or abnormality processing such as sending the same query again if
there is no response message reply within a specific time.

11-7
11-7

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2 Modbus-RTU function codes
11.2.1 Read status of coil [01h]・Reads the status of the coil. (ON/OFF)・The following shows an example when reading the status of the input terminals [FR] to [PLA] of theinverter for slave address 1. The status of input terminals [FR] through [PLA] are as follows.
Input terminal
Coil No.
Coil status

FR
0005h
ON

RR
0006h
OFF

DFL
0007h
ON

DFM
0008h
OFF

AUT
0009h
OFF

ES
000Ah
OFF

RST
000Bh
ON

PLA
000Ch
OFF

Query
No.

Field Namee.g. HEX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Slave address Note:1
Function code
Coil-starting number (upper) Note:2
Coil-starting number (lower) Note:2
Coils (high) Note:3
Number of coils (low) Note:3
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)

01
01
00
04
00
08
7C
0D

Coil start number = Coil number-1

Response

Input terminal [RST]No.

Field Name

1
2
3
4
5
6

Slave address
Function code
Number of data bytes
Read Coil Data Note:4
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)e.g. HEX

Input terminal [DFL]

01
01
01
45
90
7B

Input terminal [FR]45h＝0100 0101

Note: 1. Broadcast is not possible.
2. Note that the start number has a value of 1 less. (Start Number)-Specifies the value of 1.
3. When the number of read-out coils exceeds 0 or 32, the exception response of the exception
code [03h] is returned.
4. Data of the number of data bytes is transferred.

・The coil data of the response is the status of the coil number 0005h to 000Ch with the coil 0005h as
LSB(0 bit. If the coil data is not 1byte(8 bit) units, the upper bit is extended by zeros to 1byte(8 bit) units.
Coil No.
Coil status
45h

Bit 7
000Ch
OFF
0

Bit 6
000Bh
ON
1

Bit 5
000Ah
OFF
0

Bit 4
0009h
OFF
0

Bit 3
0008h
OFF
0

Bit 2
0007h
ON
1

Bit 1
0006h
OFF
0

Bit 0
0005h
ON
1

・When reading the status of 16 consecutive coils from the coil number 0001h, the order of datum is asfollows. Byte data in which data 1 is sent first.
Data 1
Data 2

Bit 7
0008h
0010h

Bit 6
0007h
000Fh

Bit 5
0006h
000Eh

Bit 4
0005h
000Dh

Bit 3
0004h
000Ch

Bit 2
0003h
000Bh

Bit 1
0002h
000Ah

Bit 0
0001h
0009h

・When the read coil extends outside the range of the defined coil number, the coil data outside therange is sent as "0".
・If the command cannot be executed successfully, an exception response is returned. For details, seesection 11.2.9, Exception Responses.
・Reading 0000h to 004Fh of the coil number can also be substituted by reading the holding register ofthe register number 3EBCh to 3EC0h. The following shows the bit-structure of a holding register
3EBCh. Refer to the "18.1.1 Modbus Coil Number List" for more information.

11-8
11-8

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication■(Example) Holding register 3EBCh bit-structure(Holding register assignment status of coil number 0000h to 000Fh)bit

I te m

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8

Input terminal PLA
Input terminal RST
Input terminal ES
Input terminal AUT
Input terminal DFM

bit

I te m

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Input terminal DFL
Input terminal RR
Input terminal FR
Trip reset [RST]External trip [ES]Emergency direction command
Operation command-

11.2.2 Read holding register [03h]・Reads the specified number of consecutive holding registers from the specified holding register
number.
・The following shows an example of reading the source and output frequency (Holding register number=03E9h to 03EBh) of the latest trip information from the inverter of slave address 5.
Query
No.

Field Namee.g. HEX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Slave address Note:1
Function code
Register start number (upper) Note:2
Register starting number (lower) Note:2
Number of holding registers (upper) Note:3
Number of holding registers (lower) Note:3
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)

05
03
03
E8
00
03
84
3F

Register start number = Register number-1
3 registers

Response
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
16
17

Field Name
Slave address
Function code
Number of data bytes Note:4
Read register data 1 (upper)
Read register data 1 (lower)
Read register data 2 (upper)
Read register data 2 (lower)
Read register data 3 (upper)
Read register data 3 (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)e.g. HEX
05
03
06
00
07
00
00
17
70
A8
61

0007h→07d→E07（factor: overvoltage [E07]）
0000 1770h→6000d→60.0Hz(frequency)
H: hexadecimald: decimal

Note: 1. Broadcast is not possible.
2. Note that the start number has a value of 1 less. (Start Number)-Specifies the value of 1.
3. Up to 16 registers (32 byte) can be read. Otherwise, an exception response with exception code [03h]is returned.
4. Data of the number of data bytes is transferred. In this example, there are 6 bytes for the three holding
registers.

・If the command cannot be executed successfully, an exception response is returned.
For details, see section 11.2.9, Exception Responses.

11-9
11-9

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.3 Write to coil [05h]・Write to one coil. The following table shows the coil status changes

Data

OFF to ON coiling

ON to OFF coiling

Change data (high)

FFh

00h

Change data (lower)

00h

00h

・The following shows an example of issuing an operation command to the inverter of the slave address
10.
・In order to operate by a command from Modbus communication, "Operation command selection[AA111]" must be set to "Modbus communication (03)" in advance. Coil No. of operation command is0001h.
QueryNo.

Field Namee.g. HEX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Note:1

0A
05
00
00
FF
00
8D
41

Slave address
Function code
Coil address (upper) Note:2
Coil address (lower) Note:2
Change data (high)Change data (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)Coil start number = Coil number-1
OFF to ON: FF00h

Response
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Field Name
Slave address Note:1
Function code
Coil address (upper) Note:2
Coil address (lower) Note:2
Change data (high)Change data (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)e.g. HEX
0A
05
00
00
FF
00
8D
41

Note: 1. For broadcast, there is no response.
2. Note that the start number has a value of 1 less. (Start Number)-Specifies the value of 1.

・If the command cannot be executed successfully, an exception response is returned. For details, seesection 11.2.9, Exception Responses.

11-10
11-10

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.4 Write to holding register [06h]・Writes data to one specified holding register.
・The following shows an example of writing 50.00Hz to "Multi-speed 0 speed [Ab110]" of the inverter ofslave address 1.
・Since the data resolution is 0.01Hz for the holding register "2F4Eh" of [Ab110], the write data will be"5000(1388h" to set 50.00Hz.
Query
No.

Field Namee.g. HEX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Note:1

01
06
2F
4D
13
88
1C
5F

Slave address
Function code
Register address (upper) Note:2
Register address (lower) Note:2
Change data (high)Change data (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)Register start number = Register number-1
1388h＝5000d → 50.00 (Hz)Response
No.

Field Namee.g. HEX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Note:1

01
06
2F
4D
13
88
1C
5F

Slave address
Function code
Register address (upper) Note:2
Register address (lower) Note:2
Change data (high)Change data (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)Note: 1. For broadcast, there is no response.
2. Note that the start number has a value of 1 less. (Start Number)-Specifies the value of 1.

・「Acceleration time 1[AC120] Some parameters, such as "2-register length parameter", consist of two
holding register numbers (upper and lower). If the setting value falls within the range of the lower
register, writing only one register does not matter. If the setting value does not fall within the lower
register range, write two registers at the same time with the write command [10h] of multiple holding
registers. For more information on 2-register length parameter, see Exception code [27h] in "11.2.9
Exception response".
・If the command cannot be executed successfully, an exception response is returned. For details, seesection 11.2.9, Exception Responses.

11-11
11-11

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.5 Loop-back test [08h]・Used to check communication between master and slave. Any value can be used for test data.
・An example of a loopback test to the inverter at slave address 1 is shown below.
Query
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Field Name
Slave address Note
Function code
Test subcode (upper)
Test subcode (lower)
Data (high)Data (Lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)e.g. HEX
01
08
00
00
Optional
Optional
CRC
CRC

Response
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Field Name
Slave address Note
Function code
Test subcode (upper)
Test subcode (lower)
Data (high)Data (Lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)e.g. HEX
01
08
00
00
Optional
Optional
CRC
CRC

Note: Broadcast is not possible.

・The test subcode supports only echoing (00h, 00h) query data. Other commands are not supported.

11-12
11-12

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.6 Write to multiple coil [0Fh]・Rewrite multiple consecutive coils.
・An example of changing the state of the input terminals [FR] through [PLA] of the inverter at slave
address 1 is shown below. The status of input terminals [FR] through [PLA] are as follows.
Input terminal
Coil No.
Pin status

FR
0005h
ON

RR
0006h
ON

DFL
0007h
ON

DFM
0008h
OFF

AUT
0009h
ON

ES
000Ah
OFF

RST
000Bh
OFF

PLA
000Ch
OFF

Query
No.

Field Namee.g. HEX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Slave address Note:1
Function code
Coil-starting number (upper) Note:2
Coil-starting number (lower) Note:2
Coils (high) Note:3
Number of coils (low) Note:3
Number of data bytes Note:3
Written data (upper) Note:4
Written data (lower) Note:4
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)

01
0F
00
04
00
08
02
17
00
EA
F4

No.

Field Namee.g. HEX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Slave address Note:1
Function code
Coil-starting number (upper) Note:2
Coil-starting number (lower) Note:2
Number of coils (high)Number of coils (Lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)

01
0F
00
06
00
07
F4
08

Coil start number = Coil number-1

17h＝0001 0111
Input terminal[PLA]

Input terminal[FR]

Response

Note: 1. For broadcast, there is no response.
2. Note that the start number has a value of 1 less. (Start Number)-Specifies the value of 1.
3. The "number of data bytes" is not the number of cores, but the actual number of bytes to be written.
The maximum number of data that can be written is 32 coils (4 byte).
Otherwise, an exception response with exception code [03h] is returned.
4. Write data is set in the upper and lower bits, so even if the number of bytes that actually need to
be changed is odd, add one byte of zero data to make it even.

・Input terminal function is internally processed by "OR" of terminal block input and communication
input. However, "Input terminal monitor [dA-51]" only displays the data of the control terminal block.
・If the command cannot be executed successfully, an exception response is returned. For details, seesection 11.2.9, Exception Responses.

11-13
11-13

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.7 Write multiple registers [10 h]・Writes data to multiple consecutive holding registers.
・The following shows an example of writing 10.00 seconds to "Acceleration time setting (monitor) [FA10]" of the inverter of slave address 1.
・Since the data resolution of the holding register "2B02h, 2B03h" of [FA-10] is 0.01 seconds, write data
is set to "1000 (0000 03E8h" to set 10 seconds.
Query
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Field Name
Note:1

Slave address
Function code
Register start number (upper) Note:2
Register starting number (lower) Note:2
Number of Registers (Upper) Note:3
Number of Registers (Lower) Note:3
Number of data bytes Note:3
Change data 1 (upper)
Change data 1 (lower)
Change data 2 (upper)
Change data 2 (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)e.g. HEX
01
10
2B
01
00
02
04
00
00
03
E8
D8
2C

Register start number = Register number-1

0000 03E8h → 1000d → 10.00 (seconds)

Response
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Field Name
Note:1

Slave address
Function code
Register start number (upper) Note:2
Register starting number (lower) Note:2
Number of registers (upper)
Number of Registers (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)e.g. HEX
01
10
2B
01
00
02
19
EC

Note: 1. For broadcast, there is no response.
2. Note that the start number has a value of 1 less. (Start Number)-Specifies the value of 1.
3. The "number of data bytes" is not the number of holding registers but the actual number of bytes tobe written. The largest number of data that can be written is 16 registers (32 byte). Otherwise, an
exception response with exception code [03h] is returned.

・If the command cannot be executed successfully, an exception response is returned.
For details, see section 11.2.9, Exception Responses.
・In Modbus communication of HF-620, there is a restriction on writing to "2 register length parameter".
・For more information, see the exception code [27h] in "11.2.9 Exception Response".

11-14
11-14

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.8 Writing to and reading from multiple holding registers [17h]・In successionWrites to and reads from multiple holding registers continuously.
・The following shows an example of reading "Output frequency monitor [dA-01]" by writing 50.00Hz in"Main speed command setting (monitor) [FA-01]" of the inverter of slave address 1.
Query
No.

Field Namee.g. HEX

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Slave address
Function code
Read register start number (upper) Note:1
Read register start number (lower) Note:1
Number of read registers (upper) Note:2
Number of read registers (lower) Note:2
Write register start number (upper) Note:1
Write register start number (lower) Note:1
Write register count (upper) Note:2
Write register count (lower) Note:2
Number of write data bytes
Write data 1 (upper)
Write data 1 (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)

01
17
27
10
00
01
2A
FB
00
01
02
13
88
77
A3

Register start number = Register number-1

Register start number = Register number-1

1388h = 5000d → 50.00Hz

Response
No.

Field Name

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Slave address
Function code
Read data-byte count Note:2
Read data 1 (upper)
Read data 1 (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)e.g. HEX
01
17
04
13
88
50
E3

1388h = 5000d → 50.00Hz

Note: 1. Note that the start number has a value of 1 less. (Start Number)-Specifies the value of 1.
2. The "number of data bytes" is not the number of holding registers but the actual number of bytes tobe written/read. The largest number of data items that can be written/read is 16 registers (32 byte).
Otherwise, an exception response with exception code [03h] is returned.

・If the command cannot be executed successfully, an exception response is returned. For details, seesection 11.2.9, Exception Responses.
・In Modbus communication of HF-620, there is a restriction on writing to "2 register length parameter".
For more information, see the exception code [27h] in "11.2.9 Exception Response".

11-15
11-15

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.9 Exception response
・If an error occurs in the query, an exception response is returned.
・For non-broadcast queries, the master is requesting a response. The inverter must return a response
corresponding to the query, but if an error occurs in the query, it returns an exception response.
・Exception responses are organized in the fields shown in the table below.
Field Configuration
Slave Address
Function Code
Exception CodeCRC-16

・The details of the field configuration are shown in the table below. The function code is 80h added tothe query in response to an exception. The exception code indicates the cause of the exception
response.
Function Code
Query

Exception Response

01h
03h
05h
06h
0Fh
10h
17h

81h
83h
85h
86h
8Fh
90h
97h

■ Exception code details
Cord

Description

01h

An unsupported function was specified.

02h

The specified address does not exist.

03h

The specified data is in an unacceptable format.

21h

Data is out of the setting range when writing to the holding register.

23h

The inverter is not permitting the function.
・An attempt was made to change the holding register for which change during operation isprohibited.
・Writing is performed to the holding register that is soft-locked.
・An attempt was made to change an input/output pin function that cannot be changed.
・An attempt was made to change a/b contact of the pin assigned the "Reset[RS]" input terminal
function.
・An attempt was made to write to a register when auto-tuning was enabled.
・Attempted to write to the locked register while setting the password. Other
A read-only holding register coil was written.

26h

Writing is performed during data writing or during data initialization.

27h

Only the upper-side register of "2-register length parameter" was accessed.
In Modbus communication of HF-620, large data which does not fit in 1 word is set as "2 register
length parameter", and there is a holding register which is constrained when accessing. For the target
register of "2 register length parameter", see "18.2 Parameter /Modbus holding register".
(Ex.) "Acceleration time setting (monitor)[FA-10]" is "2 register length parameter" of register number
2B02h, 2B03h. Only 2B03h of the lower word can be read/written to this register but
reading/writing only 2B02h of the upper word will fail.

22h

31h
32h

Error related to Modbus mapping function.
For more information, see "About 11.3 Modbus Mapping feature".

11-16
11-16

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.10 Store the changes to the holding register
・When the write command (06h, 10h, 17h) to the holding register is executed, the written value
becomes valid, but it is not memorized in the non-volatile memory inside the inverter, and the changed
content disappears due to the power-off. To store the changes to the holding register in the nonvolatile memory, execute the "Enter command" below or execute the "1-register write mode
instruction".
・When changing motor control related parameters such as motor constants shown below, it is also
necessary to execute enter command or motor constant recalculation command. If these instructions
are not executed, the recalculate of the internal control variables by changing parameters will not be
performed, so the motor operating characteristics will not change.
■List of parameters requiring internal control variable recalculate
Code

I te m

Code

AA121

Control mode selection
Async. Motor speed
response
IM Motor Capacity SelectIM motor pole selection
IM Base frequency

Hb105

IM Maximum frequency

Hb106

IM motor rated voltage

HA115
Hb102
Hb103
Hb104

I te m

Hb108
Hb162
Hb110 to Hb118

IM Motor Rated Current
Free-V/f frequency 7
Various IM motor parameters

Storage of changed data in the non-volatile memory by the enter command・Execute the enter command when the changed data is stored collectively in the non-volatile memory,or when recalculation of the internal control variable by changing the motor constant, etc.
・All parameters are stored in the non-volatile memory by writing (0001h) to the holding register "Enter
instruction (Data Flash write) [2328h]" using the holding register write command [06h], etc.
・The completion of the enter command should be judged by monitoring the "data writing in progresssignal [0049h]".
Holding register

Write command

R/ W

Operation details

2328hEnter instruction (Data Flash write)W

01: Write all parameters■Enter instruction

External control device
Parameter change
Parameter change

InverterWrite to RAM
Write to RAM

Parameter change
Write to RAM
Enter instruction
2328h＝1

Write all data to non-volatile memory

11-17
11-17

Resolution
1Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

1 Storage of changed data in non-volatile memory by register write mode command・Writing (0001h) to the "1 register write mode command [232Ah]" sets the data write mode.
・The data changed by the write to holding register command [06h] after the data write mode is shifted
writes the data to both the memory for temporary save (RAM) and the non-volatile memory.
・The data write mode is released when a command other than the write command [06h] to the holding
register is received after the data write mode is shifted.
・Determine the completion of the single write-mode command by monitoring the "data-writing inprogress signal (coil-number 0049h)".
Holding register
232Ah

Write command

R/ W

1 register write modeW

Operation details
01: Enable

Resolution
1■Write once mode command
External control device

Inverter1 register write
mode enabled
2032h=1
Parameter change

Writing to RAM and non-volatilememories (only change data)

Parameter change
Write to RAM

Note: Write mode is valid only once parameter change.
If a command other than the hold register write command [06h] is issued, the write
mode becomes invalid.

Changing the internal control constant by the motor constant recalculation command・By writing (0001h) in the holding register "Motor constant recalculation command [2332h]" using thewrite command to the holding register [06h], etc., the recalculation of the internal control constants
may be performed and the motor operating characteristics may be changed.
Holding register

Write command

R/ W

2332h

Motor constants recalculate(No Motor Constant Standard Data Expansion)

W

CautionFailureOperation details
01: Enable

Resolution
1

・Do not turn off the inverter during writing to the non-volatile memory by the "enter command" and the"single write mode command". Data will not be stored correctly if the power is turned off. Whether or
not data is being written should be judged by monitoring "data writing in progress signal (coil-number
0049h)".

Prohibited ・Since the storage element of the inverter has a limit on the number of rewrites, the life of the inverterDO

may be shortened if the above-mentioned writing command is used abundantly. Write commands
should be minimized. In particular, please be careful not to execute this command periodically andcontinuously due to loop processing of external control equipment, etc.

11-18
11-18

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.2.11 Holding register endian selection
・The endian of communication is the byte data sequence of communication 1-word data to betransmitted and received. In HF-620, the endianness can be set for the data part of thetransmit/receive frame.
・Depending on the specifications of the external control device, it may be necessary to swap the upperand lower bytes of word data when reading/writing holding registers. Changing the Endian selection
may eliminate the need for these processes. Refer to the operation manual of the external control
device for details.
・Endian selection is valid only for holding register read/write function codes ([03h], [06h], [10h], [17h])and option commands for optional communication ([03h], [06h], [10h], [51h], [52h], and [53h]). In
addition, only the data part of the query/response is affected.
・When using the PC software「SAFS001」, select "Big Endian (00)" (default). Other settings will not work
properly.
・Endian selection does not function in trip history monitor (register number 03E9h to 04AEh), and it isread as big endian. When using the trip history monitor, set [CF-12] to "Big Endian". When "Little
Endian" or "Special Endian" is selected, perform data sorting properly when reading data with an
external control device, etc.
Code

I te m

CF-12

RS485 endianness
selection

Description
The order of byte data in the data section is big endian.
Byte data in the data section is lined up with little endian.
The order of byte data in the data part is special endian.

Data

Initial
value

00
01
02

00

Order of byte data for each endian setting
・The following shows the data order for Modbus (I/O) communication with 1-word data =0102h and 2word data =0102 0304h.
■For 1-register length parameter
Byte order of transmission
and reception

Big endian

Little endianSpecial endian

1
2

01
02

02
01

01
02

Byte order of transmission
and reception

Big endian

Little endianSpecial endian

1
2
3
4

01
02
03
04

04
03
02
01

03
04
01
02

■For 2-register length parameter

11-19
11-19

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

For each endian selection Example of Holding Registry Write Query/Response
・Endian Selection When Big Endian, Little Endian, or Special Endian is set, the first deceleration time
[F003]"= 3000 sec] in "2 Register Length Parameter" and the "RUN Key Operation Direction Selection[F004]"= 01 (Forward)" in "1 Register Length Data" are written in [10h]. The following are examples ofqueries.

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Query
Field Name
Slave address
Function code
Register start number(upper)Register start number(lower)Number of registers(upper)Number of Registers(lower)In bytes
Write data 1 (upper)
Write data 1 (lower)
Write data 2 (upper)
Write data 2 (lower)
Write data 3 (upper)
Write data 3 (lower)
CRC-16 (high)
CRC-16 (low)Big

EndianLittleSpecial

01
10

01
10

01
10

11

11

11

04

04

04

00

00

00

03

03

03

06
00
04
93
E0
00
01
EB
DB

06
E0
93
04
00
01
00
65
B4

06
93
E0
00
04
00
01
EB
DD

11-20
11-20

[F003] is "2 register length parameter" and theresolution is 0.01 seconds. Therefore, write-data
is 3000.00 seconds =300000d=000493E0h.
[F004] = 0001h writing when in forward direction

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.3 Modbus mapping function
11.3.1 Set Modbus mapping function
・With Modbus mapping function, register numbers, data types, and data scales specified bycommunication commands from external control devices can be converted to any register numbers anddata scales in HF-620 inverters. This enables replacement of the inverter without changing thecommunication program on the external control device side.
・The register number and data of up to 10 registers can be converted.
・If the external register number is already used as the internal register number of the inverter, Modbus
mapping setting takes precedence. When accessing the internal registers of the disabled drive, perform
Modbus mapping settings separately to indirectly access the registers.
Code

I te mCG-01

Register mapping
function selection

CG-11 to External registerCG-20 1 to 10

Description

Data

Register mapping function disable

00

Enable Modbus Register map function enables

01

Set the register number used in the communication
program of the external control device, etc.
0000h is judged as not being set.

0000h to
FFFFh

Initial
value
00

0000h

The data type of the external register is unsigned word data.

00

The data type of the external register is signed word data.

01

CG-51 to External registerCG-60 1 to 10 scaling

Data specified from the external control device x
this setting value = Inverter internal data.
Writing: External data × Write this setting to the internalregister
Read: Internal data/Read this setting as external data

0.001 to65.5351.000

CG-71 to Internal registerCG-80 1 to 10

Set Modbus register number of the inverter.
0000h is judged as not being set.

0000h to
FFFFh

0000h

CG-31 to External registerCG-40 format 1 to 10

11-21
11-21

00

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

Setting up Modbus mapping(1) Set the register number of the external control device in "External register 1 to 10 ([CG-11] to [CG20])". If "0000" is set, no processing is performed.
(2) Set the data type of the external control device in "External register format 1 to 10 ([CG-31] to [CG40]."(3) In "Scaling 1 to 10 ([CG-51] to [CG-60]), set the magnification when receiving from an external control
device and loading it into the inverter. Conversely, it is divided when reading internal data.
(4) Set Modbus register number in the inverter to be actually accessed in "Internal Registers 1 to 10 ([CG71] to [CG-80])".
Note: Refer to "18.2 List of Parameter /Modbus Holding Registers" for Modbus register number of theinverter.
(5) Set "Communication endianness selection [CF-12]" as required. For details, see section 11.2.11,
Endian Selection of Holding Register.
(6) Set "Register Mapping Function Select [CG-01]" to "Enable (01)". When the parameters related toModbus mapping function have been set or changed, be sure to turn the power OFF and then ON
again. If the power is not turned on again, the settings and changes made by Modbus mapping
function will not be reflected.

Inside of the inverter
Modbus Mapping
External Register
Setting
External control device
Address
Command
Data

4005h
10h
(Holding register write)
1000

4001h
4002h
4003h
4004h
4005h
4006h

Data Type
Conversion
Scaletransformation

Register
No.
2F4Fh
2F50h
2F51h
2F52h
2F53h
2F54h

Data
2000d
-

Mapping 1setting example
Code

I te mCG-11

External register

CG-31
CG-51
CG-71

External register format
Scaling
Internal register 1

Setting example
4005h
00(unsigned word)
2.00
2F4Fh

Note: An external register 4005h is mapped to an inverter-internal register 2F4Fh and an external data 1000d is
written.
The data type of the external data is regarded as unsigned, and 2000d obtained by multiplying the scale by
2.00 is written to the internal register. (In the case of data reading, internal data is returned to the external
control device at 1/2.)

11-22
11-22

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

Handling Modbus mapping function errors
・If there is an error in Modbus mapping setting, the exception response of the exception code below isreturned. If an exception response occurs, review the external or internal register settings.
Code

Description
・When the external register is set but the internal register setting is not set to "0000".
・A holding register number that does not exist in the internal address is set.
・The external register settings are duplicated.

31h

・As shown in the figure below, if the register number already used in the inverter is set as an externalregister, the same register number used in the inverter cannot be accessed.
Example: When 2EEFh is set to an external register, the "1st stop method selection [AA115]" whose
internal register number is 2EEFh from another external register (3000h in the following
table) cannot be accessed.
External register setting
CG-11 to CG-20

Internal register setting
CG-71 to CG-80

Internal
registernumber

-

-

2EEBh

AA111

2EEFh

2EECh

2EECh

AA-12

-

-

2EEDh

AA-13

-

-

2EEEh

AA114

3000h

2EEFh

2EEFh

AA115

-

-

2EF5h

AA121

11-23
11-23

Parameter
RUN command input
source selection, 1st-motor
RUN-key command rotation
direction
STOP-key enable
RUN direction restriction
selection, 1st-motor
STOP mode selection
1st-motor
Control mode selection
1st-motor

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.4 Inter-inverter communication EzCOM function
11.4.1 EzCOM
・Inter-inverter communication function EzCOM is a function that uses Modbus-RTU communication to
perform inter-communication between Inverters (HF--620, HF-430NEO) without external control devices
such as PC and PLC.
・By issuing a notification from one inverter to another, such as changing the frequency command orchanging the operation/stop status, coordinated operation between the inverters is enabled without
external control devices.
・The operation of EzCOM is outlined below. (When four inverters are connected)
・During EzCOM communication, the inverters share the roles of "control inverter," "master inverter," and"slave inverter." Be sure to install the inverter of station number 1. The inverter becomes the"management inverter".
・When EzCOM communication starts, "control inverter" will gradually switch "master inverter". At this time,
all other than "master inverter" are set to "slave inverter".

Inverter 1
Station 1(control)

(1)

(4)

(2)

(3)

：Master inverter

Inverter 2
Station No. 2

TimeInverter 3
Station No. 3

Inverter 4
Station No. 4(1) When EzCOM communication starts, the inverter specified by the administrative inverter becomesthe "master inverter". In the example above, Inverter 1 = Management Inverter = Latest masterinverter.
The master inverter (inverter 1) writes its own holding register data into the holding registers ofother inverters according to the setting. Up to five writes can be set.
(2) When writing of inverter 1 is completed, the master inverter switches to inverter 2. Like the masterinverter 1, the master inverter (inverter 2) writes its own holding register data into the holding
registers of other inverters according to the setting.
(3) When the switching of the master inverter is one cycle for all specified inverters, the inverter 1 isswitched to the master inverter again.
(Up to eight master inverters can be set.)(4) (1) to (3) is repeated.
・Like normal Modbus communication (RS485), connect the [SP]/[SN]/[L] terminals of the inverters for
EzCOM communication (the [CM1] terminals of SJ series P1) respectively. (Turn ON the terminating
resistors of the inverters at both ends that constitute EzCOM communication.)・Up to eight master inverters can be set for EzCOM communication.
・Up to five writes can be set from each master inverter.
(Data can also be written to the inverter that does not become the master (inverter 4 in the example of
the above figure).)

11-24
11-24

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

11.4.2 EzCOM setting
・In the inverter-to-inverter communication function EzCOM, each inverter connected by communicationis switched to a master inverter, so that mutual communication can be performed by only multiple
inverters without external control equipment such as PC and PLC.
・During EzCOM communication, the inverters share the roles of "control inverter," "master inverter," and"slave inverter." The setting items change in "Management Inverter" and other cases. Refer to thefollowing section and set the appropriate settings for each of the inverters that make up EzCOM.
■Common setting items of inverters for EzCOM
Code

I te m

CF-01

RS485 communication baud rate selection

Description

CF-03

RS485 communication parity selection

CF-04

RS485 communication stop bit selection

CF-05

RS485 communication error selection

CF-06
CF-07

RS485 communication enable setting
RS485 communication wait time setting

Data

Use the same setting for the
inverters for EzCOM.
Refer to the sample EzCOM
communication time chart inthis section for setting.

Initial value
05
00

-

01
02
-

2
5

■Setting items of management inverter (station No.1)
Code
CF-02
CF-08

Data

Initialvalue

Set station No. 1 to the control inverter.

1

1

Inter-inverter communication (EzCOM) is used(control inverter).

03

01

1 to 81

I te mDescription

RS485 communication
node address
RS485 communication
mode selection

CF-20

EzCOM start node No.

Set the start station number of the master inverter.

CF-21

EzCOM end node No.

Set the finish station number of the master inverter.

CF-22

EzCOM start method
selection

CF-23 to
CF-38

EzCOM Write Data-Related
ParameterCA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal function

Activation via the "EzCOM activation [ECOM]"
inputterminal

00

Constant communication

01

The control inverter can also send data as a"master inverter." Refer to the next table "Setting
items of master inverter".
EzCOM activation [ECOM]:
When the "[ECOM] terminal (00)" is set to [CF22], EzCOM communication is performed when
this terminal is turned ON.

00

-

-

098

-

■Setting items of master inverter (station No. 1 to 8)
Code
CF-02
CF-08
CF-23
CF-24
CF-25
CF-26
CF-27

I te m
RS485 communication
node address
RS485 communication
mode selection
EzCOM number of data
EzCOM destination
address 1
EzCOM destination
register 1
EzCOM source register 1
EzCOM destination
address 2

Description

Data

Initialvalue

For the station number setting of the master inverter
for EzCOM communication, set the station number
set in [CF-20] to [CF-21] of the control inverter.

1 to 247

1

02

01

1 to 55

1 to 247

10000h to
FFFFh

0000h

1 to 247

2

Use inter-inverter communication (EzCOM)
Sets the number of writes to the holding register.
Set the station number and holding register
number of the station to write data to, and theholding register number of the write data of theown station. Maximum 5 sets can be set.
Note: In the destination register and thesource register, specify a register
address of-1 from the register number.

11-25
11-25

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication

Code

I te m

CF-28
CF-29
CF-30

EzCOM destination register 2
EzCOM source register 2
EzCOM destination address 3

CF-31

EzCOM destination register 3

CF-32
CF-33
CF-34
CF-35
CF-36
CF-37
CF-38

EzCOM source register 3
EzCOM destination address 4
EzCOM destination register 4
EzCOM source register 4
EzCOM destination address 5
EzCOM destination register 5
EzCOM source register 5

Description

Set the station number and holding register
number of the station to write data to, and theholding register number of the write data of
the own station. Maximum 5 sets can be set.
Note: In the destination register and thesource register, specify a register
address of-1 from the register number.

Data

Initialvalue

0000h to
FFFFh

0000h

1 to 247

30000h to
FFFFh

0000h

1 to 247

40000h to
FFFFh

0000h

1 to 24750000h to
FFFFh

0000h

EzCOM communication settings
1. Common setting of inverters for EzCOM communication(1) Set Modbus communication settings ([CF-01], [CF-03], and [CF-04]) of the inverters to the samesetting.
(2) Set [CF-05], [CF-06], and [CF-07] by referring to EzCOM communication time chart and notes in thissection.
2. Setting of management inverter (station No.1)(3) To perform EzCOM communication, set "Communication station No. selection [CF-02]" to (1), andprovide an inverter with "Inter-inverter communication (EzCOM control) (03)" set to "Communication
method selection [CF-08]". This inverter becomes "management inverter".
(4) Set the first and last station numbers of the inverter to be operated as a "master inverter" to "EzCOM
starting INV station No. [CF-20]" and "EzCOM ending INV station No. [CF-21]", respectively. Also, set
it so that [CF-20] ≦ [CF-21] is set.
(In EzCOM communication time chart, [CF-20]=01, [CF-21]=04.)(5) EzCOM communication start timing can be selected in "EzCOM start selection [CF-22]". When"Continuous communication (01)" is set, "Management inverter" starts EzCOM communication assoon as the power is turned on. If the power-on of another inverter is delayed, communication timeout occurs in "control inverter", so please ensure that the start-up timing of the other inverter comes
first so that it does not happen. When the "[ECOM] terminal (00)" is set, EzCOM communication starts
when the "EzCOM start [ECOM]" inputterminal is turned ON.
3. Setting of master inverter and slave inverter(6) For the inverter that becomes the "master inverter", it is necessary to set a continuous station number
out of 1 to 8. Set the station number set in [CF-20] to [CF-21] of the "control inverter" in order in the"communication station number selection [CF-02]" of the inverter which becomes the "masterinverter". The station No. of the inverter that does not become the "master inverter" should be a station
No. other than [CF-20] to [CF-21] of the "control inverter".
(7) Set "Inter-inverter communication (EzCOM) (02)" to "Communication method selection [CF-08]" of all
the inverters participating in EzCOM communication, except for "Management Inverter".
(8) Set the data-information ([CF-23] to [CF-38]) to be written from the master inverter to the slave
inverter for each of "master inverter".

11-26
11-26

Chapter 11

Modbus Communication■Sample EzCOM communication time chart
・EzCOM communication is configured with 4 node addresses 1 to 4.
・Station numbers 1 to 3 become the master inverter.
・Station No. 4 is a slave only and does not become a master inverter.
Inverter 1
Station No.1 Send
(control)
Reception

M

Master data write communication
Master switching instruction

S

Receive data in slave of write
communication

M

M
t1

t3

S

Inverter 2 Send
Station No.2 Reception

S

Inverter 3
Send
Station No.3 Reception

S

S

Send
Inverter 4
Station No.4 Reception

S

S

S

t2

M
t3

t3

S

S

t3

M

t1: Silent interval + "Communication wait time [CF-07]"
t2: Silent interval + "Communication wait time [CF-07]"
t3: "Communication time-out time [CF-06]"

S

S

S

Station No.

Register

Data

02
02
03
03
04

××××
××××
××××
××××
××××

××××
××××
××××
××××
××××

Up to five data writes can be specified.

・The master switching command is sent from the management inverter at the timing shown below.
- When the control inverter is the master inverter, after t1 shown in the figure above has elapsed sincedata write communication was completed.
- When the control inverter is a slave inverter, after a lapse of t2 shown in the above figure after
completion of receiving data transmission communication.
・If data reception cannot be completed within the "Communication timeout time [CF-06]" setting time,
the timeout will be calculated from the start of reception wait (in t3 above). The operation at that time
follows "Communication error selection [CF-05]".
・If a setting other than "ignore (02)" is set to [CF-05] in the management inverter, communication
between the inverters will be stopped when a communication time-out occurs in the management
inverter. In this case, turn on the power supply of the control inverter again.
・Be sure to set the [CF-06] of the control inverter to a value other than 0.00 (recommended 1 second or
longer). If 0.00 is set, EzCOM function will be stopped if data cannot be received from the masterinverter due to timeout. If it stops, turn the power supply of the control inverter OFF and then ON again,or reset it using the "Reset [RST]" inputterminal.
・Do not set 2327h (enter command (2328h-1)) and 2329h (1 register write mode (232Ah-1)) in thedestination register.
・In data write communication by the master inverter, the destination slave station number is set, but it isactually transmitted to all stations by broadcast communication. A slave that is not specified as atransmission destination on the master side will receive data once, but the received data will bediscarded internally.

11-27
11-27

Chapter 12

PC Software

12

Chapter 12 PC SoftwareThis chapter describes an outline of the "Inverter configuration software "SAFS001" as well as parameter
descriptions of the Inverter. (Supported language: Japanese)
Before conducting a test run, please read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" carefully and pay attention
to safety.

12.1 PC software
・In the inverter setting software "SAFS001", parameter setting and management of the inverter, graphdisplay of the monitor data, are performed. The main functions are listed below.
I te mOperation Screen
Parameters set function
Monitor function
Tracing function

Description
Sets the frequency command and starts/stops operation. The state of the intelligent
terminal can also be checked.
Various parameter settings can be made, such as setting parameters individually andsearching for changed parameters from the factory default settings.
Parameters can be saved and read in CSV format.
The specified monitor data can be displayed in a table format or in a graph format with thehorizontal axis as the time. Monitor data can be saved and read in PMG format or CSV format file.
Parameters and triggers can be set to graph the data when the trigger is activated.
The recorded trace data can be saved and read in a CSV format file.

・Refer to the Inverter Setting Software "SAFS001" Manual for detailed information about "SAFS001"
functions.
・The most recent version of「SAFS001」, and the User's Manual can be downloaded from our website.
https://japan.sumitomodrive.com/en-jp(Note that member registration is required in advance for downloading.)

Connecting PC and Inverter
注）Micro-B コネクタの USB ケーブルまたは変換コネクタを準備してください。

USB
Type A terminalUSB
Micro-B terminal

With "SAFS001"
As it is installed Windows PC

12-1
12-1

Chapter 12

PC Software

12.2 Trace function
12.2.1 Trace function data logging
・The trace function is used to acquire and accumulate the inverter monitor data under the set conditions.
・The accumulated data (trace accumulated data) can be uploaded to PC using "SAFS001" for graphingand saving.
・When using the tracing function, refer to the Inverter Setting Software "SAFS001" Manual (No. DM2505E)
for more information.
■Specifications
I te mDescription

Number of trace data

Monitor data: Up to 8 data
I/O signal: Up to 8 signals (selected from Input/Output terminal functions)

Trace accumulated data size

8 Kbytes

Sampling time (cycle)

Select from 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 50, 100, 500, 1000 ms

Number of sampling points
Trace start methods
Trigger condition

Other

It varies depending on the number of trace data, the number of signals, and the data
size of the parameter to be traced. 953 points for ex. "Number of traced data: 4,
Number of signals: 1, Data size: all 2 bytes"
Parameter setting, input terminal function "Data tracing start signal [DTR]"
・2 conditions (4 conditions in combination) settable
・Select from trip and trace data (monitor data and signal)
・Trigger level and trigger point can be set.
・Output pin function "Tracing function trigger wait signal[WFT]"
・Output pin function "Tracing function tracing in progress signal[TRA]"
・Graphing and saving of accumulated data by "SAFS001"■Flow up to execute of tracing function
No.
1
2
3
4

5

6

7
8
9
10

Description

Remarks

Enable the tracing function.
"Tracing function selection [Ud-01]" = "Enable (01)"
Set the monitor data count and I/O signal count to be traced.
「Number of trace data setting [Ud-03]」「Number of trace signals setting [Ud-04]」
Select the parameter code of the monitor data to be traced.
"Tracing data selection ([Ud-10] to [Ud-17])"
Selects whether the traced I/O is an input-pin or an output-pin function.
"Trace signal I/O selection([Ud-20], [Ud-23], [Ud-26], [Ud-29], [Ud-32], [Ud-35], [Ud-38], [Ud-41])」
Selects I/O (I/O pin function) to be traced.
Input: "Trace signal input pin selection"([Ud-21], [Ud-24], [Ud-27], [Ud-30], [Ud-33], [Ud-36], [Ud-39], [Ud-42])」
Output: "Trace signal output pin selection"([Ud-22], [Ud-25], [Ud-28], [Ud-31], [Ud-34], [Ud-37], [Ud-40], [Ud-43])」
Select and set the trigger condition.
Trace trigger selection ([Ud-50], [Ud-54])"Trigger action selection at trace data trigger ([Ud-51], [Ud-55])""Trigger level at trace data trigger ([Ud-52], [Ud-56])""Trigger Operation Selection at Tracing Signal Triggering ([Ud-53], [Ud-57])"「Trigger condition selection [Ud-58]」
Select the sampling time (cycle).「Sampling time setting [Ud-60]」
Start tracing. "Tracing start [Ud-02]" = "Start (01)" (Tracing can also be started fromthe input terminal function "Data tracing start [DTR]" or "SAFS001".)
When tracing is completed, the trace stop status Note;1,2 is entered, and [Ud-02] isautomatically changed to "Stop (00)".

『12.3.2 Refer to"Trace function
related parameters".

Use "SAFS001" to read, graph, and save trace accumulated data.

"SAFS001"is required.

Note: 1. When the inverter power supply is cut off, the trace accumulation data is erased.
2. Do not stop during tracing because tracing may not be performed normally.

12-2
12-2

Chapter 12

PC Software

12.2.2 Trace function related parameters
・ When using the tracing function, refer to the Inverter Setting Software "SAFS001" Manual for more
information.
Code

I te mDescription

00

Enable01

Stop tracing.

00

Starts tracing and waits for a trigger.

01

Select the number of data to trace.

0 to 81

0 to 81

Reference trace
object datadA-01

Trace function enable

Ud-02

Trace start

Ud-03

Number of trace data setting

Ud-04

Number of trace signals setting Selects how many I/O are traced.
Trace data 0 to 7 selection

Ud-20, Ud-23
Ud-26, Ud-29 Trace signal 0 to 7
Ud-32, Ud-35 I/O selection
Ud-38, Ud-41

Ud-21, Ud-24
Ud-27, Ud-30 Trace signal 0 to 7 input
Ud-33, Ud-36 pin function selection
Ud-39, Ud-42
Ud-22, Ud-25
Ud-28, Ud-31 Trace signal 0 to 7 output
Ud-34, Ud-37 pin function selection
Ud-40, Ud-43
Ud-50
Ud-54

Ud-51
Ud-55

Ud-52
Ud-56

Ud-53
Ud-57

Trace trigger 1/2 selection
acceptance

Initialvalue

DisableUd-01

Ud-10 to
Ud-17

Data

Select the monitor parameter to be
traced.
Input pins are tracing targets. When
"Input (00)" is selected, the following
parameters are valid.
[Ud-21], [Ud-24], [Ud-27], [Ud-30][Ud-33], [Ud-36], [Ud-39], [Ud-42]
The output terminal is the tracing
target. When "Output (01)" is selected,
the following parameters are valid.
[Ud-22], [Ud-25], [Ud-28], [Ud-31][Ud-34], [Ud-37], [Ud-40], [Ud-43]

00
01

01 to 08

Trigger the trace signal.

09 to 16

12-3
12-3

001

001

00

Triggers trace data.

When "Trace data (01 to 08)" isselected for [Ud-50]/[Ud-54], thetrace data is recorded when a
Trigger 1/2 motion production rising trigger is detected.
selection at trace data trigger
When "Trace data (01 to 08)" isselected for [Ud-50]/[Ud-54], thetrace data is recorded when afalling trigger is detected.
When "Tracing data (01 to 08)" isselected for [Ud-50]/[Ud-54], adjust
Trigger 1/2 bell setting at trace
the trigger level with the max. value ofdata trigger
each selected monitor parameter set
to 100%.
When "Trace signal (09 to 16)" isselected for [Ud-50]/[Ud-54], trace
data is recorded with the signal ON.
At trace signal trigger
Trigger 1/2 action selection
When "Trace signal (09 to 16)" isselected for [Ud-50]/[Ud-54], trace
data is recorded with the signal OFF.

00

00

『18.2.6 "List ofMulti-function
Set the input pin function to be traced.
Input Pin
Functions".
『18.2.7"List of
Set the output pin functions to be
Multi-function
traced.
Output Pin
Functions".
Trip generation is triggered.

00

00

00
00
01

0 to 100 %

00

01

0

Chapter 12
Code

PC Software
I te mDescription

Ud-58

Trigger condition
selection

Ud-59

Trigger point setting

Ud-60

Sampling time setting

CA-01 to Input terminal
CA-08 function

CC-01 to Output terminal
CC-07 function

Data

Trace data is recorded when trace trigger 1 is met.
00
Trace data is recorded when trace trigger 2 is met.
01
Recording when either of trigger 1 or trigger 2 is satisfied.
02
Recording when both trigger 1 and trigger 2 are met.
03
Determine the trigger point for tracing data recording.
0 to 100 %Get at the set interval.
02 (0.5ms), 03 (1ms), 04 (2ms), 05 (5ms) 06 (10ms)
02 to 1007 (50ms), 08 (100ms), 09 (500ms), 10 (1,000ms)
Data tracing start signal[DTR]:[DTR] When the input terminal becomes ON, data
108
tracing starts regardless of the trigger setting.
Tracing function trigger wait signal[WFT]:
When the tracing function is enabled and the unit is in078
the trigger wait status, this signal is turned ON.
Trace function data logging
When data tracing is started and operating, this signal is079
turned ON.

Initial
value

00
0
03

-

-

■Data to be traced
・Set the monitor parameters below to "Tracing data 0 to 7 selection ([Ud-10] to [Ud-17])".
Code

I te mSize ofthe data(bytes)

Code

dA-01

Output frequency monitor

4

db-36

dA-02

Output current monitor

2

db-42

4

db-44

4

4

db-50

4

db-51

PID1 deviation monitor

2

4

db-52

PID1 Deviation 1 Monitor

2

2

db-53

PID1 deviation-2 monitor

2

2
4
2
2
2
2

db-54
db-55
db-56
db-64
dC-15
FA-01

PID1 deviation-3 monitor
PID2 output monitor
PID2 deviation monitor
PID feed-forward input source monitor
Cooling fin temperature monitor
Main speed reference setting (monitor)

2
2
2
4
2
4

2

FA-02

Sub speed reference setting (monitor)

4

2

FA-15

Torque reference setting (monitor)

2

2

FA-16

Torque bias setting (monitor)
PID1 target setpoint 1 setting(monitor)
PID1 target setpoint 2 setting(monitor)
PID1 setpoint 3 setting (monitor)
PID2 target setpoint (monitor)

2

dA-61
dA-62

Analog input [IRF] monitor

2

FA-30

dA-70

Pulse input monitor

2

FA-32

db-30
db-32

PID1 feedback value 1 monitor
PID1 feedback value 2 monitor

4
4

FA-34
FA-36

db-34

PID1 feedback value 3 monitor

4

dA-08
dA-12
dA-14
dA-15
dA-16
dA-17
dA-30
dA-34
dA-40
dA-41
dA-42
dA-43

Size ofthe data(bytes)PID2 feedback value monitor
PID1 target value monitor(after calculation)
PID1 feedback data monitor(after calculation)
PID1 output monitor

Frequency reference(after calculation) (signed)
Detect speed monitor
Output frequency monitor(signed)Frequency upper limit monitor
Torque reference monitor(after calculation)
Torque limit monitor
Output torque monitor
Input power monitor
Output power monitor
DC bus voltage monitor
DBTR load ratio monitor
Electronic thermal load factor
monitor (Motor)
Electronic thermal load factor
monitor (Inverter)
Analog input [VRF] monitor

dA-04

I te m

12-4
12-4

4
4
2

4
4
4
4

Chapter 12

PC Software■Time of trace data
・The time of trace data depends on the "number of trace data [Ud-03]", "number of trace signals [Ud-04]","sampling time setting [Ud-60]" and the data size of the monitor parameter to be traced.
Tracing data times Note
Ud-03
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Ud-60: 01 (0.2ms) (Min.)For all 4 bytes
For all 2 bytes
344ms (1,724 point)
190ms (953 point)
131ms (656 point)
100ms (500 point)
80ms (402 point)
67ms (336 point)
57ms (288 point)
50ms (252 point)

576ms (2,880 point)
344ms (1,724 point)
245ms (1,228 point)
190ms (953 point)
155ms (778 point)
131ms (656 point)
113ms (568 point)
100ms (500 point)

Note: When "Tracing signal count selection [Ud-04]" is other than 0.
(**** point) indicates the number of sampling points.

12-5
12-5

Ud-60: 10 (1,000ms) (Min.)For all 4 bytes
For all 2 bytes
1,724s (1,724 point)
953s (953 point)
656s (656 point)
500s (500 point)
402s (402 point)
336s (336 point)
288s (288 point)
252s (252 point)

2,880s (2,880 point)
1,724s (1,724 point)
1,228s (1,228 point)
953s (953 point)
778s (778 point)
656s (656 point)
568s (568 point)
500s (500 point)Chapter 13

Communication Option

Chapter 13 Communication Option

13

This chapter describes the precautions for using the communication options.
For details on using the communication options, refer to the manuals for the respective communication
options.
When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters, and pay attention to safety.

13.1 Communication option
13.1.1 Communication option unit
・The following communication option are available on HF-620.
・For details on how to install the communication option unit, refer to manual.
Product Name
C1-CCL-H

Content
CC-Link communication unit

■ Notes on depth dimensions
・When mounting an option unit on a HF-620, the depth dimensions change as shown below.
(e.g.) HF6202-A20 (three-phase 200V class 0.2kW)
109

37Communication option unit

When communication option
unit is mounted to HF-620.

13-1
13-1

Safety Function STO

Chapter 14

Chapter 14 Safety Function STO

14This chapter describes the safety function STO (Safe Torque Off) defined in the functional safety IEC618005-2.
For further information on functional safety, refer to the separate "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)".
For details of the installation, wiring, and the various functions of the inverter, refer to the corresponding
chapters.
When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters and pay attention to safety.

14.1 Using the safety function STO (Safe Torque Off)14.1.1 STO function
・The HF-620 is equipped with the STO (Safe Torque Off) function defined in IEC61800-5-2. This function
is equivalent to stop category 0 defined in IEC60204-1.
・STO function is enabled by turning on the HF-620 and starting the inverter. Special operations such as
switches are not required.
Standard

Remarks

EN ISO 13849-1

CAT. 3, PL e

IEC61800-5-2
EN61800-5-2

SIL 3

UL1998Diagnostic software class 1

IEC 60204-1

Stop Cat. 0・This guide explains only the outline of the STO function. When this product is handled as a functionalsafety certified product, be sure to check the separate "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)" andimplement the items required as a functional safety system (verification, validation, etc.).
The information given in safety function guide takes precedence.

14-1
14-1

Safety Function STO

Chapter 14
Wiring and operation procedure of safety function

・Input of STO signal is performed by redundant input of STO input terminals [ST1] and [ST2]. Whenvoltage is applied to each input terminal and current flows, operation of safety path is enabled. (Whenshipped from the factory, operation is always enabled.)
・The voltage for inputting STO signal can be selected from the inverter's internal power supply ([P24S]
terminal) or an external ＋24V power supply.
・STO function is enabled and the output to the motor is shut off by turning OFF either of the external
switches for STO signal input as shown in the wiring diagram on the next page.
SymbolName

Description

P24S＋24V output power supply
terminal(STO dedicated terminal)＋ 24V power supply dedicated for[ST1]/[ST2] input. Not used when the STO
input voltage is supplied from an external
power supply.

CMS

Common for ＋24V output
power supply terminal(STO dedicated terminal)

Common terminal for [P24S].

[ST1]/[ST2]

STO input terminal Note

UPF

Output terminal [UPF]

OM

Common for output terminal

Electrical characteristics

Maximum output current: 100mA

Input terminal for STO signal.

[ST1]/[ST2] – [CMS] voltage:
ON voltage Min. 15V
OFF voltage Max. 5V
Max. allowable voltage 27V
Load current 5.8mA (at 27V)
Internal resistance：4.7kΩ

When EDM switch is turned ON, output
terminal [UPF] becomes "STO statemonitor output [EDM]".
Common terminal for output terminal[UPF].

Open collector output ([UPF] to [OM])Max. allowable voltage: 27V
Max. allowable current: 50mA
Voltage drop when turned on: 4V or lessNote: Corresponding to "Digital input type 1" defined in IEC61131-2.

STO Terminal

Control circuit terminal

ST2 CMS ST1Connection of STO input terminal
・STO function is disabled by the short-circuit wire
when shipped from the factory.
・Always activate the STO function using both STO
inputs ([ST1]/[ST2]).

■When using internal power supply

PCS P24 P24S

■When using external power supply
ST2 CMS ST1

ST2 CMS ST1
PCS P24 P24SPCS P24 P24S
Switch: Direction of current

SwitchExternal +24V power supply(SELV or PELV)

14-2
14-2

: Direction of current

Safety Function STO

Chapter 14
STO Status Retention Function (not supported as the safety function)

・The retention function that retains the STO status of internal safety path even if STO input is canceled
is not implemented as a safety circuit. Therefore, if a RUN command is given after cancellation of STO
input or STO input is canceled while the command is given, the inverter starts output to the motor.
・Hence, to satisfy the requirements about cancellation of emergency stop specified in IEC60204-1,
either of the following measures has to be taken.
(1) At the same time as STO input, set the RUN command to the inverter to stopped status.
(2) Configure the system so that STO input to HF-620 is canceled when system reboot is required by
the user.
・By parameter settings, display of the keypad depending on ON/OFF status of [ST1]/[ST2] terminals, theerror display at trip, etc. can be selected. For details, refer to "14.1.3 STO Status Indication".

14.1.2 STO state monitor output (EDM signal)
・When using STO state monitor output (EDM signal), turn ON EDM switch near the control circuit
terminal. "Output terminal [UPF] function [CC-01]" is automatically changed to "STO state monitor
output [EDM](096)". At the same time, "Output terminal [UPF] active state [CC-11]" become "NormallyOpen (00)".
・"STO state monitor output [EDM]" is the output signal for monitoring the input status of STO signal andfailure detection status on the internal safety path. It is not permitted to activate the safety function
using this signal.
STO state monitor output [EDM]
Control circuit terminal

OM DRV UPF
ON

EDM Switch

Load
OFF

Code

Name

Description

Data

Initial value

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Output terminal
function

STO state monitor output [EDM]：
Monitors the input status of STO signals and thefault output status on the internal safety path.

096

002
001
017

・For operation of [ST1]/[ST2] terminals and [EDM] signal against failure detection status, refer to thematrix below. [EDM] signal turns ON only when both STO inputs are correctly input, and internal failure
is not detected.
SignalStatus 1

Status 2

Status 3[ST1] terminal Note

STO

Operation
permitted

STO[ST2] terminal Note

STO

STO

Failure detection[EDM] signal

None
ON

None
OFF

Operation
permitted
None
OFF

Output to the motor

OFF

OFF

OFF

Status 4

Status 5

Operation
permitted
Operation
permitted
None
OFF
Operation
permitted

STO orOperation permitted
STO orOperation permitted
Detected
OFF
OFF

Note: [ST1]/[ST2] terminal input state and contact state: Operation permitted = Contact ON, STO = Contact OFF

14-3
14-3

Safety Function STO

Chapter 14

・The operation of the safety function STO input terminals [ST1]/[ST2] and the output terminal [UPF]
when the EDM switch is ON can be checked with the "Safety STO terminal monitor [dA-44]". For details,
refer to "14.1.3 Changing Status Display/Error Indication by Settings".
・When EDM switch is turned OFF from ON, "Output terminal [UPF] function [CC-01]" is automaticallychanged to "Not use [no]".
■STO Timing Chart
・The timing chart of the output to the motor and [EDM] signal for STO input terminals [ST1]/[ST2] is shown
below. The output to the motor is shut off within 20ms after [ST1] and [ST2] are turned off.

ST1 terminal input

ON

OFF

ST2 terminal input

ON

OFF

Output to the motor

OutputShut off

EDM output

OFF

ON
20ms
30ms

14-4
14-4

Safety Function STO

Chapter 14
14.1.3 STO status indication

・The indication of the keypad according to [ST1]/[ST2] input status or errors can be changed by "STO
input display selection [bd-01]" setting.
・The function shown below is a referenced signal to monitor the input status of STO signal and the failure
detection status of the internal safety path. It is not permitted to activate the safety function using thissignal.
■STO related monitor
Code

dA-44

Name

Safety STO terminal
monitorDescription

Data

The 7-segment LED on the keypad indicates the input status of the[ST1]/[ST2] terminals and the ON/OFF status of the output terminal
functions [EDM]/[SFM1]/[SFM2].
(e.g.)[ST1] terminal: STO[SFM1] output: ON[ST2] terminal: Operation permitted [EDM], [SFM2] output: OFF-

STO / ON
Operation permitted / OFF
Display
SFM2

EDM

SFM1 (ON)dA-45

Safety STO monitor

ST1

ST2 (Operation permitted): Lighting: Lights off

Displays the input status of the STO terminal input.For details, refer tothe table in this section "Safety STO monitor [dA-45]" and statusindication the keypad".

-■STO related parameter
Code

bd-01

bd-02

Name

STO input display
selection

STO input change time(release)

Description
Warning (display):
When input of both [ST1] and [ST2] is STO (input
contact point is OFF), "StO" is shown on the keypad.
Warning (without display):
When input of both [ST1] and [ST2] is STO (input
contact point is OFF), any warnings are not shown on
the keypad.
Trip:
When input of both [ST1] and [ST2] is STO (input
contact point is OFF), "STO shut off error [E090]"
occurs.
Note: Even if either [ST1] or [ST2] is STO, [E090]
error does not occur.
Set the allowable time for which input status wheneither [ST1] or [ST2] is released from STO is different.
(e.g.: [ST1]=ON, [ST2]=OFF)
When there is a difference between the switching time of[ST1] and [ST2], set the time that the system can allow thedifference.
When it is set to 0.00, the determination of allowablechange time becomes invalid.

14-5
14-5

Data

Initial
value

00

01
01

02

0.00 to 60.00 s

0.01

Safety Function STO

Chapter 14
Code

bd-03

bd-04

bd-05

bd-06
bd-07

CC-01
CC-02
CC-07

Name

Display selection during
STO input change time

Action selection after
STO input change time

STO input change time
(shutoff)

Warning release mode
selection
Warning release mode
selection

Output terminal
funciton

Description
Warning (display):
Displays a warning during [bd-02]/[bd-05] after thedifference between the states of [ST1] and [ST2] occurs.
Warning (without display):
Does not display a warning during [bd-02]/[bd-05] after thedifference between the states of [ST1] and [ST2] occurs.
Maintain current status:
When the allowable time set in [bd-02]/[bd-05] isexceeded after the difference between the states of[ST1] and [ST2] occurs, display a warning.
Disable:When the allowable time set in [bd-02]/[bd-05] isexceeded after the difference between the states of[ST1] and [ST2] occurs, does not display a warning.
Trip:
When the allowable time set in [bd-02]/[bd-05] isexceeded after the difference between the states of[ST1] and [ST2] occurs, "STO path 1 error [E092]" or "STO
path 2 error [E093]" occurs.
[Set the allowable time for which input status when either[ST1] or [ST2] is shutted off from operation permission
state is different.
(e.g.: [ST1]=OFF, [ST2]=ON)
When there is a difference between the switching time of [ST1]and [ST2], set the time that the system can allow the difference.
When it is set to 0.00, the determination of allowable change
time becomes invalid.
Keep warning display
Release warning display
Set the time displayed a waring again after release a warning.
STO input discrepancy [FSC]:
When the input states of [ST1]/[ST2] does not match,[FSC] signal is turned off.
ST1 feedback monitor [SFM1]:
The input state of [ST1] terminal can be checked with [SFM1]
signal.
When [ST1] terminal is turned on, [SFM1] signal also turn on.
When [ST1] terminal is turned off, [SFM1] signal also turn off.
ST2 feedback monitor [SFM2]:
The input state of [ST2] terminal can be checked with [SFM2]
signal.
When [ST2] terminal is turned on, [SFM2] signal also turn on.
When [ST2] terminal is turned off, [SFM2] signal also turn off.

Note: For details of functions, refer to the separate "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)".

14-6
14-6

Data

Initial
value

00
01
01

00

01

00

02

0.00 to60.00 s

0.01

00
01

00

1 to 30 s

30088 Note

094 Note

095 Note

002
001
017

Safety Function STO

Chapter 14■"Safety STO monitor [dA-45]" and status indication the keypad
dA-45 Note:1

Keypad status
display Note:1

Condition Note:200(No indication)

<1>

01

P-1A

<2>

02

P-2A

<3>

03

P-1b

<5>

04

P-2b

<6>

05

P-1C

<7>

06

P-2C

<8>

07

STO

<4>

Description
Both [ST1] and [ST2] are operation permission state (contact
point is ON) and inverter output is available.
When both [ST1] and [ST2] are operation permission state(contact point is ON), only [ST2] changes to STO state (contact
point is OFF). Then, [ST1] remains operation permission state
during "STO input change time (shutoff) [bd-05]".
When both [ST1] and [ST2] are operation permission state(contact point is ON), only [ST1] changes to STO state (contact
point is OFF). Then, [ST2] remains operation permission state
during "STO input change time (shutoff) [bd-05]".
(1) This status is displayed when "P-1C" or "P-1A" status is continue
for the time set in "STO input change time [bd-02]/[bd-05]".
(2) When both [ST1] and [ST2] are "Operation permitted" state(contact point is ON), only [ST2] changes to STO state(contact point is OFF). Then [ST2] is operation permission
state (contact point is ON) again.
(1) This status is displayed in the P-2C or P-2A status after "STO inputchange time [bd-02]/[bd-05]".
(2) When both [ST1] and [ST2] are operation permission state(contact point is ON), only [ST1] changes to STO state(contact point is OFF). Then [ST1] operation permission state(contact point is ON) again.
From the status that both [ST1] and [ST2] is STO state (contact
point is OFF), only [ST2] changes to operation permission state(contact point is ON). Then, [ST1] remains STO state (contact
point is OFF) during "STO input change time (release) [bd-02]".
From the status that both [ST1] and [ST2] is STO state (contact
point is OFF), only [ST1] changes to operation permission state(contact point is ON). Then, [ST2] remains STO state (contact
point is OFF) during "STO input change time (release) [bd-02]".
Both [ST1] and [ST2] are "STO" state (contact point is OFF).

Note: 1. "Safety STO monitor [dA-45]" and status indication of keypad can be displayed or hidden by the parametersettings of [bd-01], [bd-03], and [bd-04].
2. For details, refer to the figure in this section "State transition diagram".

■STO rerated error
Error
code

Name

Condition Note

E090

STO shut off error

<9>

E091

STO internal error]

<10>

E092

STO path 1 error

<11>

E093

STO path 2 error<12>

Description
When "STO input display selection [bd-01]" is set to "Trip (02)",the error occurs when both [ST1] and [ST2] terminals become
STO state.
The error occurs when internal failure is found. It cannot becanceled by reset operation.
When "Action selection after STO input change time [bd-04]" isset to "Trip (02)", the error occurs when the inverter state ischanged to "P-1b".
When "Action selection after STO input change time [bd-04]" isset to "Trip (02)", the error occurs when the inverter state ischanged to "P-2b".

Note: For details, refer to the figure in this section "State transition diagram".

14-7
14-7

Safety Function STO

Chapter 14■State transition diagram00:
No
indication

<2>

<1>

<3>
<1>
01:P-1A[E090]
05:P-1C

02:P-2A
<9>

<4>
<4>

<7>

06:P-2C<8><4>
07:StO

<4>

<6>

<10>
<5>

<6>

<5>
[E091]

03:P-1b

04:P-2b[E092]

<11>

14-8
14-8

[E093]<12>

Not recoverChapter 15

Troubleshooting

Chapter 15 Troubleshooting

15

This chapter describes errors caused by the protection function, warnings caused by the warning function,and troubleshooting when something is wrong.
Read this chapter first when the inverter does not operate as intended or a problem occurred.
Address these issues according to the circumstances by referring to the next and subsequent sections.

15.1 Self-diagnosis of problems
15.1.1 Procedure for checking when a problem occurs
・If a trip, warning, or trip has not occurred, but the display is different from the normal display, or if it
does not operate as intended, follow the procedure below to perform troubleshooting.
Descriptions of the trouble

References

When a trip occurs and an error such as "E001" isdisplayed on the control panel.
When a trip occurs and the inverter restarts.
When a warning occurs and a warning such as"102" is displayed on the operation panel.
When an unusual display or unusual content isdisplayed on the control panel.
If it does not work well as the above-mentioned
trip, warning, other indications, etc. as follows.
"Some parameters are not displayed""Cannot be set"
"Operation does not start even if operation or
frequency command is input""Operation is possible, but frequency does notincrease""The motor vibrates and distorts"•••••etc.

『15.2 See "Troubleshooting Protection
Features" to resolve the cause.
『15.3.1 Refer to "Warning indication" andeliminate the cause.
『15.3.2 Refer to "Other indications" andeliminate the cause.

『15.4 See "When you think something iswrong" to solve the cause.

If the above does not solve the problem !

・Consult the retailer from whom the watch was purchased or our sales.
・When making an inquiry, please contact us after confirming the following items.
(1) Inverter model(2) Serial number (MFG No.)
(3) Time of purchase(4) Descriptions of inquiries

15-1
15-1

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

15.2 Troubleshooting protection functions
15.2.1 Check the trip information
・The inverter trip history can be displayed up to the last 10 times.
・"Trip Monitor ([dE-11] to [dE-20])" allows you to refer to the error code and detailed information suchas the output frequency at trip, output current, DC voltage between P-N, and inverter status. In
addition, the latest trip history is displayed in "Trip Monitor 1 [dE-11]".
・Refer to the table below for the trip status (inverter status, LAD status, INV control mode, restriction
status (="Icon 2LIM detailed monitor [dC-37]"), and special status).
・Release the trip (reset) by pressing the (a) STOP/RESET key. (b) ON→OFF the "Reset [RS] input terminal
assigned to the input terminal. (c) Turn the power OFF and ON again. (Some error causes cannot be
reset by (a) or (b). For details, refer to the remedy for each error.)Code

I te m-Inverter status-

LAD status-

INV control

dC-37

Icon 2 L LIM detailmonitor(= Restriction status)

-

dE-01

Special status

Trip count monitor

dE-11 todE-20

Trip monitor 1 to
Trip monitor 10

CA-01 toCA-08

Input terminal
function

Description
Displays the inverter operation management status when an error
occurs.
Initialization (00), Earth fault detection (01), Stop (02)
Operation standby (03), operation preparation (04)operation (05), Stop standby (06), Retry standby (07), Retry (08)Displays LAD (acceleration/deceleration) status when an error
occurs.
Cut-off (00), Min. speed (01), Accelerate (02), Decelerate (03),Constant speed (04), Restart (05)
Displays the inverter control status when an error occurs.
Interruption (00), Speed Control (01), Start (02), DC Braking (03),Position Control (06), Torque Control (07), Restart (08), Magnetic
Pole Position Detection (09), Earth Fault Detection (10), Nonrotation Measurement (11)
Not in the motor drive limit state
Overcurrent suppression in progress
Overload restriction in progress
Overvoltage suppression in progress
Torque limited
Upper/lower limit limiter, jump frequency, setting limit in progress
Minimum frequency setting limit in progress
Indicates the special functions that were operating when an error
occurred.
Not in special function state (00)During auto-tuning (01)During simulation mode (02)During EMF mode (04), BYP mode (05)
Monitors the number of trips.
The following information is displayed when an error occurs.
(1)Trip factor, (2) output frequency (signed), (3) output current(4)DC between P-N, (5) Inverter status, (6) LAD status(7)INV control mode., (8) Limit state., (9) Special state.
(10)Cumulative time during RUN, (11) Cumulative power ON time
This data is stored in the internal memory when the power supply is
cut off.
Reset [RST]:
Resetting operation is performed with ON of this signal. If tripped,
trip state is canceled.

15-2
15-2

Data

-

-

-

00
01
02
03
04
05
06

-

0 to 65535(times)-028

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

Trip Monitor Display
dE -1 1
Esc

Trip monitor

SET

E005

Error code

60. 00 Output frequency at Trip (Hz)Frequency monitor lamp [Hz] lights up.

4. 00

Output current at Trip (A)The current monitor lamp [A] lights.

400. 2 DC Voltage Between P-N at Trip (Vdc)

1- 00

Inverter status

2- 00

LAD status

3- 00

INV control mode

4- 00

Restriction status＝「Icon 2LIM detailed monitor[dC-37]」5- 00

Special status

15.

Cumulative trip RUN times (hr)18.

Accumulated power-on time at Trip (hr)・When forced shutdown by hardware of the inverter occurs, information at the time of error occurrence
may not be acquired accurately.
・If an error occurs during output shutdown and a trip condition occurs, the value of each data may
become 0.
・In case of a ground fault or instantaneous overcurrent, the current value may be recorded low.
・Trip monitor and trip count monitor can be cleared by historical initialization.
・A negative value for the output frequency indicates that an error occurred during reverse rotation.

15-3
15-3

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

15.2.2 Check retry information
・Retry history of the inverter can be displayed up to 10 times in the past.
・"Retry Monitor ([dE-31] to [dE-40])" allows you to refer to the error code that caused the retry and thedetailed information such as the output frequency, output current, DC voltage between P-N, and thestatus of the drive during the retry. Also, the most recent retry history is displayed in "Retry monitor 1[dE-31]".
・Refer to the table below for the status at retry (inverter status, LAD status, INV control mode, restriction
status (= "Icon 2LIM detailed monitor [dC-37]") and special status).
Code

I te m-Inverter status-

LAD status-

INV control

dC-37

Icon 2 L LIM detailmonitor(= Restriction status)-

dE-31 todE-40

Special status

Retry monitor 1 to
Retry monitor 10

Description
Displays the inverter operation management status when a retry
occurs.
Initialization (00), Earth fault detection (01), Stop (02)
Operation standby (03), operation preparation (04)operation (05), Stop standby (06), Retry standby (07), Retry (08)Displays LAD (acceleration/deceleration) status when a retry
occurs.
Cut-off (00), Min. speed (01), Accelerate (02), Decelerate (03)Constant speed (04), Restart (05)
Displays the inverter control status when a retry occurs.
Interruption (00), Speed Control (01), Start (02)
DC Braking (03), Position Control (06), Torque Control (07)Restart (08), Magnetic Pole Position Detection (09)Earth Fault Detection (10), Non-rotation Measurement (11)
Not in the motor drive limit state
Overcurrent suppression in progress
Overload restriction in progress
Overvoltage suppression in progress
Torque limited
Upper/lower limit limiter, jump frequency, setting limit in progress
Minimum frequency setting limit in progress
Displays the special function that was operating when the retry
occurred.
Not in special function state (00)During auto-tuning (01)During simulation mode (02)During EMF mode (04), BYP mode (05)
Displays the following information when a retry occurs.
(1)Trip factor, (2) output frequency (signed), (3) output current,(4)DC between P-N, (5) Inverter status(6) LAD status, (7)INV control mode., (8) Limit state.
(9) Special state, (10)Cumulative time during RUN(11) Cumulative power ON time
This data is stored in the internal memory when the power supply
is cut off.

Data

-

-

-

00
01
02
03
04
05
06

-

-

・The contents of the retry monitor display are the same as the trip monitor. 『15.2.1 Refer to "Checking
trip information".

15-4
15-4

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

15.2.3 Troubleshooting for protection functions related error
Error No. and Retry No. list
・Refer to the table below for the error code and retry code and the corresponding error content.
・Refer to the relevant section in this section for details of each error.
Error
No .

Retry
No .

E001

r001

E005

-

Page

Error
No .

Retry
No .

Overcurrent error

15-6

E041

-

RS485 communication error

15-16Motor overload error

15-7

E042

-

RTC error

15-16

Option error 0

Error name

Error name

E006

-

Regenerative brake overload error

15-8

E060

-

E007

r007

Overvoltage error

15-8

E061

-

Option error 1

E008

-

Memory error Note

15-9

E062

-

Option error 2
Option error 3

Page

E009

r009

Undervoltage error

15-9

E063

-

E010

-

Current detector error

15-9

E064

-

Option error 4

E011

-

CPU error Note

15-10

E065

-

Option error 5

E012

-

External trip

15-10

E066

-

Option error 6

E013

-

USP error

15-10

E067

-

Option error 7

E014

-

Ground fault error Note

15-11

E068

-

Option error 8

E015

-

Input overvoltage error

15-11

E069

-

Option error 9

E019

-

Temperature detector error

15-11

E090

-

STO shutoff error

E021

-

Temperature error

15-11

E091

-

STO internal error

E022

-

CPU communication error

15-12

E092

-

STO path 1 error

E024

-

Input phase loss

15-12

E093

-

STO path 2 error

E025

-

Main circuit error

15-12

E100

-

Encoder disconnection error

15-17

E026

-

Analog input level over error

15-12

E104

-

Positioning range error

15-17

E030

-

IGBT(Driver) error Note

15-13

E105

-

Speed deviation error

15-18

E034

-

Output phase loss

15-13

E107

-

Excessive speed error

15-18

E035

-

Thermistor error

15-13

E110

-

Contactor error

15-18

E036

-

Brake error

15-14

E120

-

PID soft start error

15-18

E038

-

Overload error at low speed

15-14

E121

-

Abnormal upper detecting error

15-18

E039

-

Controller overload error

15-15

E122

-

Abnormal lower detecting error

15-19

-

Operator keypad disconnection
error

15-15

E040

15-16

15-16
15-17

Note: These errors are major failure and these errors could not be canceled with keypad and input terminal function"Reset [RST]".When major failure is occurred, the output terminal function [MJA] turns ON. For details, see"9.11.2 Output Major Failure Signal".

15-5
15-5

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

List of trip codes and their contents, possible causes and remedies

E001 Overcurrent error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when detecting a large output current exceeding the overcurrent
level.
・Overcurrent level can be set by "Overcurrent detection level [bb160]". In factory setting, [bb160] is set
to 2.2 times the rated output current at ND rating regardless of ND/LD rating setting.
・When a large output current exceeding the overcurrent level is detected, the inverter can perform toretry for a certain number of times without tripping by the parameter setting.
Generation status

Possible causal

Steep load fluctuation
occursSudden occurrence
during operation
Motor hunting

Generated during
acceleration

・The acceleration time isshort.
・Insufficient acceleration
torque・Load inertia is large
・High friction torqueOccurred during
deceleration

・Deceleration time isshort
・Failure regenerative
torque・Load inertia is large

Generated immediately
after operation command
input・Occurrence of a ground
fault・Motor output wire isshort-circuited or out ofphase.
・Output element failure・Motor is captive

Generated immediately
after power-on

Generated after
prolonged use

Example of remedy
・The overcurrent [bA122] suppression function and the stall
prevention [bA120] function are enabled to suppress theovercurrent.
・When using vector control, it may be improved by adjusting"Velocity Response [HA115]".
・It may be improved by setting "IM motor capacity selection[Hb102]", "IM motor pole selection [Hb103]" correctly or by
performing auto-tuning.
・It may be improved by adjusting the "stabilization parameter[HA110]".
・Acceleration torque failure can be alleviated by increasing theacceleration time [FA-10].
・If acceleration torque is required, you may improve it by adjusting"manual torque boost amount [Hb141]", or changing the control
method with "control method [AA121]", etc.
・It may be improved by reviewing the load conditions.
・Lengthening the deceleration time [FA-12] can alleviate failure
regenerative torque.
・If regenerative torque is required, you may need to adjust the
manual torque boost [Hb141], change the control method with thecontrol method [AA121], etc.
・It may be improved by reviewing the load conditions.
・If this happens even when the power is turned on by the inverter
alone after disconnecting the output line to the motor, there is apossibility of failure.
・If the output line to the motor is disconnected and no longer
occurs, the wiring and motor must be checked.
・It may occur if the rotation of the motor is restricted.

・Load inertia is large

・The above countermeasures for "Occurring during Acceleration"
may be improved.

・Output element failure

・The output element or current detector may be faulty.

・Current detector failure

・Investigation and repair are required.

Changes in the system
environment
Aging degradation

It may also reduce the motor load and improve system maintenance,
for example, by cleaning the fan being driven or by removing clogged
ducts.
If the problem is not solved by reducing the load, etc., the parts thathave reached the end of their life may deteriorate over time.
The Inverter replacement is required.

15-6
15-6

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E005 Motor overload error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips when the electronic thermal function detects a motor overload
monitoring the inverter output current.
・Time until motor overload error and the behavior after motor overload error is changed according to
the setting of the motor rated current and the electronic thermal function. Note
Generation status

Possible causal

Heavy load continued
Occurred during acertain period of
operation
The thermal setting is high.

・Insufficient acceleration torque
Generated during
acceleration

・Load inertia is large
・High friction torque
The function to suppress theovercurrent is activated.

Occurred during
deceleration

Load inertia is large

Overvoltage suppression functionis activated.

Generated after
prolonged use

Changes in the system
environment
Aging degradation

Example of remedy
・It may be improved by reviewing the operating conditions andimproving the load conditions.
・If the "Electronic Thermal Level [bC110]" setting is not
appropriate, it may be improved by reviewing the setting.
・It may be improved by performing auto-tuning to set "IM motor
capacity selection [Hb102]", "IM motor pole selection [Hb103]",etc.
・It may be improved by adjusting the "stabilization parameter[HA110]".
・Acceleration torque failure can be alleviated by increasing theacceleration time [FA-10].
・If acceleration torque is required, you may improve it by adjusting"manual torque boost amount [Hb141]", or changing the control
method with "control method [AA121]", etc.
・It may be improved by reviewing the load conditions.
An overcurrent may have occurred.
Review the acceleration time [FA-10] and load conditions.
・Lengthening the deceleration time [FA-12] can alleviate failure
regenerative torque.
・If regenerative torque is required, you may need to adjust the
manual torque boost [Hb141], change the control method withthe control method [AA121], etc.
As a result of suppressing overvoltage, current may grow. Review thedeceleration time [FA-12] and load conditions.
It may also reduce the motor load and improve system maintenance,
for example, by cleaning the fan being driven or by removing
clogged ducts.
If the problem is not solved by reducing the load, etc., the parts thathave reached the end of their life may deteriorate over time.
The inverter replacement is required.

Note: When "Electronic thermal decrease function enable [bC112]" is "Disable (00)", the inverter does not accept a
reset operation for 10 seconds. Wait for a while before performing a reset operation.
When [bC112] is "Enable (Linear decrement) (01)" or " Enable (Time constant decrement) (02)", it can bereset immediately after error occurs. However, the overload accumulated value is not cleared and the value
continue to decrease after reset operation.
Therefore, when the inverter is restarted immediately after reset operation, the overload accumulated value
may quickly reach 100% and the error may occur again. In this case, wait for a while before restarting.

15-7
15-7

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E006 Regenerative brake overload error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the braking resistor operation circuit (DBTR) usage rate
exceeds the usage rate specified in "Dynamic brake use ratio [bA-60]".
Generation status
Occurred during
deceleration

Possible causal
・Deceleration time is short.
・Load inertia is large.
・Braking resistor capacity is small.
・Continuation of regenerative
operation
・Braking resistor capacity is small.

Generated whendriving
Be turned by external force

Generated byrepeated operation

Frequent operation cycles

Example of remedy
・If the inertia of the load is suddenly decelerated, it may be
improved by increasing the deceleration time [FA-12].
・If the deceleration time [FA-12] cannot be shortened, theselection of the resistor must be reviewed.
The resistor may not be fully consumed due to the highregenerative power returned from the motor. The load conditions
must only be reviewed and the resistor selection must be
reviewed.
The resistor may not be fully consumed because the regenerative
power returned from the motor increases when the fan is driven
by a strong wind or a load is unloaded by a crane. The loadconditions must only be reviewed and the resistor selection must
be reviewed.
・There is a possibility of improvement by reducing the frequencyof operation cycles.
・Adjusting the deceleration time [FA-12] or reviewing theselection of the resistor may also improve the performance.

E007 Overvoltage error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when detecting a high DC bus voltage exceeding the overvoltage
level.
・Overvoltage level is approx. DC400V (200V class) or approx. DC800V (400V class).
・When a high DC bus voltage exceeding the overvoltage level is detected, the inverter can perform toretry for a certain number of times without tripping by the parameter setting.
Generation status

Occurred during
deceleration

Possible causal

・Deceleration time is short.
・Load inertia is large.

Load inertia is large.

Generated when driving
Motor is running by external
force (Fan, Crane)

Occurred during the stop

Abnormal power voltage

Occurred during
the drooping control

Mutual interference causedby two motors strictly
controlling each other

Example of remedy
・If the load is decelerating rapidly, it may be improved byincreasing the deceleration time [FA-12].
・If the deceleration time [FA-12] cannot be shortened, it isnecessary to review the load conditions, enable the overvoltage
suppression function [bA140] or the overexcitation function[bA146], use a braking resistor, a regenerative braking unit, or aregenerative converter, etc.
If the inertia of the load is large, the regenerative power returned
from the motor is high, so it is likely to be overvoltage. It is necessary
to review the load conditions, enable the overvoltage suppressionfunction or the overexcitation function, use a braking resistor,
regenerative braking unit, or a regenerative converter.
If the motor speed is higher than the inverter output frequency(rotational speed), it is liable to become overvoltage. It isnecessary to review the load conditions, enable the overvoltage
suppression function [bA140] or the overexcitation
function [bA146], use a braking resistor, regenerative braking
unit, or a regenerative converter.
The power supply voltage may be rising or fluctuating. It may be
improved by reviewing the power supply environment or byinserting the input-side AC reactor.
When two motors driving the same axis are controlled by two
inverters, the control may diverge because they attempt to
output torque from each other. One control may be improved by
P control. See 9.6.7 Moving a single load with multiple motors(true-ping control).

15-8
15-8

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E008 Memory error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the internal memory has problems.
・"CPU error [E011]" may be issued instead.
・The reset operation is not accepted. A power on reset is required.
・When the inverter recovers by a power on reset, make sure the parameter setting is correct.
Generation status

Possible causal

Occurs sometime after the
power is turned on

Noise contamination

Generated after unintentional
power shutdown(main power supply, external＋24V power supply)Power shutdown
during memory
accessExample of remedy
To prevent external noise, it may be necessary to take noise
countermeasures such as moving the noise source away or inserting ashielding plate.
・Data must be recovered using data backed up beforehand by theremote operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards) or PC software.
・If you cannot recover, you must initialize the data. See "7.2.2
Initialization Parameters".
・If it cannot be restored by initialization, the inverter replacement isrequired.

E009 Undervoltage error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when detecting a low DC bus voltage below the undervoltage
level to prevent the temperamental circuit operation
・Undervoltage level is approx. DC173V (200V class) or approx. DC345V (400V class).
・When a low DC bus voltage below the undervoltage level is detected, the inverter can perform to retry
for a certain number of times without tripping by the parameter setting.
・Undervoltage error during stop can be disabled by a parameter setting.
Generation status

Possible causal

There was a power

The power supply voltage dropped.

failure.
Generated by driving

Inverter does not start
Generated after
prolonged use

Example of remedy

・The power supply voltage dropped.
・Insufficient power capacity
Insufficient power supply voltage

If the internal power supply does not completely turn off,you can restart after power is restored by setting the retryfunction.
If the power supply voltage drops or the power supply
capacity is insufficient, the power supply environment must
be reviewed.
Supply power according to the voltage class of the inverter.

・Changes in the system environment
・Deterioration of the capacitor
・Circuit failure

If undervoltage occurs frequently, it may be of life or
malfunction. The inverter replacement is required.

E010 Current detector error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when detects abnormally on the built-in current sensor.
Generation status

Generated after
power-onGenerated after
prolonged use

Possible causal

Example of remedy

The current detection circuit isbroken.

If this happens again even after resetting the error, the current detection
circuit may be faulty. The inverter replacement is required.

Have a noise source nearby

If there is a noise source nearby, it may be improved by taking measuresagainst noise, such as moving the noise source away or inserting ashielding plate.

The current detection circuit isbroken.

If this happens again even after resetting the error, the current detection
circuit may be faulty. The inverter replacement is required.

15-9
15-9

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E011 CPU error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the internal CPU has problems or malfunction.
Generation status

Possible causal

Internal CPU is corrupted.
Suddenly occurredHave a noise source nearby

Occurs during data writing.

Inconsistent data

Example of remedy
・It may be recovered by turning on the power supply again.
When it is restored, initialization must be executed. See "7.2.2
Initialization Parameters".
・If it does not recover, it may be malfunctioning. The inverter
replacement is required.
If there is a noise source nearby, it may be improved by taking
measures against noise, such as moving the noise source away orinserting a shielding plate.
It may be recovered by turning on the power supply again. When it
is restored, initialization must be executed. See "7.2.2 Initialization
Parameters".

E012 External trip
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the inverter receive an signal from an external equipment
to input terminal which is assigned "External fault [ES]".
Generation status

Unintentionallygenerated

Possible causal

・The terminal logical is reversed.
・Wrong wiring

Example of remedy
・The operation status from the external device and external device
must be checked, and the "External failure [ES]" terminal
assignment to the input terminal function, setting of a/b contact,
external trip command by communication, etc. must be reviewed.
・a/b contacts of the terminals can be changed in the settings of theinverters.

E013 USP error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the inverter power is turned on while applied an RUN
command.
・Unattended start protection function is valid when input terminal function "Unattended start protection[USP]" is turned on or "[USP] active selection [CA-73]" is "Enable (01)".
・RUN command detection is executed for 2 second after the power is turned on.
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Timing of entering operation command is fast.

Unintentionallygenerated

Operation command is not released

Attempting to move by a command other thana terminal

15-10
15-10

Review the sequence for entering the operation command.
After the power is turned on, it is necessary to wait for atleast 2 seconds before turning on the operation command.
Operation command must be released when the power isturned on.
When the power restoration restart prevention function isenabled, commands such as operation panel andcommunication commands are also subject to errors. Afterthe power is turned on, it is necessary to wait for at least 2
seconds before turning on the operation command.

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E014 Ground fault error
・The inverter instantly protects from ground-fault, when detects the ground fault between the inverter
output and the motor on power up.
・The function does not work while inverter trips.
・Enable/disable of the ground fault detection can be selected by "Detect ground fault selection[bb-64]"
setting.
・When the external ＋24V power supply has been turned on prior to the main power supply(R, S, T), theground fault detection function is activated at the time the main power supply is turned on.
Generation status
Generated byturning on thepower

Possible causal

Example of remedy

・Ground fault in wiringand motor

・Disconnect the wires to the motor and check the motor and wiring after
shutting off the power. Ground fault or insulation degradation is suspected.

・Insulation
deterioration of motor

・Turning on the power with the ground fault condition may cause a failure.
Check the motor and motor wiring without turning on the power.

E015 Input overvoltage error
・When "Power supply overvoltage selection [bb-61]" is "Error (01)", the inverter trips when persist
overvoltage condition for more than 100 seconds while the inverter is in stop status.
・Input overvoltage level can be set by "Power supply overvoltage level setting [bb-62]".
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Generated after power-on

Receiving voltage is high.

Generated after prolonged use

The power supply becomes
unstable.

Review of the power supply environment is required.
The power supply environment may have changed due toequipment replacement, etc.
Review of the power supply environment is required.

E019 Temperature detector error
・The inverter trips when there is a problem in the temperature detector circuit such as disconnection.
Generation status
Generated after
power-onPossible causal

Example of remedy

The temperature detection circuit is
disconnected or has failed.

The temperature detection circuit has failed. The inverter
replacement is required.

E021 Temperature error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the internal temperature is above the threshold.
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Occurred during
operation

Fins are clogged・Use in high-temperature environments
・Poor ambient cooling
Not satisfying normal installation
conditions

When the carrier frequency is high, the internal temperature of
the inverter rises easily. Decrease the setting of "Carrier
frequency [bb101]".
If the fins are clogged, cooling performance will be reduced.
Cleaning the fins may improve them.
It may be improved by improving the operating environmentand cooling environment.
Incorrect installation of the inverter may cause a failure. Install
the product correctly according to this manual.

Generated after
prolonged use

The temperature detection circuit has
failed.

If an error occurs continuously after resetting, the temperaturedetection circuit has failed. The inverter replacement is required.

Have a high carrier frequency

15-11
15-11

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E022 CPU communication error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when occurs a communication error in an internal CPU.
Generation status

Possible causal

Internal CPU is corrupted.
Suddenly began
to occurHave a noise source nearby

Example of remedy
・Reset operation, power restoration, or initialization operation may recover
the unit. When it is restored, initialization must be executed. See "7.2.2
Initialization Parameters".
・If it does not recover, it may be malfunctioning. The inverter replacement
is required.
If there is a noise source nearby, it may be improved by taking measuresagainst noise, such as moving the noise source away or inserting a shielding
plate.

E024 Input phase loss
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when detects a phase loss of input side of main circuitry.
・Enable/disable of the input phase loss detection can be selected by "Input phase loss detection enable[bb-65]" setting.
・The single-phase inverters shut off the power when input phase loss. In this case, set [bb-65] to"Disable (00)".
Generation status

Generated after
power-onGenerated after
prolonged use

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Poor contact or disconnection of
the power input line

It is necessary to shut off the power supply and check the wiringcondition of the power input line and the breaker. This can also occur
if the power supply voltage is defective, the contact is defective, orthe screw is not tightened properly.

A model using three-phase power
supply and single-phase input.

For models using a three-phase power supply, connect all threephases of the power input wires.

Poor contact or disconnection of
the power input line

Improvements may be made due to poor contact caused by loose
screws or by improving abnormalities in the circuit breaker.

E025 Main circuit error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when occurs a malfunction on the main circuit board.
Generation status
Generated after
power-onPossible causal
Have a noise source nearby
The main circuit board is faulty.

Example of remedy
If there is a noise source nearby, it may be improved by taking measuresagainst noise, such as moving the noise source away or inserting a shielding
plate.
If the main circuit board is faulty, the inverter replacement is required.

E026 Analog input level over error
・When "[VRF] input selection [Cb-08]" or "[IRF] input selection [Cb-18]" is "Current (02)", the inverter
trips when excessive current come into the analog input terminal [VRF]/[IRF].
・Power off the inverter when occurs this error, and check the wiring connection of analog input.
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Generated when acommand is issued byanalog current input.

Miswiring to control wiring

Check the wiring of the analog current input after the power is turned off.

15-12
15-12

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E030 IGBT(Driver) error
・At the time of an instantaneous overcurrent from motor or external braking resistor, or the mainelement failure the inverter turns off the output to protect the main element.
Generation status

Possible causal
・Occurrence of a ground fault

Generated
immediately after
operation

・Motor output wire is short-circuited.
Motor rotation constrained

Example of remedy
After the power is cut off, it is necessary to check the output line
to the motor, disconnection of the motor, etc. If this happens
when the motor wiring is removed, it is malfunctioning and needs
to be repaired.
If the motor is restrained during operation, a large current may
flow. You need to eliminate the cause.

The output element is defective.
Generated
immediately after
power-onOccurred during
operation

The output element is defective.

If the output element fails, the inverter replacement is required.

The external braking resistor
connection terminal is shortcircuited or a braking resistor lessthan the minimum connection
resistance value is connected.

After shutting off the power supply, it is necessary to check thebraking resistor wiring and resistance. If this happens even when
the braking resistor and motor output wire are disconnected, it ismalfunctioning and must be repaired.

Motor rotation constrained

If the motor is restrained during operation, a large current may
flow. You need to eliminate the cause.

E034 Output phase loss
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when a loose connection, disconnection of output line,
disconnection inside the motor, etc., are detected.
・Enable/disable of the output phase loss detection can be selected by "Output phase loss detection
enable [bb-66]" setting.
・Detection of output phase loss is executed in the section of output frequency 5Hz to 100Hz.
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Generated immediately
after operation

Contact or disconnection of
motor output wire or motor has
occurred.

・It is necessary to shut off the power supply and check the wiringcondition of the output wire and the motor. This can also occur
due to dielectric breakdown of the motor or improper screw
tightening.

Generated after
long-time operation

Contact or disconnection of
motor output wire or motor has
occurred.

・Be sure to connect all three phases of the motor output wire.
It is necessary to shut off the power supply and check the wiringcondition of the motor output wire and motor. If any of the screws
are loose, retighten them to improve the problem.

E035 Thermistor error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when an abnormal temperature is observed with an external
thermistor.
・When "Thermistor type selection [Cb-40]" is "PTC (01)", the input terminal [AUT] become for external
PTC type thermistor. In this case, "Input terminal [AUT] function [CA-05]" setting is invalid.
・The threshold of abnormal temperature can be set by "Thermistor error level [bb-70]" and "Thermistor
gain adjustment [Cb-41]".
・When [Cb-40] is "PTC (01)", this error is occurred when the external thermistor is disconnected and regenerated after trip reset. In this case, it is required to connect the thermistor or short between [AUT]
terminal and [COM] terminal.

15-13
15-13

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

Generation status
The motor isgenerating heat.

Motor does not
generate heat

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Motor is not cooling well
Heavy load conditions continue

Cooling environment should be improved
The drive environment of the motor must be reviewed.

Incorrect setting of thermistor
function

It may be improved by reviewing the "thermistor error level [bb-70]" and"thermistor adjusting [Cb-41]" sets.

Thermistor is defective

The thermistor must be repaired.

Malfunction due to noiseThis may be improved by noise suppression measures such as wiring
separation.

E036 Brake error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the inverter cannot detect whether the input function"Answer back from brake [BOK]" is ON or OFF during "Brake release wait time ([AF131], [AF134])" after
the inverter has output a "Brake release [BRK]".
・When [BOK] is not assigned to "Input terminal function([CA-01] to [CA-08])", this error is not occurred.
Generation status

Generated after
operation

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Break in the signal wire

Check the wires of the "Braking Check Signal [BOK]" input terminals andwhether signals are present.

Setting the Brake Function

Reconsider the brake confirmation wait time and input terminal logicalaccording to the signal sequence.

E038 Overload error at low speed
・When the inverter operate lower than 0.2Hz, shuts off the inverter output and trips when the electronic
thermal function detects a motor overload monitoring the inverter output current to prevent the mainelement failure.
Generation status

Possible causal

Generated at
low-speed output

Heavy motor load

Example of remedy
It is necessary to reduce the load in the low-speed range. If the error occurs
frequently, it is necessary to select an inverter with a larger capacity for the motor.

15-14
15-14

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E039 Controller overload error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips when the thermal electronic function detects aninverter(controller) overload monitoring the inverter output current.
・When the controller overload error occurs, reset command cannot be accepted for 10 seconds.
・There is no user parameter for controller (inverter) overload protection. the controller overload
detection is according to the rated output current at ND rating. It is impossible to change the time until
controller overload error and the behavior after controller overload error like "Motor overload error[E005]".
・Regardless the setting of "Load type selection [Ub-03]", ND rated derating is applied. For detail, see"17.3 Current Derating".
Generation status

Possible causal

Occurred during a certain
period of operation(or during acceleration)

Heavy load continued

It may be improved by reviewing the operating conditions andimproving the load conditions.

The load (ND/LD) was changed,
and the carrier frequency waschanged, resulting in an overload
due to current derating.

Improvements may be made by lowering the carrier frequency
setting, overload, overcurrent limit or other operating
conditions, or by improving the load conditions.

・Insufficient acceleration
torqueGenerated during
acceleration

Example of remedy

・Load inertia is large
・High friction torque
The function to suppress theovercurrent is activated.

・Acceleration torque failure can be alleviated by increasing theacceleration time [FA-10].
・ If acceleration torque is required, you may improve it byadjusting "manual torque boost amount [Hb141]", or changing
the control method with "control method [AA121]", etc.
An overcurrent may have occurred. Review the acceleration time
[FA-10] and load conditions.
・Lengthening the deceleration time [FA-12] can alleviate failure
regenerative torque.

Occurred during
deceleration

Generated after
prolonged use

Failure regenerative torque・If regenerative torque is required, you may need to adjust the
manual torque boost [Hb141], change the control method withthe control method [AA121], etc.

Overvoltage suppressionfunction is activated.

As a result of suppressing overvoltage, current may grow.
Review the deceleration time [FA-12] and load conditions.

Changes in the system
environment
Aging degradation

It may also reduce the motor load and improve system
maintenance, for example, by cleaning the fan being driven or byremoving clogged ducts.
If the problem is not solved by reducing the load, etc., the parts
that have reached the end of their life may deteriorate over time.
The Inverter replacement is required.

E040 Operator keypad disconnection error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when occurs this error between optional remote operator andinverter due to noises, loose connection or disconnection.
・Enable/disable of the timeout detection between optional remote operator and inverter can beselected by "Action selection at keypad disconnection [UA-20]" setting.
Generation status
Occurred after
communication starts

Possible causal
・Poor contact
・Disconnection
Noise contamination

Example of remedy
Check the wiring to see if the connection is correct.
Noise suppression measures such as wiring separation may improve the wiring.

15-15
15-15

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E041 RS485 communication error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when RS485 communication timeout occurs because of amalfunction due to noises, loose wire connection, wiring disconnection, etc.
・Enable/disable of the RS485 communication timeout detection can be selected by " RS485
communication error selection [CF-05]" setting.
・This error may occur even if the communication settings with the connected control device do notmatch. In this case, the connection is not normally established and an error occurs in the host device. It
is required to check the RS485 communication setting ([CF-01] to [CF-08]).
Generation status

Possible causal
・Poor contact

Occurred after
communication starts

・Disconnection
Noise contamination

Example of remedy
Check the wiring to see if the connection is correct.
Noise suppression measures such as wiring separation may improve the wiring.

E042 RTC error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the RTC data incorporated in the remote operator(VOP)
has returned to the initial data.
Generation status
Occurred at
power-onPossible causal

Example of remedy

The remote operator (OS-44
Ver.2.0 onwards) batteries run out.

This error occurs when the inverter power is turned on again if thebattery is exhausted. It is canceled by changing the battery andsetting the date and time.

E060 to E069 Option error 0 to 9
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the inverter detects errors in the option mounted in theoptional slot.
Generation status

Generated when option
was installed.

Possible causal

Example of remedy

The connector is not firmly
engaged.

The option may not be installed correctly. Make sure that the option
is installed properly.

There is a mistake in the use.

The details of the error differ for each option. For details, refer to theuser's guide for each option.

E090 STO shutoff error
・When "STO input display selection [bd-01]" is "Trip (02)", shuts off the inverter output and trips whenboth [ST1] terminal and [ST2] terminal are off (=STO state).
・When it is not required to trip at STO state, [bd-01] should be set to "Warning (display) (00)" or"Warning (without display) (01)".
・For details of safety function related error, see "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)".
Generation status

Safety function is
used.

Possible causal

Example of remedy
・If the error is not cleared even when the contact is turned ON, checkthat the wiring and STO signal input are normal.

The safety function system is faulty.

・If this occurs in an unexpected situation, execute a function
confirmation test (proof test). For more information, refer to theseparate volume, "Safety Function Guide (No. 2503E)".

15-16
15-16

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E091 STO Internal error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips when a failure is detected in the safety path inside WJ-C1.
・After this error occurs, the internal safety path keeps STO state until power off.
・For details of safety function related error, see "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)".
Generation status
Safety function is
used.

Possible causal

Example of remedy

The safety function system is faulty.

A dangerous failure may have occurred in the safety path inside theinverter. Stop the system, shut off the output to the motor, and thenexecute a function check test (proof test). For more information, referto the separate volume, "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)".

E092 STO Path1 error
E093 STO Path2 error
・When "Action selection after STO input change time [bd-04]" is "Trip (02)", shuts off the inverter output
and trips when either [ST1] terminal or [ST2] terminal is off.
・When it is not required to trip at STO state, [bd-04] should be set to "Maintain current status (00)" or"Disable (01)".
・For details of safety function related error, see " Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)".
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy
・Check that the wiring and STO signal input are normal.

Safety function isused.

The safety function system is faulty.

・Check that STO Input Switching Allowable Time (Return) [bd-02],
and STO Input Switching Allowable Time (Shutoff) [bd-05] sets areappropriate.

E100 Encoder disconnection error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when the inverter detect an encoder wiring disconnection.
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy
・Check the encoder signal and wiring for any abnormality.

Generated by turning on thepower

Encoder wire orencoder error

Sudden occurrence during
operation

Encoder wire orencoder error

Check the encoder signal and wiring for any abnormality.

Generated when the power iscut off or [E100] is added tothe error history every time
the power is turned on.

Encoder power
supply error

Check whether the encoder power is lost before the inverter.

・Check whether the power-on and startup of the encoder are notdelayed with respect to the power-on of the inverter.

15-17
15-17

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E104 Positioning range error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips, when he actual position exceeds the preset position range set by"Position control range setting (forward) [AE-52]" and "Position control range setting (reverse) [AE-54]".
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Insufficient torqueOccurred during
operation

Sliding due to faulty encoder
setting
Encoder setting error
Electronic gear setting error

It may be improved by reviewing the operating conditions andimproving the load conditions.
Check the installation of the encoder. Review any factors that may
cause slippage.
Check the encoder constant and other settings.
Check the electronic gear setting again.

E105 Speed deviation error
・When "Speed deviation error mode selection [bb-82]" is "Error (01)", shuts off the inverter output andtrips when the deviation between the frequency reference and the feedback speed exceeds thedeviation specified in "Speed deviation error detection level [bb-83]".
・When this error is occurred, output terminal function "Speed over deviation [DSE]" is turned on.
Generation status

Occurred during
operation

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Insufficient torque

It may be improved by reviewing the operating conditions andimproving the load conditions.

Sliding due to faulty encoder setting

Check the installation of the encoder. Review any factors that may
cause slippage.

Encoder setting error
Electronic gear setting error

Check the encoder constant and other settings.
Check the electronic gear setting again.

E107 Excessive speed error
・Shuts off the inverter output and trips when the motor speed rises over a preset value set by "Overspeed detection level [bb-80]" for the time set by "Over-speed detection time [bb-81]".
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Insufficient torqueOccurred during
operation

Encoder setting error
Electronic gear settingerror

It may be improved by reviewing the operating conditions and improving the loadconditions.
Check the encoder constant and other settings.
Check the electronic gear setting again.

E110 Contactor error
・When output terminal function "Contactor check signal [COK]" is assigned to one of "Input terminal
function ([CA-01] to [CA-08])", shuts off the inverter output and trips when [COK] is not turned on/off
for the time set by "Contactor response check time [AF123]" after operation of "Contactor control[CON]".
Generation status[COK] did not ON during thecontactor check period whenstarting[COK] did not OFF duringcontactor check when stopped

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Incorrect wiring

Check the intelligent input setting and wiring.

Contactor response failure

Check the operation including the contactor response time.

Incorrect wiring
Contactor response failure

Check the intelligent input setting and wiring.
Check the operation including the contactor response time.

15-18
15-18

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

E120 PID soft start error
・When "PID soft start error detection enable [AH-81]" is "Enable(Error) (01)", shuts off the inverter output
and trips when a PID feedback value is not achieved a threshold level within the determined time.
・The time until trip can be set by "PID soft start time [AH-80]", and The threshold level of PID feedback
value can be set by "PID soft start error detection level [AH-82]".
Generation status

Occurred during
operation

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Target value too low

It may be improved by reviewing the setting of "PID soft start target level [AH-76]".

The wire is broken.

PID feedback may not be entered properly. Check the wires and check "PID1 Feedback
Data Monitor (after calculation) [db-44]".

E121 Abnormal upper detecting error
E122 Abnormal lower detecting error
・When "Abnormal upper level detecting action [bE-05]" and "Abnormal lower level detecting action [bE05]" are "Trip (01)" or "Trip after deceleration stop (02)", shuts off the inverter output and trips when thevalue displayed on monitor function specified in "Abnormal detection target[bE-02]" exceeds or falls
below the steady operation range.
・When the value exceeds the range, "Abnormal upper detecting error [E121]" is generated.
・When the value falls below the range, "Abnormal lower detecting error [E122]" is generated.
Generation status

Possible causal

Example of remedy

Occurred during
normal operation

The setting of the steadystate operation range isincorrect.

The range setting of the monitor value considered to be abnormal may beincorrect. The setting parameters of the detection area differ depending on thesetting of "Non-stationary detection selection [bE-01]", so check whether thesetting is correct.

15-19
15-19

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

15.3 Troubleshooting the warning function
15.3.1 Warning display
・If the set parameter is inconsistent with other settings, a warning is displayed and the program lamp[PRG] flashes.
・The warning display and warning display conditions are shown below. When a warning is displayed,refer to the contents of the table to correct the parameter. (Even if an operation command is input, it
will not automatically rewrite to the correct value.)・The latest warning is stored in "Warning monitor [dE-50]". If no warning occurs, "_____" is displayed.
Warning
Code

Warning reconditions

102

First highest frequency [Hb105]＜

1st frequency upper limiter [bA102]

103

First highest frequency [Hb105]＜

1st frequency lower limiter [bA103]

106

First highest frequency [Hb105]＜

1st Main Speed Command Setting (Monitor) [FA-01]

107

First highest frequency [Hb105]＜

1st Aux. Speed Set Setting (Monitor) [FA-02]

202

2nd highest frequency [Hb205]＜

2nd frequency upper limiter [bA202]

203

2nd highest frequency [Hb205]＜

2nd frequency lower limiter [bA203]

206

2nd highest frequency [Hb205]＜

2nd main speed command setting (monitor) [FA-01]

207

2nd highest frequency [Hb205]＜

Secondary speed command setting (monitor) [FA-02]

15-20
15-20

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

15.3.2 Other display
・During resetting, under-voltage condition, or while the restart function is standby for retrying, theoperation panel is displayed as follows.
Name

Description

During reset

This is displayed during reset (when the "Reset [RS]" input terminal is ON
or when the trip status is reset by pressing STOP/RESET button).

Under-voltage standby

Displayed during under voltage standby and power shutdown.

External +24V power isbeing supplied

Appears when only the external +24V power supply is operating.

Retry wait in progress

Displayed when the restart function is running.

Restricting operationcommandThis message is displayed when the restricted operation command is input
while the operation direction is restricted by the "Operation direction limit
selection [AA114]".

Display Operators
RotateWhen "Pattern 0" is set for "Default selection [Ub-02]", this item isdisplayed during data initialization.
When "Pattern 1" is set for "Default selection [Ub-02]", this item isdisplayed during data initialization.
When "Pattern 3" is set for "Default selection [Ub-02]", this item isdisplayed during data initialization.
Data initializing

Displayed during initialization of the trip history.
Displayed alternately
When "Light load (LD)" is set to "Load spec. selection [Ub-03]", it isdisplayed during initialization.
When "Standard load (ND)" is set to "Load spec. selection [Ub-03]", it isdisplayed during initialization.

No dataThis is displayed when there is no relevant data.
(trip monitor, warning monitor)

Communication error

Appears when a problem occurs between the external digital operator andthe inverter.

Auto-tuning OK

Appears when auto-tuning ends normally.

Auto-tuning NG

Displayed when auto-tuning fails.

Functional safety STO
shut-off

Displayed when STO input/display selection [bd-01] is "Warning (withindication) (00)", and when [ST1]/[ST2] is both Open and STO blocked.

Functional safety ST1/ST2
mismatch

Depending on ON/OFF timing of [ST1]/[ST2], one of [P-1A]/ [P-1b]/[P2A]/[P-2b]/[P-1C]/[P-2C] is displayed depending on the settings of "STO
Input Allowable Time Input Indication Selection [bd-03]" and "STO Input
Allowable Time After Operation Selection [bd-04]".
For more information, see "14.1 Using Safety Function STO (Safe Torque
Off".

15-21
15-21

Blink

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

15.4 Others
15.4.1 Troubleshooting other than trip occurrence and warning
・The inverter has not tripped, but we gathered examples of remedies when it does not operate as
expected.
・If there are any events in the "Problems occurring" column, refer to the respective chapters in the"Check details" column or the next page for the remedies.
・If you cannot solve the problem by checking the following information, please use the contact
information on the back cover.
Issues that may exist

Confirmation details

1

A trip or warning has occurred. The operation panel
display is different from normal.

『 15.2 Refer to "Troubleshooting Protection Functions" and"15.3 Troubleshooting Warning Functions" to clear the cause of
the trip or warning.

2

The operation panel does not light even when the main
power is turned on.
(The power indicator [PWR] does not light.)

Check "S1: The power does not turn on (the power indicator[PWR] on the main unit does not light)."3

The operation indicator [RUN] on the control panel does
not light even when an operation command is inputted.

Confirmation "S2: Operation command setting or operationcommand is incorrect".

4

When the operation command is ON, the operation
indicator [RUN] lights up to indicate the operation
status, but it does not operate according to the intended
frequency command. (The [FA-01] display is 0Hz, does
not operate at the intended frequency for the analogue
voltage/current that is actually being inputted, etc.)

Confirmation "S3: Frequency command setting or frequency
command is incorrect".

5

The operation command and frequency command are
input correctly, but the motor does not drive.

Confirmation "S4: Frequency-output cutoff/limit function is
activated".

6

The motor is driven but not driven at the intended
frequency. ([FA-01] indicates the frequency command
value actually entered, but the motor speed is not theintended output, the output frequency becomes
oscillatory or unstable, etc.)

Depending on the situation,"S5: The motor speed does not increase.""S6: Motor rotates in reverse.""S7: Output-frequency becomes unstable.""S8: Torque is not generated."
Check

7

The parameter to be set is not displayed or theparameter cannot be set.

Confirmation "S9: The parameter to be set is not displayed" or"S10: The control panel cannot be operated or the parametercannot be set."

8

Other problems other than the above have occurred.

Check after "S11: Noise is noisy for motors and machines" andaddress the issue. If the problem persists, use the contact
information on the back cover.

15-22
15-22

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

S1: The power does not turn on. (The power indicator [PWR] on the main unit does not light.)
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

Power is not turned on.

Check that the power supply satisfying the specifications is
supplied to the inverter power input side.

17-2
17-3
17-4

[P+], [P1/+1] The short-circuit bar or
DC reactor between the terminals is
disconnected.

[P+], [P1/+1] Connect the short-circuit bar or DC reactor
between the terminals correctly.

5-3

The power input wiring is broken or theconnection terminals are loose.

Review the wiring status.

-

External power +24V is input, but main
power is not input.

When the external power +24V is applied, the parametersettings can be changed, but the motor cannot be driven.
Input the main circuit power supply.

5-3
5-16

S2: Operation command setting or operation command is incorrect
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

The motor does not drive even when an
operation command is input.

If the operation indicator [RUN] on the control panel does not light up
when an operation command is inputted, the operation command is
not recognized. Check the contents of this table.

-

Check that the setting of "Operation command selection [AA111]" is"Operation panel RUN key. (02)". LED to the right of RUN key lights
when the actuator can be operated using RUN key on the control
panel.

9-1

STOP/RESET buttons on the control panel can be enabled or disabledusing the "STOP key selection [AA-13]". Check this parameter.

9-5

Check that the setting of "Operation command selection [AA111]" is"[FR]/[RR] terminal (00)" or "3 wire (01)".

9-2
9-3

ON either of them when the operation command is executed at the[FW]/[RV] input terminal. (If both are ON, it is judged as a stopping
command.)9-2

Check if the [CA-01] to [CA-08] setting is correct.

9-204

Monitor the status of the input terminals in the Input Terminal Monitor[dA-51] and confirm that there is no problem with the wiring.

10-11"Forced command switching [F-OP]" input
terminal is ON.

If the "Forced command switching [F-OP]" function is not required, turnOFF those inputs.

9-4
9-21

Settings or wiring other than the above areincorrect.

Check the setting of "Operation command selection [AA111]", thesetting of input terminal function assignment and the wiring. For
details, refer to "9.1 Operation Command Selection and Alarm Reset".

-

You want to drive the motor by pressing
RUN key. However, the setting, etc. isincorrect.

[FR]/[RR] You want to move the unit using
the input connector or [STA]/[STP]/[F/R]
input connector, but the setting is wrong.

15-23
15-23

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

S3: Frequency command setting or frequency command is incorrect
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

The frequency command is notrecognized.

If the setting of the frequency command cannot be changed with [FA-01]
or the set frequency command is not displayed in [FA-01], the frequency
command is not recognized correctly. Check the contents of this table.

-

The frequency command destination isincorrect.

Check if "Main speed command selection [AA101]" is set correctly.

9-7

When "Main speed command selection [AA101]" is“[VRF] terminal input(01)" or "[IRF] terminal input (02)", measure the voltage/current input tothe [VRF]/[IRF] terminal with a tester, etc., and check whether the input
voltage/current and wires are correct.

5-16

When "Main speed command selection [AA101]" is "Parameter setting(07)", set the frequency command in [FA-01].

9-8

When performing multi-speed operation ([DFL] to [DHH] and [SF1] to[SF7]), set the frequency command correctly to [Ab110]/ [Ab-11] to [Ab25].

9-10

When the frequency command is analog
input or pulse input, the motor drives at
a value different from the input command
value.

Check whether the settings of "Main speed command selection [AA101]",[VRF]/[IRF] terminal analogue input adjustment parameter ([Cb-01] to[Cb-33]), pulse input adjustment parameter ([CA-90] to [CA-96]), etc. arecorrect.

9-9
9-15
9-207

"Forced command switching [F-OP]" input
terminal is ON

If the "Forced command switching [F-OP]" function is not required, turnOFF those inputs.

9-4
9-21

The main circuit wiring is disconnected orincorrect.

Check the main circuit wiring for disconnection or incorrectconnection.

-

Settings or wiring other than the above areincorrect.

Check if there is any mistake in the function assignment and wiring of thecontrol circuit terminal block. For details, refer to "9.2 Selecting
Frequency Reference".

-

Frequency reference is 0Hz.

S4: Frequency-output cutoff/limit function is activated.

Possible causal
The "Reset [RST]" connector is ON.
The "Free run stop [MBS]" input terminal isON.
"Commercial switch [CS]" input terminal is
ON.
"Operation enable [REN]" input terminal isassigned and OFF.

Example of remedy[RST] If the input-terminal is ON, the product will be in the reset-stateand operation commands will not be accepted. [RST] The input
terminals must be OFF.
[MBS] If the input terminal is ON, it will be in the free-run stop status
and the operation command will not be accepted. [MBS] The input
terminals must be OFF.
[CS] If the terminal is ON, the commercial power supply is shut off andoperation commands are not received. Check the commercial switching
function.
[REN] If the terminal function is OFF when using the input terminal, theoperation command will not be accepted. Check the operation
permission signal.

Reference
9-214

9-77

9-82

9-34

"Operation orientation limit selection[AA114]" is set.

Set [AA114] correctly.

9-33"Reverse rotation prevention selection[HC114]" is set.

Set [HC114] correctly.

9-33

The short-circuit wire of the [ST1]/[ST2]terminal of the safety function is
disconnected or in OFF status.

[ST1]/[ST2] The terminal is for functional safety. When this function
is not used, a short-circuit wire must be provided.

14-1

Wrong or broken wiring, etc.

Check if there is any abnormality such as an output wire to the motor ora broken wire inside the motor.

15-24
15-24

-

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

S5: The motor speed does not increase.
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

The stall prevention function or
the overcurrent limit function is
activated.

The stall prevention function or the overcurrent limit function limits theoutput current by stopping acceleration or lowering the output frequency
when the output current exceeds the operating level. Increasing theoperating level may improve the performance.

9-130
9-132

Frequency command is limited

If the frequency upper limiter and maximum frequency settings are low, they
can be improved by raising the settings. To limit the frequency, use theupper limiter function rather than the highest frequency.

9-32

The frequency command value isoverwritten by another frequency
command method.

If a high-priority frequency command is input due to jogging, multi-speedcommand, etc., the actual frequency command may be low. Review ofterminal function and frequency command destination is required.

9-6
9-10
9-13

Long acceleration time

If the acceleration time setting is long, it will accelerate slowly. Reduce theacceleration time.

9-22

Motor is constrained.

If the motor shaft is constrained by something that obstructs the brake or
motor rotation (such as a jam), the cause must be removed.

-

S6: Motor rotates in reverse.
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

The phase order of the wiring to the motor
Is incorrect.

The rotation is reversed by replacing the two phases in the wiring to themotor.

-For operation with RUN button on thecontrol panel. The rotational direction
setting is incorrect.

Check the setting of "RUN key Operation direction selection [AA-12]".

9-2[F/R] Check the input logic of the input terminals.

9-3
9-204

Enable "Reverse rotation prevention selection [HC114]".

9-33

When using the 3-wire function, the inputof the "3-wire forward/reverse [F/R]" input
terminal is reversed.
In the case of sensorless vector control,
the motor reverses for a moment in the
low-speed range,

S7: Output-frequency becomes unstable
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

Various parameters are not appropriate.

Check the basic setting parameters of the motor.
This may be improved by adjusting the stabilization constant or byremoving the output frequency slightly from the power supply
frequency.

Load fluctuation is large.

It may be necessary to review the capacity of both the motor and theinverter.

-

The input power supply voltage fluctuates.

Option reactors (DC or AC) or input-side noise filters may be used toreduce power supply fluctuations.

5-9

15-25
15-25

8-4
8-18
9-45

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

S8: Torque is not generated
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

The various parameters are not appropriate
and the acceleration torque is not.

Adjust by setting the torque boost or switching to sensorless vector
control.

9-40
9-41
9-46

The inverter is used for winding down.

When the torque is insufficient in regenerative operation, perform thefollowing adjustment.
- The deceleration time is increased.
- Set "Overexcitation function selection (V/f) [bA146)" to "Always
operation (01)".
- Braking resistor or regenerative braking unit is used.

9-22
9-135
9-137

Too heavy load

It may be necessary to review the capacity of both the motor and theinverter.

-

S9: The parameter to be set is not displayed.
Possible causal

Display restrictions are set

The display is fixed.

Example of remedy
The display limit function may be activated. Review "Display selection[UA-10]". If [UA-10] cannot be changed, it may be protected by "Viewselection (UA-10) password [UA-01]". If this happens, cancel the
password.
Operations on the operation panel are unavailable when the "Display
Fixed [DISP]" of the input terminal function is ON. [DISP] OFF the
INPUT terminal.

Reference
7-7
7-18

7-21

S10: The operation panel cannot be operated or the parameters cannot be set.
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

The display is fixed.

Operations on the operation panel are unavailable when the "Display
Fixed [DISP]" of the input terminal function is ON. [DISP] OFF the
INPUT terminal.

7-21

The inverter is running.

Some parameters cannot be changed during operation. If it cannot bechanged, stop the inverter once.

7-1

The soft lock function is activated.

Disable the soft lock function.

7-17

The parameter setting range, etc. haschanged due to a change in the load
specification setting.

The setting range of some parameters is changed by changing "Loadspecification selection [Ub-03]", and some parameters are hidden.
The load specification selection status of the inverter can be checked
by "Inverter load specification selection status monitor [dC-01]". It isnecessary to change the load specifications or review the setting
within the settable range.

8-2
10-17

15-26
15-26

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

S11: Noise from motors and machines is noisy.
Possible causal
Carrier frequency is set low
The rotation frequency of the motor andthe natural frequency of the machine areresonant.
The motor is over-excited.

Example of remedy

Reference

Increase "Carrier frequency [bb101]". However, noise generated from theinverter and leakage current may increase. Derating may also be required
for the output current depending on the model.

9-152
17-11

Change the set frequency. If resonance occurs during
acceleration/deceleration, avoid the resonance frequency with thefrequency jump function ([AG101] to [AG106]).
Match the "IM base frequency [Hb104]" and "Motor rated voltage[Hb106]" with the motor rating. If this does not improve, slightly lower the"Output-voltage gain [Hb180]" or adjust the control method with free V/f
response.

9-6
9-156
8-4
9-38
9-45
9-135

S12: Cannot operate/set via Modbus communication
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

The communication parameter settings(station number, communication speed,
and parity settings) are incorrect orchanges have not been reflected.

Check the setting of Modbus (I/O) communications related parameter([CF-01] to [CF-12]). If you change the setting, you must restart thecommunication by selecting "Communication restart selection [Ub-06]" orturn the power off and on again. For details, see "7.2.3 Restarting thecommunication settings".

11-1

Operation command selection is not"RS485 setting (03)".

Check if "Operation command selection [AA111]" is set to "RS485 setting(03)".

9-4

Main speed command selection is not"RS485 setting (08)"Check if "Main speed command selection [AA101]" is set to "RS485 setting(08)".

9-14

Wrong wiring

Check that the communication cable is correctly wired.

11-3

The terminating resistor is connected
incorrectly.

Termination resistors must be connected to both ends of the devices
connected by RS485 communication. Connect the terminating resistor
correctly. If the last stage is WJ-C1, turn ON the terminating resistor
selector switch.

11-3

There is a lot of noise and there is acommunication error.

Review the wiring, such as changing the wiring to a shielded cable, andreview the grounding to the signal ground.

1-9

S13: Earth leakage breaker trips when operating
Possible causal

Large leakage current of inverter

Example of remedy

Reference

Decrease the carrier frequency [bb101].

9-152

Increase the sensitivity current of the earth leakage breaker or consider
replacing the earth leakage breaker with a one with high sensitivity
current.

5-9

15-27
15-27

Chapter 15

Troubleshooting

S14: DC braking does not work
Possible causal

Example of remedy

DC braking force, DC braking time, etc.
are not set or are incorrect.

Check the setting of the DC braking-related parameter ([AF101] to[AF109]).

"External DC brake [DB]" is not assigned
to the input terminal function orincorrect wiring.

When performing DC braking with signal-input, check with the above
sets whether "External DC braking [DB]" is assigned. Also check the [DB]terminals.

Reference
9-69
9-78
9-78
9-204

S15: Noises may occur in devices near inverters, TV/radios etc.
Possible causal

Conducted/radiated noise from theinverter

Example of remedy

Reference

Keep the inverter as far away from nearby devices, TV/radio, etc. as possible.

1-9

Insert a zero-phase noise filter into the power Input/Output of the inverter.
Insert a radio noise filter (XY filter) into the power Input of the inverter.

5-9

S16: Cannot operate/set from optional communication board
Possible causal

Example of remedy

Reference

Operation command selection
destination or main speed command
selection destination is not "option""Option (09)" may not be set for "Main speed command selection [AA101]"and "Option (04)" may not be set for "Operation command selection [AA111]".
[AA101], Check the [AA111] setting.

9-4
9-14

S17: Cannot connect to PC software
Possible causal
The communication cable isdisconnected or incorrect.

Example of remedy
Check that there is no disconnection or contact failure at thecommunication cable or connection terminal, or that the cablespecifications are not incorrect, etc.

15-28
15-28

Reference
12-1

Chapter 16

Chapter 16

Maintenance and Inspection

Maintenance and Inspection

16

This chapter describes how to perform maintenance and inspection on the product.
When performing each work, carefully read "Chapter 1 Safety Instructions/Risks" and the corresponding
chapters and pay attention to safety.

DANGER● Risk of electric shock !
Electric
Shock

DO

Prohibited

Electric
Shoc・
k
Fire
Injury・Before inspecting the inverter, be sure to turn off the power supply and wait for 10 minutes or more.
(Confirm that the charge lamp on the inverter is turned off and the DC voltage between terminals[P/+] and [N/-] is DC45V or less.)
・Entrust only a designated person for maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts.
(Be sure to remove wristwatches and metal accessories, e.g., bracelets, before maintenance andinspection work. Be sure to use insulated tools for the work.)
・Do not perform withstand voltage test.

● Risk of electric shock, fire and injury !

・Never modify the unit.
Prohibited

16-1
16-1

Chapter 16

Maintenance and Inspection

16.1 Cautions for maintenance and inspection
16.1.1 Daily inspection
・Check that the following abnormalities are not observed during operation.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Description
Motor operation is not abnormal.
There is no abnormality in the environment where the device is installed.
There is no abnormality in the cooling system.
No abnormal vibration or sound is observed.
No abnormal overheat or discoloration is observed.
No abnormal smell is observed.

ㇾ
□
□
□
□
□
□

・While the inverter is running, check the input voltage of inverter using a multimeter, etc.
No.

Description

1

There is no frequent occurrence of variation of power supply voltage.

2

Three-phase AC voltage keeps a good balance.

ㇾ□□

16.1.2 Cleaning
・Keep the inverter in a clean condition.
No.
1
2
3

Description
When cleaning the inverter, use a soft cloth soaked in neutral detergent to gently wipe up thedirtied parts.
Do not use solvents such as acetone, benzene, toluene, or alcohol as they may melt the surface or
strip the coating of the inverter.
Do not use detergents or alcoholic cleaners to clean the keypad displays.

ㇾ
□
□
□

16.1.3 Periodic inspection
・Check sections that cannot be inspected unless operation is stopped and sections requiring periodic
inspection.
No.

Descriptionㇾ

1

Check that there is no abnormality in the cooling system and clean the air filter, etc.
Check the tightness and retighten if necessary. Due to effects of vibration or temperature change,tightened portions of screws or bolts may loosen. Make sure to carefully check and perform thework.
No corrosion or damage is observed on the conductors and insulators.
Measurement of insulation resistance
Checking and replacing the cooling fan, smoothing capacitor, and relay

□

2
3
4
5

□
□
□
□

16.1.4 Periodic function test for safety function (STO)
・When handling the HF-620 as a functional safety certified product, be sure to perform the following
items. For details, refer to the separate "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)".
・A periodical STO functional test must be performed at least once in a year to maintain the intended
safety performance level of the STO function. This periodical STO function test is one of the conditions
for the STO function of HF-620 to meet PL e of ISO13849-1 and SIL 3 of IEC61800-5-2.

16-2
16-2

Chapter 16

Maintenance and Inspection

16.2 Daily inspection and periodic inspection
16.2.1 Inverter inspection list

Details of inspection

Every

Inspection method

Criterion

2 year

1 year

Daily

Inspection Inspection
part
items

Inspectioncycle

T e s te r
deviceSurrounding
environment

Check the ambient
temperature, level ofhumidity, dust, … etc..

✓

Refer to "Chapter 4
Installation".

The ambient temperatureand level of humidity arewithin the operating
Thermorange.
meter,
There are no freeze,
Hygrocondensation, dust,
meter,
corrosive gas, explosiveDatagas, flammable gas,
loggergrinding fluid mist,hydrogen sulfide and
salt.

Whole
inverter

Check that there are noabnormal vibrations or
noises.

✓Check visually andauditorily.

No abnormality.

Power supply Check that the main
voltagecircuit voltage is normal.

✓

Measure the line-to-line
Multimeter,
Within the allowable AC
voltage of the inverter
Digitalvoltage fluctuation.
main circuit terminals
multimeter[R/L1], [S/L2], and [T/L3].

GeneralCheck the resistance
between the main circuitand the ground terminals.
(between main circuit
General check and ground terminals)

Check looseness intightening parts.
Check for overheating
traces.
Check for straining in
Conductors an conductors.
cablesCheck for cable coating
damage.
Terminal
Check for any damage.
block

✓

Remove all wires from themain circuit terminal andcontrol circuit terminal of
the inverter. Then,
Resistance no less thanshortcircuit all terminals of
5MΩ.
the main circuit terminal,
and measure between thisshortcircuited part and theground terminal.

✓

Check tighten.

No abnormality.

-✓

Check visually.

No abnormality.

-

Check visually.

No abnormality.

-

Check visually.

No abnormality.

-

✓

✓

Smoothingcapacitor

Relay

Check the resistance
between all the terminals.

Check for capacitor fluid
leakage.
Check that the relief
valve does not swell or
protude.
No chatter sound while
operating.
Check contacts fordamage.

DC500Vclassohmmeter(megger)✓MaincircuitInverter andconverter
circuits(including
resistors)-✓

Remove all wires from themain circuit terminal ofRefer to "16.2.4
the inverter.
Then measure between Checking the Inverterand Converter Section".
main power supply
Reference forterminals and DC bus
replacement of thevoltage terminals[P/+]/[N/-], and between inverter and converter
motor output terminals
Start/Stop:106 cycles
Note:3and DC bus voltage
terminals [P/+]/[N/-] or[+]/[-] in the 1Ω range.

Analogmultimeter✓
Check visually.

No abnormality. Note:1,3,4-✓

Check auditorily.

No abnormality.

-✓

Check visually.

No abnormality.

-

✓

16-3
16-3

Chapter 16

CoolingsystemCooling fan

Cooling fin

Display
Display
External
meter

GeneralWhile performing a unit
operation of the inverter,
check the balance of theoutput voltage among theindividual phases.
Carry out a sequential
protection test, andcheck the protective anddisplay circuits for any
abnormality.
Check that there are noabnormal vibrations or
noises.
Check for loose
connections.
Check for obstrutions/clogging.
Check if the charge
lamp and the keypad's
LEDs light up.
Display cleaning.

Every

✓

✓

Simulate a shortcircuit or An error must be
open of the inverter
detected according to
output protection circuit. the sequence.

-

Check auditorily andvisually.

○

Check that there is noodour.

○

Check the resistance
between the main circuitand the ground terminals.

-

Check visually.

○

Check visually.

No clogging.

-

Check visually.

Check the lighting.

-With cleaning rag.
Check the meters
readings on the control
panel.

-

Regulation and control
value are satisfactory.

Check visually,auditorily,
No abnormality.
and by touch.

Motor
Insulation
resistance

Smooth operation. No
abnormality. Wind flows
to the top.
Approximate
replacement period:
10 years Note:2,3,5○○

Check that there are noabnormal vibrations or
noises.

T e s te r
deviceDigitalmultimeter
Ammeter,
Voltmeter○○

Criterion

Measure the line voltages
Phase-to-phase voltage
between the [U/T1],
balance[V/T2], and [W/T3]
200V class: within 4V
terminals of the inverter
400V class: within 8V
main circuit.

○

Check that Indicatedvalues are normal.

Inspection method

2 yearProtection
circuitOperation
check

Details of inspection

1 yearControl
circuitInspection
cycle
Daily

Inspection Inspection
part
items

Maintenance and Inspection

Note:6Check for abnormal
superheating, damages
No abnormality.
and so on.
Remove the wiring fromthe main circuit terminals[U/T1], [V/T2] and[W/T3] of the inverter,
No less than 5MΩ.
shortcircuit the motor
wire (for 3 phases), andmeasure with a megger
between the motor wire
andthe ground terminal.

Voltmeter,
Ammeter,
etc.
--

DC500Vclassohmmeter(megger)

Note: 1. The life span of the smoothing capacitor is influenced by the ambient temperature. Refer to "16.2.5
Smoothing Capacitor Life Curve" for replacing measures.
2. The life span of the cooling fan is influenced by the ambient temperature, the dirt and the change in its
environmental conditions. Check these circumstances on the usual inspection.
3. The estimated time before replacement (Number of years/cycle) and the "16.2.5 Smoothing Capacitor Life
Curve" are based on the design lifespan, not guaranteed.
4. In case using an inverter with a long storage period, perform the following aging before use. (Aging is not
required if the storage temperature is 5 to 35°C and within 2 years.)
If the input voltage can be adjusted: Input about AC150V for 200V class and about AC300V for 400V classfor about 10 minutes, then gradually input higher value and operate while checking the functions.
If the input voltage cannot be adjusted: Input the inverter rated voltage and run for about 30 minutes tocheck for any problems with the functions. Then, turn on the power again to perform full-scale operation.
5. If the cooling fan is locked due to dust, etc., it takes about 5 to 10 seconds to restart even if dust isremoved.
6. Follow the instruction manual for the motor.

16-4
16-4

Chapter 16

Maintenance and Inspection

16.2.2 Megger test
・When testing an external circuit with a megger, disconnect all the external circuit cables from theinverter to prevent it from being exposed to the test voltage.
・In the control circuit carry out a conduction test, use a tester (with high resistance range), do not use a
megger or buzzer/continuity tester.
・Use a DC500V megger for the megger test.
・For the megger test of the inverter main circuit, short-circuit the terminals with wires as shown in the
figure below.
・As a result of the megger test, if the resistance value is 5MΩ or higher, it is normal.

Do not connect
power supply wires.

Power supply

N/-

PR

P1/+1

P/+

R/L1

U/T1

S/L2

V/T2

T/L3

W/T3
G

DC500V megger

Ground terminal

Motor

M

Do not connect
wires to the motor.

16.2.3 Withstand voltage test
・Do not carry out a withstand voltage test for the inverter. The test may damage its internal parts,
deteriorating the inverter.

16-5
16-5

Chapter 16

Maintenance and Inspection

16.2.4 Checking the inverter and converter section
Checking method of inverter and converter
・Using the analog multimeter, it can be checked if the inverter or converter unit are defective or nondefective.

1. Preparation(1) Disconnect all the wires to the main circuit terminals (wires to [R/L1], [S/L2], [T/L3]), [U/T1],[V/T2], [W/T3], [P/+], [P1/+1] [N/-], [PR] terminals).
(2) Preparation the analog multimeter (The use range is 1Ω resistance measurement range.)

2. Checking method
The good-or-bad condition of conduction status of terminals on the inverter main circuit terminal canbe judged by alternately changing the polarity of tester for measurement.
・By measuring the DC bus voltage between terminal [P/+] and [N/-] in the DC voltage range, checkthat electricity is fully discharged from the smoothing capacitor before performing check.
・When electricity is not conducted, the value is almost infinite. When conducting, it indicates several
ohms to several tens of ohms. Due to effects of the smoothing capacitor, electricity may be
conducted instantly and may not show infinity value. The measured values vary depending on theelement type, tester type, etc., but it is acceptable if the values in each section are nearly equal. The
measured value may be shifted by several ohms due to the current limiting resistance for preventing
inrush current.
Tester polarity
D1
D2

Converter

D3
D4
D5
D6
TR1
TR2

Inverter

TR3
TR4
TR5
TR6

DBTR

TR7

(Red)

(Black)Measured
value

R/L1
P1/+
S/L2
P1/+
T/L3
P1/+
R/L1
N/S/L2
N/T/L3
N/U/T1
P/+
V/T2
P/+
W/T3
P/+
U/T1
N/V/T2
N/W/T3
N/PR
P/+
PR
N/-

P1/+
R/L1
P1/+
S/L2
P1/+
T/L3
N/R/L1
N/S/L2
N/T/L3
P/+
U/T1
P/+
V/T2
P/+
W/T3
N/U/T1
N/V/T2
N/W/T3P/+
PR
N/PR

Non-conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Non-conductive
Non-conductive
Conductive
Uncertainly
Non-conductive■Three-phase models
Converter unit P1/+1

Braking resistor circuit(DBTR)
P/+

PR
TR1

Inverter unit
TR2
TR3

D1 D2 D3

R/L1

U/T1
C +

S/L2

V/T2

T/L3

W/T3
TR7

D4

D5 D6

TR4

TR6

TR5

N/-

■Single-phase models
Braking resistor circuit(DBTR)
Converter unit

P1/+1

P/+

PR

Inverter unit
TR1

D1

TR2

TR3

D3

R/L1

U/T1
C +

V/T2

S/L2

W/T3

TR7
D4

D6

N/－

16-6
16-6

TR4

TR5

TR6

Chapter 16

Maintenance and Inspection

16.2.5 Smoothing capacitor life curve
Ambient temperature(°C) Note:1

In the case of 24-hour energization/day and driving at 80% of
ND rated current

50

In the case of 24-hour energization/day
and driving at 100% of ND rated current

40
30
20
10
0
-10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Capacitor life (years)

Note: 1. The ambient temperature is a temperature measured at a position about 5cm from the bottom center of theinverter (atmospheric temperature). When the inverter is installed in the cabinet, it is the temperature inside
the cabinet.
2. The smoothing capacitor is a finite life component which occurs chemical reaction inside, replacement isrequired after 10 years of use (It is a designed expected life, not a guaranteed value).
However, if the inverter is used in an environment at high temperature or in a heavy-load environment where
its rated current is exceeded, the life is significantly shortened.

16.2.6 Life warning output
・By the self-diagnostic, it is possible to output an alarm in regards of the inverter own internal
components lifespan when the lifespan is nearing to its end (the cooling fan, the circuit board
electrolytic capacitor, the power module and the inrush current prevention circuit).
If the life warning output of the cooling occurs, the cooling fan should be replaced. If other life warning
output occurs, the inverter replacement is required.
・The life diagnosis of each life component can be checked using the output terminal functions"Capacitor life warning [WAC]", "Cooling-fan life warning [WAF]", "Power module life warning [WAP]","Inrush circuit life warning [WAIC]", or "Life assessment monitor [dC-16]".
・The life diagnostics of the electrolytic capacitor on the board and the cooling fan can be checked with
"Capacitor life warning [WAC] (39)" and "Cooling-fan life warning [WAF] (40)" output terminals or "Lifeassessment monitor [d022]".
・For details of each life diagnosis functions, refer to "9.11.9 Outputting a Warning for Capacitor Life on
the Board", "9.11.10 Outputting a Warning for Cooling-Fan Life", "9.11.11 Outputting a Warning forPower Module", "10.3.3 Monitor the Results of Lifetime Diagnosis", respectively. Since these alarms are
based on the design lifespan (not guaranteed values), problems may arise depending on theenvironment, the operation conditions, etc. It is recommended an early maintenance.

16-7
16-7

Chapter 16

Maintenance and Inspection

16.2.7 Measurement method of input/output voltage, current and power・Typical instruments for measuring input/output voltage, current and power are shown below.
R

WI1

IR

R/L1

ER
Power
supply

S

U/T1

IU

WO1
EU

Inverter

IS

WI2

S/L2

V/T2

V

IV
EV

ES
T

T/L3 W/T3

WI3

IT

IW

R-S, S-T, T-R(ER) (ES) (ET)

Input current
IIN

R, S, T current(IR) (IS) (IT)Input power
WIN
Power factor
PfIN

Measuring instrument
Moving-iron voltmeteror
Rectifier-type voltmeter
Moving-iron voltmeterWIN√3×EIN×IIN

Standard reference values

Effective valueof full waves

200V class:
200 to 240V, 50/60Hz
400V class:
380 to 480V, 50/60Hz
When there is unbalancein the input supply
IIN ＝ (IR + IS + IT)/ 3
Three-wattmeter
method-×100

Output voltage
EOUT

U-V, V-W, W-U(EU) (EV) (EW)

See the figure below or
Rectifier-type voltmeter Note:1,2

Output current
IOUT

U, V, W current(IU) (IV) (IW)Moving-iron ammeter Note:1,2

Output power
WOUT

U-V, V-W(WO1)+(WO2)Electrodynamometer-type
wattmeter Note:1,2

Output power
factor PfOUT

Remarks

R-S、S-T、T-R
Electrodynamometer-type(WI1)+(WI2)+(WI3)
wattmeter Note:1
Calculated from the measured values of the input voltage (EIN), power
input current (IIN), and input power (WIN).
PfIN =W

EW

Measurement
point

Input voltage
EIN

Motor

WO2

ET

Measurement
data

U

Effective valueof fundamental
wave
Effective valueof full waves-

Two-wattmeter method(or three-wattmeter
method)Calculated from the measured values of the output voltage (EOUT), output
current (IOUT), and output power (WOUT).

PfOUT=WOUT√3×FOUT×IOUT

-

×100

Note: 1. Use instruments that show the effective value of the fundamental wave for the output voltage and the effective
value of full waves for the current and power.
2. Since the inverter output waveform is controlled by PWM, it has a large margin of error, especially at low
frequencies. In many cases, general multimeters may be defective for the measurement, because of theadverse effects of the noise.
Example method for measuring output voltage
R

U

S

V

T

W

Diode
200V class: 600V 0.1A or more
400V class: 1000V 0.1A or more

Motor

2W 220kΩ
Moving-coil voltmeter
200V class: 300V
400V class: 600V

Effective value of fundamental wave
VAC＝1.1×VDC

16-8
16-8

Specifications

Chapter 17

Chapter 17 Specifications

17

This chapter describes product specifications, external dimensions and current deratings.
The abbreviations used in the product specifications show the following meanings.
・Load rating: ND = Normal duty rating (Overload current rating 150%/60s)
LD = Light duty rating (Overload current rating 120%/60s)(For details, refer to "8.1.2 Changing the Load Rating of the Inverter".)・Motor type: IM = induction motor
SM/PMM = synchronous motor/permanent magnet motor

17-1
17-1

Specifications

Chapter 1717.1 Standard specifications
17.1.1 Single-phase 200V class
HF620S-

Model nameApplicable motor capacity(4 poles) (kW)Rated output
current (A) Note:1
OutputOverload current rating

A20

A40

A75

1A5

2A2

LD

0.4

0.55

1.1

2.2

3.0

ND

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

LD
ND
LD
ND

2.0
1.6

3.5
3.2

Rated output voltage
Rated power
(kVA)

200V
240V

LD
ND
LD
ND

Input

LD
Rated input
current (A) Note:2
ND
Rated input AC voltage Note:3
LD
Power supply capacity(kVA) Note:4
ND

Carrier frequency
variation Note:5

6.0
9.8
12.2
5.0
8.0
11.0
120% / 60s
150% / 60s
Three-phase 200 to 240V (Output above the incoming voltage is not possible.)
0.7
1.2
2.0
3.4
4.2
0.5
1.1
1.7
2.7
3.8
0.8
1.4
2.4
4.0
5.0
0.6
1.3
2.0
3.3
4.5
3.6
7.3
13.8
20.2
3.0
6.3
11.5
16.8
Single-phase 200 to 240V (-15%/+10%), 50/60Hz ±5%
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0

LD
ND

200% / 0.5Hz
Internal braking resistor operating circuit (connect the external braking resistor)

Brake

100

Cooling method
Dimensions

H (height) (mm)W (width) (mm)D (depth) (mm) Note:8

100

50

Self-cooling (without Fan)
128
68
109

128
68
122.5

1.0

1.1

Protective structure
Approximate weight (kg)

10.0
10.0

2.0 to 10.0kHz
2.0 to 15.0kHz

Starting torque Note:6
Regenerative brake Note:7
Minimum resistance valueof connectable braking
resistor (Ω)

24.0
22.0

50

35

Forced air cooling (with Fan)
128
108
170.5

128
108
170.5

128
108
170.5

1.8

1.8

IP20 / UL open type
1.6

Note:
1. Some models require current derating depending on the carrier frequency setting and ambient temperature.
For details, refer to "17.3 Current Derating". (Please contact us for models not described.)
2. The rated input current is the value at the rated output current. The value changes according to the impedance on
the power supply side (wiring, breaker, input reactor option, etc.). The input current on the specification label
indicates the UL-certified current.
3. Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) is as follows. -Pollution degree 2, -Overvoltage category 3
4. Power supply capacity is the value of the rated output current at 220V. The value changes according to theimpedance on the power supply side (wiring, breaker, input reactor option, etc.).
5. The setting range of "Carrier Frequency setting [bb101]" is limited according to "Load type selection [Ub-03]". It is
recommended to set the carrier frequency setting equal or greater than the (maximum output frequency×10) Hz.
6. The value is specified for the Sumitomo standard motor controlled by the sensorless vector control at ND rating.
Torque characteristics may vary depending on the control mode and the motor used.
7. In case of shortage for braking torque using internal brake circuit, connect the external brake unit (option).
8. D dimension is without 3mm for dial projection. When the optional unit is connected, dimension D is increases.
Refer to the option manuals.

17-2
17-2

Specifications

Chapter 1717.1.2 Three-phase 200V class
A20

A40

A75

HF62021A5
2A2

3A7

5A5

7A5

LD

0.4

0.75

1.1

2.2

3.0

5.5

7.5

11

ND

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

LD
ND
LD
ND

2.0
1.6

3.5
3.2

6.0
5.0

Model nameApplicable motor capacity(4 poles) (kW)Rated output
current (A) Note:1
OutputOverload current
ratingRated output voltage
Rated
power
(kVA)

LD
ND
LD
ND

200V
240V

Input

LD
Rated input
current (A) Note:2
ND
Rated input AC voltage Note:3
LD
Power supply capacity(kVA) Note:4
ND

9.8
12.2
19.6
30.0
45.0
8.0
11.0
17.5
25.0
33.5
120% / 60s
150% / 60s
Three-phase 200 to 240V (Output above the incoming voltage is not possible.)
0.7
1.2
2.0
3.4
4.2
6.7
10.3
15.6
0.5
1.1
1.7
2.7
3.8
6.0
8.6
11.6
0.8
1.4
2.4
4.0
5.0
8.1
12.4
18.7
0.6
1.3
2.0
3.3
4.5
7.2
10.3
13.9
2.0
3.9
7.2
10.8
13.9
23.2
1.6
3.3
6.0
9.0
12.7
20.5
Three-phase 200 to 240V (-15%/+10%), 50/60Hz ±5%
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
20.0

LD
ND

Carrier frequency
variation Note:5

48.0

30.0
20.0

50.0
30.0

39.6

2.0 to 10.0kHz
2.0 to 15.0kHz

Starting torque Note:6200% / 0.5Hz
Note:7

Brake

Regenerative brake
Minimum resistance valueof connectable braking
resistor (Ω)
Cooling method

Dimensions

H (height) (mm)W (width) (mm)

37.0
30.8

Note:8D (depth) (mm)Internal braking resistor operating circuit (connect the external braking resistor)
100

100

50

Self-cooling (without FAN)

35

35

20

17

Forced air cooling (with FAN)

128

128

128

128

128

128

260

260

68

68

68

108

108

140

140

140

109

122.5

145.5

170.5

170.5

170.5

155

155

1.0

1.1

1.2

2.0

3.5

3.5

Degree of protection
Approximate weight (kg)50

IP20 / UL open type
1.6

1.8

Note:
1. Some models require current derating depending on the carrier frequency setting and ambient temperature. For
details, refer to "17.3 Current Derating". (Please contact us for models not described.)
2. The rated input current is the value at the rated output current. The value changes according to the impedance on
the power supply side (wiring, breaker, input reactor option, etc.). The input current on the specification label
indicates the UL-certified current.
3. Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) is as follows. -Pollution degree 2, -Overvoltage category 3
4. Power supply capacity is the value of the rated output current at 220V. The value changes according to theimpedance on the power supply side (wiring, breaker, input reactor option, etc.).
5. The setting range of "Carrier Frequency setting [bb101]" is limited according to "Load type selection [Ub-03]". It is
recommended to set the carrier frequency setting equal or greater than the (maximum output frequency×10) Hz.
6. The value is specified for the Sumitomo standard motor controlled by the sensorless vector control at ND rating.
Torque characteristics may vary depending on the control mode and the motor used.
7. In case of shortage for braking torque using internal brake circuit, connect the external brake unit (option).
8. Dimension D is without 3mm for dial projection. When the optional unit is connected, dimension D is increases.
Refer to the option manuals.

17-3
17-3

Specifications

Chapter 1717.1.3 Three-phase 400V class
Model name

A40

Applicable motor capacity(4 poles) (kW)Rated output
current (A) Note:1
OutputOverload current rating

Rated power
(kVA)

480V

1A5

HF62042A2

3A7

5A5

LD

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.0

5.5

7.5

11

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

LD
ND
LD
ND

2.1
1.8

4.1
3.4

5.5
4.8

LD
ND
LD
ND

Input

LD
Rated input
current (A) Note:2
ND
Rated input AC voltage Note:3
LD
Power supply
capacity (kVA) Note:4
ND

7.1
11.9
17.5
24.0
6.0
9.2
14.8
19.0
120% / 60s
150% / 60s
Three-phase 380 to 480V (Output above the incoming voltage is not possible.)
1.3
2.6
3.6
4.6
7.8
11.5
15.7
1.1
2.2
3.1
3.9
6.0
9.7
12.5
1.7
3.4
4.5
5.9
9.8
14.5
19.9
1.4
2.8
3.9
4.9
7.6
12.3
15.7
2.1
4.3
5.9
8.1
13.3
1.8
3.6
5.2
6.5
11.0
Three-phase 380 to 480V (-15%/+10%), 50/60Hz ±5%
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
20.0

LD
ND

Carrier frequency
variation Note:5

7A5

ND

Rated output voltage
380V

A75

20.0
16.9

24.0
19.0

30.0
20.0

30.0
30.0

2.0 to 10.0kHz
2.0 to 15.0kHz

Starting torque Note:6200% / 0.5Hz
Note:7

Brake

Regenerative brake
Minimum resistance valueof connectable braking
resistor (Ω)
Cooling method

Dimensions

H (height) (mm)W (width) (mm)D (depth) (mm) Note:8

Internal braking resistor operating circuit (connect the external braking resistor)
180
Self-cooling(without FAN)
128
108
143.5

180

100

100

70

70

128
140
170.5

260
140
155

260
140
155

2.0

3.5

3.5

Forced air cooling (with FAN)
128
108
170.5

Degree of protection
Approximate weight (kg)

180

128
108
170.5

128
108
170.5

IP20 / UL open type
1.5

1.8

1.8

1.8

Note:
1. Some models require current derating depending on the carrier frequency setting and ambient temperature.
For details, refer to "17.3 Current Derating". (Please contact us for models not described.)
2. The rated input current is the value at the rated output current. The value changes according to the impedance on
the power supply side (wiring, breaker, input reactor option, etc.). The input current on the specification label
indicates the UL-certified current.
3. Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) is as follows. -Pollution degree 2, -Overvoltage category 3
4. Power supply capacity is the value of the rated output current at 440V. The value changes according to theimpedance on the power supply side (wiring, breaker, input reactor option, etc.).
5. The setting range of "Carrier Frequency setting [bb101]" is limited according to "Load type selection [Ub-03]". It is
recommended to set the carrier frequency setting equal or greater than the (maximum output frequency×10) Hz.
6. The value is specified for the Sumitomo standard motor controlled by the sensorless vector control at ND rating.
Torque characteristics may vary depending on the control mode and the motor used.
7. In case of shortage for braking torque using internal brake circuit, connect the external brake unit (option).
8. Dimension D is without 3mm for dial projection. When the optional unit is connected, dimension D is increases.
Refer to the option manuals.

17-4
17-4

Specifications

Chapter 1717.1.4 Common Specifications
I te mControl method

Specifications
PWM control (Switch between 3-phase modulation and 2-phase modulation)

Output frequency range Note:1 0.01 to 590.00Hz
Frequency accuracy

For the maximum frequency, digital ± 0.01%, analog ± 0.2% (25 ± 10°C)

Frequency resolution

Digital: 0.01Hz, analog: maximum frequency/1000

Control mode Note:2(Voltage/frequency calculation)

IM
SM/PMMV/f control (Constant torque, Reduce torque, Free-V/f, Automatic torque boost)Sensorless vector control (With carrier frequency derating at low sepeed)
PM sensorless vector control Note:3

Acceleration/deceleration time 0.00 to 3600.00s (linear, S-curve, U-curve, inverted U-curve, EL-S-curve)
Starting torque200% / 0.5Hz (at IM sensorless vector control)

Monitor function

Output frequency, Output current, Output torque Note:4, Trip history, Input/Output terminal status,
Input power Note:5, Output power Note:5, etc.
For details of monitor function, refer to "Chapter 10 Monitor Functions".

Starting function

Starting after DC braking, Active frequency matching, Reduced voltage start, Trip retry restart

Stop function

DC braking after deceleration stop or free run stop, DC braking by input terminal(Braking force, time, and operating speed are adjustable.)

Stall prevention function

Stall prevention, Overcurrent suppression, Overvoltage suppression

Protection function Note:6

Other functions

Overcurrent error, Motor overload error, Braking resistor overload error, Overvoltage error, Memory error,
Undervoltage error, Current detector error, CPU error, External trip, USP error, Ground fault,
Input overvoltage error, Temperature detector error, Temperature error, CPU communication error,
Input phase loss, Main circuit error, Analog input level over error, IGBT(Driver) error, Output phase loss,
Thermistor error, Brake error, Overload error at low speed, Controller overload error,
Operator keypad disconnection error, RTC error, Option related errors, Functional safety related errors,
Encoder disconnection, Positioning range error, Speed deviation error, Excessive speed error,
Contactor error, PID soft start error, Abnormal upper/lower detecting error
For details of protection function, refer to "15.2 Troubleshooting for Protection Functions Related Error".
Free-V/f, Manual torque boost, Output voltage gain, AVR, Braking resistor circuit (DBTR), PID control,
Motor constant selection, Auto-tuning, Stabilization control, Direction reversal protection, Position control,
Torque control, Torque limit, Automatic carrier reduction, Energy saving operation, Brake control,
Instantaneous power failure non-stop, Commercial power supply switching, Minimum frequency,
Upper/lower frequency limit, Window comparator, Frequency jump, Acceleration/deceleration stop,
Frequency calculation/addition, 2-stage acceleration/deceleration, External start/end, Multi-speed,
Analog output adjustment, Stop selection, Input terminal response, Output signal delay, Soft-Lock,
Operation direction limit, STOP/RESET key selection, Scaling function, Cooling-fan ON/OFF,
Display restriction, Password function, Initial display selection, For details of each function, refer tochapter 7 to 10.

Frequency reference

KeypadThe parameters for the command value set by dial, Esc key and SET key on the keypad
0 to 10V voltage input (Input impedance: 10kΩ)External signal

Analog input (Terminal [VRF]/[IRF])(Switch between voltage and current
input by parameter setting.)
Multi-speed terminal(input terminal function used.)
Pulse input (Input terminal [RST]/[PLA])

Maximum 32kHz x 2

Note:74 to 20mA current input (Input impedance: 100Ω)Maximum 16 speeds

Forward/
ReverseRun/Stop
Input

External port

RS485 serial communication (Modbus-RTU), USB (PC Software), Remote operator, Communication option

KeypadRUN and STOP/RESET key on the keypad (Forward/Reverse can be switched by parameter setting.)

External signal"Forward [FR]"/"Reverse [RR]", 3-wire input (When input termnal functions are asigned)

External port

RS485 serial communication (Modbus-RTU), USB (PC Software), Remote operator, Communication option

Input terminal function
Analog input
Backup power supply
terminal
Safety function STO
input terminal

Input terminal function can be indivisually assiegned to input terminal [FR] to [PLA].
For details of types of input terminal function, refer to "9.15.1 Using External Input Signal Functions".
2 terminals (Terminal [VRF]/[IRF]: 0 to 10V voltage input, 4 to 20mA current input)(Switch between voltage and current input by parameter setting.)
External +24V power supply can be input from [P24] terminal.
(Installation of a reverse current prevention diode is mandatory.)
2 terminals (Terminal [ST1]/[ST2])

Thermistor input terminal 1 terminal (PTC type thermistor can be connencted to input terminal [AUT])

Pulse input terminal

Input terminal [PLA] (A-phase), [RST] (B-phase), [ES] (Z-phase [PLZ]), or amy input terminals assigned
input terminal functions [PLA]/[PLB].
(Terminals differ depending on parameter settings and functions used. For details, refer to therelated pages of following functions: Frequency reference, Pulse counter, PID feedback, PID target
value, Control with encoder, and Position control functions)

17-5
17-5

Specifications

Chapter 17

OutputI te mSpecifications

Output terminal
function

Output terminal function can be indivisually assigned to 2 open collector output terminals (Output
terminal [UPF]/[DRV]) and a relay output terminal [ML].
For details of types of output terminal function, refer to "9.16.1 Using External Output Signal Functions".

Functional safety EDM
output

STO state monitor (Output terminal [UPF] is switched to [EDM] by slide switch)

Monitor output Note:8

2 terminals
Terminal [AMI]: 0 to 10V analog voltage output / 4 to 20mA analog current output
Terminal [AMV]: Pulse output (max. 32kHz)/10V output) / 0 to 10V analog voltage output

EMC noise filter

Not built-in (optional external filter can be connected)

PC external access

USB Micro-B

Operatingenvironment

Ambient temperature

ND (Normal duty): -10 to 50℃ / LD (Light duty): -10 to 40℃

Storage
Temperature Note:9-20 to 65℃

Humidity

20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)Vibration

10 to 57Hz: amplitude 0.075mm
57 to 150Hz: 9.8m/s2 (1.0G)

Installation place Note:10

Altitude: 1000m or less, indoors (free from corrosive gases, oil mist, and dust)
The design life of the electrolytic capacitor on the board and the main circuit smoothing capacitor is 10 years.

Components life span

The design life of cooling fan is 10 years (models with cooling fan) with no dust.
Non-volatile memory parts on control circuit board.

Conformity standards
Note:11,12,13

CE: EN IEC 61800-3 (EMC-filter option required)EN 61800-5-1
UL: UL 61800-5-1, -Overvoltage Category 3, -Pollution Degree 2
Others: c-UL
Functional safety: STO(Safe torque off) function / IEC 61508, EN 61800-5-2: SIL3、
EN ISO 13849-1: Cat.3 PLe
IEC 60204-1: Stop Cat.0

Option board connector

One unit can be mounted

Other optional components

AC reactor, DC reactor, Noise filter, Radio noise filter(XY filter), Zero-phase reactor,
Braking resistor, Brake unit, Remote operator (OS-44 ver.2.0 onwards), PC software, etc.

Note:
1. The output frequency range depends on the control mode and the motor used. Consult the motor manufacturer for the maximum
allowable frequency of the motor when operating beyond 60Hz.
2. In case that the control mode is changed and the motor constant settings are not appropriate, the desired starting torque cannot
be obtained and also exists the possibility of tripping.
3. Contact your supplier when driving SM/PMM.
4. Output torque monitor is reference value. They are not suitable for calculation of efficiency values, etc. To obtain an accurate value,
use an external device.
5. Input power monitor and output power monitor are reference values. They are not suitable for calculation of efficiency values, etc.
To obtain an accurate value, use an external device.
6. When "IGBT(Driver) error [E030]" occurs by the protective function, it may have happened by the short-circuit protection, but also
can occur when the IGBT is damaged. Depending on the operating conditions of the inverter, "Overcurrent error [E001]" may occur
instead of [E030].
7. At factory setting, the maximum output frequency for analog input [VRF] is adjusted to 9.8V for voltage input and [IRF] isadjusted to 19.8mA for current input. To change the characteristics, refer to the analog start/end function.
8. Analog monitor output is a reference output for analog meter or digital frequency meter connection. The maximum output value
may deviate slightly due to variations in the connected meters and analog output circuits. To change the characteristics, use[AMI]/[AMV] adjust function.
9. The storage temperature is the temperature during transportation.
10. In case of installing at an altitude of 1000m or more, the atmospheric pressure decreases by approximately 1% for every 100m
altitude increase. Apply 1% current derating from the rated current by increasing every 100m and conduct an evaluation test.
When using at an altitude of 2500m, please contact your supplier.
11. Insulation distance conforms to UL and CE standards.
12. For details of standards of functional safety, refer to the separate "Safety Function Guide (No. DM2503E)".
13. The standards information on this document is as of June 2023.

17-6
17-6

Specifications

Chapter 1717.2 External dimensions
Power supply

Model

Single-phase
200V class

HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40
HF6202-A20
HF6202-A40
HF6202-A75

Three-phase
200V class

W (mm)

68

H (mm)D (mm)

D1 (mm)Approx. weight (kg )

128

109
122.5
109
122.5
145.5

13.5
27
13.5
27
50

1.0
1.1
1.0
1.1
1.2

68(W)

(9.5)

128 (H)

φ4.5

118

56

D1

4.5

D

3

4.5

17-7
17-7

Specifications

Chapter 17
Power supply
Single-phase
200V classThree-phase
200V classThree-phase
400V classModel
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2
HF6202-1A5
HF6202-2A2
HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2

W (mm)H (mm)D (mm)

Approx. weight (kg )
1.6

170.5
108

55.5

128 (H)(9.5)

118

2-φ4.5

4.5

D1

D

3

2-4.5

17-8
17-8

1.8

143.5

28.5

1.6
1.8
1.5

170.5

55.5

1.8

128

108(W)
96

D1 (mm)Specifications

Chapter 17
Power supply
Three-phase
200V classThree-phase
400V classModel

W (mm)H (mm)D (mm)

D1 (mm)Approx. weight (kg )

140

128

170.5

55.5

2.0

HF6202-3A7
HF6204-3A7

140(W)

55.5 (D1)

4.5

170.5 (D)

3

(9.5)

2-4.5

128 (H)2-φ4.5

118

128

17-9
17-9

Specifications

Chapter 17
Power supply

Model

Three-phase
200V class

HF6202-5A5

Three-phase
400V class

HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5

HF6202-7A5

W (mm)H (mm)D (mm)

D1 (mm)Approx. weight (kg )

140

260

155

74

3.5

140 (W)

260 (H)

2-φ6

248

122

6.5

74 (D1)155 (D)

3

2-6

17-10
17-10

Specifications

Chapter 1717.3 Current derating

・When using a model that is checked with "〇" in the "Required" column in the table below, performcurrent derating as shown in the graph below.
・Set the output current value to be derated in "Electronic thermal level setting [bC110]".
For details, refer to "8.1.4 Setting Electronic Thermal for the Motor".
・When the product is used beyond the derating, it may cause damage to the inverter and shorten the
product life.
■Derating necessity table
Single-phase 200 V

RequiredThree-phase 200 V

RequiredThree-phase 400 V

Required

HF620S-A20
HF620S-A40
HF620S-A75
HF620S-1A5
HF620S-2A2〇〇-

HF6202-A20
HF6202-A40
HF6202-A75
HF6202-1A5
HF6202-2A2
HF6202-3A7
HF6202-5A5
HF6202-7A5〇-

HF6204-A40
HF6204-A75
HF6204-1A5
HF6204-2A2
HF6204-3A7
HF6204-5A5
HF6204-7A5
-

〇
〇
〇
-

-

-

〇: Derating required〇-- : Derating not required

Models that do not require current derating (common)
Normal duty (ND)

Light duty (LD)100
Output current(%)

Output current(%)

100

Ambient temperature 40℃
Ambient temperature 50℃

8060

Ambient temperature 50℃

40
20
0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

80
60

Ambient temperature 40℃

40
20

16

0

2

4

Carrier frequency (kHz)

6

8

10

12

14

Carrier frequency (kHz)Models requiring current derating■ HF6202-A20
Normal duty (1.6 A)

Output current (A)Output current (A)

2.0

1.5

1.0

0

2

4

6

8

1

Light duty (2.0A)

2.0

1

1

16

1.5

1.0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

Carrier frequency (kHz)Carrier frequency (kHz)

17-11
17-11

14

Specifications

Chapter 17■ HF-620S-A40
Normal duty (3.2 A)

Light duty (3.5 A)

3.6
Output current (A)Output current (A)

3.6
3.0

2.0

1.0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12 14

16

3.0

2.0

1.0

0

Carrier frequency (kHz)

2
4
6
8
1
1
Carrier frequency (kHz)14■ HF6204-A40
Normal duty (1.8 A)

2.2

2.0
Output current (A)2.0
Output current (A)Light duty (2.1A)

2.2

1.5

1.0

1.5

1.0
0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

0

16

2

4

6

8

10

12

Carrier frequency (kHz)Carrier frequency (kHz)Normal duty (5.0 A)

Light duty (6.0 A)

14■ HF620S-A75
6.8
Output current (A)Output current (A)

6.8

6.0

5.0

4.0

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

Carrier frequency (kHz)

6.0

5.0

4.0

0

2

4

6

8

10 12

Carrier frequency (kHz)

17-12
17-12

14

Specifications

Chapter 17■ HF6204-A75
Normal duty (3.4 A)

4.0

3.0

2.0

0

2

4

6

8

10 12

Light duty (4.1 A)

4.8

Output current (A)Output current (A)

4.8

14

4.0

3.0

2.0

16

0

2

Carrier frequency (kHz)

4

6

8

10

12

14

Carrier frequency (kHz)■ HF6202-3A7
Normal duty (17.5 A)

Light duty (19.6 A)

20

19

19

18

18

Output current (A)Output current (A)

20

17
16
15
14

17
16
15
14

0

2

4

6

8

10

12 14

16

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

Carrier frequency (kHz)Carrier frequency (kHz)Normal duty (9.2 A)

Light duty (11.9 A)

14

12

12

11

11
Output current (A)Output current (A)■ HF6204-3A7

10
9
8
7

10
9
8
7
6

6
0

2

4

6

8

10

12 14

16

0

2

4

6

8

10 12

Carrier frequency (kHz)Carrier frequency (kHz)

17-13
17-13

14

Chapter 18

Parameter

18

Chapter 18 Parameter

This chapter provides a list of monitor parameters, setting parameters, Modbus communication coils andregister numbers. Monitor parameters and setting parameters accessible by Modbus communication arelisted together with the holding register number.
Some parameters may not be displayed on the keypad due to display restrictions or the password
function, or the settings may not be changed due to the soft lock function. In such a case, check "7.2
Functions Related to Keypad" or "15.4 How to Check When Something Is Wrong".

18.1 Modbus coil number/special resister numbers
18.1.1 List of Modbus coil numbers
Coil No.

Name

R/W

0000h

Reserved-

0001h

RUN command

R/W

0002h

Rotation direction command

R/W

0003h
0004h
0005h
0006h
0007h
0008h
0009h
000Ah
000Bh
000Ch
000Dh to0014h

External trip [ES]Reset [RST]Multi-function input terminal [FR] Note
Multi-function input terminal [RR] Note
Multi-function input terminal [DFL] Note
Multi-function input terminal [DFM] Note
Multi-function input terminal [AUT] Note
Multi-function input terminal [RS] Note
Multi-function input terminal [RST] Note
Multi-function input terminal [PLA] Note

R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W

Reserved-

0015h

Operation status

R

0016h
0017h
0018h
0019h
001Ah
001Bh to
001Eh
001Fh
0020h to
0048h
0049h
004Ah
004Bh
004Ch
004Dh
004Eh
004Fh toRotation direction
Inverter readyReserved
Multi-function output terminal [UPF]
Multi-function output terminal [DRV]

R
R
R
R

Reserved-

Multi-function output terminal [ML]R

Reserved-

Data writing in progress
CRC error
Overrun error
Framing error
Parity error
Sum check error
Reserved

R
R
R
R
R
R
-

Setting
1: Run/ 0: Stop
(Enable when [AA111]/[AA211]＝RS485 (03))
1: Reverse/ 0: Forward(Enable when [AA111]/[AA211]＝RS485 (03))
1: Trip / 0: No
1: Reset / 0: No
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: Forward or Reverse/
0: Stop or 0Hz output (Linked to [dA-03])
1: Reverse/ 0: Forward (Linked to [dA-03])
1: Ready/ 0: Not ready
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: ON/ 0: OFF
1: Writing in progress/ 0: Normal state
1: With error/ 0: No error
1: With error/ 0: No error
1: With error/ 0: No error
1: With error/ 0: No error
1: With error/ 0: No error-

Note: The input terminal can be turned on/off by Modbus communication. The inverter recognizes that the input
terminal is in the ON state if either the input terminal by communication or the input signal by control terminal is on.
However, as "Intelligent Input terminal monitor [dA-51]" is a monitor of control terminal's input signal, input status via
communication is not displayed.

18-1
18-1

Chapter 18

Parameter18.1.2 Modbus list of Modbus special holding registers
・The following table lists Modbus register numbers that do not directly correspond to monitor
parameters and setting parameters.
・For the number of the holding register corresponding to the monitor parameter/setting parameter thatcan be R/W from keypad, refer to "18.2 List of Parameters and Modbus Holding Registers".
Resister
No .
2328h
232Ah
2332h
2906h
2907h
291Eh
2922h
2926h

Name

R/W

Data range

Resolution

ENTER instruction (Write to Data Flash)
Single write mode
Motor constants re-calculation

W
W
W

01: Write all parameters
01: Enable
01: Enable-

RS485 speed reference(Signed) (For main/sub speed)

R/W-59000 to 59000

0.01Hz-5000 to 5000

0.1%

0 to 59000

0.01Hz-10000 to 10000

0.01%

RS485 torque reference

R/W

RS485 torque bias
RS485 speed limit at torque control(at Forward rotation)

R/W
R/W

RS485 speed limit at torque control(at Reverse rotation)

R/W

RS485 PID target value

R/W

RS485 PID feedback data

R/W

RS485 torque limit
Output terminal function
Option output [OPO]

R/W

0 to 5000

0.1%

R/W

0 to 0x7F

1

3EBCh

Coil data 0 (Coil No. 0000h to 000Fh)

R/W

3EBDh

Coil data 1 (Coil No. 0010h to 001Fh)

R

Coil data 2 (Coil No. 0020h to 002Fh)

R

0 to 0xFFFF

1

2927h
2932h
2933h
293Ah
293Bh
2946h
3EB5h

3EBEh
3EBFh

Coil data 3 (Coil No. 0030h to 003Fh)

R

3EC0h

Coil data 4 (Coil No. 0040h to 004Fh)

R

18-2
18-2

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2 Parameter
・When the data range or initial value has a description regarding the rated current and is marked as
rated output current, refer to the rated output current of the currently selected normal duty (ND) or
light duty (LD). For those marked ND rated current, refer to the rated output current of the normal duty
(ND), even if light duty (LD) is selected. The currently selected load type can be checked on the"Inverter load type status [dC-01].
・In the default condition, the data part (0.00Hz in the case of stopped state) of [dA-01] is always
displayed after the power is turned on. To change the monitor at power-on, change the setting of"Initial display selection [UA-91]".
・If the parameter code cannot be displayed, or if the code and setting data can be displayed but cannot
be changed, the display restrictions or Soft-Lock may be activated. For more information, refer to "7.2
Functions Related to Keypad" or "15.4.1 Troubleshooting Other Than Trip and Warning".
・The d parameter group can only be "Read", and the rest of the parameters can be R/W unless otherwise
noted.
・In the table below, Modbus holding register numbers may be discontinuous, but do not access theholding registers that is not listed.
18.2.1 d parameter
Code

Name

dA-01
dA-02

Output frequency monitor
Output current monitor
Rotation direction
monitorFrequency referencemonitor (after calculation)(signed)Output frequency scaleconversion monitor

dA-03
dA-04
dA-06
dA-08
dA-12
dA-14
dA-15

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

0.00 to 590.00 Hz
0.00 to 655.35 A
o: Stop/ d: 0Hz output
F: Forward/ r: Reverse

○
-

2711h
2712h

0 to 59000
0 to 65535

0.01
0.01

10-1
10-3

-

2713h

0 to 3-10-3-590.00 to 590.00 Hz

-

2714h
2715h

-59000 to 59000

0.01

10-1

0.00 to 59000.00○

0 to 5900000

0.01

10-1

-590.00 to 590.00 Hz--59000 to 59000

0.01

Detect speed monitor
Output frequency monitor(signed)Frequency upper limit
monitor
Torque reference monitor(after calculation)

Modbus communication

Changeduringrunning

Data range

2716h
2717h
2718h
2719h
271Ch
271Dh

Page

10-4
10-2

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

-

271Eh

0 to 59000

0.01

9-32

-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

-

271Fh

-10000 to 10000

0.1

10-5

dA-16

Torque limit monitor

0.0 to 500.0 %

-

2720h

0 to 59000

0.1

9-64
10-5

dA-17

Output torque monitor-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

-

2721h

-10000 to 10000

0.1

10-5

dA-18

Output voltage monitor(RMS)

0.0 to 800.0 V

-

2722h

0 to 8000

0.1

10-6

2724h
2725h

Normal mode:-268435455 to
268435455
High resolution mode:-1073741823 to1073741823

1

9-187
10-6

0 to 2147483647

1

9-211

0 to 65535

0.01

10-7

0 to 10000000

0.1

10-7

0 to 65535

0.01

10-8

0 to 10000000

0.1

10-8

0 to 10000

0.1

0 to10000

0.01

0 to 10000

0.01

10-9
9-137
10-9
9-163
10-10
9-164
10-10

Absolute position control :-268435455 to 268435455 pls

dA-20

Current position monitor

dA-28

Pulse count monitor

0 to 2147483647

-

dA-30

0.00 to 655.35 kW-

0.0 to 1000000.0 kWh-

0.00 to 655.35 kW-

0.0 to 1000000.0 kWh

-

dA-40

Input power monitor
Accumulated input powermonitor
Output power monitor
Accumulated output
power monitor
DC bus voltage monitor

DC0.0 to 1000.0 V

-

272Ch
272Dh
272Eh
2730h
2731h
2732h
2734h
2735h
2738h

dA-41

DBTR load factor monitor

0.00 to 100.00 %

-

2739h

0.00 to 100.00 %

－

273Ah

0.00 to 100.00 %

－

273Bh

dA-32
dA-34
dA-36

dA-42
dA-43

Electronic thermal loadfactor monitor (Motor)
Electronic thermal loadfactor monitor (Inverter)

High resolution absolute position control :-1073741823 to 1073741823 pls

18-3
18-3

-

Chapter 18
Code

Name

Parameter
Changeduringrunning

Data range

Modbus communication
Page

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

-

273Ch

20 : Terminal [ST1]
21 : Terminal [ST2]
22 : Terminal [EDM]
23 : [SFM1] signal
24 : [SFM2] signal

-

14-5

-

273Dh

0 to 7

1

14-5

-

2743h

20 to: (terminal FR)
27 : (terminal PLA)

-

10-11

-

2746h

20 : (UPF)
21 : (DRV)
22 : (AL)

-

10-11

(e.g.) VRF: Analog current input
IRF: Analog voltage input
AMI: Analog current output
AMV: Always voltage position

-

274Ch

-

10-13

0.00 to 100.00 %--100.00 to100.00 %00: (0x00) None
02: (0x02) Reserved
03: (0x03) Reserved
06: (0x06) Reserved
07: (0x07) CC-Link

-

274Dh
274Eh
2756h

-

2761h

-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID1 scale
adjustment (AH-04, 05, 06)

-

2792h
2793h
2794h
2795h

-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID2 scale
adjustment (AJ-04, 05, 06)-

STO/ON
RUN enable/OFF

dA-44

Safety STO terminal
monitor

dA-45

Safety STO monitor

dA-51

Input terminal monitor

5 4 3 2 1
1: Terminal [ST1] (STO/ RUN enable)
2: Terminal [ST2] (STO/ RUN enable)
3: Terminal [EDM] (OFF/ ON)
4: [SFM1] signal (OFF/ ON)
5: [SFM2] signal (OFF/ ON)
00: No input
01: P-1A (-F20-)
02: P-2A (-F10-)
03: P-1b (-F02-)
04: P-2b (-F01-)
05: P-1C (-F22-)
06: P-2C (-F11-)
07: STO (--S--)ON
OFF
PLA RST ES AUT DFM DFL RR FR(e.g.) FR, RR: ON
ON
dA-54

Output terminal monitor

OFF
ML DRV UPF(e.g.) UPF, DRV: ON/ ML: OFF
Voltage
Current
dA-60

Analog input/output
status monitor

dA-61
dA-62
dA-70

Analog input [VRF]monitor
Analog input [IRF] monitor
Pulse input monitor

dA-81

Option mounting
status

db-30
db-32

PID1 feedback value 1
monitor
PID1 feedback value 2
monitor

db-34

PID1 feedback value 3
monitor

db-36

PID2 feedback value
monitorAMV AMI IRF VRF

db-50

PID1 set-point monitor(after calculation)
PID1 feedback value
monitor(after calculation)
PID1 output monitor

db-51

PID1 deviation monitor

db-52
db-53
db-54
db-55

PID1 deviation 1 monitor
PID1 deviation 2 monitor
PID1 deviation 3 monitor
PID2 output monitor-100.00 to 100.00 %db-56

PID2 deviation monitor-200.00 to 200.00 %

db-42
db-44

00h to FFh

0 to 10000-10000 to 10000

0 to 7

1

10-12

0.01

10-12

1

13-1

Depends
on AH-06

9-101
10-22

Depends
on AJ-06

9-101
10-22

2796h
2797h
2798h
2799h

-10000 to 10000

279Eh
279Fh

-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID1 scale
adjustment (AH-04, 05, 06)--100.00 to 100.00 %-Dependon AH-06

27A0h
27A1h
27A6h

-10000 to 10000

0.01-20000 to 20000

0.01

27A7h
-200.00 to 200.00 %

-

27A8h
27A9h
27AAh
27ABh

-10000 to 10000

0.01

-

27ACh

-20000 to 20000

0.01

-

18-4
18-4

9-107
10-22
9-101
9-110
10-22
10-22
9-101
10-22
10-22
9-122
10-22

Chapter 18
Code

Name

db-61
db-62
db-63
db-64

Current PID P-Gain monitor
Current PID I-Gain monitor
Current PID D-Gain monitor
PID feedforward monitor

dC-01

Inverter load type status

dC-02

Rated current monitor

dC-07

Main speed input source
monitordC-08

Sub speed input source monitor

dC-10

RUN command input source
monitor

dC-15

Cooling fin temperature monitor

dC-16

dC-20
dC-21
dC-22
dC-24
dC-26
dC-30
dC-31
dC-32
dC-33

dC-37

Parameter

Life assessment monitor

Accumulated number of starts
monitorAccumulated number of poweron times monitor

Data range
0.0 to 100.0
0.0 to 3600.0 s
0.00 to 100.00 s
0.00 to 100.00 %01: Light duty (LD)
02: Normal duty (ND)
0.0 to 6553.5 A
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Multi-speed 0/ 09: Multi-speed 1
10: Multi-speed 2/ 11: Multi-speed 3
12: Multi-speed 4/ 13: Multi-speed 5
14: Multi-speed 6/ 15: Multi-speed 7
16: Multi-speed 8/ 17: Multi-speed 9
18: Multi-speed 10/ 19: Multi-speed 11
20: Multi-speed 12/ 21: Multi-speed 13
22: Multi-speed 14/ 23: Multi-speed 15
24: Jogging/ 25: RS485
26: Option/ 29: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: PID function
34: AHD retention speed
00: Disabled
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
08: Sub speed (Parameter setting)
25: RS485/26: Option
29: Pulse input/ 31: Reserved
32: PID function
00: [FR]/[RR] terminal
01: 3-Wire
02: Keypad's RUN key
03: RS485
04: Option-20.0 to 200.0 ℃

4 3
1: WAC (Capacitor life warning)
2: WAF (Cooling-fan life warning)
3: WAP (Power module life warning)
4: WAIC (Inrush circuit life warning)

RegisterNo.

-

Data range

Resolution

27B1h
27B2h
27B3h
27B4h

0.0 to 1000
0 to 36000

0.1
0.1

0 to 10000

0.01

-

27D9h

1 to 2

1

-

27DAh

0 to 65535

0.1

-

27DFh

1 to 34

1

Dual monitor

Page

10-22

10-17

10-19

-

27E0h

0 to 33

1

-

27E2h

0 to 4

1

-

27E7h

-200 to 2000

0.1

9-166
10-16

27E8h

20 : WAC
21 : WAF
22 : WAP
23 : WAIC

1

9-167
9-168
9-169
10-16

1 to 65535

1

10-15

-

27ECh
1 to 65535

27EDh

Accumulated RUN time monitor
Accumulated power-on time
monitorAccumulated cooling-fan run
time monitor

Modbus communication

Changeduringrunning

0 to 1000000 hr-

Monitor data selected by [UA-96], [UA-97]

Unsteady detection value
monitorUnsteady detection upper levelmonitorUnsteady detection lower levelmonitor-100.00 to 100.00 %Icon 2 LIM detail monitor

00: Motor RUN not restricted
01: OC suppress
02: OL restriction
03: OV suppress
04: Torque limit
05: Frequency limit
06: Minimum frequency

-

27EEh
27EFh
27F0h
27F1h
27F2h
27F3h

0 to 1000000

27F6h

-

-

10-20

-10000 to
10000

0.01

10-14

1

10-20

1

9-170
10-15
10-15

27F7h
-

27F8h
27F9h

18-5
18-5

－

27FDh

0 to 6

Chapter 18
CodeParameter

Name

Data range

Modbus communication

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

-

27FEh

0 to 4

1

-

27FFh

0 to 2

1

00: No warning notice
01: OL notice
02: Motor thermal notice
03: Controller thermal notice
04: Motor overheating notice
00: Not in retry status
01: Waiting for retry
02: Waiting for restart
00: Ready
01: Trip occurrence
02: Power supply error
03: Resetting
04: STO
05: Standby
06: Data warning, etc.
08: Free run
09: Forced stop
00: IM selected
01: SM selected
00: -01: Auto-tuning completed
02: Auto-tuning failed
00: Disabled
01: EMF Active
02: BYP Active

-

2800h

0 to 9

1

-

2805h

0 to 1

1

-

2807h

0 to 2

1

-

2809h

0 to 21

dC-38

Icon 2 ALT detail monitor

dC-39

Icon 2 RETRY detailmonitor

dC-40

Icon 2 NRDY detailmonitor

dC-45

IM/SM monitor

dC-47

Auto-tuning monitor

dC-49

Emergency-force drivemode monitor

dC-50

Firmware Ver. monitor(I/O)

00.00 to 99.99 (MM.mm)
MM：Major, mm：Minor

-

280Ah

dC-53

Firmware Gr. monitor

00: Standard

-

280Dh

dC-87

Firmware Ver. monitor(Core)

00.00 to 99.99 (MM.mm)
MM：Major, mm：Minor

-

282Fh

Page

10-20

10-21

10-17

18-6
18-6

0000h to FFFFh
Upper digits: Major
Lower digits: Minor
00000h to FFFFh
Upper digits: Major
Lower digits: Minor

9-90
10-18

0.01
1
0.01

-

Chapter 18
Code
dE-01

dE-11

dE-12

dE-13

dE-14

Parameter
Name

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Trip counter
Trip monitor 1 Factor

0 to 65535 times
E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 1 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 1 Output current
Trip monitor 1 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 1 Inverter status
Trip monitor 1 LAD status
Trip monitor 1 INV control mode
Trip monitor 1 Limit status
Trip monitor 1 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 1 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 1 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 1 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 1 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 1 Time Hour/Minute
Trip monitor 2 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 2 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 2 Output current
Trip monitor 2 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 2 Inverter status
Trip monitor 2 LAD status
Trip monitor 2 INV control mode
Trip monitor 2 Limit status
Trip monitor 2 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 2 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 2 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 2 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 2 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 2 Time Hour/Minute
Trip monitor 3 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 3 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 3 Output current
Trip monitor 3 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 3 Inverter status
Trip monitor 3 LAD status
Trip monitor 3 INV control mode
Trip monitor 3 Limit status
Trip monitor 3 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 3 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Modbus communication
RegisterNo.

Trip monitor 3 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr

Trip monitor 3 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 3 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 3 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

03E8h
03E9h
03EAh
03EBh
03ECh
03EDh
03EEh
03EFh
03F0h
03F1h
03F2h
03F4h
03F5h
03F6h
03F7h
03F8h
03F9h
03FAh
03FDh
03FEh
03FFh
0400h
0401h
0402h
0403h
0404h
0405h
0406h
0408h
0409h
040Ah
040Bh
040Ch
040Dh
040Eh
0411h
0412h
0413h
0414h
0415h
0416h
0417h
0418h
0419h
041Ah
041Ch
041Dh
041Eh
041Fh
0420h
0421h
0422h

Trip monitor 4 Factor

E001 to E122

-

0425h

Trip monitor 4 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 4 Output current
Trip monitor 4 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 4 Inverter status
Trip monitor 4 LAD status
Trip monitor 4 INV control mode
Trip monitor 4 Limit status
Trip monitor 4 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 4 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 4 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr－

Trip monitor 4 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 4 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 4 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

18-7
18-7

0426h
0427h
0428h
0429h
042Ah
042Bh
042Ch
042Dh
042Eh
0430h
0431h
0432h
0433h
0434h
0435h
0436h

Data range

Resolution

0 to 65535
0 to 1221
1-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 12211
11-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 12211
11-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

Page

10-23
15-2

Chapter 18
Code

dE-15

dE-16

dE-17

dE-18

Parameter
Name

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Trip monitor 5 Factor

E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 5 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 5 Output current
Trip monitor 5 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 5 Inverter status
Trip monitor 5 LAD status
Trip monitor 5 INV control mode
Trip monitor 5 Limit status
Trip monitor 5 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 5 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 5 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 5 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 5 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 5 Time Hour/Minute
Trip monitor 6 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 6 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 6 Output current
Trip monitor 6 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 6 Inverter status
Trip monitor 6 LAD status
Trip monitor 6 INV control mode
Trip monitor 6 Limit status
Trip monitor 6 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 6 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 6 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 6 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 6 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 6 Time Hour/Minute
Trip monitor 7 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 7 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 7 Output current
Trip monitor 7 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 7 Inverter status
Trip monitor 7 LAD status
Trip monitor 7 INV control mode
Trip monitor 7 Limit status
Trip monitor 7 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11
0 to 60 to 6-

Trip monitor 7 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 7 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 7 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 7 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 7 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

Trip monitor 8 Factor

E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 8 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 8 Output current
Trip monitor 8 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 8 Inverter status
Trip monitor 8 LAD status
Trip monitor 8 INV control mode
Trip monitor 8 Limit status
Trip monitor 8 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 8 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 8 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 8 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 8 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 8 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

18-8
18-8

Modbus communication
Register
No.
0439h
043Ah
043Bh
043Ch
043Dh
043Eh
043Fh
0440h
0441h
0442h
0444h
0445h
0446h
0447h
0448h
0449h
044Ah
044Dh
044Eh
044Fh
0450h
0451h
0452h
0453h
0454h
0455h
0456h
0458h
0459h
045Ah
045Bh
045Ch
045Dh
045Eh
0461h
0462h
0463h
0464h
0465h
0466h
0467h
0468h
0469h
046Ah
046Ch
046Dh
046Eh
046Fh
0470h
0471h
0472h
0475h
0476h
0477h
0478h
0479h
047Ah
047Bh
047Ch
047Dh
047Eh
0480h
0481h
0482h
0483h
0484h
0485h
0486h

Data range

Resolution

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 12211
11-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 12211
11-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11
0 to 60 to 6

0.01
0.1
1
1
1
1
1

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

Page

10-23
15-2

Chapter 18
Code

dE-19

dE-20

dE-31

dE-32

Parameter
Name

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
RegisterNo.

Trip monitor 9 Factor

E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 9 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 9 Output current
Trip monitor 9 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 9 Inverter status
Trip monitor 9 LAD status
Trip monitor 9 INV control mode
Trip monitor 9 Limit status
Trip monitor 9 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 9 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 9 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 9 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 9 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 9 Time Hour/Minute
Trip monitor 10 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
E001 to E122-

Trip monitor 10 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Trip monitor 10 Output current
Trip monitor 10 P-N DC voltage
Trip monitor 10 Inverter status
Trip monitor 10 LAD status
Trip monitor 10 INV control mode
Trip monitor 10 Limit status
Trip monitor 10 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Trip monitor 10 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 10 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Trip monitor 10 Time Year/Month
Trip monitor 10 Time Day/Day of week
Trip monitor 10 Time Hour/Minute
Retry monitor 1 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 1 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 1 Output current
Retry monitor 1 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 1 Inverter status
Retry monitor 1 LAD status
Retry monitor 1 INV control mode
Retry monitor 1 Limit status
Retry monitor 1 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 1 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 1 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 1 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 1 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 1 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

0489h
048Ah
048Bh
048Ch
048Dh
048Eh
048Fh
0490h
0491h
0492h
0494h
0495h
0496h
0497h
0498h
0499h
049Ah
049Dh
049Eh
049Fh
04A0h
04A1h
04A2h
04A3h
04A4h
04A5h
04A6h
04A8h
04A9h
04AAh
04ABh
04ACh
04ADh
04AEh
04B1h
04B2h
04B3h
04B4h
04B5h
04B6h
04B7h
04B8h
04B9h
04BAh
04BCh
04BDh
04BEh
04BFh
04C0h
04C1h
04C2h

Retry monitor 2 Factor

r001 to r009

-

04C5h

Retry monitor 2 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 2 Output current
Retry monitor 2 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 2 Inverter status
Retry monitor 2 LAD status
Retry monitor 2 INV control mode
Retry monitor 2 Limit status
Retry monitor 2 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 2 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 2 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 2 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 2 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 2 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

18-9
18-9

04C6h
04C7h
04C8h
04C9h
04CAh
04CBh
04CCh
04CDh
04CEh
04D0h
04D1h
04D2h
04D3h
04D4h
04D5h
04D6h

Data range

Resolution

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 12211
11-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 91111-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

Page

10-23
15-2

10-24
15-4

Chapter 18
Code

dE-33

dE-34

dE-35

dE-36

Parameter
Name

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Retry monitor 3 Factor

r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 3 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 3 Output current
Retry monitor 3 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 3 Inverter status
Retry monitor 3 LAD status
Retry monitor 3 INV control mode
Retry monitor 3 Limit status
Retry monitor 3 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 4 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 4 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 4 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 4 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 4 Time Hour/Minute
Retry monitor 4 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 4 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 4 Output current
Retry monitor 4 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 4 Inverter status
Retry monitor 4 LAD status
Retry monitor 4 INV control mode
Retry monitor 4 Limit status
Retry monitor 4 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 4 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 4 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 4 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 4 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 4 Time Hour/Minute
Retry monitor 5 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 5 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 5 Output current
Retry monitor 5 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 5 Inverter status
Retry monitor 5 LAD status
Retry monitor 5 INV control mode
Retry monitor 5 Limit status
Retry monitor 5 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 5 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 5 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 5 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 5 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 5 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

Retry monitor 6 Factor

r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 6 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 6 Output current
Retry monitor 6 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 6 Inverter status
Retry monitor 6 LAD status
Retry monitor 6 INV control mode
Retry monitor 6 Limit status
Retry monitor 6 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 6 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 6 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 6 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 6 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 6 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

18-10
18-10

Modbus communication
Register
No.
04D9h
04DAh
04DBh
04DCh
04DDh
04DEh
04EFh
04E0h
04E1h
04E2h
04E4h
04E5h
04E6h
04E7h
04E8h
04E9h
04EAh
04EDh
04EEh
04EFh
04F0h
04F1h
04F2h
04F3h
04F4h
04F5h
04F6h
04F8h
04F9h
04FAh
04FBh
04FCh
04FDh
04FEh
0501h
0502h
0503h
0504h
0505h
0506h
0507h
0508h
0509h
050Ah
050Ch
050Dh
050Eh
050Fh
0510h
0511h
0512h
0515h
0516h
0517h
0518h
0519h
051Ah
051Bh
051Ch
051Dh
051Eh
0520h
0521h
0522h
0523h
0524h
0525h
0526h

Data range

Resolution

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 12211
11-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 91111-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

Page

10-24
15-4

Chapter 18
Code

dE-37

dE-38

dE-39

dE-40

dE-50

Parameter
Name

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Retry monitor 7 Factor

r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 7 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 7 Output current
Retry monitor 7 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 7 Inverter status
Retry monitor 7 LAD status
Retry monitor 7 INV control mode
Retry monitor 7 Limit status
Retry monitor 7 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 7 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 7 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 7 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 7 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 7 Time Hour/Minute
Retry monitor 8 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 8 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 8 Output current
Retry monitor 8 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 8 Inverter status
Retry monitor 8 LAD status
Retry monitor 8 INV control mode
Retry monitor 8 Limit status
Retry monitor 8 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 8 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 8 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 8 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 8 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 8 Time Hour/Minute
Retry monitor 9 Factor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 9 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 9 Output current
Retry monitor 9 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 9 Inverter status
Retry monitor 9 LAD status
Retry monitor 9 INV control mode
Retry monitor 9 Limit status
Retry monitor 9 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 9 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 9 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 9 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 9 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 9 Time Hour/Minute

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

-

Retry monitor 10 Factor

r001 to r009-

Retry monitor 10 Output frequency (signed)-590.00 to 590.00 Hz-

Retry monitor 10 Output current
Retry monitor 10 P-N DC voltage
Retry monitor 10 Inverter status
Retry monitor 10 LAD status
Retry monitor 10 INV control mode
Retry monitor 10 Limit status
Retry monitor 10 Special status

0.00 to 655.35 A
0.0 to 1000.0 Vdc
0 to 80 to 50 to 11-

0 to 6-

Retry monitor 10 RUN time

0 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 10 Power-on time

1 to 1000000 hr-

Retry monitor 10 Time Year/Month
Retry monitor 10 Time Day/Day of week
Retry monitor 10 Time Hour/Minute
Warning monitor

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
Warning code Note－

Note: Refer to "15.3.1 Warning display".

18-11
18-11

Modbus communication
Register
No.
0529h
052Ah
052Bh
052Ch
052Dh
052Eh
052Fh
0530h
0531h
0532h
0534h
0535h
0536h
0537h
0538h
0539h
053Ah
053Dh
053Eh
053Fh
0540h
0541h
0542h
0543h
0544h
0545h
0546h
0548h
0549h
054Ah
054Bh
054Ch
054Dh
054Eh
0551h
0552h
0553h
0554h
0555h
0556h
0557h
0558h
0559h
055Ah
055Ch
055Dh
055Eh
055Fh
0560h
0561h
0562h
0565h
0566h
0567h
0568h
0569h
056Ah
056Bh
056Ch
056Dh
056Eh
0570h
0571h
0572h
0573h
0574h
0575h
0576h
05DCh

Data range

Resolution

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 12211
11-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
0 to 91111-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm

1
1
1

0 to 1221-59000 to 59000

0.01

0 to 65535
0 to 10000
0 to 80 to 50 to 11

0.01
0.1
1
1
1

0 to 61

0 to 1000000

10 to 1000000

1

YY/MM
DD/WW
HH/mm
Waning code

1
1
1
-

Page

10-24
15-4

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.2 F parameter
Code

Name

Initialvalue

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

Page
9-6

FA-01

Main speed reference
setting (monitor)

10.00

○

0.00 to 590.00 Hz
FA-02

Sub speed reference
setting (monitor)

FA-10

Acceleration time setting(monitor)

FA-12

Deceleration time setting(monitor)

FA-15
FA-16

Torque reference setting(monitor)
Torque bias setting(monitor)

FA-20

Position reference
setting(monitor)

FA-30

PID1 set-point 1 setting(monitor)

FA-32

PID1 set-point 2 setting(monitor)

FA-34

PID1 set-point 3 setting(monitor)

FA-36

PID2 set-point setting(monitor)

9-8

2AF9h
0 to 59000

0.00

〇

0.01

9-9
9-10

2AFAh

9-6

2AFBh

9-8

2B02h
0.00 to 3600.00 s

10.00

○

2B03h
2B04h

0 to 360000

0.01-5000 to 5000

0.1

9-23

2B05h
2B07h
-500.0 to 500.0 %

0.0

○

9-57

2B08h
Absolute position control :-268435455 to 268435455 pls
High resolution absolute position
control :-1073741823 to 1073741823 pls

0

○

2B0Ch
2B0Dh

9-64
Normal mode:-268435455
to 268435455
High resolution
mode:-1073741823
to 1073741823

1

9-187

-10000 to 10000

Depends
on AH-06

9-107-10000 to 10000

Depends
on AJ-06

9-122

2B16h
-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID1 scale
adjustment (AH-04, 05, 06)

2B17h
0.00

○

2B18h
2B19h
2B1Ah
2B1Bh

-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID2 scale
adjustment (AJ-04, 05, 06)

0.00

18-12
18-12

○

2B1Ch
2B1Dh

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.3 A parameter
Code

Name

Data range
01: Terminal [VRF]/ 02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting/ 08: RS485
09: Option/ 12: Pulse input
14: Reserved/ 15: PID function
00: Disabled/ 01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]/ 07: Parameter setting
08: RS485/ 09: Option
12: Pulse input/ 14: Reserved
15: PID function

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Page

×

2EE1h

1 to 16

1

9-7

00

×

2EE2h

0 to 16

1

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

07 NoteAA101

Main speed input
source selection,
1st-motor

AA102

Sub speed input
source selection,
1st-motor

AA104

Sub speed setting,1st-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

2EE4h

0 to 59000

0.01

AA105

Speed reference
calculation symbol
selection, 1st-motor

00: Disable
01: Addiction [ADD]
02: Subtraction [SUB]
03: Multiplication [MUL]

00

○

2EE5h

0 to 3

1

AA106

Add frequency
setting, 1st-motor-590.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

2EE6h

-59000 to

2EE7h

59000

AA111

RUN command input
source selection,
1st-motor

02

×

2EEBh

AA-12

RUN-key commandrotation direction

00

○

AA-13

STOP-key enable

01

AA114
AA115

RUN direction
restriction selection,
1st-motor
STOP mode
selection, 1st-motor

00: [FR]/[RR] terminal
01: 3-wire
02: Keypad's RUN-key
03: RS485
04: Option
00: Forward
01: Reverse
00: Disable
01: Enable
02: Enable at only trip reset
00: No restriction
01: Only Forward
02: Only Reverse
00: Deceleration stop
01: Free-run stop
00: V/f control (Constant torque) (IM)
01: V/f control (Reduce torque) (IM)
02: V/f control (Free-V/f) (IM)
03: V/f control (Automatic torque boost) (IM)
08: Sensorless vector control (IM)
11: Sensorless vector control (SM/PMM)
00: Speed/Torque control mode
02: Absolute position control
03: High resolution absolute position control

0.01

9-18

0 to 4

1

9-1

2EECh

0 to 1

1

9-2

○

2EEDh

0 to 2

1

9-5

00

×

2EEEh

0 to 2

1

9-33

00

○

2EEFh

0 to 1

1

9-77

00

×

2EF5h

0 to 11

1

9-35

00

×

2EF7h

0 to 3

1

00

×

2EF8h

0 to 1

1

07 Note×

55F1h

1 to 16

1

00

×

55F2h

0 to 16

1

AA121

Control mode
selection, 1st-motor

AA123

Vector control mode
selection, 1st-motor

AA124

Speed
compensation withencoder selection,
1st-motor

AA201

Main speed input
source selection,
2nd-motor

AA202

Sub speed input
source selection,
2nd-motor

AA204

Sub speed setting,2nd-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

55F4h

0 to 59000

0.01

AA205

Speed reference
calculation
selection, 2nd-motor

00: Disable
01: Addiction [ADD]
02: Subtraction [SUB]
03: Multiplication [MUL]

00

○

55F5h

0 to 3

1

AA206

Add frequency
setting, 2nd-motor-590.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

55F6h

-59000 to

55F7h

59000

RUN command input
source selection,
2nd-motor

00: [FR]/[RR] terminal
01: 3-wire
02: Keypad's RUN-key
03: RS485
04: Option

02 Note×AA211

00: Disable
01: Enable
01: Terminal [VRF]/ 02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting/08: RS485
09: Option/ 12: Pulse input
14: Reserved/ 15: PID function
00: Disable/ 01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]/ 07: Parameter setting
08: RS485/ 09: Option
12: Pulse input/ 14: Reserved
15: PID function

9-43
9-187
9-43
9-48

9-7
9-95

9-16

55FBh

Note: The default settings when initialize by setting 00 to "Initialize data selection [Ub-02]".

18-13
18-13

9-16

0 to 4

0.01

1

9-95

9-18
9-95
9-1
9-95

Chapter 18
Code

Name

AA214

RUN direction
restriction selection,
2nd-motor

AA215

STOP mode
selection, 2nd-motor

AA221

Control mode
selection, 2nd-motor

AA223

Vector control mode
selection, 2nd-motor

Parameter
Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

00: No restriction
01: Only Forward
02: Only Reverse

00

×

55FEh

0 to 2

1

00: Deceleration stop
01: Free-run stop

00

○

55FFh

0 to 1

1

00

×

5605h

0 to 11

1

00

×

5607h

0 to 3

1

Data range

00: V/f control (Constant torque) (IM)
01: V/f control (Reduce torque) (IM)
02: V/f control (Free-V/f) (IM)
03: V/f control(Automatic torque boost) (IM)
08: Sensorless vector control (IM)
11: Sensorless vector control (SM/PMM)
00: Speed/Torque control mode
02: Absolute position control
03: High resolution absolute position
control

Page

9-33
9-95
9-77
9-95

9-35
9-95

9-43
9-95
9-187
9-43

AA224

Speed compensation
with encoder
selection, 2nd-motor

00: Disable
01: Enable

00

Ab-01

Frequency conversion
gain

0.01 to 100.00

1.00

○

2F45h

1 to 10000

0.01

Ab-03

Multi-speed operation
selection

00: Binary (16-speeds)
01: Bit (8-speeds)

00

×

2F47h

0 to 1

1

0 to 59000

0.01

565Eh

0 to 59000

0.01

-

-

-

-

Ab110

Multi-speed 0 setting,1st-motor

×

5608h

0.00 to Max. frequency, 1st motor Hz

10.00
20.00

2F4Fh

30.00

2F50h

Ab-13 Multi-speed 3 setting

40.00

2F51h

Ab-14 Multi-speed 4 setting

2F52h

Ab-15 Multi-speed 5 setting

2F53h

Ab-16 Multi-speed 6 setting○
0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

2F55h

2F58h

Ab-21 Multi-speed 11 setting

2F59h

Ab-22 Multi-speed 12 setting

2F5Ah

Ab-23 Multi-speed 13 setting

2F5Bh

Ab-24 Multi-speed 14 setting

2F5Ch

Ab-25 Multi-speed 15 setting

2F5Dh

AC-02

Acceleration/
Deceleration selection

AC-03

Acceleration curve
selection

AC-04
AC-05
AC-06
AC-08
AC-09

0.00 to Max. frequency, 2nd motor Hz
-

10.00

〇

-

00: Common setting
01: Multi-stage acceleration/deceleration
00: Linear acceleration
01: S-curve acceleration
02: U-curve acceleration
03: Reverse U-curve acceleration
04: Elevator S-curve acceleration

Reserved
Acceleration curve
constant setting
Deceleration curve
constant setting
EL-S-curve ratio at startof acceleration
EL-S-curve ratio at endof acceleration

9-10

2F57h

0.00

Ab-20 Multi-speed 10 setting

Reserved

9-10
9-29

2F56h

Ab-19 Multi-speed 9 setting

AC-01

10-1

2F54h

Ab-17 Multi-speed 7 setting

Multi-speed 0 setting,2nd-motor

9-48

2F4Eh

Ab-12 Multi-speed 2 setting

Ab210

1

9-95

Ab-11 Multi-speed 1 setting

Ab-18 Multi-speed 8 setting

0 to 1

-

9-10
9-95

00

×

2FAAh

0 to 1

1

9-29

01

×

2FABh

0 to 4

1

9-26

-

-

-

-

-

-

2

○

1 to 101

2FADh
1 to 102FAEh
9-26
0 to (100 - [AC-09]) %

10

×

2FB0h

0 to (100 - [AC-08]) %

10

×

2FB1h

0 to 100

18-14
18-14

1

Chapter 18
Code

AC-10
AC-11

AC115

AC116

AC117
AC120
AC122
AC124
AC126
AC-30
AC-32
AC-34
AC-36
AC-38
AC-40
AC-42
AC-44
AC-46
AC-48
AC-50
AC-52
AC-54
AC-56
AC-58
AC-60
AC-62
AC-64
AC-66
AC-68
AC-70
AC-72
AC-74
AC-76

Name
EL-S-curve ratio at start ofdeceleration
EL-S-curve ratio at end of
deceleration
Accel/Decel change
trigger, 1st-motor
Accel 1 to Accel 2
frequency transition point,
1st-motor
Decel 1 to Decel 2
frequency transition point,
1st-motor
Acceleration time 1
1st-motor
Deceleration time 1
1st-motor
Acceleration time 2
1st-motor
Deceleration time 2
1st-motor
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 1
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 1
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 2
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 2
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 3
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 3
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 4
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 4
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 5
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 5
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 6
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 6
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 7
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 7
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 8
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 8
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 9
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 9
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 10
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 10
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 11
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 11
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 12

Parameter
Data range

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

10

×

0 to (100-[AC-11]) %Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Page

2FB2h

0 to (100-[AC-10]) %0 to 100

1

0 to 2

1

9-26

2FB3h

00: Switching by [AD2] terminal
01: Switching by setting
02: Switching only when rotation isreversed

00

×

2FB7h

9-24

2FB8h
0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

0 to 59000

0.01

2FB9h

0.00 to 3600.00 s

10.00

0.00 to 3600.00 s

0.00

Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 12

○

○

2FBCh
2FBDh
2FBEh
2FBFh
2FC0h
2FC1h
2FC2h
2FC3h
2FC6h
2FC7h
2FC8h
2FC9h
2FCAh
2FCBh
2FCCh
2FCDh
2FCEh
2FCFh
2FD0h
2FD1h
2FD2h
2FD3h
2FD4h
2FD5h
2FD6h
2FD7h
2FD8h
2FD9h
2FDAh
2FDBh
2FDCh
2FDDh
2FDEh
2FDFh
2FE0h
2FE1h
2FE2h
2FE3h
2FE4h
2FE5h
2FE6h
2FE7h
2FE8h
2FE9h
2FEAh
2FEBh
2FECh
2FEDh
2FEEh
2FEFh
2FF0h
2FF1h
2FF2h
2FF3h
2FF4h
2FF5h

18-15
18-15

9-23
0 to 360000

0.01
9-24

0 to 360000

0.01

9-29

Chapter 18
Code

AC-78
AC-80
AC-82
AC-84
AC-86
AC-88

AC215

AC216

AC217
AC220
AC222
AC224
AC226

Name

Parameter
Initialvalue

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

0 to 360000

0.01

0 to 2

1

0 to 59000

1

Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 13
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 13
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 14
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 14
Acceleration timefor Multi-speed 15
Deceleration timefor Multi-speed 15

0.00 to 3600.00 s

0.00

○

2FF6h
2FF7h
2FF8h
2FF9h
2FFAh
2FFBh
2FFCh
2FFDh
2FFEh
2FFFh
3000h
3001h

Accel/Decel change
trigger, 2nd-motor

00: Switching by [AD2] terminal
01: Switching by setting
02: Switching only when rotationis reversed

00

×

56C7h

Accel1 to Accel2
frequency transition
point 2nd-motor
Decel1 to Decel2
frequency transition
point 2nd-motor
Acceleration time 1
2nd-motor
Deceleration time 1
2nd-motor
Acceleration time 2
2nd-motor
Deceleration time 2,
2nd-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

〇
56C9h

0.00 to 3600.00 s

9-24
9-95

10.00

○

56CCh
56CDh
56CEh
56CFh
56D0h
56D1h
56D2h
56D3h

01

×

300Dh

1 to 15

1

0 to 360000

0.01

Ad-01

Torque reference
input source selection

Ad-02

Torque reference value
setting-500.0 to 500.0 (%)

0.0

○

300Eh

-5000 to 5000

0.1

Ad-03

Torque reference
polarity selection

00: According to sign
01: Depending on the operation
direction

01

×

300Fh

0 to 11

Ad-04

Switching time of speed
control to torque control

0 to 1000 ms

100

×

3010h

0 to 1000

1

Ad-11

Torque bias input source
selection

00: Disable
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
15: PID function

00

×

3017h

0 to 151Ad-12Torque bias value setting-500.0 to 500.0 %

0.0

○

3018h

-5000 to 5000

0.1

Ad-13

Torque bias polarity
selection

00

×

3019h

0 to 11

Ad-14

Enable terminal [TBS]

00

×

301Ah

0 to 1

1

Ad-40

Speed limit input source
selection at torquecontrol

07

×

3034h

1 to 12

1

Ad-41

Ad-42

9-29

56C8h

01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
15: PID function

Speed limit at torquecontrol(at Forward rotation)
Speed limit at torquecontrol(at Reverse rotation)

Page

9-64

00: According to sign
01: Depending on the operation
direction
00: Disabled
01: Enabled
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input

0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

9-57

9-57
○

3035h

○

3036h

0.00

18-16
18-16

0 to 59000

0.01

Chapter 18
Code

AE-04
AE-05
AE-10
AE-11
AE-12
AE-13

Name
Positioning completed
range setting
Positioning completed
delay time setting
Stop position selection ofhome search function
Stop position of home
search function
Speed reference of home
search function
Direction of home searchfunction

Parameter
Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

0 to 10000 pls

50

○

3074h

0 to 100001

0.00 to 10.00 s

0.00

○

3075h

0 to 1000

0.01

00: Parameter setting
01: Option

00

×

307Ah

0 to 1

1

0 to 4095

0

○

307Bh

0 to 4095

1

5.00

○

307Ch

0 to 12000

0.01

00

×

307Dh

0 to 1

1

00

×

307Eh

0 to 1

1

9-202

0.01

9-52
9-187

Data range

Page

9-187

9-200
0.00 to 120.00 Hz
00: Forward
01: Reverse
00: Disable DB on simple
positioning
01: Enable DB on simple
positioning

AE-14

DC braking control
selection for simple
positioning

AE-15

Creep speed setting[Hb*30] to 10.00 Hz

5.00

○

307Fh

AE-16

Position displacement at
creep speed

0 to 16384 pls

2560

×

3080h

0 to 16384

1

9-187

AE-17

Positioning restart range

0 to 10000 pls

0○

0 to 10000

1

9-193

AE-20

Position reference 0

AE-22

Position reference 1

AE-24

Position reference 2

AE-26

Position reference 3

AE-28

Position reference 4

AE-30

Position reference 5

AE-32

Position reference 6

AE-34

Position reference 7

3081h
3084h
3085h
3086h
3087h
3088h
3089h
308Ah
308Bh
308Ch
308Dh
308Eh
308Fh
3090h
3091h
3092h
3093h
3094h
3095h
3096h
3097h
3098h
3099h
309Ah
309Bh
309Ch
309Dh
309Eh
309Fh
30A0h
30A1h
30A2h
30A3h

1

9-187

AE-36

Position reference 8

AE-38

Position reference 9

AE-40

Position reference 10

AE-42

Position reference 11

AE-44

Position reference 12

AE-46

Position reference 13

AE-48

Position reference 14

AE-50

Position reference 15

AE-52

Position control range
setting (forward)

Absolute position control :-268435455 to 268435455 pls
High resolution absolute position
control :-1073741823 to 1073741823 pls

0○(Data range is limited [AE-54]
to [AE-52] by parametersetting)

Absolute position control :0 to 268435455 pls
High resolution absolute
position control :0 to 1073741823 pls

268435455-268435455

○

30A6h
30A7h

00

×

30A8h

AE-54

Position control range
setting (reverse)

Absolute position control :-268435455 to 0 pls
High resolution absolute
position control :-1073741823 to 0 pl)

AE-56

Position control mode
selection

00: Limited
01: Not limited

18-17
18-17

○

30A4h
30A5h

[Hb*30] to
1000

Normal mode:-268435455
to 268435455
High resolution
mode:-1073741823
to 1073741823([AE-54] to[AE-52])

Normal mode:
0 to 268435455
High resolution
mode:
0 to
1073741823
Normal mode:-268435455
to 0High resolution
mode:-1073741823
to 0
0 to 1

1
9-187
9-190
9-197
1

1

9-187

Chapter 18
CodeParameter

Name

AE-60

Teach-in function
target selection

AE-61

Save current positionat power off

Data range
00: X00 / 01: X01/ 02: X02
03: X03/ 04: X04 / 05: X05
06: X06 / 07: X07/ 08: X08
09: X09/ 10: X10 / 11: X11
12: X12 / 13: X13/ 14: X14
15: X1500: Disable
01: Enable

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

00

○

30ACh

0 to 15

1

9-191

00

○

30ADh

0 to 1

1

9-198

1

9-197

Normal mode:-268435455
to 268435455

Absolute position control :-268435455 to 268435455 pls
AE-62

Pre-set position data

High resolution absolute position
control :-1073741823 to 1073741823 pls

0○

100.00

○

30AEh
30AFh

(Data range is limited [AE-54] to[AE-52] by parameter setting)
AE-64

AE-65

AE-70
AE-71
AE-72
AE-73

Deceleration stop
distance calculation
gain
Deceleration stop
distance calculation
bias
Homing function
selection
Direction of homing
function
Low-speed homing
speed setting
High-speed homing
speed setting

AE-74

ORG action selection

AF101

DC braking selection
1st-motor

AF103
AF104
AF105
AF106
AF107
AF108
AF109
AF120
AF121
AF122
AF123

AF130

AF131
AF132

DC braking frequency
1st-motor
DC braking delay time
1st-motor
DC braking force
setting, 1st-motor
DC braking active timeat stop, 1st-motor
DC braking operation
method selection
1st-motor
DC braking force atstart, 1st-motor
DC braking active timeat start, 1st-motor
Contactor control
enable, 1st-motor
Run delay time
1st-motor
Contactor off delaytime, 1st-motor
Contactor response
check time, 1st-motor
Brake control enable,
1st-motor
Brake release wait time
1st-motor (Forward)
Brake wait time foraccel.,1st-motor(Forward)

50.00 to 200.00 %

Page

30B0h

High resolution
mode:-1073741823
to 1073741823([AE-54] to [AE-52])
5000 to 20000

0.01
9-188

0.00 to 655.35 %

0.00

○

30B1h

0 to 65535

0.01

00

○

30B6h

0 to 2

1

01

○

30B7h

0 to 1

10.00 to 10.00 Hz

5.00

○

30B8h

0 to 1000

0.01

0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

5.00

○

30B9h

0 to 59000

0.01

01

○

30BAh

0 to 1

1

00

○

30D5h

0 to 21

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.50

○

30D7h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

○

30D8h

0 to 500

0.01

0 to 100 %

50

○

30D9h

0 to 10010.00 to 60.00 s

0.50

○

30DAh

0 to 6000

0.01

00: Edge
01: Level

01

○

30DBh

0 to 1

1

0 to 100 %

0

○

30DCh

0 to 10010.00 to 60.00 s

0.00

○

30DDh

0 to 6000

0.01

00: Disable
01: Enable (Primary side)
02: Enable (Secondary side)

00

×

30E8h

0 to 21

0.00 to 2.00 s

0.20

○

30E9h

0.00 to 2.00 s

0.10

○

30EAh

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.10

○

30EBh

00: Disable
01: Brake control enable(Common)02: Brake control enable(Separate for FWD/REV)

00

○

30F2h

00: Low speed homing
01: High speed homing 1
02: High speed homing 2
00: Forward
01: Reverse

00: Without RUN command
01: With RUN command
00: Disable
01: Enable
02: Enable (by frequency reference)

9-194

9-69
9-78

9-78

9-69

9-86
0 to 200

0.01

0 to 2

1
9-84

30F3h
0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

○

0 to 500
30F4h

18-18
18-18

0.01

Chapter 18
Code

AF133
AF134

AF135

AF136

AF137
AF138
AF139
AF140
AF141

AF142

Parameter

Name
Brake wait time for stopping
1st-motor (Forward)
Brake confirmation signal
wait time,
1st-motor (Forward)
Brake release frequency
setting,
1st-motor (Forward)
Brake release current setting
1st-motor (Forward)
Braking frequency, 1st-motor(Forward)
Brake release wait time
1st-motor (Reverse)
Brake wait time for accel.
1st-motor (Reverse)
Brake wait time for stopping
1st-motor (Reverse)
Brake confirmation signal
wait time,
1st-motor (Reverse)
Brake release frequency
setting,
1st-motor (Reverse)

Initialvalue

Data range

0.00 to 5.00 s

Modbus communication

Changeduringrunning

Register
No.

○

30F5h

○

30F6h

○

30F7h

0 to 59000

0.01

30F8h

(0.20 to 2.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

2000 to 20000 Note

0.01

0 to 59000

0.01

0.00

Resolution

0.00(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent

○

0.00

○

30F9h

○

30FAh

○

30FBh

○

30FCh

○

30FDh

○

9-84
0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent○

0 to 500

0.01

30FEh

0 to 59000

0.01

30FFh

(0.20 to 2.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

2000 to 20000 Note

0.01

AF143

Brake release current setting
1st-motor (Reverse)

AF144

Braking frequency, 1st-motor(Reverse)

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

3100h

0 to 59000

0.01

DC braking selection
2nd-motor

00: Disable
01: Enable
02: Enable (by frequency reference)

00

○

57E5h

0 to 21

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.50

○

57E7h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

○

57E8h

0 to 500

0.01

0 to 100 %

50

○

57E9h

0 to 00

1

0.00 to 60.00 s

0.50

○

57EAh

0 to 6000

0.01

00: Edge
01: Level

01

○

57EBh

0 to 1

1

0 to 100 %

0

○

57ECh

0 to 10010.00 to 60.00 s

0.00

○

57EDh

0 to 6000

0.01

00: Disable
01: Enable (Primary side)
02: Enable (Secondary side)

00

×

57F8h

0 to 21

0.00 to 2.00 s

0.20

○

57F9h

0 to 200

0.01

0.00 to 2.00 s

0.10

○

57FAh

0 to 200

0.01

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.10

○

57FBh

0 to 500

0.01

00: Disable
01: Brake control enable(Common)02: Brake control enable(Separate for FWD/REV)

00

○

5802h

0 to 2

1

AF201
AF203
AF204
AF205
AF206
AF207
AF208
AF209
AF220

DC braking frequency
2nd-motor
DC braking delay time
2nd-motor
DC braking force setting
2nd-motor
DC braking active time at stop
2nd-motor
DC braking operation method
selection, 2nd-motor
DC braking force at start
2nd-motor
DC braking active time at start
2nd-motor
Contactor control enable2nd-motor

Run delay time,
2nd-motor
Contactor off delay time
AF222
2nd-motor
Contactor response check time
AF223
2nd-motor
AF221

AF230

AF231
AF232
AF233

Brake control enable2nd-motor
Brake release wait time
2nd-motor (Forward)
Brake wait time for accel.
2nd-motor (Forward)
Brake wait time for stopping
2nd-motor (Forward)

Page

0 to 500

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

Data range

9-78
9-95

9-69
9-95

9-86
9-95

9-84
5803h

0.00 to 5.00 s

9-69
9-78
9-95

0.00

○

5804h

9-95
0 to 500

0.01

5805h

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-19
18-19

Chapter 18
Code

Name

Parameter
Data range

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

AF234

Brake confirmation signal
wait time, 2nd-motor(Forward)

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00

○

5806h

0 to 500

0.01

AF235

Brake release frequency
setting, 2nd-motor (Forward)

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

5807h

0 to 59000

0.01

AF236

Brake release current setting,2nd-motor (Forward)(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent○5808h(0.20 to 2.00)
×Rated output
current

0.00

○

5809h

○

580Ah

○

580Bh

○

580Ch

○

580Dh

○

Braking frequency
2nd-motor (Forward)
Brake release wait time
2nd-motor (Reverse)
Brake wait time for accel.
2nd-motor (Reverse)
Brake wait time for stopping
2nd-motor (Reverse)
Brake confirmation signal
wait time, 2nd-motor(Reverse)
Brake release frequency
setting, 2nd-motor (Reverse)

0.00 to 5.00 s

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

AF243

Brake release current setting
2nd-motor (Reverse)(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current A

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent○

AF244

Braking frequency
2nd-motor (Reverse)

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

AG101

Jump frequency 1, 1st-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

AG102

Jump frequency width 1
1st-motor

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

AG103

Jump frequency 2, 1st-motor

AG104

Jump frequency width 2
1st-motor

AG105

Jump frequency 3, 1st-motor

AF237
AF238
AF239
AF240
AF241
AF242

AG106
AG110
AG111
AG112
AG113

Jump frequency width 3
1st-motor
Acceleration stop frequency
setting, 1st-motor
Acceleration
stop
time
setting, 1st-motor
Deceleration stop frequency
setting, 1st-motor
Deceleration stop time
setting, 1st-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

2000 to 20000 Note

0.01

0 to 59000

0.01

Page

9-84
9-95
0 to 500

0.01

580Eh

0 to 59000

0.01

580Fh

(0.20 to 2.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

2000 to 20000 Note

0.01

5810h

0 to 59000

0.01

○

3139h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.50

○

313Ah

0 to 1000

0.01

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

313Bh

0 to 59000

0.01

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

○

313Ch

0 to 1000

0.01

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

313Dh

0 to 59000

0.01

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

○

313Eh

0 to 1000

0.01

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

3142h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 60.0 s

0.0

○

3143h

0 to 600

0.1

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

3144h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 60.0 s

0.0

○

3145h

0 to 600

0.1

0.00 to 10.00 Hz(Disable at RUN)
00: Free run at jogging stop
01: Deceleration stop at
jogging stop
02: DC braking at jogging
stop (Enable at RUN)
03: Free run at jogging stop
04: Deceleration stop at
jogging stop
05: DC braking at jogging
stop

6.00

○

314Ch

0 to 1000

0.01

04

○

314Dh

0 to 5

1

9-156

9-25

AG-20

Jogging frequency

AG-21

Jogging stop mode selection

AG201

Jump frequency 1, 2nd-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

5849h

0 to 59000

0.01

AG202

Jump frequency
width 1, 2nd-motor

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

○

584Ah

0 to 1000

0.01

AG203

Jump frequency 2, 2nd-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

584Bh

0 to 59000

0.01

AG204

Jump frequency
width 2, 2nd-motor

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

○

584Ch

0 to 1000

0.01

AG205

Jump frequency 3, 2nd-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

584Dh

0 to 59000

0.01

9-13

9-156
9-95

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-20
18-20

Chapter 18
Code

AG206
AG210
AG211
AG212
AG213

Parameter
Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Page

○

584Eh

0 to 1000

0.01

9-156
9-95

0.00

○

5852h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 60.0 s

0.0

○

5853h

0 to 600

0.1

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

5854h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 60.0 s

0.0

○

5855h

0 to 600

0.1

00

○

319Dh

0 to 2

1

9-100
9-102

00

○

319Eh

0 to 1

1

9-102

01

○

319Fh

0 to 58

1

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

Name
Jump frequency
width 3, 2nd-motor
Acceleration stop frequency
setting, 2nd-motor
Acceleration stop time setting
2nd-motor
Deceleration stop frequency
setting, 2nd-motor
Deceleration stop time setting
2nd-motor

AH-01

PID1 enable

AH-02

PID1 deviation inversion

AH-03

PID1 unit selection

Data range

00: Disable
01: Enable
02: Enable (with inverted output)
00: Disable
01: Enable
00: non/ 01: %/ 02: A/ 03: Hz
04: V/ 05: kW/ 06: W/ 07: hr
08: s/ 09 kHz/ 10: Ω/ 11: mA
12: ms/ 13: P/ 14: kgm2/
15: pls 16: mH/ 17: Vdc/ 18: °C
19: kWh/ 20: mF/ 21: mVs/rad
22: Nm/ 23: min-1/ 24: m/s
25: m/min/ 26: m/h/ 27: ft/s
28: ft/min/ 29: ft/h /30: m
31: cm/32: °F/ 33: l/s
34: l/min/ 35: l/h/ 36: m3/s
37: m3/min/ 38: m3/h/ 39: kg/s
40: kg/min/ 41: kg/h
42: t/min/43: t/h / 44 gal/s
45: gal/min/ 46: gal/h
47: ft3/s/ 48: ft3/min/ 49: ft3/h
50: lb/s/ 51: lb/min/ 52: lb/h
53: mbar/ 54: bar/ 55: Pa
56: kPa/ 57: PSI/ 58: mm

9-129

AH-04

PID1 scale adjustment (0%)

AH-05

PID1 scale adjustment (100%)

0

○

31A0h

10000

○

31A1h

-10000 to
10000

1

AH-06

PID1 scale adjustment(decimal point position)

0 to 4

2

○

31A2h

0 to 41

00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input

AH-07

PID1 set-point 1 input source
selection

07

×

31A3h

0 to 121

AH-10

PID1 set-point 1 setting

○

AH-12

PID1 multistage set-point 1

○

AH-14

PID1 multistage set-point 2

○

AH-16

PID1 multistage set-point 3

○

AH-18

PID1 multistage set-point 4

○

AH-20

PID1 multistage set-point 5

AH-22

PID1 multistage set-point 6

○

AH-24

PID1 multistage set-point 7

○

AH-26

PID1 multistage set-point 8

○

AH-28

PID1 multistage set-point 9

○

AH-30

PID1 multistage set-point 10○-10000 to 10000-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID1 scale
adjustment (AH-04, 05, 06)

18-21
18-21

9-25
9-95

0.00

○

31A6h
31A7h
31A8h
31A9h
31AAh
31ABh
31ACh
31ADh
31AEh
31AFh
31B0h
31B1h
31B2h
31B3h
31B4h
31B5h
31B6h
31B7h
31B8h
31B9h
31BAh
31BBh

9-102

-10000 to
10000

1Chapter 18
CodeParameter

Name

AH-32

PID1 multistage set-point 11

AH-34

PID1 multistage set-point 12

AH-36

PID1 multistage set-point 13

AH-38

PID1 multistage set-point 14

AH-40

PID1 multistage set-point 15

AH-42

PID1 set-point 2
input source selection

AH-44

PID1 set-point 2 setting

AH-46

PID1 set-point 3
input source selection

AH-48

PID1 set-point 3 setting

AH-50

PID1 set-point calculation
symbol selection

AH-51

PID1 feedback 1
input source selection

AH-52

PID1 feedback 2
input source selection

AH-53

PID1 feedback 3
input source selection

AH-54

PID1 feedback calculation
symbol selection

Initialvalue

Data range

Changeduringrunning○-100.00 to 100.00 %○Data range depends on PID1
scale adjustment (AH-04, 05,

0.00

06)

○
○
○

00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID1
scale adjustment (AH-04, 05,
06)
00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID1
scale adjustment (AH-04, 05,
06)
01: Addition
02: Subtraction
03: Multiplication
04: Division
05: Minimum deviation
06: Maximum deviation
00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
01: Addition
02: Subtraction
03: Multiplication
04: Division
05: Square root of FB1
06: Square root of FB2
07: Square root of FB1-FB2
08: Average of the three
inputs09: Minimum of the three
inputs
10: Maximum of the three
inputsModbus communication
RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

31BCh
31BDh
31BEh
31BFh
31C0h
31C1h
31C2h
31C3h
31C4h
31C5h

-10000 to 10000

1

Page

9-102

00

×

31C6h

0 to 12

1

0.00

○

31C8h
31C9h

-10000 to 10000

1

00

×

31CAh

0 to 12

1

0.00

○

31CCh
31CDh

-10000 to 10000

1

01

○

31CEh

1 to 6

1

02

○

31CFh

0 to 12

1

00

×

31D0h

0 to 12

1

00

×

31D1h

0 to 12

1

01

○

31D2h

1 to 10

1

18-22
18-22

9-107

9-110

Chapter 18
CodeParameter

Name

Data range

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

AH-60

PID1 gain change method
selection

00: Using gain-1 only
01: [PRO] terminal

00

×

31D8h

0 to 1

1

AH-61

PID1 proportional gain 1

0.0 to 100.0

1.0

○

31D9h

0 to 1000

0.1

AH-62

PID1 integral time
constant 1

0.0 to 3600.0 s

1.0

○

31DAh

0 to 36000

0.1

AH-63

PID1 derivative gain 1

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

31DBh

0 to 10000

0.01

AH-64

PID1 proportional gain 2

0.0 to 100.0

0.0

○

31DCh

0 to 1000

0.1

AH-65

PID1 integral time
constant 2

0.0 to 3600.0 s

0.0

○

31DDh

0 to 36000

0.1

AH-66

PID1 derivative gain 2

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

31DEh

0 to 10000

0.01

AH-67

PID1 gain change time

0 to 10000 ms

100

○

31DFh

0 to 10000

1

PID1 feed-forward input
source selection

00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]

00

○

31E2h

0 to 2

1

AH-70

Page

9-114

9-111

AH-71

PID1 output range

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

○

31E3h

0 to 10000

0.01

9-112

AH-72

PID1 over deviation levelTurn-off level for the PID1
feedback compare signal
Turn-on level for the PID1
feedback compare signal0.00 to 100.00 %

3.00

○

31E4h

0 to 10000

0.01

9-126

0.00 to 100.00 %100.00○31E5h

0 to 10000

0.01

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

○

31E6h

0 to 10000

0.01

00

×

31E7h

0 to 1

1

31E8h
31EAh
31EBh

0 to 10000

0.01

0 to 360000

0.01

AH-73
AH-74

9-127

AH-75

PID soft start function enable

00: Disable
01: Enable

AH-76

PID soft start target level0.00 to 100.00 %100.00○

AH-78

Acceleration time setting for
PID soft start function

0.00 to 3600.00 s

30.00

○

AH-80

PID soft start time

0.00 to 600.00 s

0.00

○

31ECh

0 to 60000

0.01

AH-81

PID soft start error detection
enable00: Disable
01: Enable (Error)
02: Enable (Warning)

00

×

31EDh

0 to 2

1

AH-82

PID soft start error detection
level

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

○

31EEh

0 to 10000

0.01

AH-85

PID sleep trigger selection

00: Disable
01: Low output
02: [SLEP] terminal

00

×

31F1h

0 to 2

1

AH-86

PID sleep start level0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

31F2h

0 to 59000

0.01

AH-87

PID sleep active time

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

31F3h

0 to 10000

0.01

AH-88

Enable set-point boost before
PID sleep

00: Disable
01: Enable

00

×

31F4h

0 to 1

10.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

31F5h

0 to 10000

0.01

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

○

31F6h

0 to 10000

0.01

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

31F7h

0 to 10000

0.01

AH-89
AH-90
AH-91
AH-92

Set-point boost time before
PID sleep
Set-point boost value before
PID sleep
Minimum RUN time before
PID sleep
Minimum active time of PID
sleep

AH-93 PID wake trigger selection

9-116

9-117

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

31F8h

0 to 10000

0.01

01: Deviation value
02: Low feedback
03: [WAKE] terminal

01

×

31F9h

1 to 31

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

○

31FAh

0 to 10000

0.01

AH-95 PID wake start time

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

31FBh

0 to 10000

0.01

0.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

○

31FCh

0 to 10000

0.01

00

×

3201h

0 to 2

1

00

×

3202h

0 to 1

1

PID wake start deviation
value

AJ-01

PID2 enable

AJ-02

PID2 deviation inversion

00: Disable
01: Enable
02: Enable(with inverted output)
00: Disable
01: Enable

AJ-03

PID2 unit selection

00 to 58 (Same as AH-03)

01

○

3203h

0 to 58

1

AJ-04

PID2 scale adjustment (0%)-10000 to 10000

0

○

3204h

-10000 to 10000

1

AJ-05

PID2 scale adjustment (100%)
PID2 scale adjustment(decimal point position)-10000 to 10000

10000

○

3205h

-10000 to 10000

1

2

○

3206h

0 to 4

1

AJ-06

9-119

9-120

AH-94 PID wake start level

AH-96

9-115

0 to 4

18-23
18-23

9-117

Chapter 18
Code

Name

Parameter
Data range
00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
15: PID1 output-100.00 to 100.00 %Data range depends on PID2
scale adjustment(AJ-04, 05, 06)
00: Not used
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

07

×

3207h

0 to 15

1

9-123

0.00

○

320Ah

-10000 to 10000

1

9-123

02

×

320Ch

0 to 12

1

9-123

AJ-07

PID2 set-point input source
selection

AJ-10

PID2 set-point setting

AJ-12

PID2 feedback input
source selection

AJ-13

PID2 proportional gain

0.0 to 100.0

1.0

○

320Dh

0 to 1000

0.1

AJ-14

PID2 integral time constant

0.0 to 3600.0 s

1.0

○

320Eh

0 to 36000

0.1

AJ-15

PID2 derivative gain

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

320Fh

0 to 10000

0.01

AJ-16

PID2 output range

0.00

○

3210h

AJ-17

PID2 over deviation level

3.00

○

3211h

AJ-18
AJ-19

Turn-off level for the PID2
feedback compare signal
Turn-on level for the PID2
feedback compare signal0.00 to 100.00 %100.00

○

3212h

0.00

○

3213h

Page

9-123
9-126
9-125
9-126

0 to 10000

0.01
9-127

18-24
18-24

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.4 b parameter
Code

bA101

bA102
bA103

Name

Upper frequency limit
source selection, 1stmotor

Upper frequency limit
1st-motor
Lower frequency limit
1st-motor

bA110

Torque limit selection
1st-motor

bA111

Torque limiting parametersmode selection, 1st-motor

bA112
bA113
bA114
bA115
bA116

bA120

Torque limit 1(Forward drive), 1st-motor
Torque limit 2(Reverse regenerative),
1st-motor
Torque limit 3(Reverse drive), 1st-motor
Torque limit 4(Forward regenerative),
1st-motor
Torque limit LADSTOP
selection, 1st-motor
Overcurrent suppression
enable, 1st-motor

Data range
00: Disable
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
0.00 toMax. frequency, 1st motor (Hz)0.00 to Upper frequency limit,
1st motor (Hz)00: Disable
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
00: 4 quadrants
01: Switched by [TRQ1][TRQ2]
terminals

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

00

×

32C9h

0 to 12

1
9-32

0.00

○

32CAh

0.00

○

32CBh

07

○

00

×

0 to 59000

0.01

32D2h

0 to 91

32D3h

0 to 1

1
9-59

32D4h
32D5h
0.0 to 500.0 %

200.0

○

0 to 5000

0.1

32D6h
32D7h
00: Disable
01: Enable
00: Disable
01: Enable
02: Enable

00

○

32D8h

0 to 1

1

00

○

32DCh

0 to 2

1

32DDh(0.30 to 1.80)
×Rated output
current

0.1

3000 to 18000Note

0.01

32DEh

0 to 3132DFh(0.20 to 2.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

2000 to 20000 Note

0.01

10 to 360000

0.01

32E2h

0 to 3132E3h(0.20 to 2.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

2000 to 20000 Note

0.01

10 to 360000

0.01(with voltage reduction)
bA121

bA122

bA123

bA124

bA126

Overcurrent suppression
level, 1st-motor(0.30 to 1.80)×Inverter
rated output current

Overload restriction 1
mode selection, 1st-motor

00: Disable
01: Enable during accel. andconstant speed
02: Constant speed only
03: Enable during accel. andconstant speed(Accel. during regeneration)

Overload restriction 1
active level, 1st-motor

1.80×
Rated
outputcurrent

×

01

○

1.50×
Rated
outputcurrent

0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current○

Overload restriction 1
action time, 1st-motor

0.10 to 3600.00 s

1.00

○

Overload restriction 2
mode selection, 1st-motor

00: Disable
01: Enable during accel. andconstant speed
02: Constant speed only
03: Enable during accel. And
constant speed(Accel. during regeneration)

01

○

bA127

Overload restriction 2
active level, 1st-motor

bA128

Overload restriction 2
action time, 1st-motor

Page

0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current

0.10 to 3600.00 s

1.50×
Rated
outputcurrent
1.00

○

○

32E0h
32E1h

32E4h
32E5h

9-61

9-132

9-130

9-131

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-25
18-25

Chapter 18

Parameter
Modbus communication

Name

Data range

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

bA-30

Instantaneous power failure
non-stop function, mode
selection

00: Disable
01: Deceleration stop
02: Deceleration stop at
power failure(without resume)
03: Deceleration stop at
power failure (withresume)

00

×

32E6h

0 to 31

bA-31

Instantaneous power failure
non-stop function, start
voltage level

○

32E7h

200V class:0 to 4000
400V class: 0 to 8000

0.1

0 to 20000 Note

0.01

bA-32

Instantaneous power failure
non-stop function, target
voltage level

32E8h200V class: 0 to 4000
400V class: 0 to 8000

0.1

Code

bA-34

bA-36

bA-37

bA-38

bA140

bA141

bA142
bA144
bA145

bA146

bA147
bA148

bA149

Instantaneous power failure
non-stop function,
deceleration time
Instantaneous power failure
non-stop function, startfrequency decrement
Instantaneous power failure
non-stop function, DC bus
voltage control P gain
Instantaneous power failure
non-stop function, DC bus
voltage control I gain

200V class:
DC0.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:
DC0.0 to 800.0 V

220.0
440.0
360.0
720.0

○

0 to 20000

0.01 to 3600.00 s

1.00

○

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.00

○

0.00 to 5.00

0.20

0.00 to 150.00 s

Overvoltage suppression
enable setting, 1st-motor

00: Disable
01: Constant DC bus
voltage control(deceleration stop)
02: Enable acceleration(at deceleration)
03: Enable acceleration(at constant speed
and deceleration)

Overvoltage suppression
active level, 1st-motor

200V class:
DC330.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:DC660.0 to 800.0 V

Overvoltage suppression
active time, 1st-motor
Constant DC bus voltage
control P gain, 1st-motor
Constant DC bus voltage
control I gain, 1st-motor

Overexcitation function
selection, 1st-motor

Overexcitation function
output filter time constant,
1st-motor
Overexcitation function
voltage gain, 1st-motor

Overexcitation function levelsetting, 1st-motor

32EAh

Note

0.01

1 to 360000

0.01

32ECh

0 to 1000

0.01

○

32EDh

0 to 500

0.01

1.00

○

32EEh

0 to 15000

0.01

00

○

32F0h

0 to 3

1

200V class:3300 to 4000
400V class:
6600 to 8000

0.1

16500 to 20000 Note

0.01

0 to 360000

0.01

380.0
760.0

○

32EBh

32F1h

32F2h

0.00 to 3600.00 s

1.00

○

0.00 to 5.00

0.20

○

32F4h

0 to 500

0.01

0.00 to 150.00 s

1.00

○

32F5h

0 to 15000

0.01

00: Disable
01: Always enable
02: At deceleration only
03: Operation at settinglevel04: Operation at setting
level at deceleration
stop

00

○

32F6h

0 to 41

0.000 to 10.000 s

0.300

○

32F7h

0 to 10000

0.001

50 to 400 %

100

○

32F8h

50 to 400

1

200V class:3300 to 4000
400V class:
6600 to 8000

0.1

16500 to 20000 Note

0.01

200V class:
DC330.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:DC660.0 to 800.0 V

360.0
720.0

○

32F3h

32F9h

Page

9-149

9-133

9-135

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-26
18-26

Chapter 18
Code

Name

bA-60

Dynamic brake use ratiobA-61

Dynamic brake activation
selectionbA-62

Dynamic brake activation
level

bA-63

Dynamic brake resistor
value

bA-70

Cooling fan control
method selection

bA-71

Clear accumulated cooling
fan run time monitor

bA-72

Ambient temperaturebA201

Upper frequency limit
source selection,
2nd-motor

bA202
bA203

Upper frequency limit,
2nd-motor
Lower frequency limit,
2nd-motor

bA210

Torque limit selection,
2nd-motor

bA211

Torque limiting parametersmode selection, 2nd-motor

bA212
bA213
bA214
bA215
bA216

bA220

bA221

bA222

Torque limit 1 (Forward
drive), 2nd-motor
Torque limit 2 (Reverse
regenerative), 2nd-motor
Torque limit 3 (Reverse
drive), 2nd-motor
Torque limit 4 (Forward
regenerative), 2nd-motor
Torque limit LADSTOP
selection, 2nd-motor
Overcurrent suppression
enable, 2nd-motor

Overcurrent suppression
level, 2nd-motor

Overload restriction 1
mode selection, 2nd-motor

Parameter
Data range
0.0 to 10.0×([bA-63]/
Min. resistance)2 %00: Disable
01: Only while running
02: Enable during stop
200V class:
DC330.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:DC660.0 to 800.0 V
Min. resistance to600.0 Ω00: Always ON
01: While inverter
operates
02: Depends on
temperature
00: Disabled
01: Clear-10 to 50 ℃
00: Disable
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
0.00 to Max. frequency,
2nd motor (Hz)0.00 to Upper frequency
limit, 2nd motor (Hz)00: Disable
01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
00: 4 quadrants
01: Switched by[TRQ1][TRQ2] terminals

0.0 to 500.0 %00: Disable
01: Enable
00: Disable
01: Enable
02: Enable(with voltage reduction)(0.30 to 1.80)×Inverter
rated output current
0: Disabled
01: Enable during accel.
and constant speed
02: Constant speed only
03: Enable during accel.
and constant speed

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

10.0

○

3304h

0 to 10000

0.1

00

○

3305h

0 to 2

1

200V class:3300 to 4000
400V class:
6600 to 8000

0.1

16500 to 20000 Note

0.01

360.0
720.0

○

3306h

Min.
resistance

○

3307h

01

○

330Eh

0 to 2

1

00

○

330Fh

0 to 1

1

40

○

3310h

-10 to 50

1

00

×

59D9h

0 to 12

1

0.00

○

59DAh
0 to 59000

0.01

0.00

○

59DBh

07

○

59E2h

0 to 9

1

00

×

59E3h

0 to 1

1

○

59E4h

○

59E5h
0 to 5000

0.1

200.0

Min. resistance to6000

Overload restriction 1
active level, 2nd-motor(0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current

9-137

0.1

9-156

9-168

9-32
9-95

○

59E6h

○

59E7h

00

○

59E8h

0 to 1

1

00

○

59ECh

0 to 2

1

59EDh(0.30 to 1.80)
×Rated output
current

0.1

3000 to 18000 Note

0.01

0 to 3

1

9-59
9-95

9-61
9-95

9-132
1.80×
Rated
outputcurrent

×

01

○

59EEh

9-95

9-130
9-95

(Accel. during regeneration)

bA223

Page

1.50×
Rated
outputcurrent〇

59EFh(0.20 to 2.00)
×Rated output
current
2000 to 20000 Note

0.1
0.01

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-27
18-27

Chapter 18
Code

bA224

bA226

bA227

bA228

bA240

bA241

bA242
bA244
bA245

bA246

bA247
bA248

bA249

bb101
bb102
bb103

bb-10
bb-11
bb-12
bb-13

Parameter

Name

Data range

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

Overload restriction 1
action time, 2nd-motor

0.10 to 3600.00 s

1.00

○

59F0h
59F1h

10 to 360000

0.01

Overload restriction 2
mode selection, 2nd-motor

00: Disable
01: Enable during accel. andconstant speed
02: Constant speed only
03: Enable during accel. andconstant speed(Accel. during regeneration)

01

○

59F2h

0 to 3159F3h(0.20 to 2.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

2000 to 20000 Note

0.01

10 to 360000

0.01

0 to 3

1

200V class:3300 to 4000
400V class:
6600 to 8000

0.1

16500 to 20000 Note

0.01

0 to 360000

0.01

Overload restriction 2
active level, 2nd-motor(0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current

1.50×
Rated
outputcurrent○

0.10 to 3600.00 s

1.00

○

59F4h
59F5h

Overvoltage suppression
enable, 2nd-motor

00: Disable
01: Constant DC bus voltage
control (deceleration
stop)
02: Enable acceleration(at deceleration)
03: Enable acceleration(at constant speed anddeceleration)

00

○

5A00h

Overvoltage suppression
active level, 2nd-motor

200V class:
DC330.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:DC660.0 to 800.0 V

Constant DC bus voltage
control P gain, 2nd-motor
Constant DC bus voltage
control I gain, 2nd-motor

Overexcitation function
selection, 2nd-motor

Overexcitation function
output filter time constant,
2nd-motor
Overexcitation function
voltage gain, 2nd-motor

Overexcitation functionlevel setting, 2nd-motor

Carrier frequency setting,1st-motor
Sprinkle carrier patternselection, 1st-motor
Automatic carrier
reduction selection, 1stmotor
Automatic error reset
selection
Alarm signal selection
at automatic error reset
Automatic error reset wait
time
Automatic error reset
number

9-130
9-95

9-131

Overload restriction 2
action time, 2nd-motor

Overvoltage suppression
active time, 2nd-motor

Page

380.0
760.0

○

5A01h

5A02h

9-95

9-133

0.00 to 3600.00 s

1.00

○

0.00 to 5.00

0.20

○

5A04h

0 to 500

0.01

0.00 to 150.00 s

1.00

○

5A05h

0 to 15000

0.01

00: Disable
01: Always enable
02: At deceleration only
03: Operation at setting level
04: Operation at setting levelat deceleration stop

00

○

5A06h

0 to 41

0.000 to 10.000 s

0.300

○

5A07h

0 to 10000

0.001

50 to 400 %

100

○

5A08h

50 to 400

1

200V class:3300 to 4000
400V class:
6600 to 8000

0.1

5A03h

9-95

9-135
9-95

200V class:
DC330.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:DC660.0 to 800.0 V
ND: 2.0 to 15.0 kHz
LD: 2.0 to 10.0 kHz
00: Disable
01: Enable (Pattern-1)
00: Disable
01: Enable (Current)
02: Enable (Temperature)
00: Disable
01: If RUN command is OFF
02: After set time
00: Enable
01: Disable

360.0
720.0

○

5A09h

16500 to 20000 Note
ND: 20 to 150
LD: 20 to 100

0.01
0.1

9-152

2.0

○

332Dh

00

×

332Eh

0 to 1

1

9-154

01

○

332Fh

0 to 2

1

9-153

00

×

3336h

0 to 2

1

00

×

3337h

0 to 1

1

0 to 600 s

2

○

3338h

0 to 600

1

0 to 10

3

×

3339h

0 to 10

1

9-92
9-216

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-28
18-28

Chapter 18
Code

bb-21
bb-22
bb-23

bb-24

bb-25
bb-26

bb-27

bb-28

bb-29

bb-30

bb-31

Number of retries after
under voltage
Number of retries after
overcurrent
Number of retries after
over voltage

0 to 16
/255

1

9-139

0 to 510 (Trip) to 16/ 255 (Unlimited)

0

○

3341h

○

3342h

0 to 5

0
○

3343h

○

3344h

9-143
9-146

01

0.3 to 25.0 s

1.0

○

3345h

3 to 250

0.1

0.3 to 100.0 s

0.3

○

3346h

3 to 1000

0.1

00: Disable
01: Enable
02: Disable at stop and deceleration

00

○

3347h

0 to 2

1

Restart mode selection
after an overcurrent error

00: Restart at 0 Hz
01: Restart with frequency
matching
02: Restart with active frequency
matching
03: Detect speed
04: Trip after deceleration stop withfrequency matching

01

○

3348h

0 to 4

1

Retry wait time after an
overcurrent error

0.3 to 100.0 s

0.3

○

3349h

3 to 1000

0.1

Restart mode selection
after an overvoltage error

00: Restart at 0 Hz
01: Restart with frequency
matching
02: Restart with active frequency
matching
03: Detect speed
04: Trip after deceleration stop withfrequency matching

01

○

334Ah

0 to 4

1

Retry wait time after an
overvoltage error

0.3 to 100.0 s

0.3

○

334Bh

3 to 1000

0.1

00

○

3354h

0 to 3

1

00

○

3355h

0 to 31

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

3356h

0 to 59000

0.01(0.20 to 2.00)×Inverter
rated output current

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent○(0.20 to 2.00)
×Ratedoutputcurrent

0.1

0 to 20000 Note

0.01

0.50

○

3358h
10 to 3000

0.01

1.20

○

3359h

Restart mode selection
after instantaneous power
failure/under-voltage error

Instantaneous power
failure allowed time
Retry wait time after
instantaneous power
failure/under-voltage error
Enable instantaneous
power failure/undervoltage error while in stop
statusbb-41

Restart mode after RS
releasebb-42

Frequency
matching
minimum restart frequency

bb-45

Page

Changeduringrunning

Data range

00: Restart at 0 Hz
01: Restart with frequency
matching
02: Restart with active frequency
matching
03: Detect speed
04: Trip after deceleration stop withfrequency matching

Restart mode after FRS
releasebb-44

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Initial
value

Name

bb-40

bb-43

Parameter

Active frequency matching
restart level

Restart constant (speed) of
Active frequency matching
Active frequency matching
restart constant (voltage)

0 to 4

1
9-139

9-75
9-139

9-139

9-143

9-146

00: Restart at 0 Hz
01: Restart with frequency
matching
02: Restart with active frequency
matching
03: Detect speed
00: Restart at 0 Hz
01: Restart with frequency matching
02: Restart with active frequency
matching
03: Detect speed

3357h

0.10 to 30.00 s

9-77

9-75
9-92

9-71

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-29
18-29

Chapter 18
Code

Name

bb-46

OC-suppress level at active
frequency matching

Parameter
Data range(0.30 to 1.80)×Inverter
rated output current

bb-47

Active frequency matching
restart speed selection

00: Output frequency at shut
down
01: Maximum frequency
02: Setting frequency

bb160

Overcurrent detectionlevel, 1st-motor(0.30 to 2.20)×Inverter
rated output current

bb-61

bb-62

Power supply overvoltage
selection

Power supply overvoltage
level setting

00: Warning
01: Error
200V class:
DC330.0 to 400.0 V
400V class:DC660.0 to 800.0 V

Detect ground fault
selection
Input phase loss detection
enableOutput phase loss
detection enable
Output phase loss
detection sensitivity

00: Disable
01: Enable
00: Disable
01: Enable
00: Disable
01: Enable

bb-70

bb-64

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

1.80×
Rated
outputcurrent

○

00

○

2.20×
Rated
outputcurrent

×

00

○

390.0
780.0

Modbus communication
RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution(0.30 to 1.80)
×Rated output
current

0.1

3000 to 18000 Note

0.01

335Bh

0 to 213368h(0.30 to 2.20)
×Rated output
Current

0.1

335Ah

3000 to 22000

○

3369h

336Ah

Note

Page

9-71

15-6

0.01

0 to 1

1200V class:3300 to 4000
400V class:
6600 to 8000

0.1

15000 to 20000 Note

0.01

9-165

00

×

336Ch

0 to 1

1

00

○

336Dh

0 to 1

1

00

○

336Eh

0 to 11

1 to 100 %

10

○

336Fh

1 to 100

1

Thermistor error level0 to 10000 Ω

3000

○

3372h

0 to 10000

1

9-157

bb-77

Input phase loss detection
level

0 to 200

50

○

3379h

0 to 200

1

9-158

bb-80

Over-speed detection level

0.0 to 150.0 %

115.0

○

337Ch

0 to 1500

0.1

bb-81

Over-speed detection time

0.0 to 5.0 s
00: Warning
01: Error

0.5

○

337Dh

0 to 50

0.1

00

×

337Eh

0 to 1

10.00 to 100.00 %

15.00

○

337Fh

0 to 10000

0.01

0.0 to 5.0 s

0.5

×

3380h

0 to 50

0.1

bb-65
bb-66
bb-67

bb-82
bb-83
bb-84

Speed deviation error
mode selection
Speed deviation error
detection level
Speed deviation error
detection time

9-158

bb201

Carrier frequency setting
2nd-motor

ND: 2.0 to 15.0 kHz
LD: 2.0 to 10.0 kHz

2.0

○

5A3Dh

bb202

Sprinkle carrier patternselection, 2nd-motor

00: Disable
01: Enable (Pattern-1)

00

×

5A3Eh

bb203

Automatic carrier
reduction selection, 2ndmotor

00: Disable
01: Enable (Current)
02: Enable (Temperature)

01

bb260

Overcurrent detectionlevel, 2nd-motor(0.30 to 2.20)×Inverter
rated output current

2.20×
Rated
outputcurrent

×

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent

〇

01

○

339Bh

0 to 2

1

01

○

339Ch

0 to 2

1

bC110

Electronic thermal levelsetting, 1st-motor

bC111

Electronic thermal
characteristic
selection, 1st-motor

bC112

Electronic thermal
decrease function enable,
1st-motor

bC113
bC-14

Electronic thermal
decreasing time, 1st-motor
Electronic thermal counter
memory selection atPower-off(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
rated output current
00: Reduce torque (VT)
01: Constant torque (CT)02: Free setting (FREE)
00: Disable
01: Enable (Linear
decrement)
02: Enable (Time constantdecrement)○

ND: 20 to 150
LD: 20 to 100
0 to 1

0.1
1

5A3Fh

0 to 21

5A78h(0.30 to 2.20)
×Rated output
current

0.1

339Ah

3000 to 22000 Note
(0.00 to 3.00)
×Rated output
current
0 to 33000

Note

9-52

9-152
9-95
9-154
9-95
9-153
9-95
15-6
9-95

0.01
0.1

8-6

0.01
8-7

8-9

1 to 65535 s

600

○

339Dh

1 to 65535

1

00: Disable
01: Enable

01

○

339Eh

0 to 11

8-10

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-30
18-30

Chapter 18
Code

bC115
bC120

Name
Electronic thermal
accumulation gain
1st-motor
Free electronic thermalfrequency-1, 1st-motor

bC121

Free electronic thermal
current-1, 1st-motor

bC122

Free electronic thermalfrequency-2, 1st-motor

Parameter
Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

1.0 to 200.0 %

100.0

○

339Fh

10 to 2000

0.1

0.00 to [bC122] Hz

0.00

○

33A4h

0 to 59000

0.01

33A5h

(0.00 to 3.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

0 to 33000 Note

0.01

33A6h

0 to 59000

0.01

33A7h

(0.00 to 3.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

0 to 33000 Note

0.01

0 to 59000

0.01(0.00 to 3.00)
×Rated output

0.1(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
rated output current

0.00[bC120] to [bC124] Hz

0.00

○

Free electronic thermal
current-2, 1st-motor

bC124

Free electronic thermalfrequency-3, 1st-motor[bC122] to 590.00 Hz

bC125

Free electronic thermal
current-3, 1st-motor(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
rated output current

0.00(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
rated output current

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent

○

00

○

01

1 to 65535 s

Electronic thermal levelsetting, 2nd-motor

bC211

Electronic thermal
characteristic selection
2nd-motor

bC212

Electronic thermal
decrease function
selection, 2nd-motor

bC213

bC215
bC220

bC221

Electronic thermal
decreasing time
2nd-motor
Electronic thermal
accumulation gain
2nd-motor
Free electronic thermalfrequency-1, 2nd-motor
Free electronic thermal
current-1, 2nd-motor(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
rated output current

○

bC123

bC210

5AAAh

0 to 33000 Note

0.01

5AABh

0 to 2

1

○

5AACh

0 to 2

1

600

○

5AADh

1 to 65535

1

1.0 to200.0 %

100.0

○

5AAFh

10 to 2000

0.1

0.00 to [bC222] Hz

0.00

○

5AB4h

0 to 59000

0.01

5AB5h

(0.00 to 3.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

0 to 33000 Note

0.01

5AB6h

0 to 59000

0.01

5AB7h

(0.00 to 3.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

0 to 33000 Note

0.01

5AB8h

0 to 59000

0.01

5AB9h

(0.00 to 3.00)
×Rated output
current

0.1

0 to 33000 Note

0.01

00: Reduce torque (VT)
01: Constant torque (CT)02: Free setting (FREE)
00: Disable
01: Enable (Linear decrement)
02: Enable(Time constant decrement)(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
rated output current

bC223

bC224

Free electronic thermalfrequency-3, 2nd-motor

bd-03
bd-04

STO input change time(release)
Display selection during
STO input change time
Action selection after STO
input change time

0.1

Page

8-6
8-9

8-8

8-6
9-95
8-7
9-95

8--9

(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
rated output current

bd-02

○

33A8h

0.01

Free electronic thermal
current-2, 2nd-motor

STO input display selection○

0 to 33000 Note
(0.00 to 3.00)
×Rated output
current[bC220] to [bC224] Hz

bd-01

0.00

○

current

bC222

Free electronic thermal
current-3, 2nd-motor

0.00

33A9h

Free electronic thermalfrequency-2, 2nd-motor

bC225

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Data range[bC222] to 590.00 Hz(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
rated output current
00: Warning (display)
01: Warning (without display)
02: Trip
0.00: Disable,
0.01 to 60.00 s
00: Warning (display)
01: Warning (without display)
00: Maintain current status
01: Disable
02: Trip

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

0.00

○

○

○

○

○

9-95

8-8

01

○

33F5h

0 to 2

1

0.01

○

33F6h

0 to 6000

0.01

01

○

33F7h

0 to 1

1

01

○

33F8h

0 to 2

1

9-95

14-5

14-6

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data
range for Modbus communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-31
18-31

Chapter 18
CodeParameter

Name

Data range

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

0.01

○

33F9h

0 to 6000

0.01

00 Note○33FAh

0 to 1

1

STO input change time
(shutoff)
Warning release mode
selection

0.00: Disable,
0.01 to 60.00 s
00: Keep warning display
01: Release warning display

Warning re-display time

1 to 30 (s)

30

○

33FBh

1 to 30

1bE-01

Unsteady detection enable

00: Disable
01: Enable (Frequency mode)
02: Enable (Time mode)

00

×

3459h

0 to 2

1

bE-02

Unsteady detection target

dA-**, db-**, dC-**, FA-**

dA-01

×

345Ah

0 to 65535(Register No.)-

Unsteady detection
auto tuning selection
Unsteady detection tuning
tolerance

00: Disable
01: Enable

00

×

345Bh

0 to 1

10.00 to 100.00 %

0.10

○

345Ch

0 to 10000

1

bd-05
bd-06
bd-07

bE-03
bE-04
bE-05

Unsteady upper level
detecting action

01: Warning
02: Trip
03: Trip after deceleration stop

01

×

345Dh

1 to 31

bE-06

Unsteady upper level
detecting time

0.00 to 600.00 s

0.00

○

345Eh

0 to 60000

0.01

Unsteady lower level
detecting action

01: Warning
02: Trip
03: Trip after deceleration stop

01

×

345Fh

1 to 31

0.00 to 600.00 s

0.00

○

3460h

0 to 60000

0.01

3462h
3463h
3464h
3465h
3466h
3467h
3468h
3469h
346Ah
346Bh

0 to 59000

0.01

bE-07
bE-08
bE-10
bE-12
bE-14
bE-16
bE-18
bE-21
bE-22
bE-23
bE-24
bE-25
bE-26
bE-27
bE-28
bE-29
bE-30
bE-31
bE-32
bE-33
bE-34
bE-35
bE-36
bE-37

Unsteady lower level
detecting time
Unsteady detection
minimum frequency
Unsteady detection
intermediate frequency 1
Unsteady detection
intermediate frequency 2
Unsteady detection
intermediate frequency 3
Unsteady detection
maximum frequency
Upper limit at minimum
frequency
Upper limit at intermediate
frequency 1
Upper limit at intermediate
frequency 2Upper limit at intermediate
frequency 3Upper limit at maximum
frequency
Lower limit at minimum
frequency
Lower limit at intermediate
frequency 1
Lower limit at intermediate
frequency 2
Lower limit at intermediate
frequency 3
Lower limit at maximum
frequency
Unsteady time detection
operating time 1
Unsteady time detection
operating time 2
Unsteady time detection
operating time 3
Unsteady time detection
operating time 4
Unsteady time detection
operating time 5
Unsteady time detection
operating time 6
Unsteady time detection
operating time 7○○
0.00 to Max. frequency Hz

0.00

○
○
○

-100.00 to 100.00 %

○

346Dh

○

346Eh

○

346Fh

○

3470h

○

3471h

○

3472h

○

3473h

○

3474h

○

3475h

○

3476h

0.00

0.00 to [bE-32] s

0.00

○

3477h

[bE-31] to [bE-33] s

0.00

○

3478h

[bE-32] to [bE-34] s

0.00

○

3479h

[bE-33] to [bE-35] s

0.00

○

347Ah

[bE-34] to [bE-36] s

0.00

○

347Bh

[bE-35] to [bE-37] s

0.00

○

347Ch

[bE-36] to [bE-38] s

0.00

○

347Dh

Note: The default settings when initialize by setting 00 to "Initialize data selection [Ub-02]".

18-32
18-32

Page

14-6

9-177

-10000 to 10000

0.01

0 to 60000

0.01

Chapter 18
Code

bE-38
bE-39
bE-40
bE-41
bE-42
bE-43
bE-44
bE-45
bE-46
bE-47
bE-48
bE-49
bE-50
bE-51
bE-52
bE-53
bE-54
bE-55
bE-56
bE-57
bE-58
bE-59
bE-60

Name
Unsteady time detection
operating time 8
Unsteady time detection
operating time 9
Unsteady time detection
operating time 10
Unsteady time detection
upper level 1
Unsteady time detection
upper level 2
Unsteady time detection
upper level 3
Unsteady time detection
upper level 4
Unsteady time detection
upper level 5
Unsteady time detection
upper level 6
Unsteady time detection
upper level 7
Unsteady time detection
upper level 8
Unsteady time detection
upper level 9
Unsteady time detection
upper level 10
Unsteady time detection
lower level 1
Unsteady time detection
lower level 2
Unsteady time detection
lower level 3
Unsteady time detection
lower level 4
Unsteady time detection
lower level 5
Unsteady time detection
lower level 6
Unsteady time detection
lower level 7
Unsteady time detection
lower level 8
Unsteady time detection
lower level 9
Unsteady time detection
lower level 10

Parameter
Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

[bE-37] to [bE-39] s

0.00

○

347Eh

[bE-38] to [bE-40] s

0.00

○

347Fh

[bE-39] to 600.00 s

0.00

○

3480h

○

3481h

○

3482h

○

3483h

○

3484h

○

3485h

○

3486h

○

3487h

○

3488h

○

3489h

○

348Ah

○

348Bh

○

348Ch

○

348Dh

○

348Eh

○

348Fh

○

3490h

○

3491h

○

3492h

○

3493h

○

3494h

Data range-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

18-33
18-33

Page

Data range

Resolution

0 to 60000

0.01

9-177

-10000 to 10000

0.01

9-178

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.5 C parameter
Code

Name

Initialvalue

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

CA-01

Input terminal [FR] function

001/FR

CA-02

Input terminal [RR] function

002/RR

36B2h

CA-03

Input terminal [DFL] function

003/DFL

36B3h

CA-04

Input terminal [DFM] function

CA-05

Input terminal [AUT] function

CA-06

Input terminal [ES] function

033/ES

36B6h

CA-07

Input terminal [RST] function

028/RST

36B7h

CA-08

Input terminal [PLA] function

103/PLA

36B8h

CA-21

Input terminal [FR] active state

36C5h

CA-22

Input terminal [RR] active state

36C6h

CA-23

Input terminal [DFL] active state

CA-24

Input terminal [DFM] active state

CA-25

Input terminal [AUT] active state

Refer to "18.2.6 List ofIntelligent Input
Terminal Functions"004/DFM
015/AUT

00: Normally Open(NO)
01: Normally Closed
(NC)

36B1h

○

36B4h

0(no)/

36B5h

1 to 110

00

○

36C9h

Input terminal [ES] active state

CA-27

Input terminal [RST] active state

36CBh

CA-28

Input terminal [PLA] active state

36CCh

CA-41

Input terminal [FR] response time

36D9h

CA-42

Input terminal [RR] response time

36DAh

CA-43

Input terminal [DFL] response time

36DBh

Input terminal [DFM] response time

CA-45

Input terminal [AUT] response time

0 to 400 ms

○

36DCh
36DDh

CA-46

Input terminal [ES] response time

36DEh

CA-47

Input terminal [RST] response time

36DFh

CA-48

Input terminal [PLA] response time

36E0h

CA-55

Multistage input determination time

CA-60

UP/DWN overwrite target selection

CA-61

UP/DWN data save enable

CA-62

UP/DWN/UDC selection

CA-64
CA-66

Acceleration time setting for
UP/DWN function
Deceleration time setting for
UP/DWN function

CA-70

Speed reference source selection
when [F-OP] is active

CA-71

RUN command source selection
when [F-OP] is active

CA-72

Reset mode selection

CA-73[USP] active selection

00: Speed reference
01: PID1 Set-point 1
00: Not save
01: Save
00: 0Hz
01: Saved data

18-34
18-34

0 to 400

1

9-206

9-10
9-108
9-190

36E7h

0 to 2000

1

00

○

36ECh

0 to 1

1

00

○

36EDh

0 to 1

1

00

○

36EEh

0 to 1

1○

00: Disabled
01: Enabled

1

○

10.00

01: Terminal [VRF]
02: Terminal [IRF]
07: Parameter setting
08: RS485
09: Option
12: Pulse input
14: Reserved
15: PID function
00: [FR]/[RR] terminal
01: 3-wire
02: Keypad's RUN-key
03: RS485
04: Option
00: Always enabled(Trip release at turn-on)
01: Always enabled(Trip release at turn-off)
02: Only enabled in trip
status(Trip release at turn-on)
03: Only enabled in trip
status(Trip release at turn-off)

0 to 10○0.00 to 3600.00 s

9-204

36CAh

2

0 to 2000 ms

1

36C7h
36C8h

CA-26

CA-44

Page

36F0h
36F1h
36F2h
36F3h

000 to360000

9-19
9-115

0.01

01

○

36F6h

1 to 15

1

9-21

00

○

36F7h

0 to 4

1

9-4

00

○

36F8h

0 to 3

1

9-214

00

○

36F9h

0 to 1

1

9-155

Chapter 18
CodeParameter

Name

Data range

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

CA-81

Encoder constant setting

1 to 65535 pls

512

×

3701h

1 to 65535

1

CA-82

Encoder phase sequence
selection

00: Phase-A Lead
01: Phase-B Lead

00

×

3702h

0 to 11

CA-83

Motor gear ratio numerator

×

3703h

CA-84

Motor gear ratio
denominator

1 to 10000

1

1 to 10000

1

CA-85

Encoder disconnection time

0.0 to 10.0 s

CA-86

Speed feedback filter

0 to 1000 ms

CA-90

Pulse input target function
selection

CA-91

Pulse input mode selection

CA-92

Pulse input frequency scale

0.05 to 32.00 kHz

CA-93

Pulse input frequency filter
time constant

CA-94

Pulse input frequency bias
value

CA-95
CA-96
CA-97
CA-98
CA-99

Pulse input upper frequency
detection level
Pulse input lower frequency
detection level
Pulse counter compare
match output ON value
Pulse counter compare
match output OFF value
Pulse counter compare
match maximum value

Cb-01[VRF] Filter time constant

Cb-03[VRF] Start value

Cb-04[VRF] End value

3704h

1.0

○

3705h

0 to 100

0.1

20

○

3706h

0 to 1000

1

01

×

370Ah

0 to 3

1

03

×

370Bh

0 to 31

25.00Note

○

370Ch

0.01 to 2.00 s

0.10

○

370Dh

-100.0 to 100.0 %

0.0

○

370Eh

100.0

○

370Fh

1.0

○

3710h

0

○

3711h

0

○

3712h

65535

○

3713h

0.0 to 100.0 %0 to 65535

1 to 500 ms
0.00 to 100.00 %

500

○

3715h

0.00

○

3717h

100.00○3718h

0.05 to
32.00
01 to 200
-1000 to
1000

0.1

0 to 1000

0.1

0 to 65535

1

1 to 50010.00 to100.00[VRF] Start rate

0.0 to [Cb-06] %

0.0

○

3719h

100.0

○

371Ah

100.0

Cb-07

[VRF] Start value

01

○

371Bh

0 to 1

1

Cb-08[VRF] Input selection[Cb-05] to 100.0 %00: Start value [Cb-03]
01: 0 %
01: Voltage
02: Current

01

○

371Ch

1 to 2

1

Cb-11[IRF] Filter time constant

1 to 500

1

Cb-13[IRF] Start value

Cb-14[IRF] End value

Cb-15[IRF] Start rate

Cb-16

[IRF] End rate

Cb-17

[IRF] Start value selection

Cb-18[IRF] Input selection

Cb-30

500

○

371Fh

0.00

○

3721h

100.00○3722h

0.0 to [Cb-16] %

20.0

○

3723h

[Cb-15] to 100.0 %00: Start value [Cb-13]
01: 0%
01: Voltage
02: Current

100.0

○

3724h

01

○

02

[VRF] Voltage/Current bias
adjustment-100.00 to 100.00 %Cb-31[VRF] Voltage/Current gain
adjustment

Cb-32

0.00 to 100.00 %0.00 to100.00

0.1

0.1

3725h

0 to 1

-

○

3726h

1 to 2

-

0.00

○

3732h

0.00 to 200.00 %100.00○3733h[IRF] Voltage/Current bias
adjustment-100.00 to 100.00 %

0.00

○

3734h

Cb-33

[IRF] Voltage/Current gain
adjustment

0.00 to 200.00 %100.00○3735h

0 to 20000

0.01

Cb-40

Thermistor type selection

00: Disabled
01: PTC00

373Ch

0 to 1

1

Cb-41

Thermistor gain adjustment

0.0 to 1000.0

100.0

373Dh

0 to 10000

0.1○

Note: The default settings when initialize by setting 00 to "Initialize data selection [Ub-02]".

18-35
18-35

1000
0 to 20000-1000 to
1000

9-15

9-211

9-207

0.01

0 to 1000-1000 to

9-43
9-48

0.01

[VRF] End rate

0.0 to

9-52
9-48
10-4
9-15
9-43
9-48
10-4

0.01

Cb-06

1 to 500 ms

10-4

0.01

Cb-05

selection

9-48

9-48

×

00: Disable
01: Frequency reference
02: Speed feedback
03: Pulse count00: 90 degrees shift pulse input
01: Forward/Reverse pulse input
and direction signal
03: Single phase pulse input

Page

9-208

0.01
9-207
0.01
0.01
9-208

9-157

Chapter 18
CodeParameter
Name

CC-01 Output terminal [UPF] function
CC-02 Output terminal [DRV] function

Initialvalue

Data range

002

CC-07 Output terminal [ML] function
CC-11 Output terminal [UPF] active state
CC-12 Output terminal [DRV] active state(UPF1)

Refer to "18.2.7 List ofIntelligent Output
Terminal Functions"

001
(DRV)
017(AL)

00: Normally Open (NO)
01: Normally Closed(NC)CC-17 Output terminal [ML] active state
CC-20
CC-21
CC-22
CC-23

Changeduringrunning
○

3779h

○

377Ah

○

377Fh

00

○

3783h

00

○

3784h

00

○

3789h

Output terminal [UPF] on-delay
Output terminal [UPF] off-delay

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

○

Output terminal [DRV] off-delay

CC-32 Output terminal [ML] on-delay time

CC-42 LOG1 logical calculation selection
CC-43 LOG2 operand-1 selection
CC-44 LOG2 operand-2 selection
CC-45 LOG2 logical calculation selection
CC-46 LOG3 operand-1 selection
CC-47 LOG3 operand-2 selection
CC-48 LOG3 logical calculation selection
Cd-01 [FRQ] Output wave form selection
Cd-02[FRQ] Output base frequency(at frequency output)

Cd-03 [FRQ] Output monitor selection
Cd-04 [AMI] Output monitor selection

0 to 11378Eh

0 to 10000

0.01

9-221

1

9-185

3798h

CC-33 Output terminal [ML] off-delay time

CC-41 LOG1 operand-2 selection

9-218

378Fh

time

CC-40 LOG1 operand-1 selection

1

378Dh

time
time

0 to 98

Page

378Ch

time

Output terminal [DRV] on-delay

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

3799h
Same as[CC-01] to [CC-07](Except [LOG1] to [LOG3])00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
Same as[CC-01] to [CC-07](Except [LOG1] to [LOG3])00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
Same as[CC-01] to [CC-07](Except [LOG1] to [LOG3])00: AND
01: OR
02: XOR
00：PWM
01：Frequency
0 to 32000 Hz
Monitor parameters(Refer to "9.16.3
Selecting a Monitor
Data for Analog/Pulse
Output ")00: Bias value based fullscale
01: Fixed full scale
00: Disable
01: Enable

000

○

37A0h

000

○

37A1h

00

○

37A2h

000

○

37A3h

000

○

37A4h

0 to 98

0 to 20 to 98

00

○

37A5h

0 to 2

000

○

37A6h

000

○

37A7h

00

○

37A8h

0 to 2

01

○

37DDh

0 to 1

1

1440

○

37DEh

0 to 32000

1

9-224

○

37DFh

dA-01

○

37E0h

1

9-231

0 to 98

0 to 65535
Register No.

○

37E1h

00

○

37E2h

0 to 1

-

9-224
9-232

00

○

37E6h

0 to 1

-

9-224
9-229

1 to 500 (ms)
00: Absolute value
01: Signed value

10

○

37E7h

1 to 500

1

9-224

00

○

37E8h

0 to 1

-

9-224
9-229

Cd-13 [FRQ] Bias adjustment-100.0 to 100.0 %

0.0

○

37E9h

Cd-14 [FRQ] Gain adjustment-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

100.0

○

37EAh

Cd-05 [AMV] Output monitor selection
Cd-06 Analog adjust gain basis selection
Cd-10

Analog monitor adjustment mode
enableCd-11 [FRQ] Output filter time constant
Cd-12 [FRQ] Data type selection

Cd-15

Adjustment mode [FRQ] output
level-100.0 to 100.0 %

100.0

○

37EBh

Cd-16

Pulse input/output scaleconversion gain

0.01 to 100.00

1.00

○

37ECh

Cd-21

[AMI] Output filter time constant

1 to 500 ms

10○[AMI] Data type selection

00: Absolute value
01: Signed value

00

○

Cd-22

18-36
18-36

-1000 to1000
-10000 to
10000-1000 to

9-232

0.1
9-224
0.1
0.1

9-229

1 to 10000

0.01

9-230

37F1h

1 to 500

1

9-236

37F2h

0 to 1

-

9-231
9-232

1000

Chapter 18
Code

Name

Parameter
Data range

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

20.0

○

37F3h

-1000 to 1000

0.1

Cd-23

[AMI] Bias adjustment(Voltage/Current)-100.0 to 100.0 %Cd-24[AMI] Gain adjustment(Voltage/Current)-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

80.0

○

37F4h

Cd-25

Adjustment mode [AMI]
output level-100.0 to 100.0 %

100.0

○

37F5h

-1000 to 1000

0.1

Cd-26

[AMI] Output type selection

01: Voltage
02: Current

02

○

37F6h

0 to 1

1

Cd-31[AMV] Output filter time constant

100

○

37FBh

1 to500

1

Cd-32[AMV] Data type selection

1 to 500 ms
00: Absolute value
01: Signed value

00

○

37FCh

00 to 01-

Cd-33

[AMV] Bias adjustment (Voltage)-100.0 to 100.0 %

0.0

○

37FDh

-1000 to 1000

0.1

-10000 to
10000-10000 to

Page

9-231

0.1

9-236
9-232
9-235
9-232

Cd-34

[AMV] Gain adjustment (Voltage)-1000.0 to 1000.0 %

100.0

○

37FEh

Cd-35

Adjustment mode [AMV] output
level-100.0 to 100.0 %

100.0

○

37FFh

-1000 to 1000

0.1

9-235

Cd-36

[AMV] Output type selection

01

○

3800h

1 to 3

1

9-224
9-229

CE101

Low current signal output mode
selection, 1st motor

01

○

3841h

0 to 1

1

CE102

Low current detection level 1,
1st motor

3842h(0.00 to 2.00)×Rated
output current

0.1
0.01

3843h

0 to 20000 Note
(0.00 to 2.00)×Rated
output current
0 to 20000 Note

0.01

3845h

0 to 113846h(0.00 to 2.00)×
Rated output
current

0.1
0.01

3847h

0 to 20000 Note
(0.00 to 2.00)×
Rated output
current
0 to 20000 Note

0.01

0 to 59000

0.01

0 to 5000

0.1

00: Voltage
01: Current
00: During accel./decel.
and constant speed
01: During constant speed
only

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
output current A
CE103

Low current detection level 2,
1st motor

CE105

Overload signal output mode
selection, 1st motor

CE106

Overload warning level 1,
1st motor

00: During accel./decel.
and constant speed
01: During constant speed
only

1.15×
Rated
outputcurrent(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
output current A
CE107

CE-10
CE-11
CE-12
CE-13
CE120
CE121
CE122
CE123

Overload warning level 2, 1st
motor
Arrival frequency 1 value setting
during acceleration
Arrival frequency 1 value setting
during deceleration
Arrival frequency 2 value setting
during acceleration
Arrival frequency 2 value setting
during deceleration
Over-torque level (Forward drive),
1st motor
Over-torque level (Reverse
regenerative), 1st motor
Over-torque level (Reverse drive),
1st motor
Over-torque level (Forward
regenerative), 1st motor

CE124

Over/Under torque output signal
mode, 1st-motor

CE125

Over/Under torque selection,
1st-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

○

○

○

〇

9-162

0.1

9-161

0.1

384Ah

○

384Bh

○

384Ch

○

384Dh

○

3854h

〇

3855h

〇

3856h

○

3857h

01

○

3858h

0 to 1

-

00

○

3859h

0 to 1-

100.0

00: During accel./decel.
and constant speed
01: During constant speed
only
00: Over torque

0.1

○

0.00

0.0 to 500.0 %01: Under torque

00

○

10000

9-182

9-59

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data range for Modbus
communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-37
18-37

Chapter 18
Code

CE-30
CE-31
CE-33
CE-34
CE-36
CE-40
CE-41
CE-42
CE-43
CE-44
CE-45
CE-50

Name

Parameter

Electronic thermal warninglevel (Motor)
Electronic thermal warninglevel (Inverter)

0.00 to 100.00 %Zero speed detection level0.00 to 100.00 Hz

Cooling fin overheat warninglevel
Accum. RUN time (RNT) /Accum. Power-on time (ONT)
setting[VRF] Window comparator
higher limit[VRF] Window comparator
lower limit[VRF] Window comparator
hysteresis width[IRF] Window comparator
higher limit[IRF] Window comparator
lower limit[IRF] Window comparator
hysteresis width[VRF] Operation set level at
disconnection orcompare event

Initialvalue

Data range

Modbus communication

Changeduringrunning

Register
No.

○

385Eh

85.00

Data range

Resolution

0 to 10000

0.01

9-163

○

385Fh

0.00

○

3861h

0 to 10000

0.01

9-184

0 to 200 ℃

100

○

3862h

0 to 2001

9-166

0 to100000 hr

0○

0 to 100000

1

9-170

100

○

3868h

0 to 100

1

0

○

3869h

0 to 100

1

0

○

386Ah

0 to 10

1

100

○

386Bh

0 to 100

1

0

○

386Ch

0 to 100

1

0

○

386Dh

0 to 101

0 to 100 %Min. : ([CE-41]+[CE-42])×2
0 to 100 %Max. : ([CE-40]-[CE-42])×2
0 to 10 %Max. : ([CE-40]-[CE-41])/2
0 to 100 %Min. : ([CE-44]+[CE-45])×2
0 to 100 (%)
Max.：([CE-43]-[CE-45])×2
0 to 10 (%)
Max. : ([CE-43]-[CE-44])/2

3864h
3865h

9-164

9-172

0 to 100 %

0

○

3872h

0 to 100

1

CE-51[VRF] Operation set level
implement timing

00: Disable
01:Enable (at WCVRF active)
02:Enable(at WCVRF de-active)

00

○

3873h

0 to 2

1

CE-52[IRF] Operation set level at
disconnection or compare
event

0 to 100 %

0

○

3874h

0 to 100

1

CE-53[IRF] Operation set level
implement timing

00: Disable
01: Enable (at WCIRF active)
02: Enable (at WCIRF de-active)

00

○

3875h

0 to 2

1

20

○

387Ch

300

○

387Dh

100

○

387Eh

01

○

5F51h

0 to 11

5F52h(0.00 to 2.00)×
Rated output
current

0.1
0.01

5F53h

0 to 20000 Note
(0.00 to 2.00)×
Rated output
current
0 to 20000 Note

0.01

5F55h

0 to 10

5F56h(0.00 to 2.00)×
Rated output
current

0.1

CE-60
CE-61
CE-62
CE201

Output frequency related
filter for terminal function
Output current related filter for terminal function
Output torque related filter
for terminal function

0 to 2000 ms

Low current signal output
mode selection, 2nd-motor

00: During accel./decel. andconstant speed
01: During constant speed only

Low current detection level
CE202
1, 2nd-motor

1.00×
Rated
outputcurrent(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
output current A
CE203

CE205

Low current detection level2, 2nd-motor

Overload signal output mode
selection, 2nd-motor

00: During accel./decel. andconstant speed
01: During constant speed only

Overload warning level 1,
CE206
2nd-motor(0.00 to 2.00)×Inverter
output current A
CE207

Overload warning level 2,
2nd-motor

Over-torque level
CE220(Forward drive), 2nd-motor
Over-torque level (Reverse
CE221
regenerative), 2nd-motor
Over-torque level (Reverse
CE222
drive), 2nd-motorPage

0.0 to 500.0 %

00

1.15×
Rated
outputcurrent

100.0

18-38
18-38

○

○

○

○

9-184
0 to 2000

5F57h

○

5F64h

○

5F65h

○

5F66h

9-161
9-162
9-59

Note

○

1

9-95
9-162

9-95
9-162

0.1

0 to 20000(0.00 to 2.00)×
Rated output
current

0.01

0 to 20000 Note

0.01

0 to 5000

0.1

9-95
9-161

0.1

9-59
9-95

Chapter 18
Code

CE223
CE224

Parameter

Name

Data range

Over-torque level (Forward
regenerative), 2nd motor
Over/Under torque output
signal mode, 2nd-motor

CE225

Over/Under torque selection,
2nd-motor

CF-01

RS485 communication
baudrate selection

0.0 to 500.0 %00: During accel./decel. And
constant speed
01: During constant speed only
00: Over torque
01: Under torque03: 2400bps
04: 4800bps
05: 9600bps
06: 19.2kbps
07: 38.4kbps
08: 57.6kbps
09: 76.8kbps

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

100.0

○

5F64h

01

○

5F68h

00

○

5F69h

05

○

38A5h

0 to 5000

Page

0.1
9-59

0 to 11

3 to 10

1

9-95

11-1

10: 115.2kbps
CF-02

RS485 communication nodeaddress

CF-03

RS485 communication parity
selection

CF-04

RS485 communication stop bit
selection

CF-05

RS485 communication error
selection

CF-06
CF-07

RS485 communication timeout
setting
RS485 communication wait
time setting

CF-08

RS485 communication mode
selection

CF-11

Registerdata
conversion function

CF-12

RS485 endianness selection

CF-20

EzCOM start node No.

CF-21

EzCOM end node No.

CF-22

AV<=>%

1 to 247

1

○

38A6h

1 to 247

1

00: no parity
01: Even parity

00

○

38A7h

0 to 2

1

01

○

38A8h

1 to 2

1

02

○

38A9h

0 to 4

1

2.00

○

38AAh

0 to 10000

0.01

5

○

38ABh

0 to 1000

1

01

○

38ACh

1 to 3

1

00

×

38AFh

0 to 1

1

00

○

38B0h

0 to 2－

1 to 81

0 to 1－

02: Odd parity
01: 1-bit
02: 2-bit
00: Error
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free run stop
04: Deceleration stop
0.00 to 100.00 s
0 to 1000 m
01: Modbus-RTU
02: Communication between
inverters (EzCOM)
03: Communication between
inverters(EzCOM Administrator)
00: A, V
01: %00: Big endian
01: Little endian
02: Special endian

×

38B8h

×

38B9h

00

×

38BAh

1 to 5

5

○

38BBh

1 to 51

1 to 247

1

○

38BCh

1 to 247

1

○

38BDh

○

38BEh

0000h to
FFFFh

1

1 to 8

1

EzCOM start method selection

00: [ECOM] terminal
01: Usually communication

CF-23

EzCOM data size

CF-24

EzCOM destination address 1

CF-25

EzCOM destination register 1

CF-26

EzCOM source register 1

CF-27

EzCOM destination address 2

CF-28

EzCOM destination register 2

CF-29

EzCOM source register 2

CF-30

EzCOM destination address 3

CF-31

EzCOM destination register 3

CF-32

EzCOM source register 3

CF-33

EzCOM destination address 4

CF-34

EzCOM destination register 4

CF-35

EzCOM source register 4

CF-36

EzCOM destination address 5

CF-37

EzCOM destination register 5

CF-38

EzCOM source register 50000h to FFFFh

0000h

1 to 24720000h to FFFFh

0000h

1 to 247

30000h to FFFFh

0000h

1 to 247

40000h to FFFFh

0000h

1 to 24750000h to FFFFh

0000h

○

38BFh

1 to 247

1

○

38C0h

1

○

38C1h

0000h to
FFFFh

1

○

38C2h

1 to 247

1

○

38C3h

1

○

38C4h

0000h to
FFFFh

○

38C5h

1 to 247

1

○

38C6h

1

○

38C7h

0000h to
FFFFh

1
1

○

38C8h

1 to 247

○

38C9h

○

38CAh

0000h to
FFFFh

11-2

11-25

1

1

1

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data range for Modbus
communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-39
18-39

Chapter 18
CodeParameter
Name

CF-50

USB communication node address

CF-61

Output current monitor filter

CF-62

Output torque monitor filter

CF-63

Output voltage monitor filter

CF-64

Input/Output power filter

CG-01 Register mapping function selection

Data range
1 to 247

0 to 1000 ms

00: Disable
01: Enable

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

1

×

38D6h

300

○

38E1h

100

○

38E2h

100

○

38E3h

400

○

38E4h

00

○

3909h

○

3913h

CG-11 External register 1
CG-12 External register 2

○

3914h

CG-13 External register 3

○

3915h

CG-14 External register 4

○

3916h

CG-15 External register 5

○

3917h

○

3918h

CG-16 External register 60000h to FFFFh

0000h

CG-17 External register 7

○

3919h

CG-18 External register 8

○

391Ah

CG-19 External register 9

○

391Bh

CG-20 External register 10

〇

391Ch

CG-31 External register 1 format

○

3927h

CG-32 External register 2 format

○

3928h

CG-33 External register 3 format

○

3929h

CG-34 External register 4 format
CG-35 External register 5 format
CG-36 External register 6 format

00: Unsigned word
01: Signed word00

CG-37 External register 7 format

○

392Ah

○

392Bh

○

392Ch

○

392Dh

CG-38 External register 8 format

○

392Eh

CG-39 External register 9 format

○

392Fh

CG-40 External register 10 format

○

3930h

CG-51 External register 1 scaling

○

393Bh

CG-52 External register 2 scaling

○

393Ch

CG-53 External register 3 scaling

○

393Dh

CG-54 External register 4 scaling

○

393Eh

CG-55 External register 5 scaling

○

393Fh

○

3940h

CG-57 External register 7 scaling

○

3941h

CG-58 External register 8 scaling

○

3942h

CG-59 External register 9 scaling

○

3943h

CG-60 External register 10 scaling

○

3944h

CG-71 Internal register 1

○

394Fh

CG-72 Internal register 2

○

3950h

CG-73 Internal register 3

○

3951h

CG-74 Internal register 4

○

3952h

CG-75 Internal register 5

○

3953h

○

3954h

CG-77 Internal register 7

○

3955h

CG-78 Internal register 8

○

3956h

CG-79 Internal register 9

○

3957h

CG-80 Internal register 10

○

3958h

CH-01 Sync input terminal function selection 1

〇

396Dh

〇

396Eh

CG-56 External register 6 scaling

CG-76 Internal register 6

CH-02 Sync input terminal function selection 2
CH-03 Sync input terminal function selection 3
CH-04 Sync input terminal function selection 4
CH-05 Sync input terminal function selection 50.001 to 65.535

1.0000000h to FFFFh

0000h

Refer to "18.2.6 List ofMulti-function Input
Terminal Functions"

CH-06 Sync input terminal function selection 6

18-40
18-40

000

○

396Fh

○

3970h

○

3971h

〇

3972h

1 to 247

1

Page
10-3
10-5

0 to 1000

1

10-6
10-7
10-8

0 to 1

10000h to
FFFFh

1

0 to 11

11-21

1 to 65535

0.001

0000h to
FFFFh

1

00 to 110

1

9-237

Chapter 18
Code

CH-11
CH-12
CH-13
CH-14
CH-15
CH-16

Parameter

Name
Sync output terminal function
selection 1
Sync output terminal function
selection 2
Sync output terminal function
selection 3
Sync output terminal function
selection 4
Sync output terminal function
selection 5
Sync output terminal function
selection 6

Initialvalue

Data range

Refer to "18.2.7 List of
Muti-function Output Terminal

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

○

3977h

〇

3978h

〇

3979h

〇

397Ah

○

397Bh

○

397Ch

00

Functions"

CH-21

Sync terminal logic selection 1

○

3981h

CH-22

Sync terminal logic selection 2

〇

3982h

CH-23

Sync terminal logic selection 3

CH-24

Sync terminal logic selection 4

CH-25

Sync terminal logic selection 5

○

3985h

CH-26

Sync terminal logic selection 6

○

3986h

CH-30

Sync terminal on-delay time 1

○

398Ah

CH-31

Sync terminal off-delay time 1

○

398Bh

CH-32

Sync terminal on-delay time 2

〇

398Ch

00: Normally Open (NO)
01: Normally Closed (NC)

00

〇

3983h

〇

3984h

CH-33

Sync terminal off-delay time 2

〇

398Dh

CH-34

Sync terminal on-delay time 3

〇

398Eh

CH-35

Sync terminal off-delay time 3

○

398Fh

CH-36

Sync terminal on-delay time 4

○

3990h

CH-37

Sync terminal off-delay time 4

〇

3991h

CH-38

Sync terminal on-delay time 5

〇

3992h

CH-39

Sync terminal off-delay time 5

〇

3993h

CH-40

Sync terminal on-delay time 6

○

3994h

CH-41

Sync terminal off-delay time 6

○

3995h

0.00 to 100.00 s

0.00

18-41
18-41

Page

00 to 98

1

9-237

0 to 1

1

9-237

0 to 10000

0.01

9-237
9-238

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.6 List of multi-function input terminal functions
Function

Symbol

Name

Page

Code

Function

Symbol

Name

Page

Code

000

no

Not use001

FR

Forward rotation

002

RR

Reverse rotation

003

DFL

004

DFM

005

DFH

Multi speed selection 3

006

DHH

007
008

-

055

PRO

PID gain change

056

PIO1

PID output switching 1

9-124

058

SLEP

SLEEP condition activation

9-117

Multi speed selection 1

059

WAKE

WAKE condition activation

9-8-20Multi speed selection 2

060

TL

Torque limit enable

9-59

061

TRQ1

Torque limit selection bit 1

Multi speed selection 4

062

TRQ2

Torque limit selection bit 2

SF1

Multi speed Bit-1

063

PPI

P/PI control mode selection

SF2

Multi speed Bit-2

064

CAS

Control gain change

009

SF3

Multi speed Bit-3

067

ATR

Permission of torque control

9-55

010

SF4

Multi speed Bit-4

068

TBS

Torque Bias enable

9-64

011

SF5

Multi speed Bit-5

069

ORT

Home search function

9-200

Acceleration/Deceleration
cancellation

9-23

9-2

9-11
9-30

9-12
9-30

012

SF6

Multi speed Bit-6

071

LAC

013

SF7

Multi speed Bit-7

072

PCLR

014

ADD

Trigger for frequency addition

9-18

076

CP1

015

AUT

Main/Sub speed reference change

9-16

077

CP2

016

STA

3-wire start

078

CP3

017

STP

3-wire stop

079

CP4

018

F/R

3-wire forward/reverse

019

AHD

Analog command holding

020

UP

Remote control Speed-Up function

021

DWN

Remote control Speed-Downfunction

022

UDC

Remote control Speed data clearing

9-3

9-20

9-19

9-114

9-60
9-65
9-67

Clearance of position deviation

9-197

Multistage position settings
selection 1
Multistage position settings
selection 2
Multistage position settings
selection 3
Multistage position settings
selection 4

9-190

080

ORL

Limit signal of Homing function

9-194

081

ORG

Start signal of Homing function

9-194

082

FOT

Forward Over Travel

083

ROT

Reserve Over Travel

9-198

084

SPD

Speed/Position switching

9-201

085

PSET

Position data presetting

9-197

023

F-OP

Force operation

9-8
9-21

024

SET

2nd-motor control

9-95

086

028

RST

Reset

9-214

087

029

JOG

Jogging

9-13

088

030

DB

External DC braking

9-78

089

031

AD2

2-stage Acceleration/Deceleration

9-24

090

032

MBS

Free run stop

9-77

091

033

ES

External fault

9-154

092

034

USP

Unattended start protection

9-155

093

035

CS

Commercial power supply change

9-82

097

PCC

Pulse counter clearing

9-211

036

SFT

Soft-Lock

7-17

098

ECOM

EzCOM activation

11-25

037

BOK

Answer back from Brake

9-84

099

-

038

OLR

Overload restriction selection

9-131

100

HLD

Acceleration/Deceleration disable

9-25

039

KHC

Accumulated input power clearance

10-7

101

REN

RUN enable

9-34

040

OKHC

Accumulated output power
clearance

10-8

102

DISP

Display lock

7-21

041

PID

Disable PID1

103

PLA

Pulse input A

042

PIDC

PID1 integration reset

104

PLB

Pulse input B

043

PID2

Disable PID2

044

PIDC2

PID2 integration reset

051

SVC1

Multi set-point selection 1

052

SVC2

Multi set-point selection 2

053

SVC3

Multi set-point selection 3

054

SVC4

Multi set-point selection 4

9-112

9-125

9-108

-

Reserved

Reserved

-

-

9-211

105

EMF

Emergency-Force Drive activation

9-90

107

COK

Contactor check signal

9-86

108

DTR

Data trace start

109

PLZ

Pulse input Z

110

TCH

Teach-in signal

18-42
18-42

12-3
9-194
9-200
9-191

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.7 List of multi-function output terminal functions
Function

SymbolName

Function

Page

Code

Symbol

Name

Page

Code

000

no

Not use

-

040

ZS

Zero speed detection

001

DRV

Running

9-179

041

DSE

Speed over deviation

9-52

002

UPF1

Constant-frequency reached

9-181

043

POK

Positioning completed

9-187

003

UPF2

Set frequency overreached

9-182

044

PCMP

Pulse count compare match output

9-213

004

UPF3

Set frequency reached

9-183

045

OD

Over deviation for PID control

9-126

005

UPF4

Set frequency overreached 2

9-182

046

FBV

PID feedback comparison

9-127

006

UPF5

Set frequency reached 2

9-183

047

OD2

Over deviation for PID2 control

9-126

007

IRDY

Inverter ready

9-180

048

FBV2

PID2 feedback comparison

9-127

008

FRR

Forward rotation

049

NDc

Communication line disconnection

11-1

009

RRR

Reverse rotation

050

VRFDc

Analog VRF disconnection detection

010

FREF

Frequency reference=Keypad is selected

9-8

051

IRFDc

Analog IRF disconnection detection

011

REF

Run command=Keypad is selected

9-2

056

WCVRF

Window comparator VRF

012

SETM

2nd control is selected

9-95

057

WCIRF

Window comparator IRF

016

OPO

Option output Note

-

062

LOG1

Logical operation result 1

017

AL

Alarm

9-159

063

LOG2

Logical operation result 2

018

MJA

Major failure

9-160

064

LOG3

Logical operation result 3

019

OTQ

Over-torque

9-59

069

021

UV

Undervoltage

9-139

070

022

TRQ

Torque limited

9-58

071

023

IPS

IP nonstop function is active

9-149

076

EMFC

Emergency-Force Drive indicator

024

RNT

Accumulated operation time over

9-170

077

EMBP

Bypass mode indicator

9-179

-

Reserved

9-184

9-172

9-172

9-185

-

9-93

025

ONT

Accumulated power-on time over

9-170

078

WFT

Trace function waiting for trigger

026

THM

Electronic thermal alarm (Motor)

9-163

079

TRA

Trace function data logging

027

THC

Electronic thermal alarm (Inverter)

9-164

080

LBK

Low-battery of keypad

7-22

029

WAC

Capacitor life warning

9-167

081

OVS

Over-Voltage power supply

9-165

030

WAF

Cooling-fan life warning

9-168

082

ABU

Abnormal exceeded Upper limit

031

FS

RUN command active

9-180

083

ABL

Abnormal fall below Lower limit

032

OHF

Heat sink overheat warning

9-166

088

FSC

STO input discrepancy

14-6

033

LOC

Low-current indication

093

SSE

PID soft start error

9-116

034

LOC2

Low-current indication 2

094

SFM1

ST1 feedback monitor

035

OL

Overload warning notice

095

SFM2

ST2 feedback monitor

036

OL2

Overload warning notice 2

096

EDM

STO state monitor

037

BRK

Brake release

WAP

Power module life warning

038

BER

Brake error

9-84
9-202

097
098

WAIC

Inrush circuit life warning

039

CON

Contactor control

9-86

9-162

9-161

Note: Option output [OPO]」is not available in preparation.

18-43
18-43

12-3

9-178

14-6
14-4
9-169

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.8 H parameter
Code

HA-01
HA-02
HA110
HA112
HA113
HA115
HA120
HA121
HA122
HA123
HA124
HA125
HA126
HA127
HA128
HA129
HA130
HA131
HA132
HA133

Name

Auto-tuning selection
Auto-tuning RUN command
source selection
Stabilization constant,
1st-motor
Stabilization ramp function end
ratio, 1st-motor
Stabilization ramp function startratio, 1st-motor
Speed response,
1st-motor
ASR gain switching mode
selection, 1st-motor
ASR gain switching time setting,1st-motor
ASR gain mapping intermediate
speed 1, 1st-motor
ASR gain mapping intermediate
speed 2, 1st-motor
ASR gain mapping maximum
speed, 1st-motor
ASR gain mapping P-gain 1,
1st-motor
ASR gain mapping
I-gain 1, 1st-motor
ASR gain mapping
P control P-gain 1, 1st-motor
ASR gain mapping P-gain 2,
1st-motor
ASR gain mapping
I-gain 2, 1st-motor
ASR gain mapping
P control P-gain 2, 1st-motor
ASR gain mapping P-gain 3,
1st-motor
ASR gain mapping I-gain 3,
1st-motor
ASR gain mapping P-gain 4,
1st-motor

HA134

ASR gain mapping I-gain 4,
1st-motor

HA181

Reserved

HA210
HA212
HA213

Stabilization constant,
2nd-motor
Stabilization ramp function end
ratio, 2nd-motor
Stabilization ramp function startratio, 2nd-motor

Data range
00: Disabled
01: No-rotation
02: Rotation
00: Keypad's RUN-key
01: Setting by [AA111]/[AA211]
0 to 1000 %Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Page

×

3A99h

0 to 2

1

8-19

00

×

3A9Ah

0 to 1

1

8-19

100

○

3AA2h

0 to 1000

1

30

×

3AA4h
0 to 1001

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning00

0 to 100 %

9-45

10

×

3AA5h

0 to 1000 %

100

○

3AA7h

0 to 1000

100: [CAS] terminal
01: Parameter setting

00

○

3AACh

0 to 1

1

0 to 10000 ms

100

○

3AADh

0 to 10000

1

0 to 59000

0.01

9-46

3AAEh
0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

○

3AAFh
3AB0h
3AB1h
3AB2h
3AB3h

9-67

3AB4h
3AB5h
0.0 to 1000.0 %

100.0

○

3AB6h

0 to 10000

0.1

3AB7h
3AB8h
3AB9h
3ABAh
Do not change parameter.

10

×

-

-

-

0 to 1000 %

100

○

61B2h

0 to 1000

1

0 to 100

30

×

61B4h

0 to 100

1

0 to 100

10

×

61B5h

0 to 100

1

HA215

Speed response, 2nd-motor

0 to 1000 %

100

○

61B7h

0 to 1000

1

HA220

ASR gain switching mode
selection, 2nd-motor

00: [CAS] terminal
01: Parameter setting

00

○

61BCh

0 to 1

1

HA221

ASR gain switchingtime setting, 2nd-motor

0 to 10000 ms

100

○

61BDh

0 to 10000

1

HA222

ASR gain mapping intermediate
speed 1, 2nd-motor

○

61BEh

HA223

ASR gain mapping intermediate
speed 2, 2nd-motor

HA224

ASR gain mapping maximum
speed, 2nd-motor

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

61BFh
61C0h

18-44
18-44

-

9-43
9-95

9-46
9-95

9-67
9-95
0 to 59000

0.01

Chapter 18
Code

HA225
HA226
HA227
HA228
HA229
HA230
HA231
HA232
HA233
HA234

Name
ASR gain mapping
P-gain 1, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
I-gain 1, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
P control P-gain 1, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
P-gain 2, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
I-gain 2, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
P control P-gain 2, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
P-gain 3, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
I-gain 3, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
P-gain 4, 2nd-motor
ASR gain mapping
I-gain 4, 2nd-motor

Parameter
Data range

61C4h
61C5h
0.0 to 1000.0 %Async. Motor number of polessetting, 1st-motor

Async. Motor constant R1,
1st-motor

Hb112

Async. Motor constant R2,
1st-motor

Hb114

Async. Motor constant L,
1st-motor

Hb116

Async. Motor constant I0,
1st-motor

Hb118

Async. Motor constant J,
1st-motor

Hb130
Hb131

Hb140

Minimum frequency
adjustment, 1st-motor
Reduced voltage start time
setting, 1st-motor
Manual torque boost
operation mode selection,
1st-motor

9-67
9-95

-

61CAh

00: 2P/01: 4P/02: 6P
03: 8P/04: 10P/05: 12P
06: 14P/07: 16P
08: 18P/09: 20P
10: 22P/11: 24P
12: 26P/13: 28P
14: 30P/15: 32P
16: 34P/17: 36P
18: 38P/19: 40P
20: 42P/21: 44P
22: 46P/23: 48P

Hb110

0.1

61C9h

0.01 to 11.00 kW

Async. Motor rated current,
1st-motor

0 to 10000

61C8h

Async. Motor capacity
setting, 1st-motor

Hb108

○

61C7h

Hb102

Hb106

100.0

61C6h

Async. Motor typeselection ,1st-motor

Hb105

Page

61C3h

Hb101

Async. Motor base frequency
setting, 1st-motor
Async. Motor maximum
frequency setting, 1st-motor
Async. Motor rated voltage,
1st-motor

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

61C2h

Reserved

Hb104

Changeduringrunning

61C1h

HA281

Hb103

Initialvalue

Do not change parameter
00: Reserved
01: Sumitomo AF motor
02: Sumitomo d2G4 motor
03: SumitomoIE3 motor

10

-

-

-

-

03

×

3AFDh

0 to 31Same asInvertercapacity

×

3AFEh

1 to 1100

0.01

01

×

3AFFh

0 to 231

60.00 Note×30.00 to [Hb105] Hz

3B00h[Hb104] to 590.00 Hz
1 to 1000 V

3B01h
200/400 Note×0.01 to 10000.00 A

3B02h

3000 to
59000
1 to 1000

3B04h

1 to

3B05h

1000000

8-4

0.01

1
0.01

3B06h
0.000001 to

3B07h

1000.000000 Ω

3B08h

1 to

3B09h

1000000000

0.000001 to
1000.000000 mH

Depends on
Hb101 to×Hb104

0.000001

3B0Ah

8-11

3B0Bh
3B0Ch

0.01 to 10000.00 A

3B0Dh

1 to 1000000

0.00001 to

3B0Eh

1 to

10000.00000 kgm2

3B0Fh

1000000000

0.01
0.00001

0.01 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

○

3B1Ah

0 to 1000

0.01

0 to 2000 ms

12

○

3B1Bh

0 to 2000

1

00: Disabled
01: Always enable
02: Enable at Forward
rotation
03: Enable at Reverse
rotation

01

×

3B24h

0 to 3-9-68

Note: The default settings when initialize by setting 00 to "Initialize data selection [Ub-02]".

18-45
18-45

9-41

Chapter 18
Code

Hb141
Hb142
Hb145
Hb146
Hb150
Hb151
Hb152
Hb153
Hb154
Hb155
Hb156
Hb157
Hb158
Hb159
Hb160
Hb161
Hb162
Hb163
Hb170

Hb171
Hb180

Name
Manual torque boost value,
1st-motor
Manual torque boost peak
speed, 1st-motor
Eco drive enable, 1st-motor
Eco drive response
adjustment, 1st-motor
Free-V/f frequency 1 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f voltage 1 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f frequency 2 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f voltage 2 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f frequency 3 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f voltage 3 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f frequency 4 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f voltage 4 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f frequency 5 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f voltage 5 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f frequency 6 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f voltage 6 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f frequency 7 setting,1st-motor
Free-V/f voltage 7 setting,1st-motor
Slip compensation
P-gain with encoder,1st-motor
Slip compensation
I-gain with encoder,1st-motor
Output voltage gain,
1st-motor

Parameter
Changeduringrunning

0.0 to 20.0 %

1.0

○

3B25h

0 to 200

0.1

0.0 to 50.0 %

0.8

○

3B26h

０to 500

0.1

00: Disable
01: Enable

00

×

3B29h

0 to 1

1

0 to 100 %

50

○

3B2Ah

0 to100

1

0.00 to [Hb152] Hz

0.00

×

3B2Eh

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

3B2Fh

0 to 10000

0.1[Hb150] to [Hb154] Hz

0.00

×

3B30h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

3B31h

0 to 10000

0.1[Hb152] to [Hb156] Hz

0.00

×

3B32h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

3B33h

0 to 10000

0.1[Hb154] to [Hb158] Hz

0.00

×

3B34h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

3B35h

0 to 10000

0.1[Hb156] to [Hb160] Hz

0.00

×

3B36h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

3B37h

0 to 10000

0.1[Hb158] to [Hb162] Hz

0.00

×

3B38h

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

3B39h

0 to 10000

0.1[Hb160] to [Hb164] Hz

0.00

×

3B3Ah

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

3B3Bh

0 to 10000

0.1

○

3B42h
0 to 1000

1

9-43

9-45

0 to 1000 %

3B4Ch

0 to 255

1

03

×

620Dh

0 to 31Same asInvertercapacity

×620Eh

1 to 1100

0.01

01

×

620Fh

0 to 231

0.01 to 11.00 kW

Async. Motor number ofpoles setting, 2nd-motor

00: 2P/01: 4P/02: 6P
03: 8P/04: 10P/05: 12P
06: 14P/07: 16P/08: 18P
09: 20P/10: 22P/11: 24P
12: 26P/13: 28P/14: 30P
15: 32P/16: 34P/17: 36P
18: 38P/19: 40P/20: 42P
21: 44P/22: 46P/23: 48P

Hb208

Async. Motor rated current,
2nd-motor

3B43h

○

Async. Motor capacity
setting, 2nd-motor

Hb206

○
100

Hb202

Hb205

100

0 to 255 %Async. Motor typeselection ,2nd-motor

Async. Motor base frequency
setting, 2nd-motor
Async. Motor maximum
frequency setting, 2nd-motor
Async. Motor rated voltage,
2nd-motor

9-42

9-38

Hb201

Hb204

Page

9-41

00: Reserved
01: Sumitomo AF motor
02: Sumitomo d2G4 motor
03: SumitomoIE3 motor

Hb203

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Initialvalue

Data range

8-4
9-95

30.00 to [Hb205] Hz

×

6210h

×

6211h
6212h

60.00 Note
[Hb204] to 590.00 Hz
1 to 1000 V

200/400 Note×0.01 to 10000.00 A

Depends on
Hb201 to
Hb204

×

6214h
6215h

Note: The default settings when initialize by setting 00 to "Initialize data selection [Ub-02]".

18-46
18-46

3000 to
59000

0.01

1 to 1000

1

1 to 1000000

0.01

Chapter 18

Parameter

Code

Name

Hb210

Async. Motor constant R1, 2nd-motor

Hb212

Async. Motor constant R2, 2nd-motor

Hb214

Async. Motor constant L, 2nd-motor

Hb216

Async. Motor constant I0, 2nd-motor

Hb218
Hb230
Hb231

Hb240

Hb241
Hb242
Hb245
Hb246
Hb250

Async. Motor constant J, 2nd-motor
Minimum frequency adjustment,
2nd-motor
Reduced voltage start time setting,2nd-motor

Manual torque boost operation mode
selection, 2nd-motor

Manual torque boost value,
2nd motor
Manual torque boost peak speed,
2nd-motor
Eco drive enable, 2nd-motor
Eco drive response adjustment, 2ndmotor
Free-V/f frequency 1 setting, 2ndmotor

Initialvalue

Data range

Changeduringrunning×0.000001 to
1000.000000 Ω
Depends
0.000001 to
1000.000000 mH

on
Hb201 to0.01 to 10000.00 A

Hb204

0.00001 to
10000.00000 kgm2

×Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.
6216h
6217h
6218h
6219h

1to1000000000

0.000001

×

621Ah
621Bh

×

621Ch
621Dh

1 to 1000000

0.01

×

621Eh
621Fh

1to1000000000

0.00001

8-4
9-95

0.00 to 10.00 Hz

0.50

○

622Ah

0 to 1000

0.01

0 to 2000 ms

12

○

622Bh

0 to 2000

1

00: Disable
01: Always enable
02: Enable at Forward
rotation
03: Enable at Reverse
rotation

01

×

6234h

0 to 3

1

0.0 to 20.0 %

1.0

○

6235h

0 to 200

0.1

0.0 to 50.0 %

0.8

○

6236h

0 to 500

0.1

00: Disable
01: Enable

00

×

6239h

0 to 1

1

0 to 100 %

50

○

623Ah

0 to 10010.00 to [Hb252] Hz

0.00

×

623Eh

0 to 59000

0.01

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

623Fh

0 to 10000

0.1

Hb252

Free-V/f frequency 2 setting,2nd-motor[Hb250] to [Hb254] Hz

0.00

×

6240h

0 to 59000

0.01

Hb253

Free-V/f voltage 2 setting, 2nd-motor

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

6241h

0 to 10000

0.1

Hb254

Free-V/f frequency 3 setting,2nd-motor[Hb252] to [Hb256] Hz

0.00

×

6242h

0 to 59000

0.01

Hb255

Free-V/f voltage 3 setting, 2nd-motor

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

6243h

0 to 10000

0.1

Hb256

Free-V/f frequency 4 setting,2nd-motor[Hb254] to [Hb258] Hz

0.00

×

6244h

0 to 59000

0.01

Hb257

Free-V/f voltage 4 setting, 2nd-motor

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

6245h

0 to 10000

0.1

Hb258

Free-V/f frequency 5 setting,2nd-motor[Hb256] to [Hb260] Hz

0.00

×

6246h

0 to 59000

0.01

Hb259

Free-V/f voltage 5 setting, 2nd-motor

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

6247h

0 to 10000

0.1

Hb260

Free-V/f frequency 6 setting,2nd-motor[Hb258] to [Hb262] Hz

0.00

×

6248h

0 to 59000

0.01

Hb261

Free-V/f voltage 6 setting, 2nd-motor

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

6249h

0 to 10000

0.1

Hb262

Free-V/f frequency 7 setting,2nd-motor[Hb260] to [Hb264] Hz

0.00

×

624Ah

0 to 59000

0.01

Hb263

Free-V/f voltage 7 setting, 2nd-motor

0.0 to 1000.0 V

0.0

×

624Bh

0 to 10000

0.1

Slip compensation
P-gain with encoder, 2nd-motor
Slip compensation
I-gain with encoder, 2nd-motor

0 to 1000 %100○

0 to 1000

1

Hb280
HC101
HC102
HC111

6252h
6253h

Output voltage gain, 2nd-motor
Automatic torque boost voltage
compensation gain, 1st-motor
Automatic torque boost slip
compensation gain, 1st-motor
Boost value at start,
1st-motor (IM-SLV)○
0 to 255 %

9-95

9-95

Free-V/f voltage 1 setting, 2nd-motor

Hb271

9-68

9-41

Hb251

Hb270

Page

100

9-95

9-38
9-95

9-43
9-95
9-45

625Ch
3B61h

9-42

9-95
0 to 255

1

○

9-40
3B62h

0 to 50 %

0

○

3B6Bh

0 to 50

1

9-46

HC114

Direction reversal protection, 1stmotor

00: Disabled
01: Enabled

01 Note○

3B6Eh

0 to 1

1

9-33

HC115

Torque conversion method selection,
1st-motor

00: Torque
01: Current

01

○

3B6Fh

0 to 1

1

9-57

Note: The default settings when initialize by setting 00 to "Initialize data selection [Ub-02]".

18-47
18-47

Chapter 18
Code

HC120
HC121
HC137
HC141
HC142
HC201
HC202
HC211
HC214
HC215
HC220
HC221
HC237
HC241
HC242
Hd102

Hd103

Hd104
Hd105
Hd106
Hd108
Hd110
Hd112
Hd114

Parameter
Name

Torque current reference filter
time constant, 1st-motor
Speed feedforward
compensation gain, 1st-motor
Flux settling level, 1st-motor
Modulation threshold 1,
1st-motor
Modulation threshold 2,
1st-motor
Automatic torque boost voltage
compensation gain, 2nd-motor
Automatic torque boost slip
compensation gain, 2nd-motor
Boost value at start, 2nd-motor(IM-SLV)
Direction reversal protection,
2nd-motor
Torque conversion method
selection, 2nd-motor
Torque current reference filter
time constant, 2nd-motor
Speed feedforward compensation
gain, 2nd-motor
Flux settling level, 2nd-motor

Changeduringrunning

0 to 100 ms

2

○

3B74h

0 to 100

1

0 to 1000 %

0

○

3B75h

0 to 1000

1

0.0 to 100.0 %

80.0

×

3B85h

0 to1000

0.1

〇

3B89h

0 to 133 %115

0 to 133

1

〇

3B8Ah

○

6271h
0 to 255

1

0 to 255 %

100
〇

6272h

0

○

627Bh

0 to 50

101 Note:1

○

627Eh

0 to 1

1

01

○

627Fh

0 to 1

1

0 to 100 ms

2

○

6284h

0 to 100

1

0 to 1000 %

0

○

6285h

0 to 1000

1

0.0 to 100.0

80.0

×

6295h

0 to 1000

0.1

0 to 1331

0 to 0 %00: Disable
01: Enable
00: Torque
01: Current

Modulation threshold 1,
2nd-motor
Modulation threshold 2,
2nd-motor

0 to 133

Sync. Motor capacity setting,1st-motor

0.01 to 11.00 kW

Sync. Motor number of polessetting, 1st-motor

Sync. Motor base frequency
setting, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor maximum frequency
setting, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor rated voltage,
1st-motor
Sync. Motor rated current,
1st-motor
Sync. Motor constant R,
1st-motor
Sync. Motor constant Ld,
1st-motor
Sync. Motor constant Lq,
1st-motor

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

Initialvalue

Data range

115○

Same asInvertercapacity×

3BC6h

1 to 1100

0.01

00: 2P/01: 4P/02: 6P
03: 8P/04: 10P/05: 12P
06: 14P/07: 16P/08: 18P
09: 20P/10: 22P/11: 24P
12: 26P/13: 28P/14: 30P
15: 32P/16: 34P/17: 36P
18: 38P/19: 40P/20: 42P
21: 44P/22: 46P/23: 48P

×

3BC7h

0 to 231

30.00 to [Hd105] Hz

×

3BC8h

[Hd104] to 590.00 Hz

×

3BC9h

×

3BCAh

1 to 1000

1

3BCCh
3BCDh
3BCEh
3BCFh
3BD0h
3BD1h
3BD2h
3BD3h

1 to
1000000

0.01

Dependson
Hd102

1 to 1000 V
0.01 to 10000.00 A
0.000001 to
1000.000000 Ω××0.000001 to
1000.000000 mH

×3000 to
59000

1000000000

×

3BD4h
3BD5h

1000000

Hd118

Sync. Motor constant J, 1st-motor

0.00001 to
10000.00000 kgm2

×

3BD6h
3BD7h

1000000000

Hd132
Hd133
Hd134

9-46
9-95
9-33
9-95
9-57
9-95

9-46
9-95

0.01

Note:21 to

0.1 to 100000.0 (mVs/rad)

Hd131

9-40
9-95

629Ah

Sync. Motor constant Ke,
1st-motor

Sync. Motor minimum frequency
adjustment, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor No-Load current,
1st-motor
Sync. Motor starting method,
1st-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE 0V wait
number, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE detect wait
number, 1st-motor

9-46

6299h

Hd116

Hd130

Page

1 to
1 to

0.000001

0.1
0.00001

0 to 50 %

8

○

3BE2h

0 to 50

1

0 to 100 %

10

○

3BE3h

0 to 100

100: IMPE Disable
01: IMPE Enable

00

×

3BE4h

0 to 1

1

×

3BE5h

0 to 255

10

0 to 255

1

×

3BE6h

Note: 1. The default settings when initialize by setting 00 to "Initialize data selection [Ub-02]".
2. These parameters are SM/PMM related functions. For details, contact your supplier.

18-48
18-48

Chapter 18
Code

Hd135
Hd136
Hd137
Hd202

Hd203

Hd204
Hd205
Hd206
Hd208
Hd210
Hd212
Hd214
Hd216
Hd218

Hd230
Hd231
Hd232
Hd233
Hd234
Hd235
Hd236
Hd237

Parameter

Sync. Motor IMPE detect
number, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE voltage
gain, 1st-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE Mg-poleposition offset, 1st-motor

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

0 to 255

30

×

3BE7h

0 to 255

1

0 to 200 %

100

×

3BE8h

0 to 200

1

0

×

3BE9h

0 to 359

1

Same asInvertercapacity×

62D6h

1 to11000.01

0 to 23

1

Name

Data range

0 to 359 deg

Sync. Motor capacity setting,2nd-motor

0.01 to 11.00 kW

Sync. Motor number of polessetting, 2nd-motor

00: 2P/01: 4P/02: 6P
03: 8P/04: 10P/05: 12P/06:
14P/07: 16P/08: 18P
09: 20P/10: 22P/11: 24P
12: 26P/13: 28P/14: 30P
15: 32P/16: 34P/17: 36P
18: 38P/19: 40P/20: 42P
21: 44P/22: 46P/23: 48P

×

62D7h

30.00 to [Hd205] Hz

×

62D8h

[Hd204] to 590.00 Hz

×

62D9h

×

62DAh

Sync. Motor base frequency
setting, 2nd-motor
Sync. Motor maximum
frequency setting, 2nd-motor
Sync. Motor rated voltage,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor rated current,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor constant R,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor constant Ld,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor constant Lq,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor constant Ke,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor constant J,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor minimum
frequency adjustment,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor No-Loadcurrent, 2nd-motor
Sync. Motor starting method,
2nd-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE 0V wait
number, 2nd-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE detect wait
number, 2nd-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE detect
number, 2nd-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE voltage
gain, 2nd-motor
Sync. Motor IMPE Mg-poleposition offset, 2nd-motor

1 to 1000 V
0.01 to 10000.00 A

3000 to
59000

0.01

Dependson
Hd202

0.000001 to
1000.000000 Ω×××

0.000001 to
1000.000000 mH

×

62DCh
62DDh
62DEh
62DFh
62E0h
62E1h
62E2h
62E3h
62E4h
62E5h

1 to 1000

１

1 to 1000000

0.01
Note

1 to
1000000000

0.1 to 100000.0 (mVs/rad)×0.00001 to
10000.00000 kgm2

×

62E6h
62E7h

1000000000

1 to 1000000
1 to

0.000001

0.1
0.00001

0 to 50 %

8

○

62F2h

0 to 50

1

0 to 100 %

10

○

62F3h

0 to 100

100: IMPE Disable
01: IMPE Enable

00

×

62F4h

0 to 1

1

10

×

62F5h

10

×

62F6h

0 to 255

1

30

×

62F7h

0 to 200 %

100

×

62F8h

0 to 200

1

0 to 359 deg

0

×

62F9h

0 to 359

1

0 to 255

Page

Note: These parameters are SM/PMM related functions. For details, contact your supplier.

18-49
18-49

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.9 O parameter
Code

oA-10
oA-11

Modbus communication

Name

Data range

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

Operation selection at an
option error
Communication Watch Dog
Timer

00: Error
01: Ignore error (keep running)

00

○

3E8Ah

0 to 1

10.00 to 100.00

1.00

×

3E8Bh

0 to 10000

1

01

×

3E8Ch

0 to 4

1

00

×

3E8Dh

0 to 1

10000h to FFFFh

1

00: Error
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free run stop
04: Deceleration stop
00: Disable
01: EnableoA-12

Action selection at a
communication erroroA-13

RUN command selection at
start upoJ-01

Writing register 1, Gr. A

41A1h

oJ-02

Writing register 2, Gr. A

41A2h

oJ-03

Writing register 3, Gr. A

41A3h

oJ-04

Writing register 4, Gr. A

41A4h

oJ-05

Writing register 5, Gr. A

41A5h

oJ-06

Writing register 6, Gr. A

41A6h

oJ-07

Writing register 7, Gr. A

41A7h

oJ-08

Writing register 8, Gr. A

41A8h

oJ-09

Writing register 9, Gr. A

41A9h

oJ-10

Writing register 10, Gr. A

41AAh

oJ-11

Reading register 1, Gr. A

oJ-12

Reading register 2. Gr. A

41ACh

oJ-13

Reading register 3. Gr. A

41ADh

oJ-14

Reading register 4. Gr. A

41AEh

oJ-15

Reading register 5. Gr. A

41AFh

oJ-16

Reading register 6. Gr. A

41B0h

oJ-17

Reading register 7. Gr. A

41B1h

oJ-18

Reading register 8. Gr. A

41B2h

oJ-19

Reading register 9. Gr. A

41B3h

oJ-20

Reading register 10. Gr. A

41B4h

0000h to FFFFh

0000h

Note: Communication options for HF-620 are under development.

18-50
18-50

○

41ABh

Page

Note

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.10 P Parameter
Code

PA-01
PA-02
PA-03
PA-04
PA-05

Name
Enable Emergency-force
drive mode
Emergency-force drive
frequency reference
Emergency-force drive
direction command
Commercial power supply
bypass function selection
Commercial power supply
bypass function delay time

Modbus communication

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

RegisterNo.

Data range

Resolution

00: Disable
01: Enable

00

×

4269h

0 to 1

10.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

×

426Ah

0 to 59000

0.01

00

×

426Bh

0 to 1

1

00

×

426Ch

0 to 1

1

0.0 to 1000.0 s

5.0

×

426Dh

0 to 10000

0.1

Data range

00: Forward rotation
01: Reverse rotation
00: Disable
01: Enable

Page

9-91

9-93

PA-20

Simulation mode enable

00: Disable
01: Enable

00

×

427Ch

0 to 1

1

PA-21

Error code selection for alarm
test

0 to 255 (Error code)

0

○

427Dh

0 to 255

1

PA-22

Simulation mode:
Optional output selection forthe output current monitor

00: Disable
01: Parameter [PA-23]
02: Setting by Terminal [VRF]
03: Setting by Terminal [IRF]

01

○

427Eh

0 to 3

1

PA-23

Optional output value setting
for the output current
monitor(0.00 to 3.00)×Inverter
output current A

427Fh(0.00 to 3.00)×
Rated output
current

0.1

0 to 30000 Note

0.01

PA-24

Simulation mode:
Optional output selection for
the DC bus voltage monitor

00: Disable
01: Parameter [PA-25]
02: Setting by Terminal [VRF]
03: Setting by Terminal [IRF]

PA-25

Optional output value setting
for the DC bus voltage
monitor

200V class: DC0.0 to 450.0 V
400V class: DC0.0 to 900.0 V

PA-26

Simulation mode:
Optional output selection forthe output voltage monitor

00: Disable
01: Parameter [PA-27]
02: Setting by Terminal [VRF]
03: Setting by Terminal [IRF]

01

○

PA-27

Optional output value setting
for the output voltage
monitor

200V class: 0.0 to 300.0 V
400V class: 0.0 to 600.0 V

0.0

○

PA-28

Simulation mode:
Optional output selection forthe output torque monitor

00: Disable
01: Parameter [PA-29]
02: Setting by Terminal [VRF]
03: Setting by Terminal [IRF]

01

○

PA-29

Optional output value setting
for the output torque monitor-500.0 to 500.0 %

0.0

PA-30

Simulation mode:
Optional frequency matching
start enable setting

00: Disable
01: Parameter [PA-31]
02: Setting by Terminal [VRF]
03: Setting by Terminal [IRF]

PA-31

Optional frequency matching
start setting value

0.00 to 590.00 Hz

0.00

01

○

○

4280h

0 to 3

1

○

4281h

200V: 0 to 4500
400V: 0 to 9000

0.1

0 to 22500

0.01

4282h

0 to 314283h

200V: 0 to 3000
400V: 0 to 6000

0.1

0 to 15000

0.01

4284h

0 to 3

1

○

4285h

-5000 to 5000

0.1

01

○

4286h

0 to 3

1

0.00

○

4287h

0 to 59000

0.01

270.0
540.0

8-13

Note: When the "Register data AV<=>% conversion function [CF-11]" is set to "A, V(00)", the upper row is the data range for Modbus
communication, and when set to "%(01)", the lower row is the data range for Modbus communication.

18-51
18-51

Chapter 18

Parameter18.2.11 U parameter
Code

Name

UA-01

Password for display

UA-02

Password for soft lock

UA-10

UA-12
UA-13
UA-14
UA-15

Display restriction selection

Accumulated input
power monitor clear
Display gain for the accumulated
input power monitor
Accumulated output
power monitor clear
Display gain for the accumulated
output power monitor

UA-16

Soft-Lock selection

UA-17

Soft-Lock target selection

UA-18

Data R/W selection

UA-19

Low battery warning enable

UA-20

Action selection at keypad
disconnection

UA-21
UA-22
UA-30

2nd-motor parameter display
selection
Option parameter display
selectionUser-parameter auto setting
function enable

Data range

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

0000h

×

00

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.
4651h

0000h to

4652h

FFFFh

○

465Ah

00

○

1 to 1000

1

00: Disable
01: Clear
1 to 1000

0000h to FFFFh
00: Full display
01:Function-specific display
02: User setting display
03: Data compare display
04: Monitor only
00: Disable
01: Clear1

7-18

0 to 4

1

7-7

465Ch

0 to 1

1

○

465Dh

1 to 1000

1

00

○

465Eh

0 to 1

1

1

○

465Fh

1 to 1000

1

00

○

4660h

0 to 1

1

00

○

4661h

0 to 1

1

00

○

4662h

0 to 1

1

7-23

00

×

4663h

0 to 2

1

7-22

02

○

4664h

0 to 4

1

7-22

00

×

4665h

0 to 1

1

00

×

4666h

0 to 1

1

00

○

466Eh

0 to 1

1

10-7

10-8

00: [SFT] terminal
01: Always enable
00: All data
01: All data, except frequency
related parameters
00: Enabled
01: Disabled
R/W by remote operator
00: Disable
01: Warning
02: Error
00: Error
01: Trip after deceleration stop
02: Ignore
03: Free run stop
04: Deceleration stop
00: Hidden
01: Display
00: Hidden
01: Display
00: Disable
01: Enable

7-17

7-7

UA-31

User-parameter 1 selection

466Fh

UA-32

User-parameter 2 selection

4670h

UA-33

User-parameter 3 selection

4671h

UA-34

User-parameter 4 selection

4672h

UA-35

User-parameter 5 selection

4673h

UA-36

User-parameter 6 selection

4674h

UA-37

User-parameter 7 selection

4675h

UA-38

User-parameter 8 selection

4676h

UA-39

User-parameter 9 selection

4677h

UA-40

User-parameter 10 selection

4678h

UA-41

User-parameter 11 selection

4679h

UA-42

User-parameter 12 selection

UA-43

User-parameter 13 selection

UA-44

User-parameter 14 selection

UA-45

User-parameter 15 selection

Pageno / dA-01 to(Except [UA-31] to [UA-62])

no

○

467Ah

0 to 65535/

467Bh

no: FFFFh

467Ch(Register No.)

467Dh

UA-46

User-parameter 16 selection

467Eh

UA-47

User-parameter 17 selection

467Fh

UA-48

User-parameter 18 selection

4680h

UA-49

User-parameter 19 selection

4681h

UA-50

User-parameter 20 selection

4682h

UA-51

User-parameter 21 selection

4683h

UA-52

User-parameter 22 selection

4684h

UA-53

User-parameter 23 selection

4685h

UA-54

User-parameter 24 selection

4686h

UA-55

User-parameter 25 selection

4687h

18-52
18-52

1

7-20

7-7
7-20

Chapter 18
CodeParameter

Name

Initialvalue

Data range

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
Register
Data range
Resolution
No.

UA-56

User-parameter 26 selection

4688h

UA-57

User-parameter 27 selection

4689h
468Ah

0 to 65535/

468Bh

no: FFFFh

468Ch(Register No.)

Page

UA-58

User-parameter 28 selection

UA-59

User-parameter 29 selection

UA-60

User-parameter 30 selection

UA-61

User-parameter 31 selection

468Dh

UA-62

User-parameter 32 selection

468Eh

UA-76

Dial sensitivity

1 to 24

1

○

469Ch

1 to 241

UA-77

dial carry sensitivity

1 to 100

20

○

469Dh

1 to 100

1UA-90

Reserved

-

-

-

-

-

-

dA-01

○

46ABh

-

-

7-20

00

○

46ACh

0 to 1

1

7-20

00

○

46ADh

0 to 1

1

00

×

46AEh

0 to 1

1

dA-01

○

46AFh

dA-01

○

46B0h

dA-02

○

46B1h

00

×

00

UA-91
UA-92
UA-93
UA-94
UA-95

Waiting time for turning off thedisplay
Initial display selection
Enable auto-return to theInitial display
Enable frequency changes
through monitor display
Display while external
operator connected

UA-96

Dual monitor target 1 selection

UA-97

Dual monitor target 2 selection

Ub-01

Initialize mode selection

Ub-02

Initialize data selection

Ub-03

Load type selection

Ub-05

Enable initialization

Ub-06

Restart communication

UC-01

Debug mode selection

Ud-01

Trace function enable

Ud-02

Trace start

Ud-03

Number of trace data setting

Ud-04

Number of trace signals setting

no / dA-01 to(Except [UA-31] to [UA-62])

0 to 60 min.
no / dA-01 to(Except [UA-31] to [UA-62])
00: Disable
01: Enable
00: Disable
01: Enable
dA-**, db-**, dC-**, FA-**
dA-**, db-**, dC-**, FA-**(except [dC-30])
dA-**, db-**, dC-**, FA-**(except [dC-30])
00: Disable
01: Error history clear
02: Data initialize
03: Error history clear and data
initialize
05: All data except terminal
configuration
06: All data except
communication configuration
07: All data except terminal andcommunication configuration
10: User parameters
11: All data except user
parameters
00: Mode 0 (JP/USA)
01: Mode 1 (EU)03: Mode 3 (CN)
01: Light duty (LD)
02: Normal duty(ND)
00: Disable
01: Execute initialization
00: Disable
01: Execute communication
restart(Do not change from initial value)
00: Disable
01: Enable
00: Stop
01: Start
0 to 8

no

○

7-6

7-23
00 to 65535(Register No.)

-

46B5h

0 to 11

1

7-7

×

46B6h

0 to 3

1

7-13

02

×

46B7h

1 to 2

1

8-2

00

×

46B9h

0 to 1

1

7-13

00

×

46BAh

0 to 1

1

7-15

00

○

4719h

Do notchange frominitial value

-

-

00

○

477Dh

0 to 1

1

00

○

477Eh

0 to 1

1

0 to 8

1

○

477Fh

○

4780h

Ud-10

Trace data 0 selection

4786h

Ud-11

Trace data 1 selection

4787h

Ud-12

Trace data 2 selection

Ud-13

Trace data 3 selection

Ud-14

Trace data 4 selection

Ud-15

Trace data 5 selection

478Bh

Ud-16

Trace data 6 selection

478Ch

Ud-17

Trace data 7 selection

478Dh

18-53
18-53

7-7
7-20

10-2

1

Monitor parameters(Refer to "12.3.2 Trace Function
Related Parameters")

1

4788h
dA-01

○

4789h
478Ah

10-20

12-3
0 to 65535/
no: FFFFh(Register No.)1

Chapter 18

CodeParameter

Name

Data range

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

Modbus communication
Register
Data
Resolution
No.
range

Ud-20

Trace signal 0 input/output selection

00: Input [Ud-21]
01: Output [Ud-22]

00

○

4790h

0 to 1

1

Ud-21

Trace signal 0 input terminal selection

Same as [CA-01] to [CA-08]

001

○

4791h

0 to 1101

Ud-22

Trace signal 0 output terminal selection

001

○

4792h

0 to 981

Ud-23

Trace signal 1 input/output selection

Same as [CC-01] to [CC-07]
00: Input [Ud-24]
01: Output [Ud-25]

00

○

4793h

0 to 11

Ud-24

Trace signal 1 input terminal selection

Same as [CA-01] to [CA-08]

001

○

4794h

0 to 1101

Ud-25

Trace signal 1 output terminal selection

001

○

4795h

0 to 981

Ud-26

Trace signal 2 input/output selection

Same as [CC-01] to [CC-07]
00: Input [Ud-27]
01: Output [Ud-28]

00

○

4796h

0 to 1

1

Ud-27

Trace signal 2 input terminal selection

Same as [CA-01] to [CA-08]

001

○

4797h

0 to 1101

Ud-28

Trace signal 2 output terminal selection

001

○

4798h

0 to 981

Ud-29

Trace signal 3 input/output selection

Same as [CC-01] to [CC-07]
00: Input [Ud-30]
01: Output [Ud-31]

00

○

4799h

0 to 11

Ud-30

Trace signal 3 input terminal selection

Same as [CA-01] to [CA-08]

001

○

479Ah

0 to 1101

Ud-31

Trace signal 3 output terminal selection

001

○

479Bh

0 to 98

1

Ud-32

Trace signal 4 input/output selection

Same as [CC-01] to [CC-07]
00: Input [Ud-33]
01: Output [Ud-34]

00

○

479Ch

0 to 1

1

Ud-33

Trace signal 4 input terminal selection

Same as [CA-01] to [CA-08]

001

○

479Dh

0 to 1101

Ud-34

Trace signal 4 output terminal selection

001

○

479Eh

0 to 981

Ud-35

Trace signal 5 input/output selection

Same as [CC-01] to [CC-07]
00: Input [Ud-36]
01: Output [Ud-37]

00

○

479Fh

0 to 1

1

Ud-36

Trace signal 5 input terminal selection

Same as [CA-01] to [CA-08]

001

○

47A0h

0 to 1101

Ud-37

Trace signal 5 output terminal selection

001

○

47A1h

0 to 981

Ud-38

Trace signal 6 input/output selection

Same as [CC-01] to [CC-07]
00: Input [Ud-39]
01: Output [Ud-40]

00

○

47A2h

0 to 1

1

Ud-39

Trace signal 6 input terminal selection

Same as [CA-01] to [CA-08]

001

○

47A3h

0 to 1101

Ud-40

Trace signal 6 output terminal selection

001

○

47A4h

0 to 981

Ud-41

Trace signal 7 input/output selection

Same as [CC-01] to [CC-07]
00: Input [Ud-42]
01: Output [Ud-43]

00

○

47A5h

0 to 1

1

Ud-42

Trace signal 7 input terminal selection

Same as [CA-01] to [CA-08]

001

○

47A6h

0 to 1101

Ud-43

Trace signal 7 output terminal selection

001

○

47A7h

0 to 981

UD-50

Trace trigger 1 selection

00

○

47AEh

0 to 161

Ud-51

Trigger 1 activation selection at trace
data trigger

Same as [CC-01] to [CC-07]
00: Trip
01: Trace data 0
02: Trace data 1
03: Trace data 2
04: Trace data 3
05: Trace data 4
06: Trace data 5
07: Trace data 6
08: Trace data 7
09: Trace signal 0
10: Trace signal 1
11: Trace signal 2
12: Trace signal 3
13: Trace signal 4
14: Trace signal 5
15: Trace signal 6
16: Trace signal 7
00: Action at rising above thetrigger level
01: Action at falling below thetrigger level

00

○

47AFh

0 to 1

0 to 100 %

0

○

47B0h

0 to 100

00: Action by signal ON
01: Action by signal OFF

00

○

47B1h

0 to 1

Ud-52
Ud-53

Trigger 1 level setting at trace data
trigger
Trigger 1 activation selection at trace
signal trigger

18-54
18-54

Page

12-3

Chapter 18
Code

Ud-54

Ud-55

Ud-56
Ud-57

Parameter

Name

Trace trigger 2 selection

Trigger 2 activation selection
at trace data trigger
Trigger 2 level setting at trace
data trigger
Trigger 2 activation selection
at trace signal trigger

Ud-58

Trigger condition selection

Ud-59

Trigger point setting

Ud-60

Sampling time setting

Data range
00: Trip
01: Trace data 0
02: Trace data 1
03: Trace data 2
04: Trace data 3
05: Trace data 4
06: Trace data 5
07: Trace data 6
08: Trace data 7
09: Trace signal 0
10: Trace signal 1
11: Trace signal 2
12: Trace signal 3
13: Trace signal 4
14: Trace signal 5
15: Trace signal 6
16: Trace signal 7
00: Action at rising above the trigger
level
01: Action at falling below the trigger
level
0 to 100 %00: Action by signal ON
01: Action by signal OFF
00: At trace trigger 1 activation
01: At trace trigger 2 activation
02: Trigger-1 OR Trigger-2 activation
03: Trigger-1 AND Trigger-2 activation
0 to 100 %02: 0.5ms
03: 1ms
04: 2ms
05: 5ms
06: 10ms
07: 50ms
08: 100ms
09: 500ms
10: 1000ms

18-55
18-55

Modbus communication
Register
Data
Resolution
No.
range

Initialvalue

Changeduringrunning

00

○

47B2h

0 to 16

1

00

○

47B3h

0 to 1

1

0

○

47B4h

0 to 100

1

00

○

47B5h

0 to 1

1

00

○

47B6h

0 to 3

1

0

○

47B7h

0 to 100

1

03

○

47B8h

2 to 10

1

Page

12-3

Warranty

Appendix
Warranty
Warranty
periodThe warranty shall be 18 months from date of shipment or 12 months after initial operation,
whichever is shorter.

Warranty
condition

In the event that any problem or damage to the product arises during the “Warranty Period”
from defects in the product whenever the product is properly installed and combined with thebuyer´s equipment or machines maintained as specified in the maintenance manual, and properly
operated under the conditions described in the catalog or as otherwise agreed upon in writing
between the seller and buyer or its customers. the seller will provide, at its sole discretion,
appropriate repair or replacement of the product without charge at a designated facility, except as
stipulated in the “Warranty Exclusions” as described below.
However, if the product is installed or integrated into the buyer´s equipment or machines, theseller shall not reimburse the following cost: removal or re-installation of the product or otherincidental costs related thereto, any lost opportunity, any profit loss or other incidental orconsequential losses or damages incurred by the buyer or its customers.

Notwithstanding the above warranty, the warranty as set forth herein shall not apply to any
problem or damage to the product that is caused by:
1. Installation, connection, combination or integration of the product in or to the other equipment
or machine that rendered by any person or entity other than the seller.
2. Insufficient maintenance or improper operation by the buyer or its customers, such that the
product is not maintained in accordance with the maintenance manual provided or designatedby the seller.

Warranty
exclusion

3. Improper use or operation of the product by the buyer or its customers that is not informed tothe seller, including, without limitation, the buyer´s or its customer´s operation of the productnot in conformity with the specifications.
4. Any problem or damage on any equipment or machine to which the product is installed,connected or combined or any specifications particular to the buyer or its customers.
5. Any changes, modifications, improvements or alterations to the product or those functions thatare rendered on the product by any person or entity other than the seller.
6. Any parts in the product that are supplied or designated by the buyer or its customers.
7. Earthquake, fire, flood, salt air, gas, lightning, acts of God or any other reasons beyond thecontrol of the seller.
8. Normal wear and tear, or deterioration of the product´s parts, such as the cooling fan bearing.
9. Any other problems with or damage to the product that are not attributable to the seller.

App.1-1
App.1-1

Warranty

Appendix
To inverter users:

The inverter described in this user´s manual is used for variable-speed operation of 3-phase induction
motors for general industry use.

C A U TIO N▼ The inverter described in this user´s manual is not designed and manufactured for use inequipment or a system used under the following conditions that will directly lead to death or injury:
atomic energy control, aerospace equipment, traffic equipment, medical instrument and all kinds ofsafety devices. When our products are applied to the above equipment or system, be sure to consultus.
▼ Our products are manufactured under stringent quality control. However, install a safety device on
the equipment side in order to prevent serious accidents or loss when our products are applied toequipment that may cause serious accidents or loss due to failure or malfunction.
▼ Do not use the inverter for any load other than 3-phase induction motors.
When an explosion-proof motor is selected, pay attention to the installation environment, because
the inverter is not of an explosion-proof type.
▼ Carefully read the manual and this user´s manual before use for correct operation.
Read the manual carefully also for long-term storage.
▼ Electrical work is necessary for installation of the inverter. Leave the electric work to specialists.

App.1-2
App.1-2

U.S.A
Sumitomo Machinery Corporation of America(SMA)
4200 Holland Blvd. Chesapeake, VA 23323, U.S.A.
TEL (1)757-485-3355 FAX (1)757-485-7490
CanadaSM Cyclo of Canada, Ltd. (SMC)
1453 Cornwall Road, Oakville, Canada ON L6J 7T5
TEL (1)905-469-1050 FAX (1)905-469-1055
MexicoSM Cyclo de México, S.A. de C.V. (SMME)
Fresnos #201, Pocket Park Oriente, 67258 Juárez, N.L.
MéxicoTEL (52)81-8144-5130
BrazilSumitomo Industrias Pesadas do Brasil Ltda.
(SHIB)
Rodovia do Acucar (SP-075) Km 26
Itu, Sao Paulo, Brasil
TEL (55)11-4886-1000 FAX (55)11-4886-1000
Chile
SM-Cyclo de Chile Ltda. (SMCH)
Camino Lo Echevers 550, Bodegas 5 y 6,
Quilicura, Región Metropolitana, Chile
TEL (56)2-892-7000
FAX (56)2-892-7001
Argentina
SM-Cyclo de Argentina S.A. (SMAR)
Ing Delpini 2230, B1615KGB Grand Bourg,
Malvinas Argentinas, Buenos Aires, Argentina
TEL (54)3327-45-4095 FAX (54)3327-45-4099
GuatemalaSM Cyclo de Guatemala Ensambladora, Ltda.
(SMGT)
Parque Industrial Unisur, 0 Calle B 19-50 Zona 3,
Bodega D-1 Delta Bárcenas en Villa Nueva, Guatemala
TEL (502)6648-0500 FAX (502)6631-9171
Colombia
SM Cyclo Colombia, S.A.S. (SMCO)
Parque Industrial Celta, Km 7.0 Autopista Medellín,
Costado Occidental, Funza, Cundinamarca, Colombia
TEL (57)1-300-0673

Austria
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH(SCG)SCG Branch Austria Office
Gruentalerstraße 30A, 4020 Linz, Austria
TEL (43)732-330958 FAX (43)732-331978

Korea
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Korea, Ltd. (SCK)Royal Bldg Room #913, 19, Saemunan-ro 5-gil,
Jongno-gu, Seoul, 03173, Korea
TEL (82)2-730-0151
FAX (82)2-730-0156

Belgium
Hansen Industrial Transmissions NV (HIT)
Leonardo da Vincilaan 1, Edegem, Belgium
TEL (32)34-50-12-11 FAX (32)34-50-12-20

TaiwanTatung SM-Cyclo Co., Ltd. (TSC)
22 Chungshan N. Road 3rd., Sec. Taipei, Taiwan 104,
R.O.C.
TEL (886)2-2595-7275 FAX (886)2-2595-5594

FranceSM-Cyclo France SAS (SMFR)
8 Avenue Christian Doppler, 77700 Serris, France
TEL (33)164171717
FAX (33)164171718
Italy
SM-Cyclo Italy Srl (SMIT)
Via dell' Artigianato 23, 20010 Cornaredo (MI), Italy
TEL (39)293-481101 FAX (39)293-481103
Spain
SM-Cyclo Iberia, S.L.U. (SMIB)
C/Gran Vía Nº 63 Bis, Planta 1, Departamento 1B
48011 Bilbao–Vizcaya, SpainTEL (34)9448-05389 FAX (34)9448-01550
United Kingdom
SM-Cyclo UK Ltd. (SMUK)Unit 29, Bergen Way, Sutton Fields Industrial Estate,
Kingston upon Hull, HU7 0YQ, East Yorkshire,
United Kingdom
TEL (44)1482-790340 FAX (44)1482-790321
TurkeySM Cyclo Turkey Güç Aktarım Sis. Tic. Ltd. Sti.
(SMTR)
Barbaros Mh. Çiğdem Sk. Ağaoğlu, Office Mrk. No:1 Kat:4 D.18
Ataşehir, İstanbul, Turkey
TEL (90)216-250-6069 FAX (90)216-250-5556
India
Sumi-Cyclo Drive India Private Limited (SDI)
Gat No. 186, Raisoni Industrial Park, Alandi Markal Road,
Fulgaon-Pune, Maharashtra, India
TEL (91)96-0774-5353

Peru
SM Cyclo de Perú, S.A.C (SMPE)
Jr. Monte Rosa 255, Oficina 702, Lima,
Santiago de Surco, PerúTEL (51)1-713-0342
FAX (51)1-715-0223

China
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Shanghai, Ltd.
(SCS)
11F, SMEG Plaza, No. 1386 Hongqiao Road,
Changning District, Shanghai, China 200336
TEL (86)21-3462-7877 FAX (86)21-3462-7922

Germany
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Germany GmbH
(SCG)
Cyclostraße 92, 85229 Markt Indersdorf, Germany
TEL (49)8136-66-0
FAX (49)8136-5771

Hong Kong
SM-Cyclo of Hong Kong Co., Ltd. (SMHK)
Room 19, 28th Floor, Metropole Square, No.2 On
Yiu Street, Shatin, New Territories, Hong Kong
TEL (852)2460-1881 FAX (852)2460-1882

Singapore
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte.
Ltd. (SCA)
15 Kwong Min Road, Singapore 628718
TEL (65)6591-7800
FAX (65)6863-4238
Philippines
Sumitomo (SHI) Cyclo Drive Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd.
Philippines Branch Office (SMPH)
C4 & C5 Buildings Granville Industrial Complex, Carmona,
Cavite 4116, Philippines
TEL (63)2-584-4921
FAX (63)2-584-4922
Vietnam
SM-Cyclo (Vietnam) Co., Ltd. (SMVN)
Factory 2B, Lot K1-2-5, Road No. 2-3-5A,
Le Minh Xuan Industrial Park, Binh Chanh Dist.,
HCMC, Vietnam
TEL (84)8-3766-3709 FAX (84)8-3766-3710
Malaysia
SM-Cyclo (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. (SMMA)
No.7C, Jalan Anggerik Mokara 31/56, Kota Kemuning,
Seksyen 31, 40460 Shah Alam, Selangor Darul Ehsan,
Malaysia
TEL (60)3-5121-0455 FAX (60)3-5121-0578

HF-620 Series User’s Guide

Worldwide Locations

HF-620 Series
InverterSingle-phase 200V class 0.2 to 2.2kW
Three-phase 200V class 0.2 to 7.5kW
Three-phase 400V class 0.4 to 7.5kW

User´s Guide

Indonesia
PT. SM-Cyclo Indonesia (SMID)
Jalan Sungkai Blok F 25 No. 09 K, Delta Silicon III,
Lippo Cikarang, Bekasi 17530, Indonesia
TEL (62)21-2961-2100 FAX (62)21-2961-2211
Thailand
SM-Cyclo (Thailand) Co., Ltd. (SMTH)
195 Empire Tower, Unit 2103-4, 21st Floor, South
Sathorn Road, Yannawa, Sathorn, Bangkok 10120,
ThailandTEL (66)2670-0998
FAX (66)2670-0999
Australia
Sumitomo (SHI) Hansen Australia Pty. Ltd.
(SHAU)
181 Power St, Glendenning, NSW 2761, Australia
TEL (61)2-9208-3000 FAX (61)2-9208-3050
Japan
Sumitomo Heavy Industries, Ltd. (SHI)
ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-6025, JapanTEL (81)3-6737-2511 FAX (81)3-6866-5160<Note>
This product should be handled by only those who have been trained for the work.
Please read this manual carefully before use.
Deliver this manual to the customer who will actually use the product.
This manual should be carefully stored.
Specifications, dimensions, and other items are subject to change without prior notice.

Power Transmission & Controls Group
Headquarter ThinkPark Tower, 1-1 Osaki 2-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-6025, Japan

No.DM2502E-1.0
EA15 Printed 2024.02

Userʼs Guide DM2502E-1